JP6880736B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed that can improve the interest of a game by setting a plurality of hit types and differently producing different effects depending on the hit type.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741

However, further improvement of interest is required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a viable determining means determines a display means for identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination unit is displayed, the on the display unit When the identification information for indicating that it is the first determination result is displayed as the determination result, the first privilege game can be executed, and it indicates that the second determination result is different from the first determination result. The game has a privilege game execution means capable of executing the second privilege game when the identification information for the purpose is displayed, and the game is played during the execution period of the first privilege game or the second privilege game. A specific ball-entry means that allows the ball to enter, a specific area through which the game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means can pass, and a game ball that has entered the specific ball-entry means are guided to the specific area. A variable means that can be changed to a possible first state and a second state that is more difficult to guide to the specific area than the first state, and a game ball has passed through the specific area during the execution of the first privilege game. Based on this, the privilege game setting means capable of setting the execution of the second privilege game after the execution of the first privilege game and the type of the second privilege game set by the privilege game setting means are determined. a second award game type determination means for determining, based on the fact that the specific region is a game ball passes through, have a, a specific effect execution unit capable of executing the specific effect, the specific ball entrance means, game balls An opening / closing means capable of varying an opening formed by an opening area capable of entering two or more balls at the same time into an open state and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the open state. The variable means always has a guide port formed with an opening area through which the game balls for guiding the game balls entering the opening to the specific region one by one can pass. Is in a state of being changed to the first state without being electrically operated, and the gaming machine is placed in the guide port except for a period in which the opening / closing means is controlled to be changed to the open state. Based on the detection that the game ball has entered, the variable means is controlled to be changed to the second state .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the determination means capable of executing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means, and the display means the first as the determination result. When the identification information for indicating that the determination result is displayed, the first privilege game can be executed, and the identification information for indicating that the second determination result is different from the first determination result. Has a privilege game execution means capable of executing the second privilege game when is displayed , and the game ball can enter during the execution period of the first privilege game or the second privilege game. A first state in which the specific ball-entry means, a specific area through which the game ball entering the specific ball-entry means can pass, and the game ball entering the specific ball-entry means can be guided to the specific area. Based on the variable means that can be changed to the second state, which is more difficult to guide to the specific area than the first state, and the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the first privilege game. second privilege to determine the benefits game setting means capable of setting the execution of the second award game after execution of the first award game, a type of the second award game set by the award game setting means and game type determination means, based on the fact that the specific region is a game ball passes through, have a, a specific effect execution unit capable of executing the specific effect, the specific ball entrance means, game balls simultaneously spherical more An opening / closing means capable of varying an opening formed by an opening area capable of entering a ball into an open state and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the open state, and the opening are inserted. The variable means has a guide port formed with an opening area through which the game balls for guiding the ball-balls one by one to the specific region can pass, and the variable means is always electrically operated. The state is changed to the first state without being performed, and in the game machine, the game ball enters the guide port other than the period in which the opening / closing means is controlled to be changed to the open state. Based on the detection of this, the variable means is controlled to be changed to the second state .

Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the 1st Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a variable winning device having a La-La cross section, (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (A) to (b) are the rear view of a part of the variable winning apparatus. (A) is a flow chart showing the transition of the gaming state in the first embodiment, and (b) is the case where the jackpot type selected in each gaming state in the first embodiment and the jackpot type are selected. It is a schematic diagram which showed the game state which shifts to. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes in the probabilistic gaming state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes in the probabilistic gaming state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a frame button in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a selection switch in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the first hit random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the small hit random number table in the first embodiment. c) is a diagram schematically showing a second random number table in the first embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the general drawing variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 deviation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the notification lottery process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes in the normal game state or the latent probability change game state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of the display mode in the latent probability change game state or the probability change game state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is an enlarged view of a part of the front surface of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a flow figure which showed the transition of the game state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the jackpot game in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. This is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. (A) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. This is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control unit in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the main control unit in the second embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the first hit random number table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the small hit random number table in the second embodiment. c) is a diagram schematically showing a second random number table in the second embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (b) are schematic views showing an example of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the general drawing variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the set special electric accessory operation table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol variation stop processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change stop process 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow figure which showed the transition of the game state in the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow figure which showed the transition of the game state in the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is an enlarged view of a part of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the battle effect in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the continuous hit effect in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the display content and the voice mode when the player's continuous striking interval is short in the continuous striking effect in the third embodiment, and (b) is the figure showing the continuous striking effect in the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display content and voice mode at the time of a player's continuous hitting interval is long. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a normal pressing sound output pattern in the continuous striking effect in the third embodiment, and (b) is an example of a pressing sound output pattern of a chance-up pattern in the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the continuous hitting effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the continuous hitting effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed the contents of the set pressing sound selection table. It is a figure which showed the content of the rank-up selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 3 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the operation input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous hitting effect control processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the opening command processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the pressing sound when the player's continuous striking interval is short in the modified example of the third embodiment, and (b) is the diagram showing the timed change of the pressing sound in the modified example of the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the pressing sound when the continuous hitting interval of a person is long. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of a RAM schematically. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the echo interval selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment, and (b) is the audio in the modified example of the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the data stored in the pressing sound storage area set in the RAM of a lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the operation input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pressing sound output processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous hitting effect control processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective view of the vibration motor according to the fourth embodiment. (A) is a front view of the swing operation unit and the eccentric member when the uniform vibration mode is set in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the upward biased vibration mode in the fourth embodiment. Is a front view of the swing operation unit and the eccentric member when is set. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third symbol display device and the vibration mode of the swinging operation member during execution of the option effect in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the vibration mode of the swing operation member, and FIG. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content when the right side option is selected in the option effect in the form. (A) is a diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device when a rare effect occurs in the option effect in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the execution of the hold notice effect in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the vibration mode of the swinging operation member in the inside, and an example of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a vibration pattern during the small hit notification effect in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the vibration pattern during the big hit notification effect in the fourth embodiment. (C) is a diagram showing an example of a vibration pattern during the hold notice effect in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, it is a figure which showed an example of the vibration pattern in the case where the small hit notification effect and the hold notice effect compete with each other. It is a figure which showed an example of the PWM waveform at the time of controlling a swing operation member in an unbalanced vibration mode in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the vibration scenario selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is the vibration scenario selection table in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the contents of the table for small hit notification effect. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the operation input monitoring / effect processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the operation detection time processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the operation effect control processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the processing at the time of pressing the frame button executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the vibration setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed various notice setting processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold notice setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an acoustic waveform during the small hit notification effect in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is an example of a timed change in vibration intensity during the small hit notification effect in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of an acoustic waveform input to each channel in order to cancel the sound and vibration of a part of the effects when a plurality of effects accompanied by a vibration operation compete with each other in the fifth embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the audio output device in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the vibration conversion table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the ROM of the voice output device in the fifth embodiment. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the audio output device, and FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the audio output device. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold notice setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice output device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the audio setting process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the voice synthesis part in the modification of 5th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the display content and the audio mode of the hold notice effect corresponding to the weak notice in the first modification of the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the hold notice corresponding to the strong notice. It is a figure which showed the display content of the effect, and the audio mode. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the acoustic waveform of the weak warning sound in the first modification of the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the strong warning sound in the first modification of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the acoustic waveform of. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the RAM of the audio output device in the 1st modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the audio setting process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 1st modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the sound effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the 1st modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the strong notice control processing executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the 1st modification of 5th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an audio output pattern that generates a reverberation sound in the second modification of the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the reverberation in the second modification of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the voice output pattern which generates a sound. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the RAM of the audio output device in the 2nd modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the audio setting process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 2nd modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the sound effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the 2nd modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the echo sound control processing executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the 2nd modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the transition method of the game state in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a game method selection effect in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a safe mode entry effect in the sixth embodiment. is there. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a challenge mode entry effect in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an ending effect in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the destruction failure effect in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a game method selection effect in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an ending effect in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM of the main control unit according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a random number per first specified in the ROM of the main control unit according to the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a small hit random number table defined in the ROM of the main control unit in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the ROM of the main control unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the specified random number table per 2nd. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot type selection table defined in the ROM of the main control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the time saving number selection table defined in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the V passage of the time saving number selection table in the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the time table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the V non-passing time table of the time saving number selection table in the 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the interval selection table defined in the ROM of the main control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the operation of the probabilistic solenoid after the third round of the jackpot is completed in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is the diagram showing the timed change of the operation of the probabilistic solenoid after the third round of the jackpot is completed, and (b) is the third round of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the opening and closing operation of the 1st specific winning opening when the interval A is set later, and (c) is the 1st when the interval B is set after the 3rd round is finished in the 6th embodiment. It is a figure which showed the opening and closing operation of a specific winning opening. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the RAM of the main control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a block diagram. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the batting method selection effect selection table defined in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows 1st special symbol variation stop processing 6 executed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing an interval setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 6 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a game result notification process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the interval command processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the switch passing command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the transition method of the game state in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the V non-passing time table in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the interval selection table in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the transition method of the game state in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic first random number table defined in the ROM in the seventh embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a second random number table defined in the ROM in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot type selection table defined in the ROM of the main control device in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the game state selection table defined in the ROM in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the probability variation setting table in the seventh embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the time saving setting table in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 detachment stop process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the interval setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the transition method of the game state in the 2nd modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is an enlarged view of a part of the front surface of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the V winning apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a three-view view of the V winning device in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which looked back at the inside of the V winning apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the opening and closing door part of the V winning device in 8th Embodiment from the top view. (A) is a schematic view showing a case where the opening / closing door is in a closed state, and (b) is a schematic view showing a case where the opening / closing door is in an open state. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the third symbol display device in the modified example 1 of the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed by. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first modification of the eighth embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game in 8th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game in the modification 1 of the 8th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game in the modification 1 of the 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the modification 1 of the 8th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game in the modification 1 of the 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control unit in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the main control unit in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the first hit random number table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the eighth embodiment. Yes, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the eighth embodiment. (A) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the eighth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number 2 table, and (b) is the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table set in the ROM of. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the ROM of the main control unit in the eighth embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for normal use set in. It is a figure which shows typically the contents of the time saving variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the contents of the open scenario table set in the ROM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow figure which showed the transition of the game state in 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 8th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure which shows an example of the display data table in 8th Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing list in 8th Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process executed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the validity period monitoring process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V entrance passage command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V valid end command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 9th Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a display area of the third symbol display device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the ninth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 9th Embodiment. (A) to (d) are schematic diagrams showing a score display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the ninth embodiment and the degree of expectation of each reach effect, and (e) to (g) are schematic diagrams. It is a schematic diagram which showed the flow of the score display displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 9th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the score giving effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the ninth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the score giving effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the ninth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the score giving effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the ninth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the score giving effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the ninth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the start time of the second reach mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example at the start time of the second reach mode, and (b) is a diagram displayed by the third symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example in 2 reach mode execution. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the final stage of the second reach mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the final stage of the second reach mode, and (b) is a second reach displayed by the third symbol display device. It is a figure which showed an example of the aspect result. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that emphasizes right-handed strike among the screens during the small hit game displayed by the third symbol display device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing (a). ) Is displayed and then the ball wins a prize. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the ninth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the ninth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the ninth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the small hit type selection table in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal fluctuation pattern table in the ninth embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the time saving variation pattern table in 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the opening scenario table in 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in the 9th Embodiment. (A) to (f) are timing charts showing the flow of operations of various devices when passing through the small hit V in the ninth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the 1st notice selection table in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second notice selection table in the ninth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the given score selection table in the ninth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control device in 9th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process executed by MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous advance notice giving score setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the scoring effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect correction process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reach mode correction process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the disengagement correction process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the display control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the ninth embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V entrance passage command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the V effect command processing executed by MPU in the display control device in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a pressing command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a rewriting executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the production command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device in 9th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are schematic views schematically showing the flow of the effect in the tenth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device according to the tenth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows. It is a figure which shows typically the definition content of the scoring effect scenario selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the definition content of the specific effect execution selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the definition content of the execution timing selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the scoring effect scenario setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-scoring effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final score effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final specific effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect variable processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in tenth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the operation notice effect in the first operation effect example of each embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the operation timing and the display contents of the operation notice effect. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a composite notice effect displayed by a third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment, and (b) is a modification of each embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when the frame button was not operated during the 1st period of the compound notice effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the above. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the frame button is operated during the first period of the composite notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. , (B) is a diagram showing another example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the first period of the composite notice effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. Is. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the frame button is operated during the first period of the composite notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. , (B) is a diagram showing another example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the first period of the composite notice effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. Is. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the frame button is operated during the second period of the composite notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. , (B) is a diagram showing another example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the second period of the composite notice effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. Is. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st operation effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notice mode setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st operation effect example of each embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the score effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the score effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 11th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device according to the eleventh embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device according to the eleventh embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the specific variation pattern selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the definition content of the number-of-times selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the definition content of the execution timing selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the hit display score selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the display score selection table for disengagement set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the score effect scenario setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the advance score effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final score effect setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows. It is a figure which shows typically the definition content of the score giving scenario selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the definition content of the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the score effect scenario setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-scoring effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final score effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a period configuration of each fluctuation pattern in the first production example of each embodiment, and (b) is a notice content executed during the notice period in the first production example of each embodiment. It is a figure which showed. It is a figure which showed the reach content which is executed during the reach period in the 1st effect example of each embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the first production example of each embodiment, and (b) is the voice lamp control device in the first production example of each embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in. It is a figure which shows typically the definition content of the final variation pattern selection table set in the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the 1st effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final score effect setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st effect example of each embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of the effect in the second effect example of each embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device in the second production example of each embodiment, and (b) is the voice lamp control device in the second production example of each embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final pre-score effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final score effect setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd effect example of each embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the operation notice effect in the second operation effect example of each embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the operation timing and the display timing of each notice effect. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the second operation effect example of each embodiment, and (b) is the audio lamp in the second operation effect example of each embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in a control device. It is a flowchart which shows the score giving effect setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd operation effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the comment notice setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd operation effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd operation effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notice mode setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd operation effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd operation effect example of each embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 58, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and starting ports 630, 631, 640, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 (FIG. 11 (a)) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 11 (b)) are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2), which will be described later, is changed.

As shown in FIG. 11B, the selection switch 600 includes a determination switch (a) for determining the selection of the effect and the like, a left switch 600b for instructing the selection in the left direction, and an upward selection instructing the selection switch 600b. It is composed of an upper switch 600c, a right switch 600d for instructing a rightward selection, and a lower switch 600e for instructing a downward selection.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a. May be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in the front view, and a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a first starting port 63a, and a first. The two starting ports 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, the second starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is arranged and the launched ball flows down) formed by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member on the front surface of the game board 13. Area to do). Further, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out opening 66 and the winning opening.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base plate. It is fixed by driving it into 60.

On the right side of the game board 13, a first normal symbol start port 67a and a second normal symbol start port 67b are provided below the first normal symbol start port 67a. The first normal symbol start port 67a and the second normal symbol start port 67b are configured to have the same shape, and are configured by a gate type start port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. There is. When the game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery held for the game ball passing through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit.

When the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "×" are displayed. After the symbols of No. 1 are alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), a normal symbol (a symbol of “◯” or “×” in the present embodiment) indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed (lit). If a sphere passes through the first normal symbol start port 67 or the second normal symbol start port 67b while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes thereof is the same as that of the first normal symbol start port 67a. It is held up to 4 times in total at the 2nd ordinary symbol start port 67b. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. When the variation display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol start port 67 (first normal symbol start port 67a or second normal symbol start port 67b) remains, the next A lottery of ordinary symbols is performed, and a variable display according to the lottery is started.

When it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "○", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol was a hit. When the winning symbol is displayed, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is activated. The first ordinary electric accessory 632 has a left guide member 632a and a right guide member 632b, and the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are spaced apart from each other so that one game ball can pass to the left and right. Normally, it is maintained in an upright position. A predetermined angle (in this embodiment, the left guide member 632a is 40 degrees counterclockwise and the right guide member 632b is 40 degrees clockwise) from the state where the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are substantially vertically upright. The game ball moves (that is, is changed to the open state), and the left guide member 632a and the right guide member guide the game ball to the second start port 640, so that the game ball enters the second start port 640. It becomes an easy state (special state). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of order, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol was out of order. At this time, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not operated, and the next variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are balls that have won prizes in the first starting port 630, the right starting port 631, the second starting port 640, the first ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67a, and the second ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67b. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation display has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state. In addition, the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error display are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right. The 7-segment LED on the left has a variable display (dynamic) of the first special symbol showing the judgment (lottery) result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as the first lottery game) based on the winning of the first starting port 630 or the right starting port 631. Is displayed. Specifically, the variable display (in the present embodiment, 7 segments) is determined until the variable time (dynamic display time) elapses, which is determined based on the winning of the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631. After the central segment blinks), it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the judgment result. If the determination result is out of alignment, the central 1 segment is lit and a symbol "-" indicating the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as the symbols "3" and "7" corresponding to the hit is displayed.

On the 7-segment LED on the right side, a second special symbol (dynamic display) indicating the determination (lottery) result of the lottery (second lottery game) based on the winning of the second starting port 640 is displayed. Specifically, it is displayed until the fluctuation time determined based on the winning of the second starting port 640 elapses, and is configured in the same manner as the first lottery game. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

The first special symbol showing the determination (lottery) result of the first lottery game and the second special symbol showing the determination (lottery) result of the second lottery game are the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later. See also). As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can perform a variety of variable displays as compared with the 7-segment display 37b, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, the fluctuation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later, but the fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation mode, and corresponds to the dynamic display mode related to time information. Further, the fluctuation pattern can be divided into a long-term fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time and a short-time fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time, depending on the fluctuation pattern that becomes reach and the fluctuation pattern that does not reach. In this way, even when the time is roughly sorted by a fixed time standard (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), the time information is dynamic. Corresponds to the display mode.

Further, as will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time is also applicable to the time when the fluctuation starts accurately, and the time information of the above-mentioned rough fluctuation pattern (for example, is it a long-time fluctuation pattern? Information about time information determined based on (whether or not, etc.) (for example, the number of long-term fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation, etc.) is also applicable.

In this pachinko machine 10, is it a big hit in the lottery (first lottery game, second lottery game) performed for winning prizes in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640? In addition to making a hit / fail judgment (big hit lottery), the jackpot type is also judged. As the jackpot type determined here, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), jackpot A (15R jackpot probability variation jackpot), jackpot B (15R normal jackpot), jackpot E (15R normal jackpot (electric support)) (Yes))) are set (see FIGS. 16 (a) to 16 (c)). Here, the presence of the electric support of the jackpot E indicates that the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is easily set to the special state (open state). In the jackpot E, after the jackpot game of 15 rounds, the electric support state is set until the total number of times of the first lottery game and the second lottery game reaches 100 times.

As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), two types of jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot (with electric support)) and jackpot D (15R probability variation jackpot (without electric support)) are set (FIG. 16). (A)-(c)).

Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is arranged as a winning device that is operated in an open state during the jackpot game. The first variable winning device 65 operates so that the first specific winning opening 65a is opened 15 times for a predetermined period or until a predetermined number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of game balls are entered for the jackpots A to E. Will be done.

The configuration of the first variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the first variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65b, and is first variable. A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13 and a base member 65c arranged on the back side of the base member 65c to light an LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. To open and close the LED substrate 65d in which a plurality of LEDs of the above are arranged, the back cover body 65e that sandwiches the LED substrate 65d with the base member 65c, and the first specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. The opening / closing unit 65f having the opening / closing door 65f1 of the above, the flow path cover body 65g which is combined on the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and the back cover body 65e and the flow path cover body 65g are formed. A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is locked to the switching member 65h, a back cover body 65j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g, and the like. A fixing cover body fixed to the back side of the back cover body 65j to operate the link member 65i and a flow path solenoid 65k for covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and fixing to the back cover body 65j with screws. It is composed of 65m.

FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 5B, the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a first specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The first specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5 (b) in the lower left. An inclined bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 6B.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a is an open state in which the game ball can be entered by the opening / closing door 65f1 having a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is variable to a closed state where the ball is impossible (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the first specific winning opening 65a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves to the right first starting port 631 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the probabilistic game), it is possible to put the game ball into the second starting port 640 while hitting the right side, and the game method is changed to the left side immediately after the big hit game. You can reduce the trouble of changing. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, more game balls can be efficiently won in the first specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 5B. As shown in FIG. 5A, the detection switch 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e is distributed to the normal discharge port 65e1 and the special discharge port 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. .. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a probability change switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. ..

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the high probability gaming state (probability variation) by passing the above-mentioned probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. It is set to the game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for imparting a probability change game state. Further, the switching member 65h is configured to divide the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state ST1) or a probabilistic gaming state.

In this way, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the first specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, so that the player's interest can be improved even during the jackpot game. Can be done. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. .. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A, jackpot C, and jackpot D are won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds according to the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round. Has been done. Further, when the jackpot B and the jackpot E are won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, the game ball winning the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is not possible to pass through the probability variation switch 65e3. Has been done. Therefore, the probability variation grant ratio can be controlled according to the jackpot type, and it can be configured so that excessive advantages and disadvantages do not occur.

A case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b). FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h closes the opening surface at the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a ball discharge port switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided. As a result, it can be determined by the total of the ball discharge port switch 65e4 and the probability change switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball that was won before the 14th round is won in the 14th round and the probability change switch 65e3 is won even if the jackpot is B.

In this way, the game ball that has won the first specific winning opening 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the detection switch 65c1, and based on this, the prize ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection to be configured so that it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the probability change switch 65e3, it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give the probability change game state. .. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening for giving the probabilistic gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, various gaming states in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a flow in which various gaming states are set. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a jackpot type that occurs for each special symbol in various gaming states and a gaming state that shifts after the jackpot occurs.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, the following four gaming states are set as gaming states. The first is the normal gaming state ST1.2 in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low (normal) and there is no electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in the special state (open state)). The second is a game state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low (normal) as in the normal game state ST1, but there is electric support (the first normal electric accessory 632 is likely to be in the special state (open state)). Time saving game state ST1h. Third, the probability of a big hit of a special symbol is high, and there is no electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in a special state (open state)). Latent probability change game state) ST2. The fourth is in the game state where the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high and there is electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is likely to be in the special state (open state)). A certain probabilistic transformation support game state (so-called probabilistic game state) ST3.

In the present embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time. However, in each game state, one of the special symbols is substantially changed (also referred to as a substantial change target). Specifically, it is configured so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is not the real fluctuation target is longer than the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is the real fluctuation target. In addition, the game ball enters the starting port for drawing a special symbol that is not subject to substantial fluctuation, or the game ball enters the starting port for drawing a special symbol that is subject to substantial fluctuation. It is configured to be in a game state that is easy to play. As a result, it is possible to substantially not generate a jackpot of a special symbol that is not a substantial fluctuation target (make it difficult to generate), and substantially generate a jackpot of a special symbol that is a substantial fluctuation target (make it easy to occur).

The method of subjecting one of the special symbols to the actual fluctuation target is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, ordinary electric accessories are provided at the starting port that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol and the starting port that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, in each game state, it is conceivable to make only the ordinary electric accessory of the starting port corresponding to the special symbol to be substantially changed movable (or easy to move). As a result, the game ball does not enter the starting port corresponding to the special symbol that is the target of the actual fluctuation, and the game ball does not enter the starting port corresponding to the special symbol that is not the target of the actual fluctuation (it is difficult to enter the ball). Can be done. In this case, a lottery for moving the ordinary electric accessory provided at each starting port may be performed separately. For example, a lottery for moving one ordinary electric accessory is performed based on the entry (passing) into the first ordinary symbol start port (referred to as the lottery for the first ordinary symbol), and the other ordinary electric accessory is movable. The lottery for the second ordinary symbol may be performed by entering (passing) the ball into the second ordinary symbol starting port (referred to as the lottery of the second ordinary symbol). Further, the lottery of the first ordinary symbol and the lottery of the second ordinary symbol may be executed at the same time, and as in the case of the special symbol lottery in the present embodiment, when one of the ordinary symbols is a big hit, , The lottery of the other ordinary symbol may be missed. As a result, the variation of the gaming state can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the first special symbol and the jackpot based on the second special symbol have different probabilities of selecting a jackpot through which the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. That is, the probabilities of being able to shift (loop) to a high probability gaming state (latent probability changing gaming state ST2 or probability changing gaming state ST3) are different. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, the jackpot based on the first special symbol has a low probability of being able to shift (loop) to a high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) ( 34%), that is, there is a high probability (66%) of shifting (falling) to a low probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or time-saving gaming state ST1h). On the other hand, the jackpot based on the second special symbol has a high probability (100%) of being able to shift (loop) to a high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3). In the following description of the flow in which various game states are set, for convenience, a jackpot that enables a transition to a high-probability game state (a game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3) is selected (generated). In this case, it will be described as shifting to the high-probability gaming state (the gaming ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3).

By setting a special symbol that is a target of substantial fluctuation in each gaming state, it is possible to adjust (set) whether it is easy to shift to a high-probability gaming state (loop) or to a low-probability state (fall). As a result, in each game state, in addition to two types (high probability and low probability) of the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit, two types (probability) of transitioning (looping) to the high probability game state after the big hit (probability). It is possible to set a state (high probability, low probability) of transition to a high probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the gaming state and improve the interest of the player.

Specifically, in the probability-changing gaming state ST3, which is a high-probability gaming state, by setting the actual fluctuation target in Special Figure 1, the gaming state is easily shifted (falling) to the low-probability state, which is also the high-probability gaming state. In the latent probability change game state ST2, by setting the actual fluctuation target in the special figure 2, it is possible to make the game state easy to shift (loop) to the high probability game state. That is, even in the same high-probability gaming state (or low-probability state), by changing the special symbol that is the target of the actual fluctuation, it is possible to change the distribution of the gaming state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game. It is possible to increase the variation in which the game state shifts, and improve the interest of the player.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. First, in the state in which the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (the state in which the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on), the normal game state ST1 is set. In the normal game state ST1, the first special symbol is subject to substantial fluctuation. That is, it is a gaming state in which the probability (probability variation rate) of a jackpot that shifts to a high-probability gaming state is low (34%). Specifically, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1), a fluctuation time of 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30,000 ms (30 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 17). Then, in the jackpot of the first special symbol, the jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot) that shifts to the high probability gaming state is selected as the jackpot type with a probability of 34%, and the jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) that remains in the low probability state remains. Is selected with a probability of 66% (see FIG. 7B, FIG. 16).

On the other hand, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (special figure 2), which is not a substantial fluctuation target, is set to be long. Specifically, when the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) is incorrect, 64800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (see FIG. 17). Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery 2160 to 8200 times in the first special symbol while the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed once. Since the jackpot probability in the normal game state ST1 (low probability state) is 1/400, the jackpot in the first special symbol is reached by the time the second special symbol, which is out of the normal game, fluctuates once. It is configured to occur. In addition, since the business hours of the amusement store are mainly about 15 hours from 9 am to 11 pm, they are set to be longer than that. Therefore, even if the second lottery game is executed in the normal game state ST1, the deviation fluctuation of the special figure 2 does not end within the business hours. With this configuration, in the normal game state ST1, a jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1), which is a substantial fluctuation target, is generated (easily).

If the second lottery game is executed and the result of the winning / failing determination is not deviated and the result is a hit, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is selected to be 600,000 ms (10 minutes) (see FIG. 17). This will be described in detail later, but when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts to fluctuate based on the jackpot, the fluctuation based on the other special symbol is removed. This is because it is controlled so as to be. If the hit / fail determination result of the special figure 2 is a hit and 6480000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the fluctuation time, the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 does not end within the business hours. Therefore, there arises a problem that all the fluctuations (first lottery game) based on the special figure 1 executed during the business hours are controlled so as to be out of order (not a big hit). Therefore, the fluctuation based on the jackpot in Special Figure 2 is set to the time (10 minutes) that can be completed within the business hours. Thereby, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

However, when the fluctuation based on the jackpot of Special Figure 2 is short (for example, 500 ms (0.5 seconds)), the player can judge the result of the hit / fail judgment of Special Figure 2 in a short time, so that the next fraud There is a risk that the act will be carried out. For example, a game ball is inserted into the second starting port 640, and it is determined that the hit / fail determination result of the special figure 2 based on the entry is incorrect (the variation display of the special figure 2 is executed longer than 0.5 seconds). In that case, there is a risk that a fraudulent act (so-called reset goto) of resetting (initializing) the pachinko machine 10 will be executed. As described above, when the RAM clear switch of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed and the power is turned on (reset), the normal game state ST1 is set, and the fluctuation of each special symbol is also initialized (that is, the fluctuation is stopped). Will be). Therefore, by repeating the above fraudulent act (reset goto), it is possible to generate a big hit based on the special figure 2 which is not a target of substantial fluctuation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 is set to 10 minutes so that the player cannot determine the result of the hit / fail judgment (lottery) of the special figure 2 in a short time. As a result, a period of at least 10 minutes is required to execute the fraudulent act (reset goto), so that the feasible frequency of the fraudulent act (reset goto) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally generate the jackpot of Special Figure 2 by the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto).

The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not limited to that described above, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery game cannot be executed unless the game ball is intentionally launched (for example, a right-handed game), the right-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1 (the second lottery game is performed). As a penalty, the fluctuation time based on the jackpot in FIG. 2 may be set to a time longer than 600,000 ms (10 minutes) (for example, 1 hour). Further, in this case, it may be notified that a fraudulent act (right-handed game in the normal game state ST1) is being executed (or has been executed).

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the second starting port 640 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Therefore, in order to insert the game ball into the second starting port 640 (perform the second lottery game), it is necessary to perform a game (right-handed game) in which the game ball passes through the right side of the variable display device unit 80. In the normal game state ST1, the first normal electric accessory 632 provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is difficult to be set in the special state (open state) (that is, the ball enters the right first starting port 631). Difficult to do). Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1, it is difficult to execute the first lottery game according to the special figure 1 which is a real fluctuation target, and it is easy to execute the second lottery game according to the special figure 2 which is not a real change target. become. That is, the right-handed game in the normal game state ST1 is set to be more disadvantageous to the player than playing the game (left-handed game) by passing the game ball through the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Therefore, in the normal game state ST1, the player plays a left-handed game. When a left-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1, the game ball does not enter the second start port 640, but the game ball enters the first start port 630. As a result, the game state in which the jackpot of the second special symbol does not occur (difficult) and the jackpot of the first special symbol occurs (easily) (that is, the game state in which it is difficult to shift to the high-probability gaming state) is set. Can be done.

In the normal game state ST1, the jackpot B is generated, and after the jackpot game of the jackpot B is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to). On the other hand, after the jackpot A is generated and the jackpot game is executed, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set (shifted to) (see FIG. 7B). However, if the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 after the jackpot game based on the jackpot A is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to).

The latent probability change game state ST2 is a game state in which the jackpot probability is set 10 times higher than the normal game state ST1 (to a high probability game state), and the second special symbol is a game state in which the second special symbol is substantially changed. That is, it is a gaming state in which the probability (probability variation rate) of a jackpot that can continue the high probability gaming state is high. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). As a result, in the latent probability change game state ST2, the second lottery game can be efficiently performed by performing the right-handed game. Then, in the jackpot of the second special symbol, as the jackpot type, the jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) in which the latent probability variation game state ST2 is continued (looped) is selected with a probability of 66%, and the jackpot shifts to the probability variation game state ST3. D (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected with a 34% probability.

On the other hand, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the variation time of the first special symbol, which is not a substantial variation target, is set to be long. Specifically, if the result of the hit / fail determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is wrong, the fluctuation time is selected to be 18000000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery up to 3600 times in the second special symbol while the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed once. Since the jackpot probability during the probability change (high probability gaming state) is 1/40, the jackpot will be a jackpot with the second special symbol by the time the first special symbol, which is out of the ordinary game, has changed once. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol is a hit, the fluctuation time is selected to be 500 ms (0.5 seconds) (see FIG. 18 (a)). In the latent probability change game state ST2, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), it shifts to the normal game state ST1, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, when the first special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time is set as short as 500 ms (0.5 seconds). As a result, even if a big hit occurs in the first special symbol in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the game can be made into a gaming machine capable of continuing the game without reducing the efficiency (turnover rate) of the game.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the latent probability change game state ST2, the lottery result of the second special symbol is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 8/400. In the small hit in the latent probability variation game state ST2, about 3 game balls can be entered into the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65. Since the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entered into the first specific winning opening 65a is 15, about 45 balls are paid out to the player for each small hit game. As a result, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the right-handed game can be executed in a state that is more advantageous than the normal game state ST1 (a state in which the consumption of the holding ball is suppressed).

In the latent probability variable game state ST2, the jackpot of the second special symbol is obtained, and when the jackpot D (15R probability variable jackpot) is selected, the latent probability variable game state ST2 is set (looped) again. On the other hand, when the jackpot C (15R probability variation jackpot) is selected, the gaming state with the probability transformation support (probability variation gaming state ST3) is set thereafter.

The probabilistic game state ST3 is a game state in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set 10 times higher (set to the high probability game state), and the first special symbol is a game state in which the first special symbol is substantially changed. Further, the lottery probability of the normal symbol is set to be 40 times higher, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also short, so that the fluctuation time can be easily selected (see FIG. 19). Further, the time (opening time) in which the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is maintained in the special state (open state) is also set longer than that in the normal gaming state ST1 and the latent probability changing gaming state ST2. Therefore, when the player hits the right side, the right first starting port 631 can be easily won. In the present embodiment, 95% of the right-handed game balls are configured to win a prize in the right first starting port 631. Therefore, 85% of the remaining 5% of the game balls win the second starting port 640, and the remaining 5% is consumed as an out ball. Therefore, in the probabilistic game state, about 99% of the right-handed game balls win the right first start port 631 or the second start port 640, and 99% of the right-handed game balls play as prize balls. It is paid out to the person. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of balls held by the player and perform the game.

In the probabilistic game state ST3, the lottery result of the second special symbol is configured to be a small hit with a probability of 5/400. In the small hit in this probabilistic gaming state ST3, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from becoming too advantageous in the probabilistic gaming state ST3. Not limited to this, a game ball may be allowed to enter the first specific winning opening 65a (for example, one ball). As a result, it is possible to increase the benefits for the player and improve the interest of the player.

In the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, which is not a substantial fluctuation target, is set to be long, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, which is a substantial fluctuation target, is set to be short. Specifically, 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol regardless of the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) (see FIG. 18B). On the other hand, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, if the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) is not correct, the fluctuation time is selected to be 18000000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery up to 3600 times in the first special symbol while the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed once. Since the jackpot probability during the probability change (high probability game state) is 1/40, the jackpot is made with the first special symbol by the time the second special symbol, which is out of the ordinary game, has changed once. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, if the result of the winning / failing determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is a hit, the fluctuation time is selected to be 5000 ms (5 seconds) (see FIG. 18 (b)). As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), it shifts to the normal game state ST1, so that the above-mentioned fraudulent act (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the probabilistic game state ST3, the fluctuation time is set as short as 5000 ms (5 seconds). As a result, even if a big hit occurs in the second special symbol in the probabilistic game state ST3, the game can be made into a gaming machine capable of continuing the game without reducing the efficiency (turnover rate) of the game.

Further, as described above, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3, 95% of the launched game balls win a prize in the right first starting port 631. Therefore, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 640 and the second lottery game is difficult to be executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a big hit of the second special symbol which is not a substantial fluctuation target.

When the jackpot of the first special symbol is reached in the probability variation game state ST3, the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 34%. After the jackpot game based on the jackpot A, the latent probability change game state ST2 is set (shifted to). Therefore, the latent probability change game state ST2 is selected (shifted to) with a probability of 34%, and the game can be played with a high probability until at least two big hits are won again. On the other hand, if the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66%, the normal gaming state ST1 is set (so-called falling) after the jackpot game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set, the player has a high probability of favoring the player until the jackpot is executed twice in a state where the consumption of the possessed ball is suppressed. 2 The lottery game (or the first lottery game) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player can perform two jackpot games in a short period of time as compared with the normal game state, and there is an effect that the player can be provided with a sense of superiority.

Furthermore, by displaying so that the player can grasp that the lottery game is executed with a high probability in favor of the player until the jackpot is executed twice, the player is given at least two jackpots. It has the effect of making you feel guaranteed and providing a sense of security.

In the present embodiment, in the latent probability change game state ST2, when the jackpot B of the first special symbol is reached, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to). That is, it is not possible to obtain two big hits. In the latent probability change game state ST2, as described above, the right-handed game in which the first lottery game is difficult to be executed is performed, and the second lottery is performed during the fluctuation of the deviation of the first special symbol, which fluctuates for a long time. The game is executed a plurality of times, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is generated (easily) (substantially, it does not become the jackpot of the first special symbol). However, there is a case where the first special symbol becomes a big hit due to the reserved ball of the first special symbol stored in the latent probability change game state ST2. For example, when a big hit is obtained in the first second lottery game in which the latent probability change game state ST2 is set (probability of 1/40). Therefore, in this case, in the latent probability change game state ST2, the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot of the first special symbol with a probability of 34%, and the jackpot E is selected with a probability of 66% (). 7 (b) and 16 (b)). If the jackpot A is selected, the game shifts to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, which is a high-probability gaming state, so that it is possible to obtain two jackpots. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is selected, it is not possible to obtain two jackpots, and the situation shifts to a low probability state. In this case, 100 times of time-saving games are given after the jackpot game is completed. As a result, a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 is given. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the player is discouraged and the motivation for the game is significantly reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37. , A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) for variable display of the third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is provided.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114, so that the first display is as shown in FIG. 4 (a). Left (left side display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2) and right showing the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) which is one of the third symbols in the area Dm. Three symbol rows (right side display area Dm3) are displayed. The type of the third symbol (whether it is special figure 1 or special figure 2) displayed in the first display area (Dm) is determined and displayed according to the game state.

In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state ST1 (low probability gaming state) and the gaming state with probabilistic transformation support (probability transformation gaming state), the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the probabilistic transformation support is provided. In the case of the none game state (latent probability change game state ST2), the second special symbol is set to be displayed in the first display area Dm.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the type of the special symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is set to be switched, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same special symbol may always be displayed. Good.

Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variablely displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Dynamic display).

The third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of 10 types of special symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variation display is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over.

Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Further, in the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot movie is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, a second display area Dn and a second sub-display area Dt are formed below the second display area Dn at the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol string indicating a first special symbol or a second special symbol (depending on the game state) is displayed. Further, in the second sub-display area Dt, a symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the gaming state) displayed in the second display area Dn is displayed. Details will be described later, but in the case of the probabilistic gaming state ST3, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the treasure box symbol is the second display area as the third symbol indicating the second special symbol. It is displayed in Dn. Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started, a blinking display is executed in which the state of FIG. 9A and the state of FIG. 9B are alternately displayed in a short cycle (for example, 1 second). .. Then, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, when the fluctuation time elapses, the stop display is displayed in the state shown in FIG. 9A. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a hit, it is configured to be stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG. 9B when the fluctuation time elapses.

Further, a third display area Du is formed on the upper left of the first display area Dm. In this third display area Du, two types of symbol rows of "○" and "×" as shown in FIG. 8B are displayed in parallel in two rows, and the symbol on the left side is a lottery for the first special symbol. The result is shown, and the symbol on the right side is configured to show the lottery result of the second special symbol. Not limited to this, the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be shown depending on other aspects. For example, when two types of symbols "○" and "×" are displayed in two rows in parallel and two "○" symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, the first special symbol or the second special symbol (game). It may be configured to notify that a hit (depending on the state) was hit. Further, the third display area Du and the second display area Dn may be shared. For example, in the normal game state ST1, two types of symbol strings "○" and "×" are displayed in parallel in the second display area, and in the probabilistic game state ST3, FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (b) are displayed. ), The symbol of the treasure box may be displayed in the second display area Dn as the third symbol indicating the second special symbol. In this case, the display area may be switched based on the change of the game state after the big hit game. As a result, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened, so that the effect of the effect displayed in the first display area Dm can be enhanced. Further, when the variation based on the second special symbol is not executed (when there is no hold of the special figure 2), the second display area Dn and the second sub-display area Dt may not be displayed. .. As a result, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. When the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one is stopped and displayed in a mode showing a big hit (or a small hit), the change of the other special symbol that is changing is also forcibly changed. It is configured to be stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a disconnection.

Here, in the big hit, the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is executed 15 times (referred to as 15 rounds), whereas in the small hit, the first of the first variable winning device 65. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is executed twice (for example, two rounds). Further, one round of the jackpot game is executed until 30 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have won the first variable winning device 65. On the other hand, one round of the small hit game in the latent probability change game state ST2 is set until 1.8 seconds elapse or 10 game balls win the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hit game in the latent probability change game state ST2, about 3 game balls can be entered. Further, one round of the small hit game in the probabilistic game state ST3 is set until 0.5 seconds elapse or 10 game balls win the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hit game in the probabilistic game state ST3, it is almost impossible to put the game ball into the first variable winning device 65, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball.

Even in the probabilistic game state ST3, as described above, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lottery result indicating a small hit, the changing second special symbol is forcibly removed (FIG. 9). (See (a)) is displayed as a stop. In this case, the deviation fluctuation of the second special symbol, which is a fluctuation for a long time (10 minutes) and is not a real fluctuation target, is stopped, and after the small hit game of the special figure 1 is completed, the new fluctuation of the special figure 1 is formed. At the same time, the second lottery game is executed based on the new hold (next hold) ball of the second special symbol. That is, there is a possibility that a big hit based on the second special symbol will occur. In the present embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the second lottery game with the second special symbol, the big hit C (15R probability variation big hit) capable of shifting to the high probability game state is always selected (100%). It is configured (see FIG. 16C), which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the fluctuation is started based on the new hold (next hold) of the second special symbol, the first special is set in the second display area Dn as shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b). The variation of the symbol is displayed, and the variation of the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. Similarly, the symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub-display area Dt, and the symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is varied so as to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. .. The variable mode is not limited to this, and the display area of the second display area Dn on which the variation of the second special symbol is displayed is expanded, and the first display in which the variation of the first special symbol is displayed. The area Dm may be reduced.

When the variation of the second special symbol is changed so as to be displayed in the first display area Dm, the display mode in which the treasure box is opened is executed, and when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect, as shown in FIG. 10 (a). The word "Sorry" is displayed from inside the treasure box, and the player is informed that the lottery result was out of order. On the other hand, when the winning / failing judgment result is a hit, the characters "Congratulations" are displayed from inside the treasure box as shown in FIG. 10B, and the player is informed that the lottery result was a win. To.

In this way, when the first special symbol wins a small hit in the probabilistic game state ST3, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation of the new second special symbol is started. 2 It is possible to increase the chances that the lottery game will be executed. Further, in that case, as shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b), the variation based on the second special symbol is emphasized and displayed, so that the player is expected to make a big hit with the second special symbol. Can be made to.

In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It provides a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 8A, sub-display regions Ds are formed below the first display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 8B, the reserved symbol “black circle” corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. On the other hand, a second sub-display region Dt is formed below the second display region Dn. As shown in FIG. 9A, a reserved symbol “black triangle mark” corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second sub-display area Dt. In the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four, so that a maximum of four reserved symbols "black circles" are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds. In the second sub-display area Dt, a maximum of four reserved symbols "black triangle marks" are displayed.

In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed by a "black circle" and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is displayed by a "black triangle mark". Not limited to this, the reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be the same. By using the same reserved symbol for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the capacity of the symbol data can be reduced. Further, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. For example, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol may be displayed in the left area of the sub-display area Ds, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the right area, or the fluctuation starts from the left side of the display area. The reserved symbols may be displayed in order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 composed of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described, but the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to this, and three, four, or more lottery games and the corresponding start-up. Of course, it is also possible to provide each mouth so that the variable display of each lottery result can be displayed at the same time.

When a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640, the first starting port switch or the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is activated. Turns on. The first start port 630 and the right first start port 631 are formed on the back side of the game board 13 with a common guide path for guiding the game ball that has entered the first start port switch to the first start port switch. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first start port switch and the second start port switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 are also one of the winning openings in which one ball is paid out as a winning ball when a ball wins a prize.

When either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, the variation display based on the other special symbol is forcibly terminated. In the present embodiment, when one of the special symbols starts to fluctuate so that the winning / failing judgment result becomes a big hit, the special symbol that starts to fluctuate after the other is forcibly changed as a lottery result of losing. Is configured to start. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the jackpot game is continuously started or the jackpot game is started at the same time.

In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery game is executed in one special symbol, the lottery game that is out of the game is forcibly executed in the other, but the other is not limited to this. The lottery game may be executed according to the lottery result so that the jackpot game can be started continuously. In addition, if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted in the other special symbol, and the remaining fluctuation display is continued after the big hit. May be good. In this case, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked and displayed in a predetermined display mode "for example, h of the alphabet" in a predetermined cycle. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended).

In addition, a special symbol that preferentially executes the variable display in each game state may be specified, and the variable display of the special symbol may be preferentially executed. For example, in the normal game state ST1, the change of the first special symbol is preferentially executed. In this case, the change of the second special symbol may be temporarily stopped (or forcibly stopped) based on the start of execution of the change of the first special symbol. As a result, if the first special symbol does not change, the change of the second special symbol can be executed, but when the change of the first special symbol starts, the change of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (or). Forcibly stopped). Therefore, the variation of the first special symbol can be preferentially executed in the normal game state ST1.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not win in any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 135 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 135 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is desired to be returned to the initial state.

<About the configuration>
The characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a left flow path PA1 on which the game ball flows down on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 and a right flow path PA2 on which the game ball flows down on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 are formed. A first starting port 630 is arranged below the center of the variable display device unit 80. As described above, the game balls flowing down the right flow path PA2 are configured by the nail groups T2 and T3 so that 85% of the flowing game balls enter the second starting port 640. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path PA1 is more easily entered into the first start port 630 than the game ball that has flowed down the right side flow path PA2.

The first ordinary symbol start port 67a is arranged in the right flow path PA2, the first variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ordinary symbol start port 67a, the right first start port 631 is arranged below the first variable winning device 65, and the first right first start port 631 is arranged below the first variable winning device 65. 2 Ordinary symbol start port 67b is arranged. A second starting port 640 is arranged below the right first starting port 631. A plurality of nails T for changing the rolling direction of the game ball are arranged on the game board 13.

In the game ball launched into the right flow path, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is in a normal state (a state in which the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are upright) due to the nail group T4 (composed of three nails). , The game ball is configured so as not to enter the right first starting port 631. When the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is in the normal state, 85% of the game balls flowing down the right flow path are configured to flow down the left side of the right first starting port 631. The ratio of the game balls flowing down the left side and the right side of the right first starting port 631 can be changed by adjusting the angle (inclination) of the nail T1. By inclining the angle of the nail T1 toward the first variable winning device 65 side (opposite side to the nail group T4), the width between the nail T1 and the nail group T4 becomes wider, and the nail T1 and the nail group T4 flow down. That is, the rate at which the game ball flows down on the right side of the right first starting port 631 increases. On the other hand, by inclining the nail T1 toward the right first starting port 631 side (nail group T4 side), the width between the nail T1 and the nail group T4 becomes narrower, and the game ball flows down on the right side of the right first starting port 631. By reducing the ratio of playing balls, the ratio of game balls flowing down the left side of the right first starting port 631 can be increased.

The game ball that has flowed down the left side of the right first starting port 631 is configured to be guided to the second starting port 640 by the nail group T3 (composed of five nails). In the nail group T3, the width of each nail is arranged to be narrower than that of one game ball, and the game ball cannot pass between them (width). The game ball guided by the nail group T3 is prevented from flowing down the second starting port 640 by the nail group T2 (composed of three nails), and all the balls enter the second starting port 640. It is configured. Not limited to this, it is natural that some game balls may flow downward from the nail group T3 side (or the nail group T2 side, or both).

Here, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 640, one prize ball is set to be paid out to the player. Eighty-five percent of the game balls fired into the right channel PA2 are configured to win the second starting port 640 (when the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is in the normal state), so that the player fires. Of the game balls played, 85% are configured to be refunded as prize balls. Therefore, by launching the game ball into the right channel PA2, the player can suppress the consumption (decrease) of the game ball as a holding ball as compared with launching the game ball into the left channel. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the right first starting port 631 does not win a prize in the second starting port 640 due to the nail group T2. Thereby, by adjusting the nail T1, the ratio of the game balls entering the second starting port 640, that is, the ratio of the ball being refunded as a prize ball in the right-handed game can be adjusted.

Next, in the special state (the state in which the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are rotated until they are substantially horizontal, the open state), the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is opened by the left guide member 632a. The flow path flowing down the left side of 631 is configured to be closed. As a result, when the electric accessory 632 is in the special state (open state), the game ball flowing down the right flow path is prevented from winning the second starting port 640. Therefore, in the time-saving game state ST1h or the probability variation game state ST3, the winning of the right first starting port 631 increases, the winning of the second starting port 640 decreases, and the first lottery game with the first special symbol It is configured to increase the number of executions (execution frequency). Further, in the time-saving game state ST1h and the probability variation game state ST3, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set longer, the number of executions (execution frequency) of the second lottery game can be further reduced (lowered).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, is set to be short, so that the game is performed so as to launch the game ball into the right flow path. As already described, the ratio of the game balls that win the second starting port 640 is set to 85% of the game balls that flow down the right flow path, so that the number of balls held by the player decreases. However, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability change game state ST2, the probability of winning a small hit with the second special symbol is set high. Further, the small hit game executed during the latent probability change game state ST2 is set so that the opening time of one round of the first variable winning device 65 is 1.8 seconds or 10 balls are won, and the opening time per round is set. Since it is extended from the small hit in other gaming states, the prize ball can be obtained by the small hit. In the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit during the latent probability change is set to be 15% of the amount consumed by flowing down the right flow path, and is configured to compensate for the decrease in the number of balls held by the player. Has been done. Therefore, even in the latent probability change game state ST2, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, it is prohibited to play a game in a right-handed game (a game in which a game ball is launched into the right flow path PA2), and the second start port is in the normal game state ST1. When the game ball wins a prize in 640, an abnormality process is executed, and an alarm display "Please play left-handed" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a similar warning is also notified by voice. Further, in the normal game state ST1, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 640, the jackpot may be controlled to be invalid, or an abnormal signal may be output to a hall computer or the like. You may.

In the present embodiment, the game method (left-handed game or right-handed game) is changed in each game state, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. It may be configured so that either a left-handed game or a right-handed game may be performed in all game states, or either a left-handed game or a right-handed game may be performed in a specific game state. You may. For example, a start port for the first special symbol and a start port for the second special symbol are provided at the lower center of the game board 13. Then, the game ball that flows down the left flow path PA1 by performing the left-handed game and the game ball that flows down the right flow path PA2 by performing the right-handed game are the starting port of the first special symbol and the second. It may be configured so that the ball can enter the starting port of the special symbol. As a result, it is not necessary to distinguish between a left-handed game and a right-handed game in all game states or a specific game state, so that the player's game burden can be reduced.

<Electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation type counter C3 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are not included in the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45). It is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 wins the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second starting port 640 in which the counter values for winning the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 are stored. A second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is provided in which each counter value is stored. In the present embodiment, the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 are provided with a maximum of four holding balls, and the second starting port 640 is provided with a maximum of four holding balls, respectively. A maximum of eight reserved balls are memorable. Therefore, the game ball is moved to the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game. When a prize is won, each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins in the second starting port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. .. After that, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed). Various settings and control processing for this are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and various types for variable display of the second special symbol. Settings and control processing are executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the special symbol cannot be drawn, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is at the first starting port 630 or When the right first starting port 631 and the second starting port 640 are won, if the number of holdings for the winning starting port is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start port. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the winning start port is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and a prize ball (in this embodiment, one game ball) ) Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is 4 in total for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631, and 4 for the second starting port 640, but is limited to this. Instead, each of them may be four, or the upper limit may not be set.

Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first random number counter C1 is commonly acquired for each of the balls entering the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45).

The value of the random number counter C1 per first is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the spheres are the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port. At the timing when the 640 is won (starting prize), it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start port of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a (in this embodiment, "7" at the low probability and "0-9" at the high probability), it is determined to be the jackpot.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first hit random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (hits) that are big hits is 1 at low probability, the value "7" is 10, and the value "0-9" is 10. It is stored in the first random number table 202a.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). ) Is reached and then returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the spheres are the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start. At the timing when the opening 640 is won (starting winning), the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning start opening. The timing at which the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired is actually the timing at which the game ball is detected by the first start port switch (not shown) or the second start port switch (not shown). That is.

Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that is out of order. If there is, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect or The stop type is the one at the time of big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16) stored in the ROM 202.

As the jackpot type, as described above, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot E are set as jackpot types dedicated to the first special symbol, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types dedicated to the second special symbol. Has been done. The jackpot A to jackpot E are each composed of 15 rounds of jackpot games. Further, in the jackpot A, jackpot C, and jackpot D, the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is rotated for 5 seconds at the start of the 14th round, so that the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. When the game ball is detected by the probability change switch 65e3, the game state after the big hit game is set to the probability change game state ST3 or the latent probability change game state ST2, which is the high probability game state.

The method for making the game ball pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, a V variable winning device 651 in which a game ball that has entered can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (provided with a probability change switch 65e3) and a game ball that has entered cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (probability change switch 65e3). Is provided with a non-V variable winning device 652. Then, in the jackpot that makes it possible to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to the high-probability gaming state, the V variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game cannot be shifted to the high-probability gaming state. In the jackpot, the V variable winning device 651 is not opened and closed, and the non-V variable winning device 652 is controlled to be opened and closed. Further, the V variable winning device 651 may be provided with a switching member 65h as in the present embodiment. Then, by moving the switching member 65h at a specific timing (for example, at the start of the 14th round), the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Then, in the jackpot that makes it possible to shift the gaming state after the jackpot game to the high-probability gaming state, the V variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the high-probability gaming state. In the jackpot that makes it impossible to shift to, the non-V variable winning device 652 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round. As a result, it is not necessary to change the control of the probability change switch 65e3 for each jackpot type, so that the design cost and the program capacity can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot B and the jackpot E, the switching member 65h is rotated only for 0.5 seconds at the start of the 14th round. Since it takes 0.5 seconds or more for the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 to reach the probability change switch 65e3, if the jackpot is B or the jackpot E, the probability change switch 65e3 is used as the game ball. Is configured so that it is impossible for the player to pass through, and the gaming state after the big hit is not set to the gaming state with a high probability. In the case of the jackpot B and the jackpot E, which do not shift to the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot game, the switching member 65h may not be rotated. As a result, in the jackpot B and the jackpot E, it is possible to surely prevent the game ball from passing through the probability change switch 65e3, and it is not necessary to rotate the switching member 65h, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

Therefore, even if the jackpot game is started, it is determined for the player whether or not the probability change is given during the subsequent jackpot game, so that the expectation for the probability change can be continuously held for a long time. Further, since the ratio of the probability variation given is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player can play the game by changing the degree of expectation that the probability variation is given depending on the difference in the special symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the jackpot type selection table 202d is composed of three types of tables, the jackpot type selection tables A to C. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table A. This jackpot type selection table A is used to determine the jackpot type based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when a jackpot occurs in the normal gaming state ST1 (including the time-saving gaming state ST1h). It is a selection table. As shown in FIG. 16A, jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot) and jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) are set as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). For the jackpot A, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set as a judgment value, and for the jackpot B, the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "34 to 99" is the judgment value. Is set as. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), one type of jackpot C is set, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "0 to 99" is set as a determination value. That is, in the normal game state ST1, the jackpot A is selected with a probability of 34% and the jackpot B is selected with a probability of 66% when a jackpot is achieved in the special figure 1. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in Special Figure 2, the big hit C is selected with a 100% probability.

As shown in FIG. 16A, the jackpot A increases the probability of hitting the normal symbol, shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and sets the operating time of the first ordinary electric accessory 632 to be long. It is a big hit in which a V winning opening pattern is set in which a state (electric support state) is not given and an opening pattern in which a game ball can be won is given to the probability change switch 65e3 of the first variable winning device 65. On the other hand, the jackpot B is a jackpot in which the electric support state is not given and the V prize opening pattern is not set. The jackpot C is set to a jackpot in which an electric support state is given and a V prize opening pattern is set.

In this way, in the normal game state ST1, by setting only jackpot C as the jackpot type of the second special symbol that should not normally be played (variable), it is assumed that a jackpot occurs in the second special symbol due to fraud or the like. However, the latent probability change game state ST2 is not given, and the problem that at least two big hits are illegally given in the high probability game state can be suppressed.

Next, FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table B. The jackpot type selection table B is a table for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is established in the latent probability variation game state ST2. In this jackpot type selection table B, jackpot A and jackpot E are set as the jackpot types in Special Figure 1, and jackpot C and jackpot D are set as jackpot types in Special Figure 2, respectively.

The jackpot E is a 15-round time-saving jackpot, and the electric support state is given until the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to fluctuate 100 times after the jackpot game is completed. The jackpot probability in this case is set to a low probability state. In addition, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is set longer when shifting to the latent probability changing game state ST2, the big hit is the first fluctuation of the first special symbol that shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2. Is generally considered. In that case, with the intention of relieving the player, the jackpot E, which is not normally selected in the game state ST1, is set to be selected instead of the jackpot B. Therefore, the disappointment of the player can be suppressed, and the problem that the motivation for the game is significantly reduced can be suppressed.

When a big hit is made in Special Figure 2, a big hit C and a big hit D are set respectively. The jackpot D is composed of jackpots in which a latent probability change of 15 rounds is set. Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set, there is a high possibility that the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to the high probability game state until at least two jackpot games are executed. ing. Therefore, for the player, the jackpot D is set to a more advantageous jackpot type than the jackpot C in which the probability variation game state ST3 is set.

In the jackpot type selection table B, the jackpot C is set to "0 to 65" as a determination value, and the jackpot D is set to "66 to 99" as a determination value. Therefore, the jackpot C is set to be selected with a probability of 66% when the second special symbol is hit, and the jackpot D is set to be selected with a probability of 34%. Therefore, the player plays the game with the expectation that the jackpot D will be selected when the jackpot is hit with the second special symbol during the latent probability variation game state ST2.

FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table C. The jackpot type selection table C is a selection table used to determine the jackpot type when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state ST3. In the jackpot type selection table C, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, and only jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. The percentage of jackpot A selected is set to 34% (judgment value "0 to 33"), and the percentage of jackpot B selected is set to 66% (judgment value "34 to 99"). ).

In this way, when the probability variation game state ST3 is set, the jackpot D is always selected when the jackpot is reached in the second special symbol, so that the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set, and at least 2 is set for the player. It is configured so that the high-probability gaming state can be continuously set until the jackpot is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and further, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is easily set to be in the special state (open state). By becoming (electric support), the number of balls entering the second starting port 640 is suppressed. As will be described later, in the probabilistic game state ST3, 3000 ms is selected at a rate of 191/199, and 30000 ms is selected at a rate of 8/199 by lottery (see FIG. 19). Therefore, it is configured so that the fluctuation time of 30,000 ms, which has a long fluctuation time, is selected with a low probability.

Until the fluctuation time of 30,000 ms elapses, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not operated in the special state (open state), and during that time, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 640 ( Since 85% of the game balls hit to the right are entered), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased. On the other hand, during the probabilistic gaming state ST3, in the case of deviation as shown in FIG. 18B, the fluctuation time of 1800000 ms is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, so that the second special symbol is usually set. It is configured so that a new lottery is not efficiently executed even when the reserved ball is stored. However, since the small hit probability of the first special symbol is set to 1/80 during the probability variation game state ST3 (see FIG. 15 (b))), every time a small hit is won in the first special symbol. , The fluctuation executed by the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and then the fluctuation of the stored ball is started. That is, by winning a small hit with the first special symbol, the lottery opportunity with the second special symbol increases, and the lottery that is advantageous to the player is easily executed. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the small hit will be won in the first special symbol, and the player's expectation can be increased in addition to the big hit. The lottery probability of small hits may be set to an appropriate value as appropriate.

Returning to FIG. 9, the description of various counters will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0.

The value of the variable type counter CS1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is moved to the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640. At the timing of winning (starting winning), the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

In the present embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired at the timing when the start winning is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value may be acquired at the timing when the variation starts. Of course, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 may also be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 (a) to 18 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 17) for selecting a variation pattern in a low-probability gaming state, and a latent probability variation game. Fluctuation pattern selection table B for selecting a variation pattern in the state ST2 (see FIG. 18A), variation pattern selection table C for selecting a variation pattern in the probability variation game state ST3 or the time saving game state ST1h (FIG. 18 (FIG. 18). b) See) are set respectively.

In each fluctuation pattern selection table, the type of fluctuation pattern is set according to the number of reserved balls when the fluctuation starts, the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, and the hit / fail determination result. The type of the fluctuation pattern determined by the main control device 110 is a rough content of the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation time and the rough fluctuation type (non-reach, various types of reach) are mainly determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine the content of a more detailed fluctuation pattern. With such a configuration, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal game state ST1, the hit / fail judgment result is deviated as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and an extremely long fluctuation time (dynamic display time) is determined regardless of the hit. Has been done. Specifically, 64800000 ms is selected and 18 hours are set. Since the business hours of a game store are generally long from 9 am to 11 pm, the business hours are 15 hours, which is longer than that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing with the second special symbol in the normal game state ST1 and making a big hit. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time is long even in the case of a big hit. In this case, by outputting to the hall computer or the like that the game is being played with the second special symbol, the game store can monitor the illegal game and give guidance in the correct game method.

In the present embodiment, even in the case of a hit, a long fluctuation time is set in the second special symbol, but in the case of a hit, a short fluctuation time such as 500 ms may be used. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the second special symbol executes an extremely long hit variation, and the first special symbol does not execute the hit variation during that period.

As shown in FIG. 18A, in the latent probability change game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the case of being off is configured to be 180,000 ms, which is set extremely long. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, which is a hit, is set to be short because it is composed of 500 ms. With this configuration, even if the player shifts to the latent probability variable game state ST2 and the first special symbol of the first variation becomes a jackpot E, it is difficult to understand that the transition to the latent probability variable game state ST2 has occurred. it can. Furthermore, the jackpot game can be continuously executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 18B, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol coming off is configured to be 180,000 ms, which is set to be extremely long. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the hit is configured to be 5000 ms, and is set according to the period during which the treasure chest effect described later is executed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the variable display that becomes a big hit does not fluctuate at the same time, but the variation display that becomes a big hit can be performed at the same time. When configured, the variation display time that is the jackpot of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the first special symbol is used. The fluctuation time that becomes the jackpot of the symbol may be configured so that a fluctuation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long fluctuation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to postpone the jackpot with the second special symbol, which may determine the jackpot B, which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, and in the meantime, the second special. A jackpot C can be given to the player by making a jackpot with a symbol. In this case, if a big hit is started with one special symbol, the lottery game that is changing in the other special symbol may be invalidated. With this configuration, the jackpot C, which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, is given, and the probability variation game state ST3 is determined immediately after the probability variation game state ST3 is set, and the probability variation game state ST3 ends in a short period of time. Problems can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-mentioned configuration in which the fluctuation display in which the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, the hit / fail judgment result in the first special symbol is a deviation. By setting the display time to be long (for example, 100 seconds) and setting the fluctuation time of the hit / fail judgment result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol can be used during the time-saving game. The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner) can be reduced, and the number of times the lottery for the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, can be increased. If the number of time reductions is until the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is changed 100 times in succession due to the deviation of the second special symbol. It is possible to effectively reduce the number of times that the second special symbol is variablely displayed during the time-saving game by configuring the time longer than the time when the variable display is performed.

Returning to FIG. 13, the description of various counters will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the ordinary symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is a hit of a normal symbol when it matches the value of the random number to be a hit set by the second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)).

Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the sphere is the first normal symbol start port 67a (through gate) or the second normal symbol start port 67b (see FIG. 22). It is acquired when it is detected that the passage has passed through the gate). The number of random numbers to be won is 5 in the normal game state ST1, and the range is "5 to 9". Further, in the high-probability gaming state, it is 200, and the range is "5-204". That is, in the normal game state ST1, it is determined that the player has won when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-9", and in the high probability game state, the acquired second random number counter When the value of C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and the symbol "○" is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the first normal symbol is displayed. The left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b of the electric accessory 632 are opened once for a predetermined time (1.2 s in the present embodiment) in the normal gaming state ST1, and in the high probability gaming state, the predetermined time. The opening operation (1s in this embodiment) is performed twice. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 22). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 41).

When the game ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not displayed, and each counter based on the hold ball is stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c. When the value is not stored, the random number value is acquired from the second hit random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is variablely displayed or the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). Is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the number of times of holding (normal symbol holding 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the second random number counter C4. When a random number value is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to on, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the random value is stopped or the hold is exhausted. If the data is shifted to the previous hold area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored holding area is set to on. Judgment as to whether or not data is stored in the hold area or whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is executed depending on which hold area or whether or not the normal symbol flag of the execution area is turned on.

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

In the present embodiment, the lottery between the first lottery game and the second lottery game is configured to select various common counter values, but the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery By setting various counters dedicated to each game (second special symbol) and changing the update triggers and initial values of various counters between the first lottery game and the second lottery game, they are updated with different values. Of course, it may be composed of the counter values to be generated.

By configuring in this way, in the lottery between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter values are acquired at the same opportunity, the counter values of different values can be acquired. It is possible to suppress a variation pattern selected between the 1 special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and a problem that the result of determining whether or not the result is synchronized.

In addition, even if the fluctuation patterns are selected from the common fluctuation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the problem that the selected fluctuation patterns are synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are produced. It can be performed. Further, the stored data in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (a RAM having a small storage area or the like is used) can be obtained.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and an I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 44) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. , Normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability change flag 203g, probability change setting flag 203h, probability change passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, probability change effective flag 203p, discharge number counter 203s, time reduction counter 203t, jackpot flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, look-ahead hold storage area 203x, small hit flag 203y, time reduction flag 203a2, other memory area 203z Have at least.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired based on winning a prize in the first starting port 630 up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). is there. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting port 640 up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). It is a storage area for.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the storage area. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, refer to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). It is the same as (not shown).

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are started. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) with the detection of winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the sphere has won the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the counter buffers of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are used. The value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting port 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer as in the case of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the corresponding values are obtained. Each area (not shown) is similarly stored.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the MPU 201 executes the above-mentioned first process such as a jackpot lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to one start prize among the data (counters C1 to C2, CS1 values) stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. The data is shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) and the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) when the start winning of the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b is detected. It is a storage area to be stored. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), The value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired from the counter buffer and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to on and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that data (counter C4 value, normal symbol flag (not shown)) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. have. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing (starting prize) to the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b is digested in the holding area where the data is vacant. The reserved areas are stored in order from the earliest reserved area.

In addition, when it is detected that the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning prize, each counter value is stored and the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed. It is a memory for storing data (value of counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, it executes a winning lottery, a display setting of the second symbol display device 83 or the second symbol display device 88, and the like. In addition, among the data corresponding to each start winning prize (value of the random number counter C4 per second) stored in the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one start winning is reserved for this normal symbol. Shift to the ball execution area (not shown). The shift in the present embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are the first start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning of the mouth 630 or the second starting port 640, the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined. Each is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process (FIG. 44, S1514) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is the first special symbol reserved based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631. When the counter value is stored in the ball storage area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is a counter value in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 640. Is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol hold ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

In the MPU 201, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are respectively. When stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is stored in the first special symbol change start processing (figure). 23, S203) or the second special symbol change start processing (FIG. 23, S206), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the change pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, a variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the passage of the game ball (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize"), the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the second symbol display device 83 and the second symbol of the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display effect performed by the display device 88 up to a maximum of four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process (FIG. 44, S1514) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed (see FIGS. 41 and S1205).

The normal symbol flag (not shown) is a flag indicating that the data of the random number counter C4 per second is stored and is held, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. is there. When the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, it is set to ON. Further, when the value of the counter C4 per second is shifted to the next hold area (the hold area corresponding to the hold number in which the hold is exhausted and the hold number is reduced by one), the hold area before the shift is performed. The normal symbol flag (not shown) of is set to off, while the normal symbol flag (not shown) of the shifted and stored holding area is set to on. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is processed to stop the fluctuation, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to off.

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state (latent probability variation gaming state ST2 or probability variation gaming state ST3). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the game state is in a high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3), and when it is off, it indicates a low probability game state (including the time saving game state ST1h). ). In the present embodiment, when the probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to on at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (see S11682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started (see S607 in FIG. 29 and S1007 in FIG. 36). In the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) is determined by the probability-changing switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. It is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed. Here, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is set to off based on the on. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

When the probability change setting flag is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability change switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the probability change switch 65e3 has passed, the probability change setting flag 203h May be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to turn on and determining the fraud that the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. it can.

The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability variation switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in the present embodiment). It is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is added and updated one by one when passing through the probability variation switch 65e3 (S1681 in FIG. 50). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1711 in FIG. 51). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the first variable winning device 65, the game ball is added and updated one by one (FIG. 50). S1673). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the first variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) After it is determined whether and match, the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to be on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, in jackpot A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to on for 5 seconds based on the start of 14 rounds, and in jackpot B and jackpot E, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to 0.5 based on the start of 14 rounds. Set to on for seconds. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 14 rounds in the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the jackpot B (S1642 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, in the process of S1679 of the winning process (FIG. 50, S1634) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, the value is subtracted and updated one by one. Further, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in the present embodiment, a voice saying "look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the player's attention. In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the 12th round (10 balls are won or 30 seconds have passed in the first variable winning device 65). The notification counter 203m is decremented and updated one by one by the processing of S1664 of the notification processing (FIG. 49, S1633) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, the notification command output to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. When this command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process for outputting the above-mentioned voice.

With this configuration, the voice "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 14th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can display the third symbol corresponding to the liquid crystal. Gaze at 81. Here, in the 13th round of the jackpot game, the character of a girl is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the character "attention", which is a notification prompting the player to see the third symbol display device 81, is displayed. It is displayed. In the 14th round, the flow path solenoid 65k is activated, so if the player pays close attention to the operation, the type of jackpot being executed will be determined. In order to keep the player expecting that the probabilistic game state ST3 is given until the end of the jackpot game, the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6A) is made difficult for the player to see. Notification effect is being executed. However, when the 13th round is completed, there is a risk that the player may see the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is notified by voice during the interval period. The notification effect is executed. As a result, after the interval effect is executed, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display content, and the player's attention can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In the present embodiment, the player is distracted from the switching member 65h by notifying the player to show the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first step is performed before the start of the 14th round. By notifying the variable winning device 65 so as to hold the player's hand over it, the movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand. Further, the device is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, and may be configured to distract the player's attention by notifying the player to see the display lamp 34 or the like. Further, during the 13th round, the player may be configured to distract the player's attention by displaying a three-dimensional code or the like and giving a notification prompting the player to read the code. In the present embodiment, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of 14 rounds) until the operation of the switching member 65h is completed is set as the effect of distracting attention. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the jackpot A, the jackpot C, the jackpot D, the jackpot B, and the jackpot E are determined by the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o, which will be described later, is added and updated one by one (see S1632 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. It is a counter to do.

The remaining ball timer 203o discharges the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. It is a counter for determining whether the time required for the door has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball winning the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds in advance is the remaining ball timer 203o. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of ejected pieces match. (S1707 in FIG. 51). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that fact. Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the game ball is jammed in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65, an impact or the like is given at the start timing of the 14th round, and the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual one, and the jackpot B, Even if it is a jackpot E, it is possible to suppress fraud in passing a game ball through the probability change switch 65e3.

If the number of prizes and the number of discharges do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h is set even if the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3. The configuration may not be set to on. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probabilistic gaming state ST3 from being illegally given.

The probability change effective flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. When the probability change effective flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball flowing into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is the probability change switch 65e3 based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass through. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The probability change effective timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability change effective flag 203p is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability change effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the probability change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability change effective timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the probability change switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined to be invalid and is not determined to be passed.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the ball is entered into the special discharge port 65e2 and the game ball is passed through the probability change switch 65e3, or the game is played with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as pushing up a ball to pass it or causing a magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1711 in FIG. 51).

The time saving counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving gaming state ST1h. The time reduction counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the present embodiment, if the probabilistic game state ST3 is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the time-saving game state ST1h 100 times.

The jackpot flag 203u indicates that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on winning the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640 is a hit at the start of fluctuation. A flag that is set to on when determined. In addition, it is set to off when the jackpot game is completed. It is composed of a flag that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, and "10" sets the jackpot flag 203u on for the first special symbol, and "01" sets the jackpot flag 203u for the second special symbol. At "00", the jackpot flag 203u is set as off.

Here, since the jackpot flag 203u is commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to be on first at the start of fluctuation. If so, even if the other lottery result is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as a loss. As a result, it is possible to process the first special symbol and the second special symbol so that the variable display that becomes a big hit is not executed at the same time.

That is, when the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit is started in one of the special symbols, the fluctuation display that becomes a big hit is not started in the other, and only the out-of-order fluctuation mode is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured, but the present invention is not limited to this, and independent jackpot flags are set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to execute the variable display that becomes a big hit at the same time. With such a configuration, even if the fluctuation display of the jackpot B and the jackpot E is started in the first special symbol during the probabilistic game state ST3, the fluctuation time is set long and the second special By configuring the symbols to be easily drawn in a short fluctuation time, it is possible to easily configure the second special symbol to win the jackpot before the jackpot B starts. Therefore, an effect of notifying the player of the time until the jackpot B starts (that is, the period until the probability variation game state ST3 ends) is executed, and the player is hurriedly hit the jackpot with the second special symbol. You can perform a production that lets you play a game in an attempt to win. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is a flag indicating that the jackpot game of the second special symbol is started to be executed while the first special symbol is variablely displayed. It is set to ON in S1004 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 36, S207) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Further, it is set to off in the process of S611 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204).

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variablely displayed. It is set to ON in S605 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Further, it is set to off in the process of S1011 in the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 36, S207).

The look-ahead hold storage area 203x stores discrimination information such as a hit / fail judgment result, a jackpot type, and a variation type for the hold ball stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. It is a storage area to be stored.

The small hit flag 203y is a flag indicating that the hit / fail determination result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. The small hit flag is configured to be able to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to be a small hit at the same time (if one is a small hit, the other is a miss). Therefore, the small hit flag 203y does not have a value indicating that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are small hits.

The time saving flag 203a2 is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol (electric support state, high probability gaming state of the normal symbol). If the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state (electric support state) of the special symbol, and if the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol. Indicates a state (a low-probability state of a normal symbol). The initial value of the time saving flag 203a2 is set to off, and is set to on at the end of the jackpot type jackpot game with electric support in the ending process (see FIG. 48) executed at the end of the jackpot game. (See S1654 in FIG. 48). Then, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving (electric support) state in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 41) (see S1208 and S1214 in FIG. 41), and the next jackpot game is started. (S607 in FIG. 29, S1007 in FIG. 36), or when the number of lottery of special symbols in the time saving (electric support) state reaches a predetermined number (see S628 in FIG. 30), it is set to off.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the first specific winning opening 65a, and an electric motor. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker or the like (not shown)) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect (a variable display effect). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a vibration sensor 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it displays in the order of winning displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The voice output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed so that the reserved symbol display being displayed is rearranged and displayed in the variable display start order.

A vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since winning a prize at the starting opening is an important factor for determining the game state, it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration to prevent the winning opening from being intentionally won. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

<Electrical configuration of audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. At least the variation pattern selection table 222a is set in the ROM 222.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the detailed contents of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The variation pattern selection table 222a has a plurality of types of variation contents (for example, variation) corresponding to the variation time and the rough variation pattern (reach, non-reach, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. One variation content is determined from the reach variation patterns of different display contents from reach A to D, which are composed of the same time and the same determination result.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (b). FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, and a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f. , Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, effect counter 223j, slave state setting area 223k, and other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The prize information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and each of these areas has. Stores each prize information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variation) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. (Display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c manages the reserved ball number. It has become like.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631, or in the main control device 110, in a special symbol. When the fluctuation display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display hold ball number command, the display control device 114 holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is based on the reserved ball number command in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main controller 110 to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Since it is different only in that it is memorized, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. It should be noted that each time the main process is executed, one is added and updated.

In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110 is set. The current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223h. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3). It has a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided with. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

In the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) is pressed when the power is turned on (power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)). In this case, it is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects the winning of a special symbol or a normal symbol, and executes control processing such as various lottery such as selection of a winning or fluctuating pattern for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably control the pachinko machine 10, the lottery for whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting as in the present embodiment is sub-controlled. The control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by performing the operation by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

The control board of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is covered with a box called a board box, which is composed of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is crimped by a member for preventing fraud called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted to each other, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (or By doing so, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member unless there is a method that leaves an opening mark, such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. There is.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

In the following, the MPU 231 and the ROM 234 and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234.

As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. Further, the ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 at any time, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured to enable variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, among the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the 7-segment LED on the left side executes the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, and the 7 on the right side. In the segment LED, the variation display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 51. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b is executed. The through-gate passage process associated with the passage of the sphere in is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) and the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 23, S104) makes various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and displays the determined variation by predetermined control. In the embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously control the variable display, or control the stop display in the display mode showing the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 23, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 23, S104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not being achieved (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the variation display of the first special symbol is in progress (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display elapses, the processing of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Will be done. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), the second special symbol is variable-stopped with a symbol indicating a big hit (or small hit), and the big hit game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol during the variable display is executed. When the second special symbol is stopped fluctuating with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the fluctuation of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variation display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start processing is executed (S203). In the first special symbol change start process (S203), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection process based on the hold data are performed. Is executed. Further, in the first special symbol change start processing (S203), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. As a result, during execution of the variation display based on the big hit (or small hit) of the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol is controlled to be an out-of-order variation display. The first special symbol change start processing (S203) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. When the second special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), if the fluctuation of the first special symbol being displayed is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is interrupted (temporarily stopped). It may be configured to perform the process of restarting the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped).

After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is in the variation display (S205). If it is determined that the second special symbol is being displayed in variation (S205: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed. The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) will be described in detail later, but similarly to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed. , The process of stopping the variable display is executed with the symbol showing the determination result of the second lottery game. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped fluctuating with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) and the big hit game (or small hit game) of the first lottery game is executed, the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is changed. The process of forcibly stopping is executed. When the first special symbol is stopped fluctuating with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), the fluctuation of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). The details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not being displayed in the variation (S205: No), the second special symbol variation start processing is executed (S206). In the second special symbol change start process (S206), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection process based on the hold data are performed. Is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change start processing (S206), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. As a result, during execution of the variation display based on the big hit (or small hit) of the second special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol is controlled to be an out-of-order variation display. The second special symbol change start processing (S206) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35. When the first special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit), if the fluctuation of the second special symbol being displayed is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is interrupted (temporarily stopped). It may be configured to perform the process of restarting the variable display of the second special symbol that has been temporarily stopped).

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S203).

In the first special symbol change start processing (FIG. 24, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1. S303). A process is performed in which the data stored in the hold areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 24, S305) will be described in detail later, but based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Based on the set game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) will be described in detail later, but the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S203), will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state ST3 (during probabilistic change) (S402). Whether or not the game state is the probability change game state ST3 is determined by whether or not the probability change flag 203g is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (that is, the game state is the probability change game state ST3 (during probability change)) (S402: Yes), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) is displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for high probability, and the lottery result is acquired (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (not during probability variation)) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (FIG. 15A). Based on (see), it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for low probability, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

When the processing of S403 or S404 is completed, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on (S405). Here, when the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is set to ON, it indicates that the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit is started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, by using the jackpot flag 203u (and the small hit flag 203y) in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can simultaneously receive a jackpot. It is configured so that the fluctuation is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that big hits (or small hits) are continuously generated in a short time and the loss on the amusement store side becomes excessively large. In addition, when the fluctuation which becomes a big hit or a small hit is started in the 2nd special symbol, the process of the 1st special symbol is skipped without drawing the 1st special symbol (skipping the processing of S402 to S404). The variation display based on the deviation (Special Figure 1 deviation variation processing (S410)) may be executed. As a result, the lottery process (processes S402 to S404) can be skipped, so that the processing load can be reduced.

In S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off, that is, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the big hit or the small hit has not been started in the second special symbol (S405: No). ), It is determined whether the lottery result executed in the process of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203u is set to on for the first special symbol (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery result) is set as a jackpot (S408), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set as the value of the jackpot type counter C1. It is set based on the game state (S409). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y for the second special symbol is on (S405: Yes), or in the processing of S406, it is determined that the lottery result is out of order. In the case (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation processing is executed (S410). The special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S410) will be described with reference to FIG. 26, but the setting of the deviation symbol when the lottery result of the first special symbol is deviation is executed.

In this way, even if the lottery result based on the value of the first random number C1 actually acquired is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is already set to on, that is, the first 2 When a fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit is started by a special symbol, a setting that is forcibly missed is executed in the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the fluctuations that become big hits (or small hits) are not executed at the same time, and the big hits (or small hits) are continuously obtained in a short period of time. It is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation is started and the damage on the amusement store side becomes excessively large. Further, by executing the big hit (or small hit) simultaneously or continuously, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the fluctuation that becomes a big hit is not executed at the same time, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to be executed at the same time. In this case, a dedicated jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, when the jackpot game is executed with the other special symbol, in the fluctuation of one special symbol, the measurement of the fluctuation time is temporarily stopped, and the special symbol is simulated. , It is conceivable to configure it to temporarily stop.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S410), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 1 deviation processing (S410). In the special figure 1 deviation processing (FIG. 26, S410), first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on for the second special symbol (S412). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on (S412: Yes), the first symbol display device 37 is set to the off symbol of the first special symbol (S416). After that, this process ends. In this way, when a big hit or a small hit is set for the second special symbol, the off symbol is forcibly set for the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously executed with a big hit or a small hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S411, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off for the second special symbol (S411: No), it is currently determined whether the lottery result is a small hit. The determination is made based on the game state of the above and the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) (S412). If it is determined that the hit is not a small hit in the process of S412 (S412: No), the lottery result is out of order, so the process of S416 is executed and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S412, when it is determined that it is a small hit (S412: Yes), the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S413). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a small hit (S414), and the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S415). After that, this process ends.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203u is set to ON in the process of S407 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 25).

When it is determined in the process of S501 that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the current gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, latent probability changing gaming state ST2, probability changing gaming state ST3, The variation pattern selection table 202e according to any one of the time-saving gaming states ST1h) is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16A to 16C) corresponding to the set gaming state and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2. (S503). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern selection table 202e set in the process of S502 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S504). A special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S504 (S505). After that, the process of S507 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (that is, the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the special figure 1 is out. The variation pattern selection process is executed (S506).

Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process (S506) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process (S506). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S506), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S511). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S511). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is on (S511: Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern is set (S512). In the case of a small hit, one type of fluctuation pattern is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) is set. When the processing of S512 is completed, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command indicating the small hit is set (S513). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is a miss) (S511: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (FIG. 17 and FIG. 18) are set (S514). From the set variation pattern selection table, the deviation pattern is selected based on the hit / fail determination result (disappearance) and the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 (S515). The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation pattern (S516). After that, this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. After executing the process of S505 or the special figure 1 deviation pattern selection process (FIGS. 28, S506), the process of S507 is executed. In the process of S507, a state command indicating the current gaming state is set (S507). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 22, S104), will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S204).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: Yes), the jackpot flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is determined whether or not it is set to (S602). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S603). Although not shown, when the process of S603 is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on is set.

When the processing of S603 is completed, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S604). Then, the start of the jackpot game based on the selected jackpot type is set (S605). After that, the time saving counter 203t is reset to the initial value 0 (S606), and the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203a2 are set to off (S607). Next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S608). A process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S609), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fluctuation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: No), then whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is turned on. Determine (S610). If it is determined in the process of S610 that the fluctuation stop flag 203v in FIG. 1 is off (S610: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S610 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is on (S610 in FIG. 29), it means that the second special symbol is stopped by a big hit or a small hit. The processes of S611 and S612 are executed in order to stop the fluctuation based on the first special symbol. In the process of S611, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to off, and the process proceeds to the process of S612.

In S612, the special figure 1 disengagement stop process for displaying the first special symbol in a disengaged manner is executed. In the process of S602 described above, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is off for the special figure 1 (S602: No), similarly, the special figure for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in an out-of-order manner. 1 Disengagement stop processing is executed (S612). When the processing of S612 is completed, the main processing is completed.

As described above, in the first special symbol stop processing (S204), when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed (S601: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is used. The process of stopping the variation display (S603 to S609 or S612) is executed. Further, when the second special symbol is stopped from fluctuating with a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) and the big hit game (or small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the variable display is displayed. The process (S612) of forcibly stopping the first special symbol is executed. When the first special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small hit) (S610: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol being displayed is interrupted (temporarily stopped). You may.

Here, with reference to FIG. 30, the special drawing 1 disengagement stop process (S612) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 1 disengagement stop process (S612). In the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S612), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S621). Special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S622). Then, a special 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (indicating that the special figure 2 is forcibly stopped fluctuating) is set (S623). The start of the small hit game is set (S624). After that, the process of S625 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S621, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is off for the first special symbol (S621: No), the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order, so S622. Skips the process of S624 and shifts to the process of S625. In the process of S625, it is determined whether or not the time saving counter 203t has a value larger than 0 (S625). In the process of S625, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203t is larger than 0 (S625: Yes), the time saving counter 203t is subtracted by 1 and updated (S626), and whether the time saving counter 203t after the subtraction is 0. Whether or not it is determined (S627). In the process of S627, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S627: Yes), it means that the time saving game state ST1h ends. Therefore, the time saving flag 203a2 is set to off (S628), and S629. Move to the processing of.

On the other hand, in the processing of S627, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203t after subtraction is not 0 (greater than 0) (S627; No), the time saving game state ST1h continues, so the processing of S628 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S629.

In the process of S629, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S629). A process of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed (dynamically displayed) on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S630). After that, this process is executed. Here, after returning to FIG. 29 and executing the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S608), this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time, but when the first special symbol is changed and stopped by the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit, the second special symbol is displayed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to on so as to execute the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol. On the other hand, as will be described later, when the second special symbol is stopped to fluctuate due to the lottery result of a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol is stopped by setting the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v to ON. It is forcibly executed. As a result, simultaneous fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be efficiently executed.

In addition, if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has already started a fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly removed as a result of determining whether or not it is a hit. The variable display is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuous forced execution of big hits and small hits, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the gambling becomes too high.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S206).

In the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 31, S206), the number of first special symbol hold balls in each process from S301 to S306 is compared with the above-mentioned first special symbol change start process (FIGS. 24 and S203). The counter 203d, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306) In each process from S701 to S706, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and the second special symbol jackpot determination process. (S705) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) are the same except that they are changed, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705).

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 32, S705) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305) in the following points. In the processing of S801 corresponding to the processing of S401, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and in the processing of S408. In the corresponding processing of S808, the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to the special drawing 2 (second special symbol), and in the processing of S809 and S810 corresponding to the processing of S409 and S410, the first They differ in that the special symbol is changed to the second special symbol. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S810 and FIG. 33 in FIG. 32) executed in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 32) is the same as the special figure 1 deviation variation process (see FIG. 26) described above. Since the process of is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 34, S706) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each process of S906 to S907 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 22, S104), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 29 and S204) in the following points. In the process of S1002 corresponding to the process of S602, "for special figure 1" is changed to "for special figure 2", and in the process of S1003 corresponding to the process of S603, special figure 2 The point that the variable stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 variable stop flag, the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command in the processing of S1004 corresponding to the processing of S604, and S609 and In the processing of S1009 and S1010 corresponding to the processing of S610, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag, and in the processing of S1011 corresponding to S611, the special figure 1 deviation stop processing is special. FIG. 2 is different from each other in that it is changed to the off-stop processing. Since the other points are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1011, FIG. 37 in FIG. 36) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36) is also the same as the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 30) described above. Since the process of is executed for the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In this embodiment, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed as a stop display for a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. It is possible to grasp that it is not, and to play a big hit game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIGS. 38, S105) determines whether the game ball has won a prize in any of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640, and if it wins, it is held. Up to the maximum number (up to 4 for each of the 1st start port 630, the right 1st start port 631, and the 2nd start port 640), the acquired counter values are set to the 1st special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the 2nd special symbol. This is a process of storing each in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a Alternatively, a process of predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Hereinafter, the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) will be described.

In the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 which is the first starting port (S1101). Here, winning a prize in the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 (there was a starting prize) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set. Acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 (that is, whether the number of reserved pieces is stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1104). A hold ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of hold balls is set (S1105). Each value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 which are various counter values is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls (S1106).

Next, the first look-ahead process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead process (S1107) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 39, but the hit / fail determination result and the fluctuation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a , The process of determining the stop type, etc. is executed.

Next, for each process from S1108 to S1114, the winning of the game ball to the first start port (first start port 630 and right first start port 631) executed in each process from S110 to S1107. Since the same process as the process performed in the above process is different only in that the process is executed for the second starting port 640, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the first look-ahead process (S1107), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first look-ahead process (S1107).

In the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 39, S1107), first, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, are generated. Each value of C2 and the variation type counter CS1 is read out (S1121). The read data is stored in the vacant storage area of the look-ahead hold storage area 203x in the area with the smallest winning order (S1122).

The hit / fail determination result is determined based on the data stored in the read-ahead hold storage area 203x. It should be noted that the winning / failing determination result determined here is determined in the case of winning in the normal game state ST1. Since the fluctuation time is variably set according to the number of holdings, the timing at which the fluctuation starts cannot be determined between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that it is not possible to accurately determine the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, the hit / fail determination result can be accurately determined only when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 which has the same jackpot determination value in both the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state is "7". Therefore, in the process of S1123, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a hit during the normal game state ST1.

In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit (S1123: Yes), the first special symbol is a big hit, and the first winning command indicating the big hit type is set. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1123 that the result of the winning / failing determination is incorrect (S1123: No), the first winning command indicating that the pre-reading lottery result of the first special symbol is incorrect is set (S1125). .. After that, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port (first starting port 630 or right first starting port 631) and is newly held and stored, the information held and stored is used. Based on this, the hit / fail determination result is determined before the start of fluctuation and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the reserved sphere can be changed (for example, the color of the reserved sphere can be changed to a different color from the usual one) based on the hold-stored hit / fail judgment result, or before the fluctuation starts. It is possible to perform an effect of displaying a notice symbol or the like and suggesting a winning / failing judgment result to the player.

In the present embodiment, in the case of pre-reading, the winning / failing determination is determined as the normal gaming state ST1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is accurately determined and the winning / failing determination is made based on the gaming state. It may be configured to run. In this case, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is not variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by configuring so that a constant fluctuation pattern is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of fluctuation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the reserved ball starts to fluctuate based on the information stored in the reservation.

Next, the second look-ahead process (S1114), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105), will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this second look-ahead process (S1114).

The second look-ahead process (FIG. 40, S1114) is based on the above-mentioned first look-ahead process (FIG. 39, S1107) winning a prize in the first start port (first start port 630 or right first start port 631). In contrast to the process of pre-reading the hold data in advance and making various judgments, the process is the process of pre-reading the hold data based on winning the second start port 640 and making various judgments. Since the same processing is executed only for differences, detailed description will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed at the same time. When a variable display that is a big hit or a small hit is executed in one special symbol, the variable display that is out of order is forcibly executed in the other special symbol. Therefore, in the first look-ahead process or the second look-ahead process described above, when the lottery result is read ahead, it may be configured to determine whether or not the lottery result is forcibly deviated. In this way, for example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is pre-read, the period (time) during which the dynamic display of the pre-read lottery result is executed is calculated. Then, it may be determined whether or not the fluctuation that becomes the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol is executed during the period when the dynamic display is executed. If the lottery result is out of order, it will be out of order regardless of the execution state of the second special symbol, so it may not be determined. As a result, the processing load due to the above-mentioned determination can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The ordinary symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 88, the opening time of the first ordinary electric accessory 632, and the like.

In this ordinary symbol variation processing (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting the ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S1201). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 to the middle of the opening / closing control of the first ordinary electric accessory 632. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S1220). .. The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S1219, which will be described later, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 88.

In the process of S1220, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1220: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1220, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be variablely displayed has elapsed (S1220: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1221). In the process of S1221, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S1213, the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol. ) To be set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode at the time of the miss is set by the process of S1218, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol. Set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S1221, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second symbol in the display mode set in the process of S1213 and the process of S1218. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S1222). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S1222: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is set (S1223). On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is out of order (S1222: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the variable display (S1202: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S1203).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1204). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S1204: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S1205).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). In the process of S1206, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1207).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether or not the time saving gaming state ST1h or the probability variation gaming state ST3 is set (S1208). In the process of S1208, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is off (S1208: No), based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)) for the low probability time. The hit / fail determination result is acquired (S1211). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is on (S1208: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1209). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1209: Yes), the process of S1211 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1209: No), the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15 (c)) for high probability. Based on the above, the hit / fail determination result is acquired (S1210).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1212). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is a miss) (S1212: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of the miss is set. (S1218). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined to be a hit (that is, a hit) (S1212: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode at the time of hit, is displayed. It is set (S1213).

It is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether or not the time saving game state ST1h or the probability variation game state ST3 is set (S1214). If it is determined in the process of S1214 that the time saving flag 203a2 is off (S1214: No), the process of S1217 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is on (S1214: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot (S1215). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot, the process of S1216 is executed.

In the process of S1216, the opening time of the guiding members (left guiding member 632a and right guiding member 632b) of the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is set to 1 s and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1216). On the other hand, in the process of S1215, when it is determined that the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (that is, it is in a low probability gaming state) (S1215: Yes), the first ordinary electric combination The opening time of the blades of the object 632 is set to 0.2 s, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1217).

When any one of S1216 to S1218 is completed, next, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 is determined from the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f (S1219), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal map is determined from the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 19) based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 19, in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f, a variation pattern of a normal symbol is set corresponding to each gaming state. Except for the probabilistic game state ST3 (probability change: with electric support), there is only one type of fluctuation pattern, and the same fluctuation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. On the other hand, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state ST3, the determination value "0 to 190" determines the fluctuation time of 3000 ms, and the determination value "191 to 198" determines the fluctuation time of 30,000 ms.

As a result, in the probabilistic game state ST3, a longer fluctuation time than in other cases is selected with a probability of 8/199. When this long fluctuation time is selected, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not operated until the fluctuation time elapses. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 640 is arranged below the first ordinary electric accessory 632, and when the first ordinary electric accessory 632 operates, the left guide member 632a starts the second. The flow path that can win a prize to the mouth 640 is blocked. Therefore, in the meantime, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 640 is regulated.

Here, as described above, when a fluctuation time (30000 ms) with a long fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, the first normal electric accessory 632 does not operate during that time, so right-handed during that time. Approximately 85% of the game balls played will win a prize at the second starting port 640. Therefore, the number of winnings to the second starting port 640 can be increased by selecting a long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the probability variation game state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 16C, during the probabilistic game state ST3, the jackpot D is always selected when the second special symbol hits, which is more advantageous than the jackpot with the first special symbol. Is selected. Therefore, in the probabilistic game state ST3, the lottery with the second special symbol can be more advantageous to the player when the big hit is obtained than the lottery with the first special symbol. Therefore, by increasing the winning of the second starting port 640 during the probabilistic gaming state ST3, it is possible to give the player an advantageous period.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and determines whether the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. , This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 when the game ball has passed.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 42, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301). Here, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S1302). .. In the process of S1302, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S1302: Yes), it means that the right-handed game is executed even though the gaming state is the normal gaming state. The indicated notification command is set, and the process proceeds to S1304. If a notification command indicating a firing abnormality is set, this process may be terminated as it is, and the lottery for normal symbols may not be performed.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the normal gaming state (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1304. In the process of S1304, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1304). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1305).

Whether the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: No), or the ball has passed through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b. Even if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S1305: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first normal symbol start port 67a or the second normal symbol start port 67b (S1301: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1305). : Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S1306). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free hold areas (normal symbol hold 1 to normal symbol hold 4) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S1307). In the process of S1307, the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol hold 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of normal symbol hold 2 is set, if the value is 2, the area of normal symbol hold 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the area of normal symbol hold 4 is set first. Area.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1401) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 44), first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1501). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1502). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1503).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1504), and if it is turned on (S1504: Yes), the process shifts to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), it is further determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505), and if it is not stored. (S1505: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1512 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1506), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1507: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1512 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1512, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1512). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1513, S1514) is executed.

In addition, the initialization process (S1513, S1514) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1513, S1514), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1513), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1514). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1510.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1504: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1505: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is stored. If it is normal (S1507: Yes), the power off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1508). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1510. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1510). After that, interrupts are permitted (S1511). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (S1600) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process (S1600) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process (S1600). In this main process (S1600), the counter update process and the power off time process are roughly classified.

In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is input to each of the sub-sides. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603) and executed. After the process of S1253 is executed, the probability variation setting process is executed (S1254). This probability variation setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, but when the jackpot A or jackpot C is executed, the game ball enters the second specific entry port (not shown). When it is determined whether or not the ball has been hit and the ball is entered, a process of setting data indicating that the game state after the big hit game is set in the probability change game state ST3 is executed in the state setting area after the big hit.

When the probability change setting process (S1254) is executed, the jackpot control process is executed (S1255). The jackpot control process (S1255) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43, but a process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the jackpot game process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S1256). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S1256), the opening / closing process of the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is executed. After that, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1258). Briefly, on condition that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is used. The second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process is shifted to S1251 and each process after S1251 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1260: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1261, S1262).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1252 (S1262).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1256, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1263 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1264). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1265), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1259 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1251 to S1258, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1251. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1251 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1301) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1251 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (FIG. 45, S1600), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) of the above (S1601) is executed. Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 23) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 38) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 46) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first 1 The jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1604). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the first specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a specified number of balls have won a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a. Is determined. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the first ordinary electric accessory 632 attached to the right first starting port 631 is executed (S1605). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1225 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1216, the processing of S1217, and the processing of S1220 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1606). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), it corresponds to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31) ends. , The variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is set in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S310 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 65). ) Is stopped and displayed (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1607). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1220 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1223 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) in the display mode set by the process of S1212 or the process of S1223 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41). ).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1609). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1609: Yes), the process is shifted to S1601, and each process after S1601 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1609: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1610, S1611).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1610). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1602 (S1611).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1601 to S1607 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1608, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 43 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1612 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1612), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1613). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1614), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1615), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1608 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1601 to S1607, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1610 and S1611 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1601. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1601 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1501) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1601 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1604) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1604). This jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed, and the first This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot or a small hit of a special symbol is started (S1621). Specifically, S606 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 29), S1006 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 36), or S624 of the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (see FIG. 30). If the process of S1024 of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 37) is executed and the start of the big hit or small hit of the special symbol is set, the big hit or small hit of the special symbol is started. judge. In the process of S1621, when a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol is started (S1621: Yes), an opening command is set (S1622), and this process is terminated.

The opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) and transmitted according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated regularly (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the jackpot or small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpot A and 5000 for jackpot B). If this happens, the opening command should be sent. By doing so, for example, in the case of a big hit in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is lengthened, and in the case of a big hit in the right-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is increased. Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, it is possible to secure a sufficient time to switch to a right-handed game (big hit game). As a result, the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S1621, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S1621: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is in the big hit or the small hit (S1623). As for the big hit or small hit of the special symbol, it is said that the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). , During the predetermined time after the jackpot game of the special symbol is completed. In the process of S1623, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1623: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1624). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1624: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1625). The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1625) will be described with reference to FIG. 47, but the opening setting to the first variable winning device 65 and the probabilistic solenoid in each round corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

The jackpot operation setting process (S1625), which is one of the jackpot control processes (FIG. 46, S1604), will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S1625). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 47, S1625), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is set is read (S1641). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1641 (S1642). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 4) of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of S1641. After that, this process ends.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the small hit game, the operation of the probabilistic solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set. The small hit is composed of two rounds, and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for one second in each round.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1624, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1624: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability solenoid) 65k (S1626). When it is determined that the operation timing is reached (S1626: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1627). After that, the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1628). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1626, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1626: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1630), and this process ends.

In the process of S1629, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1631). The end timing of the jackpot is specifically the end timing of the set ending effect. If it is determined in the process of S1631 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S1631: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the end of the jackpot is executed (S1632), and this process is performed. To finish.

Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of this jackpot end processing (S1632) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 48, S1632). In the ending process (FIG. 48, S1632), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is ON (S1651). If it is determined in the process of S1651 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1651: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (S1652), and the process proceeds to the process of S1653. Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to on.

In the process of S1653, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a type with electric support (big hit C) (S1653). In the process of S1653, if it is determined that the jackpot type is a type with electric support (S1653: Yes), the time saving flag 203a2 is set to ON (S1654), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1653, if it is determined that the jackpot type is not the type with electric support (big hit C) (S1653: No), the process of S1654 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of S1651 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1651: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot E (S1655). If it is determined in the process of S1655 that the jackpot type is jackpot E (S1655: Yes), 100 is set in the time reduction counter 203t (S1656), the process of S1654 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1655, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot E, the processes of S1656 and S1654 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball is passing through the probability change switch 65e3 and set the high probability game state. Therefore, it is possible to keep expecting the player to shift to the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) until the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high probability gaming state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is given after the jackpot game, so that even during the jackpot game. The game can be played with an interest in whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1631 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1631: No), the notification process is executed (S1633). Here, the details of the notification process (S1633) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification process (S1633).

In the notification process (S1633), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1661). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1661: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the 13th round (S1662). The determination of the end timing of the 13th round is performed depending on the case where it is detected that 10 balls have been won or the case where it is determined that 30 seconds have passed in the 13th round. When it is determined that the end timing of the 13th round is reached (S1662: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m (S1663), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1662, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the 13th round (S1662: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting the counter for 2 seconds in the processing of S1663, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during the 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball ejection time after the 13th round is completed, and the liquid crystal is viewed. Audio is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 14th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 13th round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is identified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the probabilistic game state ST3 will be given until the end of the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203 m, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 14th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time, but the effect is not limited to this, and from the 13th round. It may be executed continuously.

On the other hand, in the process of S1661, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is larger than 0 (S1661: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is subtracted by 1 and updated (S1664). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665: Yes), the notification command is set (S1666). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the voice output "Look at the liquid crystal".

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 49, S1633) is completed, the winning process is executed (S1634). Here, the winning process (S1634) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1634).

In the winning process (FIG. 50, S1634), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1671). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the opening / closing door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1671: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1671: Yes), it is determined whether or not the detection switch 65c1 of the first specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the first specific winning opening 65a has been passed (S1672: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1673). After that, the process of S1674 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 has not passed (S1672: No), the process of S1674 is executed.

In the process of S1674, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first specific winning opening 65a is set (S1676). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1677). After that, the process of S1678 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball ejection time has been in progress since the opening / closing door 65f1 was closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1674, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1675). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1675: Yes), the process of S1676 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1675: No), the process of S1678 is executed.

In the process of S1678, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1678). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S1678: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by -1 and updated (S1679). It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680: Yes), the value of the probability change passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated (S1681). The probability variation setting flag 203h is set to on (S1682). After that, the process of S1683 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1680, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (S1680: No), the process of S1683 is executed. In the process of S1683, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1683). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S1684). The probability variation valid flag 203p is set to on (S1685). After that, this process ends. Here, by setting the probability change effective flag 203p to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special discharge port 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change game Can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1678, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1678: No), it is determined whether the probability variation effective flag 203p is ON (S1686). If the probabilistic valid flag 203p is off (S1686: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation effective flag 203p is on (S1686: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation effective timer 203r to update (S1687). It is determined whether the value of the probabilistic valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S1688). When it is determined that the probability change effective timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1688: Yes), the probability change effective flag 203p is set to off (S1689). The probability change effective timer 203r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1690). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1688, when it is determined that the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1688: No), the process of S1680 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variation effective timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state ST3 can be set in consideration of the ball brushing time. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for determining the validity, it is possible to prevent the probability change game state ST3 from being illegally passed through the probability change switch 65e3.

Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 50, S1634) is completed, the abnormal process is then executed (S1635), and the present process is completed. Here, the abnormality processing (S1635) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1635). This abnormality processing (S1635) is a processing for monitoring whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 is illegally passed.

In the abnormality handling (FIG. 51, S1635), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S1701). If it is outside the round validity period (S1701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1703). After that, the process of S1704 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702: No), the process of S1704 is executed.

In the process of S1704, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1704: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated (S1705) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1706). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S1706: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1706: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the number of discharge counters 203s) and the number of prizes (the value of the number of prize counters 203j) match. (S1707).

If it is determined that they match (S1707: Yes), the process of S1709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1707: No), an error command is set (S1708). After that, the process of S1709 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the first variable winning device 65 and suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 even if it is a jackpot B.

In the process of S1709, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1709), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to the initial value 0 (S1710). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values (S1711), and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 61, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2116 (see FIG. 53) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see FIGS. 53 and S2113), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2116. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S2116 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S2116, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2116 is executed (see FIGS. 53 and S2115). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2116 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S2011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S2008 via the processes of S2004 to S2006 is started. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S2009 is that when the processing of S2008 is reached via the processing of S2004 to S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S2101 was executed (S2101), 1 millisecond. If the above has not passed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S2102 to S2110 determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2111 and the variation display setting process of S2112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2101: Yes). S2102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the operation input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). In this operation input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the operation input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). After that, the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the command determination process (S2111) that performs the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2112. Details of this command determination process (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

In the process of S2112, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is generated by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

When the processing of S2112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S2115), and the power-off process is executed (S2116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2111). This command determination process (S2111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. The details of the command determination process (S2111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the main control device 110 Further, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for variablely displaying the first special symbol. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed in order to display the first special symbol in a variable manner (S2202). The special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55, but the setting required for variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Is executed.

Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202) will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S2202). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2202), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (S2241), and the fluctuation pattern (variation) is started from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command. Time) is extracted (S2242). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a detailed display mode of the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S2243). The detailed display mode of the variation pattern selected here is identifiablely stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation display setting process described later (FIGS. 61, S2112). Is used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. ..

When the processing of S2243 is completed, it is next determined whether the current gaming state is the latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 (gaming state without probabilistic transformation support) (S2244). When it is determined that the game state is other than the latent probability change game state ST2 (S2244: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2244, when it is determined that the latent probability change game state ST2 is (S2244: Yes), the lottery result of the change of the first special symbol that starts to change is the jackpot E (15R normal jackpot: electric support 100 It is determined whether the fluctuation is (S2245). If it is determined that the fluctuation does not result in a jackpot E (S2245: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation is a jackpot E (S2245: Yes), the characters indicating the chance zone (see FIGS. 63A to 63B) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2246). ). After that, this process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player because the fluctuation time is set to be long, is set to be short. On the other hand, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is mainly executing the game is set to be long. As a result, when the player shifts to the latent probability change game state ST2, the player strikes right and plays the game so that the game ball wins the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to start changing at the same time. Here, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, in the second special symbol, a high probability game (probability variation) is always given when a big hit is made, but in the first special symbol, when a jackpot is reached, a normal probability game (low probability game) is given. Is configured to be awarded by lottery. Therefore, even if a jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot: no electric support) is given as a jackpot in the first special symbol in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation started in the first special symbol after the jackpot game is the jackpot E. Then, it will immediately shift to the normal game state ST1.

As described above, normally, after shifting to the latent probability variation game state ST2 in which the game is mainly performed by the second special symbol, the third symbol is displayed based on the start of the fluctuation of the jackpot E in the first special symbol. A chance zone (a notification mode indicating a time-saving gaming state ST1h or a probabilistic gaming state ST3) is displayed on the device 81. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the player displays the heaven zone (notification mode indicating that the latent probability change game state ST2 is in the latent probability change game state ST2) on the third symbol display device 81, and thereafter, the player has two big hit games. Recognizes that the high-probability gaming state (probability change) is maintained (highly likely) until is executed. However, in the chance zone, the player is not sure (high expectation) that the probabilistic game state ST3 will be granted even after the next big hit, and there is a possibility that the player is in the time-saving game state ST1h (low probability state). The game will be played while recognizing it.

Therefore, for example, if the player shifts to the latent probability change game state ST2 and the first change of the first special symbol is a big hit E, the heaven zone is normally displayed, but the chance zone is displayed. The Rukoto. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged in a short period of time.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the process of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2202) is executed, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner. Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2203: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204) is executed. The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG. 56.

Here, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing (S2204). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to on (S2301), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S2301). S2302). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a detailed display mode of the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a. The detailed display mode of the variation pattern selected here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and the variation display setting process described later (FIGS. 61, S2112). ), Used when setting a variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol. Be done.

When the processing of S2303 is completed, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state ST3 (gaming state with probabilistic transformation support) (S2204). If the game state is other than the probabilistic game state ST3 (S2304: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state ST3 (S2304: Yes), it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate is a big hit (S2305). Here, the determination is executed by determining whether the variation pattern is a jackpot from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command.

In the process of S2305, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate is a big hit (S2305: Yes), a treasure chest hit notice effect command is set for the display control device 114 (S2306). .. On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect, the treasure box detachment notice effect command is set for the display control device 114 (S2307).

Here, the treasure chest hit notice effect command is a command instructing the third symbol display device 81 to display the display mode shown in FIG. 10A. In the present embodiment, when the probabilistic gaming state ST3 is entered, as shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol is displayed. In the 2 display area Dn, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Here, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the second display area Dn is the symbol of the treasure box, and the display mode shown in FIG. 9 (a) and the display mode shown in FIG. 9 (b). Is repeatedly displayed in a short cycle (for example, every 0.5 seconds), so that it can be displayed as if it is blinking.

Here, when the probability variation game state ST3 is set, the long deviation variation pattern C (18000000ms) is selected if the hit / fail determination result of the second special symbol is incorrect. Therefore, the frequency at which the second special symbol starts to fluctuate becomes extremely low. However, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol that is changing is also forcibly stopped and displayed based on the stop of the fluctuation, and is newly stored after the small hit game. The fluctuation of the holding ball of the second special symbol is started. In this case, the player expects that the second special symbol, which is easier to select the jackpot that is more advantageous than the first special symbol, starts the fluctuation that becomes the jackpot.

When the second special symbol starts to change, as shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b), the treasure box showing the change of the second special symbol is enlarged and displayed in the first display area Dm. .. On the other hand, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn. After that, after the treasure box is displayed in a display mode that vibrates for about 2 seconds, if the treasure box opens and the winning / failing judgment result is a big hit, "Congratulations" from the treasure box as shown in FIG. 10B. Character is displayed, and it is notified that the second special symbol has become a big hit. Then, a notification mode indicating that the probabilistic game state ST3 "continue chance!" Is continuously executed is displayed.

In addition, when the jackpot D is selected when the jackpot in the special figure 2 is obtained in the probability variation game state ST3 (that is, when the probability variation game state ST2 is configured to shift to the latent probability variation game state ST2), the latent probability variation It suffices to display the notification mode (for example, the characters "Entering the heaven zone!") Indicating that the game state ST2 is entered. In this case, it should be configured to display a notification mode instructing to stop the firing of the game ball, such as "Stop firing!". Here, in the probabilistic game state ST3, the game is mainly executed by the first special symbol, but in the latent probabilistic game state ST2, the game is mainly executed by the second special symbol. Is set to. Therefore, when the game ball enters the right first starting port 631 and the reserved ball of the first special symbol is stored, it triggers a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, so stop firing. By instructing, the defect can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), the display that the treasure box is opened is executed as in the case where the hit / fail judgment result is a big hit, and then the hit / fail is displayed from the inside of the treasure box. The characters "Sorry" indicating that the judgment result is incorrect are displayed. After that, when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the display mode is switched to the display modes shown in FIGS. 9A to 9B, and the blinking display is executed until the fluctuation time set in the second special symbol elapses. Will be done.

As a result, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time, the player pays attention to the second special symbol only for a certain period at the start of the change of the second special symbol, and then the player pays attention to the second special symbol. Can pay attention to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the game becomes easy to understand, and the player can play the game comfortably.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S2204), this process ends. When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2205). If it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S2205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception process (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG. 57.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command reception process (S2206). In the stop type command reception process (S2206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on. (S2311). The stop type (big hit A to big hit E, missed, missed reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S2312). The extracted stop type is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is of the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type.

It is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313). If the gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal gaming state ST1, this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313: Yes), it is determined whether the stop type is jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot: no electric support) (S2314). If it is determined that the stop type is other than the jackpot A (S2314: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type is jackpot A (S2314: Yes), the area with the earliest digestion order of the hold 1 (first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a) of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The hit / fail determination result of the reserved ball stored in) is determined to be a jackpot E (15 rounds normal jackpot: 100 times of electric support) (S2315). Here, the jackpot random value of the corresponding reserved ball notified by the winning command is read from the winning information storage area 223b and determined. Although not shown, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a first random number table 202a (FIG. 15A) and a jackpot type selection table 202d (FIG. 15) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. 16 (a) to (c)) are stored, and based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2 given to the winning command output from the main control device 110. The sound lamp control device 113 can determine the result of the hit / miss determination in the probability change state.

In the process of S2315, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is a determination result other than the jackpot E (S2315: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the jackpot E (S2315: Yes), the characters "Chance zone entry" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the ending of the jackpot game. A display command to be instructed is set for the display control device 114 (S2316). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is not the jackpot E (S2315: No), as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the heaven zone (latent probability variation game state ST2) is entered at the ending of the jackpot game. A display command for displaying the characters "Entering the heaven zone !!" indicating the transition to the third symbol display device 81 is output to the display control device 114 (S2317). After that, this process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the state shifts to the latent probability variation game state ST2, the probability variation game is likely to be continuously set until the jackpot game is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that at least two jackpots have been promised when the characters of the heaven zone are displayed. In addition, since it is configured to be displayed at the ending, which is the end of the jackpot game, the player can play until the end of the jackpot game in anticipation of a transition to the latent probability change game state ST2, improving the interest of the game. it can.

Further, even if the jackpot A is won in the normal game state ST1, if it is determined that the jackpot E is won in the latent probability variation game state ST2 in the hold 1 of the first special symbol, in the ending of the jackpot A, the time saving game state ST1h or Since the characters "Chance zone entry !!" indicating that the game is in the probabilistic game state ST3 are displayed, the player does not recognize that the jackpot game has been confirmed to occur at least twice, and the time-saving game state ST1h It is possible to recognize that the game is in the probabilistic game state ST3 and play the game. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the transition to the latent probability change gaming state ST2 has occurred, and the disappointment of shifting to the time-saving gaming state ST1h in a short time can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the stop type command reception process (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S2305: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110. (S2207). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S2207: Yes), the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command is included. The value of the number counter e (that is, the number of reserved balls for the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted, and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is the voice lamp. The number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the control device 113, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d (S2208).

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640. Whenever there is a start prize, the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 are set to the first special of the main control device 110 by the processing of S2207. It can be adjusted to the values of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 becomes the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Or, even if the value deviates from the value of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected. Then, it can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

If it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received (S2209). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S2209: Yes), the winning command processing is executed (S2210). The details of the winning command processing (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG. 58.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S2210). In the winning command processing (S2210), first, the received winning command information is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S2401). Here, the winning information command is configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be distinguished from each other, and the holding order (number of held balls) and the winning / failing determination result in the normal game state ST1 can be discriminated. ing. Furthermore, the values of various counters acquired at the time of starting winning are also composed of commands that can be discriminated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (S2402). If it is determined in the process of S2402 that the gaming state is not the low-probability gaming state (S2402: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2405. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (that is, the probability change is not in progress) (S2402: Yes), whether or not there is information on the probability change jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b provided in the RAM 223. (S2403). If it is determined in the process of S2403 that there is no information on the probability variation jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: No), the processes of S2403 and S2404 are not executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2405 as it is. On the contrary, when it is determined that the winning information storage area 223b has the information of the probability variation jackpot (S2403: Yes), the notification lottery process (S2404) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2405. The notification lottery process of S2404 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. In the process of S2405, other processes are executed (S2405), and the winning command process is terminated.

Next, this notification lottery process (S2404) will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this notification lottery process (S2404). In the notification lottery process (S2405), first, the value of the effect counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 is acquired (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is a determination value (S2502). If it is determined in the process of S2502 that the value of the effect counter 223j is not the determination value (S2502: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j (counter in the range of 0 to 198) is a determination value (any of "0 to 50" in this embodiment) (S2502: Yes), the third A stop display mode command for displaying the characters "Stop firing !!", which notifies the symbol display device 81 to stop firing the game ball, is set for the display control device 114 (S2503), and this process is performed. To finish.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the winning information that is the probability variation jackpot, that is, the jackpot A is received in the normal game state ST1, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to notify the player to stop firing. Here, when shifting from the normal game state ST1 to the latent probability change game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set short, and the game in the second special symbol is the main game method (the second special symbol is the target of substantial fluctuation). ). However, if the jackpot A is won in the normal game state ST1 and the reserved ball for the first special symbol is stored, a lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed in the first special symbol even during the latent probability change game state ST2. Will be done. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the hold for winning the jackpot A is stored in the normal game state ST1, the notification to stop the firing of the game ball is executed by the lottery, so that the player can play the game ball at an early timing. It is possible to stop the firing of the first starting port 630 and suppress the winning of the first starting port 630. In addition, the player can recognize that the jackpot A will be obtained at an early stage by being notified to suggest that the firing is stopped, and the game can be produced in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, the launch stop notification of the game ball is executed by lottery, but it may be configured to always notify when the reserved ball of the jackpot A is stored.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the winning command process (FIG. 58, S2210), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S2211: Yes), the status command reception process (S2212) is executed. The details of this state command reception process (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

Next, the state command reception process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the state command reception process (S2212).

In the state command receiving process (S2212), first, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the gaming state based on the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2601). Whether or not the game state has been changed is determined by comparing the game state information set in the slave state setting area 223k with the received game state. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to S2602. In the process of S2602, it is determined whether or not to change the gaming state to the normal gaming state ST1 (that is, the time-saving gaming state ST1h) (S2602). When it is determined that the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state ST1 (that is, the time-saving gaming state ST1h) (S2602: Yes), the main display area setting command corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 is set (S2603). Here, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (“○ ×” in the present embodiment) is displayed in the second display area Dn. A display command instructing the display control device 114 is set. A display command for displaying the characters of the "lower bound zone" indicating that the third symbol display device 81 is in the normal game state ST1 is set for the display control device 114 (S2604). After that, the process of S2612 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2602, when it is determined that the game state has been changed to other than the normal game state ST1 (S2602: No), the game state is changed to the latent probability change game state ST2 (game state without probability change support). It is determined (S2605). In the process of S2605, when it is determined that the gaming state has been changed to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (S2605: Yes), the main display area setting command corresponding to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is set (S2606). Here, the display control device 114 is instructed to display the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the first display area Dm and the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the second display area Dn. The display command to be displayed is set. Further, it is set so that the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub display area Dt. To.

Next, the hold 1 of the first special symbol determines from the winning information storage area 223b whether or not the hold information for which the jackpot E is determined is stored (S2607). When the hold information in which the hold 1 of the special figure 1 is other than the jackpot E is stored (S2607: No), the character indicating the heaven zone (see FIG. 62 (b)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Set the display command to be displayed (S2608). After that, the process of S2612 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the jackpot E (S2607: Yes), a display command for displaying the character indicating the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2609). .. After that, the process of S2612 is executed. By the processing of S2607 and S2609, a jackpot E is generated immediately after shifting to the latent probability change state ST2, and when shifting to the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the display indicating the heaven zone can be prevented, so that the player can do so. It is possible to prevent (suppress) excessive disappointment.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2605 that the game state has been changed to a game state other than the latent probability change game state ST2 (that is, the probability change game state ST3) (S2605: No), the probability change game state ST3 (game with probability change electric support) The main display area setting command corresponding to the state) is set for the display control device 114 (S2610). Here, the first display area Dm is the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the second display area Dn is the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (in the present embodiment, the treasure box symbol (FIG. 9A). A display command is set to instruct the display control device 114 so that (see (b))) is displayed.

Then, a display command for displaying the characters of the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2611). After that, the process of S2612 is executed. In the process of S2612, the state of the game state indicated by the received state command is set in the slave state setting area 223k (S2612). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 54. After executing the status command reception process (S2212), it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received (S2213). In the process of S2213, when it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2213: Yes), the voice / lamp notification mode indicated by the received command is set (S2214), and the display corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the received command is set. A command is set (S2215) to end this process. By the processing of S2214, for example, based on the notification command indicating the firing abnormality set and transmitted in the above-mentioned through gate passage processing (see FIG. 42), the notification sound indicating the firing abnormality (“Please hit left!” And voice) is output. Further, by the processing of S2215, for example, based on the notification command indicating the firing abnormality set and transmitted in the above-mentioned through gate passage processing (see FIG. 42), the display indicating the firing abnormality (“Please hit left! ") Is output to the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S2213 that the notification command has not been received (S2213: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2219), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the variation display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2112). This variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is one process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit E), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. 59, S2112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that the process of S2705 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702).

Next, in the process of S2703, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111) is displayed in the other memory area of the RAM 223. Acquired from 223z, a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S2703). The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or a variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command having a 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to.

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S2703 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S2704) in accordance with the fact that the display has been set).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2705). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is not on (that is, off) (S2705: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S2709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S2706). In the process of S2302 of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 55, S2205), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Then, a variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is generated (S2707).

The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S2707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 corresponds to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S2708).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S2709). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i are not set on (that is, off) (S2709: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is on. The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to off (S2710). ).

In the process of S2206 of the command determination process (FIGS. 54 and S2111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S2711). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the stop type (whether it is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot) is given to the display control device 114 based on the stop type. A special display 1 stop type command for notification is generated. If the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, whether the stop type (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) is applied to the display control device 114 based on the stop type. ) Is generated for display special figure 2 stop type command (S2712). The special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and notifies even when the determination result is incorrect. Will be done. If the determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time. Can be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can play the game by switching the special symbol that sets a long fluctuation time with the fluctuation time between the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the transition of the gaming state. It is configured to control the special symbols that are possible. Then, in the latent probability change state ST2, only the big hits in the high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) are set to be drawn by the second special symbol given at the time of the big hit. Even after the jackpot is executed, the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 or probability-changing gaming state ST3) is set again. Therefore, for the player, when the player shifts to the latent probability change game state ST2, the probability change state can be set until the jackpot is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that two jackpots are guaranteed in the latent probability change game state ST2.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not operated, 85% of the right-handed game balls are configured to win a prize in the second starting port 640. Furthermore, in the latent probability change game state ST2, it is set to win a small hit with the second special symbol, and the lottery probability is that about 15% of the right-handed game balls are given to the player as a prize ball. It is set with a probability that it will be paid out in. Therefore, the operation frequency of the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is set low (non-electric support state), and even in the latent probability variation game, the decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed when the right-handed game is played. The game can be played.

Furthermore, if a big hit is made from the latent probability variation game state ST2 with the second special symbol, the probability of transition to the probability variation game state ST3 is 66%. Here, in the probabilistic game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be long and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be short. Then, when a big hit is made with the first special symbol, either a big hit that shifts to the probabilistic gaming state ST3 again or a big hit that shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 is given by lottery. Therefore, the player can play the game in the hope that he will be able to win the big hit twice again. Further, by providing a case where the probabilistic game state ST3 is changed to the normal game state ST1, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high. In the probabilistic game state ST3, the jackpot based on the first special symbol may shift to either the latent probabilistic game state ST2 or the normal game state ST1. As a result, the player plays the game with the expectation that the probabilistic game state ST3 will shift to the latent probabilistic game state ST2 where two jackpots can be obtained again, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Furthermore, in the normal game state ST1, the lottery ratio of the jackpot A to which the latent probability change game state ST2 is given is set lower than the lottery ratio of the jackpot B when the jackpot is mainly played in the first special symbol. , It is possible to increase the difficulty level of transitioning to the latent probability change game state ST2 and suppress the increase in gambling.

In the present embodiment, the game state is switched when the big hit game is executed, but the game state is not limited to this, and the game state can be switched depending on the small hit type even when the small hit game is won. It may be configured as. With this configuration, the small hits can be drawn more easily than the big hits, so that the frequency of switching the game state can be increased. Therefore, even when the gaming state is set to be disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to switch to the advantageous gaming state by winning the small hit, and the player can be expected to win the small hit. Further, even when an advantageous gaming state is set, it is possible to switch to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by making a small hit, and it is possible to suppress gambling.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 86. First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 65 is an enlarged view of an enlarged right side region of the gaming board 13.

In the second embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper right side of the front view of the game board 13, and the ball guidance path forming member 70 is provided on the right side region of the front view of the game board 13. The point provided in the above, the point provided in the lower right decorative member 71 on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 13, and the second ordinary electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 and below the front view of the game board 13. A point provided on the side, a point where the first variable winning device 65 is attached to the lower right decorative member 71, and a normal symbol start port (through) instead of the first normal symbol start port 67a and the second normal symbol start port 67b. The difference is that the gate) 670 is provided on the lower side of the front view of the game board 13 and the right first starting port 631 is deleted. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 64, in addition to the first embodiment, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a ball guiding path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71, and the like. The first starting port 630, the second starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, points added to the first embodiment regarding the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 64.

A through gate 670 is provided on the right side of the game board 13. The through gate 670 is a gate type and is composed of a starting port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the through gate 670, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery held for the passing of the game ball to the through gate 670, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit.

When the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 2), and "○" and "○" and " After the symbols of "x" are alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the ordinary symbols (symbols of "○" or "x" in this embodiment) indicating the lottery result are stopped and displayed (lit).

When it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "○", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol was a hit. When the winning symbol is displayed, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 operates for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). The second ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained in a state of standing upward so as to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 640 in the normal state (non-operating state), while the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is maintained. By operating the object 640a, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (40 degrees in this embodiment), and a state in which the game ball is allowed to enter the second starting port 640 (special state). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of order, the second symbol display device 83 is lit and displayed with "x", which is a symbol indicating that the lottery of the ordinary symbol was out of order. At this time, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the next variation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for entering the balls into the first starting port 630 and the second starting port 640, a hit / fail judgment (big hit lottery) is performed and a judgment of the big hit type is performed. Also do. The details of the jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIG. 74, but as the jackpot type determined here, eight types of jackpot A to jackpot H are used as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is set (see FIG. 74). These eight types of jackpots include the length of the interval time (1 second or 4 seconds), the possibility of V operation, and the presence or absence of electric support after the jackpot game ends (whether the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is easily put into a special state. Whether or not) are combined and set.

Here, the length of the interval time means that the game ball is placed at a predetermined timing (probability change switch) to the first variable winning device 65 provided with the special discharge port (specific area) 65e2 (see FIG. 6) provided with the probability change switch 65e3. It is the length of the interval time set to change whether or not it is possible to guide (whether it is easy or difficult) at the timing (timing when it can pass through 65e3).

The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, but in the present embodiment, the interval time between specific rounds during the jackpot game (the round in which the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes (in the present embodiment). Timing of reaching the first variable winning device 65 by changing the interval time provided between 4R) and the round (5R in this embodiment) in which the first variable winning device 65 opens and closes. Whether or not the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 depending on the timing when the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 (easy or difficult). Is configured so that it can be set.

Whether or not the V operation is possible is whether or not the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6) provided in the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6) (easy or difficult). If V operation is possible, the game ball that won the prize in the first variable winning device 65 is set so that it can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, while V operation is not possible. In this case, the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 is set to be impassable (difficult) to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted. However, in the present embodiment, the operation of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6) provided in the first variable winning device 65. By controlling the above, it is possible to set whether or not V operation is possible.

In the present embodiment, the possibility of V operation is set by driving and controlling the switching member 65h, but it is sufficient as long as it can be set whether or not the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. A lid member that is constantly opened and closed at regular intervals is provided on the upstream side of the passage having the probability change switch 65e3, and a stopper member that retains the game ball is provided further upstream of the lid member. Then, a configuration may be used in which the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 only when the timing at which the stopper member is released and the timing at which the lid member is opened coincide with each other. By using such a configuration, it is possible to make the player know that the lid member is periodically opened, and the player is made to win the game ball in the first variable winning device 65. If this is the case, it is possible to make the player think that there is a possibility of passing through the probability change switch 65e3, which has the effect of increasing the motivation of the game.

In addition, the opening time (opening timing) of the lower attacker (opening / closing door) 65f1 that opens the first specific winning opening 65a is changed to make it difficult for the game ball to win in the first variable winning device 65. It may be possible to set whether or not the sphere can pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

The presence / absence of electric support sets whether or not the second ordinary electric accessory 640a shifts to a state in which it is easy to operate in a special state (electric support state) after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, eight types of jackpot A to jackpot H are set as the jackpot types of the second special symbol (special figure 2) as in the case of the first special symbol (see FIG. 74).

Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged as variable winning devices that are operated in the open state during the jackpot game. The first variable winning device 65 is provided on the lower side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and in the specific round (fifth round in this embodiment) during the jackpot game, the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined period (see FIG. It is operated so as to be opened until a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls (29 seconds in the present embodiment) are inserted (see FIG. 80 (b)).

On the other hand, the second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and is a round other than the specific round during the jackpot game (1st to 4th rounds and 6th to 7th rounds in this embodiment). In, the second specific winning opening 650b is operated so as to be opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds in the present embodiment) or a predetermined number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of game balls are inserted.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game board 13, a ball guidance path forming member 70 for guiding a game ball launched by a right-handed game is assembled to the surface of the game board 13 with a screw. The ball guidance path forming member 70 has an opening 70a, which is an opening through which the game ball launched by the right-handed game can pass, and a plurality of guides that guide the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a to meander and flow down. A game ball in which the members (first guide member (first guide surface) 70b, second guide member (second guide surface) 70c, third guide member (third guide surface) 70d) and the third guide member 70d flow down. The discharge unit 70e is assembled as one unit.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that the positional relationship between the position where the game ball passes (the position of the opening 70a and the discharge part 70e) and the member for guiding the game ball (each guiding member) is deviated. In addition to this, it is possible to suppress a problem that the positional relationship between the guiding members is displaced, and there is an effect that the manufacturing efficiency can be improved in the process of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10.

Below the ball guidance path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71 provided with a first variable winning device 65 is assembled to the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The lower right decorative member 71 includes a fourth guide member (fourth guide surface) 71a that receives a game ball that has rolled on the third guide member 70d of the ball guide path forming member 70, a first variable winning device 65, and the like. The decorative portion 71b is assembled and configured as one unit.

The decorative portion 71b is provided with a decorative lamp (light emitting means) (not shown) so that it can be emphasized that the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state during the jackpot game. Has been done. Specifically, the surface of the decorative portion 71b (the surface that can be seen by the player) is composed of a half mirror, and when the decorative lamp is off, it becomes difficult to see the inside of the first variable winning device, and the first identification is made. When the winning opening 65a is opened, the decorative lamp is turned on so that the inside of the first variable winning device can be visually recognized.

With this configuration, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the player is in a gaming state aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a, and also in a non-gaming state or a normal gaming state (during a big hit game). In a gaming state that is not), the structure inside the first variable winning device 65 can be made invisible (difficult), so that a fraudulent act (for example, a jig dedicated to the first specific winning opening 65a) can be made. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the switching member 65h to be deformed by inserting the.

Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. A ball guidance path 72 is formed in the right region of the game board 13 by the ball guidance path forming member 70 and the fourth guidance member 71a described above. The ball guidance path 72 is configured so that the game ball meanders, and a specific configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 65.

FIG. 65 is an enlarged front view of the right side region of the game board 13. Here, the flow of the game ball in the ball guidance path 72 will be described. First, the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a is received by the first guide member 70b. The first guide member 70b is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the first guide member 70b in the lower right direction. The lower end of the flow of the first guide member 70b is assembled so as to face the second guide member 70c, and the game ball that has flowed down the first guide member 70b falls onto the second guide member 70c.

The second guide member 70c is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the second guide member 70c in the lower left direction. The lower end of the flow of the second guide member 70c is assembled so as to face the third guide member 70d, and the game ball that has flowed down the second guide member 70c falls onto the third guide member 70d.

The third guide member 70d is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction in the front view of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the third guide member 70d in the lower right direction. The lower end of the flow of the third guide member 70d is assembled so as to face the fourth guide member 71a, and the game ball flowing down the third guide member 70d passes through the discharge portion 70e and is placed on the fourth guide member 71a. Fall.

The fourth guide member 71a is attached to the game board 13 so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction when viewed from the front of the game board, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the fourth guide member 71a in the lower left direction. ). The lower end of the flow of the fourth guide member 71a is configured to communicate with the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) of the first variable winning device 65, and the fourth guide is in a closed state when the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. The game ball that has flowed down the member 71a flows down (rolls) on the opening / closing door 65f1 and is discharged to the lower area (the area where the through gate 670 and the second starting port 640 are arranged) of the game board 13. It is composed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 is configured so that the game ball meanders, so that the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72 (guided path passing time) is meandered. It is possible to set it longer than when it is not set.

Further, each guiding member constituting the ball guiding path 72 is configured so that the inclination angle becomes gentler in order from the upstream side. Specifically, the first guide member 70b and the second guide member 70c are set to about 20 degrees, the third guide member 70d is set to about 10 degrees, and the fourth guide member 71a is set to about 5 degrees.

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the game ball on the downstream side of the ball guiding path 72, and open / close communication with the rolling surface of the fourth guiding member 71a and eventually the fourth guiding member 71a. A plurality of game balls can be simultaneously retained (rolled) on the door 65f1.

Therefore, when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, it is possible to win a plurality of game balls in a short period of time.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the game ball is configured to fall between the guiding members on an inclined surface inclined in a direction opposite to the flow direction, the flow speed of the game ball can be efficiently reduced. It is possible.

In the present embodiment, in order to simultaneously retain (roll) a plurality of game balls on the downstream side of the ball guidance path 72, the inclination angle of the guide member is loosened to reduce the flow speed of the game balls. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a material having a high coefficient of friction (urethane or the like) may be attached to the rolling surface of the game ball of the guiding member to reduce the flow speed of the game ball. Further, the guide member (fourth guide member 71a) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72 and the game ball rolling surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 are configured to meander in the depth direction (horizontal direction) when viewed from the front of the game board 13. You may. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the fourth guide is provided so that a step does not occur between the guide surface of the fourth guide member 71a and the surface (guide surface) of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. The member 71a is provided on the lower right decorative member 71, which is formed separately from the ball guide path forming member 70. With this configuration, for example, when the ball guidance path configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is adopted for the pachinko machine 10 in which the shape of the first variable winning device 65 is slightly changed, the fourth guidance member 71a Only by changing the shape to correspond to the shape of the first variable winning device 65, the ball guidance path forming member 70 can be diverted. That is, there is an effect that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, the opening 70a of the ball guidance path 72 described above is located below the second variable winning device 650, and the second specific winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is open (the upper attacker 650b is open). In the open operation state), the game ball is configured so as not to pass through the opening 70a (difficult).

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but in the present embodiment, the period (opening period, interval period) for closing the second specific winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device 650 during the jackpot game. By changing the length, the game ball that has passed through the ball guidance path 72 can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 by the operation of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65. It is configured so that it is possible to control whether or not to win a prize in 65.

In the present embodiment, the two variable winning devices are arranged vertically apart from each other, and the ball guiding path 72 is provided between them (between the paths through which the game balls flow down), whereby the upper variable winning device (second variable) is provided. The time it takes for the game ball that passed without winning the winning device 650) to reach the lower variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) is delayed, but it is arranged as two variable winning devices. Other configurations may be used. For example, a plurality of variable winning devices may be provided in the left-right direction, and a ball guidance path 72 may be provided between them.

Further, a plurality of variable winning devices and a ball guiding path 72 between them may be assembled and configured as one unit. With such a configuration, the work of assembling to the game board 13 can be facilitated, and there is an effect that the manufacturing efficiency can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the ball guidance path 72, a configuration in which the game ball meanders in the left-right direction of the game board is used, but if the configuration is such that the time for the game ball to pass through the ball guidance path 72 is a predetermined time or longer. Other configurations may be used. For example, the path may meander in the frontal view depth direction (horizontal direction) of the game board 13, or the game ball may meander in three dimensions using both the left-right direction and the depth direction.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time during which the game ball passes through the right region of the game board 13 (the time during which the game ball flows down between the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65) is the distance at which the game ball flows down. Although it is realized that the game ball is extended for a predetermined time or longer by using a configuration for extending the game ball or a configuration for slowing down the speed at which the game ball flows down, other methods may be used. For example, a regulating member that regulates the flow of the game ball is provided in the ball guiding path 72, and the regulating member is electrically driven at all times or at regular intervals to allow the game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72. The configuration may be such that the time is set to be longer than a predetermined time. By using the restricting member that is electrically driven in this way, it is possible to more reliably set the time for passing through the ball guidance path to a predetermined time or longer.

In the second embodiment, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the first starting port 630 during the right-handed game, but the first starting port is located in the right region of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment described above. 631 may be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a flow in which various gaming states in the present embodiment are set will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flow in which various gaming states are set. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a point that a limit (100 times) is provided for the number of times of giving electric support in the probabilistic game state ST3 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, and a flow in which various game states are set. Are different. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the transition ratio of the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability state after the jackpot game is set to the type of special symbol (two types of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and the gaming state (normal gaming state). It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a total of eight types can be set by combining ST1, the time-saving game state ST1h, the latent probability change game state ST2, and the probability change game state ST3). The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 74.

First, the flow in which various gaming states are set in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 66. In the normal game state ST1, first, a left-handed game is performed aiming at the first starting port 630 (see FIG. 64) provided in the lower center of the game board 13. During the normal game state ST1, the first special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation. Specifically, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol game is 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30,000 ms (30 seconds). The time is selected, and 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 76). With this configuration, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to change at the same time in the normal game state ST1, the first special symbol is before the second special symbol finishes one change. Since the symbol can be changed a plurality of times (at least 20 times in the present embodiment), the first special symbol can be made a substantial change target.

Then, during the normal game state ST1, when the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1) becomes a big hit, the big hit B (7R normal big hit: no electric support) and the big hit D (7R normal big hit: with electric support) ), Jackpot E (7R probability variation jackpot: with electric support) and jackpot H (7R normal hit: without electric support) are selected.

Here, if a big hit is won in the first lottery game during the normal game state ST1, the probability of shifting to the high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) is set to 50% after the big hit ends. The probability of transitioning to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time-saving game state ST1h) is set to 50%, and if the jackpots B, D, and H are won in the first lottery game, after the jackpot game is completed. , The normal game state ST1 is set again, and when the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability variation game state ST3 is set after the jackpot game is completed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the jackpot probability does not shift to a high probability unless the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game as described above in the first embodiment. Even if the jackpot E is won in the lottery game, the probability variation game state ST3 is not set unless the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, and the probability variation game state ST3 (high probability: with electric support) is a jackpot. It will shift to the time-saving gaming state ST1h (low probability: with electric support) where the probability is low.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the same jackpot type is won, the jackpot game depends on the result of the game during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot game). The game states that shift after the end may differ, but when explaining the flow of setting various game states, the game states that can be shifted depending on the jackpot type (shift by playing normally). The game state) will be explained as the transition destination after the jackpot game is completed.

If the second lottery game is performed in the normal game state ST1, it is set to shift to the 100% low probability state without shifting to the high probability game state after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 74). ). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second lottery game from being illegally performed during the normal game state ST1.

Next, a probabilistic game state ST3 that shifts with a probability of 50% when a big hit is won in the first lottery game during the normal game state ST1 will be described. In the probabilistic game state ST3, a right-handed game is performed aiming at the second starting port 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13. During the probabilistic game state ST3, the second special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation. Specifically, in the probabilistic game state ST3, a fluctuation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol game. It is configured so that 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). By lengthening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in this way, it is possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. ..

Then, during the probability variation game state ST3, when a big hit is obtained in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the big hit E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and the big hit F (7R: high probability: Either (without electric support) or jackpot G (7R: low probability: with electric support) is selected.

Here, if a jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability variation game state ST3, the probability of shifting to the high probability gaming state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is set to 70% after the jackpot ends. The probability of transitioning to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time-saving game state ST1h) is set to 30%, and if the jackpot E is won in the second lottery game, the probability change game state is reached after the jackpot game ends. When ST3 is set again and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability change game state ST2 is set after the jackpot game is completed. Then, when the jackpot G is won in the second lottery game, the time saving game state ST1h is set.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the electric support ends when the total number of fluctuations of the first lottery game and the second lottery game in the probability variation game state ST3 reaches 100 times. Therefore, when the special symbol variation exceeds 100 times in the probabilistic game state ST3, the process shifts to the latent probabilistic game state ST2.

If the first lottery game is performed in the probability variation game state ST3, the rate of transition to the high probability game state after the jackpot game ends is set to 10%, and the rate of transition to the low probability state after the jackpot game ends. Is set to 90% (see FIG. 74).

Next, the latent probability variation game state ST2, which shifts at 10% when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game in the probability variation game state ST3, will be described. In the latent probability change game state ST2, a right-handed game is performed aiming at the second starting port 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13. During the latent probability changing game state ST2, the second special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation. Specifically, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, a fluctuation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol game. , 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). By lengthening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in this way, it is possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. ..

Then, during the latent probability change game state ST2, when a big hit is obtained in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the big hit E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and the big hit F (7R: high probability) : No electric support) is selected.

Here, if a jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability variation game state ST3, the probability of transitioning to the high probability gaming state (latent probability variation game state ST2 or probability variation game state ST3) is set to 100% after the jackpot ends. It is set so that it does not shift to the low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time-saving game state ST1h), and if the jackpot E is won in the second lottery game, the probability change game state is reached after the jackpot game ends. When ST3 is set and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability change game state ST2 is set again after the jackpot game is completed.

Next, the time-saving game state ST1h will be described. In the time-saving game state ST1h, a left-handed game is performed aiming at the first starting port 630 (see FIG. 64) provided in the center of the game board 13. During the time-saving game state ST1h, the first special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation. Specifically, in the time-saving game state ST1h, a fluctuation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol game, and the first It is configured so that 1000 ms (1 second) to 30000 ms (30 seconds) are selected as the fluctuation time of one special symbol (see FIG. 77). By lengthening the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in this way, it is possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. ..

Then, during the time-saving game state ST1h, when a big hit is obtained in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the big hit A (7R: low probability: no electric support) and the big hit C (7R: low probability: One of jackpot E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and jackpot F (7R: high probability: without electric support) is selected (see FIG. 75).

Here, if a big hit is won in the first lottery game during the time-saving game state ST1h, the probability of shifting to the high probability game state (latent probability change game state ST2 or probability change game state ST3) is set to 95% after the big hit ends. The probability of transitioning to a low probability state (normal game state ST1 or time-saving game state ST1h) is set to 5%, and if the jackpots A and C are won in the first lottery game, the normal game is completed after the jackpot game is completed. If the game state ST1 is set and the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability variation game state ST3 is set after the jackpot game is completed, and if the jackpot F is won in the first lottery game, after the jackpot game is completed. , Latent probability change game state ST2 is set.

Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 75, in the gaming state in which the time-saving gaming state ST1h is provided with electric support and the second ordinary electric accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 tends to be in a special state. However, as described above, the first special symbol is substantially subject to fluctuation during the time-saving game state ST1h, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation. The game aiming at 640 is a very inefficient game. Further, since the prize ball of the game ball is set to one in the second start port 640, even if the right-handed game is performed during the time-saving game state ST1h and the game ball is won in the second start port 640. Since the number of balls to be ejected does not increase, in the time-saving game state ST1h, substantially the same game as in the normal game state ST1 (left-handed game) is performed.

The flow of setting various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has been described above, but here, the main game characteristics (transition of various gaming states) of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. To do.

First, in the normal game state ST1, the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game and the probability change game state ST3 is aimed at (distribution 50%). Next, in the probabilistic game state ST3, while performing the second lottery game, the jackpot F is won and the latent game state ST2 is aimed at (distribution 10%). Alternatively, the aim is to shift to the latent game state ST2 by performing the special symbol game 100 times without making a big hit and ending the electric support.

In the probabilistic game state ST3, the jackpot in which the probabilistic game state ST3 is set again after the jackpot game ends accounts for 60% of the total jackpot. We will aim to make the transition.

In addition, this probabilistic game state ST3 is configured to win a small hit as a result of the lottery of the second lottery game, and to play the game without reducing the number of balls held by performing the small hit game.

Next, in the latent probability variable game state ST2, after the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot in which the latent probability variable game state ST2 is set again accounts for 90% of the total jackpot. This latent probability change game state ST2 is the game state in which the most promising ball output can be expected in the pachinko machine 10. Although a detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, the latent probability-changing game state ST2 is configured to be able to obtain more balls than the probability-changing game state ST3 by repeatedly performing the small hit game. .. That is, during the latent probability change game state ST2, it is possible to increase the number of balls to be output in the small hit game and the big hit game, and the same mode is repeated (looped) with a 90% probability after the big hit game is completed. It is configured.

In addition, the latent probability change game state ST2 has a high probability game state transition rate of 100% in the second lottery game, and even if the remaining 10% is won instead of the 90% that loops the latent probability change game state ST2, the probability change. It only shifts to the game state ST3. That is, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the jackpot can be won at least twice (ST2 → ST3, ST3 → ST1h twice) in the high probability game state.

Finally, the time-saving game state ST1h is a game state set when the state shifts (falls) from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment). ), It is a game state in which electric support is given. In this time-saving game state ST1, the rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state after the end of the big hit is set higher than in the normal game state, and if the big hit is won in the first lottery game during the time-saving game state ST1, it is high. The rate of transition to the stochastic gaming state is set to 95% (the probabilistic gaming state ST3 is 70% and the latent gaming state ST2 is 25%). Then, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the normal game state ST1 is entered.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the game state (normal game state ST1, time-saving game state ST1h, latent probability change game state ST2, probability change game state ST3) are set. Based on this, it is configured so that a plurality of ratios of transitioning to the high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game can be set, and further, the special symbol that is the target of substantial fluctuation can be changed according to the gaming state. It is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state (0% in the present embodiment) when the second lottery game, which is not a target of substantial fluctuation, is performed. With this configuration, even if an inappropriate game (illegal game) is played, it does not shift to a state advantageous for the player (high probability game state), so that the illegal game targeting the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It has the effect of being able to be suppressed.

Further, the actual variable target of the latent probability changing game state ST2, which is a high probability gaming state, is the second lottery game in which the second special symbol fluctuates, and the lottery result of the second lottery game is a big hit only during the latent probability changing game state ST2. Since it is configured to shift 100% to the high-probability gaming state when the probability becomes high, it is possible to make a big hit in the high-probability gaming state at least twice in a part of the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in game playability, and there is an effect that the interest of the gaming machine can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the flow of control of various devices during the jackpot of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing the flow of various devices executed from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. Of the operation controls of various devices, the same operation control as that of the first embodiment described above will be omitted, and other operation controls will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 80.

First, when the jackpot game is started, the main control device 110 operates various devices related to the jackpot game (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650) a predetermined number of times at a predetermined timing (see FIG. 80). Then, based on various commands output from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game on the third symbol display device 81.

First, when the jackpot game is started, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is opened (turned on) in order to open the second specific winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device 650 after the lapse of a predetermined period t1 (opening period). ). Then, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is closed when any of the conditions of the predetermined period (29 seconds in the present embodiment) or the predetermined number of winnings (10 in the present embodiment) is satisfied. The period t2 in which the second specific winning opening 650b is in the open state is set as one opening period (round), and is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (7 times in this embodiment) in one jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650b is always open during the opening period t2, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the second specific winning opening is open and closed during the opening period. The upper attacker 650b may be operated so as to repeat the state. Even when such a configuration is used, the opening period t2 is set when either a predetermined period elapses after the second specific winning opening is first opened or a predetermined number of winnings are satisfied. It will end.

Then, the next round is started after a predetermined period t3 (interval period) has elapsed since the end of one round. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, from the first round to the fourth round, a game of opening the second specific winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device is executed, and the game is executed for five rounds. A game is executed in which the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened.

Next, the flow between the fourth and fifth rounds in which the specific winning opening that is opened during the jackpot game is switched from the second specific winning opening 650b to the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a predetermined period t4, which is a specific interval period between the fourth and fifth rounds, can be changed according to the gaming state (see FIG. 80). For example, the jackpots A to D have an interval period of 1 second, and the jackpots E to H have an interval period of 4 seconds.

Here, the influence on the game by changing the specific interval period will be described. First, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball launched by the right-handed game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 passes through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state, and then the ball. By passing through the guidance path 72, it is possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 64). The ball-guided path 72 is designed so that the ball-guided path transit time is 3 to 4 seconds.

Further, the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 operates in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 at the same time when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened (V opening operation is turned on). The mode (the state in which the V opening operation is on) is continued for a predetermined period t5 (2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined period (V opening period) t5 elapses, the game ball presses the probability change switch 65e3. It is controlled so as to operate (V opening operation is turned off) in an impassable (difficult) manner.

That is, in the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to pass the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3, V is the sum of the specific interval period t4 and the period (2 seconds) t5 in which the V opening operation is on. The effective period t6 needs to be longer than the ball-guided route transit period (up to 4 seconds in this embodiment). Specifically, by setting the specific interval period t4 to 4 seconds, the V effective period t6, which is the sum of the specific interval period t4 (4 seconds) and the V opening period t5 (2 seconds), is set to 6 seconds, and the ball is guided. Make it longer than the route passage period (up to 4 seconds). With this configuration, after the upper attacker 650b in the fourth round is turned off (after the game ball can pass through the ball guidance path 72), the game ball that has passed through the ball guidance path 72 is V effective. It is possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a within the period t6 and make it possible to pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

On the other hand, if the V valid period t6 is set shorter than the ball guidance path passing period, it becomes possible (difficult) to make it impossible (difficult) for the game ball to win the first specific winning opening 65a within the V valid period t6. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 according to the game state, the jackpot game capable of substantially passing V without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. And V It is possible to provide a jackpot game that cannot pass (difficult). Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the main control device 110 during the jackpot game can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switching member 65h) is performed according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). (Motion control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and motion control that cannot pass (difficult)) are set, and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. It is configured to be set.

In this embodiment, by changing the operation content of the switching member 65h as described in the first embodiment described above, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easy) operation pattern and non-passage. Although it is configured to set a possible (difficult) operation pattern, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65. It may be configured to set a (easy) operation pattern and a non-passable (difficult) operation pattern.

Specifically, first, when the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened (5 rounds in the present embodiment) is started, the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. That is, when the game ball wins at the timing when the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the switching member 65h so that the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easily). To drive. Then, the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 is placed in the first specific winning opening 65a to open the opening / closing door opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that continuously opens for 29 seconds) in which a game ball can win (easily), and the first specific winning opening 65a. The opening / closing door opening pattern in which the game ball cannot win (difficult) (for example, an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.4 seconds is repeated 5 times from the start of 5 rounds and then continuously opened for 27 seconds) can be changed.

With this configuration, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easily) by simply changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1 without changing the operation content of the switching member 65h. Possible (difficult) operation patterns can be set. Therefore, it is possible to substantially set a plurality of ratios of jackpot games that can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, and there is an effect that various game characteristics can be provided to the player and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and the game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). When a configuration that enables setting of a different state is used, the timing at which the switching member 65h is started is not only the timing at which the first variable winning device 65 is started, but also, for example, the pachinko machine 10. The operation may be controlled so that a constant operation is always repeated at the timing when the power is turned on.

Further, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and the game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). It is possible to set the period during which the switching member 65h is turned on for longer than 2 seconds by using the configuration that enables the setting of the above state. As a result, the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a can be more reliably passed through the probability change switch 65e3.

In the present embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period, but other than that. The configuration of may be adopted. For example, the ball-guided path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball-guided path 72, may be switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V opening period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game is shown. For example, in the first round, the first variable winning device 65 In the case of a jackpot game in which the first specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, the period of change according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1.

With this configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball-guided route transit time, the jackpot game starts (start of the opening period t1) on the right. The struck game ball can win a prize in the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6, and can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball-guided route passing time, the game ball hit right with the start of the jackpot game becomes the first within the V valid period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

As a specific configuration, the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to operate a plurality of times in one round. (The first specific winning opening 65a is configured to repeat the open state and the closed state within one round), and the game ball that wins when the first specific winning opening 65a is first opened is the probability change switch. It is preferable to configure it so that it can pass through 65e3. Further, the opening / closing door 65f1 that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a is composed of a plurality of members having different predetermined movements, and the specific winning is performed only when the plurality of members perform specific movements. It may be configured so that the mouth is open.

By using the specific configuration described above, even when a jackpot game with a short opening period t1 (a jackpot game in which the game ball cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (difficult)) is set, the open state (within one round) is set. Since the game ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening (in the second open state), there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. When the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 (not shown) is turned off (end of the fifth round) and the first specific winning opening 65a is closed, the upper attacker 650b is turned on after the interval period t3 elapses (second). The specific winning opening 650b is open). After that, the operation of the upper attacker 650b is repeated until the final round (7 rounds) is completed, and after the second specific winning opening 650b of the final round (7 rounds) is closed, the ending period t7 elapses and the jackpot game is played. finish.

The third symbol display device 81 is executing the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game while the jackpot game is being performed. Specifically, in the early stage of the big hit game, a production display (directing A) is executed to congratulate the big hit game, and after that, a notification that the specific winning opening to be opened in the next round is switched and a big hit is performed. An effect display (effect B) is executed to notify (suggest) that a game is to be performed to determine whether or not to shift to the high-probability game state after the end of the game. Then, an effect display (effect C) that encourages whether or not to shift to the high probability game state is executed, and at the end of the jackpot game, the game state provided after the jackpot game ends (high or low probability of jackpot, presence / absence of electric support). The effect display (effect D) for notifying (suggesting) is executed.

In the present embodiment, the timing at which the above-mentioned effect B and effect C are switched is different (delayed) from the timing at which the upper attacker 650b is closed (the timing at which the fourth round ends). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent various processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 from being concentrated.

Further, the timing at which the effect B and the effect C are switched is between the timing when the upper attacker 650b closes (the timing when the fourth round ends) and the timing when the lower attacker 65f1 opens (the timing when the fifth round starts). Since the interval period (specific interval period t4) is set, the game ball uses the probability change switch 65e3 in this jackpot game based on the timing at which the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the jackpot is passable, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress tiredness of the game by grasping the result of the jackpot game at an early stage.

In addition, by preparing a plurality of timings for switching the effect display within the specific interval period t4 and providing a means for randomly setting the timing for switching the effect display, the jackpot game can be further based on the timing for switching the effect display. It can be difficult to get the result.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. Although the description on the display screen or the description thereof is omitted for the same parts as the contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 described in the first embodiment described above, the same is true in the present embodiment. It has a display.

First, in the present embodiment, the stage in which the main character is walking outdoors is displayed on the display screen during the normal game state ST1 (not shown). Then, when the jackpot is won and the game shifts to the probabilistic game state ST3, the display screen illustrated in FIG. 68A is displayed. FIG. 68A is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect in the probabilistic game state ST3.

On the display screen of FIG. 68A, the variation of the first special symbol is displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the variation of the second special symbol is displayed on the upper right of the screen. At the bottom of the screen, a game state display area is provided in which the current game mode (game state) "tower search mode (probability change game state ST3)" and "right-handed" notifying the game method are displayed. In addition, on the right side of the screen, a status display area is provided in which an object imitating the tower currently being searched by the main character is displayed. In this status display area, "1F" which is the lowest floor of the object, "100F" which is the top floor, "rooftop" which is above the top floor, and "30F" which indicates the current number of floors are displayed. Has been done.

During the probabilistic game state ST3, the tower is climbed one floor each time the special symbol changes once, and the display is updated for each change so that the special symbol reaches the roof when it changes 100 times without winning a big hit. That is, the number of floors displayed with the cursor as the "current floor" ("30F" in this figure) is the same value as the current number of special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot. By displaying this status display area, the hero climbs the tower and finally rooftop in the situation where the special symbol is changed 100 times without winning a big hit during the probability change game state ST3 and the situation shifts to the latent probability change game state ST2. It is configured to be displayed as an effect to reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), the display contents when a big hit is won during the probabilistic game state ST3 will be described. FIG. 68 (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing that a jackpot was won during the probabilistic game state ST3. In FIG. 68 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as "555", indicating that the result of the lottery is a big hit. In addition, the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at "246" indicating that it is out. In the status display area, "50F" is shown as the current number of floors (the number of special symbol changes since the end of the previous jackpot).

In the probabilistic game state ST3, when a big hit is won, a display body (elevator) notifying that the big hit is won is displayed on the display screen. During the jackpot game, the elevator is boarded and the destination of the elevator is fueled (not shown). The destinations of the elevator are "outdoor" when the game state after the jackpot game is set to the normal game state ST1 or the time-saving game state ST1h, and "tower search mode (tower) when the probability change game state ST3 is set. There are three types, "1F)" and "Rooftop mode" (see Fig. 69) when the latent probability change game state is set to ST2, and each is configured so that the destination is suggested by the effect executed during the jackpot game. There is.

In the present embodiment, since the game state set after the end of the jackpot is changed depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the jackpot game is performed before the start of the jackpot game or at the beginning of the jackpot game. The game state set after the end is not fixed.

Therefore, based on the winning jackpot types (A to H), it is determined between the gaming state that shifts when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 and the gaming state that shifts when the game ball does not pass (for example, the jackpot type is In the case of jackpot E, the gaming state that shifts after the jackpot game ends is the probability variation gaming state ST3 or the time-saving gaming state ST1h), and the effect common to the discrimination results is used as the effect at the beginning of the jackpot game (for example, effect A in FIG. 67). Then, it is preferable to determine whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, and set the effect at the end of the game (for example, effect D in FIG. 67) based on the determination result. With this configuration, the effect of the display screen can be displayed without discomfort with respect to the game result during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3).

FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect in the latent probability variation game state ST2. On the display screen of FIG. 69, it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and in the game state display area, right-handed display and the current game mode (game state) are displayed. A certain "rooftop mode (latent probability change game state ST2)" is displayed. Also, in the status display area, the "rooftop" display is highlighted to notify that the main character has reached the rooftop.

This "rooftop mode" is a mode for notifying (suggesting) the latent probability change game state ST2. In the pachinko machine 10, various values are set so that the gaming state in which the player is most likely to obtain a ball is the latent probability variation gaming state ST2. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78A to 80. However, in the latent probability variation game state ST2 in which the actual variation target is the second special symbol, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set short. In addition, the small hit game time (of the small hit game time, the opening period and the ending time in which the game ball does not win the specific winning opening) is also set short (shorter than the probability variation game state ST3). That is, the latent probability variation game state ST2 is set to the game state in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for the longest time in the small hit game per unit time among all the game states. Furthermore, the jackpot probability is set to a high probability.

To the "rooftop mode" that suggests the latent probability change game state ST2, either win the jackpot F during the probability change game state ST3 (10% of the total jackpot), or without winning the jackpot during the probability change game state ST3. It is designed to transition by changing the special symbol 100 times.

At that time, as the effect display performed by the third symbol display device 81, for example, a jackpot is won during the probabilistic game state ST3 (see FIG. 68 (b)), and an effect of getting into the elevator (not shown) starts. If so, is the elevator going upstairs or downstairs during the jackpot game? After notifying (suggesting) which mode the player will shift to after the jackpot game is completed, the effect display in which the elevator reaches the rooftop is executed.

Further, in the case of shifting to the latent probability variation game state ST2 without winning the jackpot during the probability variation game state ST3, the effect shown in FIG. 68 (a) is continuously displayed until the special symbol changes 100 times, and every time. The current number of floors shown in the status display area increases by one floor for each change. Then, when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times and shifts to the "rooftop mode", the cursor displayed in the status display area shifts from "100F" to "rooftop" and shifts to "rooftop mode".

Next, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the "rooftop mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70A is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect in the latent probability change game state ST2. FIG. 70B is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect when a small hit is won in the second special symbol in the latent probability change game state ST2.

On the display screen of FIG. 70 (a), it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the game state display area shows a right-handed display and the current game mode (game). The "rooftop mode (latent probability change game state ST2)" which is the state) is displayed. Also, in the status display area, the "rooftop" display is highlighted to notify that the main character has reached the rooftop.

Further, on the upper side of the display screen, "possession G (acquisition medium display)" is displayed as a value corresponding to the game ball acquired by the player. A plurality of treasure chests are displayed on the roof of the tower in the center of the display screen. This treasure chest is displayed so that it will be opened when the result of the special symbol game is a big hit or a small hit.

The acquisition medium display displayed on the upper side of the display screen is displayed corresponding to the game balls acquired in the flow of a series of games in the pachinko machine 10 (the flow from the first big hit to the transition to the normal game state ST1). It is a thing.

In the present embodiment, as the acquired medium display, a value corresponding to the total number of media acquired during the series of games is displayed. For example, it corresponds to the media acquired in the jackpot game during the series of games. The value and the value corresponding to the medium acquired in the small hit game may be displayed in a display mode in which the player can identify. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily grasp how the player has acquired the medium in a series of games. Further, when such a display is executed, if the value corresponding to the medium acquired in the small hit game satisfies a predetermined condition (the value corresponding to the medium that can be acquired in one big hit game), another value is obtained. It is preferable to display the display mode. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that the medium equivalent to the big hit game has been acquired as a result of a plurality of small hit games.

On the display screen of FIG. 70 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at "123" indicating a small hit. Then, the first special symbol, which was changing at the same timing as the stop of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, is forcibly stopped and displayed at the wrong eye. In the center of the display screen, the selected treasure chest opens, and a treasure indicating a small hit appears from the inside.

FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing an effect when a big hit is won in the second special symbol in the latent probability change game state ST2. When a big hit is won in the second special symbol, one of the treasure chests displayed on the display screen of FIG. 70 (a) is opened during the fluctuation, and an effect in which a monster appears is displayed. Then, a battle with a monster starts during the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot game is notified (suggested) according to the result of the battle (not shown). For example, if you win the battle, you will reach the rooftop and shift to "rooftop mode". Also, if you escape from the battle, you will be displayed to shift to the "tower search mode (1F)", and if you lose the battle, you will be directed to move to the "outdoor" stage (not shown).

As described above, in the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the effect that the story progresses is displayed for each mode corresponding to the game state, and the story is displayed according to the lottery result (big hit, small hit) of the special symbol. The results are configured to change. Then, since the player can grasp whether or not the current state is advantageous for the player just by looking at the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game performance is more complicated than that of the conventional pachinko machine 10. There is an effect that the player can play the game without being confused even if he / she adopts (a game property that can acquire many game balls other than the jackpot game).

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 81. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the content of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed. The differences between the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 81. Since the other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 72 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 202 in MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment operates the small hit type selection table 202 g and the special electric accessory (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) with respect to the first embodiment. The difference is that the table 202h and the jackpot scenario 202i are added, and the values of the various counter values referred to in the various tables are changed, and the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first hit random number table 202a is different from the first embodiment in that the value set as the jackpot determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (a).

The small hit random number table 202b is different from the first embodiment in that the conditions for determining small hits are changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (b).

The second hit random number table 202c is different in that the values set as the hit determination values are different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 73 (c).

The jackpot type selection table 202d increases the jackpot type with respect to the first embodiment so that jackpots having different specific interval periods during the jackpot can be selected, and the jackpot type selection used in the time-saving gaming state ST1h. The difference is that the table D is newly provided. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

The variation pattern selection table 202e and the general map variation pattern table are different from the first embodiment in that the set variation time is changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79.

The small hit type selection table 202g is a table used when the small hit random number table 202b stabilizes with a small hit, and is a table in which the small hit type corresponding to each gaming state is selected. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (a).

The special electric accessory operation table 202h is a table in which the operation contents of the special electric accessory corresponding to the set jackpot type or small hit type are stored. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b).

The jackpot scenario 202i is an area for storing a scenario selected when a jackpot is reached, and stores the timing and number of actions of the accessory during each jackpot. The jackpot scenario 202i is updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 85) and reset by the jackpot end process 2 (S1732 in FIG. 86).

FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment has a small hit type selection table 202 g and a special electric accessory (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) operating table with respect to the first embodiment. The difference is that 202h is added and the values of various counter values referred to in various tables are changed, and other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. To do.

The jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is an area for setting (storing) the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 85), and is in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S254 in FIG. 82). , A jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set.

The scenario counter 203c2 is updated by adding 1 when the jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 in the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 87), and the jackpot end process 2 (S1732 in FIG. 86). It is cleared at the same time as resetting the jackpot scenario with.

The other memory area 203z includes other memory areas set in the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and at least the winning number counter 203j and the operation counter 203k shown in the first embodiment described above are included. The notification counter 203m, the remaining ball timer flag 203n, and the remaining ball timer 203o are included, and are used in the same control as in the first embodiment described above.

Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (a). FIG. 73A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 199, and in a low probability gaming state, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7", the probability is high. In the game state, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is "7 to 9", it is determined that the first hit (big hit). That is, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability gaming state is "1/200", and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is "3/200". In both the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol used in the present embodiment, the winning determination is performed using the first random number table 202a.

The contents of the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table 202b. In the present embodiment, the small hit is not won by the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1). On the other hand, in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "10" in the low probability game state (low probability: no electric support, low probability: with electric support). If it is "~ 20", it is determined that it is a small hit, and in the high probability game state (high probability: no electric support, high probability: with electric support), the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "10 to 199". If there is, it is determined that it is a small hit. That is, the small hit probability by the first lottery game is "0/200", the small hit probability by the second lottery game in the low probability game state is "11/200", and the second lottery game in the high probability game state. The small hit probability is "190/200".

As a result, in the high-probability gaming state (latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 and probability-changing gaming state ST3) in which the second lottery game is performed, a small hit game is frequently given. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b), the time when the second specific winning opening 650b is opened as a small hit game is the same in the latent probability variation game state ST2 and the probability variation game state ST3. The opening time and the ending time set as the small hit game are different, and the opening time and the ending time are set shorter in the small hit game in the latent probability variation game state ST2. That is, the opening time of the second specific winning opening 650b per unit time is longer in the latent probability changing game state ST2 than in the probability changing game state ST3. Therefore, the number of game balls that a player can acquire as a small hit game can be increased in the latent probability variation game state ST2 than in the probability variation game state ST3, and the player can acquire a game ball other than the jackpot game. It is possible to provide a game machine with unexpected surprises, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first lottery game is set to 0%, but it may be set to, for example, about 10%, or the second lottery in the low probability game state. The probability of winning a small hit in a game is set to "11/200", but for example, it may be set to the same probability as the second lottery game in a high probability game state.

The contents of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (c). FIG. 73C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In the present embodiment, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 98" in the low probability gaming state. In the high-probability game state, when the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is "0 to 99", it is determined that the second hit (per ordinary figure). That is, the probability of winning in the low-probability gaming state is "99/100", and the probability of winning in the high-probability gaming state is "100/100". If the player wins the game, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a operates, and the game ball easily enters the second starting port 640 (special state). In the present embodiment, the probability of being the second hit is provided with a slight height difference between the high probability time and the low probability time, but the same probability may be used.

Next, the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 75. FIG. 74 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot type selection table A202d referred to in the normal game state ST1, and FIG. 74 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the jackpot type referred to in the probability variation game state ST3. It is a schematic diagram which shows the selection table B202d schematically. FIG. 75 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2, and FIG. 75 (b) is a jackpot referenced in the time saving game state ST1h. The type selection table D202d.

The jackpot type selection table 202d is referred to when a jackpot is won as a result of lottery for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), and the type of special symbol won by the jackpot (first). Based on the 1 special symbol (special symbol 1) or the 2nd special symbol (special diagram 2)) and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot type is jackpot using the counter value acquired from the first hit type counter C2. It is selected from A to jackpot H.

The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the present embodiment has a point that the jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time saving game state ST1h is added to the first embodiment described above, and the jackpot type to be selected is It differs in that it has increased, that the interval time of the jackpot game can be set according to the jackpot type, and that the ratio of the first hit type counter value assigned to each jackpot type has been changed, and other configurations. Are the same. The explanation of the same part will be omitted, and the difference will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the normal gaming state ST1, the ratio that the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the high probability gaming state (high probability) is Interval time (specific interval time t4 in FIG. 67) and V operation (operation of switching member 65h) for each jackpot type so that the rate of becoming a low probability state (low probability) is 50% at 50%. , The presence or absence of electric support after the jackpot game is set. Specifically, an open pattern (V is possible) that controls the operation of the switching member 65h so that the game ball can pass (enter) the probability change switch 65e3 as a V operation according to the game state, and the game ball is the probability change switch 65e3. Any of the open patterns (V not possible) that controls the operation of the switching member 65h is set so that the ball cannot pass (enter) (difficult).

Further, if the V operation is V-enabled according to the game state as the interval time, the game ball is transferred to the first variable winning device 65 during the period during which the game ball can pass (enter) the probability change switch 65e3. "4 seconds (V is possible)" that can win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and even if the V operation is V possible, the game ball is placed during the period when the game ball can pass (win) through the probability change switch 65e3. One of "1 second (V not possible)" that cannot be won (difficult) is set in the first specific winning opening 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65.

Then, it is set whether or not the electric support (100 times) is given after the jackpot game is completed. Regarding the granting of electric support, the game ball is granted regardless of whether the game ball passes (enters) or does not pass (enter) the probability change switch 65e3. For example, the electric support " When the jackpot type for which "Yes" is set is selected, when the game ball passes through (enters) the probability change switch 65e3, the game shifts to the probability change game state (ST3) after the jackpot game ends, and the game ball temporarily presses the probability change switch 65e3. If it does not pass (enter the ball), it will shift to the time-saving game state (ST1h) after the jackpot game is completed.

In this way, the current jackpot type is selected from the jackpot types with different contents set according to the first hit type counter value acquired from the first hit type counter C2. For example, if a jackpot is won in Special Figure 1 during the normal game state ST1 and 50 is acquired as the first hit type counter value, the jackpot type E is selected. During the jackpot game provided by the jackpot type E, the game ball passes (enters) the probability variation switch 65e3, so that the probability variation game state ST3 is provided after the jackpot game is completed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot B, the jackpot D, and the jackpot H are set as the jackpot types in which the normal game state ST is selected after the jackpot game is completed. This means that regardless of whether "1 second" or "4 seconds" is selected as the interval time and "V is possible" or "V is not possible" is selected as the V operation, it is possible to shift to the normal game state ST1 after the jackpot game is completed. It shows that there is sex. With this configuration, it becomes impossible (difficult) to grasp the game state after the jackpot game ends only by grasping the interval time and the contents of the V operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the notification (suggestion) of the game state after the jackpot game, which is performed during the jackpot game (or the first special symbol change after the jackpot game ends), and the pachinko machine 10 is used. It has the effect of making people interested in the production display and suppressing the situation where they get bored of the game early.

Further, the distribution in which the V operation is "V possible" or "V not possible" differs only depending on the type of the special symbol, and is set so as not to be changed according to the game state. Specifically, in the first special symbol, the ratio of V operation being "V possible" is set to 90% and the ratio of being "V not possible" is set to 10%, and in the second special symbol, V operation is "V possible". The ratio of "V is not possible" is set to 0% and the ratio of "V is not possible" is set to 0%. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the V operation (operation of the switching member 65h) depending on the gaming state, so that the capacity for storing the operation instruction content for the first variable winning device 65 (switching member 65h) is reduced. Can be (can be two types). There is an effect.

Next, the selection of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (a). In the normal game state ST1, a game aiming at the first special symbol (left-handed game) is an appropriate game method that is advantageous for the player, but when an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, the normal game state A game using the second special symbol is performed during ST1. As an inappropriate game, the RAM of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 is reset so as to shorten the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the long fluctuation (10 minutes) is set during the normal game state ST1. By receiving a lottery multiple times in a shorter time than the normally required fluctuation time, the player can shift to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, which is most advantageous for the player, without going through an appropriate game flow (see FIG. 66). Acts are possible. Assuming that such a game is performed, if a big hit is won with the second special symbol during the normal game state ST1, the big hit H is set to be selected. The jackpot H is a jackpot type that shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the jackpot game is completed.

Therefore, it is possible to give a penalty (penalty) to a player who plays an inappropriate game during the normal game state ST1. As for the penalty (penalty) to be executed for an inappropriate player, other than the above contents may be used. For example, during the normal game state ST1, a small hit is won with a second special symbol that is not a target of substantial fluctuation. If this is the case, the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the small hit game may be set as a special variation pattern, and at least the variation pattern in which the first special symbol is a long variation may be forcibly selected. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to substantially continue the game, and it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of an inappropriate game.

In addition, if a jackpot is won as a result of an inappropriate game, the operation content of the special electric accessory during the jackpot game is changed to the special operation content (difficult operation in which the game ball cannot be inserted into the specific winning opening). Contents) may be stored in advance in the ROM of the main control device 110.

In addition, for example, when the jackpot is won with the hold memory of the second special symbol and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the jackpot game is completed, the above-mentioned inappropriate game is performed unintentionally by the player. Since it may be broken, it may be executed only after a predetermined number of times (upper limit reserved memory number (4 pieces) of the second special symbol) after the end of the jackpot game, or the second start port 640 during the normal game state ST1. It may be executed only when a prize is won. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate (suppress) the penalty (penalty) for inappropriate games from being given to the player who is performing the normal game, and to give the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Has the effect of being able to suppress.

Next, the jackpot type selection table B202d referred to in the probability variation game state ST3 will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (b). As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the probability variation game state ST3, the ratio that the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the high probability gaming state (high probability) is At 10%, the rate of becoming a low probability state (low probability) is set to be 90%. This is because the game of special figure 1 in the probabilistic game state ST3 is an inappropriate game like the game of special figure 2 in the normal game state ST1, and therefore a penalty (penalty) is given to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in Special Figure 2, 70% of the game states are in the high-probability gaming state (high probability) after the jackpot game is completed, and 30% are in the low-probability state (low probability). It is set to be.

Next, the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the latent probability variable gaming state ST2, the ratio of the gaming state after the jackpot game ends to the high probability gaming state (high probability). Is set to 30%, and the rate of becoming a low probability state (low probability) is set to 70%. This is because the game of the special figure 1 in the latent probability change game state ST2 is an inappropriate game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, and therefore a penalty (penalty) is given to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in Special Figure 2, 90% of the game states are in the high-probability gaming state (high probability) after the jackpot game is completed, and 10% are in the low-probability state (low probability). It is set to be.

Next, the jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time saving game state ST1h will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the ratio that the gaming state after the jackpot game ends becomes the high probability gaming state (high probability) is At 95%, the rate of becoming a low probability state (low probability) is set to be 5%. On the other hand, when the big hit is won in Special Figure 2, the rate of the game state after the big hit game ends is 5%, and the rate of the low probability state (low probability) is 95%. It is set to be. This is because the game of special figure 2 in the time-saving game state ST1h is an inappropriate game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, and therefore a penalty (penalty) is given to the player.

In this way, when the big hit is won in the special figure 1 during the time-saving game state ST1h, even if the same low probability state is obtained, the game state after the big hit game is completed with a higher probability than the normal game state ST1 has a high probability. It is set so that it can shift to the game state. With this configuration, even if the player shifts to a low-probability state (falls), it is possible to provide a chance to shift to a high-probability gaming state (pull-back chance) for a predetermined period of time. It has the effect of increasing the motivation of the player to play.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the transition ratio to the high-probability gaming state can be set according to the gaming state and the type of the special symbol, so that a wide variety of game playability can be achieved as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to provide the game, which has the effect of suppressing a situation in which the player gets bored at an early stage. It is also possible to give an appropriate penalty to a player who has performed an inappropriate game.

Next, a variation pattern selection table for selecting variation patterns in each gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set for each fluctuation pattern is different from that of the first embodiment, and the others are the same. The same part will be omitted, and only the differences will be explained.

FIG. 76 is a schematic view showing the variation pattern selection table A referred to in the normal game state ST1. The normal game state ST1 is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In the present embodiment, as described above, a penalty can be given to an inappropriate game, so that the fluctuation time is set short.

FIG. 77 is a schematic view showing the variation pattern selection table B referred to in the time saving game state ST1h. In the time-saving game state ST1h, as in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the fluctuation time of various deviation fluctuation patterns of the special figure 1 is shortened. It differs from the first embodiment.

FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic view showing the variation pattern selection table C referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2. In the latent probability change game state ST2, unlike the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is changed to 600,000 ms (10 minutes) and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is 500 ms because the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is the actual fluctuation target. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it has been changed.

FIG. 78 (b) is a schematic view showing the variation pattern selection table D referred to in the probability variation game state ST3. The probabilistic gaming state ST3 is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the fluctuation time when the special figure 1 is off is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing a normal map fluctuation pattern table for selecting the fluctuation time of a normal symbol. This embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the number of types of ordinary symbols is one, and therefore the difference is that the number of ordinary symbols that refer to this table is one.

FIG. 80A is a schematic view schematically showing the small hit type selection table 202g. FIG. 80A is a small hit type selection table 202 g used when a small hit is obtained as a result of the winning / failing determination of the special symbol game, so that a predetermined small hit is selected according to the game state. It is set. If the game state is a small hit during the normal game state ST1 or the time-saving game state ST1h, the small hit 1 is selected, and if the small hit is won during the probability change game state ST3, the small hit 2 is selected and the latent probability change. If a small hit is won during the game state ST2, the small hit 3 is selected. It should be noted that the small hit 1, the small hit 2, and the small hit 3 have different operating contents of the special electric accessory during the small hit game. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b).

Next, with reference to FIG. 80 (b), the operation contents of the special electric accessory (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) operated during the big hit game or the small hit game will be described. FIG. 80B is a diagram schematically showing the special electric accessory operating table 202h. The operation content of the special electric accessory corresponding to the jackpot type is set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h.

First, the operation contents of the special electric accessory based on each jackpot type will be described. The same operation is set from jackpot A to jackpot E of the jackpot type, the opening time is 5 seconds, the number of rounds is 7, and the second variable winning device is from 1 round (R) to 4 rounds as the opening operation during the round. The 650 (top) opens for 29 seconds, and the first variable winning device 65 (bottom) opens for 29 seconds in the fifth round. Then, from the 6th round to the 7th round, the second variable winning device 650 (top) is set to open again for 29 seconds. The opening operation time during the round is set to 29 seconds, but the specific winning opening is set to be closed when 10 game balls win in the specific winning opening of each variable winning device during that period. Then, 2 seconds is set as the inter-round interval, 1 second is set as the inter-round specific interval (t4 in FIG. 67), and 5 seconds is set as the ending time.

The jackpot types E to H are different from the jackpots A to E described above in that the time of the specific interval between rounds is increased from 1 second to 4 seconds, and the same values are set for other items. .. By making the specific intervals between rounds different in this way, as described with reference to FIG. 67, it is possible to set whether or not the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (easy or difficult). There is. In this way, between specific rounds (a round in which the game ball is won in the second specific winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device 650 and a round in which the game ball is won in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65. By simply changing the interval time between (and), it is possible to set multiple percentages of jackpot games that can substantially pass through the probability change switch 65e3, providing players with various game characteristics and playing games. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the present embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6 (see FIG. 67). However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, the ball-guided path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball-guided path 72, may be switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V opening period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game is shown. For example, in the first round, the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state. 1 In the case of a jackpot game in which the specific winning opening 65a is open, the period of change according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With this configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball-guided route transit time, the jackpot game starts (start of the opening period t1) on the right. The struck game ball can win a prize in the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6, and can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball-guided route passing time, the game ball hit right with the start of the jackpot game becomes the first within the V valid period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

In this embodiment, the operation content of the special electric accessory set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h and the operation content of the switching member 65h corresponding to each jackpot type are set as a jackpot scenario. , Other configurations may be adopted. For example, the operation content of the switching member 65h may be set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3 is opened only once in the fifth round in one big hit game, but in one big hit game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened. The variable winning device 65 may be configured to be opened a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, the first variable winning device 65 may be configured to be in the open state in the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round.

With this configuration, the round before the round in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened can be changed to the round in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and during one jackpot game. It is possible to have a plurality (three) specific interval periods. Therefore, for each specific interval period, it is possible to set whether or not the game ball can reach the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 at the timing when the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. There is an effect that a person can have expectations multiple times during one big hit game.

When the above-described configuration is adopted, if the V operation is V-enabled (FIG. 74), that is, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened and at the same time, the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. In that case, it is determined whether the game ball is fired at a timing that allows it to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, and if the game ball is not fired at a timing that allows it to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, the player uses an appropriate game method. It is good to notify to.

Specifically, a detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side of the ball guidance path 72, it is determined that the passage of the game ball is detected within a specific interval period, and the third is based on the determination result. As a display for notifying the game method on the symbol display device 81, it is preferable to display contents explaining the game method such as "Don't stop right-handed hitting!" By performing such a display, it is possible to support the game so that the player can play an appropriate game when the first variable winning device 65 is opened (5th round or 7th round). It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the playability.

The method for determining whether or not an appropriate game is being performed during the jackpot game is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and other methods may be used. For example, a method of determining that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball has been operated during the big hit game, or a method of detecting the amount of rotation of the handle and determining that the right-handed game is not performed is used. You may.

Further, the display content of the display for notifying (guidance) the game method may be changed based on the content of the winning jackpot. For example, if an appropriate game is played, in the case of a big hit in which the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the display may be emphasized.

Further, a jackpot scenario in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened in consecutive rounds may be configured to be settable. By using such a configuration, even when the interval time is short, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, the variation can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. It will be possible.

Next, the operation contents of the special electric accessory based on the small hit type will be described. There are small hit types from small hit 1 to small hit 3, small hit 1 is a small hit selected when the game state is the normal game state ST1 or the time-saving game state ST1h, and small hit 2 is the probability change of the game state. It is a small hit selected in the case of the game state ST3. The small hit 3 is a small hit selected when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (see FIG. 80 (a)).

Each small hit is set so that the opening time, the opening operation during the round, and the ending time are different. Specifically, the small hit 1 is set to have an opening time and an ending time of 7.5 seconds, and is set so that the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is repeated 6 times as the opening operation during the round. That is, the small hit 1 is set as a small hit in which high-speed opening is repeated, and the game ball hardly wins a prize in the specific winning opening during the small hit game (difficult).

Next, in the small hit 2, the opening time and the ending time are set to 7.5 seconds, which is the same as the small hit 1, but the opening operation of 1.8 seconds is performed once during the round. It is set. That is, in the small hit 2, the operation of the special electric accessory is set so that the game ball can win a prize in the specific winning opening.

Specifically, in the probability variation game state ST3 (see FIG. 80 (a)) in which the small hit 2 is selected, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit game of the small hit 2 is set. The time is set to 16.8 seconds (about 17 seconds), which is the sum of the opening time (7.5 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds), and the ending time (7.5 seconds). Assuming that the number of game balls to be won in the specific winning opening during the small hit game is 2, and the number of winning balls in the specific winning opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 60 to 70 prize balls in one minute. It becomes.

Finally, the small hit 3 has the same opening operation as the small hit 2 during the round, but the opening time and the ending time are set to 0.3 seconds. That is, the period during which the specific winning opening is closed is set to be 10 times or more shorter than the small hit 2.

Specifically, in the latent probability variation game state ST2 (see FIG. 80 (a)) in which the small hit 3 is selected, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit of the small hit 3 is set to 0.5 seconds. The game time is set to 2.4 seconds (about 2.5 seconds), which is the sum of the opening time (0.3 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds), and the ending time (0.3 seconds). Assuming that the number of game balls to be won in the specific winning opening during the small hit game is 2, and the number of winning balls in the specific winning opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 480 prize balls in one minute. ..

That is, in the small hit 3, the operation of the special electric accessory is set so that the game ball can win a prize in the specific winning opening, and further, it is the time when the specific winning opening is not opened in the small hit game. By shortening the opening time and the ending time, it is possible to make the open state of the specific winning opening by the small hit game appear more frequently than the small hit 2. Therefore, it is possible for the player to acquire a large number of game balls, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. In addition, by adding another game property (a game property that waits for the game state to shift to the latent probability change game state ST2) to the game property that waits for the jackpot game to be executed as in the conventional case, the player can be given another game property. It is possible to provide a wide variety of effects, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 81A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, FIG. 81B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Since the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that an advantageous period flag 223 m and an advantageous information storage area 223 n are added. Is the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The advantageous period flag 223m is a flag that is set to be on while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability gaming state, and is set to on when the gaming state is in the high-probability gaming state. It is set to off when a low-probability gaming state is reached.

The advantageous information storage area 223n is an area for storing game information while the advantageous period flag 223m is set to ON (during the advantageous state). As the game information, the number of game balls acquired during the advantageous period, the number of big hits and the number of small hits won during the advantageous period are stored. The information stored in the advantageous information storage area 223n is cleared when the advantageous period flag 223m is set to off.

By temporarily storing the number of game balls acquired by the player during the continuation of the high-probability game by using the advantageous period flag 223 m and the advantageous information storage area 223n described above, the acquired medium is displayed on the display screen during the latent probability change game state ST2. (See FIG. 70) can be displayed.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. Regarding the same processing as in the first embodiment, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted, and only the different control processing will be illustrated and described.

The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S254). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (FIG. 82, S254) differs from the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIGS. 29, S204) in the first embodiment in that the process of S651 is added. .. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S609, the process of S651 is executed after the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed. In the process of S651, the jackpot scenario 202i (determined by the special electric accessory operation table) defined for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2. (S651).

Next, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (FIG. 83, S257) is different in that the process of S1051 is added to the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 36, S207) in the first embodiment. .. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1009, the process of S1051 is executed after the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed. In the process of S1051, the jackpot scenario 202i defined for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S651).

Here, in the jackpot scenario, the operation for each time in the jackpot game is set. When the start of the jackpot game is set, the specific winning opening set in the jackpot scenario is opened and set after the opening period set in the jackpot scenario has elapsed. After that, when the closing conditions (for example, until 10 balls are won or the opening time of 30 seconds elapses), the specific winning opening is closed, and after that, after the interval period set in the jackpot scenario elapses, the next The jackpot round is started, and the opening of the specific winning opening is set.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot scenarios are stored in the ROM 202 corresponding to the game state and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the corresponding jackpot scenario is selected. Here, even if the jackpot type is set with an open pattern that allows the game ball to enter the probability change switch 65e3, the game ball can be set to the probability change switch 65e3 by changing the opening period and the interval period. It can be set as a jackpot that can be entered and a jackpot that cannot be entered. Thereby, depending on the jackpot game state, the jackpot type that can enter the probability change switch 65e3 can be regulated by the opening time or the interval time, so that the probability change ratio for each game state can be variably set.

In the normal game state ST1 in which the normal game method is set to allow the game ball to flow down the left flow path PA1 and the game ball to enter the first starting port 630 to play the game, the right flow path PA2 When the game is played by letting the game ball flow down, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is easily opened. Therefore, when the game ball is flowed down to the left flow path PA1 and the game is played, the first starting port 630 is used. The game ball can be easily entered into the second starting port 640 rather than the game ball is inserted. It is advantageous for the player to play the game by letting the game ball flow down to the right flow path PA2 even in the normal game state because more chances of lottery in the second special symbol can be obtained. However, in the second embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the normal game state with the second special symbol, even if it is a big hit type that is opened in an open pattern that allows the ball to enter the probability change switch 65e3, it is set in the big hit scenario. Since the opening period of the first specific winning opening 65a ends before the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 due to the interval period, the probability change switch 65e3 is passed through the game ball. The probability variation is not given to the player, that is, the probability variation ratio of the second special symbol is set to 0%. Therefore, even if the game is performed by letting the game ball flow down to the right flow path PA2 in the normal game state ST1, the disadvantage on the game store side can be suppressed.

Similarly, in each game state, even if the flow paths (left flow path PA1, right flow path PA2) for playing the game are set by design, the probability variation rate at the winning openings for entering balls in different flow paths is disadvantageous to the player. It can be set according to the jackpot scenario.

Next, the normal symbol variation process 2 (S156) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 2 (S156). The ordinary symbol variation processing 2 (S156) is different from the ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 41 and S106) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1214 to S1215 are deleted. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Since the processes S1214 to S1215 in the first embodiment have been deleted, in the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of the second ordinary electric accessory 640a are twice per second regardless of the gaming state. An open pattern is set. Therefore, the opening pattern is always in a supported state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 640, and it is configured so that the second starting port 640 can be easily set to win a prize when it is opened.

As a result, when the game is played by flowing the game ball down the right flow path PA2 (time saving game state ST1h, latent probability change game state ST2, probability change game state ST3), the game ball is moved to the second start port 640. You can get a lot of prizes. In the present embodiment, when the game ball is allowed to flow down to the right flow path PA2, it is more difficult to win a prize than when the game ball is allowed to flow down to the left flow path PA1 at the first starting port 630. Therefore, it is possible to give priority to the second special symbol and change it to play the game, and it is possible to easily set a jackpot to be given to the player with the second special symbol.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1720) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S1720). The jackpot control process 2 (S1720) differs from the jackpot control process (FIGS. 46 and S1604) in the first embodiment in that the processes S1621 to S1623 are changed to the processes S1721 to S1724. For other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed.

In the process of S1721, it is determined whether the jackpot scenario is set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S1721). When it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1721: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter d2 and updated (S1722). After that, the process of S1723 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1721 when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1721: No), this process is terminated. In the jackpot scenario, data corresponding to the scenario counter is set respectively, and the operation data corresponding to the current scenario counter is read and controlled.

In the process of S1723, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the current scenario counter is the data indicating the start of the opening (S1723). If the data indicates the start of the opening (S1723: Yes), the opening command is set (S1724). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1723, if it is determined that the opening is not started (S1723: No), the process of S1624 is executed.

Further, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 85) of the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1631 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S1631: Yes), the first Instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48) in the embodiment, the jackpot end process 2 is executed (S1732), and this process is terminated. The jackpot end process 2 (S1732) is a process for setting the jackpot end, similarly to the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48). The details of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1732) will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

As described above, in the second embodiment, since the start of the opening and the start timing of a new round can be determined by the jackpot scenario, the opening time and the interval time can be easily changed for each jackpot type. Can be controlled.

Next, the jackpot end process 2 (S1732) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing 2 (S1732). The jackpot end processing 2 (FIG. 86, S1732) is different from the ending processing (FIG. 48, S1632) in the first embodiment in that the processing of S1655 and S1656 is changed to the processing of S1731 to S1733. In the second embodiment, even if the jackpot is given the probability variation game state, the jackpot type in which the upper limit of the number of times that the normal symbol is in the time saving state is set is set, so that the processing of S1731 (time saving counter 203t) is set. The timing of the process of setting 100 to 100) has been changed and set. Further, in the final process of the jackpot end process 2 (S1730) for setting the jackpot end process, the jackpot scenario set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is cleared to 0 and reset. Thereby, whether or not the jackpot game is in progress can be determined by the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2.

As described above, according to the second embodiment, the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, time-saving gaming state ST1h, latent probability changing gaming state). Since it is configured so that a plurality of ratios for transitioning to the high probability game state after the end of the jackpot game can be set based on ST2 and the probability change game state ST3), when the second lottery game that is not a substantial fluctuation target is performed in the normal game state ST1. It is possible to extremely reduce the rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state (0% in this embodiment). With this configuration, even if an inappropriate game (illegal game) is played, it does not shift to a state advantageous for the player (high probability game state), so that the illegal game targeting the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It has the effect of being able to be suppressed.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot type selection table 202d is used to select the jackpot type based on the type of the special symbol and the game state. For example, the jackpot type is selected based on the type of the special symbol. And the selection of the interval time based on the game state may be performed using another table. Specifically, in the jackpot type selection table 202d, the jackpot type is selected based on the type of the special symbol, and an interval time corresponding to the gaming state is used by using a different table (for example, an interval time type selection table). Select. Then, the jackpot control may be performed using the selected jackpot type and the interval time. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the types of jackpot types, and there is an effect that the capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the above-mentioned interval time type selection table, the gaming state and the interval time are associated with each other (in the case of a specific gaming state, a specific interval time is always selected), but a predetermined counter (for example, an interval) is used. It may be configured so that a plurality of interval times can be selected based on the counter value of the time type counter). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the playability more complicated, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the second embodiment has been described using a pachinko machine (simultaneous fluctuation type) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time, but it is adopted for other types of gaming machines. You may. Other types of gaming machines include, for example, a type of gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the order in which they win a prize at the starting port, and a change in one special symbol causes the other special symbol. There are types of gaming machines, etc. that are executed with priority over fluctuations in.

Further, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting opening, a winning lottery is performed, and when the lottery result is the first result, the first winning opening is operated so as to be able to win a prize. During the first award game, the second award game that activates the second winning opening in a winning state when the lottery result is the second result, and the second award game, the second prize game Used for a gaming machine (1 type 2 type mixer) equipped with a third privilege game in which the first winning opening is operated so that the winning opening can be won by passing the game ball through a specific area provided in the winning opening. You may.

In the second embodiment, the game ball passes through the ball guidance path 72 only when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state, but the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state. Also, the game ball that has passed through a specific path may be configured to pass through the ball guidance path 72. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the ball flow of the game ball on the game board 13, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

Further, a game ball that has passed through a specific route other than the ball guidance route 72 may be configured to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the ball flow of the game ball on the game board 13, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

According to the second embodiment, two specific winning openings are provided in the flow path of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball that has passed through the specified winning opening on the upper side (upstream side) in the closed state is specified on the lower side (downstream side). A game in which the winning opening is reachable, and a delay guidance path is provided between the specific winning opening on the upper side (upstream side) and the specific winning opening on the lower side (downstream side) to delay the flow time of the game ball. In the machine, the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific winning opening on the downstream side is changed by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 (see FIG. 67) according to the game state (usually, probability change, latency, time reduction). Configure to be possible.

With this configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball that has won the specific winning opening on the downstream side passes through the specific area (probability change switch 65e3) provided in the specific winning opening. It is configured so that the mode of the game state that shifts (sets) after the end of the jackpot game can be changed. It is possible to provide a jackpot game that can substantially pass through V and a jackpot game that cannot (difficultly) pass through V without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the main control device 110 during the jackpot game can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment described above, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (switching member 65h) is performed according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). (Motion control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and motion control that cannot pass (difficult)) are set, and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of ratios of jackpot games that can substantially pass through the probability change switch 65e3, provide various game characteristics to the player, and improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the present embodiment, by changing the specific interval period t4, it is possible to change whether or not the game ball can win the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period, but other than that. The configuration of may be adopted. For example, the ball-guided path passage time, which is the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball-guided path 72, may be switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V opening period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game is shown. For example, in the first round, the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state. 1 In the case of a jackpot game in which the specific winning opening 65a is open, the period of change according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With this configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be longer than the ball-guided route transit time, the jackpot game starts (start of the opening period t1) on the right. The struck game ball can win a prize in the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6, and can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball-guided route passing time, the game ball hit right with the start of the jackpot game becomes the first within the V valid period t6. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

Further, when different times can be set as the specific interval time, the time of the predetermined interval period after the specific interval period is set so as to cancel the difference of the specific interval time during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is performed. It is preferable to configure the sum of the interval times in the above to match. With this configuration, for example, the time used for each process performed using the interval period when the amount of information processing is small during the big hit game can be unified, and stable processing can be executed. It has the effect of becoming.

In the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 (delayed guiding path) is provided so that the ball guiding path passing time becomes (delays) a predetermined time, but the inlet (opening 70a) and the exit (exhaust section 70e) of this path ), A detection means (sensor) for detecting the passage of the game ball may be provided, and a means for determining (monitoring) whether the game ball is passing within a predetermined time may be provided. By using such a configuration, it is possible to easily detect a ball clogging that occurs in the ball guiding path 72 and a fraudulent act that intentionally causes the game ball to stay in the guiding path using a magnet or a ball with a thread. It has the effect of being possible.

The first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guidance path 72 (see FIG. 65) used in the second embodiment may be used in the following gaming machines. .. That is, the number of rounds of the jackpot game has a first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round number (for example, 15 rounds), and the first to twelfth rounds are variable prizes provided on the upper side of the game board 13. The device (second variable winning device 650) is opened, and from the 13th round to the 15th round, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) provided on the lower side of the game board 13 is opened. It may be used for a game machine.

By using the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guiding path 72 used in the second embodiment for such a gaming machine, the launched gaming ball is wasted. It is possible to entertain the production during the jackpot game by using a specific interval time between specific rounds (between the 12th and 13th rounds).

Specifically, at the end of the 12th round, the second variable winning device 650 is closed, and the game ball flows down to the ball guidance path 72. Since the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guidance path 72 is set to 3 to 4 seconds (see FIG. 65), the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a of the ball guidance path 72 is the first variable winning device. It takes at least 3 seconds to reach 65.

Using the time (arrival time) required for the game ball to reach the first variable winning device 65, a production between rounds (a production that fuels whether this jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot). By doing this, even if you continue the right-handed game, you can eliminate (reduce) useless game balls (game balls that do not win in the specific winning opening of the variable winning device even though you are hitting the jackpot). is there.

That is, if the above-mentioned production during the jackpot game is executed on a gaming machine having one variable winning device, the variable winning device is passed during the specific interval time (the specific winning opening of the variable winning device is closed). Even though the game ball is in a big hit game, it cannot win a prize in the specific winning opening, resulting in a useless game ball. In addition, if the specific interval time is shortened in order to reduce unnecessary game balls, the production that is executed between specific rounds (the production that fuels whether this jackpot game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot). There is a problem that the effect is weakened.

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned effect during the jackpot game is executed by the gaming machine using the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 that allows the gaming ball to flow down when the second variable winning device 650 is closed is provided. Since the effect is performed during a specific interval time using the time (3 to 4 seconds) when the game ball flows down, it is possible to suppress the wasted ball generated during the jackpot, and the effect executed between specific rounds (this jackpot). There is an effect that the effect of (directing to incite whether the game is a 12-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot) can be strengthened.

If the interval time between specific rounds is set shorter than the time during which the game ball flows down the ball guidance path 72, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 reaches the first variable winning device 65. Since the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state, it is possible to prevent unnecessary game balls from being generated.

As an effect in this case, it is conceivable to divert the display data displayed in the ending period of the 12-round jackpot and display it at the specific interval time of the 15-round jackpot. By adopting such an effect, it is possible to reduce the amount of display data and make the player think that it is a 12-round jackpot, and when the 13th round is started, the player can be made to think. It has the effect of being able to provide surprise and joy.

In addition, a detection means for detecting a game ball flowing down in the ball guidance path 72 is provided, and when the detection means detects a game ball during a specific interval period, this jackpot is a 15-round jackpot (the jackpot is still). (Continued) may be notified. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the act of stopping the firing of the game ball during the interval period during the jackpot game can be suppressed.

Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined as follows. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged in parallel, and the game ball meanders in the horizontal direction from the second variable winning device 650 toward the first variable winning device 65. A configuration provided with a guidance path for guiding the player may be used in the following gaming machines. That is, a variable winning device (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round (for example, 15 rounds) are provided as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the first to twelfth rounds are provided on the upstream side. The second variable winning device 650) is opened, and from the 13th round to the 15th round, the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65) provided on the downstream side is opened. May be good.

In this configuration, when the variable winning device provided on the upstream side is closed, the game ball rolls on the guidance path and is guided to the variable winning device on the downstream side. This guidance path is configured to meander in the horizontal direction so that a predetermined time (time equal to or longer than the interval period, for example, 3 seconds) is required for the game ball to pass. The upstream variable winning device and the downstream variable winning device are set with a plurality of opening patterns so that they are opened in a predetermined order during one jackpot game, and the opening patterns are set according to the type of jackpot. Is set.

Then, the opening / closing status of each variable winning device can be displayed by the display means. That is, the player can grasp the situation in which the variable winning device is closed by checking the display means. However, it is displayed so that it cannot be determined whether the closing status is the interval period (during the jackpot) or the ending period (end of the jackpot).

By using such a configuration, for example, it is shown that the variable winning device is closed to the display means in the interval period when the variable winning device on the upstream side is closed and then the variable winning device on the downstream side is opened. By displaying the effect (closed effect) by the display means, the player plays the game while expecting whether the jackpot game is over or still to be continued. Then, when the interval period ends and the variable winning device on the downstream side is opened, at the same time, an effect (opening effect) indicating that the variable winning device is opened is displayed on the display means. At the timing when this opening effect is displayed on the display means, the game ball rolling on the guidance path has not reached the variable winning device on the downstream side (the time required to pass through the guidance path rather than the interval time). (Because it is longer), while the closing effect is being executed (while the variable winning device on the upstream side is closed), the game ball that rolls the guidance path is surely won in the variable winning device on the downstream side. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the waste of the game ball while executing the effect indicating the closure of the variable winning device in the jackpot game. When using such a configuration, it is advisable to prepare a plurality of types of opening patterns for each variable winning device in the jackpot game.

Hereinafter, a modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

<Modification 1 of the second embodiment>
In the first modification, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from that of the second embodiment described above, and gameability different from that of the second embodiment described above is provided. Specifically, as will be described later, in this modified example, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state ST1 and the game shifts to the probability variation game state ST3, the value is high only for a predetermined period (during 100 rotations) after the end of the jackpot game. It has a game property (so-called two-time loop) in which a jackpot is won at least twice while maintaining a stochastic game state.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flow in which various gaming states in this modified example are set. In this modification 1, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from that of the second embodiment described above. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, since the distribution is the same as that of the second embodiment described above during the normal game state ST1, the description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of jackpots in the probabilistic game state ST3 will be described.

During the probability change game state ST3, the actual fluctuation target is set in the special figure 2, and if the big hit is won in the special figure 2, there is a 100% probability of the high probability game state (probability change game state ST3 or latent probability change game state ST2). Move to. In addition, this probabilistic game state ST3 does not win the jackpot, and if the fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times, the electric support ends and the game shifts to the latent probabilistic game state ST2. While staying in the probability-variable game state ST3 (until the end of the electric support), the person will play the game while paying attention to win the next big hit.

Next, in the latent probability variation game state ST2, the distribution is set so that the pullback jackpot that shifts to the probability variation game state ST3 is 34% and the jackpot that shifts to the time saving game state ST1h (falls) is 66%.

Next, in the time-saving game state ST1h, the distribution is set so that the pullback jackpot that shifts to the probabilistic game state ST3 is 75% and the jackpot that shifts to the normal game state ST1 (falls) is 25%. At this time, in the short game state ST1h, if the special symbol changes more than 100 times without winning the jackpot, the electric support ends and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. By winning the jackpot during this period, the distribution is set so that the ratio of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state ST3, which is the high-probability gaming state, is higher than that of the normal gaming state ST1 which is the same low-probability state.

As described above, in the present modification 1, once the low probability state (normal game state ST1) is shifted to the high probability game state (probability change game state ST3), the special symbol variation 100 after a predetermined period (after the big hit). Only up to 2 times), then 2 big hits are guaranteed while maintaining the high probability game state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability gaming state, and then has the purpose of winning a big hit within a predetermined period in the special symbol game performed in the high-probability gaming state. The game can be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A modified example 2 of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 88.

<Modification 2 of the second embodiment>
In the second modification, the upper limit number (110 times) is set for the number of games (variation number) in the high-probability gaming state, and the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from the second embodiment described above. , The game property different from that of the second embodiment described above is provided. Specifically, as will be described later, in this modified example, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state ST1 and the game shifts to the probability variation game state ST3, a specific period (high probability game) after a predetermined period has passed after the jackpot game is completed. Only during the latent probability change game state ST2 in which the electric support is completed), the game property (so-called two-time loop) in which the jackpot is won at least twice while maintaining the high-probability game state. It is equipped. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flow in which various gaming states in this modified example are set. In this modification 2, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from that of the second embodiment described above. Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, since the distribution is the same as that of the second embodiment described above during the normal game state ST1, the description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of jackpots in the probabilistic game state ST3 will be described.

In this modification 2, the high-probability gaming state is set to shift (fall) to the low-probability state when the special symbol fluctuates 110 times without winning the jackpot. In this probability variation game state ST3, the actual fluctuation target is set in the special figure 2, and if the big hit is won in the special figure 2, the probability variation game state ST3 is set again with a probability of 70% and is low with a probability of 30%. Move to the stochastic state. This probabilistic game state ST3 shifts to the latent probabilistic game state ST2 when the electric support ends when the fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot.

Next, in the latent probability change game state ST2, after the jackpot ends, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starts from the 101st rotation, and the high probability game state shifts (falls) to the low probability state until the 110th rotation. It is a game state executed in. If a big hit is won during this latent probability changing game state ST2, there is a 100% probability of shifting to a high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state ST3 or latent probability changing gaming state ST2).

Next, in the time-saving game state ST1h, the distribution is set so that the pullback jackpot that shifts to the probabilistic game state ST3 is 90% and the jackpot that shifts to the normal game state ST1 (falls) is 10%. At this time, in the short game state ST1h, if the special symbol changes more than 100 times without winning the jackpot, the electric support ends and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. By winning the jackpot during this period, the distribution is set so that the ratio of shifting to the probabilistic gaming state ST3, which is the high-probability gaming state, is higher than that of the normal gaming state ST1 which is the same low-probability state.

As described above, in the present modification 2, the low probability state (normal game state ST1) is temporarily shifted to the high probability game state (probability change game state ST3), and then the number of fluctuations is a predetermined number of times (after the big hit). Only for a specific period (latent probability change game state ST2) after the lapse of (up to 100 special symbol fluctuations), two jackpots are guaranteed while maintaining the high probability game state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability gaming state, and thereafter, in the special symbol game performed in the high-probability gaming state, the player does not win within the predetermined period and after the predetermined period elapses. It is possible to continue the game with the purpose of winning a big hit during a specific period of. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A modified example 3 of the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 89.

<Modification 3 of the second embodiment>
In the third modification, a shortened path 75 is provided as another path in the ball guiding path 72 provided in the front view right side region of the game board 13 of the second embodiment described above, and the flowing game ball is guided by the ball. A distribution mechanism 75a that divides the shortened path 72 into a shortened path 75, a path that guides the game ball that has flowed down the shortened path 75 to the first variable winning device 65, and a path that guides the game board 13 to the area below the front view of the game board 13. It differs in that it is provided with a distribution mechanism 75b. Other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89 is an enlarged view of a region on the right side of the front view of the game board 13 of the third modification. In this modification, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state is alternately distributed to the ball guidance path 72 and the shortened path 75 by the distribution mechanism 75a. Here, the distribution mechanism 75a is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and the rotation range (rotation angle) is regulated by the rotation restricting member. Since the game balls distributed to the ball guidance path 72 flow down the same path as in the second embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, the shortened path 75 is configured so that the trajectory of the ball is more linear than that of the ball guiding path 72, so that at least the game ball distributed to the ball guiding path 72 first reaches the discharge unit 70e. In order to quickly discharge the ball from the shortened path 75, the time for the game ball to pass through the shortened path is set to 2 seconds. By providing the flow paths of the game balls having different shapes in this way and distributing the game balls to any of the paths by the distribution mechanism, it is possible to intentionally change the flow order of the game balls on the game board 13. (It is possible to let the game board 13 flow down in an order different from the order in which it was fired).

By using such a configuration, for example, when the game ball that first passed through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the shortening path 75 in the specific interval period, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. If it becomes possible to win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 within the period, while the game ball that first passes through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the ball guidance path 72, the probability change switch. It is possible to make it impossible (difficult) to make the game ball win the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 within the period during which the game ball can pass through 65e3.

Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 depending on which path the game ball flows down, so that the player is provided with the game property of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3 by himself / herself. This has the effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in this modification, a distribution mechanism 75b is provided for guiding the game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 to the first variable winning device 65 and a path for guiding the game ball to the area below the front view of the game board 13. ing. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 is guided to the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the flow path of the game ball on the game board 13 can be further complicated, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball.

Further, even if a distribution mechanism in which the distribution destination is determined in a predetermined order is used as in this modification, a plurality of distributions are made by the time the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3. Since the game is distributed to a plurality of flow paths by the mechanism, it is possible to make it difficult to set the state of each distribution mechanism using the launched game ball so that the distribution destination becomes a predetermined distribution destination in advance.

Further, when the first variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the ball guiding path 72 flows down on the first variable winning device 65, comes into contact with the sorting mechanism 75b, and rotates the sorting mechanism 75b. While changing the state, it flows down toward the bottom of the game board. As a result, the rotational state of the distribution mechanism 75b is constantly changing.

In this modification, only the game ball that has flowed down the shortened path 75 reaches the distribution mechanism 75b, but the game ball that has flowed down the ball guidance path 72 may also reach the distribution mechanism 75b. Further, a distribution mechanism 75c (not shown) that distributes only the game balls that have flowed down the ball guidance path 72 may be separately provided. With such a configuration, the flow path of the game ball can be further complicated, the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball, and for example, the pachinko ball passes through the closed second variable winning device 650. Which route the game ball is distributed to by using it in a pachinko machine that determines whether or not the game ball will win the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 during the period when the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. It is possible to change the possibility of entering the probabilistic gaming state.

Further, since a plurality of distribution mechanisms are provided on the path through which the game ball flows down during a right-handed game other than during the jackpot game, each distribution mechanism is distributed when a game in which the game ball is passed through the probability change switch 65e3 is performed. It becomes difficult to adjust the position in advance, and it becomes possible to make the game result random.

In this modified example, a distribution mechanism for distributing the game ball in two directions is used, but a distribution mechanism for distributing the game ball in three or more directions may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ball flow of the game ball more complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

Further, in this modification, a mechanism for physically distributing the game ball is used as the distribution mechanism, but other configurations may be used. For example, a lottery is performed based on passing through a predetermined area, and the lottery result is obtained. A means for determining the distribution direction may be provided.

Further, in this modification, the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state reaches the distribution mechanism 75a, but is located upstream of the second variable winning device 650 (the game ball is the second). The area before reaching the variable winning device 650) may be configured to reach the sorting mechanism 75a. In this case, the game balls sorted in a predetermined direction by the sorting mechanism 75a are the second variable winning device. A game ball that flows down toward the ball and is distributed in a direction other than a predetermined direction separately passes through a specific flow-down path (for example, a shortening path 75 or a ball guidance path 72), and a game ball that has passed through the specific flow-down path. The distribution mechanism 75b may be configured to distribute the game ball route to reach the first variable winning device and other routes. With this configuration, it is possible to make the game balls distributed by the distribution mechanism 75a in directions other than the second variable winning device 650 direction reach the first variable winning device 65 side by the distribution mechanism 75b. ..

With this configuration, the game ball that did not win the second variable winning device 650 in the open state may be distributed to the first variable winning device 65 in the open state so that the player can win the prize. It has the effect of being able to provide unexpected games.

By configuring the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 so as not to notify the player of the timing when the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is opened during the jackpot game, the player moves the game ball on the game board. There is an effect that the game can be enjoyed while observing the opening / closing status of each variable winning device.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 100. In the second embodiment described above, four gaming states having different degrees of advantage are provided, and each gaming state is switched back and forth with a big hit or the like as an opportunity. Then, in the most advantageous latent probability change game state ST2, the configuration is such that the game shifts to another game state only when a big hit is made, and even if a big hit is made, the latent probability is 90% again after the big hit. The probability variation game state ST2 is set (the latent probability variation game state ST2 is looped). Further, when transitioning from the latent probability-changing gaming state ST2 to another gaming state, the configuration is basically such that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state ST3, which is relatively advantageous for the player. As a result, once it is possible to shift to the latent probability change game state ST2, when a small hit is made in a special symbol lottery, a small hit 3 that makes it easy to win many prize balls is set, and a large amount. Since the jackpot that can win the prize ball is repeated at a rate of 90%, it is extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, since the game can be performed with one goal of shifting to the advantageous latent probability change state ST2, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, when the state shifts to the latent probability change game state ST3, the player can have a greater sense of satisfaction.

Further, in the second embodiment described above, when the latent probability changing game state ST2 is the most advantageous for the player, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the display mode of the rooftop mode (see FIGS. 70 and 71). ), And the lottery result is notified by the contents of the treasure box installed on the roof. That is, if the content of the treasure box is a treasure, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, and if the content of the treasure box is a monster, the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. As a result, it was possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

In addition to this, in the third embodiment, when a monster appears from the treasure box in the rooftop mode, a frame is used as a kind of hobby production to suggest the degree of expectation of the battle during the production of battle with the monster. It is configured to be able to execute an effect (continuous hitting effect) that encourages the continuous pressing of the button 22. In this continuous hitting effect, an effect of changing the display mode according to the number of times the player presses the frame button 22 is executed. Then, the higher the expectation of winning the monster, the easier it is to change the display mode. With this configuration, the frame button 22 can be positively operated by a player who wants to know the degree of expectation of the continuous hitting effect.

Further, in the continuous hitting effect in the present embodiment, the interval at which the player presses the frame button 22 is monitored, and the pressing sound for pressing the frame button 22 is made different according to the pressing interval. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the variation of the production without changing the display mode.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, the continuous striking effect in the third embodiment will be described. As described above, the continuous hitting effect is an effect that may be executed during a battle with the appearing monster when the monster appears from the treasure box in the rooftop mode and becomes a big hit (see FIG. 71).

FIG. 90A is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the battle with the monster is started. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), when the jackpot is started and the battle is started, the third symbol display device 81 displays a mode in which a male character holding a sword and a shield and a monster are glaring at each other. Shield. In addition, the characters "Win the enemy !!" are displayed above the male character and the monster, and the characters "If you win, the rooftop mode continues !!" are displayed below. .. With these characters, if the monster is defeated, the player can easily understand that the "rooftop mode" (latent probability change game state ST2) is set again after the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make people more interested in the transition of the battle.

In the battle production, various productions such as a production in which a male character attacks a monster and a production in which a monster attacks a male are executed. In this battle, if the male character can finally defeat the monster, it will indicate that it will re-enter the "rooftop mode" after the jackpot, and if it succumbs to the monster's attack and escapes, "tower search" after the jackpot ends. Indicates that the mode (1F) is to be entered. In addition, if you hit left in the rooftop mode and win a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, and you win a big hit in which the V operation of "V is not possible" is set, or the player launches a ball during the big hit. If the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, such as when there is no such thing, the effect that the male character is defeated by the monster is executed. With these effects, the player can clearly understand the game state (mode) after the jackpot is finished.

FIG. 90B is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the continuous striking effect is executed. Whether or not to perform the continuous hitting effect during the battle effect is determined at the start of the jackpot in the "rooftop mode". The details will be described later, but the rate of repeated hits is higher when the "rooftop mode" is reset than when the "tower search mode (1F)" is set after the jackpot ends. It is configured to be. As a result, the player can be expected to reset the "rooftop mode" when the continuous hitting effect occurs.

As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the continuous striking effect is started, the sword of the male character changes to a mode wearing an aura. In addition, the characters "Get enthusiastic by hitting repeatedly !!" appear above the man, and an image imitating the frame button 22 is displayed below the display area in which the characters are displayed. These characters and images make it easy for the player to understand that the frame button 22 should be repeatedly hit. Further, below the image imitating the frame button 22, a display area with the characters "Ki Lv1" appears. Although the details will be described later, there is a possibility that the numerical value of this spirit Lv increases according to the number of times the player repeatedly hits (operates) the frame button 22. In addition, as the spirit Lv rises, the amount of aura possessed by the character also increases. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the attack power of the character increases according to the number of repeated hits. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be repeatedly hit (operated) more positively.

Next, an effect mode according to the interval of repeated hits performed by the player will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b). FIG. 91 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the spirit Lv rises in a state where it is detected that the interval between repeated hits is short (5 times or more in 2 seconds). is there. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the spirit Lv is increased from Lv1 to Lv2, the aura worn by the male sword is increased as a whole, and the characters in the display area displayed on the right side of the male character are displayed. , Updated to "Ki Lv2". In addition, in the case of shifting to a higher Lv according to the number of repeated hits by the player, an effect in which the amount of aura increases in proportion to the Lv is executed.

Further, when the interval between repeated hits is relatively short, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), a relatively short pressing sound (sound effect) of "da" is output each time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. To. As a result, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22, the sound is output as "Dadadada ...". By outputting a relatively short sound as a pressing sound when the continuous striking interval is short, the possibility that a new operation of the frame button 22 is detected before the output of the pressing sound is completed is reduced, and the player can use the frame. Each time the button 22 is pressed (operated), a pressing sound can be output.

FIG. 91 (b) shows a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the spirit Lv rises in a state where it is detected that the pressing interval of the frame button 22 is relatively long (twice or less in 2 seconds). It is a figure which showed. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), when the spirit Lv rises while the interval between repeated hits is relatively long, the aura concentrates on the tip of the sword and the characters in the display area displayed on the right side of the male character become " It will be updated to "Ki Lv2". In addition, in the case of shifting to a higher Lv according to the number of repeated hits by the player, an effect in which the amount of aura concentrated on the tip of the sword increases in proportion to the Lv is executed.

Further, when the interval between repeated hits is relatively long, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), a relatively long pressing sound of "Don" is output every time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. As a result, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22, the sound is output as "Don't Don't Don't ...". When the interval between repeated hits is long, even if a long pressing sound is set, the possibility of detecting a new operation during the output of the pressing sound is low. Therefore, since the pressing sound having a length corresponding to the player's repeated hitting interval can be set, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Although not shown, when the continuous hitting effect is completed, the monster is attacked according to the mode of the aura (spirit Lv) at the end of the effect. The higher the spirit Lv, the greater the damage done when the monster is hit, so it becomes easier to defeat the monster. Therefore, when the continuous hitting effect occurs, the player can positively operate the frame button 22 in order to raise the spirit Lv.

Further, in the third embodiment, there are two types of pressing sounds for pressing the frame button 22 during the continuous striking effect, a normal voice output pattern and a chance-up pattern. In the normal voice output pattern, when the press on the frame button 22 is detected, the sound is output without a time lag, whereas in the chance-up pattern, the press on the frame button 22 is detected for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1). The pressing sound is output with a delay (seconds). As a result, the timing of the pressing operation and the timing at which the pressing sound is output can be shifted, so that the player can easily recognize that an effect different from the usual one is being performed.

This normal pattern and the chance-up pattern will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92A is a diagram showing a timekeeping change between the player's pressing timing and the pressing sound output period in the continuous striking effect in which the normal pressing sound pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), when a normal voice output pattern is set, when a press is detected, a press sound with a volume of 70% is immediately output. As a result, the pressing sound can be output in conjunction with the pressing of the frame button 22, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, when a press is detected during the output of the press sound, a new press sound is not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the pressing sounds from being output in an overlapping manner.

FIG. 92B is a diagram showing a timekeeping change between the pressing timing of the player and the output period of the pressing sound in the continuous striking effect in which the chance-up pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 92B, when the continuous hitting effect of the chance-up pattern is set, when the pressing is detected, the pressing sound is output after a time lag of 0.1 seconds. As a result, the timing of the pressing operation and the timing at which the pressing sound is output can be shifted, so that the player can easily recognize that an effect different from the usual one is being performed. Further, as in the normal pattern, when a press is detected during the output of the press sound, a new press sound is not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the pressing sounds from being output in an overlapping manner.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (a). FIG. 93A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is based on the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first and second embodiments described above (see FIG. 21 (a)). The difference is that the continuous hitting effect selection table 222b, the pressing sound selection table 222c, and the rank-up number selection table 222d are added.

The continuous striking effect selection table 222b is a data table used for determining whether or not to execute the continuous striking effect and the effect type of the continuous striking effect when executing the continuous striking effect. The details of the continuous striking effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (a).

As shown in FIG. 94 (a), in the continuous striking effect selection table 222b, the effect type of the continuous striking effect is defined in association with each value range of the effect counter 223j. Further, in this continuous hitting effect selection table 222b, a table for the jackpot type is jackpot E (after the jackpot is "tower search mode (1F)") and a table for the jackpot type is jackpot F (after the jackpot is "rooftop mode"). And are provided.

When the jackpot type is jackpot E, the value of the effect counter 223j is defined in association with the range of "0 to 49" as the effect type "no continuous hit effect". Therefore, in the determination of whether or not the continuous hitting effect executed at the start of the jackpot E can be executed, if the value of the effect counter 223j is within the range of "0 to 49", in the battle effect executed by the jackpot E, the repeated hits are performed. The production is not executed. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the effect counter 223j can take, 50 random values (counter values) for which "no continuous hit effect" is selected are set, so a big hit in "rooftop mode". When it becomes E, the ratio that the continuous hitting effect is not executed in the battle effect during the big hit is 50% (50/100).

Further, for the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of "50 to 79", "normal A" is defined in association with the effect type. Here, "normal A" is a continuous striking effect in which the specified number of times (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) until the Lv is increased (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) is the largest (the Lv is difficult to increase) among the continuous striking effects of the normal mode. Also, no matter how many times the player hits, it can only rise to Lv4 (Lv does not reach MAX). As mentioned above, as the Lv rises, the attack power of the male character increases and the expectation for defeating the monster increases, so "Normal A", where the Lv is difficult to rise, is the production with the lowest expectation for defeating the monster. .. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the effect counter 223j can take, 30 random values (counter values) for which "normal A" is selected are set, so the jackpot E in the "rooftop mode" In the case of, the ratio of the continuous hitting effect of "normal A" being executed in the battle effect during the jackpot is 30% (30/100).

Further, for the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of "80 to 94", "normal B" is defined in association with the effect type. Here, in the "normal B", the specified number of times (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) until the Lv is increased is smaller than that of the "normal A" (than the "normal A") in the continuous striking effect of the normal mode. It is a continuous hit production (high expectation to defeat monsters). Further, as in the case of "normal A", Lv does not reach MAX. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the effect counter 223j can take, 15 random values (counter values) for which "normal B" is selected are set, so the jackpot E in the "rooftop mode" In the case of, the ratio of the continuous hitting effect of "normal B" being executed in the battle effect during the jackpot is 15% (15/100).

Further, for the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of "95 to 99", "chance up A" is defined in association with the effect type. Here, in "Chance Up A", the specified number of times (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) until Lv is increased in the continuous hitting effect in which the chance up pattern is set is compared with "Chance Up B" described later. It is a lot of repeated hits. Further, as in the case of "normal A" and "normal B", it is a continuous striking effect in which Lv does not reach MAX. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the production counter 223j can take, 5 random values (counter values) for which "chance up A" is selected are set, so a big hit in "rooftop mode" When it becomes E, the ratio of the continuous hitting effect of "Chance Up A" being executed in the battle effect during the jackpot is 5% (5/100).

When the jackpot type is jackpot F, the value of the effect counter 223j is defined in association with the range of "0 to 24" as the effect type "no continuous hit effect". Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the effect counter 223j can take, 25 random values (counter values) for which "no continuous hit effect" is selected are set, so a big hit in "rooftop mode". When it becomes F, the ratio that the continuous hitting effect is not executed in the battle effect during the big hit is 25% (25/100).

Further, for the range in which the value of the effect counter 223j is "25 to 39", "normal A" is defined in association with the effect type. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the effect counter 223j can take, 15 random values (counter values) for which "normal A" is selected are set, so the jackpot F in the "rooftop mode" In the case of, the ratio of the continuous hitting effect of "normal A" being executed in the battle effect during the jackpot is 15% (15/100).

Further, for the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of "40 to 74", "normal B" is defined in association with the effect type. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the effect counter 223j can take, 35 random values (counter values) for which "normal B" is selected are set, so the jackpot E in the "rooftop mode" In the case of, the ratio of the continuous hitting effect of "normal B" being executed in the battle effect during the jackpot is 35% (35/100).

Further, for the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of "75 to 79", "normal C" is defined in association with the effect type. This "normal C" is a continuous striking effect in which the ease of increasing Lv is equivalent to that of "normal B" in Lv1 to Lv3, and there is a possibility that the increase from Lv4 to the maximum Lv (MAX). Since there is a possibility that Lv will reach MAX in the continuous hitting effect only for "normal C" and "chance up B" selected in the case of jackpot F, when the spirit Lv rises to MAX in the continuous hitting production. So, before confirming the result of the battle, it is possible to let the player know that the jackpot this time is the jackpot F. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the "rooftop mode" will continue earlier than the result of the battle, so that the player can confirm the remaining battle effect with confidence. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the effect counter 223j can take, 5 random values (counter values) for which "normal C" is selected are set, so the jackpot F in the "rooftop mode" In the case of, the ratio of the continuous hitting effect of "normal C" being executed in the battle effect during the jackpot is 5% (5/100).

Further, for the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of "80 to 97", "chance up A" is defined in association with the effect type. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the production counter 223j can take, 13 random values (counter values) for which "chance up A" is selected are set, so a big hit in "rooftop mode". In the case of F, the ratio of the continuous hitting effect of "Chance Up A" being executed in the battle effect during the jackpot is 13% (13/100).

Further, for the range in which the value of the effect counter 223j is "98,99", "chance up B" is defined in association with the effect type. This "chance up B" is a continuous striking effect in which the ease of increasing Lv is the same as that of "chance up A" in Lv1 to Lv3, and there is a possibility that the increase from Lv4 to the maximum Lv (MAX). .. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the value of the production counter 223j can take, two random values (counter values) for which "chance up B" is selected are set, so a big hit in "rooftop mode". In the case of F, the ratio of the continuous hitting effect of "Chance Up A" being executed in the battle effect during the jackpot is 2% (2/100).

As described above, in the case of the jackpot F, the ratio of selecting "no continuous hitting effect" is lower than that of the jackpot E (50% → 25%). Therefore, when the continuous hitting effect occurs, the player can have a feeling of expectation of jackpot F (the rooftop mode continues). In addition, the jackpot F has a lower rate of selecting "normal A" and a higher rate of selecting "normal B" or "chance up A", so that the Lv tends to rise. If it is felt that the pressing sound is delayed with respect to the pressing of the frame button 22, it can be determined that there is a high possibility that it is not "normal A", so that the player is expected to continue the "rooftop mode". Can be embraced.

Further, when the jackpot F is reached, there is a possibility that "normal C" or "chance up B", which is not selected in the jackpot E, is selected. Only when these "normal C" or "chance up B" are selected, there is a possibility that the spirit Lv will rise to MAX in the continuous hitting effect. Therefore, if the spirit Lv rises to MAX as a result of repeated hits by the player, it is confirmed that the jackpot is F at that point (re-entry into the "rooftop mode" after the jackpot), which pleases the player. Can be made. In this way, since the distribution of the production type selected is different depending on whether it is the jackpot E or the jackpot F, whether or not it is the jackpot F depending on the mode of the production and the degree of increase in Lv. Can be predicted. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that he / she wants to make continuous hits positively during the continuous hitting production, so that the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 93 (a). The pressing sound selection table 222c is a data table used for selecting a pressing sound to be output when the frame button 22 is pressed. The details of the pressing sound selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (b). FIG. 94 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the pressing sound selection table 222c.

As shown in FIG. 94 (b), in the pressing sound selection table 222c, the effect type of the continuous striking effect and the type of the pressing sound are defined in association with each other for each continuous striking interval. Here, although the details will be described later, the continuous hitting interval means the interval at which the player presses the frame button 22 during the continuous hitting effect, and is indicated by the data (01H to 03H) stored in the continuous hitting interval storage area 223p. Is done. “01H” is the data corresponding to the shortest continuous striking interval, and 03H is the data corresponding to the longest continuous striking interval.

When the normal pattern of continuous hitting effect (normally any of A to C) is executed, when the continuous hitting interval is "01H" (the shortest continuous hitting interval), the pressing sound is "no short interval delay" (no short interval delay). (See FIG. 91 (a)) is selected. Further, when the continuous striking interval is "02H" (intermediate continuous striking interval), "normal interval no delay" is selected as the pressing sound, and when the continuous striking interval is "03H" (longest continuous striking interval), the pressing sound is selected. As “No long interval delay” (see FIG. 91 (b)) is selected.

On the other hand, when the chance-up pattern continuous hitting effect (either chance-up A or C) is executed, when the continuous hitting interval is "01H" (the shortest continuous hitting interval), the pressing sound is "short interval delay". When "Yes" is selected and the continuous striking interval is "02H" (intermediate continuous striking interval), "Normal interval delay is present" is selected as the pressing sound, and when the continuous striking interval is "03H" (longest continuous striking interval). In addition, "with long interval delay" is selected as the pressing sound. As a result, in the case of the chance-up pattern, the pressing of the frame button 22 and the generation timing of the pressing sound can be shifted, so that the player can easily recognize the chance-up pattern.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 93 (a). The rank-up number selection table 222d is a data table in which the number of presses until the next Lv is increased during the execution of the continuous hitting effect is defined for each effect type and the continuous hitting interval. The details of the rank-up number selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rank-up number selection table 222d.

As shown in FIG. 95, in the rank-up number selection table 222d, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed from each Lv to the next Lv is defined for each effect type and continuous hit interval. .. Specifically, when the effect type is "normal A" and the continuous striking interval is "01H" (shortest interval), 10 consecutive striking times are defined in association with each other as the number of continuous striking to rank up from Lv1 to Lv2, and Lv2. The number of repeated hits for ranking from Lv3 to Lv3 is defined as 20 times in association with each other, and the number of repeated hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4 is specified as 20 times in association with each other. On the other hand, the number of times to rank up from Lv4 to MAX Lv is not specified. Therefore, no matter how many times the player presses the frame button 22 at Lv4, the rank up does not occur.

In addition, when the effect type is "normal A" and the continuous striking interval is "02H" (intermediate interval), the number of continuous striking to rank up from Lv1 to Lv2 is defined as 8 times in association with each other, from Lv2 to Lv3. The number of repeated hits for ranking is defined as 15 times in association with each other, and the number of repeated hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4 is specified as 15 times in association with each other. On the other hand, as in the case where the continuous striking interval is "01H", the number of times to rank up from Lv4 to MAX Lv is not specified.

In addition, when the effect type is "normal A" and the continuous striking interval is "03H" (the longest interval), the number of continuous striking to rank up from Lv1 to Lv2 is defined as 5 times in association with each other, from Lv2 to Lv3. The number of repeated hits for ranking is specified in association with 10 times, and the number of repeated hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4 is specified in association with 10 times. On the other hand, as in the case where the continuous hit interval is "01H, 02H", the number of times to rank up from Lv4 to MAX Lv is not specified.

In this way, even with the same production type, the number of repeated hits until the rank up occurs is different according to the repeated hit interval, and the shorter the repeated hit interval, the larger the number of repeated hits required for the rank up. With such a configuration, a player who is not good at repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 at high speed can be ranked up with a small number of repeated hits, and a player who is good at repeated hits can be ranked up with a large number of repeated hits. Since the rank can be raised, the degree of development (rank up) of the production can be matched with the skill of the player. Therefore, regardless of the player, the opportunity to rank up can be given fairly.

When the effect type is "normal B" and the continuous hit interval is "01H" (the shortest interval), 10 times are specified in association with the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv1 to Lv2, and rank from Lv2 to Lv3. The number of repeated hits for this purpose is defined as 15 times in association with each other, and the number of repeated hits for upgrading from Lv3 to Lv4 is specified in association with 15 times. On the other hand, the number of times to rank up from Lv4 to MAX Lv is not specified.

In addition, when the effect type is "normal B" and the continuous striking interval is "02H" (intermediate interval), the number of continuous striking to rank up from Lv1 to Lv2 is defined as 8 times in association with each other, from Lv2 to Lv3. The number of repeated hits for ranking is specified in association with 10 times, and the number of repeated hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4 is specified in association with 10 times. On the other hand, the number of times to rank up from Lv4 to MAX Lv is not specified.

In addition, when the effect type is "normal B" and the continuous striking interval is "03H" (the longest interval), the number of continuous striking to rank up from Lv1 to Lv2 is defined as 5 times in association with each other, from Lv2 to Lv3. Eight times are associated and defined as the number of repeated hits for ranking, and eight times are associated and defined as the number of repeated hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4. On the other hand, the number of times to rank up from Lv4 to MAX Lv is not specified.

As described above, when the effect type is "normal B", the number of repeated hits for ranking up is set to be smaller than that of "normal A", so that it is easy to rank up. As a result, it is possible to predict the production type of the continuous hitting production this time from the ease of ranking up. As mentioned above, "Normal B" is more likely to be selected by jackpot F than "Normal A", so if the number of times to rank up is small, the expectation that "Rooftop mode" will continue will be increased. Can be done.

When the effect type is "normal C" and the continuous striking interval is "01H" (shortest interval), 10 consecutive striking times are defined in association with each other to rank up from Lv1 to Lv2, and rank from Lv2 to Lv3. The number of repeated hits for this is specified in association with 15 times, and the number of repeated hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4 is specified in association with 15 times, and the number of repeated hits for ranking up from Lv4 to MAX Lv is 30. The times are specified.

In addition, when the effect type is "normal C" and the continuous striking interval is "02H" (intermediate interval), the number of continuous striking to rank up from Lv1 to Lv2 is defined as 8 times in association with each other, from Lv2 to Lv3. The number of repeated hits to rank is specified in association with 10 times, and the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv3 to Lv4 is specified in association with 10 times, and the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv4 to MAX Lv. 20 times is specified as.

In addition, when the effect type is "normal C" and the continuous striking interval is "03H" (the longest interval), the number of continuous striking to rank up from Lv1 to Lv2 is defined as 5 times in association with each other, from Lv2 to Lv3. The number of repeated hits to rank is specified in association with 8 times, and the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv3 to Lv4 is specified in association with 8 times, and the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv4 to MAX Lv. 15 times is specified.

As described above, when the effect type of the continuous hitting effect is "normal C", the rank can be increased up to Lv of MAX according to the number of repeated hits. As described above, there is a possibility that Lv will be ranked up to MAX only in the case of jackpot F, so when Lv is ranked up to MAX, it is confirmed that it is jackpot F. Therefore, it is possible for the player to check the remaining battle effects with peace of mind.

When the production type is "Chance Up A" and the continuous hit interval is "01H" (the shortest interval), 8 times are specified in association with the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv1 to Lv2, and rank from Lv2 to Lv3. Twelve times are associated and defined as the number of repeated hits for performing, and 12 times are associated and specified as the number of repeated hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4. On the other hand, the number of times to rank up from Lv4 to MAX Lv is not specified.

Further, when the effect type is "chance up A" and the continuous hit interval is "02H" (intermediate interval), 6 times are associated and defined as the number of repeated hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2, and Lv2 to Lv3. Eight times are associated and defined as the number of repeated hits to rank in, and eight times are associated and defined as the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv3 to Lv4. On the other hand, the number of times to rank up from Lv4 to MAX Lv is not specified.

Further, when the effect type is "Chance Up A" and the continuous hit interval is "03H" (the longest interval), 4 times are specified in association with the number of repeated hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2, and Lv2 to Lv3. The number of repeated hits to rank in is defined as 6 times in association with each other, and the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv3 to Lv4 is specified in association with 6 times. On the other hand, the number of times to rank up from Lv4 to MAX is not specified.

As described above, in the chance up A, the pressing timing of the frame button 22 and the output timing of the pressing sound are deviated, and the number of repeated hits required for the rank up is set to be smaller than that of the normal A to C. As a result, it is possible to predict whether or not the chance is up based on the number of presses until the rank is up, the timing of the occurrence of the press sound, and the like.

When the production type is "Chance Up B" and the continuous hit interval is "01H" (the shortest interval), 8 times are specified in association with the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv1 to Lv2, and rank from Lv2 to Lv3. 12 times is specified in association with the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv3, 12 times is specified in association with the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv3 to Lv4, and 20 times is specified as the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv4 to MAX. Is stipulated.

Further, when the effect type is "chance up B" and the continuous hit interval is "02H" (intermediate interval), 6 times are associated and defined as the number of repeated hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2, and Lv2 to Lv3. Eight times are associated and specified as the number of repeated hits to rank in, and eight times are specified in association with the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv3 to Lv4, and as the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv4 to MAX. 15 times is specified.

Further, when the effect type is "Chance Up B" and the continuous hit interval is "03H" (the longest interval), 4 times are associated and defined as the number of continuous hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2, and Lv2 to Lv3. The number of repeated hits to rank in is specified in association with 6 times, and the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv3 to Lv4 is specified in association with 6 times, and the number of repeated hits to rank up from Lv4 to MAX Lv is specified. The number of times is specified as 10 times.

In this way, when the effect type of the continuous hitting effect is "chance up B", the rank can be raised up to Lv of MAX according to the number of repeated hits. As described above, there is a possibility that Lv will be ranked up to MAX only in the case of jackpot F, so when Lv is ranked up to MAX, it is confirmed that it is jackpot F. Therefore, it is possible for the player to check the remaining battle effects with peace of mind.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (b). FIG. 93B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 93B, the RAM 223 in the third embodiment has a continuous hit interval storage area 223p, a press count counter 223q, and a reference number of times with respect to the configurations of the RAM 223 in the first and second embodiments. The difference is that the storage area 223r, the level counter 223s, the sound output flag 223t, and the rear type counter 223y are provided.

As described above, the continuous striking interval storage area 223p is a storage area in which data corresponding to the continuous striking interval performed by the player in the continuous striking effect is stored. Specifically, if the data stored in the continuous striking interval storage area 223p is "01H", it means that the continuous striking interval is short (that the continuous striking interval is 5 times or more in 2 seconds), and if it is "02H". , Indicates that the continuous hitting interval is normal (three or four repeated hits in 2 seconds), and if it is "03H", the continuous hitting interval is long (the number of repeated hits per 2 seconds is 2 times or less). There is). The type of pressing sound and the number of rank-ups are selected from the data stored in the continuous hit interval storage area 223p. The data of the continuous hit interval storage area 223p is updated every time 2 seconds elapse in the continuous hitting effect, according to the number of times the player presses the frame button 22 in the 2 seconds (see S2911 in FIG. 98).

The press count counter 223q is a counter for counting the number of times the player presses (operates) the frame button 22 in the continuous striking effect of 1. The initial value of the press count counter 223q is set to 0, and is reset to 0 even at the start of the continuous striking effect (see S2903 in FIG. 98). Then, every time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the continuous striking effect, 1 is added to the value (see S2806 in FIG. 97). Based on the value of the press count counter 223q and the reference count stored in the reference count storage area 223r, which will be described later, it is determined whether or not the rank can be increased in each Lv.

The reference number storage area 223r is a storage area in which the number of times that serves as a reference for determining whether or not to rank up is stored. The reference number storage area 223r is set to 0 times as an initial value, and is reset to 0 times even at the start of the continuous hitting effect (see S2903 in FIG. 98). Then, each time a rank-up occurs, the value of the press count counter 223q at that time is stored. When determining whether or not to rank up, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed after reaching the current Lv is based on the difference between the value of the press count counter 223q and the reference number stored in the reference number storage area 223r. Is determined, and the possibility of rank-up is determined by comparing with the rank-up number selection table 222d.

The level counter 223s is a counter whose value is updated according to the current spirit Lv. The initial value of the level counter 223s is set to 0, and the value is added by 1 each time a rank-up occurs in the continuous striking effect (see S2812 in FIG. 97). The current Lv can be determined from the value of the level counter 223s.

The sound output flag 223t is a flag indicating whether or not the pressing sound is being output in the continuous striking effect. While the sound output flag 223t is on, the output of the pressing sound is avoided even if the frame button 22 is pressed. As a result, even when the pressing interval of the frame button 22 is short, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the pressing sounds from competing with each other, so that the pressing sounds can always be output normally.

The back type counter 223y is a counter in which the value corresponding to the back type is stored. In the present embodiment, the rear image displayed on the back surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed each time the operation on the frame button 22 is detected. The back type counter 223y is used to specify the changed back type when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. The value of the back type counter 223y is updated by 1 each time the operation on the frame button 22 is detected during the period when the back type can be changed. When the value of the back type counter 223y is further updated in the state of the maximum value (for example, 3), the value returns to 0. As a result, a predetermined number of back types can be switched in order each time the frame button 22 is pressed by the player.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 100. The same processing as in the first and second embodiments will be illustrated and described only for different control processing, without illustration and description thereof.

First, the main process 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 96. This main process 3 (see FIG. 96) is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 53). FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 3. The main process 3 (see FIG. 96) in the present embodiment is different from the main process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment in that the processes S212 to S2123 are added. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the main process 3 (see FIG. 96), after executing the hold quantity display update process in the process of S2106, the operation for the frame button 22 is monitored instead of the operation input monitoring / effect process (S2107 of FIG. 53). , The operation input monitoring / effect process 3 for setting the effect corresponding to the pressing timing is executed (S2121). Details of the operation input monitoring / effect processing 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 97.

Next, similarly to the main process described above (see FIG. 53), after executing the processes of S2108 to 2110, the continuous hitting effect control process for performing various controls related to the continuous hitting effect is executed (S2122). The details of this continuous striking effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98.

When the continuous hitting effect control process (S2122) is completed, or when it is determined in the process of S2101 that 1 millisecond has not elapsed from the previous process of S2101 (S2101: No), the command determination in the main process is performed. Instead of the process (see S2111 in FIG. 53), the command determination process 3 is executed (S2123). The details of the command determination process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. Further, after the command determination process 3 (S2123) is completed, the process proceeds to the process after S2112.

Next, the operation input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S2121), which is one of the main processes 3 (see FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation input monitoring / effect processing 3.

When this operation input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S2121) is started, first, it is determined whether the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S2801), and when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected (S2101). S2801: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the process of S2801 (S2801: Yes), then it is determined whether the current back type is the change prohibition period (S2802). Here, the change prohibition period of the back type is a period in which the change of the back image is prohibited even if the frame button 22 is pressed, and examples thereof include a big hit state and a continuous hitting effect. In the process of S2802, if it is determined that the current back type is not the change prohibition period (S2802: No), the value of the back type counter 223y is updated (S2803), and the back type corresponding to the updated counter value is changed. After setting (S2804), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2802, when it is determined that the current time is the change prohibition period of the back type (S2802: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present is the execution period of the continuous striking effect (S2805). Here, whether or not the continuous hitting effect is executed is determined by the timer value of the continuous hitting period timer. At the start of the continuous striking effect, the timer value corresponding to the continuous striking period is set in the continuous striking period timer, and the timer is periodically updated until the value becomes 0. If the value of the continuous striking period timer is 1 or more, it indicates that the continuous striking effect is being executed, and if it is 0, it indicates that the continuous striking effect is out of the execution period. In the process of S2805, the value of the continuous hitting period timer is read out, and whether or not the continuous hitting effect is executed is determined based on whether or not the value is 1 or more.

In the process of S2805, if it is determined that the current time is outside the execution period of the continuous striking effect (S2805: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current period is the continuous hitting period (S2805: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the press count counter 223q (S2806), and the value of the press count counter 223q after the addition and the reference count storage area 223r. The difference from the value stored in is calculated (S2807). Next, among the rank-up times specified in the rank-up number selection table 222d, the rank-up corresponding to the production type of the continuous hitting effect this time, the current Lv, and the player's continuous hitting interval (data of the continuous hitting interval storage area 223p). The number of times is compared with the difference calculated in the process of S2807, and it is determined whether or not the difference is equal to or greater than the number of rank-ups (S2808).

In the process of S2808, when it is determined that the difference between the value of the press count counter 223q and the value stored in the reference count storage area 223r is less than the rank-up count (S2808: No), the press operation this time is enthusiastic. Since Lv does not increase, the processes of S2809 to S2811 for setting the pressing sound for pressing the frame button 22 are executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the sound output flag 223t is on (S2809), and when it is determined that the sound output flag 223t is off (S2809: No), a pressing sound is output. Next, the pressing sound corresponding to the value of the continuous striking interval storage area 223p is selected from the pressing sound selection table 222c (see FIG. 94 (b)) (S2810), and the selected pressing sound is selected. The output of (S2811) is set, and this process ends.

As described above, different pressing sounds are selected from the pressing sound selection table 222c (see FIG. 94B) according to the player's repeated hitting interval (value of the continuous hitting interval storage area 223p). That is, a pressing sound with a short output period is selected for a player with a short continuous striking interval, and a pressing sound with a long output period is selected for a player with a long continuous striking interval. As a result, it is possible to output the maximum length of the pressing sound within the continuous striking interval that differs for each player. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sound output flag 223t is on in the processing of S2809 (S2809: Yes), the processing of S2810 and S2811 is skipped, and the main processing is terminated as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the repeated output of the pressing sound, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the unnatural pressing sound.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2808, the difference between the value of the press count counter 223q and the value stored in the reference count storage area 223r is equal to or greater than the rank-up count corresponding to the current production type, the current Lv, and the continuous hit interval. If it is determined to be present (S2808: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the level counter 223s (S2812), and the level-up effect and the level-up sound corresponding to the value of the continuous hit interval storage area 223p are set (S2813). The sound output flag 223t is set to ON (S2814), and the value of the press count counter 223q is overwritten in the reference count storage area 223r (S2815). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the continuous striking effect control process (S2122), which is one of the main processes 3 (see FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of this continuous striking effect control process.

In the continuous striking effect control process (see FIGS. 98 and S2122), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the start timing of the continuous striking effect (S2901). If it is determined that the current timing is the start timing of the continuous striking effect (S2901: Yes), a value corresponding to the current continuous striking effect is set in the value of the continuous striking period timer for timing the execution period of the continuous striking effect (S2902). ), The value of the press count counter 223q and the number of times stored in the reference count storage area 223r are reset to 0 (S2903), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the current timing is not the start timing of the continuous striking effect (S2901: No), then it is determined whether or not the sound output flag 223t is on (S2904). In the process of S2904, when it is determined that the sound output flag 223t is on (S2904: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the sound output (S2905). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the sound output (S2905: Yes), the sound output flag 223t is set to off (S2906), and the process proceeds to S2907.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2904, when it is determined that the sound output flag 223t is off (S2904: No), and in the processing of S2905, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the sound output (S2905: No), S2906. The process shifts to the process of S2907 without executing the process.

In the process of S2907, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hitting period timer is larger than 0 (whether or not the continuous hitting effect is being executed) (S2907). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting period timer is 0 (S2907: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2907, when it is determined that the value of the continuous hit period timer is larger than 0 (S2907: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous hit period timer (S2908), and then the elapsed time from the start of the effect is 2 It is determined whether it is a multiple of seconds (S2909). If it is determined that the elapsed time from the start of the production is not a multiple of 2 seconds (S2909: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2909, when it is determined that the elapsed time from the start of the effect is a multiple of 2 seconds (S2909: Yes), a process for determining the pressing interval of the player is performed. Specifically, the number of presses for 2 seconds is specified based on the value of the press count counter 223q (S2910), the data in the continuous hit interval storage area 223p is updated according to the specified number of presses (S2911), and then. , End this process. In the process of S2911, if the player presses the frame button 22 5 times or more in 2 seconds, "01H" is set for the continuous hit interval storage area 223p, and the number of presses (number of repeated hits) in 2 seconds is 3. If it is 4 times or 4 times, "02H" is set for the continuous hit interval storage area 223p, and if the number of presses for 2 seconds (the number of continuous hits) is 2 times or less, "02H" is set for the continuous hit interval storage area 223p. 03H ”is stored. The number of rank-ups and the type of pressing sound can be switched according to the value set in the continuous hit interval storage area 223p. As a result, a pressing sound with a short output period is selected for a player with a short continuous striking interval, and a pressing sound with a long output period is selected for a player with a long continuous striking interval. As a result, it is possible to output the maximum length of the pressing sound within the continuous striking interval that differs for each player. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, as the interval between repeated hits is shorter, the number of repeated hits required for rank up is increased, so that the player who is not good at repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 at high speed can raise the rank with a smaller number of repeated hits. A player who is good at repeated hits can be ranked up with a large number of repeated hits. Therefore, since the degree of development (rank up) of the production can be adjusted to the skill of the player, the opportunity of rank up can be given fairly regardless of the skill of the player.

Next, the command determination process 3 (S2123), which is one of the main processes 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S2123). The command determination process 3 (see FIGS. 99 and S2123) in the present embodiment is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIGS. 54 and S2111) in the first and second embodiments, and is the main control device 110. This is a process for discriminating the command received from and executing the corresponding control.

Of the command determination processes 3 (see FIG. 99) in the third embodiment, the same processes as the command determination processes (see FIG. 54) in the first and second embodiments are executed in each of the processes S2201 to S2216, respectively. Will be done. Further, in the command determination process 3 (S2123) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received in the process of S2213 (S2213: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received. (S2221). If it is determined that the opening command has been received in the processing of S2221 (S2221: Yes), the opening command processing for setting the opening of the jackpot is executed (S2222), and then this processing is terminated. Details of this opening command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 100.

On the other hand, in the process of S2221, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2221: No), the process of S2216 is executed in the same manner as the command determination process of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 54 and S2111). This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, an opening command process (S2222), which is one process in the command determination process 3 (see FIGS. 99 and S2123) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of this opening command process (S2222).

In the opening command processing (S2222), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot this time is the jackpot won in the "rooftop mode" (latent probability change game state ST2) (S3001). In the process of S3001, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot in the "rooftop mode" (S3001: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3006.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3001, if it is determined that the jackpot this time is the jackpot won in the "rooftop mode" (S3001: Yes), the continuous hitting effect selection table 222b is read out (S3002), and the battle is executed during the jackpot. Select the production type of the production (S3003).

As described above, in the case where the jackpot type is jackpot E, if the value of the effect counter 223j is within the range of "0 to 49", "no continuous hit effect" is selected as the effect type from the continuous hit effect selection table 222b, and "No continuous hit effect" is selected. If it is within the range of 50 to 79, select "normal A" as the effect type, if it is "80 to 94", select "normal B" as the effect type, and if it is "95 to 99", select "normal B". It is configured to select "Chance Up A" as the production type. Further, in the case where the jackpot type is jackpot F, if the value of the effect counter 223j is within the range of "0 to 24", "no continuous hit effect" is selected as the effect type, and within the range of "25 to 39". If there is, select "normal A" as the effect type, if it is "40 to 74", select "normal B" as the effect type, and if it is within the range of "75 to 79", select "normal B" as the effect type. Select "Normal C", select "Chance Up A" as the production type if it is within the range of "80 to 97", and select "Chance Up B" as the production type if it is "99,98". It is configured to do.

Next, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous striking effect (whether or not a method other than "no continuous striking effect" is selected in the process of S3003) (S3004). If it is determined that the continuous striking effect is not executed (S3004: No), the process proceeds to S3006. On the other hand, in the process of S3004, when it is determined that the continuous hitting effect is executed (either "normal A to C" or "chance up A, B" is selected as the effect type) (S3004: Yes), this time. In the battle production, the timing for starting the continuous striking production is set (S3005), and the process shifts to the processing of S3006. The start timing set here is referred to in the process of S2901 of the above-described continuous striking effect control process (see FIG. 98), and when it is determined that the start timing of the continuous striking effect has come (S2901: Yes), the continuous striking effect is started. Each process of S2902 and S2903 for the purpose is executed.

In the process of S3006, a display opening command is set according to the effect type during the jackpot (S3006), and then this process is terminated. In the processing of S3006, in the "rooftop mode" (latent probability change game state ST2), an opening effect is set in which an effect indicating the start of the battle effect is executed, and in another game state, a normal (big hit) is set. Set the opening production (in the form of congratulating that it became). As a result, it is possible to execute an opening effect in an appropriate mode according to the game state (mode) at the time of the big hit.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is configured to be able to execute an effect (continuous hitting effect) that encourages the frame button 22 to be continuously pressed as a kind of hobby effect. In this continuous hitting effect, an effect of changing the display mode according to the number of times the player presses the frame button 22 is executed. Then, the higher the expectation of winning the monster, the easier it is to change the display mode. With this configuration, the frame button 22 can be positively operated by a player who wants to know the degree of expectation of the continuous hitting effect.

Further, in the continuous hitting effect in the present embodiment, the interval at which the player presses the frame button 22 is monitored, and the pressing sound (effect mode) for pressing the frame button 22 is different according to the pressing interval. With this configuration, the variation of the production can be diversified.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of presses until the effect mode (Lv) is increased is changed according to the continuous stroke interval of the continuous stroke effect. That is, when a player with a long interval of repeated hits is playing, the specified number of times until Lv up is reduced, and conversely, when a player with a short interval of repeated hits is playing, up to Lv up. It is configured to increase the specified number of times. As a result, the degree of development can be made uniform according to the time required for the continuous striking operation, regardless of the skill of the player. Therefore, even a player with a low skill of continuous striking can see the development effect, so that he / she can actively participate in the continuous striking effect regardless of the skill of continuous striking.

In the third embodiment, different voice data such as a "da" sound and a "don" sound are output as a pressing sound according to the player's repeated hitting interval, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the pressing sound may be made different by using only the voice of "da", which has a relatively short output period, and changing the number of times the pressing sound is output each time the pressing is detected. Specifically, for example, when the continuous striking interval is "01H", the voice "da" is output only once, and when it is "02H", the voice "da" is output twice in succession ( A pressing sound of "dada" is set), and in the case of "03H", the sound of "da" may be output three times in a row (a pressing sound of "dada" is set). With this configuration, all the sound effects can be generated from the voice data for outputting the voice "da", so that the voice data can be reduced.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 106. In the third embodiment described above, the interval between repeated hits (the number of repeated hits per 2 seconds) executed by the player in the continuous hitting effect is monitored, and the pressing sound when the frame button 22 is pressed is made different according to the repeated hitting interval. Was supposed to be.

On the other hand, in this modification, the same data (audio file) is used as the pressing sound, and the length of the echo generated for the pressing sound is changed. That is, if the continuous striking interval is long, the echo is also long, and if the continuous striking interval is short, the echo is also shortened. As a result, the player can hear the echo of the pressing sound regardless of the continuous striking interval.

The pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment is different in configuration from the third embodiment in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. , And a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the pressing sound in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101A is a diagram showing a timed change in audio output when the continuous striking interval is short (when the data stored in the continuous striking interval storage area 223p is “01H”). As shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the continuous striking interval is short, every time the frame button 22 is detected, the voice "bashi" is output at a volume of 70%, and then 0.01 seconds. A 40% volume "bashi" voice is output as an echo sound after an interval, and a 20% volume "bashi" voice is output as an echo sound after an interval of 0.01 seconds. The pressing sound in the modified example of the third embodiment is composed of the 70% volume "bashi" sound and two types (40% and 20% volume) echo sounds. By outputting the echo sound, it is possible to add depth to the pressing sound.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101 (b), it is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the audio output when the continuous hitting interval is long (when the data stored in the continuous hitting interval storage area 223p is "03H"). As shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the continuous striking interval is long, every time the frame button 22 is detected, the voice "bashi" is output at a volume of 70%, and then 0.1 seconds. A 40% volume "bashi" voice is output as an echo sound after an interval, and a 20% volume "bashi" voice is output as an echo sound after a 0.1 second interval.

As described above, in this modification, the interval of the echo sound set for the pressing sound is changed according to the interval of repeated hits by the player. That is, if the continuous striking interval is short, the interval at which the echo sound is output is shortened, and if the continuous striking interval is long, the interval at which the echo sound is output is lengthened. With this configuration, even when the continuous striking interval is short, all the pressing sounds including the echo sound can be output from the detection of one pressing to the detection of the next pressing.

<About the electrical configuration in the modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (a). FIG. 102 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in this modification.

As shown in FIG. 102 (a), in the ROM 222 in the present modification, the echo interval selection table 222 ab is added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third embodiment described above (see FIG. 93 (a)), and the ROM 222 is added. The difference is that the press sound selection table 222c has been deleted.

The echo interval selection table 222ab is a data table that defines data corresponding to the interval at which the echo sound is output. In this modification, every time 2 seconds elapse, a pressing sound is generated based on the data defined in the echo interval selection table 222ab, and is stored in the pressing sound storage area 223ab provided in the RAM 223, which will be described later. .. Then, each time a press on the frame button 22 is detected, the press sound stored in the press sound storage area 223ab is read and output.

The details of the echo interval selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (a). FIG. 103A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the echo interval selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), the echo sound (40%, 20%) to be set in the echo interval selection table 222ab for each value of the data corresponding to the continuous stroke interval stored in the continuous stroke interval storage area 223p. The output interval of the volume "bashi") is specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), the echo interval of 10 ms is defined in association with the data “01H” of the continuous striking interval storage area 223p. As a result, when the continuous striking interval is short, the interval for outputting the three voices of "bashi" is set to the shortest 10 ms, so that all the sounds including the echo sound are started after the output of the pressing sound is started. It is possible to shorten the period until the output of the pressing sound is completed. Therefore, the output of the pressing sound can be surely completed between the detection of one pressing and the detection of the next pressing.

Further, for "02H", 50 ms is associated and specified as an echo interval, and for "03H", 100 ms is associated and specified. That is, it is set so that the interval for outputting the echo sound becomes longer as the interval between repeated hits becomes longer. As a result, it is possible to arrange the length so that the output of the pressing sound can be completed within the continuous striking interval according to the continuous striking interval of the player.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (b). FIG. 102 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), the RAM 223 in the present modification includes the press sound storage area 223 ab and the press sound pointer 223 ac with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 93 (b)). , Press sound generated flag 223ad and is added. In addition, the sound output flag 223t has been deleted.

The pressing sound storage area 223ab is a storage area for storing the pressing sound generated according to the player's continuous striking interval. In the pressing sound storage area 223ab, a data table that defines the mode of the pressing sound for which the output is set is stored for each value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac that is periodically updated. Every time the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is updated, the operation corresponding to the pointer value is read and set from the pressing sound storage area 223ab. The details of the pressing sound storage area 223ab will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (b).

FIG. 103 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the pressing sound storage area 223ab. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the voice output operation is stored in the pressing sound storage area 223ab for each value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac. The example of FIG. 103 (b) shows a state in which data for outputting a pressing sound is stored when the continuous striking interval is “02H”.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is 0001H, the content of "outputting a pressing sound with a volume of 70%" is stored as a voice output operation, and the pressing sound pointer is stored. In the range where the value of 223ac is 0002H to 0906H, the content of "no output" is stored. Further, when the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is 0097H, the content "output the pressing sound of 40% volume" is stored as the audio output operation, and the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is 0098H to 012CH. In the range, the content of "no output" is stored, and for the value of the pointer 223ac for the pressing sound of 012DH, the content of "outputting the pressing sound of 20% volume" is stored as the audio output operation. In the range where the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is 012EH or later, the content of "no output" is stored.

Since the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is updated every 1ms, when the pressing sound output is set, the pressing sound of 70% volume "bang" is output, and 50ms later, the volume is 40%. An echo sound of "bang" is output, and after 50 ms, an echo sound of "bang" with a volume of 20% is output. By generating the pressing sound in advance and storing it in the pressing sound storage area 223ab, the processing load when outputting the pressing sound can be reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 102 (b). The pressing sound pointer 223ac is a pointer whose value is updated by 1 every 1 ms when the output of the pressing sound is set during the execution of the continuous striking effect (see S2923 in FIG. 106). Every time the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is updated, the corresponding operation content is read from the pressing sound storage area 223ab and set.

The pressing sound generated flag 223ad is a flag indicating whether or not the pressing sound has been generated (stored in the pressing sound storage area 223ab) based on the data corresponding to the continuous striking interval stored in the continuous striking interval storage area 223p. Is. If the pressing sound generated flag 223ad is on, it means that the pressing sound has been generated, and if it is off, it means that the pressing sound has not been generated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-described modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. Regarding the same processing as in the third embodiment, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted, and only the different control processing will be illustrated and described.

First, the operation input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S2121) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S2121). In the operation input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 104, S2121) in this modification, the difference between the value of the press count counter 223q and the value stored in the reference count storage area 223r in the process of S2808 is less than the rank-up count. (S2808: No), instead of the processing of S2809 to S2811 of the operation input monitoring / directing consideration 3 (see FIG. 97) in the third embodiment, a pressing sound corresponding to the continuous hitting interval is output. The only difference is that the pressing sound output process (S2831) is executed. The details of this pressing sound output process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the pressing sound output process (S2831), which is one of the operations input monitoring / effect processing 3 (FIG. 104, S2121) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modified example. ) Will be explained. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of this pressing sound output process (S2831).

In the pressing sound output process (FIG. 105, S2831) in this modification, first, it is determined whether or not the pressing sound generated flag 223ad is on (S2851). When it is determined that the press sound generated flag 223ad is off (S2851: No), the echo interval corresponding to the value of the continuous hit interval storage area 223p is selected from the echo interval selection table 222ab (see FIG. 103 (a)). (S2852).

That is, as described above, if the value of the continuous striking interval storage area 223p is "01H", the echo interval of 10 ms (006 DH) is selected from the echo interval selection table 222 ab (see FIG. 103 (a)), and the echo interval is set to "02H". If there is, the echo interval of 50 ms (009 5H) is selected, and if it is “03H”, the echo interval of 100 ms (00C7H) is selected.

When the processing of S2852 is completed, next, the pressed sound of the read echo interval is generated and stored in the pressing sound storage area 223ab (see FIG. 103 (b)) (S2853). Next, by setting the pressing sound generation flag 223ad to ON, it is shown that the pressing sound has already been generated (S2854), and the process proceeds to S2855.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2851 that the press sound generation flag 223ad is on (S2851: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2855 without executing the processes of S2852 to S2854.

In the process of S2855, the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is updated to "01H" (S2855), and the sound output operation corresponding to the updated value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is performed in the pressing sound storage area 223ab (FIG. 103 (b). )) (S2856). Next, the sound output operation read from the pressing sound storage area 223ab (see FIG. 103 (b)) is set (S2857), and then this process is terminated.

By executing this pressing sound output process (see FIG. 105), it is possible to output the pressing sound generated according to the continuous striking interval each time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the continuous striking effect control process (S2122) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. Of the continuous striking effect control processes, the processes S2901 to S2903 and S2907 to S2911 are the same as the processes S2901 to S2903 and S2907 to S2911 of the continuous striking control process (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.

Further, in the continuous striking effect control process (see FIGS. 106 and S2122) in the present modification, 01H is set to the value of the continuous striking interval storage area 223p after the process of S2903 (S2921), and then the present process is terminated. By executing the process of S2921, "01H" corresponding to the shortest continuous striking interval can be set at the start of the continuous striking effect, so that at the start of the continuous striking effect, regardless of the skill of the player, the player can be surely set. It is possible to output the pressing sound within the continuous striking interval.

Further, in the continuous striking control process (see FIG. 106) in the present modification, after the process of S2908, it is determined whether or not the press sound generated flag 223ad is on (S2922), and the press sound generated flag 223ad is on. When it is determined that there is (S2922: Yes), the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is updated (S2923), and the audio output operation corresponding to the updated value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is performed in the pressing sound storage area 223ab (FIG. Read from 103 (b)) (S2924). Next, the read voice output operation is set (S2925), and the process proceeds to S2909.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2922, if it is determined that the pressing sound generation flag 223ad is off (S2922: No), the processing of S2923 to S2925 is skipped and the processing of S2909 and thereafter is executed.

By executing the processes of S2922 to S2925, the pressing sound stored in the pressing sound storage area 223223ab can be accurately output.

Further, in the continuous striking effect control process (see FIG. 106) in the present modification, when the process of S2911 is completed, a pressing sound corresponding to the continuous striking interval updated in the process of S2911 is generated, and the generated pressing sound is generated. The sound is overwritten in the pressing sound storage area 223ab (S2926), and this process is terminated. By executing the process of S2926, the pressing sound corresponding to the continuous striking interval can be updated every 2 seconds for determining the continuous striking interval.

In this modified example, the value stored at the start of the continuous striking effect is set to "01H" for the continuous striking interval storage area 223p, but the value is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. Further, for example, the value of the continuous striking interval storage area 223p may not be updated, and the value set in the last processing of S2911 executed in the previous continuous striking effect may be retained. As a result, if the player who played the game in the previous continuous hitting effect and the current player are the same, the continuous hitting interval updated according to the continuous hitting interval of the player in the previous continuous hitting production is continuously used. Therefore, it is possible to set the pressing sound according to the player's continuous striking interval immediately after the start of the continuous striking effect.

As described above, in the present modification, only one type of pressing sound (executed effect) is provided based on the detection of the operation of the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous striking effect. Then, the output interval of the echo sound output in accordance with the pressing sound is changed according to the player's repeated hitting interval. More specifically, the longer the repeated hit interval (the smaller the number of repeated hits per unit time), the longer the interval for outputting the echo sound, and the shorter the repeated hit interval (the larger the number of repeated hits per unit time), The interval at which the echo sound is output is shortened. With this configuration, the pressing sound including the echo sound can be more reliably output between the pressing operation of 1 for the frame button 22 and the next pressing operation regardless of the player's repeated hitting interval. Can be done. Further, by varying the output interval of the echo sound according to the interval of repeated hits by the player, it is possible to provide a variation in the pressing sound. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous. Further, in the third embodiment, different pressing sound data are separately provided for each repeated hitting interval, but in this modification, a single pressing sound is used and a plurality of variations having different echo intervals are provided. It has a structure. As a result, the storage capacity of data for outputting the pressing sound can be reduced.

In the modified example of the third embodiment, the number of echo sounds is set to 2, and the sound "bashi" is output a total of 3 times for each pressing of 1, but this is limited to this. Instead, the number of echo sounds may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the output of the echo sound is set to 40% and 20% of the pressing sound, but the sound pressure is not limited to these, and may be arbitrarily set. Further, the number of echo sounds and the sound pressure of each echo sound may be changed according to the player's continuous striking interval. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Further, in the above-mentioned third embodiment and its modified example, the configuration is such that the effect type is not changed in the middle of the continuous striking effect of 1, but it may be configured to be changeable in the middle. Specifically, for example, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to change the effect type at the timing when the Lv is increased or the timing at which the continuous hitting interval is determined. That is, a data table having the same configuration as the continuous hitting effect selection table 222b for performing a lottery as to whether or not to change is prepared, and when the lottery timing comes, the table and the value of the effect counter are compared. Therefore, it may be configured to determine whether or not to change the production type of the continuous striking effect. As a result, when the continuous hitting effect is started with the effect type having a low expectation, it is possible to make the repeated hits with the expectation that the effect type will be changed to the effect type with a high expectation in the middle. Further, in this case, it may be configured so as to avoid being changed to an effect type having a low expectation in the middle of the continuous hit effect. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the effect type having a high degree of expectation from being changed to the effect type with a low degree of expectation, which impairs the player's sense of expectation for the continuous hitting effect.

In the third embodiment and its modified example, the pressing sound when the frame button 22 is pressed in one continuous striking effect is changed according to the continuous striking interval of the player, but the pressing sound is changed according to the continuous striking interval. It is not limited to the pressing sound that can be changed. For example, in the continuous striking effect, a predetermined character or the like is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 each time the frame button 22 is pressed, and the type of the character, the display period, or the like is changed according to the continuous striking interval. May be. More specifically, for example, the configuration is such that a predetermined character jumps on the spot in response to the pressing of the frame button 22 during the continuous hitting effect, and the longer the continuous hitting interval is, the higher the jump is made (the flight time is lengthened). It may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been accepted during the effect period that matches the continuous striking interval. Further, when displaying a jumping character, when setting a jump effect having a relatively short flight time, a configuration may be configured in which a part of the image data of the jump having a long flight time is used to display the effect. .. For example, of the image data of each frame used for the production with the longest flight time, each image data from the start of the jump to reaching the height of 50%, and 50% after falling past the apex of the jump. By connecting each image data from the time when the height of the image is reached to the time when the image is landed, the effect of short flight time (half the height of the jump) may be executed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to separately prepare different image data for each jump height, so that the amount of image data can be reduced. Further, various LEDs provided on the front frame 14 may blink or emit strong light according to the continuous hitting period of the player, and the blinking cycle or the light emitting period may be changed according to the continuous hitting interval. ..

In the third embodiment and the modified example thereof, the player's continuous striking interval is determined by the number of presses per 2 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frequency of determining the continuous striking interval is arbitrarily determined. You may. Further, the method of determining the continuous striking interval is not limited to the method of determining the number of presses within a predetermined time (2 seconds). For example, the time from the detection of one operation on the frame button 22 to the detection of the next operation is timed, and each time the operation on the frame button 22 is detected, the elapsed time from the previous operation is determined. It may be configured to set the pressing sound. Specifically, for example, if the elapsed time is 1 second or more, the pressing sound having the longest output period is set, and if the elapsed time is 0.4 seconds or more and less than 1 second, the output has an intermediate length. If the pressing sound of the period is set and the elapsed time is less than 0.4 seconds, the pressing sound of the shortest output period may be set.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 127. In the second embodiment described above, an operation means for detecting the operation of the player and executing the corresponding control, such as the frame button 22, is provided. As a result, the player's willingness to participate could be improved by operating the operating means.

In addition to this, in the fourth embodiment, the operating means is configured to be able to execute the vibration operation, and in addition to accepting the operation by the player, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation and assist the operation depending on the mode of the vibration operation. It is configured in.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the swing operation that can be operated left and right and back and forth as a kind of operation means that can be operated by the player. The point that the member 310 is provided, the point that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the point that some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed. It is a point that has been done. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 107. As shown in FIG. 107, in the fourth embodiment, a substantially spherical swing operation member 310 is arranged below the center of the front view. The swing operation member 310 is configured to be tilted in the left-right direction and the front-back direction along a substantially cross-shaped groove at the base portion. In the option effect described later, the effect develops into a different mode depending on the operation direction with respect to the swing operation member 310. As a result, it is possible to give diversity to the production. Further, the swing operation member 310 has a built-in vibration motor 380, and the swing operation member 310 can be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 380. A plurality of patterns are provided for this vibration operation, and it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the effect depending on the strength of the vibration and the direction of the vibration.

The internal structure of the swing operation member 310 will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 310. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the swing operation member 310 includes a substantially hemispherical dome member 317 and a ring-shaped ring member provided for the player to easily operate by hooking a finger. It is composed of a cover portion composed of 312 and a base portion 318 including a vibration motor 380.

FIG. 108 (b) is a perspective view of the vibration motor 380 provided on the base 318. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), the vibration motor 380 is composed of a motor portion 381, an eccentric member 382 having a shape obtained by cutting a cylinder in substantially half, and a shaft portion 381a that pivotally supports the eccentric member 382. ing. The eccentric member 382 is fixed to the shaft portion 381a, and when the shaft portion 381a is rotated by driving the motor portion 381, the eccentric member 382 also rotates in conjunction with the shaft portion 381a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 108, the shaft portion 381a is fixed at a position deviated from the center of gravity of the eccentric member 382. Therefore, when the motor unit 381 rotates, the center of the rotation of the eccentric member 382 and the center of gravity of the eccentric member 382 do not match, so that centrifugal force is generated in different directions depending on the arrangement of the eccentric member 382. As a result of centrifugal force being generated in different directions depending on the rotation position, a minute variable operation is performed in various directions, so that the entire vibration motor 380 vibrates. Since the vibration motor 380 is fixed to the base portion 318 of the swing operation member 310, vibration is transmitted to the base portion 318 and the cover portion fixed to the base portion 318. Therefore, when the player is touching the swing operation member 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand. As a result, in addition to the visual display effect and the auditory sound effect, the vibration effect can be performed, so that the variation of the effect can be further diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the vibration motor 380, the magnitude of vibration (vibration intensity) increases as the rotation speed of the eccentric member 382 increases. This is because the centrifugal force is proportional to the square of the rotational speed (angular velocity). The rotation speed of the eccentric member 382 is controlled by a motor control IC (not shown) provided in the swing operation member 310 to drive the motor unit 381. This motor control IC drives the motor unit 381 with a drive voltage (drive power) corresponding to a command received from the voice lamp control device 113. More specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a command for designating the rotation speed to the motor control IC. The motor control IC vibrates a pulse signal having a duty ratio according to a command received from the voice lamp control device 113 and a fixed amplitude (for example, 5 volts) at a predetermined frequency (for example, 1 kHz). It is applied as a drive voltage to the motor 380. Since the vibration motor 380 is composed of a known DC motor, the rotation operation is performed during the period when the drive voltage is on, and the rotation operation is stopped during the period when the drive voltage is off. Therefore, the longer the on period is, the more the motor rotates. The speed becomes faster. Thereby, the rotation speed of the eccentric member 382 fixed to the shaft portion 381a can also be changed. In the command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC, the duty ratio of the drive voltage output from the motor control IC to the vibration motor is specified as the data corresponding to the rotation speed. At least the information to do is included. The motor control IC continuously outputs drive voltage waveforms having the same duty ratio until a new command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. In this way, by adopting the motor control IC, the voice lamp control device 113 can change the vibration intensity by simply outputting the information corresponding to the duty ratio once, so that the voice lamp control can be performed. The processing load of the device 113 can be reduced.

Next, the mode of the vibration operation of the swing operation member 310 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. In the fourth embodiment, the uniform vibration mode in which the swing operation member 310 is vibrated evenly in all directions and the vibration intensity in any one of the four directions becomes stronger than in the other direction (in any case). It is configured so that the vibration operation can be executed in the biased vibration mode (which vibrates in one direction with uneven weight).

FIG. 109 (a) is a diagram showing the operation of the swing operation member 310 and the eccentric member 382 of the vibration motor 380 inside the swing operation member 310 when the swing operation member 310 is performing a uniform vibration operation. As shown in FIG. 109 (a), when the swing operation member 310 vibrates in all directions with a constant vibration intensity (in a uniform vibration mode), the vibration motor 380 is driven at a constant speed, resulting in the result. The eccentric member 382 rotates at a constant speed. As a result, every time the eccentric member 382 makes one rotation, a centrifugal force of the same strength is generated according to the rotation position. This is because the centrifugal force is proportional to the square of the rotational speed (angular velocity). As a result of changing the direction of centrifugal force in conjunction with the rotation position, vibration is generated evenly in all directions.

FIG. 109 (b) is a diagram showing the operation of the swing operation member 310 and the eccentric member 382 of the vibration motor 380 inside the swing operation member 310 when the swing operation member 310 is performing an eccentric vibration operation. In the example of FIG. 109 (b), the upper side of the swing operation member 310 is vibrated more strongly than in other directions. By vibrating the upper side strongly, it is possible to suggest to the player who is touching the swing operation member 310 that the swing operation member 310 is operated toward the back side in the front view.

As shown on the right side of FIG. 109 (b), the rotation speed of the eccentric member 382 of the vibration motor 380 is changed according to the rotation position when the vibration is vibrated by biasing the swing operation member 310 to the upper side. .. Specifically, the rotation speed becomes high while the center of gravity of the eccentric member 382 passes through the upper side, and decreases when passing in a direction other than the upper side. By controlling the rotational speed (angular velocity) of the vibration motor 380 in this way, the magnitude of the centrifugal force can be made different according to the passing position of the eccentric member 382. Specifically, the centrifugal force increases while passing in the upward direction in which the rotation speed is set to be high, and the centrifugal force decreases while passing in the other direction in which the rotation speed becomes low. As a result, the upward vibration having a large centrifugal force becomes larger than that of the other directions having a small centrifugal force. You can make it feel like you are doing it. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the swing operation member 310 should be operated toward the back side of the front view. Similarly, when the eccentric member 382 is biased to the right and vibrates, the rotation speed is controlled to be high while passing through the right direction, and when the eccentric member 382 is biased to the left and vibrates, the eccentric member The rotation speed is controlled to be high while the 382 is passing in the left direction, and when the eccentric member 382 is vibrated in a downward bias, the rotation speed is controlled to be high while the eccentric member 382 is passing in the downward direction. do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, various display effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the fourth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111 (a), the option effect executed in the fourth embodiment will be described. This option effect is an effect that may be executed in the rooftop mode, and one target is selected by the player by operating the swing operation member 310 from the options displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a production to make you.

More specifically, this option effect is an effect that may occur in the rooftop mode and selects one treasure box to be opened by a male character from among four treasure boxes. Different effects may be performed depending on the treasure chest selected by the player. Specifically, this option production may be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order or a big hit, and in the case of out of order (gase), the treasure box is empty no matter which treasure box is selected. Is.

On the other hand, if the selection effect is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, there is a possibility that different types of monsters (normal monsters or rare monsters) will appear depending on the treasure chest selected by the player. In the case of jackpot E, no matter which option is selected, a normal monster will appear. On the other hand, in the case of jackpot F, an option in which a rare monster appears is set as a part of the options. That is, since the jackpot F is determined when a rare monster appears, it is possible to recognize that the rooftop mode will continue before confirming the result of the battle effect. Therefore, the player can positively operate the swing operation member 310 in anticipation of seeing a rare monster.

FIG. 110A shows the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and the vibration mode of the swing operation member 310 when the option effect is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol being the jackpot F. It is a figure which showed. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when the option effect is started, a display area in which the characters "Select a box with the lever !!" is displayed is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a display area is displayed. One treasure chest with a different shape is displayed on the top, bottom, and left and right. With this display content, the player can easily understand that the treasure box can be selected by operating the swing operation member 310 left and right or back and forth.

Further, FIG. 110A illustrates a case where a normal monster appears when the upper and lower treasure chests and the left treasure chest are selected, and a rare monster appears when the right treasure chest is selected. In this case, the swing operation member 310 is set to vibrate on the right side in order to suggest a rare monster to the player. As a result, the player who swings to the swing operation member 310 can easily understand that a rare monster may appear by operating the swing operation member 310 to the right side.

FIG. 110 (b) shows the display content of the third symbol display device 81 and the mode of the swing operation member 310 when the swing operation member 310 is operated to the right according to the vibration mode in which the swing operation member 310 is vibrated with a bias to the right side. It is a figure which showed. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the player tilts the swing operation member 310 to the right, the treasure chest displayed on the right side of the front view blinks to indicate that the treasure chest is selected, and the other treasure chests are black. Out. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the player's selection operation has been accepted.

When the player operates the swing operation member 310 according to the vibration mode, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), a monster having a different (rare) mode appears from the treasure chest. More specifically, compared to a normal monster (see FIG. 71), a monster with no fangs, no spines on the head, no claws on the toes of the forefoot, and an unreliable facial expression (looks weak) appears. The production in which this rare monster appears is a special (premium) production in which victory is confirmed at the time of appearance (entering the rooftop mode again after a big hit). Therefore, the player who wants to see the premium effect can be made to actively touch the swing operation member 310 when the option effect appears. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the option production.

In addition, in the case of jackpot F, rare monsters do not always appear due to the biased vibration mode, and whether or not to include rare monsters in the options, and when including rare monsters in the options, rare monsters due to biased vibration It is decided by lottery whether or not it suggests an option in which. This prevents (suppresses) the expectation for the jackpot F from being impaired even if the swing operation member 310 does not vibrate unevenly in the option production, and allows the battle production to be confirmed with the expectation until the end. be able to.

Next, an example of the hold notice effect in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (b). In the present embodiment, a hold notice effect is provided in which the hold symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a mode different from the usual one. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), among the reserved symbols, the reserved symbol HY1 corresponding to the newest start winning prize is changed to a special symbol imitating a treasure box, and the neck is executed. The effect that the swing operation member 310 vibrates uniformly is executed. Since the higher the expectation of the jackpot of the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved symbol, the higher the rate of execution of this hold notice effect, the player who recognizes that the hold notice effect has been executed is expected to be a big hit. You can feel it. In the uniform vibration mode in this hold notice effect, the vibration motor 380 is basically driven at the maximum rotation speed, and the vibration intensity is maximized (see FIG. 112 (c)). This is because there is a high possibility that the hold notice effect is executed without the player touching the swing operation member 310, so that the hold notice effect is executed even if the player does not touch the swing operation member 310. This is to make people aware of. That is, by setting the maximum vibration intensity, the vibration of the swing operation member 310 can be visually recognized, and the vibration sound generated by the vibration can be heard by the player. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the hold notice effect has been executed regardless of whether or not the swing operation member 310 is touched.

In the present embodiment, if the time when the execution of the hold notice effect is determined is the execution of the fluctuation display effect (vibration effect) accompanied by the vibration of the swing operation member 310, it is outside the execution period of the vibration effect. When the execution of the hold notice effect is decided in, the following vibration intensity is set. This is because there is a high possibility that the player has already touched the swing operation member 310 during the execution of the vibration effect, and if too strong vibration is output, the player may be surprised. is there. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, when the hold notice effect is determined for the execution of the vibration effect, the vibration intensity is uniformly added by 30% to the vibration intensity of the vibration corresponding to the vibration effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the vibration intensity from becoming too strong while making it possible to tactilely distinguish whether or not the vibration is based on the vibration effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, a timed change (vibration pattern) of the vibration intensity of the vibration set in the swing operation member 310 when the vibration effect or the hold notice effect is executed will be described. To do. First, FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a timed change in vibration intensity during execution of a fluctuation effect for notifying a small hit (small hit notification effect).

As shown in FIG. 112 (a), when the small hit notification effect is started, the vibration intensity is maintained at 0 (the vibration motor 380 is inactive) for 1.5 seconds. After that, in the third symbol display device 81, an effect of discovering a plurality of treasure chests is executed, and when the back music (musical piece) playing during the effect rises (sound pressure increases), a swing operation is performed according to the music. The member 310 vibrates at a vibration intensity of 40% for 1 second. As a result, vibration is generated in accordance with the excitement of the music and the development of the display effect, so that it is possible to provide an effect that appeals to the sense of touch in addition to the visual and auditory senses.

When the vibration operation for 1 second is completed, the vibration is stopped for 2 seconds. Two seconds after the vibration operation is stopped, the production of determining one treasure box to be released this time from the multiple treasure boxes found is executed, and the music is lively. Therefore, the vibration operation is executed again according to these. Specifically, the vibration operation is executed for 1 second at a vibration intensity of 50%. After 1 second has elapsed, the vibration stop state for 2 seconds is set. During these two seconds, the effect of opening the treasure chest is executed. When the vibration stop state ends, the effect of discovering the treasure from the opened treasure box (see FIG. 70 (b)) develops, and the music becomes the greatest excitement in this variable display effect. In accordance with this, a vibration operation with a vibration intensity of 70% is set for 2.5 seconds. Then, when the vibration operation for 2.5 seconds is completed, the small hit is started.

In this way, by setting the vibration operation according to the display mode of the variable effect and the mode of the musical piece, it is possible to execute the tactile effect in combination with the visual and auditory effect. Therefore, since the production operation can be diversified, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, FIG. 112 (b) shows a jackpot notification effect in which an option effect is set among the variable effects (big hit notification effect) executed based on the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit in the “rooftop mode”. It is a figure which showed the timed change (vibration pattern) of the vibration intensity in. As shown in FIG. 112 (b), when the fluctuation effect corresponding to the big hit is started, a plurality of treasure chests are found after the vibration stop state for 1.5 seconds is first set as in the small hit notification effect. Along with the development of a vibrating effect, a vibration operation with a vibration intensity of 40% is set for 1 second. When the vibration operation for 1 second is completed, the effect develops into an option effect (see FIG. 110 (a)). In this option effect, as described above, the swing operation member 310 selects one treasure box from the four treasure boxes displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The option effect is executed for a maximum of 3 seconds, and during the 3 seconds, for example, a vibration operation is executed with an average vibration intensity of 50%. In the case of the uniform vibration mode, the vibration intensity fixed at 50% is set, and in the case of the unbalanced vibration mode, the average of the high-speed operation portion and the low-speed operation portion is set to be 50%. After the option effect is completed, the effect of opening the selected 1 treasure box is executed and the vibration is stopped, and 2 seconds later, the monster corresponding to the option from the treasure box (normal). An effect in which a monster or a rare monster appears is executed, and a vibration operation in a uniform vibration mode is set for 2.5 seconds with a vibration intensity of 70%. After 2.5 seconds, the jackpot will start.

Further, FIG. 112 (c) is a diagram showing a timed change (vibration pattern) of the vibration intensity when the hold notice effect is executed. The hold notice effect is an effect set when the effect execution judgment executed based on the detection of a new start prize is won, and a new hold symbol displayed based on the new start prize is displayed. This is an effect of displaying in a mode different from the usual one (see FIG. 111 (b)). With this hold notice effect, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation that it will be a big hit for the hold ball corresponding to the new hold symbol. When a new start prize is detected and the execution judgment of the hold notice effect is won, once a new hold symbol in the normal mode is displayed, and one second after the start prize, the new hold symbol imitates a treasure chest. An effect that is changed to a special pattern is executed. In accordance with this, a vibration operation with a vibration intensity of 100% is executed for 0.2 seconds. By setting the vibration operation with the vibration intensity of 100% (maximum vibration intensity), the vibration of the swing operation member 310 can be visually recognized, and the vibration sound generated by the vibration can be heard by the player. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the hold notice effect has been executed regardless of whether or not the swing operation member 310 is touched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the timed change of the vibration intensity when a plurality of effects accompanied by the vibration operation compete with each other will be described. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a vibration pattern when the hold notice effect is executed during the execution of the small hit notification effect. As shown in the figure, when the execution timing of the hold notice effect is reached during the execution of the fluctuation effect (vibration effect) accompanied by the vibration operation, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect already determined is 30%. After performing a vibration operation for 0.2 seconds with the vibration strength obtained by adding the vibration strength of, the vibration strength is switched again to the vibration strength corresponding to the vibration effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 113, when the execution timing of the hold notice effect is reached while the vibration operation of 40% vibration intensity is being executed, 30% is added to the vibration intensity of 40% to 70%. The vibration operation of the vibration intensity of is set. In addition, if the execution timing of the hold notice effect is reached while the vibration operation of 70% vibration intensity is being executed, the vibration operation of 100% vibration intensity is performed by adding 100% to the vibration intensity of 70%. Set. In this way, when the start timing of the hold notice effect is reached during the execution of the vibration effect, the swing operation member 310 is touched by setting the vibration intensity to which only 30% is added to the vibration intensity as the vibration effect. It is possible to easily make the player aware that the vibration intensity has been switched. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of overlooking that the hold notice effect has been executed, so that the hold notice effect can be more surely expected.

Further, during the execution of the vibration effect, by suppressing the addition of the vibration intensity corresponding to the hold notice effect to 30%, it is possible to prevent the swing operation member 310 from vibrating excessively. That is, the reason why the vibration operation with 100% vibration intensity is set when the hold notice effect is executed in a single shot is that there is a high possibility that the player has not touched the swing operation member 310 as described above. The configuration is such that the vibrating appearance and the vibrating sound are used to more reliably recognize that the vibration operation has been executed (a hold notice effect has been set). On the other hand, it is highly possible that the player has already touched the swing operation member 310 while the vibration effect is being set. Therefore, if the vibration intensity is suddenly maximized when the hold notice effect is started, There is a risk that the player will be surprised. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the increase range of the vibration intensity is set to be suppressed to 30% from the originally set vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and is configured to suppress excessive vibration. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being surprised by the vibration that is too strong.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, a pulse waveform (PWM waveform) output by the motor control IC based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 when the biased vibration operation is set will be described. .. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a timed change of the PWM waveform (drive voltage waveform) in a state in which the biased vibration operation is performed with an uneven weight in the upward direction. At the start timing of the vibration operation, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a command for designating the duty ratio of 40%, and the motor control IC repeatedly outputs a pulse signal having a duty ratio of 40% at a frequency of 1 kHz. The vibration motor 380 to which this pulse waveform is applied rotates at a rotation speed based on the applied voltage. As a result, the rotation operation is started clockwise from the front view from the arrangement in which the eccentric member 382 is arranged on the left side (origin position of the rotation operation). Further, when 10 ms has elapsed from the start of the rotational operation of the eccentric member 382 and the eccentric member 382 is arranged diagonally upward to the left, a command for specifying an 80% duty ratio is output from the voice lamp control device 113. , The duty ratio of the drive voltage output from the motor control IC is switched to 80%. As a result, the on-period of the drive voltage applied to the vibration motor 380 is doubled as compared with that before the duty ratio is switched, so that the eccentric member 382 is moved from the diagonally upper left direction to the diagonally upper right direction in the front view. It is rotated at twice the rotation speed for 25 ms until it rotates. As a result, before and after the eccentric member 382 passes in the upward direction, the centrifugal force applied outward from the rotation axis with respect to the center of gravity of the eccentric member 382 increases.

When 25 ms has elapsed since the duty ratio was set to 80%, a command for specifying the duty ratio of 40% is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC. The motor control IC that receives this command switches the duty ratio of the output drive voltage to 40% again. As a result, the rotation speed of the eccentric member 382 is returned to the same rotation speed as at the start of the rotation operation. By performing the rotation operation for 65 ms in this state, the eccentric member 382 makes one revolution and returns to the origin position. By repeating the switching of the duty ratio, the centrifugal force can be increased when the eccentric member 382 passes in the front-rear direction in the upward direction, and the centrifugal force can be weakened when the eccentric member 382 passes in another position. As a result, stronger vibration can be generated in the upward direction in which the centrifugal force increases, so that the player who is touching the swing operation member 310 is informed of the operation direction in the form of vibration. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suggest a novel operation direction. Further, if the swing operation member 310 is not touched, it is difficult for the player to recognize the direction suggested by the vibration. Therefore, when the vibration effect occurs, the player positively responds to the vibration effect. The swing operation member 310 can be touched. If the swing operation member 310 can be touched, the possibility that the player operates the swing operation member 310 is increased, so that the player's willingness to participate in the option production can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment, an origin sensor (not shown) that can detect whether or not the eccentric member 382 is arranged at the origin position (arrangement arranged on the left side) is provided. At the time of the unbalanced vibration effect, the output of the origin sensor is detected every 100 ms when the rotation operation of one round is completed, and it is determined whether or not one round has been completed as set. If it is not at the origin position, an additional rotation operation is performed until the origin sensor is turned on, and then when the origin sensor is turned on, the biased vibration shown in FIG. 114 is set again. Is configured to start. As a result, even if the rotation position deviates, the rotation position can be corrected every one round, so that the direction of the biased vibration can be set more accurately.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. First, FIG. 115 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 115, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, with respect to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first and second embodiments, the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113 is used. The difference is that the swing operation member 310 is electrically connected.

The swing operation member 310 is provided with at least a tilt sensor 385 that detects the operation direction of the player (the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is tilted) and the vibration motor 380 described above. The tilt sensor 385 is composed of four detection sensors corresponding to each of the four directions (left-right and front-back directions), and when the swing operation member 310 is operated in any direction, it corresponds to the operation direction. The output of the sensor is turned on (H). Since the output of each sensor is input to the input / output port 225, the MPU 221 can sequentially grasp the state of the swing operation member 310.

As described above, the vibration motor 380 is provided to vibrate the swing operation member 310. The rotation speed of the vibration motor 380 is controlled by the duty ratio of the pulse output from the voice lamp control device 113. Although not shown, an origin sensor capable of detecting whether or not the eccentric member 382 of the vibration motor 380 is arranged at the origin position is also electrically connected to the input / output port 225. The origin sensor turns on the output when the eccentric member 382 is located at the origin position and turns off when the eccentric member 382 deviates from the origin position. By monitoring this output, it is possible to accurately grasp whether or not the eccentric member 382 is arranged at the origin position in the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (a). As shown in FIG. 116 (a), the ROM 222 in the fourth embodiment has the vibration scenario selection table 222e and the vibration scenario selection table 222e with respect to the configurations of the ROM 222 in the first and second embodiments (see FIG. 21 (a)). It differs from the development production selection table 222f in that it is added.

In the vibration scenario selection table 222e, the setting of the vibration operation (DUTY ratio of the drive voltage output to the motor control IC) during the execution of the effect accompanied by the vibration operation of the swing operation member 310 is periodically updated. It is a data table specified for each value of the vibration pointer 223v. When the vibration effect is set, one vibration scenario corresponding to the vibration effect to be executed this time is selected from the vibration scenario selection table 222e and stored in the vibration scenario storage area 223u provided in the RAM 223, which will be described later. To. During the execution of the vibration effect, every time the vibration pointer 223v is updated, the vibration scenario stored in the vibration scenario storage area 223u is read out, and the vibration operation corresponding to the pointer value is set. As a result, the same vibration operation can be accurately executed at the same timing in each vibration effect.

The details of the vibration scenario selection table 222e will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b). FIG. 117A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the vibration scenario selection table 222e. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the vibration scenario selection table 222e defines different scenarios for each effect type. Specifically, in the "roof mode", the small hit notification effect table 222e1 set when the small hit notification effect (see FIG. 70B) is selected as the display mode of the variable effect, accompanied by the option effect. The jackpot notification effect table 222e2, which is set when no jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 71) is selected, the hold notice effect table 222e3, which is set when the hold notice effect is determined, and the option effect are executed. In addition, there is a vibration operation such as an upper weighted vibration effect table 222e4 in which an unbalanced vibration operation is set on the upper side, and an upper weighted vibration effect table 222e5 in which an option effect is executed and an unbalanced vibration operation is set on the right side. Scenarios corresponding to all production modes are defined.

Next, the specified contents of each vibration scenario defined in the vibration scenario selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (b), taking the small hit notification effect table 222e1 as an example. FIG. 117 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit notification effect table 222e1.

As shown in FIG. 117 (b), the small hit notification effect table 222e1 defines the duty ratio of the drive voltage to be output to the motor control IC in association with the value of the vibration pointer 223v. Specifically, the START information indicating the start of the effect is associated with the value of the vibration pointer 223v of 0000H. Further, since the value of the vibration pointer 223v is defined in the range of 0001H to 05DBH in association with the duty ratio of 0%, the vibration is stopped in the range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v. Further, for the value of the vibration pointer 223v in the range of 05DCH to 0DABH, a duty ratio of 40% is defined in association with the value. Therefore, in the range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v, as a result of inputting a command for specifying the duty ratio of 40% to the motor control IC, a voltage waveform having a duty ratio of 40% is input to the vibration motor 380. The vibration intensity is set to 40%.

Since the duty ratio of 0% is defined in association with the value of the vibration pointer 223v in the range of 0DACH to 1193H, the vibration is stopped in the range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v. Further, for the value of the vibration pointer 223v in the range of 1194H to 157BH, a duty ratio of 50% is defined in association with the value. Therefore, in the range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v, the duty ratio of 50% is set for the motor control IC, and the drive voltage of the duty ratio of 50% is output from the motor control IC. As a result, the vibration motor 380 The vibration intensity is set to 50%.

Since the value of the vibration pointer 223v is defined in the range of 157CH to 1D4BH in association with the duty ratio of 0%, the vibration is stopped in the range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v. Further, a duty ratio of 70% is defined in association with the value of the vibration pointer 223v in the range of 1D4CH to 270FH. Therefore, in the range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v, the duty ratio of 70% is set for the motor control IC, and the drive voltage of the duty ratio of 70% is output from the motor control IC. As a result, the vibration motor 380 The vibration intensity is set to 70%.

Further, END information is associated with the value 2710H of the vibration pointer 223v. This END information is used to determine whether or not the vibration operation specified in the vibration scenario has been set. By setting the small hit notification effect table 222e1, the vibration pattern shown in FIG. 112 (a) can be realized.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the vibration scenarios corresponding to various effects are defined in advance in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the scenario 1 is read from the vibration scenario selection table 222e and set at the start of the effects. It has a structure. Then, during the execution of the vibration effect, the vibration motion (DUTY ratio) corresponding to the value of the vibration pointer 223v that is periodically updated (every 1 ms) is specified from the vibration scenario, and the specified vibration motion is set. It has a structure. As a result, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 does not need to specify the sequential vibration motion from the progress of the vibration effect, and simply performs a simple process of reading the corresponding vibration motion from the vibration scenario. The load can be reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 116 (a). The development effect selection table 222f is a data table that is referred to in order to select the development content according to the direction in which the player operates in the option effect. The operation direction of the swing operation member 310 and the effect mode are defined for each effect mode. Although not shown, the development effect selection table 222f is set with a plurality of tables having different development patterns, and one of the tables is selected according to the value of the effect counter 223j. .. As a result, the correspondence between the operation direction and the content of the development effect can be randomized.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (b). FIG. 116 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the fourth embodiment, the vibration scenario storage area 223u and the vibration pointer are provided with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first and second embodiments (see FIG. 21 (b)). The difference is that 223v, the scenario type flag 223w, the validity period timer 223x, and the back type counter 223y are provided.

The vibration scenario storage area 223u is a storage area for storing the vibration scenario corresponding to the current vibration performance, which is read from the vibration scenario selection table 222e when the execution of the vibration effect is decided. During the execution of the vibration effect, the vibration scenario stored in the vibration scenario storage area 223u is referred to, and the corresponding vibration setting is read and set every 1 ms when the vibration pointer 223v is updated (FIG. 123). See S3404).

The vibration pointer 223v is a pointer that is updated one by one in the vibration setting process during the execution of the vibration effect (see S3403 in FIG. 123). Since the vibration setting process (see FIG. 123) is executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 118), the vibration pointer 223v is periodically updated every 1 ms. During the execution of the vibration effect, every time the value of the vibration pointer 223v is updated, the vibration operation (DUTY ratio) corresponding to the pointer value is read from the vibration scenario storage area 223u, and the read DUTY ratio is read. Is notified to the motor control IC (see S3408 in FIG. 123).

The scenario type flag 223w is a flag for identifying the set type of vibration scenario (type of vibration effect). With this scenario type flag 223w, the type of the current vibration scenario can be easily specified.

The validity period timer 223x is a timer for timing the validity period during which the player's operation on the swing operation member 310 is valid in the option effect. At the start timing of the option effect, the validity period corresponding to the current option effect is set for the validity period timer 223x (see S3202 in FIG. 121). The value of the valid period timer 223x is subtracted by 1 in the effect control process until the player detects an operation on the swing operation member 310 (S3204 in FIG. 121). Then, when the timer value becomes 0 before the player operates the swing operation member 310, it is determined that the valid period has expired, and an effect in which a normal monster appears from the treasure box is executed as a development effect. (See S3206 in FIG. 121).

Since the back type counter 223y has the same function as the back type counter 223y provided in the RAM 223 in the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 127. The same processing as in the first and second embodiments will be illustrated and described only for different control processing, without illustration and description thereof.

First, the main process 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 4. The main process 4 (see FIG. 118) in the present embodiment is different from the main process (see FIG. 53) in the first and second embodiments in that the processes S2131 to S2133 are added. As for other processes, the same processes as the main process (see FIG. 53) are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the main process 4 (see FIG. 118), after executing the hold quantity display update process in the process of S2106, the operation input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is replaced with the operation input monitoring. The effect process 4 is executed (S2131). Details of the operation input monitoring / effect processing 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

Further, in the main process 4 (see FIG. 53) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of 2110 is completed, the vibration setting process (S2132) for setting the vibration intensity of the vibration motor 380 is executed. Details of this vibration setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

When it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has not passed since the processing of S2132 was executed, or in the processing of S2101, the main processing was started, or the processing of S2101 was executed last time (S2101). : No), the process proceeds to the command determination process 4 of S2133. Details of the command determination process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. 124. After that, the processes of S211 to S2117 are executed in the same manner as the main processes (see FIG. 53) in the first and second embodiments.

Next, the operation input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S2131), which is one of the main processing 4 (see FIG. 118) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation input monitoring / effect processing 4.

In the operation input monitoring / effect processing 4 (S2131), first, whether or not the operation on the swing operation member 310 is detected (the output of the sensor corresponding to any direction of the tilt sensor 385 becomes H) or not. Is determined (S2821). When an operation on the swing operation member 310 is detected (S2821: Yes), an operation detection time process for performing control according to the operation direction of the swing operation member 310 is executed (S2822). The details of this operation detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 120. On the other hand, when the operation on the swing operation member is not detected (S2821: No), the operation effect control process for updating the execution period of the continuous striking effect is executed (S2823). Details of this operation effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 121. In the process of S2824 executed after the process of S2822 or S2823, the pressing of the frame button 22 is monitored, the frame button pressing process for performing the corresponding control is executed (S2824), and this process is terminated. The details of the frame button pressing process (S2824) will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, an operation detection time process (S2822), which is one process in the operation input monitoring / effect process 4 (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation detection processing.

In the operation detection time processing (S2822), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the valid period timer 223x that clocks the valid period (execution period) of the continuous hitting period is larger than 0 (S3101). If the value of the valid period timer 223x is 0 (S3101: No), it means that the present is outside the valid period (outside the execution period) of the continuous striking effect, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the validity period timer 223x is 1 or more (S3101: Yes), the tilting direction (direction corresponding to the sensor whose output is H) is specified from the output of each sensor constituting the tilting sensor 385 (S3102). .. Next, the direction in which the rare effect (see FIG. 111) is set in this option effect (see FIG. 110) is compared with the tilt direction of the swing operation member 310 (S3103), and the tilt direction of the swing operation member 310 is compared. Determines whether or not matches the direction in which the rare effect is set (S3104). In addition, the direction in which the rare effect is set is determined by the lottery at the start of the variation when the variation effect of the mode accompanied by the option effect is determined in the variation effect executed when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the jackpot F. Determined and stored in RAM 223.

In the process of S3104, when it is determined that the tilting direction (operation direction) of the swing operation member 310 matches the direction in which the rare effect is set (S3104: Yes), the special effect table is displayed from the development effect selection table 222f. The process proceeds to read (S3105) and S3107. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect in which a monster of a rare aspect appears in the option effect, so that the player can be pleased. On the other hand, in the process of S3104, if the comparison results do not match (S3104: No), the normal effect table is read from the development effect selection table 222f (S3106), and the process proceeds to the process of S3107. When the normal production table is read, the production (see FIG. 71) in which a monster of the normal mode appears from the treasure box is executed, so it is unclear whether the "rooftop mode" will continue after the big hit. is there. Therefore, in this case, the game can be performed with the expectation that the male character will defeat the monster in the battle effect during the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the big hit.

In the process of S3107, the development effect is set based on the read table and the value of the effect counter 223j (3108), and the value of the vibration pointer 223v is updated to the pointer value at the time when the option effect ends (S3109). Next, the value of the validity period timer 223x is reset to 0 (S3110), and this process ends.

Next, the operation effect control process (S2823) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing this operation effect control process (S2823). This operation effect control process (S2823) is executed in the operation input monitoring / effect process 4 (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the operation effect control process (S2823) will be described.

In the operation effect control process (FIGS. 121, S2823), first, it is determined whether or not the operation of the swing operation member 310 is the start timing of the effective period (S3201). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period (S3201: Yes), the valid period corresponding to the current fluctuation effect is set in the valid period timer 223x (S3202), and the process returns to the operation input monitoring / effect process 4. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the valid period (S3201: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the valid period timer 223x is larger than 0 (S3203). When it is determined that the value of the validity period timer 223x is larger than 0 (S3203: Yes), the value of the validity period timer 223x is subtracted by 1 and updated (S3204), and the value of the validity period timer 223x after the subtraction is 0. It is determined whether or not it is (S3205). In the process of S3205, when it is determined that the value of the validity period timer 223x is 0 (S3205: Yes), the normal effect table (not shown) is displayed from the development effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 110 (a)). Read (S3206). Next, the development effect is set (S3207) based on the read-out normal effect table (not shown) and the value of the effect counter 223j, and the process returns to the operation input monitoring / effect process 4 (see FIG. 119). As a result, when the player does not operate the swing operation member 310 in the option effect, a normal effect can be set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the validity period timer 223x is 0 in the processing of S3203 (S3203: No), the value of the validity period timer 223x after subtraction is not 0 (greater than 0) in the processing of S3205. If it is determined that (S3205: No), the process returns to the operation input monitoring / effect process 4 (see FIG. 119) as it is without executing the processes of S320 and S3207.

In the fourth embodiment, the normal effect is set at the end of the operation valid period of the swing operation member 310 set in the option effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the options corresponding to the rare effect are included, the rare effect may be executed. Further, for example, when the option corresponding to the rare effect is included and the vibration mode of the swinging operation member 310 is an unbalanced vibration mode, the operation direction suggested by the unbalanced vibration mode is determined, and the effective period is set. When a lapse of time has passed, the same control as that operated in the operation direction suggested by the vibration mode may be executed (the development effect is set by reading out the special effect table from the development effect selection table 222f). With this configuration, even a player who does not want to operate the swing operation member 310 can be given an opportunity to perform a rare effect, thus improving the player's interest in the game. Can be made to.

Next, the frame button pressing process (S2824) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the processing when the frame button is pressed (S2824). This frame button pressing process (S2824) is executed in the operation input monitoring / effect processing 4 (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the frame button 22 is subjected to the operation input monitoring / effect processing 4 (see FIG. 119). It is a process of monitoring the pressing and setting the effect corresponding to the case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected.

In the frame button pressing process (FIG. 122, S2824), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S3301). When it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected in the process of S3301 (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the back type change prohibition period (S3302). When it is determined that it is not the back type change prohibition period (S3205: No), the value of the back type counter 223y is updated (S3303), and the back type corresponding to the updated value of the back type counter 223y is set (S3304). ). After that, the process returns to operation input monitoring / effect processing 4.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected (S3301: No), and in the process of S3302, when it is determined that the back type change prohibition period is set (S3302: Yes). ), Return to operation input monitoring / effect processing 4.

Next, the vibration setting process (S2132) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing this vibration setting process (S2132). This vibration setting process (S2132) is executed in the main process 4 (see FIG. 118) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The details of the vibration setting process (S2132) will be described below.

In the vibration setting process (FIGS. 123 and S2132), first, the scenario type flag 223w is read (S3401), and it is determined whether or not the vibration scenario is set (S3402). When it is determined that the vibration scenario is set in the process of S3402 (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the vibration pointer 223v (S3403). Next, the duty ratio corresponding to the value of the vibration pointer 223v after addition is read from the vibration scenario storage area 223u (S3405). Then, in the process of S3405, it is determined whether or not the END information is read instead of the duty ratio (S3405).

If it is determined that the END information has been read in the process of S3405 (S3405: Yes), the stop of the vibration motor 380 is set (S3406), and the process returns to the main process 4 (see FIG. 118). On the other hand, in the process of S3405, when it is determined that the END information has not been read (the duty ratio has been read) (S3405: No), then it is determined whether or not to change from the currently set duty ratio (S3405: No). S3407). If it is determined in the process of S3407 that the duty ratio is to be changed (S3407: Yes), an operation command is set based on the read duty ratio (S3408), and the process returns to the main process 4.

Next, the command determination process 4 (S2133), which is one of the main processes 4 (see FIG. 118) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (S2133). Of the command determination processes 4 (see FIGS. 124 and S2133) in the present embodiment, in each of the processes S2201 to S2209 and S2211 to S2216, the command determination processes in the first and second embodiments (see FIGS. 54 and S2111). ), The same processes as those of S2201 to S2209 and S2211 to S2216 are executed.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (S2133) in the fourth embodiment, after executing the processes of S2202 and S2204, various advance notice setting processes (S2231) for setting the option effect and the advance notice effect such as the vibration operation are performed. Execute. Details of the various advance notice setting processes (S2231) will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

Further, in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 124) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the winning command has been received in the processing of S2209 (S2209: Yes), the winning in the first and second embodiments is achieved. Instead of the command processing (see FIG. 58), the winning command processing 4 is executed (S2322), and then the main processing is terminated. The details of the winning command processing 4 (S2322) will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, various advance notice setting processes (S2231), which is one of the command determination processes 4 (see FIGS. 124 and S2133) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the various advance notice setting processes (S2231).

In the various notice setting processes (S2231), first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is accompanied by the option effect (S3501). The information as to whether or not it is accompanied by the option effect is selected based on the variation pattern command in the special figure 1 variation start process (see FIG. 55) or the special figure 2 variation start process (see FIG. 56). When a mode accompanied by an option effect is set as a mode of a detailed variation pattern, it is stored in the RAM 223.

If it is determined in the process of S3501 that the current fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by the option effect (S3501: No), the process of S3502 is not executed and the process proceeds to the process of S3503. On the other hand, in the processing of S3501, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is accompanied by the selection effect (S3501: Yes), the start timing of the valid period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set (S3502), and the processing of S3503 Move to.

In the process of S3503, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is accompanied by a vibration effect (S3503). If it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by the vibration effect (S3503: No), the processes of S3504 to S3506 are not executed, and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3503, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is accompanied by the vibration effect (S3503: Yes), the vibration scenario corresponding to the current vibration effect is selected in the vibration scenario selection table 222e (FIG. 117 (a)). ) Read from (S3504), store the read scenario in the vibration scenario storage area 223u (S3505), reset the value of the vibration pointer 223v (S3506), and then end this process.

Next, the winning command process 4 (S2322), which is one of the command determination processes 4 (see FIGS. 124 and S2133) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command process 4 (S2322). The winning command process 4 (see FIGS. 126 and S2232) in the present embodiment is a process executed in place of the winning command processing (see FIGS. 58 and S2210) in the first and second embodiments, and is notified by the winning command. It is a process of performing control corresponding to the lottery result.

Of the winning command processing 4 (S2322) in the fourth embodiment, the processing of S2401 to S2405 is the same as the processing of S2401 to S2405 of the winning command processing (see FIG. 58) in the first and second embodiments, respectively. The same process is executed. Further, in the winning command process 4 (see FIG. 126) in the fourth embodiment, S2411, S2412 for determining whether or not the hold notice effect (see FIG. 111B) can be executed before executing the process of S2405. Execute each process of. That is, in order to determine whether or not the hold notice effect is currently being executed (S2411), and if the hold notice effect is not being executed (S2411: No), it is determined whether or not to set the hold notice effect. (S2412) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S2405. Details of this hold notice setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127.

On the other hand, in the process of S2411, if it is determined that the hold notice effect is being executed (S2411: Yes), the process of S2412 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2405.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, a hold notice setting process (S2412), which is one process in the winning command process 4 (see FIGS. 126 and S2322) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold notice setting process (S2412).

In the hold notice setting process (S2412), first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S3601), and the acquired value of the effect counter 223j is compared with the hold notice determination table (not shown) provided in the ROM 222. Then, it is determined whether or not the hold notice for the new winning information can be executed (S3602). Although the illustration is omitted, the hold notice judgment table is defined by associating the lottery result of the special symbol notified by the winning command and the judgment value for determining that the hold notice effect is executed for each type of fluctuation pattern. There is. In this hold notice determination table, when the lottery result is a big hit, the rate of determining that the hold notice is executed is set to be high. Further, in the case of deviation, the mode in which the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by super reach is set so that the rate of determining that the hold notice is executed is higher than the mode of complete deviation or normal reach.

Next, it is determined in the determination of S3602 whether or not it is determined that the hold notice is to be executed (S3603), and if it is determined that the hold notice is not executed (S3603: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the hold notice is to be executed (S3603: Yes), a display hold notice command for notifying the type of the hold notice is set (S3604), and a sound effect corresponding to the hold notice effect is output. It is set (S3605), and the vibration pattern scenario corresponding to the hold notice is read out (S3606).

After the processing of S3606, it is determined whether or not another scenario has already been set (S3607), and if it is determined that another scenario has not been set (S3607: No), the read scenario is stored in the vibration scenario. The area is set to 223u (S3608), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3607, when it is determined that another vibration scenario has already been set (S3607: Yes), the duty ratio corresponding to each pointer value of the vibration scenario corresponding to the read hold notice effect is 0. Multiply by 3 (S3609). Next, the value of the current vibration pointer 223v is added to the value of each vibration pointer 223v defined in the read vibration scenario (S3610). Then, the duty ratio multiplied in the process of S3609 is added to the duty ratio of each pointer value of the vibration scenario storage area 223u for each value of the same vibration pointer 223v (S3611), and then this process is terminated. ..

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the swing operation member 310 that can be operated by the player in four directions (left / right, back, and front) is provided. Further, as an effect using the swing operation member 310, an option effect is provided. In this option effect, one option can be selected from the four options displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the operation direction of the swing operation member 310. Then, different development effects (normal effect or rare effect) can be set according to the direction selected by the player. With this configuration, when the option effect is executed, the swing operation member 310 can be positively operated in anticipation of the appearance of the rare effect.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the vibration motor 380 is provided inside the swing operation member 310, and the vibration operation can be executed by driving the vibration motor 380. The vibration motor 380 is configured to be controllable in a uniform vibration mode that vibrates uniformly in all directions and a biased vibration mode that vibrates in one direction. The biased vibration mode may be set when the option effect is selected as the effect of notifying the jackpot F, which is advantageous for the player, in the "rooftop mode". That is, the swing operation member 310 vibrates in the direction of the option that develops into the rare effect. As a result, it is possible to notify the player who is touching the swing operation member 310 of the direction in which the rare effect appears, so that the player who wants to see the rare effect can be notified of the swing operation member 310. Can be positively touched. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the option production.

In the fourth embodiment, the biased vibration mode is set as a kind of notification mode suggesting the direction of the rare effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be used to notify the launch direction of the ball. That is, in the normal game state ST1 and the time-saving game state ST1h, which are the game states in which the left-handed game should be performed, the swing operation member 310 is configured to vibrate in a biased manner in the left direction, and in the game state in which the right-handed game should be performed. In a certain probability variation game state ST3 or a latent probability variation game state ST2, the swing operation member 310 may be configured to vibrate in a biased manner to the right. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player is unlikely to make a mistake in the launch direction.

In the fourth embodiment, at the start of the fluctuation effect accompanied by the vibration operation, the vibration scenario of 1 is selected from the vibration scenario selection table 222e, and the swing operation member 310 is subjected to the vibration pattern specified in the selected vibration scenario. It was designed to vibrate, but it is not limited to this. For example, only the execution timing and the execution period of the vibration operation may be set for each type of the variation effect, and the vibration intensity may be determined by lottery for each execution period. Then, a normal vibration intensity and a vibration intensity with a high expectation are provided, and when the lottery result is a result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit F in the rooftop mode or a small hit), the expectation is high. The configuration may be such that a high vibration intensity can be easily selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to play the game paying attention to the vibration intensity, so that it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the vibration effect.

In the fourth embodiment, when the option effect is executed, the player is notified of the operation direction that develops into the rare effect by the option effect in the form of vibration, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 is set to vibrate, and is applied to a gaming machine capable of executing a pressing effect in which a different effect mode is displayed according to the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed in the third symbol display device 81. You may. That is, the frame button 22 may be vibrated during the period determined to be the best timing in the pressing effect. With this configuration, the operation timing can be easily determined just by touching the frame button 22, so that even a player who is not good at pressing effect can actively participate in the pressing effect. be able to.

In the fourth embodiment, the option for executing the rare effect is suggested in the form of vibration (position where the vibration intensity is strong), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the option production, the cursor can be selected by moving the cursor to the option with the swing operation member 310 and then performing a determination operation with a predetermined operation button (for example, the frame button 22). The vibration intensity may be different depending on whether or not the option that combines the above is a rare effect option. That is, a strong vibration intensity may be set while the cursor is placed on the rare effect option, and a weak vibration intensity may be set while the cursor is placed on the normal effect option. With this configuration, the player can actively operate the swing operation member 310 in order to confirm the vibration intensity of each option.

In the fourth embodiment, when the gaming state after the big hit becomes the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, there is a possibility that the biased vibration mode is set in the option production, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the biased vibration mode may be executed in the jackpot fluctuation effect during the variation effect and in the effect of notifying the jackpot.

In the fourth embodiment, the direction of the rare effect is notified by the biased vibration mode, but instead of or in addition to this, when the vibration operation is started, the swinging operation member 310 is used by the player. It may be configured to operate in the direction in which the hand will be (front side of the front view). As a result, the player can be made to touch the swing operation member 310 more positively.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 137. In the fourth embodiment described above, when the execution of the effect accompanied by the vibration operation of the swing operation member 310 is determined, the vibration scenario in which the timed change of the vibration operation corresponding to the effect is defined is set in advance. The configuration was such that a predetermined vibration operation was executed at a predetermined timing.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the vibration operation is determined according to the sound pressure (loudness of the sound felt by the player) specified from the voice data for outputting the sound such as a musical piece or the pressing sound. It is said. As a result, the vibration can be output according to the loudness of the sound felt by the player, so that it is possible to provide a more realistic effect.

The difference in configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is that the voice lamp control device 113 and the voice output device 226 are configured to enable mutual communication, and voice. The configurations of ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, and some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 128, the correspondence between the acoustic waveform and the vibration intensity in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 (a) is a diagram showing the acoustic waveform (voltage waveform) of the music output to the amplifier unit 307 (see FIG. 130) of the audio output device 226 during the execution of the small hit notification effect. FIG. 128 (b) is a diagram showing a timed change of the vibration operation output based on the audio data of the music. As shown in FIG. 128 (a), when the small hit notification effect is executed and the music corresponding to the effect is played, an acoustic waveform (voltage waveform) whose amplitude changes from moment to moment is transmitted to the amplifier unit 307. It is output. The output acoustic waveform is amplified by the amplifier unit and output as audio from the speaker unit 308. Although the details will be described later, the data (audio file) for outputting the acoustic waveform (voltage waveform) is stored in the ROM 302 (see FIG. 130) provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. The music is output by reading (reproducing) the data of this audio file.

FIG. 128 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the timed change of the vibration operation output according to the music output in the small hit notification effect. Here, in the present embodiment, the sound pressure data based on the voice data output to the amplifier unit 307 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 controls the swing operation member 310 to vibrate with a vibration intensity corresponding to the received sound pressure data. As a result, the vibration intensity can be changed in synchronization with the change in sound pressure.

As shown in FIG. 128 (b), when the small hit drop effect is executed and the music of the sound pressure waveform illustrated in FIG. 128 (a) is output, the swing operation member 310 changes the acoustic waveform of the music. It vibrates with a vibration intensity according to the amplitude. Specifically, for example, when the peak of the amplitude is 40%, the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) is set to 40%, and when it is 50%, the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) is set to 50%. In the case of%, 70% is set as the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio). As a result, the loudness of the sound felt by the player and the strength of the vibration can be linked with each other, so that it is possible to provide a more realistic effect.

In this embodiment, a plurality of songs or sound effects may be combined and output at the same time. Specifically, for example, when a big hit occurs and a music for a big hit is output, a winning sound for the first specific winning opening 65a is detected and a winning sound is output. Although the details will be described later, when a plurality of different voices are output at the same time, a plurality of voices are synthesized by the voice synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 130) provided in the voice output device 226, and a new voice data of 1 is obtained. Is output to the amplifier unit 307. Therefore, the voice synthesis unit 306 is provided with a plurality of channels for receiving a plurality of types of voice data to be synthesized. The voice synthesis unit 306 can synthesize the voice data input to each channel and output it to the amplifier unit 307. This makes it possible to output a plurality of different audio data at the same time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, in the case of outputting a plurality of audio data, a case of avoiding the output of a part of the audio data as sound will be described. In the present embodiment, even during the execution of the fluctuation effect (vibration effect) accompanied by the vibration operation, if a new start prize is detected, it is possible to determine whether or not the hold notice effect can be executed. Therefore, if the determination is won, the hold notice effect may be executed during the vibration effect. However, during the vibration effect, it is normal to pay attention to the variation effect and play the game, and it may not be noticed that the mode of the reserved symbol has been changed. In such a case, if the vibration corresponding to the hold notice effect and the sound are output, the player may misunderstand that a special (rare) effect was executed in the vibration effect. There is a risk. Then, if the misunderstanding is not resolved and the vibration effect during execution is finally disengaged, the player may feel distrust. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the hold notice effect is determined, neither sound nor vibration is output if the vibration effect is being executed. That is, the configuration is such that only the display mode of the reserved symbol in the sub-display area Ds is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from confusing the music or vibration based on the vibration effect with the sound effect or vibration based on the hold notice effect.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an audio output method for canceling the output of the sound effect corresponding to the hold notice effect when the hold notice effect is determined. As shown in FIG. 129, when the hold notice effect is determined during the output (playback) of the music for the vibration effect to the channel 1, the audio data (audio file) corresponding to the sound effect is transferred to the channel 2. On the other hand, it is output (reproduced). Further, at the same time as the output of the sound effect corresponding to the hold notice effect, the audio data (cancellation data) for canceling the sound effect is output to the channel 3.

As shown in FIG. 129, the voice data corresponding to the sound effect and the cancellation data of the sound effect are data having opposite phases to each other, and therefore, when they are synthesized by the voice synthesis unit 306, they cancel each other out. Therefore, the set hold notice sound effect does not actually reach the player as a sound. Further, as described above, since the vibration operation of the swing operation member 310 is set based on the voice data after synthesis, the sound effect for the hold notice effect canceled after synthesis by the cancellation data is set to the vibration operation. It will not be reflected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sound and vibration corresponding to different effects from being output during the execution of the vibration effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from erroneously recognizing the voice or vibration based on another effect as a part of the sound or vibration operation of the vibration effect.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132. First, FIG. 130 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 130, the voice output device 226 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 so as to be able to transmit and receive data.

As shown in FIG. 130, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 301 is a ROM 302 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 301, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 302 is executed. A certain RAM 203 is built in.

The MPU 301 of the voice output device 226 is electrically connected to the input / output port 305 and the voice synthesis unit 306. When a command for designating voice data is received from the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input / output port 305. Further, the voice data designated by the voice lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the voice type of the voice synthesis unit 306.

The voice synthesis unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesis LSI that synthesizes the voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. As a result, various voices specified by the voice lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308. In this embodiment, the synthetic voice data generated by the voice synthesis unit 306 is input not only to the amplifier unit 307 but also to the ADC 309 configured by a known AC-DC converter. The ADC 309 is configured to convert synthetic voice data, which is analog data, into digital data and output it to the MPU 301.

More specifically, the ADC 309 has at least a comparator 309a1 to 309a15 and a decoding unit 309b. Each of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15 can determine whether or not the amplitude (voltage) of the received analog data is larger than the voltage corresponding to each of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15. The voltage corresponding to each comparator 309a1 to 309a15 is set by 1 volt in the range of 7 volt to -7 volt. The comparators 309a1 to 309a15 are configured to output L when the voltage value of the synthetic voice data is larger than the corresponding voltage value, and output H when the voltage value of the synthetic voice data is smaller.

The decoding unit 309b identifies the voltage value range of the synthesized speech data this time from the combination of the outputs of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15, and converts it into a 4-bit digital value. That is, it is converted into digital values from "0000B" to "1111B" in ascending order of voltage. Specifically, for example, when the voltage value of the synthesized voice data is larger than 7 volts, "1111B" is output as a digital value. Further, for example, when the voltage value of the synthesized voice data is larger than 3 volts and 4 volts or less, "1011B" is output as a digital value.

The MPU 301 samples the synthesized voice data output from the ADC 309 over a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and outputs the average value (average amplitude) to the voice lamp control device 113. It has a structure. The voice lamp control device 113 specifies the corresponding vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) from the received average amplitude. Then, an operation command for driving the vibration motor 380 with the specified vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) is set for the motor control IC. As a result, the vibration intensity of the swing operation member 310 can be changed according to the sound output from the speaker unit 308, so that it is possible to provide a realistic effect.

In the fifth embodiment, the digital value output from the ADC 309 is output to the MPU 301. However, by directly outputting the digital value to the input / output port 305, the digital value is directly output to the audio lamp control device 113. It may be configured to output. Then, when executing a fluctuation effect accompanied by a vibration effect, the voice lamp control device 113 calculates the average amplitude by sampling the digital value over a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). May be. Then, the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) corresponding to the calculated average amplitude may be notified to the motor control IC by an operation command. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 301 can be reduced.

In the fifth embodiment, the synthesized speech data is converted into the average value of the absolute values of the amplitudes, and the vibration intensity (duty ratio) is specified based on the average value, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the maximum value of the absolute value in a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) for sampling may be output from the audio output device 226 to the audio lamp control device 113, or the effective value (maximum amplitude) may be output. A value obtained by dividing the value by the square root of 2) may be calculated and output from the audio output device 226 to the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 131 (a). FIG. 131 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 131 (a), the ROM 222 of the fifth embodiment is provided with a vibration conversion table 222 g with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 116 (a)). The difference is that the vibration scenario selection table 222e has been deleted.

The vibration conversion table 222g is referred to in order to specify the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio of the pulse signal (drive voltage) output to the motor control IC) from the data indicating the amplitude of the synthetic voice data received from the voice output device 226. The data table to be created. The details of the vibration conversion table 222g will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (a).

FIG. 132A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the vibration conversion table 222g. As shown in FIG. 132A, the vibration conversion table 222g should be notified to the motor control IC for each range of the amplitude (A) values of the synthetic voice data received from the voice output device 226. The ratios are specified in association with each other.

Specifically, the duty ratio of 5% is defined in association with the range in which the amplitude A of the synthetic speech data is 0% or more and less than 5%. Further, the duty ratio is defined as 10% in the range where the amplitude A is 5% or more and less than 15%, and the duty ratio is defined in the range where the amplitude A is 15% or more and less than 25%. 20% is associated with the DUTY ratio, and 30% is associated with the amplitude A in the range of 25% or more and less than 35%. Similarly, every time the amplitude A increases by 10%, the associated duty ratio also increases by 10%. Then, for the range in which the amplitude A is 95% or more and 100% or less, 100% is defined in association with the duty ratio. The vibration conversion table 222g is referred to when the synthesized voice data synthesized by the voice synthesis unit 306 of the voice output device 226 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, and the DUTY ratio corresponding to the amplitude is used for motor control. It is controlled to set an operation command for notifying the IC. As a result, the vibration intensity of the swing operation member 310 can be changed in conjunction with the synthetic voice data, so that the player who is touching the swing operation member 310 can be provided with a more realistic effect. can do.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 131 (b). FIG. 131 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 131 (b), in the RAM 223 in the fifth embodiment, a vibration effect flag 223ba is added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 116 (b)), and the vibration effect flag 223ba is added. The vibration scenario storage area 223u, the vibration pointer 223v, and the scenario type flag 223w have been deleted.

The vibration effect flag 223ba is a flag indicating whether or not an effect accompanied by a vibration operation of the swing operation member 310 is being executed. While the vibration effect flag 223ba is on, the swing operation member 310 is vibrated based on the synthetic voice data output from the voice output device 226. On the other hand, when the vibration effect flag 223ba is off, the vibration operation is not executed regardless of whether or not the synthetic voice data is received. The vibration effect flag 223ba is set to ON when starting a variation effect accompanied by a vibration operation or when starting a hold notice effect.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (b). FIG. 132B is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 302. As shown in FIG. 132 (b), the ROM 302 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which an audio file (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, etc. in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 is stored. When the execution of various effects is notified by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice file corresponding to the effects is read from the voice file storage area 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the voice synthesis unit 306.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the sound output device 132 will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (c). FIG. 132 (c) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. 132 (c), the RAM 303 is provided with at least a command storage area 303a, a music output in-progress flag 303b, and an anti-phase output flag 303c.

The command storage area 303a is an area in which various commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice output device 226 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 136) of the audio output device 226 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 303a is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The music output flag 303b is a flag indicating whether or not a variable display effect or the like is executed and a music is being output based on the audio file. If the music output flag 303b is on, it means that the music is being output, and if it is off, it means that the music is not being output. When the output of the sound effect corresponding to the hold notice effect is notified while the music output flag 303b is on, in addition to playing the sound effect sound file, the sound data for cancellation (sound effect sound effect) is played. Outputs out-of-phase data) to a dedicated channel. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sound effects from being repeatedly pronounced during the execution of the music.

The anti-phase output flag 303c is a flag indicating whether or not an output of anti-phase audio data for canceling the sound effect of the hold notice effect is set. If the anti-phase output flag 303c is on, it means that the output of the anti-phase audio data is set, and if it is off, it means that the output of the anti-phase audio data is not set. .. When the anti-phase output flag 303c is turned on and the sound effect corresponding to the hold notice effect is set (the audio file is reproduced), the anti-phase data for cancellation is reproduced at the same time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sound effects from being repeatedly pronounced during the execution of the music.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. Regarding the same processing as in the third embodiment, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted, and only the different control processing will be illustrated and described.

First, the command determination process 5 (S2141) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 5 (S2141). This command determination process 5 (see FIGS. 133 and S2141) is executed in place of the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 124) in the fourth embodiment, and is used to perform control according to a command received from the main control device 110. It is a process.

In each of the command determination processes 5 (see FIG. 124), S2201 to S2209, S221 to S2216, S2231, and S2232, S2201 to S2209 of the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 124) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S2211 to S2216, S2231, and S2232 are executed. Further, in the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 133) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2213 that the notification command is not received (S2213: No), then the synthetic voice command is received. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S2241). This synthetic voice command is a command output from the voice output device 226 and output by the MPU 301 to notify the average amplitude of the synthetic voice data in a predetermined period (0.1 seconds).

If it is determined in the process of S2241 that the synthetic voice command has not been received (S2241: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2216. On the other hand, in the process of S2241 when it is determined that the synthetic voice command has been received (S2241: Yes), it is determined whether the vibration effect flag 223ba is on (S2242). If the vibration effect flag 223ba is off (S2242: No), the vibration effect is not being executed and it is not necessary to set the vibration in conjunction with the voice, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the vibration effect flag 223ba is on (S2242: Yes), the average amplitude of the synthetic speech data specified by the received command is converted into the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) (S2243), and the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio). ) Is set in the motor control IC to set the vibration operation of the vibration motor 380 (S2244), and this process is terminated.

Next, the hold notice setting process 5 (S2421) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 134. This hold notice setting process 5 (see FIG. 134) is a process executed in place of the hold notice setting process (see FIG. 127) in the fourth embodiment, and is a process for determining whether or not the hold notice effect can be executed. is there.

Of the hold notice setting processes 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, the processes S3601 to S3605 are the processes of S3601 to S3605 of the hold notice setting process (see FIG. 127) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed.

Further, in the hold notice setting process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, after the sound effect corresponding to the hold notice effect is set in the process of S3605, the vibration effect flag 223ba is set to ON (S3621). ), End this process. As a result, it can be shown that the effect accompanied by vibration is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to set the vibration operation of the vibration intensity corresponding to the hold notice effect for the vibration motor 380 based on the synthetic voice command. it can.

<Regarding the control process of the audio output device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the output processing executed by the audio output device 226 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137.

First, the main process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (a). FIG. 135A is a flowchart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main process of the voice output device 226 is executed, first, based on the average amplitude obtained by sampling the synthesized voice data for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) in the command determination process (S6002). A command output process for transmitting the generated synthetic voice command to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S6001). Next, a command determination process that performs a process according to a command received from the voice lamp control device 113 or the ADC 309 is executed (S6002). Details of this command determination process (S6002) will be described later with reference to FIG. 136. After the processing of S6002, the audio setting process for reproducing the audio data (audio file) according to the effect is executed (S6003). The details of this voice setting process (S6003) will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

When the processing of S6003 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 303 (S6004). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S6004 (S6004: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S6006), and the power-off process is executed (S6007). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S6008), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S6004 (S6004: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S6005), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S6005: No), the process returns to the process of S6001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S6005: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (b). FIG. 135 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt process.

This command interrupt process (see FIG. 135 (b)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S6501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

Next, the command determination process (S6002), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (S6002).

In the command determination process (S6002), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6101), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6101: No), the command determination process ends. Then return to the main process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6101: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to on (S6102), and then the unprocessed new command stored in the command buffer area is set. For all the processing commands, the type of the command is analyzed (S6103).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a voice variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6104). This voice variation pattern command displays a detailed display mode of the variation pattern in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 55) or the special figure 2 variation start process (see FIG. 56) of the voice lamp control device 113. At the selected timing (see S2243 in FIG. 55 and S2303 in FIG. 56), it is also set to notify the type of sound to be reproduced and the output timing corresponding to the display mode.

In the processing of S6104, when it is determined that there is a variation pattern command for voice among the unprocessed commands (S6104: Yes), the music and sound effect used during the execution of the notified variation pattern command are specified (S6105). ), The specified music, the output channel of the sound effect, and the output timing are set (S6106), and the process returns to the process of S6101.

In the processing of S6104, if it is determined that there is no voice variation pattern command (S6104: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a voice hold notice command among the unprocessed commands (S6107). This voice hold notice command is generated by the process of S3605 that sets the sound effect corresponding to the hold notice effect in the hold notice setting process 5 (see FIG. 134) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is generated by the voice lamp control device. It is output to the audio output device 226 by the command output process (S2102) of the main process 4 (see FIG. 118) of 113.

In the processing of S6104, when it is determined that there is a voice hold notice command among the unprocessed commands (S6107: Yes), the sound effect corresponding to the notified hold notice type is specified (S6108) and specified. The output timing of the sound effect is set (S6109), and it is determined whether or not the music output flag 303b is on (S6110). If the music output flag 303b is off (S6110: No), the process returns to the process of S6101. On the other hand, if the music output flag 303b is on (S6110: Yes), the antiphase sound output flag 303c is set on (S6111), and the process returns to S6101. By turning on the anti-phase sound output flag 303c here, the audio file corresponding to the sound effect and the anti-phase sound of the sound effect are separated at the timing of outputting the sound effect corresponding to the hold notice effect. Can be output (played back) to the same channel at the same time. As a result, when another music is already being played, it is possible to cancel the output of the sound effect corresponding to the hold notice effect and the vibration operation executed in conjunction with the sound effect.

In the processing of S6107, when it is determined that there is no voice hold notice command among the unprocessed commands (S6107: No), it is determined whether or not the synthesized voice is received (S6112). When it is determined that the digital value of the synthesized voice is received by ADC309 (S6112: Yes), the synthesized voice is sampled over a predetermined period (0.1 seconds), and the predetermined period (0. The average value of the amplitude in 1 second) is specified (S6113), a synthetic voice command for notifying the average value of the specified amplitude is set (S6114), and the process returns to the process of S6101. By this synthetic voice command, the vibration intensity (DUTY) ratio corresponding to the synthetic voice data is specified (converted) by the processing of S2253 of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. To.

On the other hand, in the process of S6112, when it is determined that the synthesized voice is not received (S6112: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6115), and the process proceeds to S6101. Return.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the details of the audio setting process (S6003), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the contents of the voice setting process (S6003).

In the audio setting process (S6003), first, it is determined whether or not it is the output (reproduction) timing of the music (S6201). When it is determined in the processing of S6201 that it is the output timing of the music (S6201: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (S6202), and the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel (6203). ), The music output flag 303b is set to ON (S6204), and the process proceeds to S6205. The channel for outputting the audio file is predetermined for each file. For example, the audio file of the music used for the variation effect is preset to be output to the channel 1.

On the other hand, in the process of S6201 when it is determined that it is not the output timing of the music (S6201: No), the process of S6202 to S6204 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6205.

In the process of S6205, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the sound effect (S6205). If it is not the output timing of the sound effect (S6205: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the output timing of the sound effect is (S6205: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current sound effect is read (S6206), the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel (6207), and the opposite phase is output. It is determined whether the flag 303c is on (S6208). If it is determined in the process of S6208 that the anti-phase output flag 303c is off (S6208: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S6208, if it is determined that the anti-phase output flag 303c is on (S6208: Yes), the anti-phase audio file of the current sound effect is read (S6209), and the read audio file is canceled. Outputs to the channel (channel 3) for (6210), and this process ends. As a result, the sound effects can be canceled by the sounds of opposite phases, so that it is possible to prevent the sound effects of different effects from being output in an overlapping manner during the execution of the variable effect (when another song is being played). Can be suppressed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player who plays the game paying attention to the fluctuation effect from misunderstanding the sound effect or vibration corresponding to the hold notice effect as the sound effect or vibration based on the variation effect. It is possible to have an accurate sense of expectation for the variable production.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the corresponding vibration intensity is sequentially calculated from the synthesized voice data after synthesizing the music and the sound effect, and the vibration operation of the swing operation member 310 is set. It has a structure. As a result, the player who is touching the swing operation member 310 is made to recognize that the sound output from the speaker unit 308 and the mode of vibration transmitted from the swing operation member 310 are interlocked and changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a more realistic effect.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, if it is decided to execute the hold notice effect during the execution of the fluctuation effect accompanied by the vibration operation, the sound corresponding to the hold notice effect can be canceled. There is. More specifically, by simultaneously setting the sound effect data for the hold notice effect and the audio data having the opposite phase to the sound effect data, they are combined to cancel each other out. By synthesizing the voice, a part of the data can be canceled out, so that the influence of the part of the data can be eliminated even in the vibration operation specified based on the synthesized voice data. With this configuration, a player who plays a game paying attention to the fluctuation effect may mistakenly recognize the sound effect or vibration corresponding to the hold notice effect as the sound effect or vibration based on the variation effect. It is possible to prevent (suppress) and give an accurate sense of expectation to the fluctuation effect.

In the fifth embodiment, a case where the sound (sound effect) corresponding to the hold notice effect is canceled by the opposite phase voice data when the fluctuation effect accompanied by the vibration operation and the hold notice effect conflict with each other will be described. However, the type of voice to be canceled and the conditions for canceling are not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the target for canceling the sound is not limited to the sound of the effect accompanied by the vibration operation, and may be arbitrarily determined. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the fifth embodiment, the synthetic voice data is converted into the vibration intensity, but the target of conversion into the vibration intensity is not limited to the voice. For example, the vibration intensity may be changed in conjunction with the brightness of various LEDs (light emitting members) provided on the front frame 14 or the like. That is, the drive power for various LEDs may be discriminated and the vibration intensity may be changed in proportion to the drive power. In general, as the driving power of an LED increases, the brightness of the output light increases, so that the vibration intensity can be changed in conjunction with the apparent brightness. Therefore, it is possible to provide a more realistic production operation. Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the accessory is provided on the board surface, the vibration intensity may be changed in conjunction with the operation of the accessory. Specifically, the vibration intensity may be changed in proportion to the operating speed set for the driver IC that controls the operation of the motor means such as the stepping motor that changes the accessory. By varying the vibration intensity in conjunction with the operating speed of the accessory, it is possible to provide a realistic effect operation. Further, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be discriminated to change the vibration intensity. Specifically, for example, a histogram of an image drawn in each frame may be acquired from the display control device 114, and the vibration intensity may be increased as the number of high-gradation pixels increases. Further, the vibration intensity may be increased as the number of pixels of a specific color (for example, red) increases. With this configuration, the vibration intensity can be changed in conjunction with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, so that a more realistic effect can be provided.

In the fifth embodiment, the synthetic voice data is output to the MPU 301, but by directly outputting to the input / output port 305, the synthetic voice data is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as it is. May be. Then, when the fluctuation effect accompanied by the vibration effect is executed, the absolute value of the amplitude of the synthesized voice data is sampled over a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) on the voice lamp control device 113 side to average it. It may be configured to acquire the amplitude of. Then, the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) corresponding to the specified average amplitude may be notified to the motor control IC. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 301 can be reduced.

In the fifth embodiment, the synthesized speech data is converted into the average value of the absolute values of the amplitudes, and the vibration intensity (duty ratio) is specified based on the average value, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the maximum value of the absolute value in a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) for sampling may be output from the audio output device 226 to the audio lamp control device 113, or the effective value (maximum amplitude) may be output. A value obtained by dividing the value by the square root of 2) may be calculated and output from the audio output device 226 to the audio lamp control device 113.

In the fifth embodiment, the vibration motor 380 for setting the vibration operation based on the synthetic voice data is provided, but a different type of vibration motor may be provided. For example, a vibration motor that vibrates according to the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 or a vibration motor that vibrates according to the operation of the accessory may be provided. With this configuration, a wide variety of vibration operations can be realized.

In the fifth embodiment, the voice output device 226 is configured to output the synthesized voice data synthesized by the voice synthesis unit 306 to the amplifier unit 307 and the ADC 309, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to synthesize only the audio data output for some channels and output it to the ADC 309. That is, it may be divided into a channel that generates vibration in conjunction with voice (for example, channel 1 and channel 2) and a channel that independently outputs voice without generating vibration. This prevents the sound output (reproduced) based on the effect executed independently of the variable effect (for example, the hold notice effect) from being combined with the sound of the variable effect and reflected in the vibration intensity. it can. Therefore, in the variation effect accompanied by the vibration operation, only the sound corresponding to the variation effect can be converted into the vibration intensity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effect accompanied by vibration from competing with the other effect, output a loud sound effect in the other effect, and change the vibration intensity. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate vibration intensity according to the type of fluctuation effect. This modification will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 138.

FIG. 138 is a block diagram showing a voice synthesis unit 306 of the voice output device 226 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 138, in this modification, the voice synthesis unit 306 has a first synthesis unit 306a that synthesizes the voice data input to the channel 1 and the voice data input to the channel 2, and the first synthesis unit 306a thereof. A second synthesis unit 306b that synthesizes the voice synthesized by the synthesis unit 306a and the voice input to each of the channels 3 and subsequent channels (channels 3 to n) is provided.

The audio data of the music to be played in the variable effect is input to the channel 1, and the audio data of the sound effect output during the variable effect is input to the channel 2. On the other hand, the audio data of the audio output in the effect different from the variable effect is input to the channel 3 and later. That is, only the voice related to the variation effect is synthesized by the first synthesis unit 306a, and the synthesized voice (first synthetic voice) is output to the second synthesis unit 306b and the ADC 309.

As described above, the audio signal input to the ADC 309 is converted into a digital value and output to the MPU 301. Then, the digital value is sampled for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second), and the average value is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 as the amplitude of the voice. The voice lamp control device 113 specifies the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) based on the notified amplitude, and sets a command for changing the DUTY ratio for the motor control IC. As a result, even when the fluctuation effect accompanied by vibration (vibration effect) and other effects compete with each other, only the audio data of the vibration effect can be reflected in the vibration intensity. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate vibration intensity only according to the type of fluctuation effect. Further, in the fourth embodiment described above, when the vibration effect and the other effect compete with each other, the other effect (for example, the hold notice effect) is canceled together with the sound, but in this modified example, the sound is output. Can be made to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize that another effect is executed together with the vibration effect.

In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the swing operation member 310 is configured to be vibrating, but the configuration for vibrating is not limited to the swing operation member 310. The configuration may be such that the lower plate unit 15 and the operation handle 51 are vibrated in accordance with a display effect, a sound effect, or the like, as long as the configuration is provided so that the player can touch it. Since the lower plate unit 15 and the operation handle 51 are always in contact with the player's hand or foot during the game, when a vibration effect occurs, the player can easily recognize the vibration effect. it can.

In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the vibration motor 380 is controlled by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, or may be controlled by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. Further, the display control device 114 may be used for control. As a result, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, a first modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 144. In the fifth embodiment described above, the voice output device 226 is configured to output (reproduce) a different type of voice file for each channel of the voice synthesis unit 306.

On the other hand, in the first modification, the same type of sound effect is input to a plurality of channels at different timings. That is, when the effect of continuously outputting the sound effect for a period shorter than the output period of the sound effect is executed, the same sound effect is reproduced by slightly shifting the timing for a plurality of channels. It is supposed to be. If the sound effect is continuously played only for a single channel, the sound effect in the middle of output is canceled and a new sound effect is output each time it is time to output a new sound effect. Therefore, only the beginning of the sound effect can be output. On the other hand, in the first modification, the sound effects are reproduced by shifting the timing for a plurality of channels, so even if the sound effects are newly started to be reproduced, the sound effects are reproduced on other channels. The sound effect being played can be continued to be played as it is. Therefore, the effect of producing the sound effect can be further enhanced.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the fifth embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 is partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 has been changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 139, an aspect of the hold notice effect in the first modification will be described. In the first modification, a plurality of modes (weak notice, strong notice) having different expectations are provided for the hold notice effect. The strong notice is a mode in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the weak notice. More specifically, the strong notice is configured so that a new hold ball is set at a higher rate when it is a big hit or out of super reach, and a lower rate is set when it is out of normal reach. ing. In addition, it is configured so that it is not selected when the stop type is completely out of range. On the other hand, the weak notice is set at a lower rate in the case of a big hit or out of super reach than the strong notice, while the rate of being set is higher in the case of out of normal reach. It may also be set in the case of complete disengagement (for example, 5% of the reserved symbols corresponding to complete disengagement). For this reason, the strong notice production is more likely to lead to a big hit.

FIG. 139 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and a mode of a sound effect when the hold notice effect corresponding to the weak notice is executed, and FIG. 139 (b) is a diagram showing a mode of the sound effect. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the mode of a sound effect when the hold notice effect corresponding to a strong notice is executed.

As shown in FIG. 139 (a), when the hold notice effect in the mode of weak notice is set for the new start prize, it corresponds to the newest start prize among the hold symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The effect of changing the reserved symbol HY1a to a special symbol imitating a treasure box is executed. In addition, a sound effect of "Shakin" is output as a sound effect (weak warning sound) corresponding to the weak warning. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139 (b), when the hold notice effect of the strong notice mode is set for the new start winning, the most of the hold symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds. An effect is executed in which the reserved symbol HY1b corresponding to the new start prize is changed to a symbol that looks more luxurious than the weak notice. In addition, as a warning sound (strong warning sound) corresponding to the strong warning, a sound effect in which the beginning portion of the weak warning sound (voice of "shaki") is repeatedly output is output. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the effect having a higher degree of expectation than the weak notice effect has been executed. Further, by configuring the strong warning sound to be output using the beginning portion (part) of the weak warning sound, it is possible to use common voice data for the weak warning sound and the strong warning sound. Therefore, the number of audio files can be reduced.

Next, the acoustic waveforms of the weak warning sound and the strong warning sound will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 (a) is a diagram showing an acoustic waveform of a weak warning sound. As shown in FIG. 140 (a), when the weak warning sound is set, the voice data (voice file) corresponding to the effect on of "Shakin" is output to the channel 2 only once. As shown in FIG. 140 (a), the amplitude of this weak warning sound is larger in the acoustic waveform corresponding to the voice "ki" than in the acoustic waveform corresponding to the voice "sha". Therefore, the voice "ki" is pronounced as the loudest sound.

On the other hand, FIG. 140 (b) is a diagram showing an acoustic waveform of a strong warning sound. As shown in FIG. 140 (b), when the strong warning sound is set, the voice portion of the weak warning sound at the beginning of the weak warning sound is repeatedly output to CH2 and CH3. Further, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), the output timing to CH2 and the output timing to CH3 are shifted. As a result, it is possible to continuously output the “ki” sound whose acoustic waveform peaks (that is, the most characteristic) in the sound effect for a short period of time. Thereby, it is possible to easily distinguish whether the weak warning sound is output or the strong warning sound is output to the player.

Here, if an attempt is made to output a strong warning sound on only one channel, the next sound effect must be output after waiting for the "ki" sound to be output. The output interval becomes long. Therefore, there is a risk that the strong warning sound will be delayed and the effect of the effect will be reduced. On the other hand, if the output period of the sound effect is shortened and continuously output, only the sound "sha" at the beginning is continuously output, and the characteristic sound "ki" is not output. There is a risk. Therefore, it may be difficult to tell whether the sound effect is output continuously or only once. Further, if the voice data in which the most characteristic "ki" sound among the sound effects is continuously output is provided separately from the weak warning sound, the weak warning sound and the strong warning sound are used respectively. Since the data must be prepared, there is a problem that the capacity of the ROM 302 of the audio output device 226 increases.

On the other hand, in the first modification, when the work warning sound is output, the voice data corresponding to the weak warning sound is continuously output to a plurality of channels at different timings. As a result, even when voice data having a long period from the start of voice output to the output of characteristic voice is used as a sound effect, the characteristic voice portion is continuously output at short intervals. be able to. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, since the same voice data can be used for the weak warning sound and the strong warning sound, the capacity of the ROM 302 can be reduced.

<Electrical configuration in modification 1 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 141, the RAM 303 in the first modification has the first cutoff timer 303d and the second cutoff timer with respect to the configuration of the RMA 303 in the fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 132 (c)). The difference is that the 303e, the strong warning flag 303f, and the output count counter 303g are provided.

When the strong warning sound is set, the first cutoff timer 303d and the second cutoff timer 303e start to output the warning sound of 1 to the channel 2 and the channel 3, and then the warning sound. It is a timer for measuring the period from when the output of is cut off to when the output of the warning sound is newly started. Each time a new warning sound is output to each channel during execution of the strong warning sound, the value of the timer corresponding to the channel (either the first cutoff timer 303d or the second cutoff timer 303e) is set. A timer value corresponding to the period (for example, 0.2 seconds) until the sound "Shaki" is output is set. The values of the first cutoff timer 303d and the second cutoff timer 303e are periodically subtracted, and each time the values become 0, a new notice output start is set for the corresponding channel.

The strong warning flag 303f is a flag indicating whether or not the strong warning sound is being output. When the strong warning flag 303f is on, it indicates that the strong warning sound is being output, and when it is off, it indicates that the strong warning sound is not being output. During the strong warning flag 303f, the warning sound is repeatedly output with the timing shifted for the plurality of channels (channel 2 and channel 3).

The output number counter 303g is a counter for counting the number of times the warning sound is output during the output of the strong warning sound. As described above, in the first modification, when the strong warning sound is set, the beginning part of the weak warning sound (sound of "shaki") is continuously output. From the value of the output number counter 303g, it is determined whether the number of times the weak warning sound is output has reached the upper limit (for example, 4 times), and when the upper limit is reached, the output of the warning sound is terminated. As a result, it is possible to output the same number of consecutive weak warning sounds in each strong warning sound.

<Regarding the control process of the audio output device in the first modification of the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144, the control process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 142, the voice setting process (see FIG. 142) executed in the main process (see FIG. 135) in the first modification will be described.

Of the audio setting processes (see FIG. 142) in the first modification, in each of the processes S6201 to S6205 and S6208 to S6210, S6201 to S6205 of the audio setting process (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. And the same processing as each processing of S6208 to S6210 is executed.

Further, in the voice setting process (see FIG. 142) in this first modification, when it is determined in the process of S6205 that it is the output timing of the sound effect (S6205: Yes), the effect for setting the sound effect. The sound setting process is executed (S6211), and the process shifts to S6208. Details of this sound effect setting process (S6211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Further, in the voice setting process (see FIG. 142) in this first modification, when it is determined in the process of S6205 that it is not the output timing of the sound effect (S6205: No), the antiphase flag 303c is turned off in the process of S6208. When it is determined that (S6208: No), or when the processing of S6210 is completed, the strong warning control process for controlling the voice output of the strong warning sound is executed (S6212), and this processing is terminated. .. The details of this strong advance notice control process (S6212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 144.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned sound effect setting process (S6211) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. As described above, this sound effect setting process (S6211) is a process for setting a sound effect.

In this sound effect setting process (see FIG. 143), first, it is determined whether or not the sound effect to be output this time is a strong warning sound (S6301), and if it is not a strong warning sound, it corresponds to the sound effect to be output this time. Read the audio file (S6302). Next, the read audio file (audio data) is output to the channel corresponding to the sound effect (S6303), and this process is terminated. For example, when outputting a weak warning sound, an audio file corresponding to the weak warning sound is output to channel 2.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6301 when it is determined that the sound effect to be output this time is a strong warning sound (S6301: Yes), an audio file (voice data) corresponding to the sound effect of the hold notice effect (that is, the weak warning sound). ) Is read (S6304), and the read audio file is output to channel 2 (S6305). Next, 1 is set in the value of the output count counter 303g (S6306), and the output period for the strong warning sound is set in the first cutoff timer 303d (S6307). Next, by setting the strong warning flag 303f to ON, it is indicated that the strong warning sound is being output (S6308), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned strong advance notice control process (S6212) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 144. As described above, this strong warning control process (S6212) is a process for controlling the audio output of the strong warning sound.

In the strong warning control process (see FIG. 144), first, it is determined whether the strong warning flag 303f is on (whether the strong warning sound is being output) (S6401), and the strong warning flag 303f is off. If (S6401: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6401 that the strong warning flag 303f is on (S6401: Yes), the strong warning sound is being output. Whether or not it is determined (S6402). In the process of S6402, when it is determined that the value of the output count counter 303g is the upper limit value (S6402: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the cutoff timing of the sound effect (S6403). Here, in the first modification, the weak warning sound is output four times (twice for each of channel 2 and channel 3). Then, the output start timing for the channel 3 is later than the output start timing for the channel 2. Therefore, since the final audio output of the strong warning sound is performed for the channel 3, in the process of S6403, it is determined whether the timer value of the second cutoff timer 303e corresponding to the channel 3 has become 0.

In the process of S6403, when it is determined that the sound effect (weak warning sound set in channel 3) is not the cutoff timing (the timer value of the second cutoff timer 303e is not 0) (S6403: No), the voice is heard. Since it is not the output timing of, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S6403, when it is determined that it is the cutoff timing of the sound effect (S6403: Yes), the audio file (audio data) corresponding to the sound effect (weak warning sound) of the hold notice effect is read out (S6404). ), The read audio file is output to channel 3 (S6405). Next, the strong warning flag 303f and the output count counter 303g are reset to the initial values (S6406), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6402, when it is determined that the value of the output count counter 303g is less than the upper limit value (S6402: No), then whether or not the value of the output count counter 303g is 1 is determined. Determine (S6407). In the processing of S6407, when it is determined that the value of the output count counter 303g is 1 (S6407), the first weak warning sound for channel 2 is output, and then the weak warning sound is output for channel 3. It means that it is a period between. Therefore, in this case, first, it is determined whether or not the delay period until the output of the weak warning sound is started for the channel 3 has elapsed (S6408). If it is determined that the delay period has elapsed in the processing of S6408 (S6408), the process proceeds to the processing of S6409. Further, in the process of S6407, even if it is determined that the value of the output count counter 303g is not 1, the process of S6408 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6409.

In the process of S6409, it is determined from the values of the first cutoff timer 303d and the second cutoff timer 303e whether or not it is the cutoff timing of the sound effect (S6409). In this determination, when either the first cutoff timer 303d or the second cutoff timer 303e becomes 0 and the delay period is not set, it is determined that the cutoff timing is reached. If it is determined in the process of S6409 that it is not the cutoff timing (S6409: No), it is not necessary to set a new sound effect, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the cutoff timing of the sound effect (S6409: Yes), and when it is determined that the delay period has elapsed in the processing of S6408 (S6408), S6410 to output a new weak warning sound. The process of S6416 is executed. Specifically, the audio file (audio data) corresponding to the sound effect (weak advance notice sound) for the hold advance notice effect is read out (S6410), and it is determined whether or not the value of the current output count counter 303 g is an even number. (S6411). If the value of the output count counter 303g is an even number (S6411: Yes), the read audio file is output to channel 2 (S6412), and the output period for the strong warning sound is set for the first cutoff timer 303d. (S6413), the process shifts to S6416. On the other hand, if the value of the output count counter 303g is an odd number (S6411: No), the read audio file is output to channel 3 (S6414), and the output period for the strong warning sound is set for the second cutoff timer 303e. Then (S6415), the process shifts to S6416.

In the processing of S6416 executed after the processing of S6413 or S6415, 1 is added to the value of the output count counter 303g to end this processing. By executing this strong warning control process (see FIG. 144), it is possible to continuously output the voice "shaki" to a plurality of channels at different timings during the output of the strong warning sound.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the fifth embodiment, one of a plurality of types of warning sounds (weak warning sound, strong warning sound) is used as the warning sound to be output in the hold notice effect. It is configured to output sound effects. Further, some warning sounds (strong warning sounds) are generated by using the voice data of other warning sounds (weak warning sounds). Specifically, when the strong warning sound is output, the beginning portion of the weak warning sound is continuously output with the timing shifted for a plurality of channels. With this configuration, it is possible to continuously output the "ki" sound, which is a characteristic sound of the weak warning sound, so that the difference between the weak warning sound and the strong warning sound can be made to the player. It can be easily distinguished.

Here, as in the first modification, the sound pressure (amplitude) is small immediately after the start of output, and the sound pressure (amplitude) peaks after a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) from the start of output. When the sound effect is adopted as the weak warning sound, there is a risk that the effect of the effect will be reduced even if the strong warning sound is realized in a single channel. Specifically, when the strong warning sound is configured to continuously output the weak warning sound in a single channel for a short period (every 0.2 seconds), only the part where the sound pressure (amplitude) is small is repeated. It will be played (output). Therefore, even if the beginning portion of the weak warning sound is continuously output, the warning sound may be difficult for the player to hear, and the effect of the effect may be reduced. On the other hand, when a single channel is used to output a portion where the sound pressure (amplitude) becomes large and a weak warning sound is continuously output, the portion where the sound pressure (amplitude) is large is reached. Until then, a new weak warning sound cannot be output, so it is necessary to lengthen the output interval of the weak warning sound. That is, since the period from the start of the output of the weak warning sound of 1 to the start of the output of the next weak warning sound becomes longer, the production may be delayed and the production effect may be reduced. is there.

On the other hand, in the first modification, in the strong warning effect that continuously outputs the weak warning sound at short intervals, the channel for outputting the warning sound is switched for each time. Weak warning sounds with different timings input to the channel can be synthesized by the voice synthesis unit 306 and output as synthetic voice data. As a result, the weak warning sound can be output up to the portion where the sound pressure (amplitude) peaks (characteristic voice portion) while keeping the output interval of the weak warning sound short.

The control is not limited to the application to the fifth embodiment, and may be combined with the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment. In particular, by applying to the above-mentioned third embodiment and its modified example, even if the player's continuous striking interval is even shorter than the sound effect of the shortest output period, the pressing sound for each pressing operation can be output completely. Can be done. Therefore, the pressing sound can be suitably output according to the player's repeated hitting interval.

In this first modification, the control of outputting the sound effect to a plurality of channels at different timings is applied to the warning sound of the hold notice effect, but the applicable range of this control is the hold notice effect. It is not limited to, and can be applied to the sound effect of any effect. As a result, the storage capacity of the audio output device 226 can be further reduced.

In the first modification, the same warning sound (weak warning sound) is continuously output to a plurality of channels by shifting the output start timing as the strong warning sound. Is not limited to the same warning sound. For example, a configuration may be configured in which different warning sounds for each channel are continuously output with the output start timing shifted. As a result, the degree of freedom in the production mode can be further increased. In this case, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced by adjusting the output timing of the characteristic sound of each warning sound so as to be shifted.

In this first modification, as the strong warning sound, the warning sound of 1 (weak warning sound) is continuously output to a plurality of channels by shifting the output start timing, but the strong warning sound is used. Is not limited to the mode composed of only one warning sound (weak warning sound). For example, a plurality of different warning sounds may be output in a predetermined order for each channel at different timings. Further, the order of the warning sounds output for each channel may be the same or different. As a result, the degree of freedom of the strong warning sound can be further increased.

In this first modification, the output start timing is shifted for the two channels to continuously output the weak warning sound, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of output channels is increased. May be good. For example, the output start timing may be shifted for the four channels to continuously output the weak warning sound. As a result, the output start timing for each channel can be shortened, which has the effect of enhancing the effect of the effect.

In this second modification, the most characteristic voice "ki" is output continuously at short intervals, but instead of making only the voice "ki" stand out, it is called "ki". The voice "sha" output before the voice may also be configured to be audible to the player. That is, among the periods during which the voice "ki" is output on one channel, the volume of the voice "ki" is reduced during the period during which the voice "sha" is output on the other channel (sound pressure). It may be configured (to make it smaller). With this configuration, the player can hear the voice "sha" more clearly, so that the effect of producing the strong warning sound can be enhanced. Further, instead of reducing the volume of the sound of "ki", in the case of the strong notice effect, the sound of "ki" may be faded out earlier than in the case of the weak notice effect. With this configuration, the player can hear the voice "sha" output during the fade-out more clearly. Also, instead of reducing or fading out the voice "ki", or in addition, in the case of a strong warning sound, increase the volume of the voice "sha" (increase the sound pressure). It may be configured. With this configuration, the player can hear the relatively inaudible voice of "sha" more clearly.

<Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 149. In the fifth embodiment described above, different audio data (audio files) are provided in the audio file storage area 302a for each type of sound effect used in the production. Then, the audio data of the corresponding sound effect is output to the channel (channel 2) corresponding to the sound effect at a predetermined timing for each production.

On the other hand, in the second modification, as the voice data (voice file) of the warning sound in the hold notice production, the voice data (reference voice data) of the reference voice and the reference voice are given. The sound data of the effect to be performed (effect sound data) is provided separately. When outputting the sound effect, the reference sound data and the effect sound data are selected one by one and output to different channels at the same time (or at different timings). With this configuration, when setting voices with the same reference voice but different effects as sound effects, the effect is applied to one reference voice data instead of providing separate voice data separately. Only the audio data needs to be switched and set. Therefore, voice data can be reduced.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment described above is that the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 is partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 has been changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 145, an acoustic waveform in the case of outputting a sound having a stronger reverberation component than usual and a sound having a stronger reverberation component than usual will be described as a warning sound for the hold notice effect. .. Here, in the second modification, a plurality of channels (channel 2, channel 3) are set as input channels to the voice synthesis unit 306 for outputting the sound effect, and each component of the sound effect is set. , It is configured to output to a predetermined channel. Specifically, the channel 2 is set as a channel for outputting the reference voice data corresponding to the reference voice which is the first component of the sound effect. On the other hand, the channel 3 is set as a channel for outputting the effect audio data corresponding to the effect which is the second component of the sound effect.

FIG. 145 (a) is a diagram showing an audio output pattern when a reverberant sound is generated with respect to a reference warning sound (sound effect of “Shakin”). The sound effect (notice sound of "Shakin") is configured to be output when the hold notice effect is executed, as in the first modification described above. In the second modification, different effect audio data are set according to the degree of expectation. It can also be selected when the effect audio data is not set and only the reference audio data is set. When only the reference audio data is used, it means a hold notice effect with a low expectation, and when the effect audio data is set, it means a hold notice effect with a relatively high expectation. Although not shown, the expectation of a big hit can be changed according to the type of effect.

As shown in FIG. 145 (a), when the effect of the pattern that generates the reverberation sound is selected for the warning sound, the reference sound component corresponds to the channel 2 for outputting the reference component. The audio file is reproduced (output), and the audio data corresponding to the effect emphasizing the reverberation component is output to the channel 3 for outputting the effect component. As a result, the voice data input to the channel 2 and the channel 3 is synthesized by the voice synthesis unit 306, and the warning sound in the mode in which the reverberation sound is emphasized (extended mode) is output.

On the other hand, FIG. 145 (b) is a diagram showing an audio output pattern when a reverberant sound is generated with respect to a reference warning sound. As shown in FIG. 145 (b), when the effect of the pattern that generates the reverberant sound is selected, it is predetermined after the audio file corresponding to the reference audio component is reproduced (output) for the channel 2. After a delay period of (for example, 0.1 second), audio data corresponding to the reverberant sound is output as an effect component. As a result, the voice data input to the channels 2 and 3 is synthesized by the voice synthesis unit 306, and a warning sound in a mode in which the echo sound is emphasized (a mode in which the echo is effective) is output.

As described above, in the second modification, the sound effect (notice sound) is divided into a plurality of components, and a separate audio file is stored for each component. When the sound effect (notice sound) is output, the audio files corresponding to each component are output to different channels. With this configuration, when setting voices with the same reference voice but different effects as sound effects, the effect is applied to one reference voice data instead of providing separate voice data separately. Only the audio data needs to be switched and set. Therefore, voice data can be reduced.

In the second control example, in addition to the reference sound and the effect component shown in FIGS. 145 (a) and 145 (b), a plurality of different reference sounds and a plurality of effect components corresponding to each reference sound are provided. It is provided. Further, in the second modification, even when the same effect component is synthesized for the same reference sound, sound effects having different impressions can be output by amplifying or attenuating the effect component. ..

<Electrical configuration in modification 2 of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. 146, the RAM 303 in the second modification is provided with the echo sound standby flag 303h with respect to the configuration of the RAM 303 in the fifth embodiment described above (see FIG. 132 (c)). Is different.

The reverberation sound standby flag 303h sets the output of the reference sound component to the output of the effect component corresponding to the reverberation sound when the reverberation sound is set as the effect component of the sound effect (reverberation sound). This is a flag indicating whether or not the period (delay period) is in progress. If the echo sound standby flag 303h is on, it means that the delay period is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the delay period is not in progress. The echo sound standby flag 303h is set to on when the delay period until the echo sound is output is set (see S6317 in FIG. 148). On the other hand, when the delay period has elapsed and the output of the effect component corresponding to the reverberant sound is set, it is set to off (see S6505 in FIG. 149).

<Regarding the control process of the audio output device in the second modification of the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the second modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149. First, the voice setting process (S6003) in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing this voice setting process.

Among the voice setting processes (see FIG. 147), in each of the processes S6201 to S6205 and S6208 to S6210, S6201 to S6205 and S6208 to S6210 of the voice setting process (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed.

Further, in the voice setting process (see FIG. 147) in this first modification, when it is determined in the process of S6205 that it is the output timing of the sound effect (S6205: Yes), the effect for setting the sound effect The sound setting process 2 is executed (S6221), and the process shifts to S6208. Details of this sound effect setting process 2 (S6221) will be described later with reference to FIG. 148.

Further, in the voice setting process (see FIG. 147) in this first modification, when it is determined in the process of S6205 that it is not the output timing of the sound effect (S6205: No), the antiphase flag 303c is turned off in the process of S6208. (S6208: No), or when the processing of S6210 is completed, a reverberation sound for controlling the audio output when a sound effect (notice sound) in which the reverberation component is emphasized is set. The control process is executed (S6222), and this process is terminated. The details of this echo sound control process (S6222) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

Next, the above-mentioned sound effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 148) will be described with reference to FIG. 148. This sound effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 148) is a process executed for setting the output of the sound effect, similarly to the sound effect setting process (see FIG. 143) in the first modification described above. Of the sound effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 148) in the second modification, the process of S6302 is the same as the process of S6302 of the sound effect setting process (see FIG. 143) in the first modification described above. Is executed.

Further, in the sound effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 148) in the second modification, when the process of S6302 is completed, the audio file (reference audio component) read in the process of S6302 is then output to channel 2 (see FIG. 148). S6311). Then, it is determined whether or not the output is set this time for the type of sound effect (preliminary sound) accompanied by the effect (S6312), and when it is determined that the output is not the type of sound effect accompanied by the effect (S6312). : No), this process ends as it is. That is, the sound effect of only the reference voice component is output.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6312, if it is determined that the sound effect (notice sound) of the type accompanied by the effect is set this time (S6312: Yes), then this effect corresponds to the reverberation sound. If it is determined whether or not the effect is to be performed (S6313), and if it is determined that the effect does not correspond to the reverberation sound (the effect corresponds to the reverberation on) (S6313: No), then the sound effect of this time is determined. The reverberant sound audio file corresponding to (S6314) is read out, the read voice file is output to channel 3 (S6315), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6313, if it is determined that the effect this time is an effect corresponding to the reverberant sound (S6313: Yes), a delay period until the audio data of the reverberant sound is output is set (S6316). By setting the echo sound standby flag 303h to ON, it is indicated that the delay period is in progress (S6317), and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the reverberation sound control process (S6222) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing this echo sound control process.

In this echo sound control process (see FIG. 149), first, it is determined whether or not the echo sound standby flag 303h is on (that is, whether it is a delay period until the effect component corresponding to the echo sound is output). (S6501), if the echo sound standby flag 303h is off (S6501: No), it is not during the delay period (that is, there is no possibility of setting the effect component corresponding to the echo sound), so this process is terminated as it is. To do.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the echo sound standby flag 303h is on in the processing of S6501, it is determined whether or not the delay period has elapsed (S6502), and it is determined that the delay period has not elapsed. In the case (S6502: No), it means that it is not the output start timing of the effect component corresponding to the reverberant sound, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S6502, when it is determined that the delay period has elapsed (S6502: Yes), the audio file of the echo sound corresponding to the current sound effect is read (S6503), and the read audio file is set to channel 3. Is output (S6504). Next, the echo sound standby flag 303h is set to off (S6505), and this process ends.

By executing this echo sound control process (see FIG. 149), the output of the echo sound as an effect component of the sound effect (notice sound) can be started at an appropriate timing.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the fifth embodiment, the sound effect (notice sound) is divided into a plurality of components, and a separate audio file is stored for each component. When the sound effect (notice sound) is output, the audio files corresponding to each component are output to different channels. With this configuration, when setting voices with the same reference voice but different effects as sound effects, the effect is applied to one reference voice data instead of providing separate voice data separately. Only the audio data needs to be switched and set. Therefore, voice data can be reduced.

The control of the second modification (control to output audio data to different channels for each component) is not limited to the application to the fifth embodiment, and may be applied to the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment. May be applied.

In this second modification, audio data is provided for each component that constitutes audio, and when audio is output, it is output to a channel determined for each component, but this is limited to this. is not it. For example, the audio data may be divided for each output period, and the data for each output period may be output to different channels. For example, when there is a sound effect with an output period of 0.5 seconds, the audio data for 0.2 seconds in the first half is output to channel 2, and the audio data for 0.3 seconds in the latter half is output to channel 3. It may be configured to output to.

In the second modification, two types of components, a reference sound component and an effect component, are output to separate channels as components constituting the sound, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect component may be further subdivided (for example, it may be subdivided into a reverberation sound component and a reverberation sound component). Then, each redifferentiated component may be output to a different channel. Similarly, the reference audio component may be further subdivided. Specifically, for example, it may be subdivided into a high-pitched sound component and a low-pitched sound component, and each component may be output to a different channel. With such a configuration, the sounds that can be expressed can be further diversified, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the second modification, the audio data is output to a channel determined for each component. That is, the reference audio component is output to the channel 2 and the effect component is output to the channel 3, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time the audio data is output, the vacant channel (the audio data is not output) at that time may be determined and the audio data of each component may be output. With this configuration, even if one sound effect is being output, another sound effect can be output to other channels of the voice synthesis unit 306, so that the output periods of the sound effects overlap. In that case, it is possible to prevent some of the sound effects from being output, or the sound effects output later to be cut off in the middle of the sound effects that were output earlier.

In the second modification, the effect component of the sound effect is changed according to the expectation of the hold notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect component that is most audible to the player is selected from the balance with the sound data other than the sound effect (for example, the music data of the back music played during the fluctuation production), and the effect component is combined with the reference sound component and output. May be. Specifically, for example, when the output of the warning sound (sound effect) is determined in accordance with the determination of the hold notice effect, the warning sound (sound effect) is obtained from the audio data of the music currently being output (played). When the information of the music in the output period is discriminated and it is determined that the sound pressure (volume) of the music is a small part, only the reference audio component may be output. On the other hand, if it is determined that the output period overlaps with the part where the sound pressure (volume) of the music is high and the sound pressure (volume) of the music becomes small in the latter half of the output period of the warning sound, the echo sound component is used as an effect component. May be configured to extend the output period of the warning sound by outputting. As a result, the output period of the warning sound in the period when the sound pressure (volume) is low in the music can be extended, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from missing the warning sound. In addition to or in addition to these controls, if it is determined that the sound pressure (volume) of the music is high during the sound pressure (volume) of the music, the sound pressure (volume) of the music is set to the output period of the music. The output may be staggered until the period when) becomes small. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from missing the warning sound.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 177. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the latent probability variation game state ST2, the probability variation state continues at least twice until the jackpot is hit, which is the most advantageous gaming state. In addition, if a big hit is made from the latent probability-changing game state ST2 with the second special symbol, there is a 66% probability of transition to the probability-changing game state ST3. Here, when a big hit is made in the probabilistic game state ST3, either a big hit that shifts to the latent probabilistic game state ST2 again or a big hit that shifts to the normal game state ST1 is given by lottery. Therefore, even if the player shifts (ranks down) from the latent probability changing game state ST2 to the probability changing game state ST3, the player may be discouraged because there is a possibility of returning to the more advantageous latent probability changing game state ST2. The configuration was such that the game could be performed with the expectation that it would be suppressed and the game would be re-entered in the latent probability change game state ST2. Further, by providing a case where the probabilistic game state ST3 is changed to the normal game state ST1, it is possible to suppress the gambling from becoming too high.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the latent probability variable gaming state ST2 is set as the most advantageous gaming state, and the probability variable gaming state ST3 is the second most advantageous gaming state after the latent probability variable gaming state. It is in a state. Specifically, when a big hit is made in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set again after the big hit (looping the latent probability changing game state ST2), or the time saving game state ST1h is set. After the configuration, the ratio of looping the latent probability variation game state is configured to be 80%. On the other hand, when a jackpot is reached in the probability variation game state ST3, the probability variation game state ST3 is set again after the jackpot (looping the probability variation game state ST3), or the time saving game state ST1h is set. The ratio of looping the probabilistic game state ST3 is set to 25%. Further, in the time-saving game state ST1h, which is disadvantageous to the player, depending on the player's selection (game method), it is easy to shift to the latent probability change game state ST2 or to the probability change game state ST3. It has a structure and realizes a novel playability in which the degree of advantage is changed according to the player's choice.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the pachinko machine 10 is executed in the third symbol display device 81. The production mode is partially changed, the configurations of ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed, and the configurations of ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The points that have changed are that some processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has been changed, and some processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. .. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 150, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. As illustrated in FIG. 150, in the sixth embodiment, the second starting port 640 is arranged below the front view of the first starting port 630. Further, the structure of the second starting port 640 in the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the right first starting port 631 in the first embodiment, and the right first starting port 631 is deleted. That is, the second starting port 640 is provided with a left guiding member 640a and a right guiding member 640b. The left guide member 640a and the right guide member 640b normally prevent the game ball from entering the second starting port 640. On the other hand, when the normal symbol hits, the left guide member 640a and the right guide member 640b are set to the open state, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 640. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 150, in the sixth embodiment, the through gate 67a and the through gate 67b are arranged in the left-right direction of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. As a result, regardless of whether the game ball is launched into either the flow path formed in the left direction (left side flow path PA1) or the flow path formed in the right direction (right side flow path PA2) of the variable display device unit 80. , The ratio of game balls entering the first starting port 630 can be made equal, and the lottery frequency of ordinary symbols can also be made equal. Therefore, the ball entry rate for any of the first starting port 630 and the second starting port 640 can be the same regardless of the flow path, so that the player can play the game in the desired flow path. Can be done.

In the sixth embodiment, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to hit the normal symbol when the time is shortened is only one more than the normal state of the normal symbol. Yes, it is configured so that it is difficult to hit the normal symbol even in the short time state of the normal symbol. That is, since it is difficult for the second starting port 640 to be in the open state, it is the main purpose for drawing a special symbol to allow the game ball to enter the first starting port 630 even in the time saving state of the normal symbol. It will be an opportunity. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the time-saving game state ST1h (non-probability variation non-time saving state) is set as the most disadvantageous (longest stay in the game) gaming state, and the normal game state ST1 (non-probability variation non-time saving state) is set. , The game state is set as having an aspect that is more advantageous than the time-saving game state ST1h. Specifically, the time-saving gaming state ST1h is difficult to shift to the most advantageous latent probability changing gaming state ST4 even if it becomes a big hit, whereas when it becomes a big hit in the normal gaming state ST1, it shifts to the latent probability changing gaming state ST4. The configuration makes it easy to migrate. Therefore, in order to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous to the player in the time-saving game state ST1h in which the game stays for the longest time, in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set. It is set to a low probability (equivalent to the normal state of a normal symbol). In the following, for convenience of explanation, the most disadvantageous time-saving game state ST1h is set to "normal mode", the normal game state ST1 is set to "preparation mode", the probabilistic game state ST3 is set to "renso mode A", and the latent probable game state ST4 is set to "ream". It is called "Zhuang Mode B".

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, a mode (game state) transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 151, in the sixth embodiment, the four modes (gaming states) are configured to be able to go back and forth between each other. Specifically, as a mode advantageous for the player, two types of modes are provided: a continuous villa mode A (probability variation game state ST3) and a consecutive villa mode B (latent probability variation game state ST2). In these consecutive villa modes A and B, the probability of winning a small hit in a special symbol lottery is set high, so wait for the next big hit while maintaining the holding ball with the prize ball obtained during the small hit. Can be done. Further, in the consecutive villa modes A and B, since the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is set high (1/40), it becomes easy to win consecutive big hits at short intervals. As a result, it is advantageous for the player in the consecutive villa modes A and B. As described above, when the consecutive villa mode B becomes a big hit, the ratio of looping the same mode is higher than that of the consecutive villa mode A (the ratio of falling to the disadvantageous normal mode is lower). ing). Therefore, the consecutive villa mode B is more advantageous to the player than the consecutive villa mode A.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, two modes, a normal mode (time saving game state ST1h) and a preparation mode (normal game state ST1), are provided as modes disadvantageous to the player. In these normal modes and preparation modes, small hits are not drawn in the special symbol lottery, and the probability of becoming a big hit is set low (1/50), so the interval until the next big hit is won. In addition to being prone to lengthening, the number of balls held is likely to decrease. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player.

First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 151, a method of shifting the gaming state in the normal mode (time saving gaming state ST1h) will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 151, in the normal mode, when a big hit is made, or when a lottery of special symbols set after the previous big hit is continuously lost, the mode is changed to another mode. There is a possibility of migration.

Specifically, it becomes a jackpot (big hits C to G) in which the first specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state at the timing when the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, and the game ball becomes the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. If the player has passed (V prize), the game shifts to either the consecutive villa mode A (probability changing game state ST3) or the consecutive villa mode B (latent probability changing game state ST2) after the jackpot ends. That is, it becomes one of the jackpots C to F that wins at 35% of the jackpot, and when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 (V wins) during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends is continuous. Set to Zhuang mode A. In addition, when the jackpot is 5%, the jackpot G is won, and when the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 (V wins) during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot is set to the consecutive villa mode B. Will be done. In addition, if the number of time reductions can be passed (if the lottery of special symbols for the number of time reductions results in continuous loss), the preparation mode can be changed by changing from the normal state of the normal symbol to the normal state of the normal symbol. It shifts to (normal game state ST1).

On the other hand, even if a big hit is achieved by a special symbol lottery, if the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, a normal mode or a preparation mode that is disadvantageous to the player is set after the big hit. That is, only during the period when the game ball cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (difficult), the first specific winning opening 65a becomes a big hit (big hit A, B) set in the open state, or becomes a big hit C to F. In addition, if the player is unable to enter the game ball into the first specific winning opening 65a during the period during which the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (the ball is not intentionally entered), The normal mode is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. In addition, the player was unable to enter the game ball into the first specific winning opening 65a during the period when the jackpot G was obtained and the game ball could pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (the ball was not intentionally entered). In the case of), the preparation mode is set as the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this way, in the normal mode, the same mode (normal mode) is looped at a high rate of 60% or more in the case of a big hit, and the most advantageous consecutive villa is also when shifting to another mode. It is disadvantageous for the player because it shifts to mode B only at a rate of 5%.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 162, but in the present embodiment, the switching member 65h is set at the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed from the end of the third round of the jackpot, regardless of the jackpot type and the gaming state. Is activated (the probability variation solenoid 65k is set to ON), and the game ball is set to a state (see FIG. 6A) in which the game ball is distributed to the special discharge port 65e2 for 3 seconds. On the other hand, the timing at which the first specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state differs depending on the jackpot type and the gaming state. That is, the interval period from the end of the third round to the start of the fourth round is switched according to the jackpot type and the game state, so that the start timing of the fourth round (first specific winning opening) The timing at which 65a is set to the open state) is different. As a result, by setting the interval period (interval A) at which the fourth round is started after the period of 3 seconds for which the probabilistic solenoid 65k is set to be turned on has elapsed, V winning is impossible (difficult) jackpot. Can be formed. Further, by setting the interval period (interval B) at which the fourth round is started at the timing when the probabilistic solenoid 65k is set to ON, it is possible to form a jackpot in which V winning is possible (easy).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the on / off operation of the probabilistic solenoid 65k and the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a are made the same regardless of the jackpot, and only the interval period after the end of the three rounds is the jackpot. It is configured to switch according to the type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. As a result, the percentage of jackpots for which V prizes are possible (easy) can be changed for each gaming state, so that the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player and the jackpot type that is disadvantageous for the player can be changed for each gaming state. Can be different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 160, but when the normal mode is set again after the big hit in the normal mode, the number of time reductions of 10 to 100 times is set depending on the big hit type. The smaller the number of time reductions, the easier it is to elapse the number of time reductions, so that it becomes easier to shift to the preparation mode. If it is possible to shift to the preparation mode, it will be easier to shift to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B, which is more advantageous than the normal mode. In addition, it becomes a big hit (big hits A and B) where V winning is impossible (difficult), and it becomes a big hit (big hits C to G) where V winning is possible (easy) than when the normal mode is set again after the big hit. When the normal mode is set again after the big hit, it is easier to set a smaller number of time reductions (10 to 40 times). Therefore, if a big hit is made in the normal mode, it is easy to shift to the preparation mode by intentionally stopping the launch of the game ball in the fourth round where V winning may be possible (time reduction number of times). It is possible to give the player the option of setting the normal mode. In other words, the loop rate is low (25%), but the player is allowed to set the consecutive villa mode A, which is advantageous for the player, or the player is disadvantaged, but it is easy to shift to the preparation mode (normal mode with a small number of time reductions). Whether to set it can be selected depending on the game method of the player in the fourth round (whether or not to launch the game ball aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, in FIG. 151, a method of shifting the mode (game state) in the consecutive villa mode A (probability variation game state ST3) illustrated on the lower left side of the normal mode will be described. As shown in FIG. 151, in the consecutive villa mode A, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, in the consecutive villa mode A, you can win the jackpots A to D (75% of the total distribution) for which the interval period (interval A) at which V winning is impossible (difficult) is set, or you can win V The player wins the jackpot EG (25% distribution) for which the (easy) interval period (interval B) is set, and the player wins the game ball in the first specific prize during the four rounds in which the V prize is possible. If the ball cannot be entered into the mouth 65a (the ball is not intentionally entered), the V winning is not generated and the game state after the big hit is set to the normal mode.

On the other hand, during the 4 rounds in which the jackpot EG (25% distribution) is won and the V prize is possible, the player enters the game ball into the first specific winning opening 65a to change the game ball. When it is passed through 65e3, the consecutive villa mode A is set again after the big hit (the consecutive villa mode A is looped). Further, when the mode A is changed to the normal mode, a relatively large number of time reductions (75 to 100 times) are given. That is, it becomes difficult to shift to the preparation mode (the possibility of winning a big hit before the number of time reductions elapses increases). Therefore, in the consecutive villa mode A, it is basically more advantageous for the player to have the jackpots EG than to have the jackpots A to D.

Next, a method of shifting the mode (game state) in the preparation mode (normal game state ST1) illustrated on the lower right side of the normal mode in FIG. 151 will be described. As shown in FIG. 151, in the preparation mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, in the preparation mode, the jackpots C to G (40% of the total distribution) in which the interval period (interval B) at which V winning is possible (easy) is set are won, and the probability change switch is switched during the jackpot. When the game ball passes through 65e3, it shifts to the latent probability change game state which is the most advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the preparation mode is set again after the jackpot. Therefore, in the preparation mode, it is more advantageous for the player when the jackpots are C to G than when the jackpots are A and B.

Next, a method of shifting the mode (game state) in the consecutive villa mode B (latent probability change game state ST2) shown below the preparation mode in FIG. 151 will be described. As shown in FIG. 151, in the consecutive villa mode B, as in the consecutive villa mode A and the preparation mode, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, in the consecutive villa mode B, the jackpot B (distribution 20%) in which the interval at which V winning is impossible (difficult) is set was won, and the game ball did not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot. In this case, the mode after the big hit (game state) is set to the normal mode.

On the other hand, if you win the jackpots A, C to G (distribution 80%) where the interval at which V winning is possible (easy) is set, and you do not pass the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, The game state after the big hit is set to the preparation mode. When the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 due to a mistake in the game method during the jackpot, etc., despite winning the jackpots A, C to G in the consecutive villa mode B, the mode ( This is because if the game state) is suddenly dropped to the normal mode, the player's motivation for the game may be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpots A, C to G are won in the consecutive villa mode B, the player is configured to be in the minimum preparation mode to relieve the player's mistake. This makes it possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game.

In this way, in the consecutive villa mode B, the same mode is looped at a rate of 80% by continuously launching the game balls in each round of the jackpot. That is, the jackpot to which a large amount of prize balls are given and the consecutive villa mode B in which the jackpot can be waited while maintaining the holding ball are repeated at a rate of 80%, which is an extremely advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game in the pachinko machine 10 with one goal of shifting to the consecutive villa mode B. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, although there is a big merit for the player by becoming the consecutive villa mode B, the preparation mode, which is the pre-stage of the consecutive villa mode, is in a disadvantageous state for the player (a state in which the number of balls held is easily reduced and the jackpot probability is low). ). Therefore, even if it is possible to shift from the normal mode to the preparation mode, it is necessary to play the game in a disadvantageous state for the player until the jackpot is reached, as in the normal mode. Also, even if you win a big hit in the preparation mode, you will win a big hit that makes it impossible (difficult) to win a V at a rate of 60%, so there is a possibility that the preparation mode and the big hit that cannot win a V will be repeated. is there. That is, there is a risk that the disadvantageous state will continue endlessly. Therefore, there are various demerits for the player in the game method aiming at the transition to the preparation mode by avoiding the V prize when the jackpot that can win the V prize is won in the normal mode. That is, it becomes a big hit before shifting to the preparation mode, and there is a possibility that the normal mode will be looped (a disadvantageous state will be looped), and a disadvantageous state due to not being able to win the big hit in the preparation mode. There is a demerit that there is a possibility that will continue for a long time, and there is a demerit that a disadvantageous state may continue for a long time by looping the preparation mode. Therefore, it can be said that the game method of avoiding the V prize is a high-risk, high-return game method (a game method with high gambling property) even though the jackpot that allows the V prize is won in the normal mode.

On the other hand, in the normal mode, if you win a big hit that allows you to win a V prize, and you play a game aiming for a V prize, you can almost certainly shift to the consecutive villa mode A, so you can win. Although the number of prize balls is small, it is possible for the player to play the game with peace of mind.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the fourth round of the jackpot won in the normal mode, a game method in which the player is given a V prize (the game ball is passed through the probability change switch 65e3) and a game method in which the player is not allowed to be selected are selected. Can be made to. Then, different game characteristics can be provided according to the game method selected by the player. That is, in the consecutive villa mode A where the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained is small, there is a chance to shift to the consecutive villa mode B where the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained is high and the playability that can stably increase the prize balls. Although it is given, it is possible to switch between playability, which has a large disadvantage for the player when the transition cannot be made. As a result, it is possible to select the playability according to the taste of the player, the mood of the player for each jackpot, and the like, so that it is possible to provide a playability that can be received by more people.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 to 155, a display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment will be described. More specifically, the game method selection effect executed after the third round of the jackpot won in the normal mode is completed will be described. This game method selection effect is an effect that is executed from an interval of 3 rounds to 4 rounds, and launches a game ball toward the first specific winning opening 65a for the player (entering the consecutive villa mode A). A production that lets you select either a game method (to aim) or a game method that does not dare to win the game ball in the first specific winning opening 65a (aim to set a short time reduction number and make it easier to shift to the preparation mode). Is.

As described above, if the game ball can be entered into the first specific winning opening 65a during the period when the game ball can flow down to the special discharge port 65e2, the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 and the game after the big hit. The state is set to the consecutive villa mode A (in the case of the jackpot G, the consecutive villa mode B). That is, since the advantageous state is started immediately after the big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. For this reason, in the game method selection effect, the consecutive villa mode A set after the end of the jackpot won in the normal mode is referred to as the "safety mode".

In addition, if the game ball does not enter the special discharge port 65e2 during the jackpot won in the normal mode, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot, but the number of time reductions is 10 times depending on the jackpot type. The number of times in the range of ~ 100 times is set. The smaller the number of time reductions set, the more likely it is that the number of time reductions will elapse before the jackpot and the transition to the preparation mode will occur, so it is most advantageous to challenge the transition to the preparation mode. You can get a chance to shift to the consecutive villa mode B. For this reason, in the game method selection effect, the normal mode set after the end of the jackpot won in the normal mode is called "challenge mode".

FIG. 152A is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the game method selection effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), when the game method selection effect is executed, a gunman-like character (gunman 811) wearing a hat and a cloak becomes a box (in the example of FIG. 152 (a), it is tattered. The effect of discovering the box 812) is executed. In the game method selection effect, the box mode discovered by the gunman 811 suggests the number of time reductions set when the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 (V winning does not occur). That is, three types of boxes are provided: a tattered box, an iron box, and a golden box. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 165, but the tattered box is more likely to be selected when the number of time reductions is large (when the number of time reductions is 80 or 100), and the golden box is when the number of time reductions is small. It becomes easy to be selected (when the number of time reductions is 10). The iron box is positioned between the tattered box and the golden box, and is easily selected when the number of time reductions is 30 or 40 times. When the game method selection effect is executed, the game method (the game ball is inserted into the first specific winning opening 65a) is given to the player by using the mode of the box displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a guide. It is possible to select (judgment) whether or not to make a ball.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), above the gunman 811 are the characters "Find a tattered box on the right side!" And the characters "If you break it, hit it to the right !!" (character Dd1a). A display area Dd1 is formed in which the characters "If you can open it, ask me what it is!" Are displayed. In addition, a display area Dd2a formed in the shape of an arrow pointing in the direction of the character Dd1a is formed on the right side of the character Dd1a that says "If you break it, hit it to the right !!". In this display area Dd2a, the characters "safety mode" are displayed. Therefore, from the display contents of these characters Dd1a and the display area Dd2a, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a possibility of shifting to the "safety mode" (ream villa mode A) by launching the game ball to the right side. it can. In addition, every time the player makes a right-handed hit and detects that the ball has entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the gunman 811 shoots at the tattered box 812.

On the other hand, on the right side of the character Dd1b that says "If you open it, ask me what it is!", A display area Dd2b formed by an arrow shape pointing to the character Ds1b is formed. The characters "challenge mode" are displayed in this display area Dd2b. Therefore, from the display contents of these characters Dd1b and the display area Dd2b, the player is made to recognize that there is a possibility of shifting to the "challenge mode" (normal mode) by waiting without launching the game ball. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the character Dd1a is displayed with more emphasis than the character Dd1b. The difference in the mode of this character is switched according to the number of time reductions given when the game ball is not passed through the probability change switch 65e3. Specifically, when it is determined from the jackpot type that the number of time reductions given when the probability change switch 65e3 is not passed is large (100 times or 80 times), the character Dd1a corresponding to the safe mode is displayed. It will be highlighted. That is, the display mode is set to recommend the safe mode. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of time reductions is small (10 times), the character Dd1b corresponding to the challenge mode is highlighted. That is, the challenge mode is set to the recommended display mode (see FIG. 155 (a)).

Further, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 152 (a), an image of an arrow pointing to the right suggesting a right-handed game is displayed even during the execution of the game method selection effect. However, since the display area Dd1, the gunman 811, and the image of the box discovered by the gunman are displayed in a more conspicuous manner, the game method (right-handed) is performed for the player based on the display mode other than the image of the arrow. You can choose to play the game or wait without launching the game ball). Of the jackpots, the arrow displayed on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81 may be hidden during the execution period of the game method selection effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more easily understand that the game method should be selected by the player himself / herself.

FIG. 152B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the player strikes right according to the display contents of the characters Dd1a and the display area Dd2a with the aim of shifting to the safe mode. As shown in FIG. 152 (b), when the player strikes right while the special discharge port 65e2 can flow down and the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 inside the first variable winning device 65, the gunman By shooting the tattered box 812 with the gun possessed by 811, the effect of destroying the tattered box 812 (the tattered box 812 explodes) is executed. In addition, the characters displayed in the display area Dd1 at the upper part of the gunman 811 are changed to the characters "Destruction succeeded !! Entering the safe mode !!" (these display modes are collectively referred to as the safe mode notification effect). By executing this safety mode notification effect, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the player has entered the safety mode (ream villa mode A).

FIG. 153 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the player waits without launching the game ball according to the display contents of the characters Dd1b and the display area Dd2b with the aim of shifting to the normal mode. Is. As shown in FIG. 153 (a), the player waits during the jackpot without making a right-handed hit, and the game ball is inserted into the first specific winning opening 65a for a predetermined period from the start of the fourth round (for example, the first specific winning opening 65a). After 3.5 seconds, which makes it impossible for the probability change switch 65e3 to pass through (3.5 seconds) (the guide piece 65h2 moves and the flow path leading to the probability change switch 65e3 is closed), the box 812 is rusted. The key 813 appears. In addition, the characters "Rusted key GET !! Enter challenge mode !!" are displayed on the display area Dd1 formed above the gunman 811 (these display modes are collectively referred to as the challenge mode notification effect). .. By executing this challenge mode notification effect, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the challenge mode (normal mode) is set after the big hit. There are three types of keys that appear from the box: rusted keys, iron keys, and golden keys. Similar to the box aspect, the rusted key is more likely to be selected when the time reduction is high, the golden key is more likely to be selected when the time reduction is low, and the iron key is selected in the middle of the two. It's easier. In the game method selection effect, the number of time reductions in the challenge mode (normal mode) set after the big hit can be predicted depending on the mode of the box and the mode of the key.

In the ending of the jackpot in which the challenge mode (normal mode) is notified, the effect of rushing into the tower corresponding to the mode of the key is executed. FIG. 153 (b) shows the display contents when the effect of rushing into the "old tower" corresponding to the rusted key 813 is set. In the ending effect shown in FIG. 153 (b), the gunman 811 discovers the old tower 814 and uses the rusted key 813 obtained from the box to enter the inside of the old tower 814. In addition, the characters "old tower rush" are displayed in the display area Dd1. This makes it possible for the player to more clearly understand that the mode has been changed to the challenge mode (normal mode). There are three types of towers: an old tower that can be entered with a rusted key, an ordinary tower that can be entered with an iron key, and a luxurious tower that can be entered with a golden key. ..

Although not shown in the figure, after the gunman 811 progresses to one of the towers and the challenge mode (normal mode) is started, each time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, one tower is entered. The production of climbing floor by floor is performed. The tower is composed of the same number of floors as the number of time reductions set as the normal mode, and when the gunman 811 climbs up the tower before the big hit, the transition to the preparation mode is notified. By adopting such an effect mode, it is possible to provide a novel playability in which the player can play the game with the expectation that the lottery of the special symbol will be continuous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, the effect of climbing this tower is resumed from the display contents (the number of floors of the tower) before the power was cut off even if the power was temporarily cut off due to a so-called momentary power failure or the like and the power was supplied again. It has a structure. Although the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are backed up, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are not backed up. Therefore, when the power is turned on, a process of notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the stored contents of the RAM 203 of the backed up main control device 110 by a command is executed. That is, a state command for notifying the gaming state (values of the probability change flag 203g, the time saving counter 203t, and the time saving flag 203a2) at the time of turning on the power is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, whether or not the mode is in the normal mode, and in the case of the normal mode, the number of time reductions can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side as well. Can be restored to the number of floors of the tower when it was cut off.

In FIG. 154, it is detected that the game method selection effect is executed and the player strikes right (at least one ball has entered the first specific winning opening 65a), but the game ball is a probability change switch 65e3. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content in the case where the flow path which continues to the probability change switch 65e3 is closed without passing through. In this case, the effect that the gunman 811 drops the gun and is discouraged is executed, and the characters "destruction failure ..." are displayed (these display modes are collectively referred to as the destruction failure effect). By executing this destruction failure effect, the player can easily understand that the transition to the safe mode could not be performed. The case where the destruction failure effect is executed is mainly the case where the game method selection effect is executed as a jackpot type in which an interval period (interval A) in which V winning is impossible is set. When an interval period during which V winning is not possible is set, even if a game ball can be entered into the first specific winning opening 65a by a right-handed game, all the game balls are the ball ejection ports. This is because the game ball cannot be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 because it is distributed to the flow path on the side where the switch 65e4 is provided. After the destruction failure effect is executed, the challenge mode notification effect (see FIG. 153 (a)) is executed as in the case where the player waits without launching the game ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, when it is determined that the number of time reductions given when the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is small (in the case of 10 times), the game method is easily selected. An example of the production will be described. In this case, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), the golden box 815 is displayed as the box discovered by the gunman 811. Further, in the display area Dd1, the character Dd1b is emphasized and displayed more than the character Dd1a. This makes it seem better to aim for the challenge mode without launching a game ball.

Further, when the effect of finding the golden key in the golden box 815 by waiting without launching the game ball aiming at the challenge mode is executed, the ending effect of the jackpot is shown in FIG. 155 (b). As you can see, the gunman 811 enters the gorgeous tower 816. Then, the characters "luxury tower rush" are displayed on the display area Dd1. As a result, it can be suggested to the player that a small number of time reductions is likely to be set, so that it is possible to recognize that it is an opportunity to shift to the preparation mode. Therefore, the motivation of the player for the game can be improved.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when a big hit is made in the normal mode, the number of time reductions (advantage) when the V prize is not generated during the big hit is determined in advance at the end of the third round. The configuration is such that the interval period after the end of the third round and the mode of the game method selection effect executed in the fourth round are switched according to the determination result. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to estimate the number of time reductions (advantageous degree) when the V prize is not generated from the effect mode of the game method selection effect. That is, it is possible to estimate the ease of transition to the preparation mode of the normal mode that transitions when the V prize is not generated. Thereby, in consideration of the ease of transition to the preparation mode inferred from the display mode, the player can be made to select whether to make the V prize or not to make the V prize.

In the sixth embodiment, even if a big hit is impossible (difficult) to win a V in the normal mode, the game method selection effect is executed during the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the game method selection effect may be executed only during the execution of the jackpot where the V prize is possible (easy).

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 165. First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 156 (a). FIG. 156 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 156 (a), the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment is provided with the time saving number selection table 202j and the interval selection table 202k with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14). It differs in that it is. Further, the contents of the first hit random number table 202a, the small hit random number table 202b, the second hit random number table 202c, and the big hit type selection table 202d have also been partially changed.

The time reduction number selection table 202j is a data table that is referred to for selecting the time reduction number to be given as added value after the end of the big hit when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160, but the time reduction number selection table 202j defines the time reduction number to be given after the end of the jackpot for each jackpot type and the game state at the time when the jackpot is won. Has been done. The time reduction number selection table 202j is referred to when setting the time reduction number after the end of the jackpot in the jackpot end processing 6 (S1762, S1761 in FIG. 170).

The interval selection table 202k is a data table referred to for selecting the interval period after the third round of jackpots is completed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 161. In this interval selection table 202k, the type of jackpot and the type of interval period set after the end of three rounds of jackpot are defined for each game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Has been done. That is, either the interval A in which V winning is impossible (difficult) or the interval B in which V winning is possible (easy) is defined. This interval selection table 202k is referred to in the interval setting process for setting the interval period when the end timing of the third round is reached (S1803 in FIG. 169).

Next, the details of the first random number table 202a in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 156 (b). Similar to the first embodiment, the first hit random number table 202a defines the value of the first hit random number counter C1 that is determined to be a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 156 (b), in the sixth embodiment, eight random numbers (counter values) determined to be big hits in the low probability state (normal mode, preparation mode) of the special symbol are set. Its value is "0-7". Of the 400 values from 0 to 399 that the first random number counter C1 can take, eight counter values (random number values) are determined to be jackpots, so the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/50 ( 8/400).

On the other hand, 10 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 9" are set to be determined as big hits in the probabilistic state of the special symbol (ream villa modes A and B). Of the 400 values from 0 to 399 that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, there are 10 counter values (random number values) that are determined to be jackpots, so the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/40 ( 10/400).

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the number of random numbers that are big hits is changed by only two between the low-probability state of the special symbol and the high-probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, even in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be won relatively early (it is hard to get hooked). This is because, in particular, if the configuration is such that it is difficult to win a big hit in the normal mode, the time saving period can be easily passed. That is, as a result of facilitating the transition to the preparation mode, the transition to the most advantageous consecutive villa mode B is also facilitated, which is excessively advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is not much different from the jackpot probability in the probability variation state of the special symbol. As a result, the possibility of winning a big hit before the number of time reductions elapses is increased, and it is difficult to shift to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) excessive advantage for the player.

Next, the details of the small hit random number table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 157 (a). FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit random number table 202b in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a small hit is not defined regardless of the type of the special symbol. That is, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the small hit is not won.

On the other hand, 132 random numbers (counter values) of "268 to 399" are defined as small hits determined in the special symbol lottery in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Of the 400 counter values (random numbers) that the value of the first random number counter C1 can take, 132 random numbers are determined to be small hits, so the probability of winning a small hit in a special symbol lottery is about 1 /. It becomes 3 (132/400).

In the sixth embodiment, the game balls launched by the player enter the first starting port 630 at an average ratio of about 1 in 15 balls. Then, since the small hit is made at a rate of about 1/3 when the ball enters the first starting port 630, on average, the small hit is won every time about 45 balls are launched. Further, in the sixth embodiment, an opening period (for example, 5 seconds) in which about 4 to 5 game balls enter in the case of a small hit is set for the first specific winning opening 65a. .. In the present embodiment, 10 prize balls are awarded each time a game ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of the small hit (and the big hit). As a result, the game ball consumed to enter the first starting port 630 can be covered by the prize ball given by the small hit, so that the holding ball can be held in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Since it is difficult to reduce, it is advantageous for the player.

Next, the details of the second random number table 202c in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 157 (b). FIG. 157 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b), in the low probability state of the normal symbol, only one counter value (random number value) of "0" is defined as the counter value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. ing. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the counter values of the second hit random number counter C4, which is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol, are defined as "1, 2".

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be hits of the normal symbol when the time is shortened of the normal symbol is one more than the normal state of the normal symbol. Because it is only, it is difficult to hit the normal symbol even in the short time state of the normal symbol. This is to make the normal mode disadvantageous to the player. That is, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, if the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased too much, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of balls held in the normal mode (time-saving game state STh1), which should be the most disadvantageous. Even if you loop with, there is a possibility that the number of balls you have will increase. That is, there is a risk of causing excessive loss to the hole. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set low, and the normal mode is configured to be more surely disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from being given to the hall. In addition, since the degree of advantage can be given to the consecutive villa modes A and B, the player can have a greater sense of accomplishment when shifting to either the consecutive villa modes A or B. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 158, in the sixth embodiment, seven types of jackpots (big hits A1 to G1) that can be selected when a jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are used. Seven types of jackpots (big hits A2 to G2) that can be selected in the event of a jackpot are defined. The jackpots A1 to G1 are jackpots with 4 rounds, and the jackpots A2 to G2 are jackpots with 8 rounds. Except for the number of rounds, the jackpot of the first special symbol and the jackpot of the second special symbol have the same performance in the jackpot types corresponding to the same alphabet. That is, the number of time reductions given after the jackpot, the type of the interval period set after the end of the three rounds of the jackpot, and the value of the first hit type counter associated with the jackpot type in the jackpot type selection table 202d. Are all the same. In the following description, the jackpot A1 and the jackpot A2 are collectively referred to as "big hit A". The same applies to the jackpot types corresponding to other alphabets, and each of them is collectively referred to as jackpots B to G.

As shown in FIG. 158, the jackpot A (big hit A1 and jackpot A2) is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 39". Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of counter values (random values) that become jackpot A is 40, so jackpot A is selected when a jackpot is reached. The ratio is 40% (40/100). That is, the ratio of the jackpot A1 selected when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit and the ratio of the jackpot A2 selected when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit are both 40. %.

Further, the jackpot B is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "40 to 59", and the jackpot B is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60 to 64". C is associated and defined, and the jackpot D is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 74", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 84". In the range of, the jackpot E is associated and defined, and in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "85-94", the jackpot F is associated and defined, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. However, in the range of "95 to 99", the jackpot G is defined in association with each other.

As a result, when a big hit is obtained by lottery of a special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit B is 20% (20/100), and the ratio of determining the big hit C is 5% (5/100). , The rate at which the jackpot D is determined is 10% (10/100), the rate at which the jackpot E is determined is 10% (10/100), and the rate at which the jackpot F is determined is 10%. The rate at which the jackpot G is determined is 5% (5/100).

As described above, whether or not the interval B in which V winning is possible is set as the interval period after the third round of each jackpot type is completed depends on the game state at the time when the jackpot is won. It's different. In addition, the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot also differs depending on the game state at the time when the jackpot is won. As a result, the ratio of the jackpot that enables the V prize to be executed and the ratio of the game state after the jackpot is completed can be made different for each game state. Therefore, a complicated mode as shown in FIG. 151 can be used. The transition can be achieved. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous.

Next, the details of the time saving number selection table 202j will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160. FIG. 159 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the time saving number selection table 202j. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), as the time saving number selection table 202j, the table 202j1 for passing V, which is referred to when the game ball passes the probability change switch 65e3 (winning V) during the jackpot, and the table 202j1 for passing V during the jackpot. A table 202j2 for non-passing V, which is referred to when no game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 (V winning is not won), is defined.

First, the table 202j1 for passing through V will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). FIG. 159 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the V-passing table 202j1. As shown in FIG. 159 (b), the V-passing table 202j1 defines the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot for each combination of the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won. Has been done.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), for the jackpots A to F, the game state "normal mode" at the time of winning the jackpot is associated with "until the next time" as the number of time reductions. Has been done. Therefore, if any of the jackpots A to F is won in the normal mode and a V prize occurs during the jackpot (the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3), the next jackpot will be completed after the jackpot is completed. Until then, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues. Further, as described above, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the big hit, and as a result, the consecutive villa mode A continues until the next big hit. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 161. However, some of the jackpots A to F have an interval period during which V winning is not possible (big hits A and B). When these jackpot types are determined in the normal mode, it is difficult to win a V prize, so there is almost no possibility that the table 202j1 for passing through V is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 159, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpots A to F is "preparation mode", "0 times" is set as the number of time reductions, and in the case of "ream villa mode A", "Until the next time" is set as the number of time reductions, and "0 times" is set as the number of time reductions in the case of "ream villa mode B".

Further, as shown in FIG. 159, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot G is any of the normal mode, the preparation mode, and the consecutive villa mode B, "0 times" is set as the number of time reductions. .. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot G is the consecutive villa mode A, "until the next time" is set as the number of time reductions.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the details of the V non-passing time table 202j2 of the time saving number selection table 202j will be described. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the V non-passing table 202j2.

As shown in FIG. 160, the number of time reductions "100 times" is defined in association with the jackpot A in the normal mode. That is, the maximum number of time reductions that can be set is specified. Therefore, if it becomes a big hit in the normal mode and the V prize cannot be generated, it is most difficult to shift to the preparation mode. That is, there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be won before the number of time reductions elapses. Further, when the jackpot A is reached in the normal mode, an interval period (interval A) in which V winning is impossible is set. Therefore, when the jackpot A is reached, the normal mode in which the number of time reductions is 100 is almost certainly set, so that the jackpot A is the most disadvantageous jackpot in the normal mode.

Further, for the jackpots B and C in the normal mode, "80 times" is specified in association with the number of time reductions. Therefore, if the jackpots are B and C in the normal mode and the V prize is not generated, a relatively large number of time reductions are set, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. In the normal mode, the jackpot B is set with an interval at which V winning is not possible, and the jackpot C is set with an interval at which V winning is possible. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot C, it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game ball aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a when the game method selection effect is executed.

Further, for the jackpot D in the normal mode, "40 times" is associated and specified as the number of time reductions, while for the jackpot E, "30 times" is associated and specified as the number of time reductions. ing. That is, when the V prize does not occur in these jackpots, the normal mode with a relatively small number of time reductions is set, so that the preparation mode is compared with the case where the V prize does not occur in the jackpots A to C. It becomes easy to shift to. Further, when the jackpot D or E is reached in the normal mode, the interval period (interval B) at which the V prize can be won is set, so whether or not the V prize is generated differs depending on the player's playing method. Will be. When the player waits without launching the game ball during the execution of the game method selection effect, a relatively small number of time reductions (30 times or 40 times) is set. On the other hand, when the player launches the game ball and the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the game state after the big hit is set to the consecutive villa mode A. Therefore, it is possible to let the player choose whether to wait for the transition to the preparation mode or to launch the game ball aiming at the consecutive villa mode A where the prize ball can be surely obtained. Can be improved.

For the jackpot F in the normal mode, "10 times" is defined in association with the number of time reductions. That is, the minimum number of time reductions is set in the case of shifting to the normal mode. In the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of losing in the special symbol lottery is 1/50, so if the time reduction number is set to 10 times, the mode shifts to the preparation mode (10 times in a row after the big hit). ) Ratio is about 82% (49/50 to the 10th power). Therefore, it is possible to shift to the preparation mode with a high probability, which is a great chance to shift from the preparation mode to the interlocking mode. In this case, the expected value of the prize ball obtained is higher if the player waits without launching the game ball during the execution of the game method selection effect.

The ratio of shifting to the preparation mode when the number of time reductions is 30 is about 55% (49/50 to the 30th power), and the ratio of shifting to the preparation mode when the number of time reductions is 40 is about. It is 45% (49/50 to the 40th power). Further, the ratio of shifting to the preparation mode when the number of time reductions is 80 is about 20% (49/50 to the 80th power), and the ratio of shifting to the preparation mode when the number of time reductions is 100 is It is about 13% (49/50 to the 100th power). Even if the number of time reductions is set to 100, which is the largest number, the mode can be shifted to the preparation mode at a rate of 1 in 8 or more on average. Therefore, even if the player wants to shift to the consecutive villa mode A because it is a big hit that V prize is impossible, even if the normal mode is set after the big hit, the player You can switch your mind and expect to move to the preparation mode.

For the jackpot G in the normal mode, "0 times" is defined in association with the number of time reductions. That is, if the V prize does not occur, the preparation mode is set after the big hit. In addition, the jackpot G is set to the interval B in which the V prize can be won, and when the V prize is won, the mode shifts to the consecutive villa mode B. Therefore, as long as the player does not make a mistake in the game method, the consecutive villa mode B is basically set by the player continuing to launch the game ball. The reason why the jackpot G is set and 0 times is set as the number of time reductions when the V prize is not generated is to provide relief in case the player makes a mistake in the game method. As a result, it is possible to prevent the motivation of the player who has performed the wrong game method for the game from being lowered.

As shown in FIG. 160, for the preparation mode, 0 time reduction times are set after the big hit regardless of the big hit type. Therefore, even if the V prize does not occur, the preparation mode is set again after the big hit. Therefore, once the mode is changed to the preparation mode, there are only two game states after the big hit, the preparation mode and the consecutive villa mode, and the player does not fall into the normal mode. The game can be continued until the mode B is entered. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160, in the consecutive villa mode A, any one of 75 times, 80 times, or 100 times is set depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, if a jackpot is obtained in the consecutive villa mode A and V prize is not generated in the jackpot, a relatively large number (or upper limit) of time reductions is set, so that it is difficult to shift to the preparation mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160, in the consecutive villa mode B, the jackpot B is obtained, and 50 times is set as the number of time reductions only when the V prize does not occur during the jackpot. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is other than the jackpot B, 0 times is set. For jackpots other than jackpot B, the interval B in which V can be won is set, and when V is won, the consecutive villa mode B is set again after the jackpot. Therefore, as long as the player does not make a mistake in the game method, the consecutive villa mode B is basically set by the player continuing to launch the game ball. It is a jackpot type other than jackpot B, and when V prize does not occur, the configuration is such that 0 times is set as the number of time reductions (preparation mode is set), which is a relief in case the player makes a mistake in the game method. This is for planning. As a result, it is possible to prevent the motivation of the player who has performed the wrong game method for the game from being lowered.

Further, if the jackpot B is won in the consecutive villa mode B, the interval A in which V winning is impossible is set. Therefore, in the consecutive villa mode B, basically, when the jackpot B is reached, the player falls to the normal mode. In addition, the reason why the number of time reductions after the jackpot B ends is set to 50 is that the player wants to shift to the preparation mode again and aim for the consecutive villa mode B after the consecutive villa mode B ends. This is to make it happen. If the number of time reductions given after the end of the consecutive villa mode B is set to a large number of times (for example, 80 times or 100 times), the possibility of shifting to the preparation mode is low, so that the player's motivation for the game is lowered. There is a risk of causing it. In particular, once the consecutive villa mode B is set, the jackpot and the consecutive villa mode B are likely to be repeated, so that the player is satisfied with a sufficient prize ball when the transition from the consecutive villa mode B to the normal mode. There is a high possibility that you are doing it. In this situation, if the player recognizes that the possibility of shifting to the preparation mode is low, the player may immediately quit the game without playing the game in the normal mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions after the end of the consecutive villa mode B is set to 50 times, which is realistic for the transition to the preparation mode. As a result, the game can be continued even after the consecutive villa mode B is completed in anticipation of entering the preparation mode again, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, the details of the interval selection table 202k will be described with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the interval selection table 202k. As shown in FIG. 161 in the interval selection table 202k, the type of interval set after the end of three rounds is defined for each combination of the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161, an interval A in which V winning is not possible is defined in association with the jackpot A and jackpot B won in the normal mode and the preparation mode. Further, for the jackpots C to G, an interval B in which a V prize can be won is defined in association with the jackpot C to G. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, the ratio of determining the jackpot A or the jackpot B is 60%, and the ratio of determining any of the jackpots C to G is 40%. Interval B is set so that V prizes can be won at a rate of 40%.

Further, for all the jackpots A to D that are won in the consecutive villa mode A, an interval A in which V winning is impossible is defined in association with each other. On the other hand, for the jackpots E to G, the interval B in which the V prize can be won is defined in association with each other. Since the ratio of determining any of the jackpots E to G is 25% in total, the interval B in which the V prize can be won is set at the ratio of 25% in the case of a jackpot in the consecutive villa mode A. That is, the consecutive villa mode A is looped at a rate of 25%.

Further, for the jackpot B that is won in the consecutive villa mode B, the jackpot A that cannot win V is defined in association with it. On the other hand, for jackpots A and C to G, intervals B at which V prizes can be won are defined in association with each other. Since the ratio of jackpots A and C to G is 80%, in the consecutive villa mode B, the interval B at which V prizes can be won is set at the ratio of 80% of the jackpots. That is, the consecutive villa mode B is looped at a rate of 80%.

Here, the interval A and the interval B in the sixth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a time change of the on / off setting of the probabilistic solenoid 65k and a time change of the opening / closing setting of the first specific winning opening 65a from the third round to the fourth round of the jackpot. ..

As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the probabilistic solenoid 65k switches from off to on at the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed from the end of the third round of the jackpot. As described above, when the probabilistic solenoid 65k is off, the upper part of the normal discharge port 65e1 is in the open state, and the game ball can flow down through the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B). On the other hand, when the probabilistic solenoid 65k is on, the upper part of the special discharge port 65e2 is open, and the game ball can flow down the probabilistic switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A).

The on state of the probabilistic solenoid 65k continues for 3 seconds, and when the feeling of 3 seconds elapses, it is switched to the off state again. After that, it remains off until the jackpot ends. This off state then becomes a jackpot and is maintained until 3 seconds have passed since the end of the 3 rounds.

On the other hand, when the interval A is set, the opening / closing pattern of the first specific winning opening 65a is set to the closed state for 6.5 seconds from the end of the third round as shown in FIG. 162 (a), and is 6.5. It is set to the open state when the seconds have passed. That is, the length of the interval set after the end of the three rounds is 6.5 seconds. In the present embodiment, in the four rounds of the jackpot, 10 game balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a, or the first specific winning opening 65a is switched to the closed state when 5 seconds have passed. .. FIG. 162 illustrates a case where 5 seconds have passed before 10 balls enter. As shown in FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (b), when the 6.5-second interval A is set, the probabilistic solenoid is set before the interval period elapses (the first specific winning opening 65a is opened). Since the on period of 65k ends, all the game balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a in the fourth round flow down to the normal discharge port 65e1 (cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3). Therefore, when the interval A is set, it becomes impossible (difficult) to generate a V prize.

On the other hand, when the interval B is set, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), the first specific winning opening 65a is kept in the closed state for 3 seconds from the end of the 3 rounds (interval period of 3 seconds). Is set), and when 3 seconds have passed, the first specific winning opening 65a is switched to the open state. That is, four rounds are started. Since the timing at which the probabilistic solenoid 65k is turned on coincides with the timing at which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, the game ball is first specified within about 3 seconds after the first specific winning opening 65a is opened. If the ball can be entered into the winning opening 65a, the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, there are two types, an interval A in which V winning is impossible (difficult) and an interval B in which V winning is possible (easy). Which interval period is selected is specified in the interval selection table 202k described above. By referring to the interval selection table 202k and configuring the interval period to be switched according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the ratio of winning the jackpot that can win a V prize is determined for each gaming state. It can be changed. Specifically, in the normal mode and the preparation mode, the percentage of winning jackpots that can win V is set to 40%, and in the consecutive villa mode A, the percentage of winning jackpots that can win V is set to 25%. It can be set, and in the consecutive villa mode B, the rate of winning a jackpot that can win a V can be set to 80%. As a result, the consecutive villa mode A can be set to a mode in which the same state is difficult to loop, and the consecutive villa mode B can be set to a mode in which the same mode can be easily looped. You can give superiority or inferiority. As a result, in order to shift to the low-advantageous consecutive villa mode A, a right-handed game is performed in the fourth round of the jackpot, or a big hit with the possibility of shifting to the high-advantage consecutive villa mode B. It is possible to realize a novel game property that allows the player to select whether to wait without launching the game ball in the fourth round of.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 163, the ROM 203 of the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20) in that the winning information storage area 203aa is added. .. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The winning information storage area 203aa is a storage area for storing information according to the gaming state (game state, jackpot type) at the time of winning the jackpot. In the sixth embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g indicating whether or not the jackpot is in the probability variation state at the start of the jackpot, the time reduction counter 203t indicating the remaining number of time reductions, and the time reduction flag 203a2 indicating that the normal symbol is in the time reduction are set as initial values. It will be reset. Therefore, at the end of the three rounds in which the interval period is selected or at the end of the jackpot where the number of time reductions is newly set, the state at the time when the jackpot is won is changed to the probability change flag 203g, the time reduction counter 203t, and the time reduction flag 203a2. Cannot be specified from the value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the information necessary for specifying the interval period and the number of time reductions is stored in advance in the winning information storage area 203aa, and then the reset processing of each value is executed. (See S662 in FIG. 166). Then, at the end timing of the three rounds, the interval period to be set is specified based on the information stored in the information storage area 203aa at the time of winning and the specified contents of the interval selection table 202k (see FIG. 161) (see FIG. 161). See S1804 in FIG. 169). Further, at the end of the jackpot, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined based on the information in the information storage area 203aa at the time of winning, and the number of time reductions is selected from the time reduction number selection table 202j (see FIGS. 159 and 160). (See S1761 and S1762 in FIG. 170). With this configuration, the interval period and the number of time reductions can be accurately set from the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 164 (a). FIG. 164 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), in the sixth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21), the striking method selection effect selection table 222ca and the non-V hour count table 222cc are provided. It is provided. Since other configurations are the same as those of ROM 222 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The hitting method selection effect selection table 222ca is for selecting the mode of the game method selection effect (see FIGS. 152 to 155) executed from the interval period after the third round of the jackpot to the fourth round of the jackpot. It is a data table referenced in. When the jackpot is won in the normal mode and the third round of the jackpot is completed, the batting method selection effect selection table 222ca is referred to, and the effect mode of the game method selection effect is selected.

The non-V hour count table 222 kb has the same configuration as the V non-passing table 202j2 (see FIG. 160) of the main controller 110. That is, the number of time reductions set when the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot (V winning does not occur) is specified. When the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received from the main controller 110, the non-V hour count table 222 kb is referred to to specify the number of time reductions when the V prize is not generated in this jackpot. .. Based on the specified number of time reductions, the production mode of the game method selection effect is determined at the end of the three rounds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the details of the above-mentioned batting method selection effect selection table 222ca will be described. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the batting method selection effect selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 165, the striking method selection effect selection table 222ca corresponds to the combination of the value of the effect counter 223j and the time reduction number set when the V prize does not occur, as shown in FIG. 165. In addition, the production mode of the game method selection effect is defined.

As shown in FIG. 165, the striking method selection effect selection table 222ca defines at least six types of effect: weak effect A, weak effect B, medium effect A, medium effect B, strong effect, and right-handed notification effect. Has been done. In the weak effect A, the gunman 811 discovers the tattered box, and when the player waits without launching the game ball, the effect of discovering the tattered key from the box is performed. Further, in the weak effect B, the gunman 811 discovers the tattered box, and when the player waits without launching the game ball, the iron key is discovered from the box. .. Although the details will be described later, the effect of discovering these tattered boxes is configured to be easily selected when the number of time reductions is large (80 times or 100 times).

In the middle production A, the gunman 811 discovers the iron box, and when the player waits without launching the game ball, the iron key is discovered from the box. Further, in the middle production B, the gunman 811 discovers the iron box, and when the player waits without launching the game ball, the golden key is discovered from the box. .. The effect of discovering these iron boxes is configured so that it can be easily selected when the number of time reductions is medium (30 times or 40 times).

In the strong production, the gunman 811 discovers the golden box, and when the player waits without launching the game ball, the golden key is discovered from the box. This strong production is the production with the highest expectation of a small number of time reductions (10 times). Further, in the right-handed notification effect, the effect of recommending the right-handed game is executed without the effect of the gunman 811 finding the box. This right-handed notification effect is executed only when the jackpot is such that the normal mode is unlikely to be set after the jackpot. That is, if a V prize occurs during the jackpot, the consecutive villa mode B is set after the jackpot, and if no V prize occurs during the jackpot, it is executed only when the jackpot G where the preparation mode is set is reached. Will be done. This is because in the jackpot G, the case where the V prize is generated is definitely more advantageous than the case where the V prize is not generated.

As shown in FIG. 165, when the number of time reductions is 80 or 100 times, the weak effect A is defined as the effect type in association with the range in which the value of the effect counter 223j is "0 to 59". There is. Of the 100 counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the effect counter 223j, the counter value (random value) corresponding to the weak effect A is 60, so the number of time reductions is 80 or 100. In this case, the ratio at which the weak effect A is selected is 60% (60/100).

Further, for the range of the effect counter 223j in the range of "60 to 94", the weak effect B is associated and defined as the effect type, and for the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of "95 to 99", it is defined. , Medium effect A is defined as an effect type in association with each other. On the other hand, since the values of the effect counter 223j are not distributed to the medium effect B, the strong effect, and the right-handed notification effect, these effect types are not selected. As a result, in the case of 80 times or 100 times of time saving, the weak effect B is selected at a ratio of 35% and the medium effect A is selected at a ratio of 5%.

In other words, when the number of time reductions is 80 or 100 times, the effect that the gunman 811 finds the tattered box is executed at a rate of 95%, and the iron box is found with a low probability (5% rate). The production to be performed is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 165, when the number of time reductions is 30 or 40 times, the weak effect A is associated with the range of the effect counter 223j value of "0 to 4" as the effect type. The weak effect B is defined as the effect type in association with the range in which the value of the effect counter 223j is "5 to 24". Further, the value of the effect counter 223j is defined in association with the effect type A with respect to the range of "25 to 74", and the value of the effect counter 223j is defined with respect to the range of the value of "75 to 94". , The medium effect B is associated and defined as the effect type, and the strong effect is associated and defined as the effect type with respect to the value range of the effect counter 223j of "95 to 99".

That is, when the number of time reductions is 30 or 40 times, the ratio of the gunman 811 performing the effect of discovering the tattered box (weak effect A or B) is 25% in total, and the effect of discovering the iron box. The ratio of executing (medium effect A or B) is 70% in total, and the ratio of executing the effect of discovering the golden box (strong effect) is 5%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 165, when the number of time reductions is 10 times, the medium effect A is defined as the effect type in association with the range of "0 to 9" in the value of the effect counter 223j, and the effect is produced. The value of the counter 223j is defined in association with the medium effect B as the effect type with respect to the range of "10 to 29", and the value of the effect counter 223j is strong as the effect type with respect to the range of "30 to 99". The production is defined in association with each other. On the other hand, since the values of the effect counter 223j are not distributed to the weak effect A, the weak effect B, and the right-handed notification effect, these effect types are not selected.

That is, when the number of time reductions is 10, the effect of the gunman 811 discovering the tattered box (weak effect A or B) is not executed, and the effect of discovering the iron box (middle). The ratio of executing the effect A or B) is 30% in total, and the ratio of executing the effect of discovering the golden box (strong effect) is 70%.

On the other hand, when the number of time reductions is 0, the right-handed notification effect is executed as the effect type regardless of the value of the effect counter 223j (for all values 0 to 99).

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the ratio of the effect mode selected as the game method selection effect is changed according to the number of time reductions (advantageous degree) set when it is assumed that the V prize does not occur. It has a structure. That is, the weak effects A and B are easily selected when the number of time reductions is large, and are difficult to be selected when the number of time reductions is small, and the medium effects A and B are selected when the number of time reductions is intermediate (30 or 40 times). The structure is such that it is easy to be selected, and the strong effect is easy to be selected when the number of time reductions is small, and difficult to be selected when the number of time reductions is large. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to estimate the number of time reductions when the V prize does not occur from the mode of the game method selection effect. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to generate the V prize in consideration of the production mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 164 (b). FIG. 164 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 164 (b), the RAM 223 of the sixth embodiment has a stop type storage area 223ca and a non-V hour number storage area 223cc with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21). The difference is that the selection effect in-progress flag 223 cc, the shooting effect flag 223 cd, the notified flag 223 ce, and the V passing number counter 223 cf are provided.

The stop type storage area 223ca is a storage area for storing information indicating the stop type extracted from the stop type command received from the main control device 110. In the stop type storage area 223ca, the information indicating the stop type of the first special symbol and the information indicating the stop type of the second special symbol can be stored separately. When a big hit occurs during the normal mode, the big hit type is specified from the information indicating the stop type stored in the stop type storage area 223ca, and it is assumed that no V prize is generated during the big hit. The time reduction count is read from the non-V hour count table 222cc. Depending on the number of time reductions read out, the effect mode of the game method selection effect executed during the jackpot is determined from the batting method selection effect selection table 222ca.

The non-V hour number storage area 223 kb is the time reduction number read from the non-V hour number table 222 kb when the jackpot is won (the time reduction number set when it is assumed that the V prize does not occur in the jackpot). It is a storage area for storing. Based on the time saving number of times stored in the non-V hour number table 222cc, the display mode of the game method selection effect to be executed during the jackpot won in the normal mode is selected from the hitting method selection effect selection table 222ca (see FIG. 165). Will be done.

The selection effect selection flag 223cc is a flag indicating whether or not the game method selection effect is being executed. If the selection effect in-progress flag 223cc is on, it means that the game method selection effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the game method selection effect is not being executed. This selection effect in-progress flag 223cc is set to on when the interval period after the end of the third round is set in the interval command processing (see S3907 in FIG. 175). On the other hand, the selection effect flag 223cc is set to off in the ending command processing executed in the on state (see S4002 in FIG. 176).

The shooting effect flag 223cd is a flag indicating whether or not a shooting effect of shooting at the box discovered by the gunman 811 is being executed in the game method selection effect. If the shooting effect flag 223cd is on, it means that the shooting effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the shooting effect is not being executed. The shooting effect flag 223cd is set to on when the ball is first detected in the first specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the game method selection effect (see S4104 in FIG. 177).

The notified flag 223ce is a flag indicating whether or not the safety mode entry effect (see FIG. 152 (b)) has been executed (notifying the entry into the safety mode). If the notified flag 223ce is on, it means that the safe mode rush effect has been executed, and if it is off, it means that the safe mode rush effect has not been executed. In the present embodiment, in the game method selection effect, five game balls have passed the probability change switch 65e3, or 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the four rounds, and at least one game ball is the probability change switch 65e3. It is configured to execute the safe mode rush effect when passing through. The notified flag 223ce is set to ON when any of the conditions is satisfied first and the execution of the safe mode entry effect is set (see S3705 in FIG. 172 and S4110 in FIG. 177). If the notified flag 223ce is on, the effect of shooting by the gunman 811 is not executed even if the entry of the game ball into the first specific winning opening 65a is detected thereafter.

The V-passing number counter 223cf is a counter for counting the number of times that the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 that the passing of the probability change switch 65e3 is detected in one jackpot. That is, it is a counter for counting the number of times that a V prize has occurred. When the value of the V-passing number counter 223cf becomes 5 before 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 4th round, based on the counter value of the V-passing number counter 223cf during the execution of the game method selection effect. , It is configured to execute the safety mode rush effect (see S4109 in FIG. 177). Further, as the ending effect of the jackpot in which the game method selection effect is executed, the ending effect of a different mode is executed depending on whether or not the value of the V-passing number counter 223cf is 0 or not.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 170. Regarding the same processing as in the first embodiment, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted, and only the different control processing will be illustrated and described.

First, with reference to FIG. 166, the details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6. Similar to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 is performed when the specified fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed. , This is a process of stopping the variable display with a symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game.

Of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 166), in each of the processes S601 to S606 and S608 to S612, S601 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S606 and S608 to S612 are executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 166) in the sixth embodiment, when the processing of S605 is completed, a big hit is made from the values of the probability variation flag 203g, the time reduction counter 203t, and the time reduction flag 203a2. The game state at the time of winning is specified (S661), and the information corresponding to the specified game state is stored in the winning information storage area 203aa (S662).

Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 166) in the sixth embodiment, after the processing of S606 is completed, the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203a2 are set to off (S663). The process shifts to S608.

By executing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 166), when the jackpot is won, the information necessary for specifying the interval period and the number of time reductions is provided to the winning information storage area 203aa. After storing in advance, the reset process of each value can be executed. Therefore, the interval period and the number of time reductions can be accurately set from the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Although the illustration is omitted, in the sixth embodiment, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 is executed instead of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. There is. In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6, the same processing as in S661 to S663 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 166) described above is added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the jackpot control process 6 (S1750) executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 6 (S1750).

Of the jackpot control processes 6 (see FIG. 167) in the sixth embodiment, in each of the processes S1621 to S1624, S1626, S1629 to S1631, and S1633 to S1635, the jackpot control processes in the first embodiment (see FIG. 46), respectively. ), The same processes as those of S1621 to S1624, S1626, S1629 to S1631, and S1633 to S1635 are executed.

Further, in the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 167) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1624 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1624: Yes), the jackpot operation in the first embodiment Instead of the setting process (see FIG. 47), the jackpot operation setting process 6 is executed (S1751), and this process is terminated. The details of the jackpot operation setting process 6 will be described later with reference to FIG. 168.

Further, in the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 167) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1626 that it is the end timing of the round (S1626), the interval setting process for setting the interval period is performed. Execute (S1752) to end this process. Details of this interval setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 169.

Further, in the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 167) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1631 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1631: Yes), then the jackpot end in the first embodiment Instead of the process (see FIG. 48), the jackpot end process 6 is executed (S1753) to end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 6 (S1751) described above will be described. In each of the jackpot operation setting processes 6 of S1641 and S1643, the same processes as those of S1641 and S1643 of the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 47) in the first embodiment are executed, respectively. Further, in the jackpot operation setting process 6 (see FIG. 168) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S1643 is completed, a round number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of rounds to be newly started next. Is set (S1754), and this process ends.

Next, the details of the above-described interval setting process (S1752) will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing this interval setting process (S1752).

In this interval setting process (see FIG. 169), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the third round of the jackpot (S1801), and if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the third round (S1801: No). An interval period of 3 seconds is set (S1802), and the process shifts to S1807.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1801, when it is determined that the end timing of the third round is reached (S1801: Yes), the interval selection table 202k is read (S1803), and the data of the winning information storage area 203aa is read from the read table. The interval period corresponding to (S1804) is read out, and the read interval period is set as the interval period after the end of three rounds (S1805). Next, the operation pattern of the probabilistic solenoid 65k is set (S1806), and the process shifts to S1807. In the process of S1807 executed after the process of S1802 or S1806, an interval command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the start of the interval is set (S1807), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the details of the jackpot end processing 6 (S1753) described above will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 6 (S1753).

Of the jackpot end processing 6 (see FIG. 170), in each of the processes S1651 and S1652, the same processes as the processes S1651 and S1652 of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment are executed, respectively. Will be done. Further, in the jackpot end processing 6 (see FIG. 170) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off in the processing of S1651 (S1651: No), then the time saving number selection table 202j The table 202j2 for non-passing through V is read from (S1761), and the process shifts to S1763.

Further, in the jackpot end processing 6 (see FIG. 170) in the sixth embodiment, when the processing of S1652 is completed, the table 202j1 for passing V is read from the time saving number selection table 202j (S1762), and the processing proceeds to S1763. Transition. In the process of S1763 executed after the process of S1761 or S1762, the time saving type corresponding to the data of the winning information storage area 203aa is read from the table read by each of these processes (S1763).

Next, it is determined whether the read time saving type is a time saving type that continues until the next big hit (S1764), and if it is determined that it is a type that continues until the next big hit (S1764: Yes), the process proceeds to S1767. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S1764, when it is determined that the type does not continue until the next big hit (S1764: No), the number of time reductions read in the processing of S1763 is set in the time reduction counter 203t (S1765). Next, it is determined whether the counter value set in the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S1766), and if it is 0 (S1766: Yes), the process shifts to S1768.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1766, when it is determined that the counter value set in the time saving counter 203t is not 0 (S1766: No), the processing is shifted to S1767. In the process of S1767, the time saving flag 203a2 is set to ON (S1767), and the process shifts to S1768. In the process of S1768, the probability change setting flag 203h and the information storage area 203aa at the time of winning are reset (S1768), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 171, the main process 6 (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the details of this main process (see FIG. 171). This main process 6 (see FIG. 171) is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment.

In each of the main processes 6 (see FIG. 171), S2101 to S2117, the same processes as those of S2101 to S2117 of the main process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment are executed. Further, in the main process 6 (see FIG. 171) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S2110 is completed, the player's selection result in the game method selection effect and the presence or absence of the V prize are obtained after the big hit. The game result notification process (S2151) for suggesting the game state is executed, and the process shifts to S2111. The details of this game result notification process (S2151) will be described with reference to FIG. 172.

FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the game result notification process (S2151). In this game result notification processing (S2151), first, it is determined whether or not the selection effect in-progress flag 223cc is on (S3701), and if it is determined that it is off (S3701: No), this processing is terminated as it is. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag 223cc during the selection effect is on (S3701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the notification timing of the game result (S3702), and it is determined that it is not the notification timing of the game result. If this is the case (S3702: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3702, when it is determined that it is the notification timing of the game result (S3702: Yes), first, it is determined whether the shooting effect flag 223cd is on (S3703), and the shooting effect flag 223cd is not on. (That is, if it is determined that the player has not entered any game ball into the first specific winning opening 65a in the fourth round and has been waiting) (S3703: No), this game method selection effect The key discovery effect (see FIG. 153 (a)) corresponding to the effect type of is set (S3704), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S3703, when it is determined that the shooting effect flag 223cd is on (S3703: Yes), first, the notified flag 223ce is set to on (S3705). Next, it is determined whether the V-passing number counter 223cg is a value greater than 0 (1 or more) (S3706), and if it is determined to be greater than 0 (S3706: Yes), the safe mode entry effect (FIG. 152 (FIG. 152). b)) is set (S3708), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the V-passing number counter 223cg is 0 in the processing of S3706 (S3706: Yes), the player has made the game ball enter the first specific winning opening 65a. However, since it means that the V prize did not occur, the destruction failure effect (see FIG. 154) is set (S3707), and this process is terminated.

By executing this game result notification process (see FIG. 172), it is possible to execute an effect suggesting a game state after a big hit in a mode corresponding to the game method selected by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the command determination process 6 (S2111) executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 54) in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 6 (S2111).

In each of the command determination processes 6 (see FIG. 173), S2201 to S2216, the same processes as those of S2201 to S2216 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54) in the first embodiment are executed. ..

Further, in the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 173) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received in the process of S2213 (S2213: No), then the command related to the jackpot is executed. If it is determined whether or not the command has been received (S2661) and it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S2661: No), the process shifts to S2216. On the other hand, in the processing of S2661 when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has been received (S2661: Yes), the jackpot-related command processing for performing control according to the command related to the jackpot is executed (S2662). ), End this process. The details of this jackpot-related command processing (S2262) will be described with reference to FIG. 174.

FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing this jackpot-related command processing (S2262). In this jackpot-related command processing (see FIG. 174), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S3801), and if it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3801: Yes), the stop type storage area 223ca Based on the stop type information stored in, the current jackpot type is specified (S3802). Next, the number of time reductions corresponding to the jackpot type is read from the non-V hour number table 222cc, and the read time reduction number is stored in the non-V hour number storage area 223cc (S3803). Next, the display opening command is set (S3804), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3801, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S3801: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S3805), and it is determined that the round number command has been received. If this is the case (S3805: Yes), a display round number command for supporting the display control device 114 is set so that the number of rounds corresponding to the command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S3806). , End this process.

Further, in the processing of S3805, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3805: No), it is determined whether or not the interval command has been received (S3807), and it is determined that the interval command has been received. (S3807: Yes) executes an interval command process for executing control corresponding to the interval notified by the interval command (S3808), and ends this process. Details of this interval command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 175.

On the other hand, in the process of S3807, when it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S3807: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S3809), and it is determined that the ending command has been received. If so (S3809: Yes), the ending command process for determining the effect mode of the ending is executed (S3810), and this process is terminated. Details of this ending command processing (S3810) will be described later with reference to FIG. 176.

Further, in the process of S3809, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S3809: No), then it is determined whether or not the large open opening winning command has been received (S3811). In addition, every time the main control device 110 detects the entry of a game ball into the first specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the large opening opening winning command sends the winning ball to the voice lamp control device 113. This command is output to notify. When it is determined that the large open opening winning command has been received in the processing of S3811 (S3811: Yes), the switch passing command processing for controlling the first specific winning opening 65a according to the winning is executed (S3811: Yes). S3812), this process is terminated. The details of this switch passage command processing (S3812) will be described later with reference to FIG. 177. Further, in the process of S3812, if it is determined that the large open opening winning command has not been received (S3812: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned interval command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing this interval command processing (see FIG. 175). In the interval command processing (see FIG. 175), first, it is determined whether the command indicates the interval after the end of the third round, and when it is determined that the interval is not set after the end of the third round (S3901: No), the process shifts to S3908. On the other hand, in the process of S3901 when it is determined that the interval is set after the end of the third round (S3901: Yes), the information stored in the slave state setting area 223k is read (S3902), and the read information is read. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the jackpot this time was won during the normal mode (S3903).

If it is determined in the process of S3903 that it is not a big hit in the normal mode (S3903: No), the process shifts to S3908. On the other hand, in the processing of S3903, when it is determined that the hit is a big hit in the normal mode (S3903: Yes), then the striking method selection effect selection table 222ca is read (S3904), and from the read table, when non-V The time saving number of times stored in the number-of-times storage area 223cc and the effect type corresponding to each value of the effect counter 223j are determined (S3905).

Next, a display interval command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined effect type interval effect is set (S3906), the selection effect in-progress flag 223 cc is set to ON (S3907), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S3908 to be executed when it is determined in the processing of S3901 that it is not the third round (S3901: No) and when it is determined that the mode is not in the normal mode in the processing of S3903 (S3903: No), it is normal. The display interval command for notifying the display control device 114 of the interval effect is set (S3908), and this process is terminated.

By executing this interval command processing (see FIG. 175), in the third round of the jackpot won in the normal mode, a game in a mode corresponding to the number of time reductions that would be set if V winning does not occur. Method selection effect can be set. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to generate the V prize from the production mode.

Next, the details of the ending command processing (S3810) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 176. In this ending command processing (S3810), first, it is determined whether or not the selection effect in-progress flag 223cc is on (S4001), and if it is off (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4005. On the other hand, in the process of S4001, when it is determined that the selection effect in-progress flag 223cc is on (S4001: Yes), the selection effect in-progress flag 223cc, the shooting effect flag 223cd, and the notified flag 223ce are all set to off (S4001: Yes). S4002).

When the processing of S4002 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the V-passing number counter 223cf is 0 (whether or not V winning has occurred in this jackpot) (S4003), and the counter value is 1. If it is determined that the above is the case (S4003: No), the process shifts to S4005. On the other hand, in the processing of S4003, when it is determined that the value of the V passing number counter 223cf is 0 (S4003: Yes), the game method selection effect is executed, and the player waits without launching the game ball. This means that the game ball did not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 even though the player launched the game ball. That is, it means that the game state after the big hit becomes the normal mode. In this case, the ending type corresponding to the production type of the game method selection effect of this time is specified, and the specified ending type is notified. Set the display ending command (S4004), and end this process.

Further, when it is determined in the processing of S4001 that the flag 223cc during the selection effect is off (S4001: No), and when it is determined in the processing of S4003 that the value of the V-passing number counter 223cc is 1 or more (S4003: In the processing of S4005 executed in No), a display ending command for notifying a normal ending effect is set (S4005), the value of the V-passing number counter 223cf is reset to 0 (S4006), and this processing is performed. To finish.

Next, the details of the switch passage command processing (S3812) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing this switch passage command processing (S3812).

In this switch passage command processing (see FIG. 177), first, it is determined whether or not the selection effect flag 223cc is on (S4101), and if it is determined that it is off (S4101: No), this processing is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, in the process of S4101, when it is determined that the selection effect in-progress flag 223cc is on (S4101: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the notified flag 223ce is on (S4102), and it is turned on. If (S4102: Yes), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4102, if it is determined that the notified flag 223ce is off (S4102: No), it is determined whether or not the shooting effect flag 223cd is on (S4103), and if it is off, it is determined. (S4103: No) Since this command was output based on the fact that the game ball first entered the first specific winning opening 65a in the game method selection effect, the shooting effect flag 223cd was set. Set to on (S4104) and shift processing to S4105. On the other hand, if it is determined that the shooting effect flag 223cd is on in the processing of S4103 (S4103: Yes), the processing of S4104 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S4105.

In the process of S4105, the execution of the shooting effect is set (S4105), and it is determined whether the command received this time is output based on the passage of the probability change switch 65e3 (S4106). If it is determined in the process of S4106 that the command is not based on the passage of the probability change switch 65e3 (S4106: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4106, if it is determined that the command is based on the passage of the probability change switch 65e3 (S4106: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the V-passage counter 223cf (S4107), and after the update. It is determined whether the value of the V-passing number counter 223cf of the above is 5 or more (S4108).

If it is determined in the process of S4108 that the value of the V-passing number counter 223 cf is smaller than 5 (S4108: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4108, when it is determined that the value of the V-passing number counter 223cf is 5 or more (S4108: Yes), the safe mode entry effect (see FIG. 152 (b)) is set (S4109), and the notification is performed. The completed flag 223ce is set to ON (S4110), and this process ends.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when a jackpot that can win a V prize is won in the normal mode (short-time game state ST1h), the player is made to select whether to win the V prize or not. be able to. When the V-winning game method is selected, the system is configured to immediately shift to the consecutive villa mode A, which is advantageous to the player, immediately after the jackpot is completed, so that the prize ball can be stably obtained. On the other hand, when a game method that does not allow V prizes is selected, it becomes easy to shift to the preparation mode. If it is possible to shift to the preparation mode, it becomes easier to shift to the consecutive villa mode B, which has a higher degree of advantage (loop rate) than the consecutive villa mode A, which is extremely advantageous for the player. However, if it is not possible to shift to the preparation mode, the disadvantageous normal mode will be looped, and it will be unstable (high risk and high return) whether or not the prize ball can be won. Depending on the game method during the jackpot, the subsequent game playability (game playability that can stably win prize balls and high-risk, high-return game playability) can be changed, so it is fun to select a game method. Can be given. Further, since different game characteristics can be selected according to the taste of each player, it is possible to match the taste of a wide range of players.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when a big hit is made in the normal mode, the number of time reductions (advantage) when the V prize is not generated during the big hit is determined in advance at the end of the third round. According to the determination result, the interval period after the end of the third round and the mode of the game method selection effect executed in the fourth round are switched. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to estimate the number of time reductions (advantageous degree) when the V prize is not generated from the effect mode of the game method selection effect. That is, it is possible to estimate the ease of transition to the preparation mode of the normal mode that transitions when the V prize is not generated. Thereby, in consideration of the ease of transition to the preparation mode inferred from the display mode, the player can be made to select whether to make the V prize or not to make the V prize.

In the sixth embodiment, the loop rate of the consecutive villa mode A is 25% and the loop rate of the consecutive villa mode B is 80%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, if the loop rate of the consecutive villa mode A is increased, the merit of performing a game method aiming at a safe mode (a game method in which a V prize is generated during a jackpot in the normal mode) can be improved. Further, if the loop rate of the consecutive villa mode B is increased, the merit of performing the game method aiming at the challenge mode (the game method of waiting without generating the V prize during the jackpot in the normal mode) can be improved. On the other hand, if the loop rate of the consecutive villa mode A is lowered, the merit of performing the game method aiming at the safe mode can be reduced. Further, if the loop rate of the consecutive villa mode B is lowered, the merit of performing the game method aiming at the challenge mode can be reduced. By adjusting the loop rates of the consecutive villa modes A and B in this way, the degree of advantage of each mode can be adjusted, so that the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 10 that meets the policy of the hall.

In the sixth embodiment, in the jackpot where the V prize is possible, the game method selection effect of the mode according to the degree of advantage when the V prize is not given is executed, and the V prize is given to the player in consideration of the effect mode. It was configured to let you choose whether to aim or not, but it is not limited to this. A type of gaming machine that starts a big hit when a gaming ball can be put into a specific area (V area) provided on the gaming board (so-called blade mono type or 1 type 2 type mixed type). May be applied to.

More specifically, for example, in a one-type two-type mixed type in which two types of game states, a normal game state ST1 and a time-saving game state ST1h, are provided, in the normal game state ST1, the game ball enters the V region. The structure is difficult to ball. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state ST1h, the game ball is easily entered into the V region. Then, in a part (for example, 80%) when the game ball enters the V region, the jackpot that shifts to the time-saving game state ST1h after the jackpot is won, and when it becomes another jackpot, it is normal after the jackpot. The configuration is such that the jackpot that shifts to the game state ST1 is won. Further, in the V region, an opening / closing plate that can be changed to a closed position that makes it difficult (impossible) for the game ball to enter and an open position that makes it easy (possible) for the game ball to enter is provided. .. This opening / closing plate is set to the open state, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit. Further, when the small hit is won, the big hit type (whether or not the time saving state is given) given when passing through the V region is also determined. In this case, an effect suggesting whether or not it is better to pass through the V region (whether or not it is a jackpot type to which the time-saving state is given) is executed during the variation effect during the variation effect during the time-saving state. It may be configured to be used. With this configuration, the continuation rate of the time saving state can be improved compared to the actual distribution of jackpot types. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment>
Next, a first modification of the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180. In the sixth embodiment described above, in the preparatory mode (normal game state ST1) in which the number of time reductions can be elapsed in the normal mode (time saving game state ST1h), when a big hit occurs, after the big hit. As the game state, the preparation mode or the consecutive villa mode B was set. That is, the configuration is such that there is no possibility of falling into the normal mode when the mode shifts to the preparation mode. However, since the preparation mode (normal gaming state ST1) is a gaming state that is set when the gaming machine is initialized, there is a problem that it is easy to shift to the consecutive villa mode B at the time of initialization. That is, in a situation where there is a high possibility that the pachinko machine 10 has been initialized, such as when the hall is opened, there is a risk that it will be excessively advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, in this modified example, in the preparation mode, when a big hit that V winning is impossible (difficult) is made, the player falls to the normal mode after the big hit. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is prevented from being excessively advantageous to the player. Further, when a big hit is made in the preparation mode, the gaming state set after the big hit is set to the normal mode, which is the most disadvantageous to the player, or the consecutive villa mode B, which is the most advantageous to the player. Further, in the case of shifting to the consecutive villa mode B, if the jackpot type is such that V winning is not possible, the configuration is such that instead of shifting to the normal mode after the jackpot, the mode shifts to the preparation mode. As a result, instead of reducing the advantage of the preparation mode, the superiority of the consecutive villa mode B is improved, so that higher risk and higher return playability can be realized when V prize is not generated. Can be done.

First, with reference to FIG. 178, a mode (game state) transition method of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 178, in the first modification of the sixth embodiment, the four modes (gaming states) can be switched back and forth as in the sixth embodiment described above. Of these, the transition method of the gaming state in the normal mode and the consecutive villa mode A is the same as the transition method in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 151), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the preparation mode in the first modification, as shown in FIG. 178, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode (game state) only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, when it becomes a big hit (big hits A, B, and D) that cannot be won by V, which is determined at a rate of 70% when it becomes a big hit, the V prize does not occur, so that after the big hit The game state is set to the normal mode. That is, it falls to the most disadvantageous mode (gaming state) at a rate of 70%. On the other hand, if a jackpot that can win a V is determined at a rate of 30% of the jackpot (big hits C and EG, and a V prize occurs during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot will be continuous. It is set to the villa mode B. If the V prize cannot be generated despite the jackpot that allows the V prize, the preparation mode is looped as a remedy as in the sixth embodiment. This makes it possible to maintain the motivation of the player for the game.

Further, in the consecutive villa mode B in the first modification, as shown in FIG. 178, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode (gaming state) only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, in the case of a big hit, which is determined at a rate of 20%, in the case of a big hit (big hit B) where V winning is impossible, V winning does not occur, so that the game after the big hit The state is set to ready mode. In addition, even if the jackpot (big hits A and C to G) that can win a V prize is obtained (80% distribution) and the player cannot generate a V prize, the mode after the jackpot (game state) is also obtained. Is set to ready mode.

On the other hand, if the jackpot is a V-winning and the player is able to generate a V-winning, the consecutive villa mode B is set again after the jackpot. In the case of a jackpot that allows V prizes, V prizes can be generated simply by continuing to play right-handed games during the jackpot, so in the case of a jackpot that allows V prizes, basically V prizes Occurs. That is, the consecutive villa mode B is looped at a rate of 80%.

As described above, in the first modification, when a big hit is made in the preparation mode, the player falls to the normal mode at a rate of about 70%. That is, the degree of advantage of the preparation mode is lower than that of the sixth embodiment described above. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player from becoming excessively advantageous and giving a disadvantage to the hall. Further, in this modified example, even if a big hit is impossible in the consecutive villa mode B, the player shifts to the preparation mode without falling to the normal mode at once. That is, if it becomes a big hit that can win a V in the preparation mode, it is possible to return to the consecutive villa mode B again. With this configuration, the degree of advantage of the consecutive villa mode B is improved as compared with the sixth embodiment described above. As a result, the playability when waiting without generating the V prize in the normal mode can be made into the playability with higher risk and return.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the V non-passing time table 202j2 of the time saving number selection table 202j in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. Of the V non-passing table 202j2, the provisions corresponding to the normal mode and the consecutive villa mode A are the same as the V non-passing table 202j2 (see FIG. 160) in the sixth embodiment. A detailed description will be omitted.

Further, in the V non-passing time table 202j2 in the first modification, 100 times are specified as the number of time reductions in association with the jackpot A won in the preparation mode. Similarly, 80 times are associated with the jackpot B won in the preparation mode, and 40 times are associated with the jackpot D won in the preparation mode. .. As a result, the jackpots are A, B, and D, and if the V prize is not generated, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. As with the sixth embodiment, 0 times is associated with the other jackpot types in the preparation mode as the number of time reductions.

Further, in the V non-passing time table 202j2 in the first modification, 0 times is specified as the number of time reductions for all the jackpot types won in the consecutive villa mode B. Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the consecutive villa mode B and the V prize cannot be generated during the big hit, the game state after the big hit is set to the preparation mode.

Next, the interval selection table 202k according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the interval selection table 202k. Of the interval selection table 202k, the provisions corresponding to the normal mode, the consecutive villa mode A, and the consecutive villa mode B are the same as the interval selection table 202k (see FIG. 161) in the sixth embodiment. A detailed description will be omitted.

Further, in the interval selection table 202k in the first modification, an interval period during which V winning is not possible is set for the jackpots A, B, and D in the preparation mode, and the jackpots C and E in the preparation mode are set. For ~ G, an interval period during which V winning is possible is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the sixth embodiment, the degree of advantage of the preparation mode is lower than that in the sixth embodiment described above. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player from becoming excessively advantageous and giving a disadvantage to the hall. Further, in this modified example, even if a big hit is impossible in the consecutive villa mode B, the player shifts to the preparation mode without falling to the normal mode at once. That is, if it becomes a big hit that can win a V in the preparation mode, it is possible to return to the consecutive villa mode B again. With this configuration, the degree of advantage of the consecutive villa mode B is improved as compared with the sixth embodiment described above. As a result, the playability when waiting without generating the V prize in the normal mode can be made into the playability with higher risk and return.

<Modification 2 of the sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 189. In the sixth embodiment described above and the first modification thereof, the time-saving game state ST1h is set as the most disadvantageous normal mode, and the normal game state ST1 that shifts by elapse of the time-saving number of times shifts to the consecutive villa mode B. It was configured as an easy preparation mode. That is, it is a playability that gives a chance to shift to the consecutive villa mode B by passing the time reduction number of times.

On the other hand, in the second modification, the normal gaming state ST1 is set as the most disadvantageous gaming state, and the normal gaming state ST1 is more advantageous than the relatively advantageous latent probability variable gaming state ST2 and the normal gaming state ST1. The configuration is such that there is a possibility of shifting to two types of gaming states of the time-saving gaming state ST1h. Then, by making a big hit in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, it is possible to shift to the most advantageous probabilistic gaming state ST3.

The details of the mode transition in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 189. As shown in FIG. 189, in the second modification, the most disadvantageous normal gaming state ST1 and the time-saving gaming state ST1h that shifts to the most advantageous probabilistic gaming state ST3 when the jackpot probability is low but the jackpot is the most advantageous, and the jackpot. There is a high probability, but a lot of balls are consumed during the game (equivalent to the normal game state ST1), and a latent probability change game state ST2, and a probability change game state ST3, in which the number of balls is hard to decrease and the jackpot probability is high (most advantageous). Four gaming states are provided.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 189, in the normal game state ST1, there is a possibility of shifting to another game state when a big hit occurs. Specifically, when it becomes a jackpot that can win a V prize at 40% of the jackpot (interval B is set) and a V prize occurs at the jackpot (the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3), The game state after the big hit is set to the latent probability change game state ST2. On the other hand, in the jackpot where V winning is possible, if the V winning does not occur because the player waits without launching the game ball in the fourth round, the time-saving gaming state ST1h is set as the gaming state after the jackpot. Will be done. The number of time reductions set in this case is, for example, one of three types of 10 times, 30 times, and 50 times, depending on the jackpot type.

If the jackpot (60% distribution) is impossible (difficult) to win the V prize and the V prize does not occur during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal gaming state ST1 again. Therefore, in the normal game state ST1, a big hit that makes it impossible (difficult) to win a V is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in FIG. 189, in the latent probability variation game state ST2 shown on the lower left side of the normal game state ST1, there is a possibility of shifting to another game state when a big hit occurs. That is, it becomes a jackpot that can be distributed at 50% of the jackpot, and if the V prize does not occur during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving gaming state ST1h. In this case, for example, 50 times or 70 times is set as the number of time reductions. Further, if the V prize that is distributed by 50% of the jackpot is impossible and the V prize does not occur during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal gaming state ST1. In other words, it is the most disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, if a V prize occurs during the jackpot won in the latent probability variable gaming state ST2, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the latent probability variable gaming state ST2 again. In other words, although the number of balls held is likely to decrease, it loops in an advantageous state where the probability of a big hit is high.

Further, in FIG. 189, in the time-saving game state ST1h shown on the lower right side of the normal game state ST1, there is a possibility that the game state will be changed when a big hit is made or the number of time reductions elapses. That is, when the number of time reductions has elapsed, the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state ST1. Further, if a big hit occurs in the time-saving game state and a V prize occurs during the big hit, the game state after the big hit is set to the probabilistic game state ST3. On the other hand, if a big hit occurs in the time-saving game state ST1h and the V prize during the big hit does not occur, the game state after the big hit is set to the time-saving game state ST1h again.

Further, in FIG. 189, in the probabilistic gaming state ST3 shown below the time-saving gaming state ST1h, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state when a big hit occurs. Specifically, if the jackpot is a jackpot in which it is impossible to win a V prize at 50% of the jackpot, and no V prize is generated during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal gaming state ST1. Further, if the jackpot is a jackpot in which 50% of the jackpot can be won and the V prize is not generated during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving gaming state ST1h. In this case, for example, 100 times is set as the number of time reductions. This is to provide relief in the case where the V prize cannot be generated due to a player's mistake or the like even though it was a chance to loop the most advantageous probabilistic gaming state ST3.

On the other hand, if the jackpot is a V-winning and the V-winning can be generated during the jackpot, the probability variation game state ST3 is set again after the jackpot.

As described above, in the second modification, by generating a V prize during the jackpot in the normal game state ST1, the player shifts to the relatively advantageous latent probability change game state ST2, while the V prize is won during the jackpot. If does not occur, the game shifts to the time-saving game state ST1h, which gives a chance to shift to the probability variation game state ST3. Therefore, the stability-oriented player who wants to immediately shift to the advantageous latent probability change game state ST2 can select the method of passing the game ball through the probability change switch 65e3. On the other hand, although it is uncertain, a gambling-oriented player who wants to aim for the most advantageous probabilistic gaming state ST3 can be allowed to play the game while avoiding the V prize. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability in which the playability can be selected for each player.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described sixth embodiment and its modified example, whether or not it is advantageous for the player to generate a V prize during the jackpot by executing the game method selection effect. The configuration was suggested, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to switch between notifying the right-handed game and notifying the standby from the number of time reductions set by avoiding the V winning. That is, instead of highlighting the recommended gaming method as in the above-mentioned option production, the configuration may be such that only one predetermined gaming method is notified for each time reduction. For example, if the number of time reductions is 40 times or less, notification (navigation) is performed so that the game ball is not launched in the 4th round, while if the number of time reductions is 50 times or more, the right-handed game is performed in the 4th round. It may be configured to notify (navigate). With this configuration, it is possible to realize a more understandable production mode. In addition, if the navigation is followed, the challenge mode can be entered only when the number of time reductions is small, so that the player is less likely to lose money. Further, as a notification method for notifying the game ball so as not to be launched, for example, an effect of touching a place other than the operation handle 51 with the right hand (the hand on the side of operating the operation handle 51) may be executed. That is, by following the effect, the effect in which the hand can be released from the operation handle 51 may be executed. Specifically, for example, a touch sensor is provided on the right side surface of the pachinko machine 10, and an effect of notifying (navigating) the touch sensor so as to keep touching it until the end of four rounds is executed. May be. With this configuration, the V prize can be avoided only by the player participating in the production.

In the sixth embodiment described above and its modified example, even if a jackpot is impossible (difficult) to win a V in the normal mode, the game method selection effect is executed during the jackpot. It is not limited. For example, the game method selection effect may be executed only during the execution of the jackpot where the V prize is possible (easy).

In the sixth embodiment described above and its modified example, the image of the arrow suggesting the right-handed game is displayed in the upper right direction of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. For example, during the execution period of the game method selection effect, the image of the arrow displayed on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81 may be hidden. With such a configuration, when the game method selection effect is executed, the player can more easily understand that the game method should be selected by the player himself / herself.

In the sixth embodiment described above and its modified example, if the power is turned on in the normal mode (time saving game state ST1h), the gunman 811 is displayed on the screen in which the number of floors of the tower corresponds to the remaining number of time saving. It was designed to be restored, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the power is turned on, the stage may be shifted to a stage dedicated to the time of turning on (for example, a stage where a rear image of the gunman 811 traveling on a horse is displayed) regardless of the gaming state. Then, the stage dedicated to the time of throwing in may be continued until, for example, the next big hit is won. With this configuration, it is difficult to determine the gaming state when the power is turned on from the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, for example, when the hall is opened, the RAM erase switch 122 is operated and initialized, and as a result, the pachinko machine 10 is staying in the preparation mode (normal game state ST1), or the power is simply turned on / off. It is possible to make it difficult to determine from the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 whether or not the above is performed and the user is staying in the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 in the preparation mode from being discriminated from the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 and start the game when the hall is opened or the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent only the player who can start the game when the hall is opened from becoming excessively advantageous.

In this case, it is not always necessary to shift to the dedicated stage when the power is turned on when the power is cut off, and the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are initialized when the hall is opened (the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed). It may be limited to situations where there is a high possibility that the power will be turned on in the state. Specifically, for example, a known RTC (Real Time Clock) is electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10, and the hall opens around the opening time (for example, 10:00 AM). In the case of a hall where the power is turned on, the stage may be set to a dedicated stage at the time of turning on, regardless of the gaming state at the time of turning on the power, only when it is determined that the power is turned on from 9:30 AM to 10:30 AM). On the other hand, in other time zones, the corresponding back type may be set according to the gaming state notified by the state command output from the main control device 110. With this configuration, for example, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily cut off due to a so-called momentary power failure during a game, the stage shifts to a dedicated stage at the time of turning on, and the current game It is possible to prevent the state from becoming unclear to the player. In particular, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily cut off due to a power failure or the like while staying in the consecutive villa mode A or the consecutive villa mode B, a stage dedicated to turning on after the power is restored. If it shifts to, there is a risk that the player may be suspicious that the advantageous state (the consecutive villa mode A or the consecutive villa mode B) has ended. On the other hand, except for the time zone around the opening time, if the back type is set according to the game state when the power is turned on, the game state is not changed even if the power is cut off. It can be easily understood by others. Therefore, the player can play the game with more peace of mind.

In the sixth embodiment described above and its modified example, a game executed during the jackpot with reference to the number of time reductions set when it is assumed that the V prize does not occur when the jackpot is hit in the normal mode. Although the configuration is such that the effect mode of the method selection effect is determined, the method of determining the effect mode of the game method selection effect is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, instead of the number of time reductions, the effect type may be determined from the current jackpot type. That is, the batting method selection effect selection table 222ca may be a data table that defines the effect type executed during the jackpot for each combination of the jackpot type and the value of the effect counter 223j. This is because when the game state is limited to the normal mode, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the jackpot type and the number of time reductions set when the V prize does not occur during the jackpot. With this configuration, when determining the effect type, the jackpot type may be specified from the stop types stored in the stop type storage area 223ca, and the effect type corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223j may be specified. Therefore, the non-V hour count table 222cc can be omitted. Therefore, the capacity of ROM 222 can be reduced.

In the sixth embodiment described above and its modified example, the game method selection effect is executed during the jackpot won in the normal mode, and the number of time reductions when the V prize is not generated is suggested from the effect mode. However, there is a possibility that the jackpot type may be predicted by the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. That is, from the jackpot type, the player may predict the number of time reductions that will be set when the V prize does not occur, and there is a risk that the effect of the game method selection effect will be reduced. As a measure corresponding to this, even if the jackpot type is the same, the display mode of the first symbol may be changed according to the game state. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to predict the jackpot type from the display mode of the first symbol, so that it is also difficult for the player to predict the number of time reductions. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the game method selection effect.

In the sixth embodiment described above and its modified example, the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed even in the time saving state of the normal symbol. That is, the number of random values that can be hit by a normal symbol is configured so that only one is different between the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol and the low probability state, and even in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is normal. It was configured so that the probability of hitting a symbol was low. Then, in the advantageous consecutive villa mode A and consecutive villa mode B, the game is configured so that it is easy to win a small hit (even if it is not a big hit, the first specific winning opening 65a is easily opened). The game ball consumed in the above is configured to be covered by a prize ball paid out based on the ball entering the first specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the time saving state of the normal symbol is set to be significantly higher than the hit probability in the low probability state (for example, 1 / 1.2 similar to the first embodiment described above). By doing so, the game efficiency of the consecutive villa mode A (probability change game state ST3) may be enhanced. Further, in this case, in order to prevent the game efficiency in the normal mode (time saving game state ST1h) from becoming too high, in the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be long (for example, 600 seconds). In the Oki, Renso mode A, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be set short (for example, 3 seconds). With such a configuration, in the normal mode, the frequency at which the second starting port 640 is opened can be set to once every 600 seconds at the shortest, so that the normal mode can be disadvantageous.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 188. The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment described above has a configuration that realizes different playability depending on whether or not a V prize is awarded during the jackpot won in the normal mode. That is, by making the V prize, the game property that can stably obtain the prize ball is selected, while by avoiding the V prize, the high risk / high return game property can be selected.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the gaming states are set to three types, that is, the normal gaming state ST1, the time-saving gaming state ST1h, and the probabilistic gaming state ST3. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player that no V prize is generated. That is, the configuration is such that the time saving state set when the V prize is not generated is more advantageous than the probability change state set when the V prize is generated.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed. The point is that some processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 181, a method of transitioning the gaming state in the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 181, in the seventh embodiment, three types of gaming states are provided: a normal gaming state ST1, a time-saving gaming state ST1h, and a probabilistic gaming state ST3.

The normal game state ST1 is the most disadvantageous game state for the player because both the jackpot probability (1/80) of the special symbol and the hit probability (1/240) of the normal symbol are set low. Since the time-saving game state ST1h has a high probability of hitting a normal symbol (1 / 1.2), it is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1. Further, in the probabilistic game state ST3, both the jackpot probability (1/40) of the special symbol and the hit probability (1 / 1.2) of the normal symbol are high, so that it is most advantageous for the player during the stay.

As shown in FIG. 181, in the normal game state ST1, there is a possibility of shifting to another game state only when the special symbol is a big hit. Specifically, it becomes a big hit, and when a V prize is generated during the big hit, it shifts to the probabilistic game state ST3. On the other hand, if the V prize is not generated during the big hit, the game shifts to the time-saving game state ST1h.

Further, in the time-saving game state ST1h, the game state is changed not only when a big hit occurs, but also when the special symbol is continuously missed for the time-saving number of times set after the previous big hit. That is, when the number of time reductions elapses, the state shifts (falls) to the most disadvantageous normal game state ST1. As described above, in the time-saving game state ST1h, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is high, so that the game can be continued without reducing the number of balls held. Therefore, in the time-saving game state ST1h, the game can be performed with the expectation that a big hit will occur before the time-saving number of times elapses. Since the method of shifting the game state in the case of a big hit is the same as that of the normal game state ST1, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, even in the probability change game state ST3, the game state is changed not only when a big hit occurs, but also when the special symbol is continuously missed for the number of probability changes set after the previous big hit. That is, when the number of probable changes elapses, the game shifts (falls) to the normal game state ST1. As described above, in the probabilistic game state ST3, the probability of winning a special symbol and the probability of winning a normal symbol are high, so that the game can be continued without reducing the number of balls held and the jackpot is won. It becomes easier to do. Therefore, in the probabilistic game state ST3, the game can be performed with the expectation that a big hit will occur before the number of probable changes elapses. Since the method of shifting the game state in the case of a big hit is the same as that of the normal game state ST1, the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of probability changes of 5 times or 10 times may be set when shifting to the probability change game state ST3. On the other hand, the time saving game state ST1h is configured to set a minimum number of time saving times of 50 times. Even if the hit probability of the special symbol is increased (1/40), if the probability change number is 5 or 10, it is more likely that the game will return to the normal game state ST1 without becoming a big hit. , If the probability variation number of 5 or 10 times is set when V prize is won, it is better to set the time reduction number of 50 times or more surely without generating V prize. It is advantageous for the player. That is, the possibility of winning the jackpot within the set number of time reductions by avoiding the V prize is higher than the possibility of winning the jackpot within the probability variation number set by winning the V prize. Therefore, the player is made to select whether to set the probability variation game state ST3 in which there is a risk that a small number of probability variations is set, or to set the time reduction game state ST1h in which the time reduction number of 50 times or more is surely set. It is possible to realize a novel playability that can be achieved.

In the seventh embodiment, the same effect as the game method selection effect in the sixth embodiment described above is executed during the winning jackpot in all the game states. In the game method selection effect of the sixth embodiment, the effect mode is switched according to the number of time reductions set when it is assumed that the V prize does not occur. However, in the game method selection effect of the seventh embodiment, the effect mode is switched. , V The production mode is switched according to the number of probable changes set when a prize is won. That is, when the number of probability changes set at the time of winning V is 5 or 10, the ratio of weak effects A and B being set is high, and when the number of probability changes set is 50, the medium effect is produced. The ratio of A and B being set is high, and when the number of probability variations set is 100, the ratio of strong effects being set is high. Since the effect mode and the like are the same as those in the sixth embodiment, the illustration will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration of the seventh embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 184. First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (a).

FIG. 182 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202. The ROM 202 in the seventh embodiment is provided with a game state selection table 202m for the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment described above, a small hit random number table 202b, a time saving number selection table 202j, and an interval selection table 202k. The difference is that is removed. Further, the first hit random number table 202a, the second hit random number table 202c, and the jackpot type selection table 202d are partially changed in that they are different. Since other configurations are the same as those in the sixth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the first random number table 202a in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first random number table 202a in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 182 (b), in the seventh embodiment, five random numbers (counter values) determined to be big hits are set in the low probability state (normal game state ST1, time-saving game state ST1h) of the special symbol. The value is "0-4". Of the 400 values from 0 to 399 that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, there are eight counter values (random number values) that are determined to be jackpots, so the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/80 ( 5/400).

On the other hand, 10 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 9" are set to be determined as big hits in the probability variation state (probability variation game state ST3) of the special symbol. Of the 400 values from 0 to 399 that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, there are 10 counter values (random number values) that are determined to be jackpots, so the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/40 ( 10/400). As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the jackpot probability in the time saving state of the special symbol is twice the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can be made to select whether or not to win a V prize during the jackpot in consideration of the jackpot probability.

Next, the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 182 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 182 (c), in the seventh embodiment, the counter value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4, which is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol, is "0" in the low probability state of the normal symbol. Only one of "" is specified. That is, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in a low probability state of a normal symbol is 1/240. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the counter value of the second hit random number counter C4, which is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol, is defined as 200 of "5 to 204". That is, in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is 1 / 1.2 (200/240).

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, since the probability of hitting the normal symbol is significantly increased in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, it becomes easy to insert the game ball into the second starting port 640. As a result, compared to the normal state of the normal symbol, it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held in the normal symbol in the short time state, so that the game can be played efficiently. That is, it is in an advantageous state where it is possible to aim for a big hit with almost no reduction in the number of balls held.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 183 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 183, in the seventh embodiment, four types of jackpot types (big hits H1 to K1) that can be selected when a jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol Four types of jackpots (big hits H2 to K2) that can be selected in the event of a jackpot are defined. The jackpots H1 to K1 are jackpots with 4 rounds, and the jackpots H2 to K2 are jackpots with 8 rounds. As in the sixth embodiment, except for the number of rounds, the jackpot of the first special symbol and the jackpot of the second special symbol have the same performance in the jackpot types corresponding to the same alphabet. .. In the following description, the jackpot types with the same alphabet are collectively referred to as jackpots HK.

As shown in FIG. 183, the jackpot H (big hit H1 and jackpot H2) is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 29". Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, the number of counter values (random values) that become jackpot H is 30, so jackpot A is selected when a jackpot hits. The ratio is 30% (30/100). Details will be described later, but in this jackpot A, 5 times is set as the probability variation number when V winning occurs, while 100 times is set as the time saving number when V winning does not occur. To Therefore, it is more likely that the next big hit will be won in the time saving state of the normal symbol if the V prize is not generated (it is advantageous for the player). Therefore, it is possible to give the player the option of waiting without launching the game ball aiming at the time saving state.

Further, the jackpot I is defined in association with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "30 to 69", and the jackpot I is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "70 to 89". J is associated and defined, and the jackpot K is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99". Therefore, the percentage of jackpot I is 40% (40/100), the percentage of jackpot J is 20%, and the percentage of jackpot K is 10%.

The jackpot I is set to 10 times as the probability variation number when the V prize occurs, while 50 times is set as the time reduction number when the V prize does not occur. Therefore, it is more likely that the next big hit will be won in the time saving state of the normal symbol if the V prize is not generated (it is advantageous for the player). Therefore, it is possible to give the player the option of waiting without launching the game ball aiming at the time saving state.

Further, for the jackpot J, 50 times is set as the probability variation number when the V prize occurs, while 70 times is set as the time reduction number when the V prize does not occur. The jackpot K is set to 100 times as the probability variation number when the V prize occurs, while 100 times is set as the time reduction number when the V prize does not occur. In the case of these jackpots J and K, considering that the jackpot probability is doubled in the probability change state, it is more likely that the V prize will be won in the next jackpot in the time saving state of the normal symbol. (It is advantageous for the player).

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, avoiding the V prize is likely to be advantageous to the player (there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be a jackpot during the time saving state of the normal symbol), and the ratio of the jackpot H and I is 70%. It is configured to win in. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to win the V prize in consideration of the number of probable changes set when the V prize is won. As described above, as in the sixth embodiment, the guideline for the number of probable changes set when the V prize is assumed is suggested by the game method selection effect.

Next, the details of the game state selection table 202m will be described with reference to FIG. 184. The game state selection table 202m is a data table that is referred to for setting the game state after the big hit at the end of the big hit. First, FIG. 184 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the game state selection table 202m.

As shown in FIG. 184 (a), the game state selection table 202m of the seventh embodiment sets the number of probability changes when a V prize occurs during the jackpot (the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3). The probability variation setting table 202m1 referred to for this purpose, and the time reduction setting table referred to for setting the number of time reductions when a V prize does not occur during the jackpot (the game ball does not pass through the probability variation switch 65e3). It is composed of 202m2.

First, the details of the probability variation setting table 202m1 will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (b). FIG. 184 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probability variation setting table 202m1. As shown in FIG. 184 (b), the probability variation setting table 202m1 defines the number of probability variations to be set at the end of the jackpot in which the V prize occurs, in association with the jackpot type.

Specifically, "5 times" is associated with the jackpot H as the probability variation number, and "10 times" is associated with the jackpot I as the probability variation number. , "50 times" is specified in association with the number of probability changes, and "100 times" is specified in association with the jackpot K.

Next, the details of the time saving setting table 202m2 will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (c). FIG. 184 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving setting table 202m2. As shown in FIG. 184 (c), the time reduction setting table 202m2 defines the number of time reductions to be set at the end of the jackpot in which the V prize did not occur, in association with the jackpot type.

Specifically, "100 times" is associated with the jackpot H as the number of time reductions, and "50 times" is associated with the jackpot I as the number of time reductions, and "50 times" is associated with the jackpot J. , "70 times" is associated with the number of time reductions, and "100 times" is associated with the jackpot K.

From these probability variation setting table 202m1 and time reduction setting table 202m2, the jackpot H and I have the degree of advantage (probability variation) when V is awarded even if the increase in the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is taken into consideration. The degree of advantage (the possibility of becoming a big hit within the number of times saved) is higher than the degree of advantage (the possibility of becoming a big hit within the number of times shortened) when the V prize is not won. On the other hand, the jackpots J and K are more advantageous than the degree of advantage when the V prize is given (the possibility of becoming a jackpot within the number of probability variations), and the degree of advantage when the V prize is not given (the possibility of becoming a jackpot within the number of time reductions). Gender) is lower.

More specifically, in the jackpot H, the probability (expected value) of winning the jackpot again is about 11.9% (probability variation) within the range of the number of probability changes of 5 times set when the V prize is generated. While the probability of losing 5 times in a row (39/40 to the 5th power) is subtracted from 1, it is within the range of 100 time reductions set when V winning does not occur. Then, the probability of winning the jackpot again (expected value) is about 71.6% (the probability of losing 100 times in a row during the time saving state (79/80 to the 100th power) minus 1). Therefore, in the case of jackpot H, it is better to set the time saving state than to set the probability variation state, while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (while the ball is hard to reduce), the jackpot is hit again. Since the expected value of winning is significantly higher, it is likely that the result will be advantageous for the player.

In addition, in the jackpot I, the probability (expected value) of winning the jackpot again is about 22.4% (10 times during the probability change) within the range of 10 probability changes set when the V prize is generated. While the probability of consecutive deviations (39/40 to the 10th power) is subtracted from 1, the jackpot is again within the range of 50 time reductions set when V prizes do not occur. The probability of winning (expected value) is about 46.7% (the probability of losing 50 times in a row during the time saving state (79/80 to the 50th power) minus 1). Therefore, even in the case of jackpot I, it is better to set the time saving state than to set the probability variation state, while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (while the ball is hard to reduce). Since the expected value of winning again is high, the result is likely to be advantageous for the player.

In addition, in the jackpot J, the probability (expected value) of winning the jackpot again is about 71.8% (50 times during the probability change) within the range of the probability change number of 50 times set when the V prize is generated. While the probability of consecutive loss (39/40 to the 50th power) is subtracted from 1, the jackpot is again within the range of 70 time reductions set when V prizes do not occur. The probability of winning (expected value) is about 58.5% (the probability of losing 70 times in a row during the time saving state (79/80 to the 70th power) minus 1). Therefore, in the case of jackpot J, it is better to set the time saving state than to set the probability variation state, while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (while the ball is hard to reduce). Since the expected value of winning again becomes low, it tends to be a disadvantageous result for the player. That is, in the case of the jackpot J, it is easier for the player to generate the V prize.

In addition, in the jackpot K, the probability (expected value) of winning the jackpot again is about 92.0% (100 times during the probability change) within the range of the probability change number of 100 times set when the V prize is generated. While the probability of consecutive loss (39/40 to the 100th power) is subtracted from 1, the jackpot is again within the range of 100 time reductions set when V winning does not occur. The probability of winning (expected value) is about 71.6% (the probability of losing 100 times in a row during the time saving state (79/80 to the 100th power) minus 1). Therefore, in the case of jackpot K, it is better to set the probability variation state than to set the time saving state, while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (while the ball is hard to reduce). Since the expected value of winning again becomes high, it tends to be advantageous for the player.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the jackpot type is provided in which it is more advantageous for the player not to win the V prize than to win the V prize. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel playability in which the player can select whether or not to win the V prize.

<Control processing of the main control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the special drawing 1 disengagement stop processing 7 (S670) will be described with reference to FIG. 185. The special figure 1 disengagement stop process 7 (S670) is a process executed in place of the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 30) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is the first special symbol. This is a process for stopping the fluctuation display of the above with a pattern that is out of alignment.

Of the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing 7 (see FIG. 185) in the seventh embodiment, in each process of S625 to S630, the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (FIG. 1) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is performed. 30) The same processing as each processing of S625 to S630 is executed.

Further, when the special figure 1 disengagement stop process 7 (see FIG. 185) in the seventh embodiment is started, it is first determined whether the value of the probability variation counter is larger than 0 (S671). This probability change counter is a counter for counting the number of probability changes, and in the range where the counter value is 1 or more, the lottery of the special symbol is executed as the probability change state of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the counter value is 0, the special symbol lottery is executed as a low probability state of the special symbol.

If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter is 0 in the process of S671 (S671: No), the process shifts to S625. On the other hand, in the processing of S671, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter is 1 or more (S671: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S672), and the value of the probability variation counter after the subtraction becomes 0. It is determined whether or not it has become (S673). In the process of S673, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter after subtraction is not 0 (1 or more) (S673: No), the process shifts to S625. On the other hand, in the process of S673, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0 (S673: Yes), the time saving flag is set to off (S674), and the process shifts to S625.

By executing this special figure 1 disengagement stop process 7 (see FIG. 185), when the probability variation number is set after the big hit, the probability variation number is accurately subtracted each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed. I can go. Although not shown, in the seventh embodiment, the same processes as those of S671 to S674 are executed in the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 37).

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the details of the jackpot control process 7 (S1760) executed in place of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 167) in the sixth embodiment will be described in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 7 (S1760).

Among the jackpot control processes 7 (see FIG. 186) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S1621 to S1624, S1726, S1629 to S1631, S1633 to S1651, and S1751, the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 186) in the sixth embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S1621 to S1624, S1726, S1629 to S1631, S1633 to S1635, and S1751 of (see FIG. 167) are executed.

Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 186) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1626 that it is the end timing of the round (S1626: Yes), the interval setting process in the sixth embodiment. Instead of 6 (see FIG. 169), the interval setting process 7 is executed (S1761) to end this process. The details of the interval setting process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 187.

Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 186) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1631 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1631: Yes), the jackpot end process 6 in the sixth embodiment Instead of (see FIG. 170), the jackpot end process 7 is executed (S1762) to end this process. The details of the jackpot end processing 7 (S1762) will be described with reference to FIG. 188.

Next, the details of the interval setting process 7 (S1761) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 187. In this interval setting process 7 (S1761), first, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the third round (S1801), and if it is determined that it is the end timing of the third round (S1801: Yes), the probability variation solenoid 65k. The operation pattern of (S1811) is set, and the process shifts to S1802. This operation pattern is the same pattern as the interval setting process 6 (see FIG. 169) in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 162 (a)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1801 that it is not the end timing of the third round (S1801: No), the processing of S1811 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S1802. In the process of S1802, an interval period of 3 seconds is set (S1802). Next, an interval command is set (S1807) to end this process.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, 3 seconds (interval period during which V winning is possible) is set regardless of the jackpot type. Therefore, in each jackpot, the player is allowed to win V or not. Can be selected.

The interval period does not necessarily have to be uniform. Similar to the sixth embodiment, the interval A in which the V prize cannot be won and the interval B in which the V prize can be won may be switched according to the jackpot type and the game state at the time when the jackpot is won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the details of the jackpot end processing 7 (S1762) described above will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 7 (S1762).

When this jackpot end process 7 (see FIG. 188) is executed, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1651), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (that is, during the current jackpot). If it is determined that (V winning has occurred) (S1651: Yes), then the probability variation setting table 202m1 is read out from the game state selection table 202m (S1771), and the jackpot type of this time is supported from the read table. The number of probable changes to be performed is specified (S1772). Next, the specified probability variation number is set in the probability variation counter provided in the RAM 203, and the process shifts to S1777.

On the other hand, in the process of S1651, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (that is, no V prize is generated during this big hit) (S1651: No), the game state selection table 202m Among them, the time saving setting table 202m2 is read out (S1774), and the number of time saving times corresponding to the current jackpot type is specified from the read out table (S1775). Then, the specified number of time reductions is set in the time reduction counter 203t of the RAM 203 (S1776), and the process shifts to S1777. In the process of S1777 executed after the process of S1773 or S1776, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off, and this process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end processing 7 (see FIG. 188), it is possible to set an appropriate probability variation number or time reduction number depending on the jackpot type and whether or not a V prize has occurred.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to not generate the V prize than to generate the V prize in some jackpots (big hits H, I). There is. That is, there is a possibility that a big hit will be made again within the time saving number set when the V prize is not generated, rather than a possibility that the big hit will be made again within the probability variation number set when the V prize is generated. The jackpot type is set to be higher. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel playability that allows the player to select whether it is better to win a V prize during the jackpot or not to win a V prize according to the jackpot type. ..

In the seventh embodiment, the number of probable changes is set to 5 times, 10 times, 50 times, and 100 times, but the number of probable changes may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the number of time reductions is not limited to the three types of 50 times, 70 times, and 100 times, and may be arbitrarily determined.

In the seventh embodiment, it is assumed that the probability variation game state ST3 is terminated when the number of lottery of special symbols reaches a specific number of times, and the system falls to the normal game state ST1 (so-called ST type). It is not limited to this. Similar to the sixth embodiment described above, the configuration may be applied to a system (so-called loop type) in which the probabilistic gaming state ST3 continues until the next big hit. In this case, in a part of the jackpot, a probabilistic state is set in which the time saving number is not given when the V prize is won, and the jackpot type which is given a large number of time saving times (for example, 100 times) when the V prize is not won is determined. It may be configured to be. In the probabilistic state where the number of time reductions is not given, the probability of winning the jackpot is high, but while the number of balls consumed before winning the jackpot increases, in the case of the time reduction state where the number of time reductions is large, the probability of winning the jackpot is high. However, if you win the jackpot again within a short time, you can win the prize ball again with almost no reduction in the number of balls you have. Therefore, especially when the jackpot probability differs only twice between the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol as in the seventh embodiment, it is better not to win the V prize (set a large number of time reductions). It is more likely that the result will be favorable to the person. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property that the player can select whether or not to win the V prize according to the jackpot type.

In the seventh embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state of the special symbol is configured to be twice the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. In at least a part of the jackpot, the expected value that will be a jackpot within the number of times that the V prize will not occur is higher than the expected value that will be the jackpot within the probability variation number that is set when the V prize occurs. May be arbitrarily determined as long as is higher. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased. As a specific example, for example, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state of the special symbol may be set to three times the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol. That is, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state may be set to 3/80. Even with this configuration, when the jackpot is H, the number of time reductions of 100 times is set by avoiding the V prize, rather than generating the V prize and setting the probability variation number of 5 times. This is advantageous for the player because the expected value of a big hit within a short time is higher. That is, when the number of probability changes of 5 times is set, the probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot within the number of probability changes is about 17.4% (the probability of losing 5 times in a row in the probability change state (77/80). 5) minus 1). On the other hand, when the time reduction number of 100 times is set, the probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot within the time reduction number is about 71.6% (probability of losing 100 times in a row in a low probability state (79). / 80 to the 100th power) minus 1). Therefore, even if the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state is tripled, if the jackpot is H, it is possible to provide a novel playability that is advantageous to the player by avoiding the V prize.

In the seventh embodiment, the probability variation number of the jackpot type (big hit H, I) and the number of time reductions, which are more advantageous when avoiding the V prize than generating the V prize, are defined in the game state selection table 202m. The content is not limited to the above, and may be arbitrarily determined as long as it is advantageous to avoid the V prize. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be further improved.

In the seventh embodiment, the time-saving game state ST1h and the probability variation game state ST3 are in the same state except that the probability of winning a special symbol is different. That is, in each of the game states, since the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the game efficiency (easiness of reducing the number of balls held) is the same, but the game efficiency is not limited to this. For example, the game efficiency may be higher in the time-saving game state ST1h. Specifically, for example, in the time-saving game state ST1h, a small hit may be won in a part of the case where the special symbol is lost in the lottery. That is, the prize ball may be obtained by opening the first specific winning opening 65a as a part of the deviation. With this configuration, the superiority of the time-saving game state ST1h can be further enhanced, so that the player wants to avoid the V prize during the jackpot and set the time-saving game state ST1h. Can be done.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 to 258. In contrast to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, in the eighth embodiment, the game board 10 is configured with new playability by changing the configuration, the electrical configuration, and the control process.

Specifically, when the jackpot to which the time saving game is given is executed by the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the special symbol is changed and stopped up to a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment). Until then, the time-saving game state (normal symbol fluctuation time is short (normal time 30 seconds is 0.2 seconds in the time-saving game state), and the operating time of the normal electric accessory 640a is long (normal time 0.2 seconds is short). It becomes 2 seconds in the game state), and the number of operations is set to be large (1 time in the normal time is 2 times in the time saving game state).

In the time-saving game state, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 640a makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640a, and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed. In the lottery of the second special symbol, since the small hit is won with a high probability (397/399), the small hit game is set to be easy to be executed. In the small hit game, since the V winning device 650 is opened a predetermined number of times, it becomes easy to win a prize in the V detection switch (V switch 650e3), and when the game ball enters the V switch 650e3, the specific winning opening 65a is opened. The jackpot game that is opened a predetermined number of times is started.

When the game ball enters the V switch 650e3, the jackpot game corresponding to the predetermined jackpot type is executed, and if the jackpot type is given a time-saving game state after the jackpot game, it is set again. During the number of fluctuations, a time-saving game state is given. As a result, the time-saving game state is set again, which makes it easier to execute the lottery with the second special symbol, and by inserting the game ball from the small hit game into the V switch 650e3, the big hit game is performed for a short period of time. It is configured to be executed continuously. If the jackpot type is determined so that the time-saving game state is not given after the jackpot game when the ball is entered into the V switch 650e3, the normal game state is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the game is played at the first entrance 64. The game shifts to a game state in which the ball is inserted and the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, in the normal game state, if the jackpot game in which the time-saving game state is given by the lottery of the first special symbol is won, the jackpot game is likely to be continuously executed in a short period of time. It is configured to transition to a state. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the time-saving game state will be set, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In addition, since the game performance such as a small hit is variable between the normal game state and the time-saving game state, it is possible to make the player execute a game with a fresh taste.

Hereinafter, the details of the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. The illustration and detailed description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted. FIG. 190 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 191 is an enlarged view of an enlarged front view lower right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 192 to 195 are views of the pachinko machine 10. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the V winning apparatus 650 provided in the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 190, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first ball opening 64, a second ball opening 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. , The peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the game board 13 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 190.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 203) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 190) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 190) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

First symbol display devices 37a and 37b including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the upper right side of the game area in front view (upper right side in FIG. 190). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. .. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball opening 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball wins the second ball opening 640, the first symbol display device 37a operates. The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, the jackpot A (4R time saving 1 jackpot (2nd special symbol)) is used as a dedicated jackpot type that is executed when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). Is changed once or the first special symbol is changed 100 times (the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 100 times), and the time-saving game state is given (set) after the big hit until it stops. )), Jackpot B (4R time reduction no jackpot) is set. As a special jackpot type that is executed when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot C (4R no time reduction jackpot) determined in the normal game state (game state without low probability time reduction) ), The jackpot D (4R time-saving one jackpot) determined in the time-saving game state is set.

In addition, in some cases where the lottery result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a loss other than the above-mentioned big hit, the privilege given to the player is less than the above-mentioned big hit (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Benefits to let) Small hits are set. This small hit is set only for the lottery of the second special symbol, and as the type of small hit, small hit A (15R time reduction once when passing V (in the small hit game, V switch 650e3 is used as a game ball). When is passed, the big hit game that continues up to 15R (the small hit game is the 1st R) is executed after the small hit game is executed, and after the big hit game, the time saving game state is set (the second special symbol is 1). (Until the number of times fluctuates or the first special symbol fluctuates 100 times)), small hit B (4R time reduction once when passing V), small hit C (in the small hit game, when the game ball passes the V switch 650e3) There are three types of small hits: a big hit game that continues up to 4R (the small hit game is the 1st R) is executed after the small hit game is executed, and a normal game state is set after the big hit game). ~ C is configured so that the game ball can pass through the V switch 650e3, and is configured so that the game ball can easily pass through the V switch 650e3 in the small hit game. In the present embodiment, all the small balls are configured. The hit type is configured so that the game ball can easily pass through the V switch 650e3, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the V switch 650e3 may be configured to set a small hit type in which the game ball is difficult to pass. In this case, the flow path solenoid 650k is operated in the same opening pattern (same operation timing) from the start of the small hit game in all the small hit types, and the opening pattern (opening timing) of the opening / closing door 650f1 is different. , A fair flow path by setting a small hit type in which the game ball easily passes through the V switch 650e3 and a small hit type in which the game ball does not easily pass through the V switch 650e3. There is an effect that it is possible to switch whether a big hit game is executed or a small hit depending on the operation content of the solenoid 650k.

Specifically, the flow path solenoid 650k is configured to be turned on for a certain period from the start of the small hit game so that the game ball passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e1. Here, in the small hit type small hit game that can pass through the V switch 650e3, the opening pattern in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened is started at the timing when the period in which the flow path solenoid 650k is turned on ends, and V In the small hit type small hit game in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the switch 650e3, the opening pattern in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened is executed from the start timing of the small hit game, and the flow path solenoid 650k is turned on. By configuring so that the opening operation is completed by the end of, the passage to the V switch 650e3 can be easily switched depending on the small hit type. Further, by making the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 the same for each small hit type and different only for the opening start timing, it is possible to suppress the determination of the small hit type from the opening pattern. Furthermore, by adjusting the stop timing of the third symbol, the opening effect, etc., the start effect of the small hit game is executed from the opening start timing of the opening / closing door 650f1, so that the player can determine the small hit type from the effect. Can be suppressed.

The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, the result is indicated. Designs according to the jackpot type and small hit type are shown.

Further, the "time saving game state" is a game state in which the ball easily enters the second entry port 640, although the jackpot probability is the same as the normal state as an added value after the end of the jackpot. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is won. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in this case is set so that the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 640 is longer than in the normal state. In addition, in order to set a game state in which the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640, other configurations may be used, only a part of the above-mentioned setting contents may be used, or the above-mentioned contents may be used. Alternatively, the probability of hitting the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the "time saving game state", the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (total number of fluctuations) or the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol reaches the first predetermined number of times (100 times). It is set while satisfying both the period up to (1st period) and the period until the number of fluctuations of the 2nd special symbol reaches the 2nd predetermined number (1 time) (2nd period). It is configured so that the end condition is satisfied when either the first period or the second period described above is completed, and the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. The total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 100, which indicates the number of times the time-saving game state is set. The time-saving game state is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This is because the number of fluctuations combined with the above is not to exceed 100 times in any state. Unlike the present embodiment, for example, the setting condition of the time saving game state is the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol twice. In the case of, if the setting condition is set to 100 times as the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is one and the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is changed up to 100 times. This is because it is possible to do so, and the total number of times may be 101 times.

In this way, a plurality of end conditions for shifting the game state from the time-saving game state to the normal state are prepared, and when any of the multiple end conditions is satisfied, the time-saving game state is changed to the normal state. By shifting to the state, it is possible to set multiple timings at which the time-saving game state ends, and while making the player excited about how long the time-saving game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state will continue. You can play a game.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of end conditions for the time-saving game state are set for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), but elements other than the number of fluctuations are set to end the time-saving state. It may be set as a condition. For example, the number of times a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery or the number of times the V winning device 650 that operates when a small hit game is executed is a predetermined number of times (for example, once). You may use the fact that you have reached the end condition as the end condition. Further, only a part of the above-mentioned many end conditions may be used, or each may be appropriately combined.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b to form a third. The second symbol is triggered by the passage of a sphere to the third symbol display device 81, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that fluctuates and displays the above is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114, for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. Will be done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 203), whereas the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

That is, the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) in which the first symbol is variably displayed (variable display) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (variable display). (Variable display), and the third symbol is special on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. It is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the symbol.

The third symbol, which is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, may be displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and is a part of the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, a hit / miss determination such as a big hit or a miss). The display mode may correspond to the result only), or the display mode may correspond to the details of the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the type of the winning jackpot). In addition, when there are three types of lottery results (for example, big hit, small hit, and miss) as the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol is the above-mentioned three types of lottery as the display mode of the third symbol. A display mode indicating that the result is one of two specific types (for example, big hit or small hit) may be used.

Further, instead of the display device used in the present embodiment, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. Is to be displayed in a variable manner by alternately lighting the above for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 It is configured to be in operation (protruding) for a predetermined time. Although the details will be described later, the ball can enter the second entry port 640 by changing the electric accessory 640a to the operating state.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the time-saving state (high probability state of the normal diagram) than in the game state of the normal state. As a result, during the time saving state, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal state. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is in the operating state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize in the second entry port 640 during the time saving state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the ball wins the second entrance 640 in the time saving state by using other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the state is easy, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and the electric function for one hit may be set. The opening time and the number of times of opening the object 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

Further, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is changed according to the set gaming state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a are changed, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variation display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the timing, the variation display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the hit is displayed (the hit of the second symbol). It may be configured to determine the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a according to the game state set in the game, that is, the timing of operating the electric accessory 640a). With this configuration, for example, when the second symbol whose fluctuation has started during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a hit during the normal state, the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the normal state can be displayed. It can be operated according to the operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set gaming state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

The relationship between the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be defined other than the above. For example, the fluctuation start timing of the second symbol and the operation of the electric accessory 640a may be defined. When it is determined that the time saving state is set as the gaming state at any one of the start timings, the operating pattern advantageous to the player as the operating pattern of the electric accessory 640a (executed during the time saving state). The operation pattern) may be set.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and flows down the right side of the game board among the balls fired on the game board. A part (almost) of the sphere is configured to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display, and if the winning lottery result is a winning, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is missed. If there is, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84 described above. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of balls at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 203), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 190, in the game in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed game), the first ball entry port 64 is on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can easily enter the game (so-called right-handed game) in which the ball flows down. Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second entry port 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed in order to allow the ball to enter the first entry port 64. To.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first ball entry port 64 when viewed from the front, a second ball entry port 640 in which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 203), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

In addition, the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls (privileges) when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry slot 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry slot 640 are different, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second ball opening 640 may be set to five.

In addition, in the present embodiment, switches (first entry switch, second entry switch) for detecting a ball that serves as a special symbol lottery opportunity (big hit lottery opportunity) are provided in the entry opening. The structure is such that a lottery opportunity for a special symbol can be obtained and a prize ball can be obtained. However, other configurations may be used. For example, an area (gate) through which the ball can pass is provided, and the area (gate) is set. When the switch (detecting means) for detecting the passing ball detects the passage of the ball, it may be configured so that a lottery opportunity for a special symbol can be obtained. In this case, at least a part of the balls that have passed through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special symbol can be entered, and when the balls enter, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls are paid out. It is advisable to provide an entrance. With such a configuration, the number of times the special symbol lottery opportunity is acquired and the number of times the prize ball is acquired can be made different, so that various playability can be provided.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a can be changed into a protruding state (allowable state) protruding from the game board 13 toward the front side (front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 190) and a shunting state (regulated state) with the game board 13 shunted. Normally (when the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in a shunting state (regulated state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, that is, the second symbol. If a winner is won in the lottery of the two symbols, the electric accessory 640a is in a protruding state (allowable state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to enter the second entry port 640.

Here, the ball flow to the second entry port 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 190, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is defined as the left side (left-handed area) of the variable display device unit 80. It is divided into the right side (right-handed area), and the player can adjust the operation amount of the operation handle 51 to divide the destination of the launched ball into the right-handed area or the left-handed area. It is configured in. Hereinafter, the game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot the ball into the left-handed area in the game area is referred to as a left-handed game, and the game in which the ball is fired into the right-handed area is referred to as a right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 190, a lottery trigger for operating the second entry port 640, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640, and the electric accessory 640a. The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is arranged in the right-handed area, and is configured so that the right-handed game is performed when the time saving state is set as the game state.

On the left side of the second entrance 640, a nail is planted to prohibit (suppress) the ball launched by the left-handed game from entering the second entrance 640, and left-handed. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the game. With this configuration, in the left-handed game, in order to change the first special symbol, the ball is made to enter the first entrance 64, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is changed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in which the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640, and it is possible to appropriately provide different game performance depending on the game method.

A nail is planted above the second entrance 640 to regulate the flow of the ball launched by the right-handed game, and the ball is the first when the electric accessory 640a, which will be described later, is not operating. 2 It is configured not to enter the ball entry port 640. Here, the configuration of the game board 13 near the second entrance 640 will be described with reference to FIG. 191.

As shown in FIG. 191 of the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 pass through the region where the electric accessory 640a is arranged and are directed toward the V winning device 650, which will be described later. It is configured to flow down. The second entry port 640 is arranged at a position 30 mm below the ball discharge position 67a of the through gate 67 in the vertical direction and 70 mm to the left in the horizontal direction, and a ball flowing down the through gate 67 can flow down. It is arranged on the left side of the area a (see FIG. 191).

An electric accessory 640a is provided below the through gate 67. The electric accessory 640a has a guided state (protruding state) in which the ball passing through the through gate 67 can be guided to the second entry port 640 and a non-inducing state (evacuation state) in which the ball does not come into contact with the ball passing through the through gate 67. It is configured to be variable to (state).

As shown in FIG. 191, the electric accessory 640a is provided so as to incline downward toward the second entrance 640 side (lower left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 191), and the electric accessory 640a is in a guided state (in a guided state (lower left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 191). The ball that has passed through the through gate 67 during the period of being in the protruding state) is received by the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and then flows down toward the second entry port 640. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 227, but in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is configured to operate continuously for different periods in the gaming state.

Specifically, the operating period of the electric accessory 640a is configured to be 2 seconds in the time saving state and 0.2 seconds in the normal state. The electric accessory 640a is configured such that the flow-down period for the ball to flow down in the region shown in FIG. 191 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (in the present embodiment). 0.4 seconds). With this configuration, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, a normal symbol is won, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the operating electric accessory 640a, the ball is in a state of flowing down. Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed by the time the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second entrance 640, the lottery of the second special symbol is surely executed in the normal state. Can be prevented.

Further, in the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) when the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entry port 640. , The ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second entry port 640, and the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed.

In the present embodiment, the operating period of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state is longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entry port 640. A sufficiently long period (2 seconds) is set to ensure that the ball enters the second entry port 640 when the electric accessory 640a operates, but other than that, for example, the time is shortened. The operating period of the electric accessory 640a in the state is slightly longer than the period (for example, 0) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entry port 640 (0.4 seconds). It may be configured to be .7 seconds). With this configuration, after passing the ball through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the launch of the ball is stopped, and after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has operated, the launch of the ball is started again ( Since so-called stop hitting) can be suppressed, it is possible to continuously perform the right-handed hitting game in a time-saving state and improve the operation of the game.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. As described above with reference to FIG. 191, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down toward the second entry port 640 or the V winning device 650 depending on the operating condition of the electric accessory 640a. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described.

The V winning device 650 is configured to be variably configured into an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small hit", the V winning device is won. The opening / closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is configured to operate so as to be variable to an open state in which a ball can win a prize in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

Further, as will be described in detail later, even in a part of the special symbol "big hit" (big hit D), the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is the same as the case where the above-mentioned "small hit" is won. It is configured to operate in. This makes it difficult to know whether the special symbol "big hit" or "small hit" was won when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 was operated.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 191 to 195. First, as shown in FIG. 191. When the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state in which the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is closed, a ball is configured to flow down on the upper surface thereof. The ball that has reached the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is closed flows down on the opening / closing door 650f1 toward the lower left side (see FIG. 191) and flows out toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in the open state (that is, during the small hit game), the ball wins in the V winning device 650.

In the present embodiment, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is configured to be 0.1 seconds × 12 times, and the V winning device 650 flows down on the opening / closing door 650f1 at the timing of opening. The ball is winning the V winning device 650. The balls that have won the V winning device 650 are configured to flow down on the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652 while being aligned toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 194 (a)). There is. With this configuration, no matter from which position of the opening / closing door 650f1 the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650, the ball can be smoothly inserted. It can be made to flow down.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds, but the opening / closing door 650f1 flows down during the opening period of the opening door 650f1. Other periods may be set as long as the ball in the ball can win the V winning device 650. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened is 12 times in one small hit game, but other times may be set.

Details will be described later, but in the small hit game, the period from the opening of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 once to the next opening (inter-opening interval period) is 5 during the small hit game. After the 10th and 10th opening operations, 5 seconds is set, and at other timings, 0.5 seconds is set. This is to make it easier for the V winning device 650 to win a ball during the period when the small hit game is being performed. Specifically, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect the ball when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small hit game, during the opening interval period after the fifth opening operation is completed. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guidance display that emphasizes and urges the player to play the right-handed game.

Then, even when the right-handed game is started by grasping the game guidance display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between openings is such that the ball can be entered into the V winning device 650. Is set longer than usual. Further, the same control process is also executed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the tenth opening operation during the small hit game is completed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small hit game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, in a specific game (small hit game) in which the opening operation is executed a plurality of times, a part of the interval period between opening is set longer than the others, and it is determined that the proper game is not performed. By making it possible to display a game guidance display for promoting appropriate game contents, it is possible to make a player who is playing an erroneous game play a game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, a special opening interval period longer than the others is set after the fifth and tenth opening operations during the small hit game. By providing the player with a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display during one small hit game in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform an appropriate game. When the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, it is preferable to set at least the notification timing for the second transition to a timing that the player who is normally playing the game cannot reach. That is, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, by continuously performing the right-handed game during the small hit game, at least one ball is inserted in one opening operation of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Since it is configured so that it can be balled, if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the number of winnings (10 pieces), which is a condition for ending the small hit game during the 10th opening operation, is reached. It will be reached and the small hit game will be completed.

That is, the interval period between openings executed after the 10th opening operation during the small hit game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing to display the game guidance display using this timing, an unnecessarily long special opening interval period can be set for a player who is playing a normal game (continuous right-handed game). It will not be executed, and the small hit game can be executed smoothly.

In addition, when the interval period between the first special opening is set to the timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) to reach even if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed as in the present embodiment. The timing when the first special opening interval period starts (the timing when the fifth opening operation ends), or the timing when a predetermined period elapses after the first special opening interval period starts (the fifth opening operation). It is determined whether the V switch 650e3 is detecting the ball at the timing when the period required for the ball entering the ball to be ejected from the V winning device 650 has elapsed), and the V switch 650e3 is detecting the ball. If it is determined, a notification effect for notifying the fact is displayed during the first special opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect the ball, the game guidance display is displayed as described above. It is good to configure it to be displayed. As a result, the special open interval period set during the small hit game can be effectively used according to the content of the game.

Further, in the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the small hit game ends without letting the V winning device 650 win a predetermined number (10) of balls during the small hit game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 192, the V winning device 650 is combined with an opening forming member 650b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 650b to form a V winning device 650. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c to light the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. To open and close the arranged LED substrate 650d, the back cover body 650e that sandwiches the LED substrate 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. A flow formed by an opening / closing unit 650f having an opening / closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 650e and a flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that projects to the road and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is locked to the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, and the back surface thereof. A flow path solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing to the back cover body 650j with screws. It is composed of and.

FIG. 193 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. 193 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 193 (b) is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 193 (b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 193 (b). An inclined bottom surface is formed on the lower left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 193 (b).

As shown in FIG. 193 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the opening / closing door 650f1 having a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is variable to a state and a closed state where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 650c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the V winning device 650 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 and moves to the second entrance 640 side. It is configured to be guided, and even during a short-time game (including during a probabilistic game), it is possible to let the game ball enter the second entrance 640 while hitting right, and immediately after the big hit game. It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the game method to left-handed. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. .. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 193 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 193 (b). As shown in FIG. 193 (a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, a configuration in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 650e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 194 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge port 650e2. As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 650g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 650 g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650 h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650 h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 650 g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 650e2. .. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 650e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. ..

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the big hit game is set after the small hit game by the game ball passing through the above-mentioned V switch 650e3 during the small hit game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting the jackpot game. Further, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which the ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small hit can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow in which the ball cannot pass through the V switch 650e3 (difficult). It is for communicating with any of the paths (normal discharge flow path 650e1), and by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON, the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. The flow path is switched to (see FIG. 194 (b)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during normal game play, so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is configured in. Then, when an illegal state is detected (for example, when it is detected that the opening / closing door 650f1 is open even though the small hit is not won), the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON and the prize is illegally won. It is configured to prevent (suppress) the ball from passing through the V switch 650e3. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the state of being maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. By providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 194 (a)), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

In this way, the game state set after the small hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, so that the player's interest is improved even during the small hit game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening of the V winning device 650 (specific winning opening) to the entrance of the special discharge port 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is at least 1 second. It is configured. With this configuration, even if the opening / closing door 650f1 is detected that the opening / closing door 650f1 has been opened even though the small hit has not been won, and then the flow route of the ball is switched by the switching member 650h, the ball is surely released. It is possible to suppress the situation where the special discharge flow path 650e2 flows down.

Further, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. As a result, it can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the probability change switch 650e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged. The end timing of the small hit game (when the end condition of the small hit game (when the V winning device 650 has a predetermined number (10 pieces) of prizes, or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established). If all the game balls that have entered the V-winning device 650 have not been discharged at the timing when the small hit ending period that is executed after the event has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V-winning device 650 and the outside is determined. It is preferable to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, the winning ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. 10 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection to be configured so that it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, it is possible to sort out whether or not the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed. Can be done. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening (specific area) for granting the jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the structure of the lower surface of the ball flow of the opening / closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 195 (a) is a schematic view of the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 in a plan view in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed. In the opening / closing door 650f1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), the ball reaching the upper surface of the V winning device 650 is a V winning device along the inclination of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 190). It is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650y1 of the 650 through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 and flow down the left upper surface 650y2 toward the variable winning device 65.

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the flow of the sphere, and the sphere is provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1. The flow period is set to 0.6 seconds. This flow period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small hit game. It is configured to be long. With this configuration, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win a prize when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small hit game.

When the small hit game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 195 (a) and the opening / closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 195 (b). FIG. 195 (b) is a schematic view of a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 195 (b), when the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened, it moves so as to evacuate to the inside of the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the upper right upper surface 650y1 becomes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that a winning can be made. Further, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 also wins a prize in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening / closing door 650f1 is located at the shelter position.

Further, in the V winning device 650, no matter from which position the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the ball flow after winning is smooth. 1 regulation member 651 and 2nd regulation member 652 are provided (see FIG. 190), and the balls that have won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a on the upstream side of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 are the 1st regulating member 651 and the first. 2 It is configured so that it is aligned in a row via the regulation member 652 and then flows down toward the detection port 650a1, which is the passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided at a position below the first regulating member, the ball winning vigorously from the opening / closing door 650f1 is directly detected at the detection port 650a1. Since it is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the ball detection switch 650c1, it is possible to prevent the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1 from failing. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652) for aligning the spheres before the spheres pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width equivalent to one sphere is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a ball clogging in the V winning device 650, which hinders the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation is performed in the privilege game (small hit game) given when the judgment result (result of the lottery of the special symbol) of the discrimination means is a predetermined judgment result (small hit). The flow period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down on the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1) is longer than the opening interval period (0.5 seconds) of the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1). Therefore, the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (timing when the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed) during the small hit game is surely made to win the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing. be able to.

Further, even if only the balls flowing down on the variable member are made to win the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, a predetermined number (10 pieces) can be won during the small hit game. Since the number of opening operations (12 times) in the winning game is set to be larger than the number of winning conditions (10) in the small hit game, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short. , A sufficient number of winnings can be secured. In addition, by setting a long opening period, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive number of balls are won by the V winning device 650 during the small hit game.

As shown in FIG. 2, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 203) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 203). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

FIG. 203 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a first frame button 22, a second frame button 23, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating the driving accessory for the effect provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is input from the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 (hereinafter, when both the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 are indicated, it is referred to as a frame button 22). When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the display control device changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the effect content at the time of super reach. Instruct 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive the accessory for the effect (not shown), and the operation content for the frame button 22 is supported. Set an audio output command for outputting audio to the audio output device 226, or set a lamp output command for emitting the lamp display device 227 in a light emitting mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22. It may be configured as.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 203). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right can be displayed. Is displayed. The third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main symbols imitating the numbers "0" to "9". .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variation display is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be changed. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. It is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is fluctuating by making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen). You may try to do it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (the degree to which it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. A small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm. In this small display area Dm2, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the small display area Dm2 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

A small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. The small display area Dm1 is configured so that the variable display of the third symbol can be easily displayed. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm1, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed is executed. If you are. While the display effect is being executed, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm. Further, by simply displaying the variation display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm1 during the execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to continue the variation display of the third symbol. Can be understood.

Further, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. In this sub-display area Ds, a reserved symbol made of a black circle is displayed. As described above, if a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed for the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved balls. In the first embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 4, and the second special symbol is set so that the reserved balls cannot be secured. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds Is displayed with a maximum of four reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is changed according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number. Further, the player may be visually notified of the size of the number of reserved balls by changing the mode of the character according to the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are displayed. An effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button-related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and a hit-related information display mode for displaying information related to the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), but there is no ball in either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entry is made. The variation display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and among the balls that have entered the first entry port 64 and the second entry port 640, the spheres that have not been changed ( This is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of reserved balls). Although details will be described later, the sub-display area Ds is displayed in the first display area Ds1, the second display area Ds2 for displaying the game content and the effect content to the player, and the reserved ball display area. It is divided into an executing area Ds3 that shifts the pending symbol and displays it as an executing pending symbol Dsa corresponding to the fluctuation currently being executed.

The hold symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the hold symbol corresponding to the next change (hold displayed on the leftmost side) when the variable display being executed ends and the next change starts. The symbol Dsb) is erased, and the remaining reserved symbols (Dsc to Dse) are displayed shifted to the left. Then, the deleted reserved symbol Dsb is displayed as the executing pending symbol Dsa in the executing display area Ds3. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of which reserved symbol the variable display being executed corresponds to, so that, for example, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed and the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol can be displayed. When an effect that raises the expectation that the lottery is a big hit (so-called look-ahead effect) is executed, the player can easily determine that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode is changed by the look-ahead effect is executed. Can be recognized.

In the present embodiment, only the ball entering the first ball opening 64 can be held up to 4 times, but the upper limit of the number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of balls to be entered into the second entry port 640 may be set to be held up to a predetermined number, or the upper limit of the number of reserved balls to be entered into the first entry port 64 and the second entry. The upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the ball opening 640 may be different from the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entry port 64, and the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entry port 64 may be set to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the second entry port 640. It may be more than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for, or conversely, it may be less. Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, the effect content displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first special symbol) is triggered by the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of the symbol) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In addition, in the third symbol, the variation display is performed in common with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the second special symbol is configured to be variablely displayed in preference to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to be variablely displayed at the same time. Has been done.

In the present embodiment, as the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the lottery of the special symbol, a continuous effect executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations can be set. In this continuous effect, when a prize information command for indicating various counter values (lottery results) acquired when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the prize information is obtained. The lottery result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the command is displayed in the period until the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed (variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation executed before the target special symbol variation). Is an effect to suggest to the player by using the period during which is executed.

In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol using the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed before the target special symbol, the player can be directed for a longer period of time. Can be provided and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, since the lottery result (for example, deviation) of the special symbol can be continuously produced without highlighting each variation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's motivation to play is reduced. it can.

<About the production of the third design>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 196 to 202, the production of the third symbol in the eighth embodiment and the modified example in the eighth embodiment will be described. First, the production of the third symbol in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 (a) and 198.

In FIG. 196 (a), after the variation display of the second special symbol won in the small hit in the time-saving game state is executed, the variation time of the second special symbol ends and the third symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 of the above. In the third symbol display device 81, a decorative symbol display area Du corresponding to the third symbol is set in the upper left of the main symbol display area Dm, and the decorative symbol composed of two columns is displayed. ing. This decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display) in synchronization with the first symbol, and then stopped and displayed. There are three types of decorative symbols: "black circle" symbol, "black triangle" symbol, and "x" symbol, each of which consists of a row of symbols. As the first symbol (special symbol) starts to fluctuate, 3 at high speed. After one symbol is switched and displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined symbol at the elapsed timing of the fluctuation time (variation period), which is the timing at which the first symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, when the "black circle" symbols are displayed side by side in two rows, it is notified that the lottery result is a big hit, and when the "black triangle" symbols are displayed side by side in two rows, the lottery is performed. It informs that the result is a small hit. In addition, when the stop display is made in other combinations, it is set as a mode for notifying that the lottery result is out of order.

In FIG. 196 (a), it is notified that it is a small hit as a decorative pattern. Further, in the main symbol display area Dm, the third symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed in each symbol row. Further, in the upper right corner, the character "right-handed" is displayed, which suggests to the player to execute the right-handed game in which the game ball is launched so that the game ball passes through the right area of the third symbol display device 81. ..

Here, in the present embodiment, when a big hit or a small hit is made in the time-saving game state, the third symbol is configured to be displayed as a combination of doublet numbers, and among them, "777". When displayed in a combination of symbols, it is possible to pass the game ball through the V switch 650e3 in the small hit game, and it is executed after the small hit game by passing (detecting) the game ball through the V switch 650e3. It is configured to notify early that the time-saving game state will be set again even after the jackpot game to be played. With this configuration, the player is notified that the small hit game that can be passed to the V switch 650e3 is executed before the small hit game is executed, and the small hit game is executed. It is configured so that the player is prepared to enter the game ball into the V winning device 650 and the player cannot miss the opportunity to pass the game ball through the V switch 650e3.

As shown in FIG. 198, when the small hit is determined by the main control device 110 and the variation display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the third symbol is synchronized with the variation in the first symbol. In the symbol display device 81, fluctuations of the decorative symbol (special symbol variation (third symbol)) and the effect symbol (third symbol) are started. As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the decorative symbol is displayed in a high-speed variable display (variable display at a speed at which the type of the variable display symbol becomes difficult to see) in the decorative symbol display area Du, and the main display area. The third symbol (effect symbol) displayed in Dm is displayed by scrolling at a high speed, which makes it difficult to visually recognize the symbol type, after starting the scroll display from the upper direction to the lower direction at a low speed. After the fluctuation time (variation period) determined by the main control device 110 has elapsed, the decorative symbol and the effect symbol are also stopped and displayed in synchronization with the stop display of the first symbol. In this case, the type of effect symbol to be stopped is determined by the determined small hit type. If the small hit types are small hit A and small hit B, the symbol "777" is determined by lottery. On the other hand, if it is a small hit C, a doublet symbol other than "777" is determined and stopped and displayed. As a result, by passing (detecting) the game ball to the V switch 650e3 during the small hit game, the big hit game to which the time saving game state is given is executed (that is, the time saving game state is continuously executed). Is a small hit set after the big hit game), the third symbol of "777" is stopped and displayed, so that the player can know before the small hit game is executed.

Also, even if the third symbol of "777" is not displayed as a stop, if it is a small hit A or a small hit B, the third symbol other than "777" is doublet and stopped by lottery. Therefore, the player is expected to execute a small hit game in which a big hit game is executed, which gives a time-saving game state when the ball is passed through the V switch 650e3. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 198, when the small hit game is started, the V winning opening solenoid 650f2 is activated after the opening time (t1) has elapsed, and after operating for 0.1 seconds (t2), it is turned off. After 0.5 seconds (t3) have elapsed, the operation is performed again for the period of t2, and the operation is repeated 12 times. As described above, after the 5th and 10th opening operations, 5 seconds is set as the interval time of t3. With this configuration, with an open time of 0.1 seconds, the small hit game period is shortened, but the interval period between the 5th and 10th times is long, so the small hit game period can be lengthened accordingly. It is possible to make it easier for a player who is playing a game without noticing the start of a small hit game, or who is playing a game by stopping the launch of a game ball, to perform a small hit game, and win a prize in the V switch 650. It is configured to suppress problems that miss opportunities.

As shown in FIG. 198 (d), the flow path solenoid 650k is maintained in the off state when the small hit A, the small hit B and the small hit C, and V to the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is configured so that the winning game balls flow into the winning device 650. With this configuration, in the 12 opening operations in the small hit game, even one ball can be passed through the V switch 650e3 by entering the game ball into the V winning device 650. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the big hit game is not continuously executed after the small hit game.

FIG. 198 (e) shows an example in which a game ball enters the V winning device 650 and the V switch 650e3 detects the game ball. Further, when the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3, as shown in FIG. 198 (f), after the small hit game is executed, the opening effect of 2 seconds (t6) is performed as the second round (2R). A jackpot game is executed in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened.

Next, a modification 1 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 (b) to 197 and 199. FIG. 196 (b) is an example of an effect example in the time-saving gaming state displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the modified example 1. In the production example shown in FIG. 196 (b), in the time-saving game state, the small hit A or the small hit B is won in the second special symbol, and the variation display period of the second special symbol corresponding to the determination result ends. It is a figure which showed the effect example (the timing of d0 in FIG. 199) of the said timing. Further, FIG. 199 is a timing chart corresponding to FIG. 196 (b) in the first modification of the eighth control example, which is controlled by the first symbol display device 37 and the display control device 114 controlled by the main control device 110. The display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81, the control of the V winning device 650, and the control timing of the first variable winning device 65 are shown.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b), when the variable display period of the second special symbol ends, the “black triangle” indicating that the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area Du is a small hit as a determination result. Stops and displays when getting doublet. On the other hand, in the third symbol (effect symbol) displayed in the main display area Dm, the same symbol type (for example, "4" symbol) is displayed as a stop display or a temporary stop display (for example, for example) in the left symbol column and the right symbol column. Reach to scroll and display the middle symbol sequence in a low-speed display mode by slightly shaking and stopping display, or stopping display mode such as stopping the symbol but flashing the surface of the symbol or gradually changing the color of the symbol. It is displayed in the display mode. The period displayed in this reach display mode is the period during which the small hit game has already started. In this way, the decorative symbol is synchronized with the fluctuation time determined by the main control device 110, and the fluctuation is displayed and the fluctuation is stopped. If the player wants to know the actual fluctuation time, the third symbol It is configured so that it can be known from the display mode of the display device 81.

On the other hand, the third symbol (directed symbol) displayed in the main display area Dm is composed of numerical symbols that are larger and easier to understand (conspicuous) than the decorative symbols, and for the player who plays the game by looking at the third symbol. Can make it seem as if the content displayed in the third symbol (directed symbol) is the variable display period predetermined by the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the third symbol is displayed at a time corresponding to the effect to be displayed regardless of the fluctuation time set by the main control device 110, and the lottery result is notified to the player at the timing according to the effect. It is possible to suppress a bad production and a problem that the meaning of the production is difficult to convey to the player.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b), when the third symbol (directed symbol) is displayed in the reach display mode, the character of "gunman" is displayed in the main display area, and V is determined by the pattern of the cloak of "gunman". An effect suggesting the type of jackpot game to be executed when the switch 650e3 is passed is executed. As shown in FIG. 196 (b), a "fish school" symbol in which a school of fish is scrolled horizontally is displayed as a cloak symbol. This "fish school" symbol is configured to be selectable by lottery when a small hit game of the type of small hit A or small hit B is executed, and is selected when small hit C is executed. It is configured so that it does not occur. With this configuration, by displaying the "fish school" symbol, the player is notified (suggested) at an early stage that the small hit game in which the time saving game state is set after the big hit game is being executed. Can be done.

The timing of d1 in FIG. 199 is the timing at which the operation of the V winning opening solenoid 650f2 is started in the small hit game and the first opening operation is started out of the 12 opening operations in the small hit game. When the game ball enters the V winning device 650 during the period in which this opening operation is being executed, it indicates that the game ball has passed the V switch 650e3 for the first time in the small hit game at the timing shown in d2. At the timing of d2, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), the middle symbol row of the effect symbols (third symbol) displayed in the reach display mode is the same as the reach type (in FIG. 196 (b)). In the example shown, the stop display is performed with the “4” symbol), and the display shown in FIG. 197 (a) is executed. With this configuration, it can be confirmed by displaying the third symbol that the game ball has passed through the V switch 650e3. In addition, the letter "V" is also displayed in the main display area Dm, and the player is notified that the game ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 with a symbol different from the third symbol, so that the player can be more easily understood. doing.

In this modified example 1, the "fish school" symbol is displayed on the cloak to indicate that the time-saving game state is set again after the big hit game to be executed, but the V switch is not limited to this. When the game ball passes through 650e3, the cloak symbol is changed to the symbol "777" and displayed, or the characters "Time saving game mode continuation confirmed" are displayed, and the time saving game state is continuously set. It may be configured to notify that. Further, after the reach display mode is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the doublet hit display mode (4 doublet symbols) shown in FIG. 197 (a) at the timing when the V switch 650e3 is passed, "777" is displayed. (7 doublet symbols) ”may be variably displayed to notify that the time-saving game state is continuously set.

In the first modification, if the "fish school" symbol is not selected by lottery in the small hit A or the small hit B, or if the small hit C is drawn, the V switch 650e3 is passed. The symbols displayed in the reach display mode are stopped and displayed in doublets, and the "fish school" symbol is not displayed on the cloak. As a result, the player is notified that the big hit game is executed after the small hit game by passing through the V switch 650e3, but it is not notified whether the time saving game state is set after the big hit game. However, even when the small hit A and the small hit B are executed, the effect shown in FIG. 197 (b) is selected (executed), so that the player is set to the time-saving game state after the big hit game. You can have expectations for that. In addition to the "fish school" symbol, the cloak color (for example, blue, red, rainbow, etc.) can be changed, or characters such as "chance !!" can be selected and displayed. Has been done. It should be noted that the selected color and characters are configured to represent the degree of expectation of the jackpot type in which the time-saving game state is set. For example, in the case of color, in the case of rainbow, it is confirmed that the time-saving game state is set in the same manner as the school of fish, and in the case of red, the time-saving game state is set after the big hit game with a higher probability than in blue. Is being executed. As the control process, the selection table is set so that the probability of selecting the red or rainbow color is higher in the case of the small hit A or the small hit B than in the case of the small hit C.

In the above modification 1, when the small hit game is executed, the third symbol (effect symbol) is displayed in the reach display mode, and the game ball does not enter (not be detected) in the V switch 650e3 during the small hit game. A symbol different from the reach display symbol (in the example of FIG. 196 (b), the middle symbol row is stopped at a symbol other than 4). This stop display timing (see FIG. 200) is the timing at which the V valid period in which it is determined that the game ball has passed the V switch 650e3 is determined to be valid ends (the timing of d3 in FIG. 199). With this configuration, when the small hit game is executed and the big hit game is not executed after that, the third symbol (directed symbol) is displayed as off (reach out), so that the game It is possible to suppress a problem that causes a person to have excessive expectations. In addition, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that the jackpot game will not be executed, and the game can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner. In the first modification, the player can understand that the game is played by shifting from the right-handed game to the left-handed game in which the game ball is passed to the left side of the third symbol display device 81 to play the game. ..

In this modification 1, even if the small hit game is started, the third symbol (directed symbol) continues to fluctuate, and the big hit game type executed when the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 during that period. By executing the notification that can be identified by, the player can be motivated to pass (detect) the game ball to the V switch 650e3. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the V switch 650e3 loses the opportunity to pass the game ball without noticing that the small hit game has been started and keeping the firing of the game ball stopped.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 201 to 202, the production of the jackpot game in the first modification of the eighth control example will be described. In the first modification, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit but a big hit, an effect is executed as if the big hit game was executed through the small hit game.

FIG. 201A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the timing when the jackpot game is started after the fluctuation time of the second special symbol determined to be the jackpot in the time-saving game state has elapsed. Further, FIG. 202 shows a variation display of the second special symbol and a third symbol display device displayed on the first symbol display device 37 controlled by the main control device 110 corresponding to the variation display shown in FIG. 201 (a). It is a timing chart in the control of the V winning apparatus 650, which is the variation display of the third symbol displayed on 81. The display mode shown in FIG. 201A is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of d0 in FIG. 201.

When the fluctuation time of the second special symbol determined by the main control device 110 elapses, the second special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed, and the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the display. The decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in is also stopped and displayed in a display mode (in this embodiment, the doublet of the black circle symbol) indicating that it is a big hit. The third symbol (directed symbol) displayed in the main display area Dm is displayed in the reach display mode as in the case of a small hit, the character of "gunman" is also displayed, and the "fish school" symbol is displayed on the cloak. It is informed that a time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, the V winning device 650 is opened in the first round of the jackpot game, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. With this configuration, even if the big hit is won, the game is made to make the player think that he has won the small hit game, and the game is passed through the V switch 650e3. It can be done, and it is possible to suppress a problem of getting tired of the game during the big hit game.

As shown in FIG. 202, the third symbol displayed in the reach display mode based on the timing when the V switch 650e3 first detects the game ball (the timing of d2 in FIG. 202) in the first round of the jackpot game. (Direction symbol) is stopped and displayed in doublets, and it is notified that the second and subsequent rounds are also executed (see FIG. 201 (b)). Furthermore, a "fish school" symbol is displayed on the cloak, and it is confirmed that the time-saving game state is set even after the big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the second special symbol, the big hit is not set, and it can be made to think that all the lottery results are small hits. Therefore, in the normal game state, the small hit is not set, and the game can be played in anticipation of the big hit, and when the game shifts to the time-saving game state, it can be reminded that only the small hit is won. It is possible to make the player think that the game is different depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, when the second special symbol is a big hit in the time-saving game state, the big hit type in which the time-saving game state is set is always determined after the big hit game, so that the small hit A and the small hit B are always determined in the actual small hit game. It is possible to make the player think that the small hit A or the small hit B is determined rather than the ratio at which is determined.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 204, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the small hit type counter C5 used for selecting the small hit type of the special symbol. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 232). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da corresponding to entry into the first ball entry port 64, which is composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and this area The first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 are arranged according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Each value is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203da are shifted to the special symbol hold ball execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started. Although the present embodiment does not have a configuration for holding and storing the ball entering the second entry port 640 and a configuration for holding and storing the ball passing through the through gate 67, these configurations are not provided. However, as a predetermined number (for example, four) of holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area or a normal symbol holding ball storage area may be provided.

Subsequently, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 204. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 398), reaches the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 398), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 398, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 398. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 232).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da of the RAM 203 and the special symbol holding ball execution area. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Further, the first random number table 202a is provided with two types, a special symbol 1 random number table 202da1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202da2 for the second special symbol. Although the number of random numbers is the same, the number of random numbers that are small hits is set differently (see FIG. 206 (c)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become small hits different, the degree of expectation for giving benefits (big hits or small hits) to the player can be increased between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Can be different. The special symbol 1 random number table 202da1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202da2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 (a) to 206 (c). FIG. 206 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 206 (b) shows the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random number table 202da1. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, and FIG. 206 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202da2. In the first hit random number table 202da, a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It's a table.

Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the special symbol 1 random number table 202da1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 206 (b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202da1, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and the other values are other than the jackpot (that is, that is). It is stipulated as a judgment value of (out). Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a big hit.

When executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number table 202da2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 206 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202da2, "0 to 1" among the values of the random number counter C1 is defined as the big hit judgment value, and "2 to 398" is the small hit judgment value. Is specified as. Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is determined, and when the value is any of "0 to 1", it is determined to be a big hit, and it is determined to be any of "2 to 398". In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the first special of the RAM 203 is generated at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203da. Further, in a state in which the lottery (variation) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, in a state other than during the change of the special symbol, the big hit game, and the small hit game), the ball is the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball.

Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da or the special symbol holding ball execution area is not a random number determined to be a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol. That is, if it is a random number determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da or the special symbol holding ball execution area is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da or the special symbol holding ball execution area. ..

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 398. In the first random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbols at the time of lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 4" are as described above. It is stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202da1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202da2 of the first random number table 202da. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of random numbers is 399, and the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 5, so the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "5/399".

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the first hit type selection table 202db, and the jackpot type when a jackpot is won is determined. Here, the contents of the first type selection table 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 207.

FIG. 207 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first type selection table 202db. As shown in FIG. 207 (a), in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It has a selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2). .. As a result, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of Special Figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of Special Figure 2 are different, or each of a plurality of types of jackpot types is selected. Since the ratios can be different, it is necessary to provide the player with different playability between the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 used at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 207 (b). FIG. 207 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 207 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A", and any of "50 to 51". If it is, the jackpot type will be "Big hit A resurrection", and if it is any of "52 to 99", the jackpot type will be "Big hit B".

"Big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is set to 4 as a big hit game, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state (the number of time saving times is 1). Since the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, "big hit A" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are random values for which "big hit A" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. The rate at which "big hit A" is selected is 50%.

"Big hit A revival" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 4 as a big hit game and the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state (1 time saving number of times), and the time saving game state is given at the time of the big hit. This is not notified, and the third symbol display device 81 executes a revival effect in which a sound effect and a lamp effect are displayed to indicate that a time-saving game state is given during the jackpot game or at the ending of the jackpot game. It is a jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the type counter C2 can take, there are two random values for which "Big hit A revival" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (Special figure 1) will be a big hit. The rate at which "big hit B" is selected is 2%.

"Big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is four as a big hit game and the game state after the big hit is set to the normal game state (non-time saving state). Since the normal game state is set after the jackpot, "big hit B" is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 48 are random values for which "big hit B" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. The rate at which "big hit B" is selected is 48%.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time is shortened after the jackpot game in 4 rounds of jackpot games at a rate of 52% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). The jackpot type in which the gaming state is set is selected, and the jackpot that shifts to the normal gaming state in which the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is selected at a rate of 48%.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207 (c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 used at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG. 207 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 207 (c), when the normal gaming state is set, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of "0 to 99" in the first hit type counter C2 is ". It becomes a jackpot C ". Further, when the time saving game state is set, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of "0 to 99" in the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit D".

Here, "big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is four as a big hit game and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the normal game state (non-time saving state). Since the normal game state is set after the jackpot, "big hit C" is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 100 are random values for which "big hit C" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. The rate at which "big hit C" is selected is 100%.

"Big hit D" is a big hit type dedicated to the second special symbol, and is a big hit type determined to be a big hit of the second special symbol in the time-saving game state. "Big hit D" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is four as a big hit game and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state (the number of time saving is one). Since the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big hit D" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 100 are random values for which "big hit D" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. The rate at which "big hit D" is selected is 100%.

As described above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot type determined is different depending on whether the normal game state is set or the time saving game state is set. In the normal game state, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entry port 640 in the normal game, there is a high possibility that the game is being executed by an illegal game method. However, in the normal game state, even if the jackpot is drawn by the second special symbol, the jackpot type of the jackpot C for which the time saving game state is not set is determined, so that the problem that the profit on the game store side is excessively impaired is suppressed. it can.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is five, but the number of jackpots is not limited to one, and one type may be used, or six or more types may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if they have the same value of the first hit type counter C2. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more player. You can expect it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of being determined as a jackpot is constant regardless of the gaming state, but the probability is not limited to this, and the probability of winning is set high until the next jackpot after a specific jackpot type. It may be configured to set the gaming state. Further, the high-probability gaming state may be set so as to be set until the fluctuation is executed and stopped at a predetermined number of fluctuations (total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol).

In addition, the type of jackpot type selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (partsper notation) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type It may be configured so that only the range is different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 by aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type when it becomes a small hit of a special symbol, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and determines a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). Within 99), 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the first special of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64. The ball is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203da, and the ball is the first entry port in a state where the special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed (that is, in a state other than during the special symbol change, the big hit game, and the small hit game). It is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the 64 or the second entrance 640.

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the big hit lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type selection table 202de (see FIG. 208 (b)) for determining the type of the small hit to be executed is the main control device 110. It is set in ROM 202 of.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202de will be described with reference to FIG. 208 (b). FIG. 208 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection table 202de. As shown in FIG. 208 (b), in the small hit type selection table 202de, three types of small hits A to C are selected as the small hit types of the second special symbol according to the value of the small hit type counter C5. It is stipulated in. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 19", the small hit type is "small hit A (15R time saving once big hit when passing V)". , The small hit type when it is any of "20 to 89" is "small hit B (4R time reduction once big hit when passing V)", and it is small when it is any of "90 to 99". The hit type is "small hit C (5R time saving no big hit when passing V)".

Here, for each small hit type (small hit A to small hit C), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small hit game, it is executed after the small hit game is completed. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of the small hit A, the 15R time reduction once big hit is set, and after the small hit A is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state (the small hit game is the 1R) is executed. After that, one time-saving game (the period until the special symbol changes 100 times or the second special symbol changes once and is stopped and displayed) is set as the time-saving state. .. Further, in the case of the small hit B, the 4R time reduction once big hit is set, and after the small hit B is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 4R open state (the small hit is the 1R) is executed. After that, one time-saving game (the period until the special symbol changes 100 times or the second special symbol changes once and is stopped and displayed) is set as the time-saving state. There is. In the case of small hit C, 4R time saving no big hit is set, and after the small hit C is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 4R open state (small hit is the 1R) is executed. After the big hit game, the time saving state is not set, and the normal state is set.

In this way, depending on the selected small hit type, the content of the big hit game executed after the small hit game is completed and the game state set after the big hit game can be different. Specifically, the small hit A is the most advantageous for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is large (15R) and the time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the big hit game is completed. It is set as a small hit, and the small hit B is set to be more disadvantageous than the above-mentioned small hit A because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is small (4R), but a time saving state is set after the big hit game. To. The small hit C is set as the most disadvantageous small hit for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is small (4R) and the time saving state is not set after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is once (first end condition), or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is A total of 100 times (second end condition) is set. With this configuration, when the jackpot is won with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being 1 or more and the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set after the jackpot ends. ) Is executed, but the time saving state does not end. Further, when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied and the time saving state can be ended. Therefore, any special symbol (second) during the time saving state can be ended. The special symbol) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is executed by entering the V switch 650e3 via a small hit, the 1R (round) th is executed as a small hit game and the second and subsequent Rs are executed as a big hit game. In the small hit A, a total of 15 rounds of games are executed, but the small hit game is not included in the number of rounds, and the number of rounds set after that (small hit A) is not included. If so, it may be configured to execute the jackpot game of 15R).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 232) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202dd (see FIG. 209 (a)) storing the random value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

Here, the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202dd will be described with reference to FIG. 209 (a). FIG. 209 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the fluctuation pattern table 202dd. As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is used with the normal fluctuation pattern table 202dd1 used in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state and in the state where the time saving state is set. The variation pattern table 202dd2 for shortening the working hours is specified. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different according to the gaming state, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is different. be able to.

FIG. 209 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202dd1 provided in the fluctuation pattern table 202dd. As shown in FIG. 209 (b), in the normal variation pattern table 202dd1, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 209 (b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special 1), the lottery result is "missing", and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". A short deviation of 7 seconds is specified in the range, a short deviation of 20 seconds is specified in the range of "140 to 149", and a fluctuation time is specified in the range of "150 to 179". Is specified in association with various normal reach of 40 seconds, and super reach a with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is specified in association with the range of "180 to 187", and the fluctuation time is 100 seconds in the range of "188 to 194". The super reach b of is specified in association with each other, and the super reach c having a fluctuation time of 120 seconds is specified in association with the range of “195 to 198”.

In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and various normal reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are supported. It is specified by attaching, and the range of "30 to 79" is associated with the super reach a having a fluctuation time of 80 seconds, and the range of "80 to 129" is associated with the super reach b having a fluctuation time of 100 seconds. It is defined that the range of "130 to 189" is associated with the super reach c with a variation time of 120 seconds, and the range of "190 to 198" is associated with various special reach with a variation time of 140 seconds. ing.

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special 2) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 180 in the entire range. If the long deviation of seconds is specified and the lottery result is "big hit or small hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 180 seconds long in the entire range. The deviation is regulated.

In this way, any fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and a command indicating this fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. By doing so, the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the right-handed game is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is configured so as not to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game in which a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game in which a lottery for the first special symbol is executed is performed. The case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state configured in this way is a case where the player illegally enters the ball into the second entrance 640, and therefore the normal state. As for the fluctuation of the second special symbol in, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the second special symbol is illegally drawn in a short period of time. If it is determined that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol has been executed during the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is illegally performed using the period (180 seconds) until the lottery result is displayed. It may be configured to notify the outside that (variation) has been executed. In addition, when the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is illegally executed, the result of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol that is illegally executed is forcibly executed as a result of the lottery (variation). It may be configured to be created and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 209 (b), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202dd1 is 7 seconds (selection ratio is 7 seconds) when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order. Approximately 70%), 40 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 15%), 20 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 5%), 80 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 4%), 100 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 3.5%) , 120 seconds (selection ratio is about 2%), and it is stipulated that the selection is facilitated. If the lottery result is a big hit, 120 seconds (selection ratio is about 30%), 80 seconds (selection ratio is about 25%), 100 seconds (selection ratio is about 25%), 40 seconds (selection ratio is about 25%). It is stipulated that selection is facilitated in the order of 15%) and 140 seconds (selection ratio is about 5%).

In this way, the lottery result of the special symbol and the selected fluctuation pattern (variation time) are related, and the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the special It is configured so that the jackpot expectation degree when a specific fluctuation time (variation pattern) is selected can be suggested by the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the symbol is out of order. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot is won according to the selected fluctuation time (variation pattern).

In the present embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table is used regardless of the winning jackpot type, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player. A different variation pattern table may be used depending on whether the jackpot type is a jackpot type or the jackpot type indicates other jackpots (big hit B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the other jackpots is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the advantageous jackpot (big hit A) is won. It is preferable to configure it so that the time fluctuation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the fluctuation time set in the execution fluctuation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to the player. Therefore, the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is won is easier to select the fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. This can be configured to provide the player with surprising gaming results when the jackpot is won in a short variation time, even when a short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

Next, the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202dd2 provided in the variation pattern table 202dd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving variation pattern table 202dd2. As shown in FIG. 210, in the time saving variation pattern table 202dd2, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 210, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "off", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198". That is, when an ultra-short deviation of 0.5 seconds is specified for the entire range and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, all. An ultra-short deviation of 0.5 seconds is specified in the range. If the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2) and the lottery result is "out of", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time is 0 in the entire range. .If the ultra-short hit of 5 seconds is specified and the lottery result is "small hit", the short and small hit with a fluctuation time of 1 second is specified, and if the lottery result is "big hit", the fluctuation type counter CS1 A short jackpot with a fluctuation time of 1 second is defined in the range of "0 to 149", and a medium jackpot with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range of "150 to 198".

Return to FIG. 204 to continue the description. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202dc stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202dc. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the hit set by, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol).

When the sphere passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 executes the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for 30 seconds. If the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired as shown in FIG. 208 (a) is in the range of "0 to 238", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. , The symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state, the second entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when it hits a normal symbol, but the opening time And the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

When the ball passes through the normal start port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving gaming state, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the variation display of the normal symbol is 3 on the second symbol display device 83. Runs for seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-238" (see FIG. 208 (a)), it is determined that the player has won, and the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed. Later, a symbol "○" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the second entrance 640 is opened. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance 640 is opened only "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "1 second x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 232).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 204, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 204, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 232) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 231) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 205 (b), the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203db, a time saving / medium total counter 203dc, a jackpot start flag 203dd, and a jackpot middle flag 203de. , Small hit start flag 203df, small hit medium flag 203df, V passing big hit type storage area 203dh, V flag 203di, time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj, V passing flag 203dk, and other memory area 203z.

As shown in FIG. 204, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first ball entrance. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired based on the entry into 64 is stored. ..

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting prize), the values of the counters C1 to C3, C5, and CS1 are acquired, and the acquired data are four. Among the vacant areas of the hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the first special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are set. It is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

Then, when the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the second special symbol, the counters C1 to C3 are at the timing when the ball enters the second entry port 640 (starting prize). , C5, and CS1 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored as it is in the special symbol holding ball execution area.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the normal symbol (second symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing when the ball passes through the normal start port 67. Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored as it is in the special symbol holding ball execution area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is a variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the third symbol display device 81 (variable display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203db is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added up to 1 (see S644 in FIG. 225). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S215 in FIG. 221).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203db (the number of holdings N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S216 in FIG. 221 and FIG. 225). (See S645). The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 by the special figure 1 hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203db is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls in the variable display itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the fluctuation display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The time-saving / medium-time total counter 203dc is a counter for totaling the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed during the time-saving state and counting up to 100 times. The time-shortening-medium total counter 203dc is set to 0, which is the initial value when the jackpot is won (see S227 in FIG. 221), and is set to 100 when the jackpot ends (see S1534 in FIG. 233). Then, 1 is subtracted each time the fluctuation of the special symbol ends during the time saving state (see S522 in FIG. 224). The value of the time-saving and medium-time total counter 203dc is referred to when determining whether or not the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been subtracted to 0 (S527 in FIG. 224). : Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S528 in FIG. 224).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition), or the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is configured so that the time saving state ends when any of the conditions that the number of fluctuations of the symbol reaches 1 (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether or not the first end condition is satisfied. The time-saving and medium-time total counter 203dc is used to determine. The value of the time saving / medium total counter 203dc is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the remaining time saving number command (see S525 in FIG. 224). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203dc is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 is the number of remaining fluctuations until the first end condition of the time saving state is satisfied by the remaining time saving number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the time saving medium total counter 203dc is changed. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of remaining time reductions managed by the game state storage area 223i of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of remaining time fluctuations counted by the time reduction / medium total counter 203dc of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if it does, the deviation can be corrected by the next received short-time remaining time command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining time reduction number based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203dc described above, that is, the first time reduction state. Information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is not transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because, when a normal game is being played, the time saving state is set to shift to the normal state when the second ending condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and the first ending condition is set. The second end condition is satisfied in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations until the establishment is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the situation where the time saving state ends is suppressed.

The jackpot start flag 203dd is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a jackpot stops, the jackpot start flag 203dd is set to ON (S226 in FIG. 221). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203dd is on and it is determined that the jackpot start timing is reached, it is set to off (S1523 in FIG. 233). The jackpot start flag 203dd is set to off in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and maintain the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned off.

The jackpot middle flag 203de is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (S226 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed), it is set to off (S1527 in FIG. 233). This jackpot middle flag 203de is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to.

The small hit start flag 203df is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S424 in FIG. 223). When it is determined that the small hit start flag 203df is on and it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off (S1543 in FIG. 234). This small hit start flag 203df is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to be.

The small hit medium flag 203 deg is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S424 in FIG. 223). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to off (S1557 in FIG. 234). This small hit medium flag 203 deg is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to be.

The V-passing jackpot type storage area 203dh contains data for determining the jackpot type that is set when the ball that has won the V winning device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 when the small hit game is being executed. It is a storage area to be stored. In the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203dh, when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit stops, the data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type is stored (FIG. 223). S422). When a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203dh. 203di is configured to be set on. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the V-passing large hit type storage area 203dh is configured to be cleared. This V-pass jackpot type storage area 203dh is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. Is configured to be held by.

The V flag 203di corresponds to the type of small hit game being executed when a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3. The flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set to on. At the end of the small hit game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203di is on (S1552 in FIG. 234), and when it is determined that the V flag 203di is on (S1552: Yes in FIG. 234), it is set to on. The type of jackpot to be executed is determined from the flag being set, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (S1553 in FIG. 234). This V flag 203di is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured as follows.

The time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state up to one time. At this time, the time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj is set to 0 which is the initial value when the jackpot is won (see S227 in FIG. 221), and is set to 1 when the jackpot ends (see S1534 in FIG. 233). Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol ends during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S524 in FIG. 224). The value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj is referred to when determining whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been subtracted to 0 (FIG. 224). S526: Yes), a normal state is set as the gaming state (S528 in FIG. 224).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition), or the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is configured so that the time saving state ends when any of the conditions that the number of fluctuations of the symbol reaches 1 (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether or not the second end condition is satisfied. The time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj is used to discriminate. The value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the remaining time saving number command (see S525 in FIG. 224). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203dc is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining time reduction number of times based on the remaining time reduction number of times command, but the remaining time reduction number of times command corresponding to the value of the time reduction medium special 2 counter 203dj described above, that is, the time reduction state first. 2 It is configured to transmit information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied to the display control device 114. This is because, when the normal game is performed, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state by satisfying the second end condition of the time saving state, and the player is asked. This is to provide an easy-to-understand game by displaying the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the time saving state on the third symbol display device 81.

The V-passing flag 203dk is a flag used to determine the state in which the V-flag 203di is set to ON during the small hit game, and is set to ON when the V-flag 203di is set to ON. Will be done. In the present embodiment, most of the balls that have won the V winning device 650 during the small hit game are configured to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2, and correspond to the balls that first win the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is set to ON in the V-pass processing (see FIG. 230) (S1147 in FIG. 230).

Then, in the V-pass processing (see FIG. 230), it is determined whether the V-pass flag 203dk is set to ON (S1141 in FIG. 230), and if it is determined that the V-pass flag 203dk is set to ON (S1141: Yes in FIG. 230). ), The processing of S1142 to S1148 of the V-passing processing (see FIG. 230) is skipped. As a result, even when the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small hit game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process executed during the small hit game, and the V-pass command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 a plurality of times, so that the V-pass management on the voice lamp control device 113 side is complicated. Can be suppressed.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 205. The MPU 201 of the main control measure 110 is equipped with a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and the ROM 202 has at least the above-mentioned first random number table 202da and first hit. In addition to the type selection table 202db, the second random number table 202dc, the variation pattern table 202dd, and the small hit type selection table 202de, the open scenario table 202df is stored.

Here, the contents of the open scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the open scenario table 202f. The open scenario table 202f is a winning device (variable winning device 65) capable of entering a ball in a privilege game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. , V winning device 650) is defined as operation data (opening scenario) for differentiating the opening operation according to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type).

In this way, the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the opening operation content (opening scenario) that are opened according to the winning result (big hit or small hit) and the hit type (big hit type, small hit type) ) Can be set differently to set the degree of advantage of the award game in multiple stages, so even after winning a big hit or a small hit, it is possible to entertain the player with which type of win was won. it can.

In the open scenario table 202df, the start interval period during the winning game corresponding to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device). And the opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds of one opening operation (round game), total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (between round games). The period during which the winning device set to is closed) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special symbol change is allowed). )) And are specified respectively.

Specifically, the winning type corresponds to the jackpot A, the start interval period is "2 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65" for "15 rounds", one round. As a game, the opening operation mode of opening "continuously for 29 seconds" is defined as "1 second" as the inter-round interval period and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Therefore, if the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpot A, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. .. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the jackpot A is a jackpot in which a time saving state is set, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, jackpot A is given the privilege that is most advantageous to the player. It is a big hit to be done.

Next, the hit type corresponds to the jackpots B and C, and the start interval period is "2 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65" as "5 rounds" and one round game. The opening operation mode for opening "continuously for 29 seconds" is defined as "1 second" as the inter-round interval period and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpots B and C, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds is executed, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed for the player. It will be a big hit game in which about 1/3 of the prize balls are paid out. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, a time saving state is set, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends. Since it is configured, the jackpot B is a jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and is given a privilege that is more advantageous than the jackpot C.

Corresponding to the jackpot D, the winning type is "1 second" as the start interval period, and the "V winning device 650" is opened to the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, and the "variable winning device 65" is opened. Is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round game, in the first round, "0.1 seconds open is opened 12 times with an interval between openings of 0.5 seconds", and 2 to In the 15th round, the opening operation mode of "continuously opening for 29 seconds" is "10 seconds" after the end of the first round as the interval period between rounds, "1 second" in other cases, and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Is stipulated.

That is, although the details will be described later, the start interval period of the jackpot D, the period until the second round is executed (the content of the first round game (opening / closing operation mode), and the interval between rounds after the end of the first lined). The content specified in (Period) is configured to be the same as the content specified in the small hit game described later. With this configuration, whether the hit game being executed this time is a big hit game or a small hit game is determined until the timing when the first round ends (if it is a small hit game, the small hit game ends). It can be difficult for the player to grasp (until the timing of the game). As a result, it is possible to provide a surprising winning game to a player who has won a small hit and recognized that the small hit game is being executed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when a jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and most of the lottery of the second special symbol is set to win a small hit. (See FIG. 206 (c)). Therefore, during the period in which the time saving state is set as the game state and the change of the second special symbol is mainly performed, some hit game is started after the change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, regardless of whether the jackpot is won or the small hit is won, which hit (big hit or small hit) is won by the player in order to execute the winning game starting from the same opening operation. Can be made difficult to grasp.

In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be lower than the case of winning the small hit, and after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot D is completed, the probability is set to be lower. It is set to give a time saving state. Therefore, the player who wins the big hit will not be provided with more disadvantageous benefits than when he wins the small hit, so that the player can play a surprising game (a big hit game corresponding to the big hit D). Since it can be a game that is advantageous to the player, the player can be more excited.

It should be noted that, in the case where the big hit D is won and the case where various small hits are won, the same effect mode is executed as the variation display (variation effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, the stop display timing of the special symbol and the display on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. The stop display timing of the third symbol is different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol are synchronized, but the display of the third symbol is displayed at the stop display timing or the period before and after that stop display timing. In order to make it more difficult for the player to identify other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period, the display mode and the display area are changed, and the display mode and the display area are displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 at the stop display timing of the special symbol. It is advisable to switch the symbol of No. 3 from the third symbol to the normal symbol for production corresponding to the variable display of the ordinary symbol.

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when the winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are arranged apart from each other, and the stop display timing of the special symbol (at any hit). At the timing of notifying the player of the winning, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display that draws the player's attention to the V winning device 650, or the first symbol display device 37a, as in the present embodiment. It is preferable to make the display area of 37b smaller than the display area of the third symbol display device 81 so that the first symbol is harder to see than the third symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit or a small hit by the stop display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and the big hit continues even during the hit game. You can expect to win.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 211. In addition to the small hit game (1 round game), the V switch 650e3 detects the ball during the small hit game to specify the hit type corresponding to the small hits A to C. The opening scenario of the jackpot game (2 to 15 round games) that is continuously executed after the end is also specified. As a result, it is possible to reliably associate the winning small hit type small hit game content with the large hit game content that can be executed after the small hit game is completed, so that an appropriate game can be provided.

Specifically, for the small hit type A, the start interval period "1 second" and the opening operation mode "V winning device 650" of the winning device "1 round" are opened as the small hit game. Round game "0.1 seconds open 12 times", interval period between openings "0.5 seconds (interval between openings 1) other than after the end of the 5th and 10th openings", the end of the 5th and 10th openings After that, 5 seconds (interval between openings 2) ”is specified.

Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game is completed, the "variable winning device 65" is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and one round game "continuous opening for 29 seconds" is performed during the interval period between rounds. As a result, "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are specified.

Further, for the small hit types B and C, the start interval period "1 second" and the opening operation mode "V winning device 650" of the winning device are opened once for "1 round" as the small hit game. Round game "0.1 seconds open 12 times", interval period between openings "0.5 seconds other than after the 5th and 10th openings (interval interval 1)", after the 5th and 10th openings 5 seconds (interval between openings 2) ”is specified.

Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game is completed, the "variable winning device 65" is opened in the "2nd to 5th rounds", and one round game "continuous opening for 29 seconds" is performed during the interval period between rounds. As a result, "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are specified.

That is, the jackpot game that can be executed after the small hit game corresponding to the small hits B and C is set so that the number of round games is smaller than that of the jackpot game corresponding to the small hit A described above. Further, when the small hit type is small hit B, a time saving state is set, which is a game state advantageous to the player after the corresponding big hit game is completed, and in the case of small hit C, after the corresponding big hit game is completed. Since the time saving state is not set, the small hit B is a small hit that is more disadvantageous than the small hit A and is given a privilege that is more advantageous than the small hit C.

Returning to FIG. 203, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. The large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side, the V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and the switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650 are driven. A solenoid 209 composed of a flow path solenoid 209a for driving a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To do.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and the frame button 23, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content at the time of super reach, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 213. As shown in FIG. 213, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223da, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db, a fluctuation start flag 223dc, a stop type selection flag 223dd, an effect counter 223de, and other memories. Area 223z is provided at least.

The prize information storage area 223da has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223da, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db is a variation effect (and a third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db of the main control device 110. (Variation display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db holds the first special symbol. It is designed to manage the number of balls.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203db of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db (see S2277 in FIG. 238). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223db according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203db.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223db, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223db, a display reservation ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display hold ball number command, the display control device 114 holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223db of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The information included in the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device may be information indicating the actual number of hold balls, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203a, or the special symbol hold ball number counter. Information indicating that the value of 203a has been added or subtracted by 1 may be used. When transmitting information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a has been added or subtracted by 1 as the reserved ball number command, it is included in the reserved ball number command received by the voice lamp control device 113. A calculation means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved balls may be provided based on the information obtained.

The variation start flag 223dc is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2272 in FIG. 238), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2512 in FIG. 241). When the variation start flag 223dc is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S2162 in FIG. 237) of the main process (see FIG. 237) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223dd is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2321 in FIG. 239), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2517 in FIG. 241). When the stop type selection flag 223dd is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223de is a counter used for scoring effect and various lottery, and although not shown, it is 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 237) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. It will be updated one by one. In the present embodiment, the effect lottery counter 223f1 used as the effect counter 223de at least for determining whether or not the score effect is executed, and the score distribution effect counter used for selecting the total score to be given during the score effect. (Not shown) and the score used when selecting the score to be displayed in one variable display (the total of the points given in the multiple score giving effects executed in one variable display). It has a scoring effect counter (not shown), and each counter is configured to update within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) without synchronization.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, as described above, during the normal game state (during the normal state), the left-handed game is performed and the special 1 game aiming at the first entrance 64 is executed. Will be done. Here, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game state shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the winning jackpot type.

Specifically, if the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the jackpot ends. Later, it is configured to shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second entry port 640 to execute a lottery for the second special symbol, and if a big hit is won, the normal game state is always set after the big hit is completed. doing. This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 190, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not (difficultly) enter the second entrance 640 even if the right-handed game is performed during the normal gaming state. Therefore, the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state is regarded as a fraudulent act, and measures are taken to prevent the player who committed the fraudulent act from playing an advantageous game. Is. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to allow the player to perform a lottery (game) that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving state. Therefore, there is a risk that the second special symbol will be drawn by cheating. Therefore, by taking the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being performed due to fraudulent acts.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball can be easily entered into the second entry port 640 by the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640. Therefore, a right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second entrance 640 is executed.

Here, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small hit game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball to make a big hit. The game is started. Here, depending on the winning small hit type, the game state shifts to a different game state after the big hit ends. Specifically, when the small hit type of the winning small hit is small hit A or small hit B (90% of the total), the time saving state is set again after the big hit ends, and the small hit type is small hit C. In some cases, it is configured to transition to the normal gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In other words, once the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot ends with a probability of about 90%, so that it is possible to easily continue the game state that is advantageous to the player and improve the interest of the game. it can. If a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is always set after the big hit is completed. Further, even if a big hit is won by a lottery of the first special symbol during the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is always set after the big hit is completed.

This is, for example, in a normal game state in which a left-handed game is performed, when a jackpot is won with the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 being the upper limit, and a time-saving game state is set after the jackpot ends, the time-saving game During the state, a lottery of the first special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball of the special figure 1 may be executed. In this way, when a big hit is won by the reserved ball of Special Figure 1 (winning information that the winning is in the normal gaming state, but the timing when the lottery is actually executed is the shortened gaming state), the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. If a possible configuration is used, there is a problem that the player who has struggled to shift to the time-saving game state is dissatisfied. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantageous.

Further, in the present embodiment, since "the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is one" is provided as a part of the end condition of the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is one. The game state is also changed from the time-saving game state to the normal game state (when the second special symbol change of the first rotation is completed during the time-saving game).

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 219. FIG. 214 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S7102 in FIG. 243) executed after the boot process (see S7101 in FIG. 243) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 219) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 244 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S7103 and S7104 in FIG. 243).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 shows the power-on displayed by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 215 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (displays of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 sees FIG. 215 (b). As shown in FIG. 215 (c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, the image of the fluctuation when the power is turned on with the “○” symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and “○” as shown in FIG. 215 (c). At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 215 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", FIG. 215 (c). The image shown in is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 215 (b) and 215 (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 214, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 216, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 216 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of rear images and a range of rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 216 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 216 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” with respect to the back surface A corresponding to the “sandy beach stage”.

As shown in FIG. 216, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 sets the range between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 216 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "sandy beach stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sandy beach stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" is resident only in a part area of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 216 (a) to 216 (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b (or the image between FIGS. 216 (a) and 216 (b)) including the initial position is transferred to the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. It can be displayed. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 214) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 214, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the serial error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A to D. If either is the case, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time saving period of this ordinary symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the second entrance 67, so that the lottery of the ordinary symbol will be held more often, and there will be more chances of winning the ordinary symbol. Become. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory to be released as a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, and a lottery for the special symbol becomes easier to be performed. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal pattern, and the ball enters the second ball. The easier it is to enter the ball mouth 640, the more prize balls will be. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls held is difficult to decrease or the number of balls held is not reduced even when the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the player can perform the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays either back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or a back different from back A and B. It contains information that identifies whether to display the image. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A and B, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image of the back surface A or B corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 217) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 219) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 218). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 218).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 218, in the example of FIG. In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 219) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 218, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 215 (a) to 215 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 243) (see S7105 in FIG. 243). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S7305 in FIG. 244 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S7301 in FIG. 244 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S7308 in FIG. 244 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 244 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 244 (b) see S7309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 245 to 252) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 253 to 255) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7651 in FIG. 256 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 256B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 257) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 219), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 219) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 219) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 244 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7555 in FIG. 255) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 219) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 219. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 219, a back image and a third symbol (designs 1,) used in the image of one frame. Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 244 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7357 in FIG. 253). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S7102 in FIG. 243) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S8163 in FIG. 257). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S8164 in FIG. 257). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7752 in FIG. 258).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 244 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S7752 in FIG. 258).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 220 to 234. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S111). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S112). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S113). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (999, 99, 239, 99, respectively in this embodiment) is reached, the value is cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S114). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S115). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 221 to 226.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S116), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S117). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 227 and 228. After executing the through gate passing process, the V entrance passing process accompanying the entry of the ball into the V winning device 650 is executed (S118). After that, the V passing process associated with winning the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S119). The details of the V-entrance passing process and the V-passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 229 and 230.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S120), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S121) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S114) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 221. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S114). This special symbol variation processing (S114) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 220), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S211). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S211: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

Unless it is a big hit of a special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S212), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. If the aspect is not changing (S212: No), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second entry port 640 (S218).

When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second entry port 640 (S218: Yes), the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5. Each value is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S219). Next, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S220), and end this process. The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 222.

On the other hand, in the processing of S212, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is not changing (S212: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db. Is acquired (S213). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is larger than 0 (S214). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is 0 (S214: No), the process proceeds to S218.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203db is not 0 (S214: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203db is subtracted (S215) and calculated. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the changed value (N1) of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203db is set (S216). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S216, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is shifted (S217). After that, the process of S220 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S212, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S212: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S221). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S221: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S221, if the fluctuation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S221: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (S222). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S220) described later with reference to FIG. 222. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. More specifically, depending on the value of the random number counter C1 per first, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and when it is a big hit of the special symbol, it is determined. , The jackpot type (big hits A to D) is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. If it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are formed of a plurality of LEDs, and when the lottery result is a big hit, the combination of the LEDs to be turned on is different to identify each big hit type (big hits A to D). It is configured to be displayed as possible. When the lottery result is other than the big hit (small hit or miss), the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b may be turned on in the same display mode. Further, the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S222 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a big hit of a special symbol (S223). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S223: Yes), an opening scenario of a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S224), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S225). Next, the jackpot start flag 203dd and the jackpot medium flag 203de are set to ON (S226), the time saving / medium total counter 203dcd and the time saving / medium special 2 counter 203dj are set to 0 (S227), and the process proceeds to S228. In the process of S228, a stop command is set (S228), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S223, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S223: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S229).

In the process of S229, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S229: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S230), and then the time saving number update process is executed (S231). ), The process of S228 described above is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S229, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S229: No), the small hit start setting process (S230) is skipped and the time saving number update process is executed (S231). .. Next, the process of S228 is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, when a small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the small hit start setting process (S230) is executed and then the time saving number update process (S231) is executed. Therefore, the big hit game is completed after the small hit game is completed. If is not executed, the time saving state will end. Therefore, when the small hit type is identified when the small hit is won, and the small hit type is disadvantageous to the player, the V winning device 650 is not allowed to enter the ball. Since the time saving state ends after the small hit game ends, it is possible to prevent an illegal game from being performed.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S220) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S220). This special symbol change start process (S220) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 221) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), and is a process of the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203da. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit" or "special symbol miss" is performed, and the first symbol display device. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. Each value of the type counter C5 is acquired (S311). Next, the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S312). Specifically, in the case of a lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entry port 64, the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the special symbol 1 random number table 202da1 (see FIG. 206 (b)). The random number value stored in is compared to determine whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entry port 640, the value of the first random number counter C1. And the random number value stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202da2 (see FIG. 206C) are compared to determine a big hit or a small hit.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S313). When the lottery result is a big hit (S313: Yes), the big hit type is acquired based on the big hit type selection table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S314). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S311 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202db1 or the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202db2. It is determined what type of jackpot is among the jackpots (big hits A to D) of the four types of special symbols (see FIG. 207 (b) or (c)).

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

Then, the display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the special symbol type and the jackpot type is set (S315). In the process of S315, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to D). Further, the jackpot type (big hits A to D) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S316), and the process proceeds to S323. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S316, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the acquired special symbol type, lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202dd1 or the time saving variation pattern table 202dd2. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined (FIG. 209 (b) or FIG. 210).

In the process of S323, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S316 is set (S323). Next, a stop type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S315 is set (S324). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are stored in the external output process (S1411) of the main process (see FIG. 232) described later, in which the voice lamp control device is used. It is transmitted toward 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S324 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 221).

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S313: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S317). When the lottery result is a small hit (S317: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S318). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the processing of S311 is compared with the random number value stored in the small hit type selection table 202de, and the small hit (small hit) of three types of special symbols is compared. Of A to C), it is determined what the small hit type is (see FIG. 208 (b)).

Next, the display mode at the time of a small hit corresponding to the special symbol type and the small hit type is set (S319). After that, the small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S320). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S316, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the normal variation pattern table 202dd1 or the time saving variation pattern table. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202dd2 (FIG. 209 (b) or FIG. 210). Next, the processes of S323 and S324 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 221).

In the processing of S323 and S324 in this case, the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (see S320) and the stop type (see S319) set when the lottery result of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Is set.

When the lottery result is not a small hit (S317: No), the display mode at the time of deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S321). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disengagement is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S322). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S316, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the normal variation pattern table 202dd1 or the time saving variation pattern table. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202dd2 (FIG. 209 (b) or FIG. 210). Next, the processes of S313 and S314 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 221).

Next, the small hit start setting process (S230) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 223. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S230). This small hit start setting process (S230) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 221) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), and is a small hit type (small hits A to C). It is a process for setting the start of the small hit game based on.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the small hit game is started, the V winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which a ball can win (easily), and the ball winning the V winning device 650 is in a specific area (V). By passing through the winning switch 650e3), the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed.

That is, in the game state in which the small hit game is executed, the ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (the prize ball can be obtained), and the big hit game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a high probability.

In the small hit start setting process (S230), first, an opening scenario corresponding to the small hit type is set (S421). After that, the jackpot type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203dh (S422).

Next, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S423), and the small hit start flag 203 df and the small hit medium flag 203 df are set on (S424). After that, this process ends.

Next, the time saving number update process (S231) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 224. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the time saving number update process (S231). This time reduction number update process (S231) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 221) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), updates the time reduction number of times, and sets the game state to the normal state. This is the process for setting to.

In the time reduction number update process (S231), first, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203dc is larger than 0 (S521). If it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium total counter dc is not a number larger than 0 (S521: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving / medium-time total counter 203dc is larger than 0 (S521: Yes), then the value of the time-saving / medium-time total counter 203dc is subtracted by 1 (S522). It is determined whether it is the special figure 2 (S523). When it is determined that the fluctuation this time is the special figure 2 (S523: Yes), the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj is subtracted by 1 (S524), and the process proceeds to S525. On the other hand, in the process of S523, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the special figure 2 (special figure 1) (S523: No), the process of S524 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S525.

In the process of S525, the remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction medium counter (time reduction medium total counter 203dc and time reduction medium special 2 counter 203dj) changed by the calculation is set (S525). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1441) of the main process (see FIG. 232) described later, the voice lamp control device. It is transmitted toward 113.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj is 0 (S526), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj is not 0 (S526: No), then the time saving medium It is determined whether the value of the total counter 203dc is 0 (S527). If it is determined in the process of S527 that the value of the time-saving / medium-time total counter 203dc is not 0 (S527: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S526, it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium special 2 counter 203dc is 0 (S526: Yes), or in the processing of S527, it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium total counter 203dc is 0. In the case (S527: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S528), and this process is terminated.

Next, the start winning information processing (S115) will be described. First, the start winning process (S115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 225. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S115). This start winning process (S115) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing for their values.

When the start winning process (FIGS. 225, S115) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S641). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S641: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N1) is acquired ( S642). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S643).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S641: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is If it is not less than 4 (S643: No), the process proceeds to S647. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S641: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is less than 4 (S643: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is added by 1 (S644). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203db changed by the calculation is set (S645).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1441) of the main process (see FIG. 232) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203db from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223db.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S645, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 updated in S113 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of is stored in the first area of the free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da of the RAM 203 (S646). In the process of S646, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set, and if the value is 3, the fourth held area is set as the first area.

Then, in the process of S647, the look-ahead process is executed (S647). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, a look-ahead process (S647), which is one process in the start winning process (see S115 in FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S647).

In this look-ahead process (FIGS. 226 and S647), it is first determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entry port 64 (S711). As a result of the determination, if there is no new prize in the first ball opening 64 (S711: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 (S711: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202da1, the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202db1, and the variation pattern selection table 202d (normal variation pattern). Based on the table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table 202dd2), the lottery result, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern are acquired in advance (S712).

Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S712 is set (S713), and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S116) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S116). This normal symbol variation process (S116) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric motor associated with the second ball inlet 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

In this ordinary symbol variation processing (FIG. 227, S116), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S821). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Includes being in the middle of being. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S8211: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S8211: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S822), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S822: No), it is determined whether or not the second hit random number counter is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S823), and if it is not stored (S823: No). , Ends this process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second hit random number counter is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S823: Yes), the value of the stored second hit random number counter C4 is acquired (S824).

Then, based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S824 and the random number table 202c per normal symbol (second), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S825). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202dc. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 238", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "239", it is out of the normal symbol. (See FIG. 208 (a)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the process of S825 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S826), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S826: Yes), it is a hit. The time display mode is set (S827), and the process proceeds to S829. In the process of S827, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S826, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S826: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S828). In the process of S828, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S829.

When the processing of S827 or S828 is completed, in the processing of S829, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S829), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S829: Yes). , The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S830), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S829: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S831), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S822, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S822: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S832). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S830 or the process of S831 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the S832 process, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S832: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S832, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S832: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S833). In the process of S833, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S827, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S828, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S833, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1418) of the main process (see FIG. 232) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S827 or S828.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIGS. 227, S116) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S834). If the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S834: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery this time is a hit of the normal symbol (S834: Yes), it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S835).

In the processing of S835, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S835: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the opening period thereof is set to 0.2 seconds. The number of times of opening is set to 1 (S836), and the process proceeds to S837. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state of a normal symbol (S835: Yes), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 times. (S837), and the process proceeds to S838. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the normal state of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the 2 winning openings 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S838, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is set (S838), and this process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S838, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1416) of the main process (see FIG. 232) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S836 or the process of S837 are completed.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S117) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S117). This through gate passing process (S117) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), determines whether or not the ball has passed at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 228, S117), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S921). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S921: Yes), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S922). If the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S922: Yes), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S922, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is not changing (S922: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S923). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S923: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S923: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S113 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S924). After that, this process ends.

Next, the V inlet passing process (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing a V inlet passing process (S118) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220).

In the V inlet passing process (S118), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passing sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S1041). If it is determined in the process of S1041 that the ball passing sensor is not on (S1041: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1041, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S1041: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 650a is in the opening period (S1042).

In the process of S1042, when it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is in the opening period (S1042: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S1043), and this process ends. The V inlet passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1411) of the main process (see FIG. 232) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 197).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is not open (S1042: No), it means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is issued. Set (S1044). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is set (S1045), and this process is completed.

Next, the V-passing process (S119) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S119). This V-passing process (S119) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220).

In the V-passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the V-passing flag 203dk is on (S1141). If it is determined in the process of S1141 that the V passage flag 203 dk is on (S1141: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1141, when it is determined that the V passage flag 203dk is not on (S1141: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passage (S1142). That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S1142, if it is determined that V has not passed (S1142: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S1142, if it is determined that V passage is present (S1142: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V passage is in the valid period (S1143). If it is determined that the V-passing valid period is in progress (S1143: Yes), the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203dh is acquired (S1144), and the acquired V-passing jackpot type is acquired. The V flag 203di indicating the above is set to on (S1145). Then, the V passage command is set (S1146).

Next, the V passage flag 203dk is set to ON (S1147). After that, the time saving medium total counter 203dc and the time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj are set to 0 (S1148), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1143, if it is determined that the V passage valid period is not in effect (S1143: No), an error command is set (S1149), and this process is terminated. If the game ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 when the V is not valid, it is considered that the ball is illegally won in the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1415, an error output is executed and a fraudulent act can be detected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1311). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1312). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1313).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 203) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1314), and if it is turned on (S1314: Yes), the process shifts to S1325. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1314: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1315), and if it is not stored (S1315: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1325 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1315: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1316), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1317: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1315 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1425 in FIG. 232, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1315, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1325). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1326, S1327) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S132, S1327) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1326, S1327) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1256, S1327), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1326), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1327). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1320.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1314: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1315: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1314: No). S1317: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1318). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1319), and the process proceeds to S1320. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1320, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the value of the time saving medium counter (time saving medium total counter 203dc and the time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj) is read (S1321), and the state command based on the read value is set (S1322). Then, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to off (S1323). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1324), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S141 to S1418 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1421 and S1422 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 232), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1411). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S111 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 220) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the special figure 1 reserved ball count command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 221) and the start winning process (see FIG. 225) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 233) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1412). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1413), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed and the response is made. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the winning opening (specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is executed (S1414). In the jackpot control process, the winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) corresponding to each round of the jackpot state is opened, and the corresponding winning opening (first variable) is opened. The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650) has passed. It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have won a prize in the V winning opening 650a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1414) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 232), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220).

Next, in the case of a small hit state of a special symbol, various effects are executed according to the small hit, and the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening of the V winning device 650). A small hit control process for opening or closing 650a) is executed (S1415). In the small hit control process, the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the corresponding winning opening (first variable) is opened. The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650) has passed. It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have won a prize in the V winning opening 650a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1415) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 232), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220).

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S1416). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S837 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 227), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S835 or the processing of S836 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S1417). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S316, S320 or S322 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 222), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start with devices 37a, 37b. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S316, S320 or S322 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 222) ends, the first symbol display device The stop symbol (first symbol) is set to the first stop symbol (first symbol) in the display mode set by the processing of S315, S319 or S321 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 222) after ending the variation display executed in 37a and 37b. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1418). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S830 or the process of S831 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 227), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S833 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 227), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) in the display mode set by the processing of S827 or the processing of S828 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 227). To do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1419), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1419: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1420). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1420: Yes), the process is shifted to S1411, and each process after S1411 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1420: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1421, S1422).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1421). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1412 (S1422).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S141 to S1418 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1419, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1419: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 43 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1423 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1423), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1424). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1425), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1426), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1419 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S141 to S1418, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1421 and S1422 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1411. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1411 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1311) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1411 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1414) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 233. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1414). This jackpot control process (S1414) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 232), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects corresponding to the jackpot are executed and corresponding. This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the jackpot control process (FIGS. 233 and S1414), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1521). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203dd is set to ON by the processing of S226 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 221), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1521, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1521: Yes), the opening command is set (S1522). Then, the jackpot start flag 203dd is set to off (S1523), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1521, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1521: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1524). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1524, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1524: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1524, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S1524: Yes), the process of S1525 is executed. In the process of S1525, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1525). If it is determined in the process of S1525 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1525: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65) is based on the open scenario table 202df. The V winning opening 650a) of the winning device 650 is opened (S1526), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1527). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1411) of the main process (see FIG. 232) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the continuous jackpot is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, the display round number command according to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the cumulative number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1525, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1525: No), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S1528). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or , When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) are won in the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1528, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1528: Yes), the corresponding winning opening is satisfied. The opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed (S1529) to end this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S1528: No), the ending effect is started. It is determined whether it is the timing (S1530). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as.

If it is determined in the process of S1530 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1530: Yes), the ending command is set (S1531), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1411) of the main process (see FIG. 232) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1530 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1530: No), it is determined in the process of S1530 whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1532). If it is determined in the process of S1532 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1532: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1532, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1532: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is the jackpot C (S1533). In the processing of S1533, if it is determined that the hit is not C (4R time saving no big hit) (S1533: No), 100 is set in the time saving medium total counter 203dc and 1 is set in the time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj (S1534). The process proceeds to S1535. On the other hand, in the processing of S1533, if it is determined that the jackpot is C (4R time saving no jackpot) (S1533: Yes), the processing of S1534 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1535.

In the process of S1535, a state command corresponding to the state after the big hit is set (S1535). Then, the end of the jackpot is set (S1536), the jackpot middle flag 203de is set to off (S1537), and this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process (S1415) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S1415). This small hit control process (S1415) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 232), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit state of a special symbol, various effects according to the small hit are executed and the response is made. This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the small hit control process (FIGS. 234 and S1415), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1541). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203df is set to ON by the processing of S424 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 223), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1541, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1541: Yes), the opening command is set (S1542). Then, the small hit start flag 203df is set to off (S1543), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1541, if the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S1541: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1544). As for the small hits of the special symbols, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the small hits of the special symbols (including during the small hit game of the special symbols). Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol. In the process of S1544, if it is not during the small hit of the special symbol (S1544: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1544, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the small hit (S1544: Yes), the process of S1545 is executed. In the process of S1545, it is determined whether or not it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1545). When it is determined in the processing of S1545 that it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1545: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202df (S1545: Yes). S1546), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1545, if it is not the V winning opening opening timing (S1545: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1547). Specifically, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening scenario set corresponding to the small hit game is completed, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) are won in the V winning device 650. To determine.

If it is determined in the processing of S1547 that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1547: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning of the V winning device 650) is determined. The mouth 650a) is closed (S1548) to end this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S1547: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1549). In the process of S1549, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1549: Yes), the ending command is set (S1550), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1411) of the main process (see FIG. 232) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1549 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1549: No), it is determined in the process of S1551 whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1551). If it is determined in the process of S1551 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1551: No), the valid period monitoring process (S1558) is executed to end this process. The details of the validity period monitoring process (S1558) will be described later with reference to FIG. 235.

On the other hand, in the process of S1551 when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1551: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203di is set to ON (S1552), and it is determined that it is set to ON. If this is the case (S1552: Yes), an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203di is set (S1553), the jackpot start flag 203dd and the jackpot medium flag 203de are set to on (S1554), and the V flag is set. The 203di is set to off (S1555), the V-passing flag 203dk is set to off (S1556), the small hit medium flag 203dg is set to off (S1557), and this process is terminated.

Next, the validity period monitoring process (S1558), which is one process in the small hit control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 235. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing this validity period monitoring process (S1558). This validity period monitoring process (S1558) is executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 234), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hit state of a special symbol, the start or end of the valid period of the V prize is started. This is a process for setting.

In the validity period monitoring process (FIGS. 235 and S1558), first, it is determined whether the value of the V validity period counter 203 dm provided in the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S1561). That is, it is determined whether or not the V validity period is in effect. When it is determined that the value of the V validity period counter 203 dm is larger than 0 (S1561: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the V validity period is in progress, the value of the V validity period counter 203 dm is subtracted by 1. S1562). Next, it is determined whether the value of the V validity period counter 203 dm subtracted by the process of S1562 is 0 (S1563). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the V valid period. When it is determined that the value of the V valid period counter 203 dm is 0 (S1563: Yes), the V valid end command is set (S1564), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1561 when it is determined that the value of the V valid period counter 203 dm is 0 (S1561: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the V valid period (S1565). When it is determined that it is the start timing of the V validity period (s1565: Yes), the counter value corresponding to the V validity period counter 203 dm is set (S1566), the V validity period start command is set (S1567), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the process of S1565, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the V valid period (S1565: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 236 to 241. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S2061). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing (S2178 in FIG. 237) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of (S2061). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 237, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (S2175: Yes in FIG. 237), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2178. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2062 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2062: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2178 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2063).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2066. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2063: Yes), the process proceeds to S2064 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2063: No), the process proceeds to S2068.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2063: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2064. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1516 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2063: No), and the process proceeds to S2068.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2062: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1516, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2064 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2064, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2064). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2065: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2066). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2065: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2067), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S2068, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2068). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2178 is executed (see S2177 of FIG. 237). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2178 is executed, the process of S2068 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2178 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2068: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2069), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2070), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S2071) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2068 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S2068 is performed via the processes of S2064 to S2066. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2068: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2069, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2070, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2070), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S2071), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S2069 is that when the processing of S2068 is reached via the processing of S2064 to S2066, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2064. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S2161 this time was executed (S2161), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2161: No), the process proceeds to S2173 without performing the processes of S2162 to S2172. In the process of S2161, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S2162 to S2172 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2173 and the variation display setting process of S2174 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2173 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2174 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S2161 (S2161: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2163 to S2172 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2162). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2168 described later (S2163), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2164). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2165 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2165, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2166). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223db.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2167). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame buttons 22 and 23 (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22) operated by the player in order to enhance the effect of the effect are pressed, and the frame button This is a process for setting the effect corresponding to the case where the input of 22 is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2168), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2169). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2169, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2170). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2168 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2169 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2170), various counter update processes (S2171) are executed. The various counter update processes are processes for updating the values of a plurality of counters of the effect counter 223de provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter is updated every 1 millisecond in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. Here, a method of updating a plurality of counters included in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.

In the present embodiment, when setting the effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the values of a plurality of counters are referred to. In such a configuration, for example, if the values of all the counters are updated by 1 each time the various counter update processes (S2171) are executed, that is, if the update method of each counter is unified, the update of each counter is performed. Since the condition is synchronized and there is a problem that it is not possible to give randomness to the set effect mode, the updated values of the counters are configured not to be synchronized.

After finishing the various counter update processes (S2171), the effect update process (S2172) is next executed. This effect update process (S2172) is for performing a process for changing the content of the effect (already set variable display) currently being executed during the effect execution. The details of this effect update process (S2172) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

After the effect update process (S2172), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2173). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 238.

Next, the process proceeds to S2174. In the process of S2174, the variable display setting process is executed (S2174). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 241.

Then, when the variable display setting process (S2174) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2175). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2175 (S2175: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S2177), and the power-off process is executed (S2178). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2179), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2175 (S2175: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2176), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2176: No), the process returns to the process of S2161, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2176: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2173) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 238. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2173). This command determination process (S2173) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 237) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .. Further, in this process, when the winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the score effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process (FIG. 238, S2173), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2271). When the variation pattern command is received (S2271: Yes), the variation start flag 223dc provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2272), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2273). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 241) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S2271: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2274). Then, when the stop type command is received (S2274: Yes), the stop symbol processing (S2275) is executed, and the process returns to the main processing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 239, a stop symbol process (S2275), which is one process in the command determination process (S2173) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol processing (S2275). The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 241) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

In the stop symbol processing (S2275), first, the stop type selection flag 223dd provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2321). Next, it is determined whether the stop type command received this time is a stop type command corresponding to either the small hit A or the small hit B (S2322). When it is determined that the received command is a stop type command corresponding to the small hit A or the small hit B (S2322: Yes), the stop type including the V winning confirmation symbol (in this embodiment, the hit symbol of 777). (All winning symbols including) are determined and set by lottery (S2323), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2322, when it is determined that the received stop type command is not the stop type command corresponding to the small hit A or the small hit B (S2322: No), the received stop type command becomes the small hit C. It is determined whether the command is the corresponding stop type command (S2324). When it is determined that the received stop type command is the stop type command corresponding to the small hit C (S2324: Yes), the stop type of the winning symbol other than the V winning confirmation symbol (that is, the winning symbol excluding the winning symbol of 777) The design) is determined by lottery (S2325). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the received stop type command is not the stop type command corresponding to the small hit C (S2324: No), it is determined whether the received stop type command is the stop type command corresponding to the big hit. (S2326). If it is determined that the received command is not the stop type command corresponding to the jackpot (S2326: No), the stop type of the outlier symbol corresponding to the variation type is set (S2327), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a stop type command corresponding to the jackpot (S2326: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is the jackpot B (S2328).

If it is determined that it is not the jackpot B (S2328: No), the winning symbol is determined by lottery, the corresponding stop type is set (S2329), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2328, when it is determined that the jackpot is B (S2328: Yes), a stop type other than the V winning confirmation symbol is set (S2330), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 238. On the other hand, in the process of S2204, when the stop type command is not received (S2274: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command is received from the main control device 110 (S2276). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S2276: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203db of the main controller 110 ( The number of holdings N1) of the variation display in the special symbol is extracted, and this is stored in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223db of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2277). Further, in the process of S2277, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223db is set. After the processing of S2277 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the processing of S2277 of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223db of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203db of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is awarded. At the time of detection or lottery of a special symbol, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223db of the voice lamp control device 113 may be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203db of the main control device 110. it can. When the process of S2278 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223db is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S2276, when the hold ball number command is not received (S2276: No), then it is determined whether the hit-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2278), and the hit-related command is executed. If it is determined that the command has been received (S2278: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S2279), and this process is terminated. This hit-related process (S2279) is for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a big hit game or a small hit game that is executed when a big hit or a small hit is won as a result of a special symbol lottery. Processing is performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

Here, the contents of the hit-related processing (S2279) will be described with reference to FIG. 240. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related processing. When this hit-related process (S2279) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S2421). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S2421: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S2422), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2162) of the main process (see FIG. 237) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2421: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2423). If it is determined that the round number command has been received in the process of S2423 (S2423: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S2424), and this process ends. In the present embodiment, since the main control device 110 transmits information indicating the number of rounds as the number of rounds command, the number of rounds command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, the voice lamp control device is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started from the main control device 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

In the process of S2423, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2423: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received next (S2425). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the process of S2425 (S2425: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S2426), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S2425 that the jackpot end command has not been received (S2425: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S2427).

If it is determined in the process of S2427 that the small hit start command has been received (S2427: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set based on the small hit type (S2427), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S2427 that the small hit start command has not been received (S2427: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S2429). In the process of S2429, when it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S2429: Yes), a small hit end command for display is set (S2430) in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hit game. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2429, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2429: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S2431). If it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received in the process of S2431 (S2431: Yes), the display V entrance passage command is set (S2432), and this process ends. Further, in the process of S2431 when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S2431: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received next (S2433).

In the process of S2433, when it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2433: Yes), a display V effect command for indicating an effect based on the ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set (S2433: Yes). S2434), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2433, when it is determined that the V passing command has not been received (S2433: No), then it is determined whether or not the V valid end command has been received (S2435). When it is determined that the V valid end command has been received in the process of S2435 (S2435; Yes), it is determined whether the V has passed (S2436). That is, it is determined whether or not the V switch 650e3 has detected the sphere. When it is determined that V has passed (S2436: Yes), the display V end command is set (S2437), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2436, when it is determined that V has not passed (S2436: No), a non-V valid end command for display is set (S2438), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V valid end command has not been received (S2435: No), this process ends as it is.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 238. In the process of S2278, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2278: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2280). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2280: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S2281), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2280: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2282), and this process is terminated.

Next, the variation display setting process (S2174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2174). This variation display setting process (S2174) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 237) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223dc provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2511). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223dc is not on (that is, it is off) (S2511: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2516. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223dc is on (S2511: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223dc is set to off (S2512), and then in the processing of S2273 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 238), the fluctuation starts. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the pattern command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2513).

Then, it is generated based on the variation pattern type in which the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is acquired and the score effect mode set in the effect setting process, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S2514). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. When the processing of S2514 is completed, the data in the winning information storage area 223da is shifted (S2515), and the process shifts to the processing of S2516.

After executing the process of S2511 or the process of S2515, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223dd is on (S2516). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223dd is not on (that is, it is off) (S2516: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223dd is on (S2516: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223dd is set to off (S2517), and the stop type extracted in the stop symbol processing (see FIG. 239) is set. (S2518), a display stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted in the process of S2518 (S2519), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 258. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 242, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S7001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S7001) will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S7001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is followed by 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S7101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S7102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S7101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S7102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S7102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S7103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S7104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S7001 in FIG. 242) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S7002 in FIG. 242) (S7105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S7001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 242, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S7101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S7101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S7102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S7103 to S7105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S7101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S7101. And, after repeating the process of S7102 a plurality of times, the processes of S7103 to S7105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S7103 to S7105 may be executed without performing the processes of S7101 and S7102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 242. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S7002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S7003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S7003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S7004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S7004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S7005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 256A) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7652 in FIG. 256A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 244 (b)), the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on (not shown), which are images at power-on, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S7308 in FIG. 244 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S7309 in FIG. 244 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image (not shown) at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. be able to. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S7005, the interrupt permission is set (S7006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S7006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 244 (a). FIG. 244 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S7201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 244 (b). FIG. 244 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 219) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 244 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S7301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (see FIG. 215) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S7302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S7303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S7302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 245 to 252.

In the display setting process (S7303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S7302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 253 to 255.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S7304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S7303) or the simple display setting process (S7309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S7305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is scored. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S7306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S7305), which are determined in the task process (S7304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 219 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 258.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S7307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S7307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to D, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete off, chance eye). ) Is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 215) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S7308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S7309) is executed to display the S7304. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 245 to 252, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S7302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 245, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S7401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S7401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S7401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S7303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S7402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S7403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S7404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S7404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S7405), the process returns to the process of S7401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S7405) will be described with reference to FIG. 246 (a). FIG. 246 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S7501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S7501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S7503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S7504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S7505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S7504, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S7502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S7503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 245. In the processing of S7404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S7404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S7406). If there is a display variable type command (S7406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S7407), and the process returns to the process of S7401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S7407) will be described with reference to FIG. 246 (b). FIG. 246 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S7601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 244 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S7602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S7602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned on. (S7603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S7602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S7304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S7602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S7603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but the character ROM 234 is used as a normal video before drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S7601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S7602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 245. In the processing of S7406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S7406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S7408), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S7408: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S7409), and the process returns to the process of S7401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S7409) will be described with reference to FIG. 247 (a). FIG. 247 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7653) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7701). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A, B), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to on (S7702), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S7701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S7702. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back side A or B according to the back side type of the back side image specified in the display data table, the back side image discrimination flag set by S7702 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7702, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 245. In the processing of S7408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S7408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S7410), and there is an error command. If (S7410: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S7411), and the process returns to the processing of S7401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S7411) will be described with reference to FIG. 247 (b). FIG. 247 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to on (S7802), and the error command is performed. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7801, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7802, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 245. In the processing of S7410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S7410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S7412), and there is a hit-related command. If (S7412: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S7413), and the process returns to the process of S7401.

Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S7413) will be described with reference to FIG. 248. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing hit-related command processing. This hit-related command processing executes processing corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hit-related command processing (S7413 in FIG. 248), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S7901). If it is determined in the process of S7901 that there is a hit start command for display (S7901: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S7902), and the process proceeds to the process of S7903.

Here, the details of the jackpot start command processing (S7902) will be described with reference to FIG. 249 (a). FIG. 249 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S7902). This jackpot start command process (S7902) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 248) that there is a jackpot start command for display, and a third effect suggesting the start of the jackpot is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot start command processing (S7902), first, the jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8001). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8002). After that, based on the jackpot start display data table, the time data is set to the time counter 233h (S8003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S8004), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S8005). This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command in the process of S7901 (S7901: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7903. When the processing of S7901 or S7902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S7903). If it is determined in the process of S7903 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S7904), and the process proceeds to the process of S7905.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S7904) will be described with reference to FIG. 249 (b). FIG. 249 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command process (S7904). This round number command process (S7904) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 248) that a display round number command has been received, and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying the effect of the command on the third symbol display device 81.

In the round number command processing (S7904), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S8102), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S8103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S8104), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S8105), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S7903 that there is no display round number command (S7903: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7905. When the processing of S7903 or S7904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S7905). If it is determined in the process of S7905 that there is a jackpot end command for display (S7905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S7906), and the process proceeds to the process of S7907.

Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S7906) will be described with reference to FIG. 250 (a). FIG. 250A is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command process (S7906). This jackpot end command process (S7906) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 248) that a jackpot end command has been received, and a third effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot end command processing (S7906), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8201). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S8202), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S8203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S8204), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S8205), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command in the process of S7905 (S7905: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7907. When the processing of S7905 or S7906 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit start command for display (S7907). If it is determined in the process of S7907 that there is a small hit start command for display (S7907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S7908), and the process proceeds to the process of S7909.

Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S7908) will be described with reference to FIG. 250 (b). This small hit start command process (S7908) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 248), and suggests the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit start command processing (S7908), first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8301). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8302). After that, the time data is set to the time counter 233h (S8303) based on the small hit start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized (S8304), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S8305). , End this process.

Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S7907 that there is no small hit start command for display (S7907: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7909. When the processing of S7907 or S7908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit end command for display (S7909). If it is determined that there is a small hit end command in the process of S7909 (S7909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S7910), and the process proceeds to the process of S7911.

Here, the details of the small hit end command processing (S7910) will be described with reference to FIG. 251 (a). This small hit end command process (S7910) is a process executed when it is determined that a small hit end command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 248), and suggests the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit end command processing (S7910), first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S8402), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S8403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S8404), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S8405), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S7909 that there is no small hit end command for display (S7909: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7911. When the processing of S7909 or S7910 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S7911). If it is determined that there is a V entrance passage command in the processing of S7911 (S7911: Yes), the V entrance passage command processing is executed (S7912), and the process proceeds to the processing of S7913.

Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S7912) will be described with reference to FIG. 251 (b). This V-entrance pass command process (S7912) is a process executed when it is determined that a V-entrance pass command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 248), and the V-winning device 650 has a V-winning position. This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed through the switch 650e3.

In the V entrance passage command processing (S7912), first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S8502), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V inlet passage display data table (S8503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S8504), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S8505), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display V entrance passage command in the process of S7911 (S7911: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7913. When the processing of S7911 or S7912 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S7913). If it is determined that there is a V effect command in the process of S7913 (S7913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S7914), and the process proceeds to the process of S7915.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S7914) will be described with reference to FIG. 252 (a). This V effect command process (S7914) is a process executed when it is determined that a V effect command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 248), and there is a high probability that a jackpot game will be granted. This is a process for displaying the effect suggesting that the third symbol display device 81.

In the V effect command processing (S7914), first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8601). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S8602), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S8603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S8604), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S8605), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display V effect command in the process of S7913 (S7913: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7915. When the processing of S7913 or S7914 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V valid end command (S7915). If it is determined that there is a V valid end command in the process of S7915 (S7915: Yes), the V valid end command process is executed (S7915), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S7913, if it is determined that there is no display V valid end command (S7915: No), this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the V valid end command process (S7916) will be described with reference to FIG. 252 (b). This V valid end command process (S7916) is a process executed when it is determined that a V valid end command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 248), and the V valid period ends. This is a process for displaying an effect suggesting that the probability is high on the third symbol display device 81.

In the V valid end command process (S7916), first, the V valid end data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S8702), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V valid end data table (S8703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S8704), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S8705), and this process ends.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 245. If it is determined that there is no hit-related command in the process of S7412 (S7412: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S7414), and the process returns to the process of S7401.

In the processing of S7401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S7401: Yes). ), The processing of S7402 to S7414 is executed again. Then, the processes of S7401 to S7414 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S7401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S7309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 244 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image (see FIG. 218) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 246 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 246 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 246 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S7501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S7502, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 253 to 255, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S7303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 253, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7351), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7351: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S7352 to S7354 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7355. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S7351: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7352), S7353 to S7354. Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7353, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7353). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7353: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7354).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be turned on is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7451).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7451, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7452), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 253. After the warning image setting process (S7354) or in the process of S7353, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7353: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7355.

In S7355, the pointer update process is executed (S7355). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7551). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7551, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7552). As a result, if it is End information (S7552: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7553), and if it is a demo display data table (S7553: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7554), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7555), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7553, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7553: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7553: No). S7556), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7552, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7552: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 253 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7356). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7356 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7357), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7358). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7358: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7358: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S7359).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7359: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7360), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7361). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7362), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7363). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7364), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7365), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7365 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S7304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7365, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7359, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7359: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7366). If the demo display flag is off (S7366: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S7367) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7368). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7369). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7370), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7371), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7366, if the demo display flag is on (S7366: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S7309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 244 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting the display data table, which specifies that the display data table (not shown) is to be stopped and displayed, in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S7305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 256A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7651). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7651: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S7652), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 256 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S7651 (S7651: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7653), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 257.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7652), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S7305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 256 (b). FIG. 256B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7652).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S8051), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S8051: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S8052). In the process of S8052, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S8052 that the transfer process has not been completed (S8052: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S8052: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S8053. Further, as a result of the processing of S8051, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S8051: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S8053.

In the processing of S8053, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S8053), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S8053: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S8054), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S8053 (S8053: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S8055), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 244 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S7308 in FIG. 244 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S7309 in FIG. 244 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 245 to 252) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 253 to 255) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set to draw the image. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 257) (see S7651: No in FIG. 256 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7653), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S7305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 257. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7653).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7355) of the display setting process (S7303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S8151). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S8152), and if it is the transfer data information (S8152: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S8153) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S8154), and the process proceeds to S8155.

Further, in the process of S8152, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S8152: No), the processes of S8153 and S8154 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S8155. In the process of S8155, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S8155), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S8155: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S8156).

In the process of S8156, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S8156 that the transfer process has not been completed (S8156: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S8156: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S8157. Further, as a result of the processing of S8155, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S8155: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S8157.

In the process of S8157, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S8157), and if the transfer start flag is on (S8157: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S8158), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S8153 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S8163. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S8157: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S8159). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S8159: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S8159: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S8160), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S8161). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S8162), and the process proceeds to the process of S8163.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S8161, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S8163, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8163). The discrimination in the processing of S8163 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S8163, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8163: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S8163 (S8163: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S8164). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S8164, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S8165), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S7306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S7304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S7305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 219 is generated (S7751). That is, in the processing of S7751, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S7304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S7305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S7752). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S7752 (S7753). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 244 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

In the first modification of the eighth embodiment described above, in the process of S2323 of the stop symbol processing (FIG. 239, S2275) in the eighth embodiment, the reach symbol type is determined by lottery and the third symbol "7" is used. The reach display mode of the symbol is also set. Further, one notice display mode in which the character's cloak includes a school of fish is determined and set from a plurality of notice display modes (a plurality of notice modes having different cloak designs are set). On the other hand, in the case of a small hit C, symbols other than the reach symbols of the 7 symbols are determined by lottery. Furthermore, the notice display mode of the cloak pattern other than the fish school pattern and the rainbow color is determined by lottery. In addition, as a stop display mode of the decorative symbol, a stop display mode corresponding to a small hit is set. Then, in addition to the processing of S2434 of the hit-related processing (FIG. 240, S2279) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display command for stopping and displaying the middle symbol with the same symbol as the reach symbol of the third symbol is issued. Set. On the other hand, the display control device 114 fluctuates with an outlier symbol different from the symbol displayed in reach based on the timing of receiving the non-V valid end command for display (output in S2438 of FIG. 240). The process of displaying the middle symbol string of the symbol is executed.

Further, even when it is determined to be a big hit, one reach symbol is determined and set as a stop type from the reach symbols including the "7" symbol by lottery. Further, as the notice display mode, one notice display mode is determined from a plurality of notice display modes including a notice display mode in which it is notified that a time-saving game state such as a school of fish or a rainbow is set (when the V switch 650e3 is passed). Is displayed. Even during the jackpot game, the middle symbol row is stopped at the reach symbol at the timing when the V switch 650e3 is passed through the 1st round. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V switch 650e3 on the 1st round, the character "Resurrection" is displayed after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed on the off symbol, indicating that the jackpot game is executed. The notification mode is executed.

<9th embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 259 to 345, as a ninth embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 259 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, FIG. 260 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 261 is a front view lower right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 263 to 265 are schematic views schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 266 is the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 259, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 259) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 260) having entry ports 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 267) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached. The contents of a large number of entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG. 260.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 259) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 259), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 267) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 260) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 259), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 260) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 260, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first ball opening 64, a second ball opening 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. , The peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 259). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the game board 13 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 259) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 260.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 259) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 267) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion of FIG. 260) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 260) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

First symbol display devices 37a and 37b including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged on the upper right side of the game area in front view (upper right side in FIG. 260). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 267), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. .. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball opening 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball wins the second ball opening 640, the first symbol display device 37a operates. The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is given to the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15 rounds, and the time saving state is given after the jackpot ends. The 15R time saving jackpot, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5 rounds, and the time saving state is given after the jackpot ends. 5R time saving jackpot, 5R normal jackpot is prepared in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5R and the time saving state is not given after the jackpot ends. In addition, in some cases where the lottery result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a loss other than the above-mentioned big hit, the privilege given to the player is less than the above-mentioned big hit (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Benefits to let) Small hits are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, the result is indicated. Designs according to the jackpot type are shown.

Here, the "15R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a time-saving state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "5R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds. It is a big hit that shifts to a time saving state. Further, the "5R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the normal state without shifting to the time saving state after the jackpot of 5 rounds.

Further, the "time saving state" is a gaming state in which the ball easily enters the second entry port 640, although the jackpot probability is the same as the normal state as an added value after the end of the jackpot. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is won. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in this case is set so that the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 640 is longer than in the normal state. In addition, in order to set a game state in which the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640, other configurations may be used, only a part of the above-mentioned setting contents may be used, or the above-mentioned contents may be used. Alternatively, the probability of hitting the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "time saving state" is the period (first period) until the number of fluctuations (total number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the first predetermined number (100 times). Alternatively, it is configured to be set while the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol satisfies both the period (second period) until the second predetermined number (1 time) is reached, and the first period or the above-mentioned first period or When any of the second periods ends, the end condition is satisfied, and the game state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state. In this way, a plurality of end conditions for shifting the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state are prepared, and when any of the multiple end conditions is satisfied, the time-saving state is changed to the normal state. By shifting to, it is possible to set multiple timings for the end of the time saving state, and let the player play the game while being excited about how long the time saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state will continue. be able to.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions are set for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), but elements other than the number of fluctuations are set as the end condition of the time-saving state. For example, the number of times a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery or the number of times the V winning device 650 that operates when a small hit game is executed is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, once). The arrival may be used as an end condition. Further, only a part of the above-mentioned many end conditions may be used, or each may be appropriately combined.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b to form a third. The second symbol is triggered by the passage of a sphere to the third symbol display device 81, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that fluctuates and displays the above is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 267), for example, the left, middle, and right 3 Two symbol columns are displayed (see FIG. 268). Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 267), whereas the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

That is, the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) in which the first symbol is variably displayed (variable display) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (variable display). (Variable display), and the third symbol is special on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. It is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the symbol.

The third symbol, which is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, may be displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and is a part of the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, a hit / miss determination such as a big hit or a miss). The display mode may correspond to the result only), or the display mode may correspond to the details of the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the type of the winning jackpot). In addition, when there are three types of lottery results (for example, big hit, small hit, and miss) as the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery result of the special symbol is the above-mentioned three types of lottery as the display mode of the third symbol. A display mode indicating that the result is one of two specific types (for example, big hit or small hit) may be used.

Further, instead of the display device used in the present embodiment, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. Is to be displayed in a variable manner by alternately lighting the above for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 It is configured to be in operation (protruding) for a predetermined time. Although the details will be described later, the ball can enter the second entry port 640 by changing the electric accessory 640a to the operating state.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the time-saving state (high probability state of the normal diagram) than in the game state of the normal state. As a result, during the time saving state, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal state. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is in the operating state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win a prize in the second entry port 640 during the time saving state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the ball wins the second entrance 640 in the time saving state by using other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the state is easy, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and the electric function for one hit may be set. The opening time and the number of times of opening the object 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

Further, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is changed according to the set gaming state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a are changed, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variation display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the timing, the variation display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the hit is displayed (the hit of the second symbol). It may be configured to determine the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a according to the game state set in the game, that is, the timing of operating the electric accessory 640a). With this configuration, for example, when the second symbol whose fluctuation has started during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a hit during the normal state, the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the normal state can be displayed. It can be operated according to the operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set gaming state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

The relationship between the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be defined other than the above. For example, the fluctuation start timing of the second symbol and the operation of the electric accessory 640a may be defined. When it is determined that the time saving state is set as the gaming state at any one of the start timings, the operating pattern advantageous to the player as the operating pattern of the electric accessory 640a (executed during the time saving state). The operation pattern) may be set.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and flows down the right side of the game board among the balls fired on the game board. A part (almost) of the sphere is configured to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display, and if the winning lottery result is a winning, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is missed. If there is, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84 described above. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of balls at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 267), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 260, in the game in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed game), the first ball entry port 64 is on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can easily enter the game (so-called right-handed game) in which the ball flows down. Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second entry port 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed in order to allow the ball to enter the first entry port 64. To.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first ball entry port 64 when viewed from the front, a second ball entry port 640 in which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 267), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

In addition, the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize, respectively. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry slot 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry slot 640 are different, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second ball opening 640 may be set to five.

In addition, in the present embodiment, switches (first entry switch, second entry switch) for detecting a ball that serves as a special symbol lottery opportunity (big hit lottery opportunity) are provided in the entry opening. The structure is such that a lottery opportunity for a special symbol can be obtained and a prize ball can be obtained. However, other configurations may be used. For example, an area (gate) through which the ball can pass is provided, and the area (gate) is set. When the switch (detecting means) for detecting the passing ball detects the passage of the ball, it may be configured so that a lottery opportunity for a special symbol can be obtained. In this case, at least a part of the balls that have passed through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special symbol can be entered, and when the balls enter, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls are paid out. It is advisable to provide an entrance. With such a configuration, the number of times the special symbol lottery opportunity is acquired and the number of times the prize ball is acquired can be made different, so that various playability can be provided.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a can be changed into a protruding state (allowable state) protruding from the game board 13 toward the front side (front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 260) and a shunting state (regulated state) with the game board 13 shunted. Normally (when the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in a shunting state (regulated state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, that is, the second symbol. If a winner is won in the lottery of the two symbols, the electric accessory 640a is in a protruding state (allowable state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to enter the second entry port 640.

Here, the ball flow to the second entry port 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 260, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is defined as the left side (left-handed area) of the variable display device unit 80. It is divided into the right side (right-handed area), and the player can adjust the operation amount of the operation handle 51 to divide the destination of the launched ball into the right-handed area or the left-handed area. It is configured in. Hereinafter, the game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot the ball into the left-handed area in the game area is referred to as a left-handed game, and the game in which the ball is fired into the right-handed area is referred to as a right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 260, a lottery trigger for whether or not to operate the second entry port 640, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640, and the electric accessory 640a. The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is arranged in the right-handed area, and is configured so that the right-handed game is performed when the time saving state is set as the game state.

On the left side of the second entrance 640, a nail is planted to prohibit (suppress) the ball launched by the left-handed game from entering the second entrance 640, and left-handed. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the game. With this configuration, in the left-handed game, in order to change the first special symbol, the ball is made to enter the first entrance 64, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is changed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in which the ball is inserted into the second entrance 640, and it is possible to appropriately provide different game performance depending on the game method.

A nail is planted above the second entrance 640 to regulate the flow of the ball launched by the right-handed game, and the ball is the first when the electric accessory 640a, which will be described later, is not operating. 2 It is configured not to enter the ball entry port 640. Here, the configuration of the game board 13 near the second entrance 640 will be described with reference to FIG. 261.

As shown in FIG. 261, among the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 pass through the region where the electric accessory 640a is arranged and are directed toward the V winning device 650, which will be described later. It is configured to flow down. The second entry port 640 is arranged at a position 30 mm below the ball discharge position 67a of the through gate 67 in the vertical direction and 70 mm to the left in the horizontal direction, and a ball flowing down the through gate 67 can flow down. It is arranged on the left side of the area a (see FIG. 261).

An electric accessory 640a is provided below the through gate 67. The electric accessory 640a has a guided state (protruding state) in which the ball passing through the through gate 67 can be guided to the second entry port 640 and a non-inducing state (evacuation state) in which the ball does not come into contact with the ball passing through the through gate 67. It is configured to be variable to (state).

As shown in FIG. 261, the electric accessory 640a is provided so as to incline downward toward the second entrance 640 side (lower left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 261), and the electric accessory 640a is in a guided state (in a guided state (lower left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 261). The ball that has passed through the through gate 67 during the period of being in the protruding state) is received by the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and then flows down toward the second entry port 640. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 304, but in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is configured to operate continuously for different periods in the gaming state.

Specifically, the operating period of the electric accessory 640a is configured to be 2 seconds in the time saving state and 0.2 seconds in the normal state. The electric accessory 640a is configured such that the flow-down period for the ball to flow down in the region shown in FIG. 261 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (in the present embodiment). 0.4 seconds). With this configuration, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, a normal symbol is won, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the operating electric accessory 640a, the ball is in a state of flowing down. Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed by the time the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second entrance 640, the lottery of the second special symbol is surely executed in the normal state. Can be prevented.

Further, in the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) when the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entry port 640. , The ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second entry port 640, and the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed.

In the present embodiment, the operating period of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state is longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entry port 640. A sufficiently long period (2 seconds) is set to ensure that the ball enters the second entry port 640 when the electric accessory 640a operates, but other than that, for example, the time is shortened. The operating period of the electric accessory 640a in the state is slightly longer than the period (for example, 0) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entry port 640 (0.4 seconds). It may be configured to be .7 seconds). With this configuration, after passing the ball through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the launch of the ball is stopped, and after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has operated, the launch of the ball is started again ( Since so-called stop hitting) can be suppressed, it is possible to continuously perform the right-handed hitting game in a time-saving state and improve the operation of the game.

Returning to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. As described above with reference to FIG. 261, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down toward the second entry port 640 or the V winning device 650 depending on the operating condition of the electric accessory 640a. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described.

The V winning device 650 is configured to be variably configured into an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small hit", the V winning device is won. The opening / closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is configured to operate so as to be variable to an open state in which a ball can win a prize in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

Further, as will be described in detail later, even in a part of the special symbol "big hit" (big hit D), the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is the same as the case where the above-mentioned "small hit" is won. It is configured to operate in. This makes it difficult to know whether the special symbol "big hit" or "small hit" was won when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 was operated.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 to 265. First, as shown in FIG. 261, when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state in which the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is closed, a ball is configured to flow down on the upper surface thereof. The ball that has reached the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is closed flows down on the opening / closing door 650f1 toward the lower left side (see FIG. 261) and flows out toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in the open state (that is, during the small hit game), the ball wins in the V winning device 650.

In the present embodiment, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is configured to be 0.1 seconds × 12 times, and the V winning device 650 flows down on the opening / closing door 650f1 at the timing of opening. The ball is winning the V winning device 650. The balls that have won the V winning device 650 are configured to flow down on the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652 while being aligned toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 264 (a)). There is. With this configuration, no matter from which position of the opening / closing door 650f1 the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650, the ball can be smoothly inserted. It can be made to flow down.

In the present embodiment, the period during which the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds, but the opening / closing door 650f1 flows down during the opening period of the opening door 650f1. Other periods may be set as long as the ball in the ball can win the V winning device 650. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened is 12 times in one small hit game, but other times may be set.

Details will be described later, but in the small hit game, the period from the opening of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 once to the next opening (inter-opening interval period) is 5 during the small hit game. After the 10th and 10th opening operations, 5 seconds is set, and at other timings, 0.5 seconds is set. This is to make it easier for the V winning device 650 to win a ball during the period when the small hit game is being performed. Specifically, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect the ball when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small hit game, during the opening interval period after the fifth opening operation is completed. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guidance display that emphasizes and urges the player to play the right-handed game.

Then, even when the right-handed game is started by grasping the game guidance display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between openings is such that the ball can be entered into the V winning device 650. Is set longer than usual. Further, the same control process is also executed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the tenth opening operation during the small hit game is completed.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small hit game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, in a specific game (small hit game) in which the opening operation is executed a plurality of times, a part of the interval period between opening is set longer than the others, and it is determined that the proper game is not performed. By making it possible to display a game guidance display for promoting appropriate game contents, it is possible to make a player who is playing an erroneous game play a game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, a special opening interval period longer than the others is set after the fifth and tenth opening operations during the small hit game. By providing the player with a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display during one small hit game in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform an appropriate game. When the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, it is preferable to set at least the notification timing for the second transition to a timing that the player who is normally playing the game cannot reach. That is, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, by continuously performing the right-handed game during the small hit game, at least one ball is inserted in one opening operation of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Since it is configured so that it can be balled, if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the number of winnings (10 pieces), which is a condition for ending the small hit game during the 10th opening operation, is reached. It will be reached and the small hit game will be completed.

That is, the interval period between openings executed after the 10th opening operation during the small hit game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing to display the game guidance display using this timing, an unnecessarily long special opening interval period can be set for a player who is playing a normal game (continuous right-handed game). It will not be executed, and the small hit game can be executed smoothly.

In addition, when the interval period between the first special opening is set to the timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) to reach even if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed as in the present embodiment. The timing when the first special opening interval period starts (the timing when the fifth opening operation ends), or the timing when a predetermined period elapses after the first special opening interval period starts (the fifth opening operation). It is determined whether the V switch 650e3 is detecting the ball at the timing when the period required for the ball entering the ball to be ejected from the V winning device 650 has elapsed), and the V switch 650e3 is detecting the ball. If it is determined, a notification effect for notifying the fact is displayed during the first special opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect the ball, the game guidance display is displayed as described above. It is good to configure it to be displayed. As a result, the special open interval period set during the small hit game can be effectively used according to the content of the game.

Further, in the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the small hit game ends without letting the V winning device 650 win a predetermined number (10) of balls during the small hit game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 262. FIG. 262 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 262, the V winning device 650 is combined with an opening forming member 650b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 650b to form a V winning device 650. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c and for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. To open and close the arranged LED substrate 650d, the back cover body 650e that sandwiches the LED substrate 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. A flow formed by an opening / closing unit 650f having an opening / closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 650e and a flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that projects to the road and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is locked to the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, and the back surface thereof. A flow path solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing to the back cover body 650j with screws. It is composed of and.

FIG. 263 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. 263 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 263 (b) is a sectional view taken along line Lb-Lb of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 263 (b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 263 (b). An inclined bottom surface is formed on the lower left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 263 (b).

As shown in FIG. 263 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the opening / closing door 650f1 having a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is variable to a state and a closed state where the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll over the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 650c (inside the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the V winning device 650 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 and moves to the second entrance 640 side. It is configured to be guided, and even during a short-time game (including during a probabilistic game), it is possible to let the game ball enter the second entrance 640 while hitting right, and immediately after the big hit game. It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the game method to left-handed. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. .. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 263 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 263 (b). As shown in FIG. 263 (a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, a configuration in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 650e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 264 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge port 650e2. As shown in FIG. 264 (a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 650g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 650 g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650 h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650 h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 650 g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

As shown in FIG. 264 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 650e2. .. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 650e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. ..

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the big hit game is set after the small hit game by the game ball passing through the above-mentioned V switch 650e3 during the small hit game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting the jackpot game. Further, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which the ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small hit can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow in which the ball cannot pass through the V switch 650e3 (difficult). It is for communicating with any of the paths (normal discharge flow path 650e1), and by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON, the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. The flow path is switched to (see FIG. 264 (b)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during normal game play, so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is configured in. Then, when an illegal state is detected (for example, when it is detected that the opening / closing door 650f1 is open even though the small hit is not won), the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON and the prize is illegally won. It is configured to prevent (suppress) the ball from passing through the V switch 650e3. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the state of being maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. By providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 264 (a)), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

In this way, the game state set after the small hit game is changed by the flow route of the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, so that the player's interest is improved even during the small hit game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening of the V winning device 650 (specific winning opening) to the entrance of the special discharge port 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is at least 1 second. It is configured. With this configuration, even if the opening / closing door 650f1 is detected that the opening / closing door 650f1 has been opened even though the small hit has not been won, and then the flow route of the ball is switched by the switching member 650h, the ball is surely released. It is possible to suppress the situation where the special discharge flow path 650e2 flows down.

Further, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. As a result, it can be determined by the total of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the probability change switch 650e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged. The end timing of the small hit game (when the end condition of the small hit game (when the V winning device 650 has a predetermined number (10 pieces) of prizes, or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established). If all the game balls that have entered the V-winning device 650 have not been discharged at the timing when the small hit ending period that is executed after the event has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V-winning device 650 and the outside is determined. It is preferable to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, the winning ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. 10 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection to be configured so that it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, it is possible to sort out whether or not the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed. Can be done. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning opening (specific area) for granting the jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the structure of the lower surface of the ball flow of the opening / closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 265 (a) is a schematic view of the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 in a plan view in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed. In the opening / closing door 650f1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 265 (a), the ball reaching the upper surface of the V winning device 650 is a V winning device along the inclination of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 260). It is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650y1 of the 650 through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 and flow down the left upper surface 650y2 toward the variable winning device 65.

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the flow of the sphere, and the sphere is provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1. The flow period is set to 0.6 seconds. This flow period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small hit game. It is configured to be long. With this configuration, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win a prize when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small hit game.

When the small hit game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 265 (a) and the opening / closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 265 (b). FIG. 265 (b) is a schematic view of a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 265 (b), when the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened, it moves so as to evacuate to the inside of the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the upper right upper surface 650y1 becomes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that a winning can be made. Further, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 also wins a prize in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening / closing door 650f1 is located at the shelter position.

Further, in the V winning device 650, no matter from which position the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the ball flow after winning is smooth. 1 regulation member 651 and 2nd regulation member 652 are provided (see FIG. 260), and the balls that have won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a on the upstream side of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 are the 1st regulating member 651 and the first. 2 It is configured so that it is aligned in a row via the regulation member 652 and then flows down toward the detection port 650a1, which is the passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided at a position below the first regulating member, the ball winning vigorously from the opening / closing door 650f1 is directly detected at the detection port 650a1. Since it is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the ball detection switch 650c1, it is possible to prevent the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1 from failing. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652) for aligning the spheres before the spheres pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width equivalent to one sphere is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a ball clogging in the V winning device 650, which hinders the game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation is performed in the privilege game (small hit game) given when the judgment result (result of the lottery of the special symbol) of the discrimination means is a predetermined judgment result (small hit). The flow period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down on the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1) is longer than the opening interval period (0.5 seconds) of the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1). Therefore, the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (timing when the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed) during the small hit game is surely made to win the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing. be able to.

Further, even if only the balls flowing down on the variable member are made to win the V winning device 650 during the small hit game, a predetermined number (10 pieces) can be won during the small hit game. Since the number of opening operations (12 times) in the winning game is set to be larger than the number of winning conditions (10) in the small hit game, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short. , A sufficient number of winnings can be secured. In addition, by setting a long opening period, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive number of balls are won by the V winning device 650 during the small hit game.

As shown in FIG. 266, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 267) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 267). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 267. FIG. 267 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a first frame button 22, a second frame button 23, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating the driving accessory for the effect provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is input from the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 (hereinafter, when both the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 are indicated, it is referred to as a frame button 22). When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the display control device changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the effect content at the time of super reach. Instruct 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive the accessory for the effect (not shown), and the operation content for the frame button 22 is supported. Set an audio output command for outputting audio to the audio output device 226, or set a lamp output command for emitting the lamp display device 227 in a light emitting mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22. It may be configured as.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 266). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 266) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 277. FIGS. 268 (a) and 268 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right can be displayed. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 268 (a), the third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is 10 that imitates the numbers "0" to "9". It is composed of each type of main symbol. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variation display is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is aligned and stopped on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the ninth embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

The mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be changed. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. It is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is fluctuating by making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen). You may try to do it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (the degree to which it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 268 (b). As shown in FIG. 268 (b), a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm. In this small display area Dm2, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 277 (a)). That is, in the present embodiment, the small display area Dm2 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

A small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. The small display area Dm1 is configured so that the variable display of the third symbol can be easily displayed. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm1, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect in which the frame button 22 is pressed is executed. If you are. While the display effect is being executed, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm. Further, by simply displaying the variation display of the third symbol in the small display area Dm1 during the execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to continue the variation display of the third symbol. Can be understood.

Further, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 268 (b), a reserved symbol made of a black circle is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. As described above, if a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed for the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved balls. In the ninth embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, and the second special symbol is set so that the reserved balls cannot be secured. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds. Is displayed with a maximum of four reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is changed according to the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number. Further, the player may be visually notified of the size of the number of reserved balls by changing the mode of the character according to the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are displayed. An effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button-related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and a hit-related information display mode for displaying information related to the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), but there is no ball in either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entry is made. The variation display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and among the balls that have entered the first entry port 64 and the second entry port 640, the spheres that have not been changed ( This is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of reserved balls). Although details will be described later, the sub-display area Ds is displayed in the first display area Ds1, the second display area Ds2 for displaying the game content and the effect content to the player, and the reserved ball display area. The pending symbol is shifted and partitioned into an executing area Ds3, which is displayed as an executing pending symbol Dsa corresponding to the fluctuation currently being executed (see FIG. 271 (a)).

The reserved symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds is a reserved symbol corresponding to the next fluctuation (front view of FIG. 271 (b)) when the variable display being executed ends and the next fluctuation is started. The leftmost reserved symbol Dsb) is deleted, and the remaining reserved symbols (Dsc to Dse) are shifted to the left and displayed. Then, the deleted reserved symbol Dsb is displayed as the executing pending symbol Dsa in the executing display area Ds3. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of which reserved symbol the variable display being executed corresponds to, so that, for example, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed and the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol can be displayed. When an effect that raises the expectation that the lottery is a big hit (so-called look-ahead effect) is executed, the player can easily determine that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode is changed by the look-ahead effect is executed. Can be recognized.

In the present embodiment, only the ball entering the first ball opening 64 can be held up to 4 times, but the upper limit of the number of held balls is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of balls to be entered into the second entry port 640 may be set to be held up to a predetermined number, or the upper limit of the number of reserved balls to be entered into the first entry port 64 and the second entry. The upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the ball opening 640 may be different from the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entry port 64, and the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entry port 64 may be set to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the second entry port 640. It may be more than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for, or conversely, it may be less. Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Next, the contents of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 269 to 277. The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first special symbol) is triggered by the first symbol display device 37. The variable display of the symbol) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In addition, in the third symbol, the variation display is performed in common with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, the second special symbol is configured to be variablely displayed in preference to the first special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to be variablely displayed at the same time. Has been done.

In the present embodiment, as the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the lottery of the special symbol, a continuous effect executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations can be set. In this continuous effect, when a prize information command for indicating various counter values (lottery results) acquired when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the prize information is obtained. The lottery result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the command is displayed in the period until the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed (variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation executed before the target special symbol variation). Is an effect to suggest to the player by using the period during which is executed.

In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol using the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed before the target special symbol, the player can be directed for a longer period of time. Can be provided and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, since the lottery result (for example, deviation) of the special symbol can be continuously produced without highlighting each variation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's motivation to play is reduced. it can.

In the present embodiment, the scoring effect is executed as the above-mentioned continuous effect. This scoring effect is an effect for giving a score for changing a predetermined stage information (gauge amount) to a different stage information (gauge amount) (score giving effect), and a case where the stage information becomes a specific stage information. A specific effect (charge effect) that can be executed (when the gauge amount reaches 6 and the charge amount is accumulated) and an effect that can be executed.

And, as a whole, in the scoring effect executed as a continuous effect, the lot of stage information is variable, and the more the charge amount is accumulated, the higher the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol to be the target of the scoring effect will be a big hit. It is configured to be.

As a result, the player is expected to win a big hit by executing the scoring effect so as to gradually change the stage information during the period during which the scoring effect is executed (multiple special symbol fluctuation periods). It can be visually notified, and it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage and enhance the effect of the effect.

In the present embodiment, during the above-mentioned scoring effect, the final score effect executed during the period during which the target special symbol variation is executed and the special symbol variation other than the target special symbol variation (that is, the target). It is composed of a pre-scoring effect that is executed during the period when the special symbol variation that is executed before the special symbol variation) is executed, and each scoring effect sets the stage information (gauge amount) that is executed to different stage information (gauge amount). The score-giving effect for changing the gauge amount) can be executed multiple times. Then, this score-giving effect is set so that it can be executed a predetermined number of times (1 to 4 times) corresponding to one special symbol fluctuation period, and further, a score is given in one score-giving effect. The number of suggestion effects suggesting that the score is given, the number of times the suggestion effect is actually given a score (or the number of times the score is not given (the number of times the Gase effect)), and the number of times the score is given. It is configured so that the score can be different from the score.

By using the scoring effect configured as described above, various effects can be executed during the scoring effect, and the player can quickly grasp the lottery result of the special symbol that is the target of the scoring effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the scoring effect at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, as a score-giving effect, the score is displayed (granted) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol, and the displayed (granted) score is a predetermined amount (for example, 6). It is configured so that a specific effect (charge effect) is executed when it is accumulated. As a result, by grasping the score displayed on the third symbol, it is possible to predict whether or not the specific effect is executed and the execution timing of the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 269, the flow of the score giving effect and the specific effect executed in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 269 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the effect when the operation score giving effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is executed as the score giving effect and the player operates the frame button 22. Therefore, FIG. 269 (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when the operation score effect that requires the operation of the frame button 22 is executed as the advance notice effect and the player does not operate the frame button 22. Is. Note that FIGS. 269 (a) and 269 (b) show an example in which the score-giving effect and the specific effect are executed in one special symbol variation in order to explain the flow of the score-giving effect and the specific effect. However, the score-giving effect and the specific effect can be executed even if the special symbol is changed a plurality of times.

As shown in FIG. 269 (a), as an effect mode of the effect executed during one variable display, the score and the score giving effect (GP effect) for giving the score are given three times, and the player presses the frame button 22. The operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) that gives points when operated is executed once, and the specific effect (charge effect) that is executed when a predetermined amount (6 pieces) of points is accumulated is executed twice. The effect mode to be performed is configured to be set as a variable display.

When the change of the special symbol is started, the first score giving effect (GP effect) is started after a predetermined period, and the score (P) "2" is displayed (given) as the effect result. As a result, when the first score giving effect (GP effect) is completed, the stage information of the display mode indicating the gauge amount "2" is displayed. Next, the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) is executed, and a predetermined operation is executed for the operation means (frame button 22) in the effect, so that the score (P) "3" is obtained as the effect result. Displayed (granted). As a result, when the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) is completed, the gauge amount is variably displayed from "2" to "5".

After that, the second score giving effect (GP effect) is started, and the score (P) "1" is displayed (given), so that the gauge amount is variably displayed from "5" to "6". In the present embodiment, when the gauge amount reaches "6", the charge amount is accumulated by "1" and the gauge amount is variably displayed to the initial value "0". Then, when the charge amount becomes "1", the first specific effect (charge effect) is executed.

Here, as the content of the effect executed as the specific effect, a suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol that is the target of the score effect this time, and a special image given to the player only when the specific condition is satisfied. And videos. When the first specific effect is completed, the third score-giving effect (GP effect) is executed with the gauge amount "0" and the charge amount "1", and the score (P) "5" is displayed (granted). ), The gauge amount is variably displayed from "0" to "5".

After that, the fourth score-giving effect (GP effect) is executed, and the score (P) "1" is displayed (granted), so that the gauge amount is variably displayed from "5" to "6" and charged. The amount is variably displayed from "1" to "2". Then, the second specific effect (charge effect) is executed.

It should be noted that this second specific effect is a predetermined effect (for example, a jackpot) set at a predetermined timing as a variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation period set when the special symbol variation is started this time. The effect of notifying that the effect of rapidly increasing the degree of expectation of is executed) is executed. Specifically, immediately before the predetermined effect is executed, as the second specific effect, an effect that urges the player to operate the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the predetermined effect has been executed based on the operation of the operation means (frame button 22), so that the player is enthusiastically participated in the game. be able to.

According to the above-described example with reference to FIG. 269 (a), the second specific effect is set to a predetermined timing (timing immediately before the predetermined effect is executed) due to the success of the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect). However, if the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) fails, the score cannot be obtained in the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect), and at a predetermined timing. There was a problem that the second specific effect could not be executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, based on the effect result of the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect), the specific effect is executed after that so that the specific effect is executed at the timing immediately before the predetermined effect is executed. It is configured so that the process of changing (correcting) the effect mode of the score giving effect can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 269 (b), in the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) executed during the score effect, the effect when the player does not perform a predetermined operation on the frame button 22. I will explain the flow of. As shown in FIG. 269 (b), if the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) fails and the score (P) cannot be obtained, the correction is performed without executing the first specific effect (charge effect). By executing the later score-giving effect (changed GP effect) and displaying (giving) the total score (P) "10", the charge amount "2" is obtained in the same manner as in FIG. 269 (a) described above. The second specific effect (charge effect) is executed in this state.

With this configuration, even if an effect (operation score giving effect) in which the score given based on the operation result of the player to the operation means is used in the score effect, the specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, the display mode of the score given (displayed) during the score giving effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 270 and 271 (a). FIG. 270 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the number of times the gauge amount “6” is reached (the number of accumulated charge amounts) in the present embodiment, and FIG. 270 (b) is given in the present embodiment. FIG. 270 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the gauge amount to be performed, and in FIG. 270 (c), among the reach effects executed in the present embodiment, the expectation degree of the first reach mode is made to correspond to the charge amount and the gauge amount. FIG. 270 (d) is a schematic view schematically shown in FIG. 270 (d), in which the expected degree of the second reach mode is schematically shown in correspondence with the charge amount and the gauge amount among the reach effects executed in the present embodiment. FIG. 270 (e) to (g) are schematic views shown, and FIGS. 270 (e) to 270 (g) show a flow of display modes of stage information (gauge amount and charge amount) when a score is given in the score giving effect in the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. Further, FIG. 271A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the score giving effect is executed in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 270 (a) and 270 (b), in the present embodiment, the gauge amount is accumulated up to "6", and when the gauge amount reaches "6", the charge amount is added (accumulated) by "1". The charge amount is set to be added (accumulated) by "3" at the maximum. That is, the stage information can be divided into 18 stages as a whole.

Then, when the score giving effect is executed and the score (P) is displayed (granted) on the third symbol display device 81, the gauge amount or the charge amount corresponds to the number of displayed (granted) points (P). The display mode is variably displayed so that is added. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of points to be given in the score effect in the variable display is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. That is, the lottery result of the special symbol is divided into 18 levels of expectation and can be suggested to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, at least a first reach mode and a second reach mode are provided as variable display (reach display) for indicating whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit. The reach mode is set so that the jackpot expectation is different according to the above-mentioned charge amount and gauge amount. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 270 (c), the first reach mode is set so that the jackpot expectation increases according to the number of points given in stages (that is, 18 stages). , As shown in FIG. 270 (d), the second reach mode is set so that the jackpot expectation is high only corresponding to the gauge amount (that is, 6 steps).

With this configuration, the stage that is most advantageous to the player among the stage information displayed during the scoring effect can be different depending on the content of the variable display to be executed (the type of reach mode to be executed). Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot until the end (until the reach display is executed).

Next, with reference to FIG. 271 (a), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during the score giving effect will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 271 (a), when the score giving effect is executed, the storage gauge Dg is displayed in the main display area Dm. This storage gauge Dg visually displays the given score, and is a charge display for indicating the gauge amount in 6 stages (gauge 1 display area Dg1 to the gauge display area Dg6) and the charge amount in 3 stages. It has a region Dg7 and.

This storage gauge Dg notifies the player of the current score storage amount (gauge amount and charge amount) by changing the display mode each time a score is given as a score giving effect. Here, the flow of varying the display mode of the storage gauge Dg will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 270 (e) to 270 (g).

First, when both the gauge amount and the charge amount are "0" and the score (P) "1" is displayed (granted) by the score giving effect, the display mode of the gauge 1 display area Dg1 is variable ( (Filled in black in FIG. 270 (e)), the display mode is variable to indicate that the gauge amount is “1” and the charge amount is “0”. Further, when the given score (P) is accumulated up to "11", as shown in FIG. 270 (f), the display mode of the gauge 1 display area Dg1 to the gauge 5 display area Dg5 is variable (black). (Fill), and the current charge amount "1" is displayed in the charge display area Dg7, and the display mode is changed to indicate that the current charge amount is "1" and the gauge is "5".

Then, when the score is further accumulated by "1" from the state of FIG. 270 (f), the display mode is changed so that the gauge value temporarily indicates "6" as shown in FIG. 270 (g). After that, the value of "2" is displayed in the charge display area Dg7, and the gauge 1 display area Dg1 to the gauge display area Dg6 are variably displayed in a display mode (initial display mode) indicating that no score is given. As a result, it is possible to visually notify that the gauge has reached the predetermined amount (6) and the charge amount has been added by 1.

Next, the contents of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the score effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 276. First, FIG. 271 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen during execution of the scoring effect in a state where the reserved symbol indicating the winning information to be the target of the scoring effect is displayed on the first reserved symbol Dsb. is there. As shown in FIG. 271 (a), at the place where the winning information that is the target of the scoring effect is displayed (first reserved symbol Dsb), the player indicates which reserved symbol the winning information that is the target of the scoring effect is. It is displayed as a target reserved symbol mode (a display mode formed by a "black circle" indicating that the winning information exists and a "three points" indicating that the score is the target of the scoring effect). There is. As a result, it is possible to grasp the period during which the scoring effect is continuously executed for the player (the number of times the special symbol changes in which the scoring effect is continued). It is possible to predict the result of the current scoring effect based on the effect result (already given score) of the score-giving effect that has already been executed and the remaining period of the scoring effect.

In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the winning information to be the target of the scoring effect is notified by changing the display mode of the reserved symbol, but other configurations may be used, for example, the scoring effect may be used. The number of times the special symbol changes that are continuously executed, that is, the number of times the special symbol changes until the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information that is the target of the scoring effect is executed (or the winning information that is the target of the scoring effect) The number of times display indicating the number of times the special symbol change including the corresponding special symbol change) is displayed on the display screen, and is displayed at the timing when the new special symbol change is started (or the timing when the special symbol change is completed). The number-of-times display may be subtracted, or the time during which the scoring effect is continuously executed may be specifically displayed. Further, it may be determined whether or not the period in which the scoring effect is continuously executed is longer than the predetermined period, and the display mode corresponding to the determination result may be displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player can grasp the period during which the scoring effect is continuously executed, but the player is not allowed to grasp the period during which the scoring effect is continuously executed. You may. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the scoring effect will continue, and it is possible to make the player always play the game while the scoring effect is being executed.

Then, while the score-giving effect is being executed, the storage gauge Dg is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the display content (score) displayed in the effect display area Da1 of the score-giving effect executed in the main display area Dm. The display mode of each display area is changed according to the effect result of the imparted effect). Further, in order to notify a period during which the score giving effect is not executed during the scoring effect period, or a display mode having a higher display priority than the score giving effect (for example, a specific effect corresponding to the charge amount or an abnormality of the pachinko machine 10). During the period when the abnormality notification display) is displayed, the storage status display area DK is displayed instead of the storage gauge Dg, and the current storage status (score acquisition status) is simply displayed. As a result, while notifying the player that the score is being produced, other contents can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The storage status display area DK may be configured to always display during the period in which the specific effect is being executed. It may be configured to display only during the period when the storage gauge Dg is not displayed. When the former configuration is used, since the storage status display area DK is continuously displayed during the execution of the score effect, it is easy for the player to indicate that the storage status display area DK indicates the effect content of the score effect. Can be grasped by. Further, when the latter configuration is used, it is possible to reduce the area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 for showing the effect status of the score effect (score grant status up to the present time), and the third symbol display. The display screen of the device 81 can be effectively used for other effect display.

In FIG. 271 (a), as the score giving effect, the effect of giving the score (P) “2” is displayed, and the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the given score (P). The display for changing (corresponding to the arrow for reflecting the display content of the effect display area Da1 on the storage gauge Dg) is executed. In addition, a value corresponding to the result of the score giving effect is added to the storage status display area DK. After that, the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is changed according to the display content displayed in the effect display area Da1. Specifically, the display mode of the charge 1 display area Da1 and the charge 2 display area Da2 is changed in response to the score (P) "2" being given, and the storage indicating that the charge amount is "2". The display mode of the gauge Dg is variable (see FIG. 271 (b)).

As described above, since the result of the score giving effect executed during the score effect is displayed in the effect display area Da1 and then the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is changed, the score (P) to be given is changed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the scoring effect to be executed in order to grasp the situation as soon as possible.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is changed after the result of the score giving effect is displayed in the effect display area Da1, but other configurations may be used, for example, during execution. A part of the effect result of the score giving effect (for example, a part of the score (P) given as a result of whether or not the score is given) is stored so as to notify the player during the execution of the score giving effect. The display mode of the gauge Dg may be changed, or the display mode of the storage gauge Dg may be changed so as to notify the player of the range of the score (P) that can be given in the score giving effect during execution. You may. As a result, it is possible to predict the effect result of the score-giving effect this time based on the effect content of the score-giving effect being executed and the variable state of the display mode of the storage gauge Dg, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Can be done.

In this case, as a configuration for varying the display mode of the storage gauge Dg, for example, a display mode different from the first display mode (black display mode in FIG. 271 (b)) indicating that the score (P) has been given. It is preferable to change the display mode to the second display mode (for example, a display mode in which the corresponding display area is blinked, a display mode in which a color is different from black, etc.). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current display mode of the storage gauge Dg is in the middle stage in the state where the score giving effect is being executed.

In addition, when a configuration is used in which the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is changed to the intermediate stage display mode in order to suggest the effect result of the score granting effect during the execution of the score giving effect, the operation can be operated by the player. The content of the intermediate stage display mode may be changed with respect to the operation content to the means (frame button 22). In this case, when a predetermined operation is executed on the operation means (frame button 22), it is preferable to display the effect result of the score-giving effect being executed in a display mode for displaying in detail. As a result, the player who wants to quickly grasp the effect result of the score giving effect can positively operate the operation means (frame button 22), and the effect can be enhanced.

In the state shown in FIG. 271 (a), when the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information to be the target of the scoring effect displayed on the reserved symbol Dsb is started, the display content shown in FIG. 271 (b) is executed. Will be done. FIG. 271 (b) shows the score-giving effect when the variable display (hereinafter referred to as the target variable display) corresponding to the winning information (hereinafter referred to as the target winning information) that is the target of the score effect is executed. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example. As shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the reserved symbol indicating the target winning information is transferred to the digested symbol (running symbol) Dsa, that is, when the target variation display is executed, the digested symbol (running symbol) is executed. ) A score giving effect using Dsa is executed by enlarging the small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds.

Here, the digestion symbol (running symbol) Dsa is variably displayed as a plurality of effect symbols, and the effect result of the score-giving effect is given to the player in the display mode of the effect symbol stopped and displayed in the roulette effect display area Ds4. The effect of notifying is executed.

Further, the score-giving effect executed in the small area Ds3 is set so that the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) to stop and display, and the operating means (frame button 22) is operated. Is notified to the player by using the comment display of the main display area Dm and the button display mode Da2 imitating the frame button 22. When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, as shown in FIG. 272 (a), the rotation display of the effect symbol is stopped, and the result of the score giving effect in the roulette effect display area Ds4 (FIG. 272 (a)). Then, the score (P) 4 points are given) is displayed. Then, the display mode of the storage gauge Dg and the storage status display area DK is changed so as to indicate that 4 points have been given, and it is notified that the charge amount has become "1".

In the present embodiment, in the operation score giving effect of displaying the effect result by operating the frame button 22, no score is given when the frame button 22 is not operated. As a result, the status of giving points can be changed depending on whether or not the player operates the frame button 22. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the production.

When the charge amount becomes "1" by the score giving effect shown in FIG. 272 (a), the specific effect is executed as shown in FIG. 272 (b). FIG. 272 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of scoring effect. When the specific profit effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 272 (b), a display mode for operating the frame button 23 (see FIG. 259) is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the charge acquired in the small area Ds2 is displayed. A comment indicating that a specific effect using is being executed is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 273 (a) and 273 (b), the content of the scoring effect during the scoring effect in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 273 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the score giving effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 273 (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a schematic diagram which showed another example of the effect mode of the score giving effect.

According to the scoring effect shown in FIG. 273 (a), the effect result of the scoring effect is displayed using the display mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. ing. Specifically, the display mode (character "P") indicating that the score (P) is given as the effect result of the score-giving effect of this time, and the score (P) given in the score-giving effect of this time. The effect result display mode Da2 composed of the score number display mode Da3 (value of “1”) indicating the number is displayed.

In FIG. 273 (a), a pattern in which a score (P) “1” is given as an effect result of the score giving effect is shown as an example, but for example, when a score (P) is not given as an effect result of the score giving effect. Is a display mode of the effect result display mode Da2, in which the score (P) is changed to the display mode (character "P") indicating that the score (P) is given as the effect result of the score-giving effect of this time. A display mode (for example, the character "?") Suggesting that the score is not given is displayed, or a character "P" is displayed, and then a display mode in which the score display mode Da3 is set to ("0") is displayed. To.

Although detailed description is omitted, this effect result display mode Da2 is also used when notifying the player of the effect contents other than the effect result of the score giving effect, and corresponds to, for example, a special symbol change during execution. Then, as the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of executions of the expectation effect that improves the expectation of the jackpot (for example, the number of pseudo fluctuations in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped and then changed again, or It is also used to notify in advance the number of times the word "chance" is displayed during the variable display. In this case, specifically, as the effect result display mode Da2, a display mode in which the characters "chance" and the value indicating the number of executions are combined is displayed.

With this configuration, when the display of the effect result display mode Da2 is started, the player is notified of whether the display mode displays the effect result of the score-giving effect or other effect contents. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is a thing, and to pay attention to the content of the production.

The above-mentioned effect result display mode Da2 is stopped and displayed at the timing when any of the third symbols (three third symbols) being displayed in a variable manner on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed. The effect result display mode Da2 is stopped and displayed in place of the three symbols. At the time when the effect result display mode Da2 is stopped and displayed, a part of the effect result display mode Da2 (display indicating the effect to be displayed this time (for example, the character "P")) is displayed, and then the effect result display mode Da2 is displayed. , The display is controlled so that the score display mode Da3 is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player in order which effect the display mode Da2 is intended for and what the result is, so that the player can continue to pay attention to the content of the effect. be able to.

The display order of the effect result display mode Da2 is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a display mode in which the score number display mode Da3 (value indicating the acquired number) is displayed first, and then the target effect is shown. May be configured to display. In addition, a plurality of display modes (characters "P") indicating that the score (P) is given as the effect result of the score giving effect this time are prepared, and the value displayed in the score number display mode Da3 is predetermined. It may be configured to discriminate whether it is larger than the value (for example, 3) and display the display mode corresponding to the discrimination result from the plurality of display modes.

In addition, during the period in which the display mode (character "P") indicating that the score (P) is given as the effect result of the score giving effect of this time is displayed and the score number display mode Da3 is not displayed, this time. By grasping the type of the display mode displayed to show that the score (P) is given as the effect result of the score giving effect, the value displayed as the score number display mode Da3 can be predicted. You can enjoy the effect. In this case, as a plurality of display modes, for example, it is preferable to use display modes in which the colors of the displayed "P" are different. As a result, it is possible to display a display mode that is easy for the player to understand without preparing a plurality of image data of the effect result display mode Da2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 273 (b), the content of the score-giving effect different from the score-giving effect described with reference to FIG. 273 (a) will be described. The score-giving effect shown in FIG. 273 (b) is an effect executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is a three-rotation display formed in a cube. The effect result is displayed by rotating the body (Ds5 to Ds7) and combining the display surfaces (surfaces on which the player can see the entire surface) of the stopped display bodies.

Specifically, the first rotation display body Ds5 displayed on the leftmost side of the display screen can display at least a display mode for showing that a score (P) is given as a result of the effect of the score giving effect this time. The third rotation display body Ds7 formed on the rightmost side of the display screen is a display mode for indicating the number of points to be given in the current score giving effect (“3” in FIG. 273 (b)). ) Is formed to be displayable at least, and the second rotation display body Ds6 displayed in the center of the display screen is a display mode (FIG.) for indicating that the effect result display mode Da2 corresponding to the score-giving effect this time is established. In 273 (b), "X") is formed so that it can be displayed at least. Then, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), one effect result display mode Da2 is displayed by combining the display modes of the display surfaces of the first rotation display body Ds5 to the third rotation display body Ds7.

In the score-giving effect shown in FIG. 273 (b), as in the case of FIG. 273 (a) described above, it may be possible to display a display mode showing an effect result other than the score-giving effect, or each rotation display. A plurality of body stop orders may be configured to be set. As a result, the display mode displayed on each rotating display during the period from when each rotating display is displayed (rotated) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 until when it is stopped and displayed. While visually recognizing, the game can be played while predicting which combination will be stopped and displayed. Further, when displaying the effect result display mode Da2 by combining the display modes displayed on the display surface of each rotation display body, for example, one character can be displayed on the display surface of each rotation display body. The combination of characters displayed on the display surface of each rotating display may be configured to suggest (notify) the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, any of the rotation displays may be stopped and then rotated again, or the rotation display, which is normally rotated from top to bottom, may be rotated in the opposite direction. In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied, for example, when the lottery of the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner or the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information to be scored is a big hit, the rotation display in the vertical direction is displayed. It may be configured so that the display surface (two surfaces in the case of a cube) that is not normally stopped and displayed can be stopped and displayed by switching to and rotating the display in the left-right direction.

As described above, a plurality of patterns of the effect mode of the score giving effect have been described with reference to FIGS. 271 and 273, but the effect mode of the score giving effect is not limited to this, and the effect result display mode Da2 can be finally displayed. Anything is fine. For example, the display mode of the effect result display mode Da2 is displayed in a transparent state, and the transparency of the transparent effect result display mode Da2 is gradually lowered to obtain the final effect result display mode (not transparent). It may be configured so that the corresponding score (P) is given when the stop display is performed in the display mode). With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp in advance the score given when the final effect result display mode is stopped and displayed, so that the score progresses when the final effect result display mode is stopped and displayed. It is possible to play the game while specifically predicting the production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, the content of an example of the specific effect executed when the charge amount is accumulated will be described. FIG. 274 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a display screen during a period in which the specific effect is being executed, and FIG. 274 (b) is a schematic view of the display screen at the timing when the specific effect ends. It is a schematic diagram shown.

As shown in FIG. 274 (a), in this example, as a specific effect, a countdown display Dg10 that counts down the time until some effect is executed is executed. The countdown display Dg10 executes an effect for operating the player's frame button 23 as a specific effect (first specific effect), for example, as described with reference to FIG. 272 (b). , It is displayed by operating the frame button 23 during the effect period.

Then, a countdown display is performed corresponding to the timing when the charge amount "1" and the gauge amount "6" (that is, the charge amount "2" and the gauge amount "0" immediately after the charge amount are displayed) after a plurality of score giving effects. The remaining period indicated by Dg10 becomes "0", and a display mode for operating the frame button 23 as the second specific effect is displayed.

In this way, as an effect corresponding to the first specific effect, by executing an effect that suggests the execution timing of the second specific effect, the second specific effect is executed during the current variation display. It can be predicted by the player.

Next, among the reach effects executed in the present embodiment, the effect contents of the second reach mode (mission reach) will be described with reference to FIGS. 275 to 276. FIG. 275 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example displayed on the display screen when the second reach mode (mission reach) is started, and FIG. 275 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the second reach mode. FIG. 276 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the display screen during the first strike executed in (Mission Reach), and FIG. 276 (a) shows the display screen at the end of the second reach mode (Mission Reach). FIG. 276 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen showing the effect result of the second reach mode (mission reach).

When the second reach mode (mission reach) is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 275 (a), the variation display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the variation display area Dm1, and the mission is displayed in the main display area Dm. The characters "Defeat 100 enemies" are displayed as the reach mission content, and the value of "100" is displayed as the remaining number of enemies in the effect display area Da1. Then, the display mode indicating the gauge amount used during the mission reach is displayed on the storage gauge Dg and the storage status display area DK.

The second reach mode (mission reach) of the present embodiment is a first strike effect in which the mission content is changed in advance using the accumulated gauge amount, and the player is made to operate the operation means (frame button 22). It is composed of this production to achieve the mission, and the expectation of big hit winning is different according to the size of the gauge amount when the second reach mode is started. ..

According to the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), since the gauge amount is accumulated as “5” when the second reach mode (mission reach) is started, as shown in FIG. 275 (b), the preemption is performed. During the attack production, the production of subtracting the number of people "50 people" corresponding to the gauge amount "5" from the mission content "100 people" is executed. In the present embodiment, in the first strike effect of the second reach mode (mission reach), the number of people obtained by multiplying the gauge amount at the start by 10 is subtracted from the number of people in the mission content, and the larger the gauge amount, the more. , The number of people subtracted in the first strike production will increase (the number of people defeated in this production can be reduced). In this way, by changing the production mode of the first strike effect according to the gauge amount, the expectation of the jackpot winning is different according to the size of the gauge amount when the second reach mode is started. doing.

When the first strike effect of the second reach mode (mission reach) configured in this way is started, the value displayed in the effect display area Da1 is subtracted to "50" as shown in FIG. 275 (b). , The mission content displayed in the main display area Dm is also variably displayed from "defeat 100 enemies" to "defeat 50 enemies". Further, in the second display area Ds2, the characters "super chance" indicating the degree of expectation of hitting the mission reach this time are displayed.

Then, when the main production of the second reach mode (mission reach) is started, as shown in FIG. 276 (a), the storage gauge Dg is a display mode in which the gauge amount used in the first strike effect is deleted. Therefore, an image imitating a button for causing the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 is displayed, and the characters "button repeated hits" are displayed in the second display area Ds2. Further, in the effect display area Da1, "1" is displayed as a value required for reaching the mission in the mission reach.

After that, when the button is repeatedly pressed and the value displayed in the effect display area Da1 becomes "0", the mission is completed, so the message "Congratulations" is displayed in the small area Ds2, and the variable display is displayed. In the area Dm1, the combination of the third symbols (7.7.7) indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 266. FIG. 266 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 278, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the small hit type counter C5 used for selecting the small hit type of the special symbol. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 310). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a corresponding to entry into the first ball entry port 64, which is composed of four hold areas (hold first to fourth areas), and is provided in this area. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Are stored respectively.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area. Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started. Although the present embodiment does not have a configuration for holding and storing the ball entering the second entry port 640 and a configuration for holding and storing the ball passing through the through gate 67, these configurations are not provided. However, as a predetermined number (for example, four) of holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area or a normal symbol holding ball storage area may be provided.

Subsequently, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 278. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 999), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 310).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 and the special symbol reserved ball execution area. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Further, the first hit random number table 202a is provided with two types, a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for the second special symbol. Although the number of random numbers is the same, the number of random numbers that are small hits is set differently (see FIG. 280). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become small hits different, the degree of expectation for giving benefits (big hits or small hits) to the player can be increased between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Can be different. The special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 280. FIG. 280 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 280 (b) shows the contents specified in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, and FIG. 280 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. In the first hit random number table 202a, a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It's a table.

Specifically, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 280 (b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and the other values are other than the jackpot (that is, that is). It is stipulated as a judgment value of (out). Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and when the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a big hit.

When executing the lottery of the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 280 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 are defined as jackpot determination values, and "5 to 997" is the small hit determination value. "998,999" is specified as a judgment value other than that (that is, out of order). Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is determined, and when the value is any of "0-4", it is determined as a big hit, and it is determined by any of "5 to 997". In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, in a state in which the lottery (variation) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, in a state other than during the change of the special symbol, the big hit game, and the small hit game), the ball is the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball.

Here, unless the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number determined to be a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol, That is, if it is a random number that is determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is that of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In the first random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbols at the time of lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 4" are as described above. It is stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the first random number table 202a. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, while the total number of random numbers is 1000, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 5, so the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/200".

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the first hit type selection table 202b to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 281.

FIG. 281 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 281 (a), in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It has a selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2). .. As a result, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of Special Figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of Special Figure 2 are different, or each of a plurality of types of jackpot types is selected. Since the ratios can be different, it is necessary to provide the player with different playability between the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 used at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 281 (b). FIG. 281 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 281 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "big hit A", and any of "10 to 49". If it is, the jackpot type is "big hit B", and if it is any of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit C".

"Big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 as a big hit game and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state (the number of time saving times is 1). Since the number of rounds is large and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state that is advantageous for the player, "big hit A" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are random values for which "big hit A" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. The rate at which "big hit A" is selected is 10%.

"Big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a big hit game and the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state (the number of time saving is 1). Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of the above-mentioned "big hit A", the "big hit B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous for the player because the gaming state after the big hit is set to a time saving state that is advantageous for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 are random values for which "big hit B" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. The rate at which "big hit B" is selected is 40%.

"Big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a big hit game and the game state after the big hit is set to the normal state (non-time saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, "big hit C" is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are random values for which "big hit C" is selected, so the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit. The rate at which "big hit C" is selected is 50%.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 15 rounds of jackpot games are selected at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and 90 A 5 round jackpot game is selected at a rate of%. In addition, a jackpot that shifts the gaming state after the jackpot game to a time-saving state is selected at a rate of 50%.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281 (c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 used at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG. 281 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 281 (c), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is any of "0 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit A". That is, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the most advantageous "big hit A" for the player is always selected as the big hit type.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is three, but the number is not limited to one, and four or more types may be provided. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if they have the same value of the first hit type counter C2. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more player. You can expect it. Therefore, the hit in the high-probability gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the taste of the game in the high-probability gaming state can be improved. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

In addition, the type of jackpot type selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (partsper notation) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type It may be configured so that only the range is different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 by aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type when it becomes a small hit of a special symbol, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and determines a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). Within 99), 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the ball is in the first entry port 64 in a state where the lottery (variation) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, in a state other than during the change of the special symbol, the big hit game, and the small hit game). Alternatively, it is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second entry port 640.

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the big hit lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 282) for determining the type of the small hit to be executed is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is set.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. 282 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 282, the small hit type selection table 202e is defined so that three types of small hits A to C are selected as the small hit types of the second special symbol according to the value of the small hit type counter C5. ing. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 19", the small hit type is "small hit A (15R time saving once big hit when passing V)". , The small hit type when it is any of "20 to 89" is "small hit B (5R time reduction once big hit when passing V)", and it is small when it is any of "90 to 99". The hit type is "small hit C (5R time saving no big hit when passing V)".

Here, for each small hit type (small hit A to small hit C), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small hit game, it is executed after the small hit game is completed. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of small hit A, a big hit of 15R time reduction is set, and after the execution of small hit A, a big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed, and then once as a time reduction state. The time-saving game (the period until the special symbol changes 100 times or the second special symbol changes once and is stopped and displayed) is set. Further, in the case of the small hit B, the 5R time saving one big hit is set, and after the small hit B is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then the time saving state is set. It is configured so that one time-saving game (the period until the special symbol changes 100 times or the second special symbol changes once and is stopped and displayed) is set. In the case of small hit C, 5R time saving no big hit is set, and after the small hit C is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, but after the big hit game, the time saving is executed. The state is not set, and the normal state is set.

In this way, depending on the selected small hit type, the content of the big hit game executed after the small hit game is completed and the game state set after the big hit game can be different. Specifically, the small hit A is the most advantageous for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is large (15R) and the time saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the big hit game is completed. It is set as a small hit, and the small hit B is set to be more disadvantageous than the above-mentioned small hit A because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is small (5R), but a time saving state is set after the big hit game. To. The small hit C is set as the most disadvantageous small hit for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is small (5R) and the time saving state is not set after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is once (first end condition), or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is A total of 100 times (second end condition) is set. With this configuration, when the jackpot is won with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being 1 or more and the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set after the jackpot ends. ) Is executed, but the time saving state does not end. Further, when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied and the time saving state can be ended. Therefore, any special symbol (second) during the time saving state can be ended. The special symbol) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 310) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 283 (a)) storing the random value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 283 (a). FIG. 283 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the fluctuation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 283 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d is used with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 used in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state and the variation pattern table 202d1 used in the state where the time saving state is set. The variation pattern table 202d2 for shortening the working hours is specified. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different according to the gaming state, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is different. be able to.

FIG. 283 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 provided in the fluctuation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 283 (b), in the normal variation pattern table 202d1, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 283 (b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "missing", and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". A short deviation of 7 seconds is specified in association with the range of "140 to 149", and a deviation of 20 seconds is specified in the range of "140 to 149", and the fluctuation time is specified in the range of "150 to 179". Various normal reach times with a time of 40 seconds are specified in association with each other, and super reach a with a variation time of 80 seconds is associated with a range of "180 to 187", and a variation time of 100 is specified in the range of "188 to 194". The super reach b of seconds is associated and defined, and the super reach c with a variation time of 120 seconds is associated and defined in the range of "195 to 198".

In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and various normal reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are supported. It is specified by attaching, and the range of "30 to 79" is associated with the super reach a having a fluctuation time of 80 seconds, and the range of "80 to 129" is associated with the super reach b having a fluctuation time of 100 seconds. It is defined that the range of "130 to 189" is associated with the super reach c with a variation time of 120 seconds, and the range of "190 to 198" is associated with various special reach with a variation time of 140 seconds. ing.

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is in the entire range. If a long deviation of 180 seconds is specified and the lottery result is "big hit or small hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the fluctuation time is 180 seconds in the entire range. Long off is stipulated.

In this way, any fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and a command indicating this fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. By doing so, the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the right-handed game is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is configured so as not to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game in which a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game in which a lottery for the first special symbol is executed is performed. The case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state configured in this way is a case where the player illegally enters the ball into the second entrance 640, and therefore the normal state. As for the fluctuation of the second special symbol in, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the second special symbol is illegally drawn in a short period of time. If it is determined that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol has been executed during the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is illegally performed using the period (180 seconds) until the lottery result is displayed. It may be configured to notify the outside that (variation) has been executed. In addition, when the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is illegally executed, the result of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol that is illegally executed is forcibly executed as a result of the lottery (variation). It may be configured to be created and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 283 (b), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is 7 seconds (selection ratio is 7 seconds) when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order. Approximately 70%), 40 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 15%), 20 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 5%), 80 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 4%), 100 seconds (selection ratio is approximately 3.5%) , 120 seconds (selection ratio is about 2%), and it is stipulated that the selection is facilitated. If the lottery result is a big hit, 120 seconds (selection ratio is about 30%), 80 seconds (selection ratio is about 25%), 100 seconds (selection ratio is about 25%), 40 seconds (selection ratio is about 25%). It is stipulated that selection is facilitated in the order of 15%) and 140 seconds (selection ratio is about 5%).

In this way, the lottery result of the special symbol and the selected fluctuation pattern (variation time) are related, and the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and the special It is configured so that the jackpot expectation degree when a specific fluctuation time (variation pattern) is selected can be suggested by the ratio of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the symbol is out of order. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot is won according to the selected fluctuation time (variation pattern).

In the present embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table is used regardless of the winning jackpot type, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (for example, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player. A different variation pattern table may be used depending on whether the jackpot type is a jackpot type or the jackpot type indicates other jackpots (big hit B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the other jackpots is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the advantageous jackpot (big hit A) is won. It is preferable to configure it so that the time fluctuation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the fluctuation time set in the execution fluctuation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to the player. Therefore, the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is won is easier to select the fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. This can be configured to provide the player with surprising gaming results when the jackpot is won in a short variation time, even when a short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

Next, the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 284. FIG. 284 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving variation pattern table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 284, in the time saving variation pattern table 202d2, the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 284, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "off", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198". That is, when an ultra-short deviation of 0.5 seconds is specified for the entire range and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, all. An ultra-short deviation of 0.5 seconds is specified in the range. If the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2) and the lottery result is "out of", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time is 0 in the entire range. .If the ultra-short hit of 5 seconds is specified and the lottery result is "small hit", the short and small hit with a fluctuation time of 1 second is specified, and if the lottery result is "big hit", the fluctuation type counter CS1 A short jackpot with a fluctuation time of 1 second is defined in the range of "0 to 149", and a medium jackpot with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in the range of "150 to 198".

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 278. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is used for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability time (normal symbol) with a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol fluctuates in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal start port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol fluctuates in the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the second entrance 640 is opened. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance 640 is opened only "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "1 second x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 310).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 278, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 278, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 310) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 309) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 308) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 279 (b), the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, a time saving / medium total counter 203c, a jackpot start flag 203d, a jackpot medium flag 203e, and a small. It has a hit start flag 203f, a small hit medium flag 203g, a V passing big hit type storage area 203h, a V flag 203i, a time saving medium special 2 counter 203j, a V passing flag 203k, and another memory area 203z.

As shown in FIG. 278, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first ball entrance 64. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired based on the entry into the ball is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting prize), the values of the counters C1 to C3, C5, and CS1 are acquired, and the acquired data are four. Among the vacant areas of the hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery of the first special symbol is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is executed. It is shifted (moved) to the area, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

Then, when the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the second special symbol, the counters C1 to C3 are at the timing when the ball enters the second entry port 640 (starting prize). , C5, and CS1 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored as it is in the special symbol holding ball execution area.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the normal symbol (second symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing when the ball passes through the normal start port 67. Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored as it is in the special symbol holding ball execution area.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is a variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. 3 This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the symbol display device 81 (variable display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see S604 in FIG. 302). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S207 in FIG. 298).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S208 of FIG. 298, FIG. 302). See S605). The special figure 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is changed.

In the voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is changed, the fluctuation held in the main control device 110 by the special figure 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls displayed. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual reserved ball in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The time-saving / medium-time total counter 203c is a counter for totaling the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed during the time-saving state and counting up to 100 times. The time-shortening-medium total counter 203c is set to 0, which is the initial value when the jackpot is won (see S217 in FIG. 298), and is set to 100 when the jackpot ends (see S1514 in FIG. 311). Then, 1 is subtracted each time the fluctuation of the special symbol ends during the time saving state (see S502 in FIG. 301). The value of the time-saving and medium-time total counter 203c is referred to when determining whether or not the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been subtracted to 0 (S507 in FIG. 301). : Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S508 in FIG. 301).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition), or the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is configured so that the time saving state ends when any of the conditions that the number of fluctuations of the symbol reaches 1 (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether or not the first end condition is satisfied. The time-saving and medium-time total counter 203c is used to determine. The value of the time saving / medium total counter 203c is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the remaining time saving number command (see S505 in FIG. 301). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 receives a command for the number of remaining time reductions transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203c is changed, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the first end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of remaining time reductions managed by the game state storage area 223i of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of remaining time fluctuations counted by the time reduction / medium total counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if it does, the deviation can be corrected by the next received short-time remaining time command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining time reduction number based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203c described above, that is, the first time reduction state. Information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is not transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because, when a normal game is being played, the time saving state is set to shift to the normal state when the second ending condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and the first ending condition is set. The second end condition is satisfied in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations until the establishment is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the situation where the time saving state ends is suppressed.

The jackpot start flag 203d is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a jackpot stops, the jackpot start flag 203d is set to ON (S216 in FIG. 298). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203d is on and it is determined that the jackpot start timing is reached, it is set to off (S1503 in FIG. 311). The jackpot start flag 203d is set to off in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and maintain the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned off.

The jackpot flag 203e is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (S216 in FIG. 298). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed), it is set to off (S1517 in FIG. 311). This jackpot middle flag 203e is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to.

The small hit start flag 203f is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 300). When it is determined that the small hit start flag 203f is on and it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off (S1603 in FIG. 312). This small hit start flag 203f is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to be.

The small hit medium flag 203g is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 300). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to off (S1620 in FIG. 312). This small hit medium flag 203g is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure when a power failure occurs. It is configured to be.

The V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h contains data for determining the jackpot type that is set when the ball that has won the V winning device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 when the small hit game is being executed. It is a storage area to be stored. In the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h, when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit stops, the data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type is stored (FIG. 300). S402). When a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203h. The 203i is configured to be turned on. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the V-passing large hit type storage area 203h is configured to be cleared. This V-pass jackpot type storage area 203h is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. Is configured to be held by.

The V flag 203i corresponds to the type of small hit game being executed when a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3. The flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set to on. At the end of the small hit game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203i is on (S1615 in FIG. 312), and when it is determined that the V flag 203i is on (S1615: Yes in FIG. 312), it is set to on. The type of jackpot to be executed is determined from the flag being set, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (S1616 in FIG. 312). This V flag 203i is a flag that is set to off in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured as follows.

The time saving medium special 2 counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state up to one time. At this time, the time saving medium special 2 counter 203j is set to 0 which is the initial value when the jackpot is won (see S217 in FIG. 298), and is set to 1 when the jackpot ends (see S1514 in FIG. 311). Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is completed during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S504 in FIG. 301). The value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203j is referred to when determining whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been subtracted to 0 (FIG. 301). S506: Yes), a normal state is set as the gaming state (S508 in FIG. 301).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state reaches 100 times (first end condition), or the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is configured so that the time saving state ends when any of the conditions that the number of fluctuations of the symbol reaches 1 (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether or not the second end condition is satisfied. The time saving medium special 2 counter 203j is used to discriminate. The value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203j is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the remaining time saving number command (see S505 in FIG. 301). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the time reduction / medium total counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining time reduction number based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the time reduction medium special 2 counter 203j described above, that is, the time reduction state first. 2 It is configured to transmit information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied to the display control device 114. This is because, when the normal game is performed, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state by satisfying the second end condition of the time saving state, and the player is asked. This is to provide an easy-to-understand game by displaying the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the time saving state on the third symbol display device 81.

The V-passing flag 203k is a flag used to determine the state in which the V-flag 203i is set to ON during the small hit game, and is set to ON when the V-flag 203i is set to ON. Will be done. In the present embodiment, most of the balls that have won the V winning device 650 during the small hit game are configured to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2, and correspond to the balls that first win the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is set to ON in the V-pass processing (see FIG. 307) (S1107 in FIG. 307).

Then, in the V-pass processing (see FIG. 307), it is determined whether the V-pass flag 203k is set to ON (S1101 in FIG. 307), and if it is determined that the V-pass flag 203k is set to ON (S1101: Yes in FIG. 307). ), The processing of S1102 to S1108 is skipped among the V-passing processing (see FIG. 307). As a result, even when the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small hit game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process executed during the small hit game, and the V-pass command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 a plurality of times, so that the V-pass management on the voice lamp control device 113 side is complicated. Can be suppressed.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 267. The MPU 201 of the main control measure 110 is equipped with a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and the ROM 202 has at least the above-mentioned first random number table 202a and first hit. In addition to the type selection table 202b, the second random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the small hit type selection table 202e, the open scenario table 202f is stored.

Here, the contents of the open scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. 285. FIG. 285 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the open scenario table 202f. The open scenario table 202f is a winning device (variable winning device 65) capable of entering a ball in a privilege game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. , V winning device 650) is defined as operation data (opening scenario) for differentiating the opening operation according to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type).

In this way, the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the opening operation content (opening scenario) that are opened according to the winning result (big hit or small hit) and the hit type (big hit type, small hit type) ) Can be set differently to set the degree of advantage of the award game in multiple stages, so even after winning a big hit or a small hit, it is possible to entertain the player with which type of win was won. it can.

In the open scenario table 202f, the start interval period during the winning game corresponding to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device). And the opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds of one opening operation (round game), total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (between round games). The period during which the winning device set to is closed) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special symbol change is allowed). )) And are specified respectively.

Specifically, the winning type corresponds to the jackpot A, the start interval period is "2 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65" for "15 rounds", one round. As a game, the opening operation mode of opening "continuously for 29 seconds" is defined as "1 second" as the inter-round interval period and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Therefore, if the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpot A, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. .. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the jackpot A is a jackpot in which a time saving state is set, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, jackpot A is given the privilege that is most advantageous to the player. It is a big hit to be done.

Next, the hit type corresponds to the jackpots B and C, and the start interval period is "2 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65" as "5 rounds" and one round game. The opening operation mode for opening "continuously for 29 seconds" is defined as "1 second" as the inter-round interval period and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type is a jackpot of jackpots B and C, the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds is executed, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed for the player. It will be a big hit game in which about 1/3 of the prize balls are paid out. Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, a time saving state is set, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends. Since it is configured, the jackpot B is a jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and is given a privilege that is more advantageous than the jackpot C.

Corresponding to the jackpot D, the winning type is "1 second" as the start interval period, and the "V winning device 650" is opened to the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, and the "variable winning device 65" is opened. Is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round game, in the first round, "0.1 seconds open is opened 12 times with an interval between openings of 0.5 seconds", and 2 to In the 15th round, the opening operation mode of "continuously opening for 29 seconds" is "10 seconds" after the end of the first round as the interval period between rounds, "1 second" in other cases, and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. Is stipulated.

That is, although the details will be described later, the start interval period of the jackpot D, the period until the second round is executed (the content of the first round game (opening / closing operation mode), and the interval between rounds after the end of the first lined). The content specified in (Period) is configured to be the same as the content specified in the small hit game described later. With this configuration, whether the hit game being executed this time is a big hit game or a small hit game is determined until the timing when the first round ends (if it is a small hit game, the small hit game ends). It can be difficult for the player to grasp (until the timing of the game). As a result, it is possible to provide a surprising winning game to a player who has won a small hit and recognized that the small hit game is being executed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when a jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and most of the lottery of the second special symbol is set to win a small hit. (See FIG. 280 (c)). Therefore, during the period in which the time saving state is set as the game state and the change of the second special symbol is mainly performed, some hit game is started after the change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, regardless of whether the jackpot is won or the small hit is won, which hit (big hit or small hit) is won by the player in order to execute the winning game starting from the same opening operation. Can be made difficult to grasp.

In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be lower than the case of winning the small hit, and after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot D is completed, the probability is set to be lower. It is set to give a time saving state. Therefore, the player who wins the big hit will not be provided with more disadvantageous benefits than when he wins the small hit, so that the player can play a surprising game (a big hit game corresponding to the big hit D). Since it can be a game that is advantageous to the player, the player can be more excited.

It should be noted that, in the case where the big hit D is won and the case where various small hits are won, the same effect mode is executed as the variation display (variation effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, the stop display timing of the special symbol and the display on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. The stop display timing of the third symbol is different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol are synchronized, but the display of the third symbol is displayed at the stop display timing or the period before and after that stop display timing. In order to make it more difficult for the player to identify other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period other than the period, the display mode and the display area are changed, and the display mode and the display area are displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 at the stop display timing of the special symbol. It is advisable to switch the symbol of No. 3 from the third symbol to the normal symbol for production corresponding to the variable display of the ordinary symbol.

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when the winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are arranged apart from each other, and the stop display timing of the special symbol (at any hit). At the timing of notifying the player of the winning, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display that draws the player's attention to the V winning device 650, or the first symbol display device 37a, as in the present embodiment. It is preferable to make the display area of 37b smaller than the display area of the third symbol display device 81 so that the first symbol is harder to see than the third symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit or a small hit by the stop display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and the big hit continues even during the hit game. You can expect to win.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 285. In addition to the small hit game (1 round game), the V switch 650e3 detects the ball during the small hit game to specify the hit type corresponding to the small hits A to C. The opening scenario of the jackpot game (2 to 15 round games) that is continuously executed after the end is also specified. As a result, it is possible to reliably associate the winning small hit type small hit game content with the large hit game content that can be executed after the small hit game is completed, so that an appropriate game can be provided.

Specifically, for the small hit type A, the start interval period "1 second" and the opening operation mode "V winning device 650" of the winning device "1 round" are opened as the small hit game. Round game "0.1 seconds open 12 times", interval period between openings "0.5 seconds (interval between openings 1) other than after the end of the 5th and 10th openings", the end of the 5th and 10th openings After that, 5 seconds (interval between openings 2) ”is specified.

Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game is completed, the "variable winning device 65" is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and one round game "continuous opening for 29 seconds" is performed during the interval period between rounds. As a result, "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are specified.

Further, for the small hit types B and C, the start interval period "1 second" and the opening operation mode "V winning device 650" of the winning device are opened once for "1 round" as the small hit game. Round game "0.1 seconds open 12 times", interval period between openings "0.5 seconds other than after the 5th and 10th openings (interval interval 1)", after the 5th and 10th openings 5 seconds (interval between openings 2) ”is specified.

Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game is completed, the "variable winning device 65" is opened in the "2nd to 5th rounds", and one round game "continuous opening for 29 seconds" is performed during the interval period between rounds. As a result, "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are specified.

That is, the jackpot game that can be executed after the small hit game corresponding to the small hits B and C is set so that the number of round games is smaller than that of the jackpot game corresponding to the small hit A described above. Further, when the small hit type is small hit B, a time saving state is set, which is a game state advantageous to the player after the corresponding big hit game is completed, and in the case of small hit C, after the corresponding big hit game is completed. Since the time saving state is not set, the small hit B is a small hit that is more disadvantageous than the small hit A and is given a privilege that is more advantageous than the small hit C.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 267. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. The large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side, the V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and the switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650 are driven. A solenoid 209 composed of a flow path solenoid 209a for driving a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To do.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 328) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and the frame button 23, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content at the time of super reach, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 288 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a variation pattern selection table 222a, a first score effect selection table 222b, a second score effect selection table 222c, a total score selection table 222d, and an assignment. The score selection table 222e and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

The first scoring effect selection table 222b is a selection table for selecting whether or not to execute the scoring effect, which is the continuous effect described above, and the effect mode of the score effect to be executed, and is a command determination process described later. (See FIG. 315), it is referred to in the prize information related process (see FIG. 316) executed when it is determined that the prize information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2209: Yes in FIG. 315) (FIG. 316). S2306). When it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed in the process of S2306, the above-mentioned scoring effect is executed.

Here, the contents of the first scoring effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 286. FIG. 286 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first score effect selection table 222b. The first scoring effect selection table 222b is a data table used to determine the effect mode of the scoring effect, and includes the variation type included in the winning information command, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (first special symbol), and the number of reserved balls. The effect mode of the score effect to be executed corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223f1 is defined.

Specifically, when the variation type is per special reach and the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 14" and "score effect C". Is specified, and "no scoring effect" is specified in the range of "15 to 99". Further, when the number of reserved balls is 4, "score effect A" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is "0 to 39", and "score effect A" is defined in the range of "40 to 49". "C" is specified, and "no scoring effect" is specified in the range of "50 to 99".

When the variation type is per super reach (super reach a to super reach c) and the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 9". "Score effect A" is defined in, "Score effect B" is specified in the range of "10 to 39", "Score effect C" is specified in the range of "40 to 49", and "50 to 99" is specified. "No scoring effect" is specified in the range. Further, when the number of reserved balls is 4, "score effect A" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is "0 to 19", and "score effect A" is defined in the range of "20 to 39". "B" is defined, "scoring effect C" is specified in the range of "40 to 59", and "no scoring effect" is specified in the range of "60 to 99".

When the variation type is per normal reach, when the number of reserved balls is 2 to 4, the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is defined in the range of "0 to 9", and "score effect A" is defined. "Score effect B" is defined in the range of "10 to 24", and "score effect C" is defined in the range of "25 to 80".

On the other hand, when the variable type is out of super reach (super reach a to super reach c) and the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, the above-mentioned variable type is per super reach (super reach a to super reach c). The production mode of the scoring effect is defined at the same rate as in a certain case. On the other hand, in the case of the number of reserved balls 4, "score effect A" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is "0-4", and "score effect B" is defined in the range of "5-39". Is defined, "scoring effect C" is specified in the range of "40 to 59", and "no scoring effect" is specified in the range of "60 to 99".

When the variation type is out of the normal reach, when the number of reserved balls is 2 to 4, the value of the effect lottery counter 223f1 is defined in the range of "0 to 4", and "score effect A" is defined and "5 to 99". "Score production B" is defined in the range of ".

As described above, the first scoring effect selection table 222b in the present embodiment defines the scoring effect A to the scoring effect C as the effect mode of the scoring effect. Here, when the scoring effect A is selected, a scoring effect in which the number of points given during one scoring effect (total number of points given) is small is executed. Next, an effect mode is executed in which a large number of points can be easily set as the number of points (total number of points to be given) given during one scoring effect in the order of the score effect B and the score effect C.

In this way, the score is scored by presetting the degree of points given during the specific effect, in addition to whether or not the specific effect is executed, according to the lottery result of the target special symbol and the number of reserved balls. The number of points given during the scoring effect is biased with respect to the winning / failing judgment result of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information to be produced, and the effect of the scoring effect is reduced, that is, during the scoring effect. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the expectation of a big hit is almost lost when the total number of points given is small.

Further, the number of reserved balls, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the target winning information, the hit / fail judgment result of the special symbol, and the selection ratio of the effect mode to be executed as the scoring effect are defined. Therefore, for example, when the variation type is Super Reach and the number of reserved balls is 4, the ratio of selecting the score effect A, which is easy to set with a low total score given, is when the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is wrong. It is stipulated that the hit case is about four times higher than that (see FIG. 286). In this way, it is stipulated that the larger the number of points given during the score production (total number of points given), the higher the expectation of big hits, but in some cases (target prizes). In the case where the variation type of the special symbol corresponding to the information is "Super Reach" and the number of reserved balls is 4), the score is set so that the smaller the score given during the score production, the higher the jackpot expectation. It is possible to provide an unexpected production as a production.

The second scoring effect selection table 222c is a data table referred to for selecting whether or not to execute the scoring effect and the effect mode of the scoring effect to be executed, as in the case of the first scoring effect selection table 222b described above. is there. Unlike the first scoring effect selection table 222b described above, the second scoring effect selection table 222c uses the reserved balls (newly acquired reserved balls during the scoring effect) acquired at the end of the scoring effect. It is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the scoring effect again.

Here, the contents of the second scoring effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 290 (a). FIG. 290 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second score effect selection table 222c. The second score effect selection table 222c is executed when a stop command is received from the main control device 110 (S2214: Yes in FIG. 315) in the command determination process (see FIG. 315) described later (FIG. 315). 319), it is determined that the scoring effect has been completed (S2601: Yes in FIG. 319), and it is determined that the number of reserved balls at that time is 2 or more (S2604: Yes in FIG. 319). (S2607 in FIG. 319).

The contents specified in the second scoring effect selection table 222c will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 290 (a). The variation type is per special reach or per super reach, and the number of reserved balls is In the case of 2 or 3, "score effect C" is defined in the range of "0 to 29" for the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1, and "no score effect" is specified in the range of "30 to 99". Will be done. Further, when the number of reserved balls is 4, "score effect C" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is "0 to 49", and "score effect C" is defined in the range of "50 to 99". None "is stipulated.

Then, when the variation type is per normal reach, when the number of reserved balls is 2 to 4, the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" as "score effect C". , "No scoring effect" is specified in the range of "10 to 99".

On the other hand, when the fluctuation type can be out of super reach (super reach a to super reach c), the value of the acquired production lottery counter 223f1 is "0 to 9" when the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3. "Score effect C" is defined in the range of "10-99", and "No score effect" is defined in the range of "10-99". Further, when the number of reserved balls is 4, "score effect C" is defined in the range where the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is "0-4", and "score effect C" is defined in the range of "5 to 99". None "is stipulated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when selecting (scoring effect determination) whether or not to execute the scoring effect and the effect mode (scoring effect A to scoring effect C) to be executed. , A data table is used in which different selections are specified depending on the situation. Specifically, rather than the score effect determination (determination referring to the first score effect selection table 222b) when the winning information command is received, the score effect determination (second score effect selection table 222c) at the time when the score effect is completed. It is configured so that the scoring effect is more difficult to be executed and the jackpot expectation is higher when the scoring effect is executed.

With this configuration, when the scoring effect is continuously executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to continuously perform the game for acquiring a new reserved ball while the scoring effect is being executed while expecting the player to continuously execute the scoring effect. , The operation of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the scoring effect is completed, the second scoring effect selection table 222c is used to determine whether or not to execute the scoring effect, but for other purposes. It may be used, for example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the scoring effect by using the second scoring effect selection table 222c for the reserved ball acquired after the end of the big hit. .. As a result, when the scoring effect is executed after the end of the big hit, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the next big hit at the timing immediately after the end of the big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, two types of data tables used for determining whether or not to execute the scoring effect are used, but three or more types may be used. In this case, if the scoring effect is executed three times in a row, the result of the third scoring effect, that is, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information that is the target of the third scoring effect will be a big hit. It is advisable to specify the contents of the third score effect selection table. In addition, when setting the scoring effect continuously, the effect content of the second scoring effect is based on the effect content (selected effect mode and total number of points given) set in the first scoring effect. It may be configured to be selected, or at least a part of the points given in the first scoring effect may be carried over to the second scoring effect and displayed as it is.

The total score selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when setting the total score to be given to the player during the current score effect when executing the score effect, and is a prize information related process (FIG. 316). (See) Or, in the stop command process (see FIG. 319), the total score setting process (FIG. 319) is executed when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed (S2307: Yes in FIG. 316 or S2608: Yes in FIG. 319). 317), which is referred to when setting the total score given (S2402 in FIG. 317). The total score given here is stored in the total score storage area 223o, and is used when setting each effect mode of the plurality of variable displays executed during the score effect.

Here, the contents of the total score selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 290 (b). FIG. 290 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the total score selection table 222d. As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the total score that can be given during one score production is configured as "18", and the variation type included in the prize information command and the special symbol (first). The total number of points given corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol) and the set effect type (the effect type of the scoring effect set in the effect type flag 223n) is defined.

Specifically, when the variation type is per special reach and the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, the total score "18" is specified for the score effect C, and the number of reserved balls is In the case of 4, the total score "4" is defined for the score effect A, and the total score "18" is defined for the score effect C. By defining the total score to be given in this way, it is possible to give a score corresponding to the frequency of occurrence of the score giving effect during the execution of the scoring effect, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect that does not give a sense of discomfort. In the total score selection table 222d, the “−” portion is a portion that is not selected when the first score effect selection table 222b and the second score effect selection table 222c are referred to.

Next, when the variation type is per super reach (super reach a to super reach c) and the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, the total score "5 to 11" is given to the score effect A. The range is defined as the range of the total score "6 to 14" for the score effect B and the range of the total score "11 to 18" for the score effect C, and the number of reserved balls is 4. In some cases, the range of the total score "5 to 11" for the score effect A, the total score "12" for the score effect B, and the total score "12 to 15" for the score effect C. The range of "" is specified respectively. Here, for the portion where a predetermined range is defined as the total score to be given, one of the points is selected from the effect counter 223f according to the value acquired from the effect distribution counter (not shown). There is. As a result, the total score given in the score effect set under the same conditions (the variation type and the number of reserved balls are the same) can be made different, so that the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the above-mentioned variable type is super reach, it is stipulated that a low score is more likely to be given as the total score given during the score production as compared with the case where the variable type is per special reach. This is because the jackpot expectation of the variable type and the value of the total score given are associated with the jackpot expectation. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the production while predicting whether or not the player has won the jackpot based on the variable type to be executed and the total number of points to be given.

When the variation type is per normal reach and the number of reserved balls is 2 to 4, the total score "6" is given to the score effect A and the total score "12" is given to the score effect B. A total score of "18" is specified for C. As described above, in the normal reach where the expectation of big hit is low as a variation type, the total score "18" can be selected in order to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

On the other hand, when the variation type is out of super reach (super reach a to super reach c) and the number of reserved balls is 2 or 3, the total score "5 to 11" is given to the score effect A. When the range is defined as the range of the total score "6 to 14" for the score effect B and the total score "12" for the score effect C, and the number of reserved balls is 4. , The range of the total score "5 to 11" for the score effect A, the total score "12" for the score effect B, and the range of the total score "12 to 15" for the score effect C. Each is specified. When the variation type is out of the normal reach and the number of reserved balls is 2 to 4, the total score "1 to 15" is defined for the score effect A.

As described above, when the variation type is Super Reach, the total score in the same range is selected depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a miss. It is configured to. With this configuration, the current variation display is supported by the effect (variation display corresponding to the variation type and the score given during the score effect) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the lottery result of the special symbol from being grasped in advance as to whether or not it is a big hit.

If the variation type is Super Reach and the score effect C is set and the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, "18", which is the maximum value of the total score given, is included in the selection range. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the selection range (selectable range "11-18"), the maximum value of the total score given is "18" so that it is not included in the selection range (selection). Possible range "12 to 15"). With this configuration, the score "18" will be given only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, when the super reach is set as the variation type, the score given during the scoring effect The game can be played while paying attention to reaching "18".

In the present embodiment, the higher the score given during the score production, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is set so as to provide the player with an easy-to-understand production, but other than that. A configuration may be used. For example, when the score given during the scoring effect is a predetermined value other than the maximum value (for example, "7"), the jackpot expectation may be high, or the score effect may be used. Is executed, but the score given is small (for example, in the range of "1" to "3"), the jackpot expectation may be high. In this way, by giving a rule to the relationship between the given score and the jackpot expectation, it is possible to accurately predict the jackpot expectation only for the player who has played the pachinko machine 10 for a long period of time.

The given score selection table 222e is a data table for selecting the score to be given (displayed) as the score giving effect in each variation display during the execution of the score effect, and is produced in the effect setting process (see FIG. 321) described later. The score giving effect setting process (FIG. 322) is executed when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223 m is larger than 0 (S2801: Yes in FIG. 321), that is, when it is determined that the score effect is currently being executed. See) (see S2905 in FIG. 322).

The number of points that can be displayed at the present time in the given score selection table 222e, that is, the total number of points given that are selected with reference to the total given score selection table 222d and stored in the total given score storage area 223o, is already displayed. The number of points scored, that is, the value obtained by subtracting the count value of the given score counter 223p, the value of the effect variation counter 223 m, that is, the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations in which the score effect is continuously executed, and the effect counter 223f. Of these, the display score is defined in association with the value of the display score effect counter (not shown), and the score is selected according to the situation when the score assignment effect setting process (see FIG. 322) is executed. To.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 288 (b). As shown in FIG. 288 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and an effect counter 223f. SW effective time storage area 223g, fluctuation time counter 223h, game state storage area 223i, effect prohibition flag 223j, effect prohibition release flag 223k, effect variation number counter 223m, effect type flag 223n, total grant score storage area 223o, grant score counter At least 223p, an operation score execution flag 223q, an operated flag 223r, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the start of fluctuation.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b displays the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2208 in FIG. 315). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203b.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 hold ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The information included in the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device may be information indicating the actual number of hold balls, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203a, or the special symbol hold ball number counter. Information indicating that the value of 203a has been added or subtracted by 1 may be used. When transmitting information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a has been added or subtracted by 1 as the reserved ball number command, it is included in the reserved ball number command received by the voice lamp control device 113. A calculation means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved balls may be provided based on the information obtained.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 315), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2702 in FIG. 320). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 314) of the main process (see FIG. 314) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 315), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2708 in FIG. 320). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for scoring effect and various lottery. Although not shown, the effect counter 223f is 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 314) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. It will be updated one by one. In the present embodiment, the effect lottery counter 223f1 used as the effect counter 223f at least for determining whether or not the score effect is executed, and the score distribution effect counter used for selecting the total score to be given during the score effect. (Not shown) and the score used when selecting the score to be displayed in one variable display (the total of the points given in the multiple score giving effects executed in one variable display). It has a scoring effect counter (not shown), and each counter is configured to update within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) without synchronization.

The SW effective time storage area 223g is a storage area in which the frame button 22 or the period in which the frame button 23 is determined to be valid is stored. In the present embodiment, when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern (SW variation pattern) that executes an effect in which the frame button 22 or the frame button 23 can be operated in the selected variation pattern, the variation pattern is used. The specified operation validity period is set. Although detailed description will be omitted, the SW effective time storage area 223g is a variation executed in the effect update process (S2112 in FIG. 314) executed in the main process (see FIG. 314) of the voice lamp control device 113. It is determined whether or not the pattern has reached the operation valid period, and when it is determined that the pattern has reached, the elapsed period of the operation valid period is counted, and the counted period is set in the SW valid time storage area 223 g. It is configured to determine whether the period has passed. Further, even when it is determined that the player has operated the frame button 22 or the frame button 23 during the operation valid period, the operation valid period is terminated.

The fluctuation time counter 223h is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the executed fluctuation pattern, and is an effect update process (S2112 in FIG. 314) executed in the main process (see FIG. 314) of the voice lamp control device 113. ), The counter value is updated. By referring to the counter value of the fluctuation time counter 223h, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern.

The game state storage area 223i is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when the state command related to the game state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223i, the current game state can be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In the present embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored in the game state storage area 223i when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like because the data is erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The information indicating the current gaming state is also deleted. However, in the present embodiment, since the state command is set in the main control device start-up process (see FIG. 309) executed after the power is turned on (S1312 in FIG. 309), the game state storage area 223i is immediately after the power is restored. Information indicating the game state that was set before the power was cut off will be stored in. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the voice lamp control device 113 can always identify the gaming state.

The effect prohibition flag 223j is a flag for prohibiting the setting of a new scoring effect in the state where the scoring effect is set, and is set to on when the scoring effect is set. When it is determined that the score effect is to be executed in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 316) or the stop command process (see FIG. 319), the effect prohibition flag 223j is determined to execute the score effect (S2307: Yes in FIG. 316, S2608 in FIG. 319: Yes), set to on (S2313 in FIG. 316, S2614 in FIG. 319). Then, when it is referred to in the prize information related process (see FIG. 316) (S2304 in FIG. 316) and it is determined that it is set to ON (S2304: Yes in FIG. 316), the process for setting the score effect is performed. It is configured to skip. After that, in the stop command processing (see FIG. 319), when it is determined that the effect prohibition release flag 223k is set to ON (S2601: Yes in FIG. 319), that is, when it is determined that the scoring effect is completed. Set to off (S2602 in FIG. 319).

With this configuration, when a ball enters the first entry port 64 and receives a new winning information command during the scoring effect executed by using multiple fluctuations of the special symbol, a new winning information command is newly received. It is possible to prevent a scoring effect from being set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that a new scoring effect is started during the execution of the scoring effect and the player is provided with an incomprehensible effect.

In this embodiment, since the configuration in which a plurality of scoring effects cannot be executed in duplicate is used, the above-mentioned control is adopted. For example, a plurality of areas for executing the scoring effects are provided, and a plurality of scoring effects are performed. When the configuration is duplicated and can be executed, the score effect may be set so as to reach the number of score effects that can be executed duplicately.

Specifically, when it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 316) (S2307: Yes in FIG. 316), or when it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed in the stop command processing (see FIG. 319). (S2608: Yes in FIG. 319) is incremented by 1 from the value of the effect setting number counter that counts the number of times the score effect is set (the number of score effects that have already been executed). Then, in the prize information related processing (see FIG. 316) and the stop command processing (see FIG. 319), the value of the current effect setting number counter is set to the upper limit value (overlapping) before determining whether to set a new score effect. It is determined whether or not the score effect has reached the number that can be executed), and if the determination result is not the upper limit value, a process for setting a new score effect is performed, and if it is the upper limit value. Skips the process of setting a new scoring effect. Then, in the stop command processing (see FIG. 319), when it is determined that the scoring effect of 1 is completed, the value of the effect setting number counter may be subtracted by 1.

The effect prohibition release flag 223k is a flag for canceling the period for prohibiting the setting of a new score effect, and is used in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 320) for setting the variation display in response to the special symbol variation. When it is determined that the value of the effect variation number counter is not larger than 0 (0) in the effect setting process (see FIG. 321) to be executed (S2801 in FIG. 321), that is, the variation display set this time is scored. This is the final variation of the effect, and is set to on (S2806 in FIG. 321) when the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to on (S2804: Yes in FIG. 321). Then, when it is referred to in the stop command processing (see FIG. 319) and it is determined in the stop command processing that the effect prohibition release flag 223k is set to ON (S2601: Yes in FIG. 319), it is combined with the effect prohibition flag 223j. Set to off.

The effect fluctuation number counter 223m counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the scoring effect, and is updated to a value corresponding to the current number of reserved balls when the scoring effect is set. Then, the value is referred to in the effect setting process (S2704 in FIG. 321), and when it is determined that the value of the effect variation counter 223 m is larger than 0 (S2801: Yes in FIG. 321), the score giving effect setting is executed. The value of the counter is decremented by 1 in the process (see FIG. 322) (S2908 in FIG. 322).

The effect type flag 223n is a flag indicating the effect type of the scoring effect, and for example, a 3-bit storage area is allocated. The first bit corresponds to the scoring effect A, the second bit corresponds to the scoring effect B, and the third bit corresponds to the scoring effect C, indicating that the scoring effect corresponding to the on (1) bit is set. Further, when all the bits are off (0), it means that the scoring effect is not set.

The total score storage area 223o is an area for temporarily storing the upper limit of the score given during the score effect, and is executed when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed (S2307: Yes in FIG. 316). The total score set in the total score setting process (see FIG. 317) is stored.

The given score counter 223p is a counter for measuring the score given (displayed) during the scoring effect, and is a value corresponding to the number of given points set in the score giving effect setting process (see FIG. 322). Is added. Further, as a score-giving effect, an operation score effect in which a score is given (displayed) when the player operates the frame button 22 is set, and if the frame button 22 is not operated during the operation score effect, the frame button 22 is not operated. The value corresponding to the score not given (displayed) is subtracted.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 315) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 308).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 266) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 286 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 286, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, during the normal game state (during the normal state), the left-handed game is performed and the special 1 game aiming at the first entrance 64 is executed. Will be done. Here, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game state shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the winning jackpot type.

Specifically, if the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the jackpot ends. Later, it is configured to shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second entry port 640 to execute a lottery for the second special symbol, and if a big hit is won, the normal game state is always set after the big hit is completed. doing. This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not (difficultly) enter the second entrance 640 even if the right-handed game is performed during the normal gaming state. Therefore, the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state is regarded as a fraudulent act, and measures are taken to prevent the player who committed the fraudulent act from playing an advantageous game. Is. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to allow the player to perform a lottery (game) that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol in the time saving state. Therefore, there is a risk that the second special symbol will be drawn by cheating. Therefore, by taking the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being performed due to fraudulent acts.

When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball can be easily entered into the second entry port 640 by the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640. Therefore, a right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second entrance 640 is executed.

Here, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small hit game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball to make a big hit. The game is started. Here, depending on the winning small hit type, the game state shifts to a different game state after the big hit ends. Specifically, when the small hit type of the winning small hit is small hit A or small hit B (90% of the total), the time saving state is set again after the big hit ends, and the small hit type is small hit C. In some cases, it is configured to transition to the normal gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In other words, once the game shifts to the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot ends with a probability of about 90%, so that it is possible to easily continue the game state that is advantageous to the player and improve the interest of the game. it can. If a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is always set after the big hit is completed. Further, even if a big hit is won by a lottery of the first special symbol during the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is always set after the big hit is completed.

This is, for example, in a normal game state in which a left-handed game is performed, when a jackpot is won with the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 being the upper limit, and a time-saving game state is set after the jackpot ends, the time-saving game During the state, a lottery of the first special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball of the special figure 1 may be executed. In this way, when a big hit is won by the reserved ball of Special Figure 1 (winning information that the winning is in the normal gaming state, but the timing when the lottery is actually executed is the shortened gaming state), the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. If a possible configuration is used, there is a problem that the player who has struggled to shift to the time-saving game state is dissatisfied. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantageous.

Further, in the present embodiment, since "the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is one" is provided as a part of the end condition of the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is one. The game state is also changed from the time-saving game state to the normal game state (when the second special symbol change of the first rotation is completed during the time-saving game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 287, the flow during the small hit game of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 287 (a) to 287 (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small hit game. As shown in FIGS. 287 (a) to 287, when the small hit game is executed by the control process of the main control device 110, the display control device 114 displays the small hit game effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is executed. Then, when t1 (1 second) elapses from the start of the small hit game, the V winning opening solenoid is driven according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 285). Further, the flow path solenoid 650k is always set to OFF, and the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The ball flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3, and the V switch 650e3 is activated within 17 seconds (V valid period t5) from 1 second after the start of the small hit game. By detecting the ball, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) elapses after the big hit game is started, the first round game is started and the specific winning opening 65 is opened. Be released.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball can be won by the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball can be detected by the V switch 650e3 only by normally executing the right-handed game. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if the time saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is configured to end when the second special symbol lottery is performed once, the game can be played without any inconvenience. Can be done. In addition, since the time saving state is configured to end when the lottery for the second special symbol is performed once, for example, the type of small hit won in the lottery for the second special symbol is identified, and the player If you win a small hit that is disadvantageous to you (for example, a small hit with a small hit type of small hit C), you can prevent the game aiming for the next special symbol lottery without winning the ball to the V winning device 650. can do.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 296. FIG. 291 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the reading thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 328) executed after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 328) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 296) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 330 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 328).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 292. FIG. 292 shows the power-on displayed by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 292 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (displays of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 292 (b). As shown in FIG. 292 (c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, the image of the fluctuation when the power is turned on with the “○” symbol at the lower right position facing the screen and “○” as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 292 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", FIG. 292 (c). The image shown in is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 292 (b) and 292 (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 291, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 293 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 293 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 293 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” with respect to the back surface A corresponding to the “sandy beach stage”.

As shown in FIG. 293, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 sets the range between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 293 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "sandy beach stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sandy beach stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 293 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" is resident only in a part area of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 293 (a) to (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 293 (a) to (b)) is transferred to the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. It can be displayed. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 291) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 291, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the serial error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A to D. If either is the case, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time saving period of this ordinary symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the second entrance 67, so that the lottery of the ordinary symbol will be held more often, and there will be more chances of winning the ordinary symbol. Become. Therefore, since there are many opportunities for the electric accessory to be released as a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, and a lottery for the special symbol becomes easier to be performed. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal pattern, and the ball enters the second ball. The easier it is to enter the ball mouth 640, the more prize balls will be. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls held is difficult to decrease or the number of balls held is not reduced even when the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the player can perform the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 294. FIG. 294 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays either back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or a back different from back A and B. It contains information that identifies whether to display the image. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A and B, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image of the back surface A or B corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 294) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 296) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 295. FIG. 295 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 295). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 295).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 295, In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 296) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 295, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 292 (a) to 292 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 328) (see S4005 in FIG. 328). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S4305 in FIG. 330 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S4301 in FIG. 330 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 330 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 330B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 330 (b) see S4309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 331 to 339) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 340 to 342) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6301 in FIG. 343 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 343 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 344) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 296), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 296) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 296) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 330 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S6005 in FIG. 342) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 296) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 296, the back image and the third symbol (designs 1,) used in the image of one frame. Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 will image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 330 (b). ) Is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S6007 in FIG. 340). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S4002 in FIG. 328) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 344) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6513 in FIG. 344). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6514 in FIG. 344). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6602 in FIG. 345).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 330 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S6602 of FIG. 345).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 297 to 312. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (999, 99, 239, 99, respectively in this embodiment) is reached, the value is cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 302 to 303.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 304 and 305. After executing the through gate passing process, the V entrance passing process accompanying the entry of the ball into the V winning device 650 is executed (S108). After that, the V passing process associated with the winning of the V winning device 650 to the V winning switch 650e3 is executed (S109). The details of the V-entrance passing process and the V-passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 298. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 297), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. If the aspect is not changing (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S203).

When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second entry port 640 (S203: Yes), the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5. Each value is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S204). Next, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b execute a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S210), and end this process. The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 299.

On the other hand, in the process of S203, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second entry port 640 (S203: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. (S205). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S206). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S206: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S206: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S207) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is set (S208). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S208, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). After that, the process of S210 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202: Yes), has the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b elapsed? Whether or not it is determined (S211). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S211: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S211 if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S211: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (S212). .. The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S210) described later with reference to FIG. 299. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, depending on the value of the random number counter C1 per first, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and when it is a big hit of the special symbol, it is determined. , The jackpot type (big hits A to D) is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. If it is a small hit, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are formed of a plurality of LEDs, and when the lottery result is a big hit, the combination of the LEDs to be turned on is different to identify each big hit type (big hits A to D). It is configured to be displayed as possible. When the lottery result is other than the big hit (small hit or miss), the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b may be turned on in the same display mode. Further, the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S212 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing (this lottery result). Is a big hit of a special symbol (S213). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S213: Yes), an opening scenario of a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S214), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S215). Next, the jackpot start flag 203d and the jackpot medium flag 203e are set to ON (S216), the time saving medium total counter 203c and the time saving medium special 2 counter 203j are set to 0 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. In the process of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S213: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S219).

In the process of S219, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S219: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S220), and then the time saving number update process is executed (S221). ), The process of S218 described above is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S219, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S219: No), the small hit start setting process (S220) is skipped and the time saving number update process is executed (S221). .. Next, the process of S218 is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, when a small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the small hit start setting process (S220) is executed and then the time saving number update process (S221) is executed. Therefore, the big hit game is completed after the small hit game is completed. If is not executed, the time saving state will end. Therefore, when the small hit type is identified when the small hit is won, and the small hit type is disadvantageous to the player, the V winning device 650 is not allowed to enter the ball. Since the time saving state ends after the small hit game ends, it is possible to prevent an illegal game from being performed.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 299. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S210). This special symbol variation start process (S210) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 299) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), and is the execution of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the area, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol", "small hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37a , 37b and the process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Each value of the counter C5 is acquired (S301). Next, the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S302). Specifically, in the case of a lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entry port 64, the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 280 (b)). The random number value stored in is compared to determine whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second entry port 640, the value of the first random number counter C1. And the random number value stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 280 (c)) are compared to determine a big hit or a small hit.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S303). When the lottery result is a jackpot (S303: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the jackpot type selection table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S304). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 or the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. It is determined what type of jackpot is among the jackpots (big hits A to D) of the four types of special symbols (see FIG. 281 (b) or (c)).

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value determined to be a big hit, but the determination value is not limited to the same, and different random values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be jackpots. The number of random numbers may be set differently. By configuring in this way, the probability of a jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

Then, the display mode at the time of jackpot corresponding to the special symbol type and the jackpot type is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to D). Further, the jackpot type (big hits A to D) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S306), and the process proceeds to S313. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S306, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the acquired special symbol type, lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table 202d2. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined (FIG. 283 (b) or FIG. 284).

In the process of S313, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S306 is set (S313). Next, a stop type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S305 is set (S314). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are stored in the external output process (S1401) of the main process (see FIG. 310) described later, in which the voice lamp control device is used. It is transmitted toward 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S314 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 298).

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S303: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small hit (S307). When the lottery result is a small hit (S307: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S308). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the small hit type selection table 202e, and the small hit (small hit) of three types of special symbols is compared. Of A to C), it is determined what the small hit type is (see FIG. 282).

Next, the display mode at the time of a small hit corresponding to the special symbol type and the small hit type is set (S309). After that, the small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202d2 (FIG. 283 (b) or FIG. 284). Next, the processes of S313 and S314 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 298).

In the processing of S313 and S314 in this case, the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (see S310) and the stop type (see S309) set when the lottery result of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Is set.

When the lottery result is not a small hit (S307: No), the display mode at the time of deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S311). After that, the fluctuation pattern at the time of off is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S312). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table. The fluctuation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202d2 (FIG. 283 (b) or FIG. 284). Next, the processes of S313 and S314 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 298).

Next, the small hit start setting process (S220) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 300. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S220). This small hit start setting process (S220) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 298) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), and is a small hit type (small hits A to C). It is a process for setting the start of the small hit game based on.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the small hit game is started, the V winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which a ball can win (easily), and the ball winning the V winning device 650 is in a specific area (V). By passing through the winning switch 650e3), the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed.

That is, in the game state in which the small hit game is executed, the ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (the prize ball can be obtained), and the big hit game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a high probability.

In the small hit start setting process (S220), first, an opening scenario corresponding to the small hit type is set (S401). After that, the jackpot type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h (S402). More specifically, the V-passing jackpot type (big hits A to D) is determined based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection table 202e. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined that it is a big hit A or D (15 rounds, one big hit), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit B (5 rounds, one big hit). ), And if the small hit type is C, it is determined that it is a big hit C (5 rounds, short time, no big hit) (see FIG. 282).

Next, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S403), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit medium flag 203g are set on (S404). After that, this process ends.

Next, the time saving number update process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 301. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the time saving number update process (S221). This time reduction number update process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 298) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), updates the time reduction number of times, and sets the game state to the normal state. This is the process for setting to.

In the time saving number update process (S221), first, it is determined whether or not (S501). If it is determined that this is not the case (S501: No), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined to be (S501: Yes), then the value of the time-saving / medium-time total counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S502), and it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is in the special figure 2 (S503). When it is determined that the fluctuation this time is the special figure 2 (S503: Yes), the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, in the process of S503, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the special figure 2 (special figure 1) (S503: No), the process of S504 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S505.

In the process of S505, the remaining time reduction number command indicating the value of the time reduction medium counter (time reduction medium total counter 203c and time reduction medium special 2 counter 203j) changed by the calculation is set (S505). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1401) of the main process (see FIG. 310) described later, the voice lamp control device. It is transmitted toward 113.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203j is 0 (S506), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203j is not 0 (S506: No), then the time saving medium It is determined whether the value of the total counter 203c is 0 (S507). If it is determined in the process of S507 that the value of the time saving / medium total counter 203c is not 0 (S506: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S506, it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium special 2 counter 203j is 0 (S506: Yes), or in the processing of S507, it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium total counter 203c is 0. In the case (S507: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S508), and this process is terminated.

Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 302. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64, and when there is a starting winning. , This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing for their values.

When the start winning process (FIGS. 302, S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S601). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entry port 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is 4. If it is not less than (S603: No), the process proceeds to S607. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203b is added by 1 (S604). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b changed by the calculation is set (S605).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1401) of the main process (see FIG. 310) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S605, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of is stored in the first area of the free hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S606). In the process of S606, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set, and if the value is 3, the fourth held area is set as the first area.

Then, in the process of S607, the look-ahead process is executed (S607). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 303, a look-ahead process (S607), which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 302) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S607).

In this look-ahead process (FIGS. 303, S607), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entry port 64 (S701). As a result of the determination, if there is no new prize in the first ball opening 64 (S701: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, and the variation pattern table 202d (normal variation pattern table). Based on 202d1 or the time saving variation pattern table 202d2), the lottery result, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern are acquired in advance (S702).

Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S702 is set (S703), and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 304. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 297), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device and the electric motor associated with the second ball entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

In this ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 304 and S106), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S801). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device. Includes being in the middle of being. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S801: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode is not changing (S802: No), it is determined whether or not the second hit random number counter is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S803), and if it is not stored (S803: No). , Ends this process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second hit random number counter is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S803: Yes), the value of the stored second hit random number counter C4 is acquired (S804).

Then, based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S804 and the random number table 202c per normal symbol (second), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S805). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 280 (d)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S805 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S806), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S806: Yes), it is a hit. The time display mode is set (S807), and the process proceeds to S809. In the process of S807, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S806, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S806: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S808). In the process of S808, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S809.

When the processing of S807 or S808 is completed, in the processing of S809, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S809), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S809: Yes). , The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S810), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S809: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S811), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S812). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S810 or the process of S811 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the S812 process, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S812: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S812, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S812: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S813). In the process of S813, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S807, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S808, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S813, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1408) of the main process (see FIG. 310) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted on) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the processing of S807 or S808.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing (FIGS. 304, S106) is the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S814). If the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S814: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery this time is a hit of the normal symbol (S814: Yes), it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S815).

In the processing of S815, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S815: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the opening period thereof is set to 0.2 seconds. The number of times of opening is set to 1 (S816), and the process proceeds to S817. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state of a normal symbol (S815: Yes), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 times. (S817), and the process proceeds to S818. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the normal state of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the 2 winning openings 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In the process of S818, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is set (S818), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S818, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1406) of the main process (see FIG. 310) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S816 or the process of S817 are completed.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 305. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (FIGS. 305 and S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902). If the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S902, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is not changing (S902: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S903). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S903: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S903: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S904). After that, this process ends.

Next, the V inlet passing process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 306. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the V inlet passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297).

In the V inlet passing process (S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passing sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S1001). If it is determined in the process of S1001 that the ball passing sensor is not on (S1001: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S1001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 650a is in the opening period (S1002).

In the process of S1002, when it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is in the opening period (S1002: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S1003), and this process is terminated. The V inlet passage command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1401) of the main process (see FIG. 310) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 286).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is not open (S1003: No), it means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small hit game, so an error command is issued. Set (S1004). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is set (S1004), and this process is completed.

Next, the V-pass processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 307. FIG. 307 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S109). This V-passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297).

In the V-passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the V-passing flag 203k is on (S1101). If it is determined in the process of S1101 that the V passage flag 203k is on (S1101: Yes), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the V passage flag 203k is not on (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passage (S1102). That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S1102, if it is determined that V has not passed (S1102: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S1102, if it is determined that there is V passage (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V passage is in the valid period (S1103). If it is determined that the V-passing valid period is in progress (S1103: Yes), the V-passing jackpot type value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203h is acquired (S1104), and the acquired V-passing jackpot type is acquired. The V flag 203i indicating the above is set to on (S1105). Then, the V passage command is set (S1106).

Next, the V passage flag 203k is set to ON (S1107). After that, the time saving medium total counter 203c and the time saving medium special 2 counter 203j are set to 0 (S1108), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, if it is determined that the V passage valid period is not in effect (S1103: No), an error command is set (S1109), and this process is terminated. If the game ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 when the V is not valid, it is considered that the ball is illegally won in the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1405, an error output is executed and a fraudulent act can be detected.

FIG. 308 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1201) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 309, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 309 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1302). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1303).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 266) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1304), and if it is turned on (S1304: Yes), the process shifts to S1315. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1304: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1305), and if it is not stored (S1305: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1315 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1306), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1307: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1315 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1415 in FIG. 310, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1315, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1315). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1316, S1317) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1316, S1317) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S1316, S1317) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S1316, S1317), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1316), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1317). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1310.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1304: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1305: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1304: Yes). S1307: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1308). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1309), and the process proceeds to S1310. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1310, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the value of the time saving medium counter (time saving medium total counter 203c and time saving medium special 2 counter 203j) is read (S1311), and a state command based on the read value is set (S1312). Then, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to off (S1313). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1314), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 310, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1401 to S1408 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1411 and S1412 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 310), first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is stored on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1401). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 297) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the special figure 1 reserved ball count command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 298) and the start winning prize processing (see FIG. 302) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 311) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1403), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed and the response is made. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the winning opening (specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is executed (S1404). In the jackpot control process, the winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) corresponding to each round of the jackpot state is opened, and the corresponding winning opening (first variable) is opened. The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650) has passed. It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have won a prize in the V winning opening 650a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1404) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 310), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297).

Next, in the case of a small hit state of a special symbol, various effects are executed according to the small hit, and the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening of the V winning device 650). A small hit control process for opening or closing 650a) is executed (S1405). In the small hit control process, the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the corresponding winning opening (first variable) is opened. The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650) has passed. It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have won a prize in the V winning opening 650a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1405) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 310), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297).

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S1406). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S817 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 304), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S815 or the processing of S816 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S1407). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 299), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start with devices 37a, 37b. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 299) ends, the first symbol display device The variation display executed in 37a and 37b is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is set to the first stop symbol (first symbol) in the display mode set by the processing of S305, S309 or S311 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 299). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1408). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S809 or the process of S810 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 304), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S812 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 304), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) in the display mode set by the processing of S806 or the processing of S807 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 304). To do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1409), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1409: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1410). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1410: Yes), the process is shifted to S1401 and each process after S1401 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1410: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1411, S1412).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1411). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1402 (S1412).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1401 to S1408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1409, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1409: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 308 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1413 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1413), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1414). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1415), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1416), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1409 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1401 to S1408, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1411 and S1412 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1401. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1401 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1301) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1401 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 311. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1404). This jackpot control process (S1404) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 310), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and corresponding. This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the jackpot control process (FIGS. 311, S1404), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1501). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203d is set to ON by the processing of S216 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 298), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1501, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1501: Yes), the opening command is set (S1502). Then, the jackpot start flag 203d is set to off (S1503), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1501: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1504). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the process of S1504, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S1504: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1504, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S1504: Yes), the process of S1505 is executed. In the process of S1505, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1505). If it is determined in the process of S1505 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1505: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65) is based on the open scenario table 202f. The V winning opening 650a) of the winning device 650 is opened (S1506), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1507). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1401) of the main process (see FIG. 310) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the continuous jackpot is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, the display round number command according to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the cumulative number of rounds in the continuous jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be made aware that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1505, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1505: No), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S1508). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or , When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) are won in the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1508, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1508: Yes), the corresponding winning opening is satisfied. The opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed to end this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S1508: No), the ending effect is started. It is determined whether it is the timing (S1510). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball ejection time, has elapsed. To determine as.

In the process of S1510, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1510: Yes), the ending command is set (S1511), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1401) of the main process (see FIG. 310) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1510 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1510: No), it is determined in the process of S1510 whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1512). If it is determined in the process of S1512 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1512: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1512, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed is the jackpot C (S1513). In the processing of S1513, if it is determined that the hit is not C (5R time saving no big hit) (S1513: No), 100 is set in the time saving medium total counter 203c and 1 is set in the time saving medium special 2 counter 203j (S1514). The process proceeds to S1515. On the other hand, in the processing of S1513, if it is determined that the jackpot is C (5R time saving no jackpot) (S1513: Yes), the processing of S1514 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S1515.

In the process of S1515, a state command corresponding to the state after the big hit is set (S1515). Then, the end of the jackpot is set (S1516), the jackpot middle flag 203e is set to off (S1517), and this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process (S1405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 312. FIG. 312 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S1405). This small hit control process (S1405) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 310), and when the papachinko machine 10 is in the small hit state of a special symbol, various effects according to the small hit can be executed. , Is a process for opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the small hit control process (FIGS. 312, S1405), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1601). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203f is set to ON by the process of S404 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 300), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1601, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1601: Yes), the opening command is set (S1602). Then, the small hit start flag 203f is set to off (S1603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S1601: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1604). As for the small hits of the special symbols, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the small hits of the special symbols (including during the small hit game of the special symbols). Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol. In the process of S1604, if it is not during the small hit of the special symbol (S1604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1604, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the small hit (S1604: Yes), the process of S1605 is executed. In the process of S1605, it is determined whether or not it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1605). In the process of S1605, when it is determined that it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202f (S1605: Yes). S1606), it is determined whether this time is the 5th or 10th opening timing (S1607).

In the process of S1607, if it is determined that this is the 5th or 10th opening timing (S1607: Yes), then it is determined whether the V flag 203i is set to ON (S1608), and if it is ON, it is determined. When it is determined that there is no (off) (S1608: No), an instruction command for notifying the outside that the V prize has not been won even though a predetermined period has passed since the small hit game was started. Is set (S1609), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1607 that this time is not the 5th or 10th opening timing (S1607: No), or when it is determined that the V flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S1608 (S1608). : Yes) ends this process as it is. The instruction command set in the process of S1609 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1401) of the main process (see FIG. 310) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the instruction command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display instruction command to the display control device 114. When the display instruction command is received by the display control device 114, the guidance highlighting that emphasizes the guidance display in the right-handed game is executed in the third symbol display device 81 for a period until the V switch 650e3 detects the ball. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, if it is not the V winning opening opening timing (S1605: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1610). Specifically, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening scenario set corresponding to the small hit game is completed, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) are won in the V winning device 650. To determine.

If it is determined in the processing of S1610 that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1610: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning of the V winning device 650) is determined. The mouth 650a) is closed (S1611) to end this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S1610: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1612). In the process of S1612, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1612: Yes), the ending command is set (S1613), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1401) of the main process (see FIG. 310) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1612 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1612: No), it is determined in the process of S1614 whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1614). If it is determined in the process of S1614 that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1614: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1614, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1614: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 223i is set to ON (S1615), and it is determined that it is set to ON. (S1615: Yes) sets an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 223i, sets the jackpot start flag 203d and the jackpot medium flag 203e on (S1617), and sets the V flag 223i to off. (S1618), the V-passing flag 203k is set to off (S1619), the small hit medium flag 203g is set to off (S1620), and this process is terminated.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 313 to 327, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 313. FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S2061). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing (S2118 in FIG. It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of (S2061). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 314, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (S2115: Yes in FIG. 314), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2118. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2062 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2062: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2118 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2063).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1516 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the data shifts to S1408.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1516, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1406). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S1515 in FIG. 338). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1516 is executed, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1516 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1411) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S1408 is reached with the power off flag turned off because the start-up process of this time was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1408 was started via the processes of S1404 to S1406. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1409 is that when the processing of S1408 is reached via the processing of S1404 to S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S2101 this time was executed (S2101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2112 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2113 and the variation display setting process of S2114 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the frame buttons 22 and 23 (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22) operated by the player in order to enhance the effect of the effect are pressed, and the frame button This is a process for setting the effect corresponding to the case where the input of 22 is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 323.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110), various counter update processes (S2111) are executed. The various counter update processes are processes for updating the values of a plurality of counters of the effect counter 223f provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter is updated every 1 millisecond in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. Here, a method of updating a plurality of counters included in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.

In the present embodiment, when setting the effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the values of a plurality of counters are referred to. In such a configuration, for example, if the values of all the counters are updated by 1 each time the various counter update processes (S2111) are executed, that is, if the update method of each counter is unified, the update of each counter is performed. Since the condition is synchronized and there is a problem that it is not possible to give randomness to the set effect mode, the updated values of the counters are configured not to be synchronized.

After finishing the various counter update processes (S2111), the effect update process (S2112) is next executed. This effect update process (S2112) is for performing a process for changing the content of the effect (already set variable display) currently being executed during the effect execution. Details of this effect update process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 324.

After the effect update process (S2112), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2113). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 315.

Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In the process of S2114, the variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 320.

Then, when the variable display setting process (S2114) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S2117), and the power-off process is executed (S2118). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2116: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2116: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 315. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Further, in this process, when the winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the score effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process (FIGS. 315, S2113), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When the variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2203). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 320) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). Then, when the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 320) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2207). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 (special). The number of holdings N1) of the variation display in the symbol is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2208). Further, in the process of S2208, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S2208 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning prize is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the special value of the main control device 110 by the processing of S2208. It can be adjusted to the value of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected. Or, at the time of lottery of the special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. When the process of S2208 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S2207, when the reserved ball number command has not been received (S2207: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2207). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2210), and the winning information-related processing is executed (S2211). ).

Here, the contents of the winning information-related processing (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. 316. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S2211). This prize information related process (S2211) is for determining whether or not to execute the score effect based on the prize information (variation type) included in the prize information command received this time and the current game situation. Processing is executed.

When the prize information related process (S2211) is executed, first, the received prize information command information is stored in the corresponding prize information storage area 223a (S2301), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is read out (S2301). S2302). Then, it is determined whether the value read in the process of S2302 is 2 or more (S2303), and if it is determined that the value is 2 or more (S2303: Yes), then the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON. Is determined (S2304). If it is determined in the processing of S2304 that the effect prohibition flag 223j is not set on (set to off) (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2305 and whether or not to execute the scoring effect. Judgment processing is performed.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned processing of S2303, when it is determined that the read counter value is less than 2 (S2303: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S2304 that the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S2303: No). S2304: Yes) skips the determination process of whether or not to execute the scoring effect, and shifts to the process of S2314 described later.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the winning information-related processing (S2211), the scoring effect can be executed only when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a predetermined number (2) or more. Therefore, since the score effect can be surely executed over a predetermined number (2 pieces) or more of the variable display, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to on, that is, when the score effect is already executed, the score effect being executed is the last because the new score effect is not set. Can be provided to the player.

Next, the process (S2305 to S2313) for setting the scoring effect will be described. In the process of S2305, the first score effect selection table 222b is read out (S2305). Next, using the variation type included in the winning information command received this time, the current number of reserved balls, and the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1, the first score effect selection table 222b is referred to to execute the score effect. The presence / absence and the effect mode of the scoring effect to be executed are determined (S2306), and whether or not to execute the scoring effect is determined (S2307).

If it is determined in the process of S2307 that the score effect is to be executed (S2307: Yes), the effect type flag 223n is updated according to the effect type (score effect A to C) selected in the process of S2306 (S2308). The total score setting process for setting the score to be given in the current score effect is executed (S2309). Here, the contents of the total score setting process (S2309) will be described with reference to FIG. 317. FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing the contents of the total score setting process (S2309).

When this total score setting process is executed, first, the total score selection table 222d is read (S2401), the variation type included in the winning information command received this time, the current number of reserved balls, and the effect type flag 223n. (S2402), the score is selected by referring to the total score selection table 222d, using the effect type (score effect A to C) indicated by and the value of the acquired score distribution effect counter (not shown). ). Then, the selected given score is stored in the total given score storage area 223o (S2403), and this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, the total number of points (upper limit value) to be given in the current score effect is determined in advance, and each variation display executed during the score effect is displayed. When setting, the number of points to be displayed is determined so that the total number of determined points is the upper limit, and the effect content of each variable display is set. With this configuration, only the final display mode (final display score number) of the score effect can be determined in advance, and the score number displayed in each variation display can be set for each variation display. It is possible to make the production mode executed during the production more diverse.

The method of setting the number of points displayed during the scoring effect is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, when it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed, the total number of points given in the current scoring effect ( The upper limit value) and the number of points to be displayed in each of the variable displays executed during the score production may be determined in advance. Further, as in the present embodiment described above, only the total number of points (upper limit value) to be given in the current score effect is predetermined, and among the plurality of variation displays executed during the score effect, other than the last variation display. The variable display of is determined regardless of the total number of points (upper limit) for which the number of points to be given is set, and when the final variable display is set, the total number of points displayed is the total number of predetermined points (the total number of points). The value may be increased or decreased so as to be the upper limit value).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 316. When the continuous notice grant score setting process (S2309) is completed, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is read (S2310), the read counter value is set as the value of the effect fluctuation number counter 223m (S2311), and this time is read. The notice target information is set in the prize information storage area 223a corresponding to the prize information command (S2312), the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S2313), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2303 that the read counter value (value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b) is less than 2 (S2303), the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON in the processing of S2304. If it is determined that there is (S2304: Yes), or if it is determined that the score effect is not executed in the processing of S2307 (S2307: No), the process proceeds to S2314 and is included in the winning information command received this time. It is determined whether the variation type is super reach or higher (super reach or special reach) (S2314).

If it is determined in the process of S2314 that it is super reach or higher (S2314: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2310 described above, the process of S231 to S2313 is executed, and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not higher than the super reach (S2314: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the processing of S2314 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, a limiting condition (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the setting status of the effect prohibition flag 223j) is provided to limit the setting of the scoring effect. Further, even when the restriction condition is not satisfied, as a result of referring to the first scoring effect selection table 222b, a determination result that the scoring effect is not executed may be selected. In such a case, if the variation type included in the received winning information command is a predetermined period or longer (80 seconds or longer), the winning information corresponding to the long fluctuation in which the scoring effect is not executed is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area. It will be stored.

In such a state, when the next prize information command is received and the score effect is set based on the prize information included in the received prize information command, it is determined while the set score effect is being executed. There is a problem that the variable display for a period of more than a period (80 seconds or more) is executed, and the scoring effect is delayed. Further, for example, when the winning information for which the scoring effect is not set includes the variable type per super reach a, the scoring effect becomes a big hit while the scoring effect is being executed, and the effect of the scoring effect is reduced. There was a problem of letting them do it.

In response to such a problem, in the present embodiment, even if the winning information does not set the score effect, the value of the effect variation counter 223 m is set when a predetermined condition (variation type is super reach or higher) is satisfied. While the winning information that is set and configured to execute the process of setting the effect prohibition flag 223j to ON and the predetermined condition (variation type is super reach or higher) is satisfied is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Is configured so that no new scoring effect is set. As a result, the effect of the score effect can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, when the variation type is a normal reach, that is, a jackpot with a short variation time, the setting of the score effect is not prohibited. With this configuration, a big hit can be generated while the scoring effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 315. In the process of S2209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2209: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received (S2212), and the winning-related command has been received. If it is determined (S2212: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S2213), and this process is terminated. This hit-related process (S2213) is for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game that is executed when the big hit or the small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol. Processing is performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

Here, the contents of the hit-related processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. 318. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related processing. When this hit-related process (S2213) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S2501). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S2501: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S2502), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 314) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2501: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2503). When it is determined that the round number command has been received in the process of S2503 (S2503: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (S2504), and this process ends. In the present embodiment, since the main control device 110 transmits information indicating the number of rounds as the number of rounds command, the number of rounds command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, the voice lamp control device is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started from the main control device 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2503: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S2505). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the process of S2505 (S2505: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S2506), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S2505 that the jackpot end command has not been received (S2505: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S2507).

If it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the process of S2507 (S2507: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set based on the small hit type (S2507), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S2507 that the small hit start command has not been received (S2507: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S2509). In the process of S2509, when it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S2509: Yes), a small hit end command for display is set (S2510) in order to execute an effect suggesting the end of the small hit game. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2509: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S2511). If it is determined in the process of S2511 that the V entrance passage command has been received (S2511: Yes), the display V entrance passage command is set (S2512), and this process ends. Further, in the process of S2511, when it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S2511: No), it is determined whether or not the V passage command has been received next (S2513).

In the process of S2513, when it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2513: Yes), a display V effect command for indicating an effect based on the ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set (S2513: Yes). S2514), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2513, when it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S2513: No), then it is determined whether or not the instruction command has been received (S2515). If it is determined that the instruction command has been received in the process of S2515 (S2515; Yes), the display instruction command is set (S2516), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the instruction command has not been received (S2515: No), this process ends as it is.

In the present embodiment, the small hit game is configured to open the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 12 times during the small hit game, and the V switch 650e3 is executed at the 5th or 10th opening timing. Is configured to output an instruction command when the ball is not detected (see S1609 in FIG. 312). When it is determined that this instruction command has been received, the third symbol display device 81 displays a highlight guidance display mode (see FIG. 277 (a)) that emphasizes and guides the V winning device 650 to win a ball. Set the display instruction command to make it.

Then, when the V switch 650e3 detects the ball while the highlight guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 277 (b), the achievement display mode for displaying the achievement display mode for blessing the player is displayed. Set the command. That is, in the present embodiment, if the small hit game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the ball is reliably configured to win the V winning device 650 by performing the right-handed game. The ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is configured to flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 provided with the V switch 650e3. If it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the fifth opening timing of the opening / closing door 650f1 despite the configuration as described above, the third symbol is displayed when the small hit game is started. The left-handed game is executed without noticing the display for guiding the right-handed hit to the guide display area Dm2 (see FIG. 268 (b)) of the display device 81. Alternatively, it is possible that the game is stopped.

In such a case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform the right-handed game by changing the display for guiding the right-handed person displayed in the guide display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display. Further, when the right-handed game is performed after the highlighted guide display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the timing for displaying the highlighted guide display mode (see FIG. The timing is set so that the launched ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player who has executed the right-handed game according to the display of the emphasis guidance display mode cannot let the ball flow down into the special discharge flow path 650e2 during the small hit game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 315. In the process of S2212, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S2214). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2214: Yes), the stop command process is executed (S2215), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S2216), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2214: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2217), and this process is terminated.

Here, the content of the stop command processing will be described with reference to FIG. 319. FIG. 319 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process. This stop command process executes various processes when a stop command is received from the main control device 110, that is, at the stop timing of the special symbol. , When the scoring effect is finished, a process of determining whether to newly execute the scoring effect is executed.

When the stop command process (S2215) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect prohibition release flag 223k is set to ON (S2601). When it is determined in the processing of S2601 that it is not set to on (set to off) (S2601: No), that is, when the scoring effect is not executed at the present time, or it is not the final variation of the scoring effect. In that case, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect prohibition release flag 223k is set to on (S2601: Yes), the effect prohibition flag 223j and the effect prohibition release flag 223k are set to off (S2602), and then the special symbol 1 is held. The value of the ball count counter 223b is read out (S2603), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or more (S2604). If it is determined in the process of S2604 that the counter value is 2 or more (S2604: Yes), the winning information is read from the winning information storage area corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter being 2 or more (S2605). , The second scoring effect selection table 222c is read out (S2606), and it is determined whether or not the scoring effect corresponding to the target variation type can be executed (S2607).

Then, when the determination result of S2607 is determined (S2608) and it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed (S2608: Yes), the effect type flag 223n is updated according to the effect type (score effect A to C) to be executed (S2608: Yes). S2609), the same total score setting process (S2610 (S2309)) as the above-mentioned prize information related process (FIG. 316) is executed. Here, the detailed contents of the total score setting process (see FIG. 317) will be omitted.

When the total score setting process (S2610 (S2309)) is completed, the value of the target special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is read out (S2611), and the read counter value is set as the value of the effect fluctuation number counter 223m. Then, the effect target information is set in the prize information storage area 223a corresponding to the target prize command (S2613), the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2604, when it is determined that the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is less than 2 (S2604: No), in the processing of S2608, it is determined that the scoring effect is not executed (S2608). : No) shifts to the process of S2615, and determines whether or not the winning information including the variation type of super reach or higher is stored (S2615). If it is determined in the process of S2615 that there is winning information including a variation type of super reach or higher (S2615), the above-mentioned processes of S261 to S2614 are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning information including the variation type of super reach or higher is not stored (S2615: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the variation display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 320. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2114). This variation display setting process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2707. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S2702), and then in the processing of S2203 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 315), the fluctuation starts. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the pattern command is acquired from RAM 223 (S2703).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, an effect setting process for setting an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S2704), and then a display variation for notifying the display control device 114. It is generated based on the variation pattern type in which the pattern command is acquired and the score effect mode set in the effect setting process, and is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2705). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. When the processing of S2705 is completed, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2706), and the process shifts to the processing of S2707.

Here, the contents of the effect setting process (S2704) executed in the process of S2704 will be described with reference to FIGS. 321 and 322. FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S2704), and FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the contents of the score giving effect setting process (S2803) executed in the effect setting process (S2704). is there. This effect setting process (S2704) is the current variation display setting process (see FIG. 316) when a score effect is set in the prize information related process (see S2211 in FIG. 316) or the stop command process (see S2215 in FIG. 319). This is a process for setting the score effect (granted score) of the fluctuation pattern set in S2114) of 320.

When the effect setting process (S2704) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect variation counter 223 m is larger than 0, that is, whether the score effect is being executed (S2801). When it is determined that the value of the effect fluctuation number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S2801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the effect type is set for the score effect in the effect type flag 223n (S2802). If it is determined in the process of S2802 that the effect type is set (S2802: Yes), the score giving effect setting process is executed (S2803), and this process is terminated. The content of the score giving effect setting process (S2803) will be described later with reference to FIG. 322.

In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the effect type is not set in the effect type flag 223n (S2802: No), that is, in the prize information related process (S2211 of FIG. 316), a new effect type is not set. When a period for prohibiting the setting of the scoring effect is provided (S2314: when the Yes process is executed), the scoring effect setting process (S2803) is skipped and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2801 when it is determined that the value of the effect variation number counter 223m is not larger than 0 (0) (S2801: No), the variation pattern of the mode without the score effect is determined (S2804). ), Next, it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S2805). When it is determined in the process of S2805 that the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S2805: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to set the variation display after the scoring effect is completed, the effect prohibition release flag is set. 223k is set to ON (S2806), the value of the score counter 223p is cleared (S2087), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to off (S2805: No), the processes of S2806 and S2807 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the contents of the score giving effect setting process (S2803) executed in the effect setting process (S2704 of FIG. 321) will be described. FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the contents of the score giving effect setting process. In this score-giving effect setting process (S2803), the score effect is executed with the total score set when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed as the upper limit of the score given to each variation display during the score effect. The process of setting according to the number of residual fluctuations to be performed is executed.

When this score giving effect setting process (S2803) is executed, first, the value of the given score counter 223p, that is, the number of points already given (displayed) in the current score effect is read (S2901), and then the total number is given. The value stored in the score storage area 223o, that is, the total number of points to be given in the current score production is read out (S2902). Then, the difference between the value of the total score storage area 223o and the value of the score counter 223p is calculated (S2903), and the remaining score that can be given in the current score production is calculated.

After finishing the processing of S2903, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect fluctuation number counter 223m is 1 (S2904), and when it is determined that the value is not 1 (S2904: No), that is, the current variation is the score effect. If it is determined that it is not the final fluctuation of, the calculated difference and the value of the effect fluctuation number counter 223m are used so that all the remaining scores are not given (displayed) in this fluctuation display, and the given score selection table 222e With reference to, the score to be given in the current variation display is selected (S2905), and the variation pattern accompanied by the score effect corresponding to the selected score (granted score) is determined (S2906).

Then, the given score selected this time is added to the value of the given score counter 223p (S2907), the value of the effect fluctuation number counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S2908), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2904, when it is determined that the value of the effect fluctuation number counter 223m is 1 (S2904: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the current variation display is the final variation of the score effect, S2903 In order to display all the differences calculated in the process, a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a score effect in a mode corresponding to the calculated differences is determined (S2909), and the value corresponding to the calculated difference is added to the value of the given score counter (S2909). S2910).

Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern determined this time includes an operation score effect for displaying the score by the player operating the frame button 22 (S2911), and it is determined that the operation score effect is included. In the case (S2911: Yes), the operation score execution flag 223q is set to ON (S2912), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation score effect is not included in the process of S2911 (S2911: No), the process of S2912 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

By using the score giving effect setting process (S2803) configured in this way, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, only the total points given during the current score effect can be used as the winning information to be the target of the score effect. By simply setting in advance based on the above, it is possible to execute various scoring effects for each variable display executed during the period until the variable display corresponding to the target winning information is executed. In addition, even if various points are given (displayed) by each variation display executed during the period until the variation display corresponding to the target winning information is executed, the variation corresponding to the target winning information is given. In the display (variable display that is the final variation of the score effect), the difference obtained by subtracting the already displayed (granted) score from the total score given in the score effect of child crying can be displayed, which is a target. The result of the scoring effect can be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the winning information, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 323, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 314) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107), a process for displaying the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 at each timing on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Further, when the operation score effect is set in the score effect, the given score monitoring process is executed when the score given (displayed) is variable based on the operation content of the frame button 22. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed, the total number of points to be given in the scoring effect this time is determined, and each time the variable display during the scoring effect is executed, the display is displayed. It is configured to execute an effect (score effect) corresponding to each variation display while determining the score to be performed. When the operation score effect is selected as the score effect, the score that can be given in the operation score effect, that is, the score given when the frame button 22 is appropriately operated when the operation score effect is executed. Is set as the score to be displayed in the variable display this time, so that the number of remaining points that can be displayed during the score production is managed.

Therefore, when the player participates in the operation score effect and obtains a score, there is no contradiction between the management content of the remaining score and the score actually displayed (acquired by the player). On the other hand, if the player does not participate in the operation score production, there will be a contradiction between the management content of the remaining score and the score actually displayed (acquired by the player). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the player has appropriately operated the frame button 22 during the operation score production, and the displayed score is determined based on the determination result, and the determination result is obtained. It is configured to execute the process of correcting the management content of the remaining score based on.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is detected (S3001), and if it is determined that the pressing is not detected (S301: No), it is as it is. This process ends. When it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S3001: Yes), then it is determined whether the current (timing when the frame button 22 is pressed) is in the scoring operation effect period (S3002). Here, the determination is executed based on the fluctuation time information that is constantly managed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 314).

In the process of S3002, when it is determined that the current scoring operation effect period is in progress, the operated flag 223r is set to ON (S3003), and the display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing is set (S3004). End the process. Here, if the operated flag 223r is not set to ON, in the effect update process (S2112 in FIG. 314), the variable process of the effect content of the variable display being executed is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that the current time is not the scoring operation effect period (S3002: No), the frame is based on the time information managed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 314). It is determined whether the timing at which the button 22 is operated is one of the operation valid periods for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 (S3005), and when it is determined to be the operation valid period (S3005: Yes), the determination is made. A display press command is set according to the operation valid period (S3004), and if it is determined that the operation is not valid (S3006: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the content of the effect update process (S2112) executed in the main process (see FIG. 314) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 324. FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process (S2112). In this effect update process (S2112), in the operation score effect executed during the score effect, the content of the variation pattern already set is changed based on whether or not the player operates the frame button 22. The process is executed.

When the effect update process (S2112) is executed, first. If it is determined whether the operation score execution flag 223q is set to ON (S3101) and it is determined that the operation score execution flag 223q is not set to ON (S3101: No), the present process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the execution is turned on (S3101: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is the end timing of the operation score effect (S3102). Here, based on the time information managed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 314), it is determined whether the current timing is the end timing of the operation score effect.

In the process of S3102, if it is determined that it is not the end timing (S3102: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is the end timing (S3102: Yes), then the operated flag 223r is set. If it is determined whether it is on (S3103), if it is determined that it is not on (off) (S3103: No), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is on (S3103: Yes). That is, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated even though the end timing of the operation score effect has been reached, the score given in the operation score effect is extracted (S3104), and the extracted grant is extracted. The score is subtracted from the value of the given score counter 223p (S3105), and it is determined whether the value of the current effect fluctuation number counter 223m is 0 (S3106).

If it is determined in the process of S3106 that the value of the effect variation counter 223 m is not 0 (S3106: No), that is, if it is determined that the current is not in the final variation of the score effect, this process is terminated as it is. .. In this case, when setting the next variation display, the score effect is set based on the value of the given score counter 223p subtracted in the process of S3105, so that the presence or absence of the operation for the frame button 22 in the operation score effect is determined. The remaining scoring effects can be executed in correspondence.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3106, when it is determined that the value of the effect fluctuation number counter 223m is 0 (S3106: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the current scoring effect is in the final variation, it is being executed. In order to correct the number of points to be given during the remaining period of the variable display, the effect correction process is executed (S3107), and this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the effect correction process (S3107) executed in the effect update process (S2112 of FIG. 324) will be described with reference to FIG. 325. FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect correction process (S3107). This effect correction process (S3107) later executes a score that is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (not given to the player) when there is no operation on the frame button 22 for the operation score effect. The correction process for finally giving to the player is executed by changing the effect mode to be performed.

In the present embodiment, on the premise that the player operates the frame button 22 in the operation score effect and the score is given, the score to be given in the remaining score effect is predetermined. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 is properly operated during the operation score effect, the predetermined score effect is executed as it is. Therefore, it is not necessary to set or change the content of the effect while the score effect is being executed, and the processing load can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, since the player tends to operate the frame button 22 during the operation score effect, it is possible to display (give) the score during the operation score effect by setting the effect mode of the score effect set in advance. It is set as a premise, and it is configured so that the chance of changing the effect mode during the variable display is reduced, but it is not limited to this, and the effect mode of the score effect set in advance is operated. The score is displayed during the score effect ( It may be set on the premise that it is not given). In this case, for example, it is preferable to notify the player that the operation score effect is being executed without being noticed by the player.

Further, instead of setting the effect mode after the operation score effect in advance, the effect mode may be set based on the effect result of the operation score effect after the end of the operation score effect, or during the operation score effect. The operation result of whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22 is set for a predetermined period (for example, the period from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to when it is turned off, or the same player is playing the game. A storage means for storing the period (the period during which the identification information that identifies the individual is input) is provided, and the setting method of the effect mode is changed based on the operation result stored in the storage means. It may be configured.

When the effect correction process (S3107) is executed, first, the difference between the value of the score counter 223p after subtraction and the value stored in the total score storage area 223o is calculated (S3201), and the remaining effect Calculate the score to be given in the period. Next, it is determined whether the period in which the operation score effect is executed is the first notice period (see FIG. 269) (S3202).

In the process of S3202, when it is determined that the first notice period is reached (S3202: Yes), the effect corresponding to the calculated difference is set as the rewrite effect of the second notice period (S3203), and the set rewrite effect is supported. The display rewriting effect command to be displayed is set (S3204), other execution management processing is executed (S3205), and this processing is terminated. With this configuration, if a score-giving effect is set in which the operation score effect is executed during the first notice period, it is executed during the second notice period set after the first notice period. By varying the effect mode of the effect executed in the score-giving effect, it is possible to add points that were not displayed (granted) during the operation score effect.

As a result, the same number of points as the preset points during the notice period (the number of points displayed in the first notice period and the second notice period) can be displayed during the notice period, so that the player can see the score. Therefore, it is possible to execute the reach effect while expecting that more points could be obtained if the frame button 22 is operated in the operation score effect, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

Here, as the rewriting effect during the second notice period, there are an effect in which only the number of points given by using the same effect mode is changed, and an effect in which the executed effect mode is changed. For example, the operation score. It may be appropriately set according to the score not displayed in the effect (the difference score calculated in the processing of S3201) and the length of the second notice period.

On the other hand, in the process of S3202, when it is determined that the present is not the second notice period (S3202: No), it is not the notice period in the variable display but the effect mode during the reach period in which the reach effect is executed is changed. Reach mode correction process (S3206) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the reach mode correction process (S3206) will be described with reference to FIG. 325. FIG. 325 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reach mode correction process (S3206). In this reach mode correction process (S3206), a process for setting the reach mode to be executed based on the lottery result of the variation display and the current gauge amount is performed.

When the reach mode correction process (S3206) is executed, the current gauge amount is first calculated based on the value of the total score storage area 223o (S3301), and then the current fluctuation is the hit fluctuation (winning the jackpot). (S3302). If it is determined that the fluctuation is a hit (S3302: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gauge amount is less than 3 (S3303), and if it is determined that it is less than 3, (S3303: Yes). As a mode of the first reach period, a rewriting first reach effect of a mode accompanied by a score effect having a gauge amount of 5 is set (S3304), and then a mission reach is set as a rewrite reach mode of the second reach period (S3305). ), Then, various display rewriting effect commands are set (S3306), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3303, when it is determined that the current gauge amount is not less than 3 (3 or more) (S3303: No), it is determined whether the current gauge amount is 1 or more (S3307). If it is determined to be 1 or more (S3307: Yes), as the mode of the first reach period, a rewritten first reach effect of a mode accompanied by a score effect having a gauge amount of 6 is set (S3308), and the process of S3306 is performed. Move to. If it is determined that the value is not 1 or more (0) in the processing of S3307 (S3307: No), a special reach effect corresponding to the total reach period of the first reach period and the second reach period is set (S3307: No). The process proceeds to S3309) and S3306, and this process is completed.

Further, in the process of S3302, when it is determined that the current variation is not a hit variation (a deviation variation), the deviation correction process (S3310) is executed and the present process is terminated. This out-of-order correction process (S3310) is a process for setting a reach effect to prevent the player from having a sense of expectation of a big hit unnecessarily when the winning result is out of order, and is displayed. A process for correcting the gauge amount to be performed and the effect mode of the reach effect is executed.

Here, the content of the disengagement correction process (S3310) will be described with reference to FIG. 327. FIG. 327 is a flowchart showing the contents of the disengagement correction process (S3310). When the deviation correction process (S3310) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gauge amount is less than 3 (S3401), and if it is determined to be less than 3 (S3401: Yes), this process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number is 3 or more, a rewritten first reach effect is set as the mode of the first reach period, which is accompanied by a score-giving effect in which the gauge amount is in the range of 0 to 2 (S3402). As a rewrite reach mode of the second reach period, a mission reach is set (S3403), various display rewrite effect commands are set (S3404), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 328 to 345. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 328, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 328 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. 329. FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S4001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S4102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S4102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S4103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S4001 in FIG. 328) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 328) (S4105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S4001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 329, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S4102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S4101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S4101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S4102 and S4102, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 328. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S4004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S4005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 343 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S6302 in FIG. 343 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 330 (b)), the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on (not shown), which are images at power-on, are simply drawn. The command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 330 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 330 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image (not shown) at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. be able to. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S4005, the interrupt permission is set (S4006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S4006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 330 (a). FIG. 330 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 330 (b). FIG. 330B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 296) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 330 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not an image at power-on (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S4302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S4302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 331 to 339.

In the display setting process (S4303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 340 to 342.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S4304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S4303) or the simple display setting process (S4309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is scored. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S4306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305), which are determined in the task process (S4304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 296 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 345.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S4307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to D, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete off, chance eye). ) Is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 34) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S4308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S4309) is executed to display the S4304. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 331 to 339, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 331 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 331, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S4401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S4403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4405), the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S4405) will be described with reference to FIG. 332 (a). FIG. 332 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S4501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S4501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S4504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S4505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S4504, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S4502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4503, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 345. In the processing of S4404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4406). If there is a display variable type command (S4406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S4407), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S4407) will be described with reference to FIG. 332 (b). FIG. 332 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S4601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 330 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S4602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. (S4603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S4304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S4603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, but the character ROM 234 is used as a normal video before drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the drawing responsiveness of the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S4601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S4602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 331. In the processing of S4406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4408), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S4408: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S4409), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S4409) will be described with reference to FIG. 333 (a). FIG. 333A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S6303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S4701). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A, B), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S4702), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S4701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S4702. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is displayed according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag set by S4702 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4702, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 331. In the processing of S4408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4410), and there is an error command. If (S4410: Yes), error command processing is executed (S4411), and the process returns to S4401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S4411) will be described with reference to FIG. 333 (b). FIG. 333 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4801). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4802), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4801, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4802 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S4802, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 331. In the processing of S4410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S4410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4412), and there is a hit-related command. If (S4412: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S4413), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S4413) will be described with reference to FIG. 334. FIG. 334 is a flowchart showing hit-related command processing. This hit-related command processing executes processing corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the hit-related command processing (FIGS. 334 and S4413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined in the process of S4901 that there is a hit start command for display (S4901: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S4902), and the process proceeds to the process of S4903.

Here, the details of the jackpot start command processing (S4902) will be described with reference to FIG. 335 (a). FIG. 335 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S4902). This jackpot start command process (S4902) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 334) that there is a jackpot start command for display, and a third effect suggesting the start of the jackpot is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot start command processing (S4902), first, the jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). After that, based on the jackpot start display data table, the time data is set to the time counter 233h (S5003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5004), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5005). This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 334, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command in the processing of S4901 (S4901: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4903. When the processing of S4901 or S4902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S4903). If it is determined in the process of S4903 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S4904), and the process proceeds to the process of S4905.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S4904) will be described with reference to FIG. 335 (b). FIG. 335 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command process (S4904). This round number command process (S4904) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 334) that a display round number command has been received, and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is updated. This is a process for displaying the effect of the command on the third symbol display device 81.

In the round number command process (S4904), first, the round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5102), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5104), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5105), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 334, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4903 that there is no display round number command (S4903: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4905. When the processing of S4903 or S4904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S4905). If it is determined in the process of S4905 that there is a jackpot end command for display (S4905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S4906), and the process proceeds to the process of S4907.

Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S4906) will be described with reference to FIG. 336 (a). FIG. 336 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command process (S4906). This jackpot end command process (S4906) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 334) that a jackpot end command has been received, and a third effect suggesting the end of the jackpot game is produced. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot end command processing (S4906), first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5202), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the jackpot end display data table (S5203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5204), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5205), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 334, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command in the process of S4905 (S4905: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4907. When the processing of S4905 or S4906 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit start command for display (S4907). If it is determined in the process of S4907 that there is a small hit start command for display (S4907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S4908), and the process proceeds to the process of S4909.

Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S4908) will be described with reference to FIG. 336 (b). This small hit start command process (S4908) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 334), and suggests the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit start command processing (S4908), first, the small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). After that, the time data is set to the time counter 233h (S5303) based on the small hit start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), and the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5305). , End this process.

Returning to FIG. 334, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4907 that there is no small hit start command for display (S4907: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4909. When the processing of S4907 or S4908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit end command for display (S4909). If it is determined that there is a small hit end command in the process of S4909 (S4909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S4910), and the process proceeds to the process of S4911.

Here, the details of the small hit end command processing (S4910) will be described with reference to FIG. 337 (a). This small hit end command process (S4910) is a process executed when it is determined that a small hit end command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 334), and suggests the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the small hit end command processing (S4910), first, the small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5405), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 334, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4909 that there is no small hit end command for display (S4909: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4911. When the processing of S4909 or S4910 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S4911). If it is determined that there is a V entrance passage command in the process of S4911 (S4911: Yes), the V entrance pass command process is executed (S4912), and the process proceeds to the process of S4913.

Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S4912) will be described with reference to FIG. 337 (b). This V-entrance pass command process (S4912) is a process executed when it is determined that a V-entrance pass command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 334), and the V-winning device 650 has a V-winning position. This is a process for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 an effect suggesting that the game ball has passed through the switch 650e3.

In the V entrance passage command processing (S4912), first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V inlet passage display data table (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5505), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 334, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4911 that there is no display V entrance passage command (S4911: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4913. When the processing of S4911 or S4912 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S4913). If it is determined that there is a V effect command in the process of S4913 (S4913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S4914), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4913, if it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S4913: No), this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S4914) will be described with reference to FIG. 338. This V effect command process (S4914) is a process executed when it is determined that a V effect command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 334), and there is a high probability that a jackpot game will be granted. This is a process for displaying the effect suggesting that the third symbol display device 81.

In the V effect command processing (S4914), first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5602), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S5603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5605), and this process ends.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 331. In the processing of S4412, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a pressing command corresponding to the pressing of the frame button 22 among the unprocessed commands (S4412: No). S4414) If there is a press command (S4414: Yes), the press command process is executed (S4415), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the pressing command processing (S4415) will be described with reference to FIG. 339 (a). FIG. 339 (a) is a flowchart showing the pressing command processing. This pressing command processing executes the processing corresponding to the pressing command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the pressing command processing (S4415), first, the pressing display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the pressed display data table (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5705), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 331, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4414, if it is determined that there is no pressing command (S4414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rewriting effect-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4416), and the rewriting effect-related command is determined. If there is (S4416: Yes), the command processing related to the rewriting effect is executed (S4417), and the process returns to the processing of S4401.

Here, the details of the rewriting effect-related command processing (S4417) will be described with reference to FIG. 339 (b). FIG. 339 (a) is a flowchart showing command processing related to rewriting effect. This rewrite effect-related command process executes the process corresponding to the rewrite effect-related command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rewriting effect-related command processing (S4415), first, the rewriting effect-related display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the pressed display data table (S5703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5705), and this process ends.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 331. When it is determined that there is no rewrite effect related command in the process of S4416 (S4416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S4418), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

In the processing of S4401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes). ), The processing of S4402 to S4418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S4401 to S4418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S4401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 330 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, the commands required to display the power-on image (see FIG. 34) from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 332 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 332 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and others. For the command of, the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 332 (a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S4501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4502, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 340 to 342, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S4303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 340, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S6002 to S6004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S6002), S6003 to S6004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S6004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 341. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be turned on is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S6101).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S6102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 340. After the warning image setting process (S6004) or in the process of S6003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S6005.

In S6005, the pointer update process is executed (S6005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 342. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6201, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S6202). As a result, if it is End information (S6202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S6203), and if it is a demo display data table (S6203: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6205), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S6203: No). S6206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 340 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S6006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S6008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S6009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S6009: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S6010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S6014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S4304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S6015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S6009, if the confirmation display flag is on (S6009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S6016). If the demo display flag is off (S6016: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S6017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S6021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S6016, if the demo display flag is on (S6016: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 330 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (Fig. A process of setting the display data table, which specifies that the display data table (not shown) is to be stopped and displayed, in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S4305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 343 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S6302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 343 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S6301 (S6301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 344.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 343 (b). FIG. 343 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S6401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S6401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6402). In the process of S6402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S6402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6403. Further, as a result of the processing of S6401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6403.

In the process of S6403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S6403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S6403 (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S6405), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 330 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 330 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 330 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 331 to 339) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 340 to 342) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 344) (see S6301: No in FIG. 343 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6303), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 344. FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the display setting process (S4303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described at the indicated address (S6501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S6502), and if it is the transfer data information (S6502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6504), and the process proceeds to S6505.

Further, in the process of S6502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S6502: No), the processes of S6503 and S6504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6506).

In the process of S6506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S6506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6507. Further, as a result of the processing of S6505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S6505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6507.

In the process of S6507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S6507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S6508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S6503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6509). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S6509: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S6509: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S6510), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S6512), and the process proceeds to S6513.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S6511, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). The discrimination in the processing of S6513 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S6513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6513 (S6513: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6514). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S6514, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S6515), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S4306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 296 (S6601). That is, in the processing of S6601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S4304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S6602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the process of S6602 (S6603). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 330 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<10th Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 346 to 358. In the tenth embodiment, the contents to be set in advance when it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed are changed with respect to the ninth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment described above, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, the total number of points given during the score effect (total number of points given) is set in advance, and in each variation display executed during the score effect. When setting the score effect, the score to be given is determined up to the total number of points to be given, and the score effect corresponding to the determined score is executed. However, in the tenth embodiment, the score effect is executed. Then, when it is determined, the difference is that the number of charge effects to be executed in the current scoring effect is set so as to be set.

Further, in the ninth embodiment described above, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed in the prize information-related processing, the score effect is executed from the variable display to be executed next. In the form, if the timing determined to execute the scoring effect in the prize information-related processing satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, if the fluctuation display during fluctuation is during high-speed fluctuation), the scoring effect is also performed for the fluctuation. The difference is that they are configurable (see Figure 346). Since the other configurations are the same, other configurations will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
The tenth embodiment is different from the ninth embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 347 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 347 (a), in the tenth embodiment, the scoring effect scenario selection table 222aa, the specific effect execution selection table 222ab, and the execution timing selection table 222ac are added. It is different from the embodiment.

The score effect scenario selection table 222aa is a data table that is referred to when determining a score effect scenario in which the number of times a specific effect is executed in the score effect is defined, and is a prize information related process 2 (S2211 in FIG. 351). It is referred to in the score effect scenario setting process (see S2351 of FIG. 352) executed in (see). In the score effect scenario selection table 222aa, the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol capable of executing the score effect (the number of continuous effects), and the effect counter 223f are displayed. A plurality of scoring effect scenarios (scenarios A to C) are defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter.

Specifically, when the variation type is per special reach or per super reach and the number of continuous effects is 2, scenario A is defined in the range where the value of the first effect counter is "0 to 9". The scoring production scenario is not specified in the range other than. The scenario A defined here is a scenario corresponding to a scoring effect in which the specific effect is executed twice. Further, when the value of the acquired first effect counter is within the range in which the score effect scenario is not specified, the score effect is not set.

In the score effect scenario selection table 222aa, a scenario is defined so that a variable type having a high jackpot expectation of a special symbol can easily execute more specific effects than a variable type having a low jackpot expectation. As a result, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the more specific effects are executed during the scoring effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the content of the effect executed during the score effect.

Further, the more the number of continuous productions in which the scoring effect can be executed, the easier it is to execute the scoring effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the scoring effect from ending in a short period of time (for example, a period of two rotations of the special symbol fluctuation), and to execute the scoring effect for a long period of time (for example, a period of four rotations of the special symbol). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the scoring effect. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special symbol change currently being changed can be included in the execution range of the scoring effect, so that the period during which the scoring effect is executed is longer. Can be set longer.

The specific effect execution selection table 222ab is a data table for selecting whether or not to execute the specific effect and the number of times the specific effect is executed in the variation display (excluding the final variation display) executed during the scoring effect. , Referred to when a new variable display is started during the period when the scoring effect is being executed. In the specific effect execution selection table 222ab, the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110, the remaining variation number of the number of variations of the special symbol (continuous effect number) capable of executing the score effect, and the remaining number of variations. The number of specific effects executed by this fluctuation (execution once, execution twice) is specified according to the remaining number of specific effects executed during the current scoring effect and the value of the second effect counter. Has been done.

Specifically, when the fluctuation type is normal reach, the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol fluctuation for which the scoring effect is continuously set is 1, and the number of remaining specific effects is 2, the value of the second effect counter. However, the number of times the specific effect is executed "1 time" is specified in the range of "0 to 49", and the specific effect is not executed in the other range. In addition, when the fluctuation type is normal reach, the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol variation for which the scoring effect is continuously set is 1, and the number of remaining specific effects is 3, the value of the second effect counter is "0". The number of executions of the specific effect "1 time" is defined in the range of "~ 69", and the number of executions of the specific effect "2 times" is specified in the range of "70 to 79".

The execution timing selection table 222ac is a data table for selecting the timing to execute the specific effect in the variation display determined to execute the specific effect among the variation displays executed during the score effect. Here, the contents specified in the execution timing selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. 350. FIG. 350 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the execution timing selection table 222ac.

As shown in FIG. 350, in the execution timing selection table 222ac, the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 and the value (0 to 99) of the third effect counter are associated with each other. , The execution timing of the specific effect is specified. Specifically, when the fluctuation type is normal reach, the value of the third effect counter is in the range of "0 to 19", and "after the first notice period" is in the range of "20 to 49" as the execution timing of the specific effect. Is specified as "after the second notice period", "during reach" is specified in the range of "50 to 89", and "specific effect is not executed" in the other range ("90 to 99"). Is stipulated.

When the fluctuation type is out of the question, "after the first notice period" is defined as the execution timing of the specific effect in the range where the value of the third effect counter is "0 to 19", and the other range ("20 to 99"). In the range of ")", "do not execute a specific effect" is stipulated. In addition, when the variation type is short deviation, it is stipulated that "specific effect is not executed" regardless of the value of the third effect counter.

That is, as described with reference to FIG. 349, when the variation type corresponding to the current variation display is short-circuited, the specific effect is not executed, so that the specific effect is displayed in the execution timing selection table 222ac. It is configured so that there is no timing to execute it. Although detailed description is omitted, for example, as shown in FIG. 349, in the present embodiment, a specific effect may be executed a plurality of times (twice) in one variation display. In this case, the execution timing of 1 specific effect is selected with reference to the execution timing selection table 222ac, and the execution timing in which the execution timing of the other specific effect comes after the execution timing of 1 specific effect is selected. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to surely make the execution timing of the specific effect executed a plurality of times different. Further, when the execution timing of the specific effect selected by referring to the execution timing selection table 222ac is reaching, that is, when there is no next execution timing in the variable display, the variable display is started. It is configured so that the execution timing that arrives first is selected.

The method of selecting the execution timing of the specific effect to be executed a plurality of times is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, the execution timing selection table 222ac is referred to using different counter values for the number of times the specific effect is executed. It may be configured to select the execution timing, or it may be configured to execute a specific effect having an effect mode different from the usual one as two specific effects at one execution timing. Further, when the execution timing is selected so that a plurality of specific effects are executed at the same execution timing, in a dedicated special period (a period that cannot be selected by referring to the execution timing selection table 222ac). It may be configured to execute a specific effect.

FIG. 347 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 347 (b), the tenth embodiment is different from the ninth embodiment in that the effect variable flag 223ab and the specific effect number counter 223ac are added.

The effect variable flag 223ab is a flag for indicating whether or not to change a part of the variable display during execution to the effect mode of the scoring effect, and a part of the variable display during execution is used as the effect mode of the scoring effect. It is set to on when it is determined that the value is variable. When the effect variable flag 223ab is set to on, the effect variable process (S3152 in FIG. 358) is executed in the effect update process 2 (S2112 in FIG. 357), and a part of the variable display being executed is scored. A display rewrite effect command for rewriting is set.

The specific effect number counter 223ac is a data area for storing the value of the specific effect number executed in the executed score effect, and is a score effect scenario executed in the prize information related process 2 (S2211 in FIG. 351). The value of the specific number of effects set in the setting process (S2351 in FIG. 352) is stored (S2360 in FIG. 352). The value stored in the specific effect counter 223ac is decremented by 1 each time the specific effect is executed during the scoring effect (S3411 in FIG. 354).

<Regarding the control process in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 to 358. In the tenth embodiment, the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 316) is replaced with the winning information-related processing 2 (see FIG. 351) with respect to the ninth embodiment described above, and the effect setting processing (see FIG. 321). Is changed to the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 353) and the effect update process (see FIG. 324) is changed to the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 357). It is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the winning information-related process 2 (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. 351. FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing the contents of the prize information related process 2 (S2211). The prize information-related process 2 is different in that the process for setting the score effect is different from the prize information-related process (see FIG. 316) of the ninth embodiment described above. When this prize information-related process 2 (S2211) is executed, the processes S2301 to S2304 are executed in the same manner as the prize information-related process (see FIG. 316), and then the score effect scenario setting process (S2351) is executed. This process ends.

Next, the score effect scenario setting process (S2351) will be described with reference to FIG. 352. FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing the contents of the score effect scenario setting process (S2351). In this score effect scenario setting process (S2351), a process of determining whether or not to execute the score effect for the winning information command received this time, and a range of special symbol fluctuations in which the score effect is continuously executed, that is, the present The process of determining whether or not to execute the score effect from the special symbol change during execution is executed.

When the score effect scenario setting process (S2351) is executed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter) 223b is set to the value of the effect variation number counter 223m (S2352). Then, it is determined whether the fluctuation type of the special symbol fluctuation currently being executed is a short deviation (S2353), and if it is determined that the fluctuation type is not a short deviation (S2353: No), the fluctuation currently being executed is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. It is determined whether or not there is (S2354). When it is determined in the process of S2354 that the high-speed fluctuation is in progress (S2354: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the effect fluctuation number counter 223 m (S2355), and the effect variable flag 223ab is set to ON (S2356).

In other words, it is determined whether the rewriting condition that can be rewritten to the content of the score effect is satisfied in the fluctuation display corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation currently being executed, and if the rewriting condition is satisfied (the fluctuation during execution is short). (If the fluctuation type is other than the deviation and the fluctuation is at high speed), the process of determining that the fluctuation display corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation currently being executed can be rewritten to the content of the scoring effect is executed. In this way, by configuring the variable display currently being executed to be used for the scoring effect only when the above-mentioned rewriting conditions are satisfied, the period for executing the scoring effect can be set longer, and the period for executing the scoring effect can be set longer. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is confused due to sudden switching of the effect content of the variable display during execution.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2353, when it is determined that the fluctuation type of the special symbol fluctuation during execution is short deviation (S2353: Yes), or when it is determined that the fluctuation during execution is other than during high-speed fluctuation. (S2354: No), the processing of S2355 and S2356 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of S2357. In this way, when it is determined in the processing of S2353 and S2354 that the above-mentioned rewriting condition is not satisfied, the variation display of the special symbol variation currently being executed cannot be used for the scoring effect, so that the effect variation counter The process of adding the value of 223 m is skipped.

In the process of S2357, the score effect scenario selection table 222aa is read out (S2357), the score effect scenario corresponding to the current winning information is determined using the score effect scenario selection table 222aa (S2358), and then the determination result of S2358. It is determined whether to execute the scoring effect based on (S2359). That is, when the score effect scenario selection table 222aa is referred to in the process of S2358, it is determined whether or not the range in which the score effect scenarios A to Scenario C are not defined is selected. When it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed in the process of S2359 (S2359: Yes), the value of the specific effect number corresponding to the determined scoring effect scenario is set in the specific effect number counter 223ac (S2360), and the prize read this time is won. The effect target information is set in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the command (S2361), the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S2362), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2359, when it is determined that the scoring effect is not executed (S2359: No), the effect variable flag 223ab is set to off (S2363), and the current variation type is super reach or higher (super reach or super reach or). It is determined whether it is a special reach) (S2364).

If it is determined in the process of S2364 that it is super reach or higher (S2364: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2361 described above, the processes of S2361 to S2362 are executed, and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not equal to or higher than the super reach (S2364: No), the value of the effect fluctuation number counter 223m is cleared (S2365), and this process is terminated.

Here, since the process executed in S2364 has the same content as the process of S2314 executed in the prize information-related process (see FIG. 316) of the ninth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted, but simply. I will explain. In the present embodiment, as described above, a limiting condition (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the setting status of the effect prohibition flag 223j) is provided to limit the setting of the scoring effect. Further, even when the restriction condition is not satisfied, as a result of referring to the score effect scenario selection table 222aa, a determination result that the score effect is not executed may be selected. In such a case, if the variation type included in the received winning information command is a predetermined period or longer (for example, 80 seconds or longer), the winning information corresponding to the long fluctuation in which the scoring effect is not executed is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball. It will be stored in the area.

In such a state, when the next prize information command is received and the score effect is set based on the prize information included in the received prize information command, it is determined while the set score effect is being executed. There is a problem that the variable display for a period of more than a period (80 seconds or more) is executed, and the scoring effect is delayed. Further, for example, when the winning information for which the scoring effect is not set includes the variable type per super reach a, the scoring effect becomes a big hit while the scoring effect is being executed, and the effect of the scoring effect is reduced. There was a problem of letting them do it.

In response to such a problem, in the present embodiment, even if the winning information does not set the score effect, the value of the effect variation counter 223 m is set when a predetermined condition (variation type is super reach or higher) is satisfied. While the winning information that is set and configured to execute the process of setting the effect prohibition flag 223j to ON and the predetermined condition (variation type is super reach or higher) is satisfied is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Is configured so that no new scoring effect is set. As a result, the effect of the score effect can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, when the variation type is a normal reach, that is, a jackpot with a short variation time, the setting of the score effect is not prohibited. With this configuration, a big hit can be generated while the scoring effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Next, the contents of the effect setting process 2 (S2704) will be described with reference to FIG. 353. FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 2 (S2704). In the effect setting process 2 (S2704), in addition to the effect setting process (see FIG. 321) of the ninth embodiment described above, a process for setting the final score effect to be executed in response to the final fluctuation of the score effect is performed. It differs in that it has been added.

When the effect setting process 2 (S2704) is started, first, the process of S2851 is executed in the same manner as S2801 of the effect setting process (see FIG. 321) of the ninth embodiment described above, and the value of the effect variation counter is 0. When it is determined that the value is not greater than (0) (S2851: No), the same processing of S2855 to S2858 as the processing of S2804 to S2807 of the effect setting processing (see FIG. 321) of the ninth embodiment described above is performed. Execute and end this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2851 when it is determined that the value of the effect fluctuation number counter is larger than 0 (S2851: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the effect variation counter 223m is 1 (S2852). If it is not 1, that is, if it is determined that the current variation is not the final variation of the scoring effect (S2852: No), the pre-scoring effect setting process (S2853) is executed, and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S2852 that the value of the effect variation counter 223 m is 1 (S2852: Yes), the final score effect setting process (S2854) is executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the effect executed during the scoring effect is set for the pre-scoring effect set for the variation other than the final variation of the scoring effect and the final variation of the scoring effect. It is configured to set each effect mode separately from the final score effect. As a result, even if the degree of freedom of the production mode for the pre-scoring effect is increased, the final result of the scoring effect can be unified in the final scoring effect, so that the effect range of the scoring effect can be expanded. The effect can be enhanced.

Next, the contents of the pre-scoring effect setting process (S2853) executed in the effect setting process 2 (S2704 in FIG. 353) will be described with reference to FIG. 354. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-score effect setting process (S2853). In this pre-score effect setting process (S2853), a process of determining the effect mode of the pre-score effect that is set for fluctuations other than the final effect of the score effect is executed.

When the pre-scoring effect setting process (S2853) is executed, first, the specific effect execution selection table 222ab is used to determine the number of times the specific effect is executed in the current variation (the variation) (S3401), and then the given score counter. The value of 223p is read out (S3402). Then, the current assigned score is subtracted from the gauge upper limit score (6 points) to calculate the difference score (S3403).

Next, whether or not to execute the specific effect according to the current variation is determined based on the determination result of S3401 described above (S3404), and when it is determined that the specific effect is not executed (S3404: No), this time. The score given by the fluctuation is set from a range smaller than the difference score (S3405). That is, even though the specific effect is not executed, the score to be given is set in a restricted state so that the amount of points that reaches the gauge upper limit score is not given. Here, a process of selecting a score based on an acquired value of an effect counter (effect counter for scoring at the time of limitation) (not shown) is executed within the range of points obtained by subtracting 1 from the difference score from 0 points.

Next, a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a score-giving effect in a mode corresponding to the set score is determined (S3406), a value corresponding to the set score is added to the value of the given score counter 223p (S3407), and the effect fluctuation number counter. The value of 223 m is subtracted by 1 (S3408) to end this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3404, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed due to this fluctuation (S3404: Yes), the specific effect execution timing is set based on the execution timing selection table 222ac (S3409), and the specific effect execution timing is set. As the score-giving effect executed up to this point, a variation pattern accompanied by a score-giving effect in a mode corresponding to the calculated difference score is determined (S3410), and the value of the specific effect number counter 223ac is updated (S3411).

Then, the value corresponding to the set score is added to the value of the score counter 223p (S3412), which is the same as the processing of S2911 and S2912 of the score giving effect setting process (see FIG. 322) of the ninth embodiment described above. The processes of S3413 and S3414 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the content of the final score effect setting process (S2854) executed in the effect setting process 2 (S2704 in FIG. 353) will be described with reference to FIG. 355. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final score effect setting process (S2854). In this final score effect setting process (S2854), a process of determining the effect mode of the final score effect set for the final variation in the score effect is executed.

When the final score effect setting process (S2854) is executed, first, the final specific effect timing corresponding to the current variation type is set (S3501). Here, in the tenth embodiment, each variation type (normal reach, super reach, special reach (see FIG. 348)) that can be the final variation of the specific effect can execute the specific effect (final specific effect) in advance. The timing (for example, the timing when the reach is reached, the timing immediately before the final symbol stops, the timing when the reach effect is switched to a different reach effect, etc.) is provided, and the processing of S3501 is the target of this time. The process of setting the timing of the final specific effect set for the variable type is executed. The timing of the final specific effect may be different for each variation type, and the variation type included in the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is provided with only a plurality of timings at which the final specific effect can be executed. The voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to execute a process of selecting and determining the timing of executing the final specific effect from the plurality of timings described above.

Next, the value of the specific effect number counter 223ac is read out, the remaining specific effect number is calculated (S3502), and it is determined whether the calculated remaining specific effect number is 1 (S3503). When it is determined that the number of times is not 1 (2 or 3) (S3503: No), then the value of the given score counter 223p is read (S3504), and based on the read value of the given score counter 223p, the value is read out. The score (sufficient score) required to execute the remaining specified number of effects is calculated (S3505). For example, when the current value of the given score counter is 4 and the number of remaining specific effects is 3, one of them is used as the final specific effect, so that it corresponds to the remaining number of remaining specific effects of 2. In addition, one score is calculated from the range of 8 to 13 as the given score. In other words, if the score given in the final score production this time is less than 8 points, the gauge upper limit amount cannot be reached twice, and if it is more than 13 points, the gauge upper limit amount is reached 3 times. Therefore, the score will not be given according to the number of remaining specific effects. Therefore, one score is calculated from the range (allowable range) of "8 to 13" as a sufficient score. When calculating one score as a sufficient score from the above-mentioned allowable range, for example, it corresponds to the production mode of the current score production (number of fluctuations in the production and the content of the pre-scoring effect) and the final score production. It is preferable to select using the data table defined in association with the lottery result (win / fail judgment, fluctuation type) of the special symbol variation and the acquisition value of the dedicated counter possessed by the effect counter 223f. With this configuration, for example, the higher the expectation of the jackpot or the higher the effect of the score effect, the larger the score within the permissible range can be selected.

Next, the execution timing of the specific effect is set based on the execution timing selection table 222ac (S3506), and the value of the given score counter 223p is updated corresponding to the value of the sufficient score calculated in the process of S3505 (S3507). The value of the specific effect count counter 223ac is updated (S3508), and the process proceeds to the final specific effect setting process (S3509).

On the other hand, if it is determined to be 1 in the process of S3503 (S3503: Yes), it is the case that only the above-mentioned final specific effect is executed in the final score effect, so the processes of S3504 to S3508 are skipped and the process of S3509 is performed. Move to. Here, the contents of the final specific effect setting process (S3509) will be described with reference to FIG. 356. FIG. 356 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final specific effect setting process (S3509). In this final specific effect setting process (S3509), a score giving effect for giving a score according to the execution timing of the final specific effect preset for the variation pattern corresponding to each variation type is set.

When the final specific effect setting process (S3509) is executed, first, the value of the given score counter 223p is read out (S3601), and the score to be given by the final specific effect execution timing is calculated (S3602). Next, as a score-giving effect corresponding to the final specific effect execution timing, a score-giving effect corresponding to the calculated score is set (S3603).

Then, the value of the given score counter 223p is updated according to the calculated score value (S3604), the value of the specific effect number counter 223ac is updated (S3605), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 355. After finishing the processing of S3509, it is next determined whether the fluctuation pattern determined this time includes the operation score effect (S3510), and if it is included (S3510: Yes), the operation score execution flag is set to on. (S3511), the value of the effect fluctuation number counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S3512), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the processes of S3510 and S3511 described above are the same as the processes of S2911 and S2912 of the score-giving effect setting process (S2803 of FIG. 322) of the ninth embodiment described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. ..

Next, the contents of the effect update process 2 (S2112) will be described with reference to FIG. 357. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 2 (S2112). The effect update process 2 (S2112) in the tenth embodiment adds a process when the effect variable flag 223ab is set to ON in addition to the effect update process (see FIG. 324) in the ninth embodiment described above. It differs in that it is the same, otherwise it is the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect update process 2 (S2112) is executed, first, the same processes of S3101 to S3107 as the effect update process (see FIG. 324) in the ninth embodiment described above are executed. After finishing the process of S3107, it is next determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223ab is on (S3151), and if it is on (S3151: Yes), the effect variable process (S3152) described later is executed, and then the effect variable process (S3152) is executed. The effect variable flag 223ab is set to off (S3153), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the effect variable flag 223ab is off in the processing of S3151, the processing of S3152 and S3153 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 358, the contents of the effect variable process (S3152) executed in the effect update process 2 (S2112 in FIG. 357) will be described. FIG. 358 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect variable processing (S3152). In this effect variable processing, a process of rewriting a part of the effect mode of the variable display during fluctuation into a score effect is executed.

When the effect variable processing (S3152) is executed, first, one point is set as a score to be given in the changing effect (S3161), and then a score counter 223p is given to a value corresponding to the set score (1 point). The value of is updated (S3162). Then, the value of the effect fluctuation count counter 223 m is subtracted by 1, the display rewrite effect command is set (S3164), and this process is terminated.

As described above, when the variable display currently being executed is added to the range of the score effect, the effect in which one point is given in the variable display being executed is executed. As a result, it is possible to immediately notify the player that the scoring effect has been executed. Further, since the score to be given is set to be small (1 point), it is possible to reduce the influence on the processing for each variation of the specific effect to be executed later.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display during execution is added to the range of the score effect, the score-giving effect in which one point is given in the variable display during execution is executed. The score to be given is not limited to this, and may be set randomly from a range (1 to 5 points) at which the specific effect is not executed, for example. However, if the score to be given is within the range in which 0 points can be selected, it will not be possible to notify the player that the score effect has been executed at an early stage. good. In addition, the score to be given may be changed based on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information that is the target of the score production this time. As a result, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the hit during the period when the scoring effect is executed. Furthermore, when adding a variable display during execution to the range of the score effect, instead of giving a score in the variable display during execution, a rewrite effect that only notifies that the score effect is executed should be executed. It may be configured as. This simplifies the processing during the scoring effect because it is not necessary to make the processing of the scoring effect during the subsequent scoring effect different depending on whether or not the variable display during execution is added to the range of the scoring effect. Can be done.

<About the first operation effect example of the operation score effect in each embodiment>
Next, another example of the operation score effect in each embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 359 to 107. In each of the above-described embodiments, the score to be given is changed according to the operation mode (presence or absence of operation) of the frame button 22 for the operation score effect executed during the score effect. On the other hand, in the first operation effect example, as the advance notice effect, the first notice effect for setting the display mode according to the operation mode (presence or absence of operation) of the frame button 22 and the first notice effect for setting a predetermined period are executed. It differs in that it has a second notice effect.

In the conventional gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, a plurality of advance notices suggesting the expectation of winning a big hit are independently displayed during one variable display. In such a gaming machine, since various notice effects can be provided to the player, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect and the interest of the game. Depending on the execution timing, an unnecessary notice effect may be displayed or a notice effect that confuses the player may be displayed, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is not sufficiently improved.

Further, in some of the advance notice effects, the player operates the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) to notify the player of the display content of the advance notice effect (hereinafter, referred to as an operation advance notice effect). In a gaming machine using such a notice effect, the execution timing (timing to display the display content of the notice effect) is switched with the other notice effect depending on the operation timing to the operation means (frame button 22). On the other hand, there was a risk that the notice production would be useless. In addition, if a period is provided in which only the operation notice effect is executed so that the execution timing of the operation notice effect does not replace the execution timing of other notice effects, many of them are within the limited effect period (variable display period). There is a problem that it becomes difficult to execute the advance notice effect of the above, and the effect of the effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in the first operation effect example, the operation mode (presence / absence of operation) of the frame button 22 for the first notice effect and the effect mode of the first notice effect and the second notice effect depending on the operation timing. (Display content) is configured to be variable. With this configuration, no matter when the operation means is operated with respect to the operation notice effect (first notice effect), the notice effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the operation timing, so that the effect is produced. Can be enhanced.

<About the production content in the first operation production example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 359 to 363, the contents of the effect in the present modification will be described. FIG. 359 (a) is a timing chart showing the display timings of the first notice effect and the second notice effect, and FIG. 359 (b) shows the notice display of each notice effect at the operation timing of the first notice effect. It is a figure which showed the content.

As shown in FIG. 359 (a), in this operation example, the combined notice effect in which the first notice effect and the second notice effect are displayed in an overlapping manner can be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 360 (a), the first notice effect is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the second notice effect is executed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. The notice production is executed. FIG. 360 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen immediately after the composite notice effect is started.

In the first notice effect, the period from 2 seconds to 10 seconds after the operation guidance display Db1 for guiding the operation of the frame button 22 is displayed is set as the frame button operable range, and the remaining period of the frame button operation period is set. The time gauge Db2 indicating the above is continuously displayed in the main display area Dm. The frame button operable period is set with the first 2 seconds as the first period, the next 5 seconds as the second period, and the last 3 seconds as the third period. It is determined which period (first period to third period) the timing of operating 22 corresponds to, and the notice display content of the composite notice effect can be changed based on the determination result.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 359 (b), when it is determined that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is the first period, the score grant expectation degree is notified (suggested) as the notice display content of the first notice effect. ) Is displayed, and the score to be acquired as the notice display content of the second notice effect is notified. That is, when the frame button 22 is operated in the first period, the first notice effect executes the notice display first, so that the player gradually gives points in the order of the first notice effect and the second notice effect. It is configured to notify to.

Next, when it is determined that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is the second period, the score to be acquired as the notice display content of the first notice effect is notified, and the score grant expectation degree is set as the notice display content of the second notice effect. The content to be notified (suggested) is displayed (see FIG. 360 (b)). That is, when the frame button 22 is operated in the second period, the second notice effect executes the notice display before the first notice effect, so that the second notice effect and the first notice effect are given points in this order. It is configured to notify the player step by step.

When it is determined that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is the third period, the content emphasizing the notice display content of the second notice effect is displayed as the notice display content of the first notice effect (see FIG. 363 (b)). ). That is, since the third period is the timing at which the second notice effect is not displayed in the small area Ds2 after the effect period of the second notice effect has elapsed, the player is notified of the effect result of this duplicate notice effect. Therefore, the highlighting (De5) in which the notice display contents (character "P") of the second notice effect are combined is displayed.

When it is determined that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is the third period, a notification other than the display content related to the score assignment, for example, a notification that directly suggests the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. Is also good.

On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not operated during the first notice effect (within the range in which the frame button can be operated), only the notice display corresponding to the second notice effect is executed, and the notice display corresponding to the first notice effect is executed. Is configured not to execute. In this case, the score is not displayed on the display screen.

In this modified example, an example in which the above-mentioned composite notice effect is executed is described, but the above-mentioned first notice effect and the second notice effect are executed at different timings. Is also configured. In addition, the standby state of the second notice effect (the state in which the treasure box shown in FIG. 360 (a) is closed) is continued for a long period of time (for example, 30 seconds), and a plurality of operation effects and the third notice effect executed during that period are performed. Depending on the result, the notice display timing of the second notice effect may be different.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 360 to 363, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the above-mentioned duplication flag is executed will be described. FIG. 360 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the duplicate notice effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 360 (a), when the duplicate notice effect is executed. As the first notice effect, the operation guidance display Db1 for guiding the operation of the frame button 22 and the time gauge Db2 indicating the remaining period of the frame button operable period are continuously displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, as the second notice effect, the treasure box Dc1 is displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds as a advance notification display for notifying the player that the notice display of the second notice effect is executed.

If the frame button 22 is not operated after the first period (2 seconds) set at the beginning of the frame button operable period has elapsed, the display screen shown in FIG. 360 (b) is displayed. FIG. 360 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed during the second period when the frame button 22 is not operated during the first period among the duplicate notice effects. .. As shown in FIG. 360 (b). Since the frame button 22 is not being operated, the operation guidance display Db1 and the time gauge Db2 are continuously displayed in the main display area Dm. The time gauge Db2 is displayed in an manner indicating that the remaining period is shorter than that in FIG. 359 (a) described above. Then, a score is given to the second notice display De1 as a P grant expectation degree notification suggesting that a score is given as a notice display of the second notice effect executed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. The letter "P" indicating is displayed.

Here, as the P grant expectation degree notification displayed on the second notice display De1, in addition to the character “P” shown in the figure, a character “P?” Indicates that a score may be given, or a character “P?” , It is determined that the score will be given, and the character "super P" indicating that the score to be given is large is displayed. As a result, even when only the P grant expectation degree notification is displayed, it is possible for the player to predict the effect result of the duplicate notice effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In this operation production example, various notification modes are shown by using different characters as the notification mode of the P addition expectation degree notification. Other configurations may be used. For example, the color and size of the character "P" may be changed to notify the P-giving expectation degree having a different meaning.

FIG. 361 (a) is a schematic view showing a display example when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period of the duplicate notice effect (see FIG. 360 (a)). As shown in FIG. 361 (a), a score is given to the first notice display De2 as a P grant expectation degree notification suggesting that a score is given to the main display area Dm as a notice display of the first notice effect. The letter "P" indicating that is displayed. Then, the characters "What's inside the treasure box?" Are displayed, suggesting that the second notice effect will be executed next.

FIG. 361 (b) is a schematic view showing another example of a display example when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period of the duplicate notice effect (see FIG. 360 (a)). As shown in FIG. 361 (b), a large score is given to the first notice display De2 as a P grant expectation degree notification suggesting that a score is given to the main display area Dm as a notice display of the first notice effect. The letter "super P" indicating that is displayed. Then, the characters "Expect the contents of the treasure box" are displayed, which suggests that the effect result of the second notice effect is an effect result (a large amount of points) that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 362 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the second period is reached in a state where the frame button 22 is operated during the first period of the duplicate notice effect (see FIG. 361 (b)). is there. As shown in FIG. 362 (a), in the state where the character "super P" is displayed in the first notice display De2 of the first notice effect in the main display area Dm, in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. The character "7" indicating the score of 7 points is displayed on the second notice display De3. Then, when the characters of 7 points are displayed, the display of the storage status display area DK is updated according to the score given (displayed).

In addition, instead of the second notice display De3 of the second notice effect shown in FIG. 362 (a), the second notice display De3 shown in FIG. 362 (b) may be displayed. FIG. 362 (b) is a schematic view showing another example of the display screen when the second period is reached in the state where the frame button 22 is operated during the first period of the duplicate notice effect (see FIG. 361 (b)). Is. In another example shown in FIG. 362 (b), the letter "V" indicating that the jackpot is won as the second notice display De3 of the second notice effect is displayed, and the character "Congratulations" is displayed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed. In this way, in the duplicate advance notice effect executed during the scoring effect, in addition to the advance notice effect for giving a score, a notice display that directly notifies the lottery result of the target special symbol is used to create an unexpected effect. In addition to being able to execute it, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for a big hit even when the score given during the score production is small.

FIG. 363 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen when the frame button 22 is operated during the second period of the duplicate notice effect. When the frame button 22 is operated in the state of FIG. 360 (b), as shown in FIG. 363 (a), the character "P" is displayed on the second notice display De1 in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. In this state, the character "3" indicating three points is displayed on the first notice display De4 in the main display area Dm. Then, when the characters of 3 points are displayed, the display of the storage status display area DK is updated according to the score given (displayed).

FIG. 363 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen when the frame button 22 is operated during the third period of the duplicate notice effect. When the frame button 22 is operated during the third period, as shown in FIG. 363 (b), the second notice display ends in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds, and the first notice display ends in the main display area Dm. The letter "P" indicating that points will be given to the first notice display De5 of the notice effect (the content displayed in the second notice effect in this duplicate notice effect) and the "3" indicating 3 points The combined characters are displayed. Then, when the characters of 3 points are displayed, the display of the storage status display area DK is updated according to the score given (displayed).

As described above, in this first operation production example, the content (effect mode) to be displayed in each notice effect displayed in the duplicate notice effect is changed according to the display timing of each notice display. It is possible to make the player interested in the advance notice effect until the final advance notice effect is executed.

In this first operation effect example, a configuration is used in which the player is only allowed to visually recognize the remaining period as a time gauge Db indicating the frame button operable period. For example, which of the frame button operable periods is currently used? In order to notify the player whether it is a period (first period to third period), the display mode of the time gauge Db2 may be changed, for example, "blue" during the first period. It is preferable to configure it so that it changes to "yellow" during the second period and "blue" during the third period. As a result, it is possible to make the player intentionally play a game aiming at a specific period, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the production.

<Regarding the control processing in this first operation production example>
Next, the control contents in the first operation effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 364 and 365. In the first operation effect example, the content of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see FIG. 323) is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (see FIG. 364) for each of the above-described embodiments. Is different.

Here, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S2107) will be described with reference to FIG. 364. FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S2107), in contrast to the above-mentioned frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 323), when the frame button 22 is pressed during the scoring operation effect period, each notice effect is produced. Notice of setting the mode The same process is executed except that the mode setting process (see S3051) is executed. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S2107) is executed, the same processes of S3001 to S3003 as the above-mentioned frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 323) are executed, and then the advance notice mode setting process is executed. (S3051) is executed. When this notice mode setting process (S3051) is completed, the same process of S3004 as the above-mentioned frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 323) is executed, and this process is terminated. Further, even when it is determined in the process of S3002 that it is not during the scoring operation effect period (S3002: No), the same process of S3005 as the above-mentioned frame button input monitoring / effect process (see FIG. 323) is executed, and this process is performed. To finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 365, the content of the advance notice mode setting process (S3051) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (S2107) will be described. FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the contents of the advance notice mode setting process (S3051). In this notice mode setting process (S3051), a process of setting the effect mode of the first notice effect and the effect mode of the second notice effect is executed according to the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed.

When the notice mode setting process (S3051) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressing timing of the frame button 22 is the first period (see FIG. 359) (S3052). Here, when the scoring operation effect period (frame button operation operable period) for effectively determining the pressing of the frame button 22 is set, the elapsed time is measured by a time counter (not shown). Then, it is configured to determine whether the timing is any of the first period, the second period, and the third period based on the value of the timekeeping counter at the timing when the frame button 22 is determined to be pressed.

In the process of S3052, when it is determined that the pressing timing is the first period (S3052: Yes), then the score grant expectation degree notification mode is set as the first notice display mode (S3053), and the second notice display is performed. As an aspect, a given score notification mode is set (S3054). Then, a display notice command corresponding to the set mode is set (S3055), and this process is terminated. That is, as described above with reference to FIG. 359 (b), when the operation timing of the frame button 22 is the first period, a score is given in the first notice effect executed (displayed) first. A display mode indicating that is displayed (see FIG. 361 (a)), and then a display mode indicating the number of points to be given at the timing when the second notice effect is executed is displayed (see FIG. 362 (b)). .. In this way, a plurality of advance notice effects can be executed for one effect that gives a score, and the effect result of the target effect is gradually suggested and notified according to the execution timing of each advance notice effect. , It is possible to make the player perform the game while predicting the effect result or expecting the effect result to be an advantageous result for the player.

In this first operation effect example, a display mode indicating that a score is given to the advance notice effect to be executed first is displayed, and the number of points to be given to the notice effect to be executed later is displayed. Is configured to display a display mode indicating the number of points that can be given to the advance notice effect to be executed first, and is executed later. The notice effect may be configured to display a display mode indicating whether or not a score is given. With this configuration, by grasping the number of points that can be given displayed in the advance notice effect that is executed earlier, the player can predict the progress of the effect when the points are actually given. It is possible to execute the advance notice effect while giving the player a sense of expectation.

Returning to FIG. 365, the description will be continued. In the process of S3052, when it is determined that the pressing timing is not the first period (S3052: No), then it is determined whether the pressing timing is the second period (S3056), and when it is the second period, it is determined. (S3056: Yes), the given score notification mode is set as the first notice display mode (S3057), and the above-mentioned process of S3055 is executed to end this process.

That is, when the pressing timing is the second period, the second notice effect has already been notified in the preset score-giving expectation notification mode (see FIG. 360 (b)). 1 As a display mode of the advance notice effect, a given score notification mode indicating the number of points to be given is set and displayed (see FIG. 363 (a)).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3056 that the pressing timing is not the second period (S3056; No), since the pressing timing is the third period, the content of the second notice display is supported as the first notice display mode. An effect mode (see FIG. 363 (b)) is set, and the above-described process of S3055 is executed to end this process. That is, when the pressing timing is the third period, that is, the timing after the second advance notice effect is completed, even if the given score notification mode (display mode showing only the number of points to be given) is displayed. Since the display mode of the second notice effect (the display mode indicating that the score is given (see FIG. 360 (b))) has already disappeared, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the target of the value.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 363 (b), the game is configured to display a display mode in which a display mode indicating that a score is given and a display mode indicating the number of points to be given are combined. It is possible to perform an effect that is easy for people to understand. If the frame button 22 is not pressed within the frame button operable period, the notice mode setting process (S3051 in FIG. 365) is not executed, so that the display mode according to the first notice effect is not set, and the advance notice effect as a whole is halfway. An odd production will be executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enthusiastically operate the frame button 22, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<11th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 366 to 376. In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment described above, when the score given during any variation display of the score effect reaches a predetermined amount (for example, 6), the specific effect is executed. It was. On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, the specific effect is executed only during the final variation of the score effect, that is, the variation display corresponding to the winning information command that caused the determination that the score effect is to be executed. The variable display in which the score effect is executed up to that point is different in that the stock effect for securing the number of times the specific effect is executed is executed.

With this configuration, the score effect can be enjoyed to the end, and it is not necessary to set the specific effect to be executed in the variation display other than the final variation, so that the variation display setting process can be easily executed. be able to.

<About scoring production in the 11th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 366 and 367, the scoring effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 366 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen during the scoring effect (before the final change). According to FIG. 366 (a), an effect similar to the scoring effect of each of the above-described embodiments is executed, and a stock display area Db2 for displaying the acquired charge amount in stock is formed in the main display area.

This stock display area Db2 has an acquired charge amount display area Db2a for indicating the currently acquired charge amount, and a maximum charge amount display area D2b2 that can be acquired in the current scoring effect. In a), "3" is displayed in the maximum charge amount display area D2b2, and "0" is displayed in the acquired charge amount display area Db2a.

Further, only the numerical value indicating the gauge value is displayed in the storage status display area DK, and the “charge zone” is set as the score effect display mode Db1 indicating that the score is currently being produced above the main display area Dm. Comment is displayed. In FIG. 366 (a), in order to notify the player of the reserved symbol corresponding to the final variation of the score effect, the display mode of the second reserved symbol Dsc is displayed in a display mode that can be distinguished from other reserved symbols. There is.

Then, when the score given in the score effect reaches the predetermined amount (6), "1" is displayed in the acquired charge amount display area Db2a of the stock display area Db2 as shown in FIG. 366 (b). .. When the pre-variation of the final fluctuation of the score effect is stopped, as shown in FIG. 367, the comment "Charge zone end" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the specific effect is executed by the next variation in the small area Ds2. A pre-command is displayed to suggest that it will be done.

Although detailed description will be omitted, even in the final variation of the score effect of the present embodiment, the score-giving effect of giving a score can be executed in the same manner as in each of the above-described embodiments. Then, the specific effect is executed in the final fluctuation for the total number of times the charge amount acquired before the final fluctuation (until the state shown in FIG. 367 is reached) and the charge amount acquired in the final fluctuation. It is configured.

With this configuration, even if the amount of charge (number of stocks) acquired by the time the final fluctuation of the scoring effect is reached is small, it is expected that a large amount of charge will be acquired in the final fluctuation. Can be done. Also, depending on the jackpot lottery result corresponding to the final fluctuation and the charge amount (stock number) acquired before reaching the final fluctuation of the score production, the jackpot expectation of the reach production executed in the final fluctuation will be different. Since it is configured, even if the amount of charge acquired is small, the degree of expectation can be raised to a big hit depending on the reach effect of the final fluctuation. Therefore, the scoring effect can be enjoyed to the end.

In the case of using the above-described configuration, the player may be notified (suggested) in advance of the reach effect executed in the final variation. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected playability that he / she does not want the player to acquire an unnecessarily large amount of charge during the scoring effect.

<About the electrical configuration in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 368. The eleventh embodiment is different from the tenth embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 368 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the normal variation pattern selection table 222ba, the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb, the number of times selection table 222bc, the execution timing selection table 222bd, and the ROM 222 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 288 (a)). The winning display score selection table 222be and the losing display score selection table 222bf are added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the tenth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal variation pattern selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting a variation pattern other than the final variation of the scoring effect, and the content thereof is the same as the variation pattern table 222a of the ninth embodiment described above. Explanation is omitted.

The specific variation pattern selection table 222bb is a data table for selecting a variation pattern in the final variation of the score effect, and is a variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110, and in the current score effect. Various fluctuation patterns are defined according to the set specific number of effects (specific number of times) and the amount of charge already acquired.

Here, the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. 369. FIG. 369 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb. In this specific variation pattern selection table 222b, as the variation pattern of the final variation of the scoring effect, the effect mode in which the set specific effect number of times can be executed and the charge amount that must be acquired in the final variation, that is, the specific effect number of times It is stipulated that a variation pattern capable of setting a score giving effect mode for acquiring a value obtained by subtracting the value of the notified number counter 223bb from the above is selected.

With reference to FIG. 369, selection of a variation pattern of the final variation of the scoring effect will be described. In the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb (FIG. 369), the variation pattern type (variation type notified by the variation pattern command) determined by the main control device 110 is determined based on the number-of-times selection table 222bc described later. Each specific variation pattern (variation pattern of the final variation of the continuous advance notice effect) corresponding to the current value of the notified number counter 223bb according to the specific number of times of production (number of times information (number of times data) stored in the number of times storage area 223ba). Are set respectively.

When the scoring effect is executed, the fluctuation patterns set in the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb (per normal reach, super reach a to c (hits and misses), special reach (only hits are set). The variation pattern)) is limited to the case where only the selection is made, and the score effect is not executed in the other variation patterns. Therefore, the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb shows the other variation patterns (normal reach). (Disengagement, etc.) is not set.

Next, a method for selecting a specific fluctuation pattern will be specifically described. The value (corresponding to the specific number of effects) stored in the number storage area 223ba by S3553 in the final score effect setting process 2 (S2854: see FIG. 376) executed by the MPU 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later, and the number of notified times. A specific variation pattern is selected from the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb (FIG. 369) based on the variation pattern type notified by the counter 223bb and the variation pattern command.

As shown in FIG. 369, when the fluctuation pattern type notified by the fluctuation pattern command is per normal reach, the normal configuration is configured in the same fluctuation mode as the normal reach per set in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. Specific fluctuation pattern (selected when the notified count counter 223bb is 0) and the stock effect of the charge amount (hereinafter, stock effect) are executed once during the fluctuation. As for the variation mode, a specific variation pattern of normal A, which is the same as the variation mode per normal reach set in the variation pattern selection table 222a, is set.

Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type of super reach a, a specific fluctuation pattern of SPA1 in which the stock effect is not executed, SPA2 in which the stock effect is executed once, and SPA3 in which the stock effect is executed twice is set. There is. The specific fluctuation patterns of SPA1 to SPA3 differ only in the number of times the stock effect is executed (including 0 times), and the main fluctuation mode is the fluctuation pattern of super reach a (including 0 times), which is normally selected. A variation mode similar to the variation pattern) selected by the normal variation pattern selection table 222ba) is set.

Here, as shown in FIG. 369, in the case of super reach a, the specific variation pattern of SPA1 is each value (number of times storage) of the specific production number of times (value of the number of times storage area 223ba) and the notified number of times counter 223bb. The value of the area 223ba and the value of the notified count counter 223bb) are set to be selected when any of (0,0), (1,1), and (2,2). Similarly, the specific variation pattern of SPA2 is selected when it is either (1,0) or (2,1), and the variation pattern of SPA3 is selected when it is (2,0). Is set to.

Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type of super reach b, SPB1 in which the stock effect is not executed, SPB2 in which the stock effect is executed once, SPB3 in which the stock effect is executed twice, and stock effect are executed three times. A specific fluctuation pattern of SPB4 is set. The specific fluctuation patterns of SPB1 to SPB4 differ only in the number of times the stock effect is executed (including 0 times), and the main fluctuation mode is the fluctuation pattern of super reach b (including 0 times), which is normally selected. A variation mode similar to the variation pattern) selected by the normal variation pattern selection table 222ba) is set.

Here, as shown in FIG. 369, in the case of super reach b, the specific variation pattern of SPB1 is each value (number of times storage) of the specific production number of times (value of the number of times storage area 223ba) and the notified number of times counter 223bb. The value of the area 223ba and the value of the notified count counter 223bb) are set to be selected when any of (0,0), (1,1), (2,2), and (3,3). ing. Similarly, the specific fluctuation pattern of SPB2 is selected when any of (1,0), (2,1), and (3,2), and the fluctuation pattern of SPB3 is (2,0), ( It is selected when any of 3 and 1), and the fluctuation pattern of SPB4 is set to be selected when it is (3,0).

Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type of super reach c, SPC1 in which the stock effect is not executed, SPC2 in which the stock effect is executed once, SPC3 in which the stock effect is executed twice, and stock effect are executed three times. A specific fluctuation pattern of SPC4 is set. The specific fluctuation patterns of SPB1 to SPB4 differ only in the number of times the stock effect is executed (including 0 times), and the main fluctuation mode is the fluctuation pattern of super reach c (including 0 times), which is normally selected. A variation mode similar to the variation pattern) selected by the normal variation pattern selection table 222ba) is set. The values of the set specific effect number of times (value of the number of times storage area 223ba) and the notified number of times counter 223bb are the same as in the case of super reach b, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the case of the variation pattern type of the special reach, SSP1 in which the stock effect is not executed, SSP2 in which the stock effect is executed once, SSP3 in which the stock effect is executed twice, and SSP4 in which the stock effect is executed three times. Specific fluctuation pattern of is set. The specific fluctuation patterns of SSP1 to SSP4 differ only in the number of times the stock effect is executed (including 0 times), and the main fluctuation mode is the fluctuation pattern of the special reach (normally) selected at normal times. A variation mode similar to the variation pattern) selected by the variation pattern selection table 222ba) is set. The values of the set specific effect number of times (value of the number of times storage area 223ba) and the notified number of times counter 223bb are the same as in the case of Super Reach B, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As is clear from FIG. 369, the upper limit of the number of times the specific effect is executed differs depending on the type of super reach, and the type of super reach executed according to the upper limit number of displayed stock effects is determined. It can be easily predicted, the flavor of the player for the stock production can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The number-of-times selection table 222bc is a data table for selecting the number of times of the specific effect to be executed in the final variation of the score effect this time when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, and is transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the specific number of effects is defined in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the variation type included in the winning information command, the current number of reserved balls, and the value of the variation lottery counter 223bc.

Here, the contents of the number-of-times selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG. 370. FIG. 370 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-times selection table 222bc. The number-of-times selection table 222bc is referred to in the process of S2371 in the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351: see FIG. 374) executed by the MPU 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later, and the specific effect number (stock effect is executed). The number of times (that is, the number of specific effects performed in the final variation) is determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 375, in the number-of-times selection table 222bc, a reserved ball is used for each variation pattern type (per normal reach, super reach A to C (hits and misses, special reach (hits only))). The determination value of the variable lottery counter 223 bc is set corresponding to.

When the fluctuation pattern type per normal reach is notified by the fluctuation pattern command, when the number of reserved balls is 2, and when the judgment value of the fluctuation lottery counter 223bc is "0 to 9", The specific number of times of directing 0 times is selected. When the number of reserved balls is 3 or 4, the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is 0 times for the specific effect for "0-4" and 1 time for the specific effect for "5-9". Is set. If a value other than the set determination value is the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect (score effect) is not executed.

When the fluctuation pattern type of super reach a is notified by the fluctuation pattern command, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the judgment value of the fluctuation lottery counter 223bc is 0 with respect to "0 to 9". The specific number of times of the specific effect, the number of specific effects of one time for "10 to 29", and the number of times of two specific effects for "30 to 39" are set respectively. When the number of reserved balls is 3, the number of specific effects is set to 0 for "0 to 29" and 2 times for "30 to 39" as the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223 bc. ing. When the number of reserved balls is 4, the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is 0 times for the specific effect for "0 to 19", 1 time for the specific effect for "20 to 29", and "30". Two specific effects are set for "~ 49". In the case of the super reach a as described above, the number of times of the specific effect of two times can be selected at the maximum, and is set to be less than the super reach b to c and the special reach described later. Further, as the number of reserved balls increases, the probability that a value having a large number of specific effects is selected is set higher. As a result, as the number of reserved balls increases, the number of specific effects tends to increase, so that the player's motivation to store the reserved balls can be increased. If a value other than the set determination value is the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect (score effect) is not executed.

When the fluctuation pattern type of super reach b is notified by the fluctuation pattern command, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the judgment value of the fluctuation lottery counter 223bc is 0 times for "0 to 9". The number of specific effects for "10 to 35", the number of specific effects for "36 to 39", the number of specific effects for "40 to 49", and the number of specific effects for "40 to 49" Each is set. When the number of reserved balls is 3, the judgment value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is 0 times for the specific effect for "0 to 5", 1 time for the specific effect for "6 to 24", and "25". Two specific effects are set for "~ 39", and three specific effects are set for "40 to 59". When the number of reserved balls is 4, the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is 0 times for the specific effect for "0 to 19", 1 time for the specific effect for "20 to 29", and "30". Two specific effects are set for "~ 39", and three specific effects are set for "40 to 69". In the case of super reach b as described above, the larger the number of reserved balls, the higher the probability that a value having a large number of specific effects is selected is set. As a result, as the number of reserved balls increases, the number of specific effects tends to increase, so that the player's motivation to store the reserved balls can be increased. If a value other than the set determination value is the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect (score effect) is not executed.

When the fluctuation pattern type of super reach c is notified by the fluctuation pattern command, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the judgment value of the fluctuation lottery counter 223bc is 0 times for "0 to 9". The number of specific effects for "10 to 35", the number of specific effects for "36 to 39", the number of specific effects for "40 to 49", and the number of specific effects for "40 to 49" Each is set. When the number of reserved balls is 3, the judgment value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is 0 times for the specific effect for "0 to 5", 1 time for the specific effect for "6 to 24", and "25". Two specific effects are set for "~ 39", and three specific effects are set for "40 to 49". When the number of reserved balls is 4, the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is 0 times for the specific effect for "0 to 19", 1 time for the specific effect for "20 to 29", and "30". Two specific effects are set for "~ 39", and three specific effects are set for "40 to 69". In the case of super reach b as described above, the larger the number of reserved balls, the higher the probability that a value having a large number of specific effects is selected is set. As a result, as the number of reserved balls increases, the number of specific effects tends to increase, so that the player's motivation to store the reserved balls can be increased. If a value other than the set determination value is the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect (score effect) is not executed.

When the fluctuation pattern type of the special reach is notified by the fluctuation pattern command, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the judgment value of the fluctuation lottery counter 223bc is 3 times for "0 to 14". A specific number of effects is set. When the number of reserved balls is 3, the number of specific effects is set to 0 for "0 to 39" and 1 for "40 to 49" as the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223 bc. ing. When the number of reserved balls is 4, the number of specific effects is set to 0 for "0 to 39" and 3 times for "40 to 49" as the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223 bc. ing. In the case of special reach in this way, when there are two reserved balls compared to other fluctuation patterns, only the maximum of three specific effects can be selected, so the number of specific effects can be selected. By notifying three times, it can be expected that the special reach, which has a high probability of being selected in the case of a big hit, will be executed in the final fluctuation.

The execution timing selection table 222b is a data table for selecting various effect data (notice data) for executing a specific effect in the final variation, and the variation pattern type selected by the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb and the variation pattern type. This is for selecting the timing for executing the specific effect based on the specific number of times set for the fluctuation pattern type (see FIG. 371). In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern set by the voice lamp control device 113 is formed by a plurality of blocks. Specifically, when the fluctuation type is super reach a (variation time is 80 seconds), the first notice period (20 seconds), the second notice period (20 seconds), and the first reach period (20 seconds). , The second reach period (20 seconds) and 4 blocks.

Then, the effect data is set so that the specific effect can be executed at the boundary of each block, and the specific effect is executed in the period selected by the execution timing selection table 222b among the plurality of specific effect executable periods. The effect data corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set. The timing of executing the specific effect is not limited to the above-described configuration, and may be set as appropriate. Further, the number of times and the timing of executing the specific effect may be determined in advance, and the variation pattern corresponding to the determined content may be selected.

Here, the contents of the specific effect set in each fluctuation pattern will be described. For example, in the specific effect executed after the end of the first notice period, the operation guidance display for operating the frame button 23 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button 23 is operated within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). As a result, a specific effect in which the screen is switched to the advance notice effect executed during the second notice period is executed. When this specific effect is executed, a suggestion comment suggesting an effect mode of the advance notice effect to be executed during the second notice period is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This suggestion comment is configured so that a different display mode is set according to the result of determining whether or not the special symbol of the variation is appropriate.

As a result, it is possible to predict the result of determining whether or not the fluctuation is correct by executing the specific effect, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the frame button 22. The production mode of the specific effect in the period is not limited to this, and for example, the specific effect in the period may be used as the stock effect.

Further, as a specific effect executed after the end of the second notice period, an operation guide display for operating the frame button 23 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button 23 is operated within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). By doing so, a specific effect indicating that the second notice period is repeatedly executed and a specific effect indicating that the reach effect is executed are executed. As the specific effect executed during the reach period, as in each specific effect described above, a display for operating the frame button 23 is executed, and by operating the frame button 23, the result of determining whether or not the fluctuation is appropriate is determined. The suggestive comment display is executed.

In addition, the effect data that can be executed in each block is configured to be set according to the number of points to be given in the fluctuation, and the stock effect is always performed in the period before the timing when the specific effect is executed. It is configured to be executed. As a result, the specific effect can be appropriately executed according to the number of times of charging, and the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The winning display score selection table 222be is a data table for selecting the score to be given in each variation display during the scoring effect, and is referred to when the final variation of the score effect is a big hit. (See FIG. 372).

The total score (specific effect number of times) is determined by the specific effect number determined by the number selection table 222bc by the process of S2374 in the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351: see FIG. 374) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be described later. A value multiplied by 6) is calculated, and the calculated value is stored in the total score storage area 223o. The remaining score that can be obtained is calculated (determined) from the value stored in the total score storage area 223o and the value of the score counter 223p that stores the value of the score currently acquired, and the remaining number of times. A score is selected from the winning display score selection table 222be based on the number of fluctuations remaining including the final variation. In FIG. 372, the remaining score (value indicated by the displayable remaining score) and the value of the score that can be obtained with respect to the number of remaining fluctuations are set. Specifically, when the remaining score is "18" and the number of remaining fluctuations is 2, a value in the range of "0 to 1" is set, and the effect counter acquired by the value in that range is set. It is selected based on the value of 223f. In this way, the range of the score shown in FIG. 372 is selected by the remaining score and the number of remaining fluctuations, and the value of 1 is selected from the range of the selected values by the value of the effect counter 223f. Has been done. With this configuration, the score can be selected more randomly, and the score effect can be given a fresh taste.

The display score selection table 222bf for deviation is a data table for selecting the score to be given in each variation display during the score production, and is referred to when the final variation of the score production is deviation (). See FIG. 373). The score selection method is the same as that of the winning display score selection table 222be already described above, and only the set score ranges are different. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 372 to 373, when the lottery result is a big hit, the probability that a high score is selected is set higher, and the player is given a high score by selecting a high score in the score effect. It is configured to set a high degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the final fluctuation.

In this way, by changing the score given during the scoring effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the final variation of the scoring effect, the period from the start of the scoring effect to the execution of the final variation. Also, you can be interested in the progress of the production.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 368 (b). In the eleventh embodiment, the number storage area 223ba and the notified number counter 223bb are added to the tenth embodiment described above. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the tenth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The number-of-times storage area 223ba is an area for storing the number of scoring effects selected in the number-of-times selection table 222bc. The value stored here is referred to when setting the fluctuation pattern corresponding to each fluctuation display of the score effect. It is also referred to when displaying as the maximum charge amount display area Db2b value of the stock display area Db2 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The value displayed in the maximum charge amount display area D2b2 may be a value stored in the number-of-times storage area 223ba or a maximum value that can be stored in the number-of-times storage area 223ba.

For example, when the value stored in the number-of-times storage area 223ba is used, the jackpot expectation may be changed according to the fluctuation of the score effect to acquire the charge amount. As a result, the jackpot expectation can be expressed in a complicated manner, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, when the maximum value that can be stored in the number-of-times storage area 223ba (3 in the present embodiment) is used, the maximum value for which it is unknown whether or not it can be obtained in the current score production is displayed. , It is possible to relatively determine the jackpot expectation of the score production this time, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting. It should be noted that both of the above two values may be configured to be displayed in the stock display area Db2.

The notified number counter 223bb is a counter for storing the number of stocks already notified during the score production, and is displayed in the acquired charge amount display area Db2a of the stock display area Db2 of the third symbol display device 81. The same value as the value is measured. The value of this counter is referred to when setting the effect of the variation display with respect to the residual variation of the score effect.

The variable lottery counter 223bc is a loop counter whose value is periodically updated like the above-mentioned effect counter 223f, and the value is acquired when a specific effect number is selected using the number selection table 222bc. ..

<Regarding the control process in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the control process according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 374 to 376. The eleventh embodiment is different in that, when it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed for each of the above-described embodiments, the number of executions of the specific effect to be executed in the final variation of the scoring effect is set ( See FIG. 374). Then, in the variable display setting process during the score production, the score to be displayed is determined, and when the accumulated value of the determined score reaches a predetermined amount (when the lap value is exceeded), the charge amount is stocked. It differs in that it is set (see FIG. 375). Further, in the scoring effect, there is a difference in that a specific effect is not set for variations other than the final variation (see FIG. 375). Finally, with respect to the fluctuation pattern set in the final fluctuation of the score effect, the process of setting the variation pattern based on the number of times the charge amount is acquired and the number of times the specific effect is executed, and the specific effect are executed. It differs in that it has a process of setting the timing (see FIG. 376).

First, the contents of the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351) will be described with reference to FIG. 374. FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing the contents of the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351). When the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351) is executed, the same processes of S2352 to S2356 as the score effect scenario setting process (see FIG. 352) described above are executed, and when the process of S2356 is completed, the number of times selection table 222bc (S2371), and the number of specific effects corresponding to the current winning information is determined using the number selection table 222bc (S2372). As described with reference to FIG. 370, the number-of-times selection table 222bc referred to here includes the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110, the current number of reserved balls, and the variation lottery. Corresponding to the value of the counter, the value of the specific number of effects is specified in the range of 0 to 3.

Here, when the variation type is per normal reach and the number of reserved balls is 3 or 4, a scoring effect in which the specific number of effects is 0 or 1 is selected. Alternatively, a pattern in which the scoring effect is not executed is selected. For example, if the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is in the range of "0 to 4", a scoring effect with a specific effect number of 0 times is selected. The scoring effect in which the number of specific effects is 0 is a scoring effect in which the points given during the scoring effect do not reach a predetermined number (6 points) and the specific effect is not executed. In this way, by configuring the scoring effect in which the specific effect is not executed even once, the chance of the scoring effect being executed is increased, but the expectation of the specific effect executed during the scoring effect is lowered. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Further, when the variation type is per normal reach, it is stipulated that the maximum value of the number of specific effects that can be selected is one. This is because the effect period of the final score effect in which the specific effect is executed is 30 seconds, which is shorter than that of other variable types (super reach, special reach). In this way, by prescribing the number of specific effects to be executed in advance corresponding to the effect period of the final score effect in which the specific effect is executed, it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort. it can.

Further, in the number-of-times selection table 222bc of the present embodiment, it is stipulated that the larger the number of reserved balls (the longer the target period of the scoring effect), the easier it is to execute a large number of specific effects. As a result, the player can be made to think that the number of points given in the scoring effect is increased according to the length of the period in which the pre-scoring effect is executed. It is possible to actively play a game in order to continue a state with a large number.

Further, in the number-of-times selection table 222bc of the present embodiment, it is stipulated that the specific number of times of production is selected regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination in the variation type other than the normal reach. As a result, the result of the final score effect (the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the final score effect) is given to the player in advance according to the number of points given during the score effect (the number of stocks acquired during the advance score effect). It is possible to prevent it from being detected.

In the present embodiment, as described above, it is stipulated that the specific number of effects is selected regardless of the result of the hit / miss judgment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times of the specific effect is selected according to the result of the hit / fail judgment. It may be specified. In this case, for example, when the number of reserved balls is a predetermined number (for example, 3), it is preferable to configure the specific number of times to be selected to be different depending on the hit / fail determination result. Specifically, when the variation type is Super Reach B and there are 3 reserved balls, if the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, 3 times can be set as the specific number of effects, and if the hit / fail judgment result is wrong. It is preferable to configure 3 times as the specific number of productions so that it cannot be set.

With this configuration, by grasping the number of reserved balls when the scoring effect is executed and the number of times the specific effect is executed, it is possible to predict the effect result of the scoring effect this time. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, the number-of-times selection table 222bc of the present embodiment is a special reach in which the variation type is the variation type having the highest expectation of big hit, and when the number of reserved balls is 2, the number of specific effects is 3 times. Only configured to be executable. When the number of reserved balls is 2, the ratio of the number of specific effects to 3 is set so that the variation type of the special reach is the highest. As a result, when a score effect that is unexpected to the player is executed, the jackpot expectation can be increased, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the special reach, which is the fluctuation type with the highest expectation of big hits, when the number of reserved balls is 3 or 4, the scoring production in which the specific number of productions is 0 is easier to select than other fluctuation types. It is configured in. As a result, even if the number of specific effects is 0, the player can expect a big hit depending on the content of the final scoring effect, so that the player can watch the scoring effect until the end. Can be done.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 374. After finishing the processing of S2372, it is determined whether to execute the scoring effect (S2359), and if it is determined to be executed (S2359: Yes), that is, in the processing of S2372, the number of specific effects of the number selection table 222bc is 0. When the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc in which ~ 3 times is specified is acquired, the value of the determined specific effect number of times is set in the number storage area 223ba (S2373), and corresponds to the value of the determined specific effect number of times. In the range, the total grant score is determined and stored in the total grant score storage area 223o (S2374).

Here, the range corresponding to the value of the determined specific effect number of times is, for example, "0 to 5" as the range of the total score given when the value of the determined score effect number of times is 0 times, and when it is 1 time. "6 to 11" is defined as "12 to 17" in the case of two times, and "18" in the case of three times as the range of the total score. Then, the value of the predetermined lottery counter possessed by the effect counter 223f is acquired from the range of the total score given corresponding to the determined specific number of times of effect, and one score is determined as the total score of the score effect this time. .. When the process of S2374 is completed, the same processes of S2361 to S2363 as the above-described specific effect scenario setting process (see FIG. 352) are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 375, the contents of the pre-scoring effect setting process 2 executed in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 375 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the pre-score effect setting process 2. In the pre-score effect setting process 2 (S2853), the content for determining the score to be given in this variation is changed from the above-mentioned pre-score effect setting process (see FIG. 354), and the determined grant is made. The difference is that the processing content to be executed is changed according to the score.

When the pre-scoring effect setting process 2 (S2853) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current scoring effect is a scoring effect for which the hit / fail determination result is a hit (S3451). Then, when it is determined that the score effect is a hit (S3451: Yes), the display score in the fluctuation is determined by using the hit display score selection table 222be (S3452), and the process proceeds to S3454. On the other hand, in the processing of S3451 when it is determined that the score is not a hit (out of place) (S3451: No), the display score in the fluctuation is determined by using the display score selection table 222bf for out of order (S3453). ), The process proceeds to S3454.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 372 and 373, the contents defined in the above-mentioned winning score selection table 222be and the off display score selection table 222bf will be described. And, the range of points that can be given by this fluctuation is defined corresponding to the number of points that can be given by this time's score production, and it is acquired from the dedicated counter (not shown) that the production counter 223f has. It is configured to select one value (score) from the range of points that can be given according to the value (a loop counter that is periodically updated like the effect counter 223f).

Further, a part of the range of points that can be given is configured to overlap with the winning score selection table 222be and the losing display score selection table 222bf. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the current scoring effect is a scoring effect corresponding to the winning, depending on the number of points given in one variable display. On the other hand, when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, for example, when the number of remaining fluctuations is 3 and the remaining score that can be displayed is 13 points, the score is displayed only when the score effect this time is the score effect corresponding to the winning. Seven points can be selected as the score. In addition, the number of points that can be displayed (total score given) and the remaining points that can be displayed in this score production are configured so that the player cannot grasp them.

With this configuration, only the player who has grasped the rule of scoring in detail can grasp whether or not the scoring effect this time is a scoring effect corresponding to the winning. , It is possible to provide a feeling of satisfaction to a player who has continuously played a game for a long period of time.

In the process of S3454, the value of the given score counter 223p is read out (S3454), the displayed score of this time and the value of the given score counter 223p are added (S3455), and the added value is the upper limit value (lap value (6 points)). ) Is exceeded (S3456). If it is determined in the process of S3456 that the lap value has been exceeded (S3456: Yes), the number of times the lap value has been exceeded is set in the notified number counter 223bb (S3457), and the process proceeds to S3458.

As the number of times set in the processing of S3457, for example, when the current number of points given is 4 points and the number of points displayed this time is 5, the number of points added is 9 points, and the lap value is set. Since the state is exceeded once (charge 1: gauge 3), the value of 1 is added to the value of the notified number counter 223bb as the number of times the lap value is exceeded. Further, in the process of S3457, a maximum value of 3 is added to the value of the notified number counter 223bb.

In the process of S3458, a variation pattern is determined (S3458) accompanied by a score giving effect in a mode corresponding to the determined score, and the value stored in the number storage area 223ba is made to correspond to the value added to the notified number counter 223bb. And update (S3459). As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of specific effects that have not yet been notified to the number storage area 223ba. Next, the same processes of S3461 to S3463 as the processes of S3412 to S3414 of the pre-score effect setting process (see FIG. 354) of the tenth embodiment described above are executed to end this process.

Next, the contents of the final score effect setting process 2 (S2854) will be described with reference to FIG. 376. FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final score effect setting process 2 (S2854). The final score effect setting process 2 (S2854) is different from the final score effect setting process (see FIG. 355) of the tenth embodiment described above in that the process of selecting the variation pattern is different.

When the final score effect setting process 2 (S2854) is executed, first, the value stored in the number storage area 223ba (the specific number of effects executed in the current score effect) is read (S3551), and then the notification has been completed. The value of the count counter 223bb is read out (S3552). Then, the variation pattern is selected using the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb based on the value of the number storage area 223ba and the value of the notified number counter 223bb (S3553).

As described above with reference to FIG. 369, the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb shows the number of times the specific effect is executed (the number displayed in the maximum charge amount display area Db2b) and the specific effect already notified by the pre-score effect. It is configured so that different fluctuation patterns are selected according to the number of effects (the number displayed in the acquired charge amount display area Db2a).

Specifically, for each variation type, the variation pattern 1 is set to an effect mode in which the charge amount is not acquired in the final score effect, and the variation pattern 2 is an effect mode in which the charge amount is acquired once in the final score effect. However, the variation pattern 3 defines an effect mode in which the charge amount is acquired twice in the final score effect, and the variation pattern 4 defines an effect mode in which the charge amount is acquired three times in the final score effect.

In this way, by making the variation pattern selected according to the number of times to be charged in the final score effect different, it is possible to set the effect mode executed in the final score effect without discomfort to the player. Since the fluctuation patterns 1 to 4 specified here are the same fluctuation type, the fluctuation periods executed are the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the score giving effect executed during the final score effect is set according to each variation pattern.

After the processing of S3553 is completed, next, the timing for executing the specific effect for the variation pattern selected in the process of S3552 using the execution timing selection table 222b is set (S3554), and the final score effect setting described above. The same processes of S3555 and S3556 as the processes of S3510 and S3511 of the process (see FIG. 355) are executed, and this process is terminated.

With this configuration, the variation that executes the specific effect can be limited to the final variation (final score effect). Therefore, when the score effect is executed, the variation other than the final variation is displayed (during the pre-score effect). It is no longer necessary to prepare multiple fluctuation patterns for. Therefore, the processing load when setting the scoring effect can be reduced.

In addition, it is possible to set various fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation display of the final fluctuation (final score effect), and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. Specifically, since the variation pattern can be set according to the number of times the specific effect is executed, the specific effect can be executed without discomfort, and the specific effect is set at the timing when the variation pattern greatly progresses. Therefore, the effect of production can be further enhanced.

Further, by notifying in advance the number of times the specific effect is executed, the player can predict the jackpot expectation degree based on the fluctuation pattern executed in the final variation and the number of times the specific effect is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<12th Embodiment>
Next, the control process according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 377 to 383. In the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed with respect to the eleventh embodiment described above, the scoring effect is executed from the pre-variation period of the scoring effect (the special symbol variation at which the scoring effect is started). As a score giving pattern during the period until the special symbol change (final change) corresponding to the winning information determined to be, is given, one giving scenario from a plurality of giving scenarios having different giving patterns Is different in that the timing of scoring is managed by using the set awarding scenario.

Then, the effect mode of the effect display (final score effect) executed during the final variation period of the score effect (the period during which the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information determined to be executed) is executed. The difference is that the selection is based on the set grant scenario.

Further, it is different in that the expectation of the jackpot winning indicated by the effect mode selected as the final score effect is configured to be different according to the set granting scenario.

<About the electrical configuration in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 377. The twelfth embodiment is different from the tenth embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the tenth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 377 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, a score-giving scenario selection table 222ca, a scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cc, and a scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc are added to the ROM 222 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 347 (a)). doing. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the tenth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The score-giving scenario selection table 222ca is a data table for selecting the presence / absence of execution of the scoring effect and the scoring pattern other than the final variation of the scoring effect (preliminary scoring effect period), and is transmitted from the main control device 110. Various grant patterns (granted) corresponding to the variation type included in the winning information command, the number of times the specific effect is executed set in this continuous advance notice effect, and the value of the second effect counter possessed by the effect counter 223f. Scenario) is specified.

Here, the score-giving scenario selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 378. FIG. 378 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the score-giving scenario selection table 222ca. In the score granting scenario selection table 222ca, three types of granting patterns (granting scenarios) are defined as the score granting patterns given in the pre-scoring effect period of the score effect.

Specifically, when the granting scenario 1 is selected, it becomes easier to set a score granting effect for evenly granting the total score granted during the current score effect during the pre-score effect period. , When the granting scenario 2 is selected, the score granting effect is likely to be biasedly set in the first half period of the pre-scoring effect period, and when the granting scenario 3 is selected, in the second half period of the pre-scoring effect. , The scoring effect is set so that the scoring effect is easily set in a biased manner.

The score-giving scenario selection table 222ca (see FIG. 378) is read out by S7007 of the score-effect scenario setting process 3 (S2351) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later, and the selected score-effect scenario (scenario). Corresponding score-giving scenarios (granting scenarios 1 to 3) are selected according to the value of the specific number of effects set for the types A to C: FIG. 348 and the value of the second effect counter.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern type (notified by the winning information command) selected in the final fluctuation is special reach (win) and super reach A to C (win), the number of specific effects is one score. When the production scenario (scenario A) is selected, the value of the second production counter is given scenario 1 for "0 to 39", given scenario 1 for "40 to 89", and "90 to 99". When the grant scenario 1 is set for "" and the scoring effect scenario (scenario B) with a specific number of effects of 2 is selected, the value of the second effect counter is "0 to 39". Grant scenario 2, grant scenario 1 for "40 to 89", grant scenario 3 for "90 to 99", and a score effect scenario (scenario C) with 3 specific effects is selected. If the value of the second effect counter is "0 to 39", the grant scenario 2 is set, "40 to 89" is given the grant scenario 1, and "90 to 99" is given the grant scenario 3. It is set, and similarly, the type of grant scenario is assigned to each variation type as shown in FIG. 378.

In this way, by configuring the timing of giving points to be given during the score giving effect to be set based on a predetermined giving scenario, the effect mode of the score giving effect executed during the score giving effect is intentionally set. Can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the total number of points to be given in the current score effect at an early stage, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

The scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cc is a table for selecting a variation pattern to be executed during the pre-scoring effect period among the score effects, and is a variation included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110. Various fluctuation patterns are defined according to the type, the number of remaining fluctuations in the score effect, and the type of the grant scenario (grant scenarios 1 to 3) set in the score effect this time.

Here, the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 379. FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cc. In this scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cc, variation patterns 1 to 3 in which the scoring frequency is different are defined for each variation pattern that can be executed during the pre-scoring effect period of the specific effect.

For each variation pattern, variation pattern types corresponding to variation patterns 1 to 3 are set. Specifically, if it is a variation type of short deviation, short deviation 1 (corresponding to fluctuation pattern 1), short deviation 2 (corresponding to fluctuation pattern 2), and short deviation 3 (corresponding to fluctuation pattern 3) are set respectively. ing. Similarly, FIG. 379 shows that the numbers added to the end of the names of the fluctuation types correspond to the numbers of the types of the fluctuation patterns 1 to 3, respectively.

Of the fluctuation patterns 1 to 3 defined for each variation type, the variation pattern 1 is a variation pattern in which the score-giving effect that can give the most points is executed, and the variation pattern 3 is given the most. It is a fluctuation pattern in which the number of points to be obtained is small, and the score giving effect in which the number of points to which the fluctuation pattern 2 can be given is between the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern 1 and the fluctuation pattern 3 is executed.

Specifically, when the variation type is short deviation (7 seconds) and the grant scenario 1 is set, "short deviation 2" is selected regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations in the scoring effect. Similarly, as shown in the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cc of FIG. 379, the assigned scenario set and the number of variations until the remaining final variation correspond to the variation type specified by the variation pattern command. It is configured so that a variation pattern dedicated to the continuous advance notice production is selected.

The scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc (see FIG. 380) is a table for selecting a variation pattern to be executed during the final scoring effect period (final variation in the continuous advance notice effect) among the scoring effects, and is a main control. Various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the device 110, the winning / failing determination result, and the type of the granting scenario set in the current score effect.

Here, the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 380. FIG. 380 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc. In this scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc, variation patterns 1 to 3 are defined for each variation type executed as the final score effect of the specific effect. As described in the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cc (see FIG. 379) described above, the variation pattern 1 is a variation pattern in which the score giving effect that can give the largest number of points is executed. The variation pattern 3 is a variation pattern in which the number of points that can be given the least is the variation pattern, and the variation pattern in which the score giving effect is executed in which the number of points that the variation pattern 2 can be assigned is between the above-mentioned variation pattern 1 and the variation pattern 3. Is.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern command of the normal reach that is a hit is notified, and if the set grant scenario is the grant scenario 1, the value of the normal 1 is not limited to the value of the fluctuation effect counter. A fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to fluctuation pattern 1 among the normal reach that is a hit) is selected. When the grant scenario 2 is set, the value "0 to 79" of the fluctuation effect counter is normal 2 (the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern 2 among the winning normal reach) and the variation effect counter. Normal 1 (a variation pattern corresponding to variation pattern 1 among the winning normal reach) is selected for each of the values "80 to 99". When the grant scenario 3 is set, the value "0 to 79" of the fluctuation effect counter is set to normal 3 (the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern 3 among the winning normal reach) and the variation effect counter. Normal 1 (a variation pattern corresponding to variation pattern 1 among the winning normal reach) is selected for each of the values "80 to 99".

Even when the fluctuation type of the outlier normal reach is notified by the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation type to be executed is determined based on the given scenario set as shown in FIG. 380 and the acquired value of the fluctuation effect counter. Be selected. Further, the super indicates the variation type of the super reach, and the super 1 indicates that the variation type corresponding to the variation pattern 1 in the variation pattern of the super reach is selected. Similarly, the number shown at the end of the type name indicates the number of the fluctuation pattern type. In addition, the special indicates that it is a special reach, and the end of the type name indicates the number of the fluctuation pattern type.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 368 (b). In the twelfth embodiment, the grant scenario storage area 223ca is added to the tenth embodiment described above. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the tenth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The grant scenario storage area 223ca is an area for temporarily storing the grant scenario selected using the score grant scenario selection table 222ca. The grant scenario stored here is referred to when setting a variation pattern corresponding to each variation display of the score effect.

In the grant scenario storage area 223ca, when it is determined in the score effect scenario setting process 3 (see FIG. 381) to be executed to execute the score effect (S7005 in FIG. 381), the selected grant scenario is stored (see FIG. 381). S7008 in FIG. 381). Then, the stored grant scenario is referred to when the variation pattern is selected using the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cc in the advance score effect setting process 3 (S2853 in FIG. 382) (see S7103 in FIG. 382). Further, it is referred to when the variation pattern is selected by using the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc in the final score effect setting process 3 (S2854 in FIG. 383) (see S7206 in FIG. 383).

<Regarding the control process in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, the control process according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 381 to 383. In the twelfth embodiment, for each of the above-described embodiments, a score giving pattern (giving scenario) to be given during the scoring effect when it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed is selected (see FIG. 381) and selected. Based on the given scenario, the variation pattern of each variation display during the pre-scoring effect period of the scoring effect is selected (see FIG. 382), and the variation pattern of the variation display in the final score effect of the scoring effect is selected (FIG. 383). See) It differs in that.

First, the contents of the score effect scenario setting process 3 (S2351) executed in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 381. The score effect scenario setting process 3 (S2351) is a process for executing the score effect for the fluctuation display currently changing with respect to the score effect scenario setting process (see FIG. 352) of the tenth embodiment described above. The difference is that the deleted point and the process of setting the grant scenario when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed have been added. Other contents are the same, and detailed description will be omitted for the same elements.

When the score effect scenario setting process 3 (S2351) is executed, first, the same process of S7001 as S2352 of the tenth embodiment described above is executed, and then the same process as S2357 and S2358 of the tenth embodiment described above is executed. The processes of S7002 and S7003 are executed. When the processing of S7003 is completed, next, the value of the specific production number corresponding to the selected scoring effect scenario is stored in the number storage area 223ba (S7004).

When the processing of S7004 is completed, it is determined whether or not to execute the scoring effect next (S7005), and if it is determined that the scoring effect is not executed (S7005: No), the scoring effect scenario of the tenth embodiment described above is performed. The same processing of S7011 and S7012 as the processing of S2364 and S2365 of the setting processing (see FIG. 352) is executed, the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S7010), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S7005, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed (S7005; Yes), the score granting scenario selection table 222ca is read out (S7006), and the granting scenario corresponding to the current winning information is selected in the score granting scenario selection table. Select using 222ca (S7007). Next, the selected grant scenario (grant scenarios 1 to 3) is stored in the grant scenario storage area 223ca (S7008), and S7009 is the same as S2361 of the score effect scenario setting process (see FIG. 352) of the tenth embodiment described above. Is executed, the above-mentioned process of S7010 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the pre-scoring effect setting process 3 (S2853) will be described with reference to FIG. 382. FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-score effect setting process 3 (S2853). This pre-score effect setting process 3 (S2853) executes a process for setting a variation pattern of each variation display during the pre-score effect in the present embodiment, and executes the process for setting the variation pattern of each variation display during the pre-score effect in the present embodiment. For the setting process 2 (see FIG. 375), the process of setting the variation pattern during the pre-scoring effect is set based on the grant scenario set in the score effect scenario setting process 3 (see FIG. 381). It differs in that it is changed to the processing to be performed.

When the pre-score effect setting process 3 (S2853) is executed, first, the grant scenario stored in the grant scenario storage area 223ca is read (S7101), and then the value of the effect variation counter 223m is read (S7102). .. Then, the current variation pattern is selected using the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cc (S7103), and the assigned score corresponding to the selected variation pattern is determined (S7104).

When the processing of S7104 is completed, the value corresponding to the determined score is then added to the value of the given score counter 223p (S7105), which is the same as S3456 to S3458 of the above-mentioned pre-scoring effect setting processing 2 (see FIG. 375). The processing of S7106 to S7108 is executed, the value of the effect fluctuation number counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S7109), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the contents of the final score effect setting process 3 (S2854) will be described with reference to FIG. 383. FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final score effect setting process 3 (S2854). The final score effect setting process 3 (S2854) executes a process for setting a variation pattern of the final score effect in the present embodiment. When the final score effect setting process 3 (S2854) is executed, first, the value of the notified number counter 223bb is read (S7201), and the value stored in the number storage area 223ba is read (S7202). Then, the value read in S7201 is subtracted from the value read in S7202 to determine whether or not there is a difference (S7203).

If it is determined in the processing of S7203 that there is a difference (the number of times that has not been notified yet among the set specific production times) (S7203: Yes), the value of the given score counter 223p is read out (S7204), and the difference value is supported. Calculate the difference-giving score (S7205). That is, the number of points to be given is calculated in order to notify all the preset specific number of times of the effect with respect to the points currently given.

After finishing the processing of S7205, the current variation pattern is selected using the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc (S7206). Next, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is a hit fluctuation (S7207), and if it is determined to be a hit fluctuation, an effect mode corresponding to the given score calculated in the process of S7205 is set (S7208). End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7207, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a hit fluctuation (S7207: No), the effect grant score is calculated within the range where the next lap value (upper limit value) is not reached (S7209), and the difference. The given score and the effect given score are added up (S7210), the above-mentioned process of S7208 is executed, and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, as the final score effect, when the current fluctuation is not a hit variation, the processes (S7209 and S7210) for positively giving a score within a range in which the specific number of effects does not increase are executed. It is configured to be done. With this configuration, the player can expect that the number of specific effects executed during the final score effect will increase.

<About the first production example showing the production mode of the variable display in each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 384 to 388, the effect mode set in the variable display in each of the above-described embodiments will be described in detail. As described above, each variation display executed when the score effect is executed is configured so that a plurality of score-giving effects can be executed during the variation display, and the total score-giving effect set as the score effect is set. Various score-giving effects are set based on points, scenarios, and the like.

Here, with reference to FIG. 384 (a), the period configuration of each fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type of the special symbol will be described. FIG. 384 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the period configuration of each fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 384 (a), each fluctuation pattern has a notice period (first notice period, second notice period) before the reach mode is displayed and a reach period (first reach period) in which the reach mode is displayed. , Second reach period, special reach period).

Next, with reference to FIG. 384 (b), an effect mode that can be executed during the notice period (pre-reach period) in each fluctuation pattern will be described. FIG. 384 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the effect mode that can be executed during the notice period (pre-reach period).

As shown in FIG. 384 (b), it is stipulated that four types of effect modes (notice A to notice D) can be executed during the notice period, and whether a score is given for each effect mode. The number of effects suggesting whether or not to give (the number of suggestions for giving P), the number of times it can be notified that a score will be given (the number of times P is displayed), and the range of the number of points that can be obtained for one P display (the number of acquired Ps). / Display), and whether or not the effect is such that the frame button 22 is operated (whether or not there is an operation) is specified.

Specifically, the notice A is an effect in which the number of times P is suggested is 2 times, the number of times P is displayed is 0 to 2, the number of acquired Ps / display is 1 to 2, and the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary. Is an effect in which the number of suggested P grants is 5 times, the number of suggested P grants is 1 to 5, the number of acquired Ps / display is 1, and the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary. , P display number is 1 time, acquisition P number / display is 1 to 8, and the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary. In the notice D, P grant suggestion number is 1 time, P display number is 1 time, and acquisition. The number of Ps / display is 0 to 18, and the operation of the frame button 22 is required.

Next, with reference to FIG. 385, an effect mode that can be executed during the reach period in each variation pattern will be described. FIG. 385 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the effect mode that can be executed during the reach period.

As shown in FIG. 385, it is stipulated that five types of effect modes (reach A to reach E) can be executed during the reach period, and it is suggested whether or not a score is given for each effect mode. The number of effects to be performed (the number of suggested P grants), the number of times it is possible to notify that a score will be granted (P display count), the range of points that can be obtained for one P display (number of acquired P / display), Whether or not the effect is such that the frame button 22 is operated (presence or absence of operation), the degree of expectation of hit, and the period during which the frame button 22 can be executed are defined.

Specifically, when the effect mode is reach A, the number of suggested times of giving P (points) is "2 times", the number of times of P display is "0 to 2 times", and the number of acquired P / display is "1 to 6". , No operation notice effect (no operation notice effect is set) is selected as the operation notice effect (presence or absence of operation). Further, as an explanation of reach A, it is possible to obtain a high score (point) as the degree of expectation for giving P, but it is a production mode in which there is a possibility of 0 point. The expected degree of jackpot is "low", which is set low. The executable period in which the effect mode of reach A is executed is set to the first reach period (see FIG. 384 (a)). As shown in FIG. 385, the reach B is also configured so that each score-giving effect content is selected in the same manner as the effect mode of the reach A. As shown in FIG. 385, the effect mode of reach B is an effect mode in which at least one point (point) can be obtained, but it is set to be more difficult to obtain a high score than the effect mode of reach A. There is.

Reach effect C has a medium hit expectation and can be executed during the first reach period and the second reach period (see FIG. 384 (a)), and reach effect D has a high hit expectation. , The first reach period and the second reach period (see FIG. 384 (a)) are feasible, and the reach effect E has a very high hit expectation and a special reach period (see FIG. 384 (a)). Is set to be executable.

<About the electrical configuration in the first production example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 386, the electrical configuration in the first production example will be described. FIG. 386 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first production example. In the first effect example, the final variation pattern for selecting the variation pattern corresponding to the final score effect executed for the final variation of the score effect from the variation pattern selection table 222a among the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the voice lamp control device 113. The difference is that the variation pattern selection table 222da is added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the twelfth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents specified in the final variation pattern selection table 222da in the first production example will be described with reference to FIG. 387. FIG. 387 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the final variation pattern selection table 222da. In this final variation pattern selection table 222da, as the variation pattern of the final variation in the scoring effect (the variation pattern in which the final score effect is executed), the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 and the winning / failing determination are made. Corresponding to the result and the remaining number of points (difference) to be given in the current scoring effect, the effect mode (score giving effect) set in each period of the fluctuation pattern is defined.

Specifically, when the variation type is normal reach, the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, and the difference value is 1, the variation pattern to be selected is the advance notice effect (score giving effect) during the first notice period. ) Is not set, "notice B (granted score 1 (1P))" is set as a score-giving effect in the second notice period, the effect mode of "reach B" is defined in the first reach period, and the second reach. In the period, the variation pattern in which the effect mode is not selected is selected.

Similarly, when the difference is 2 to 5, the notice effect (score giving effect) is not set in the first notice period, and "notice A" is set as the score giving effect in the second notice period, and the first The effect mode of "reach C" is defined in the reach period, and a variation pattern in which the effect mode is not selected is selected in the second reach period. If the difference is 6, "notice D" is set as a score-giving effect in the first notice period, "notice A" is set as a score-giving effect in the second notice period, and "reach" is set in the first reach period. The effect mode of "D" is defined, and a variation pattern in which the effect mode is not selected is selected in the second reach period. Similarly, when the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, the advance notice type or the effect mode is selected corresponding to each period as shown in FIG. 387. In addition, the super shows the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, and like the normal reach, it corresponds to each of the hit / fail judgment results (hits and misses) and corresponds to each period. The final variation pattern selection table 222da is set so that the advance notice type or the effect mode is selected.

Further, the special indicates a fluctuation pattern of the special reach, and a special reach (an effect mode that is not set for other fluctuation patterns) is set over the first reach period and the second reach period.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first production example>
In the first effect example, the final score effect setting process 4 is executed in place of the final score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 383) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 for the twelfth embodiment described above. It is different in that it does. Here, the contents of the final score effect setting process 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 388. FIG. 388 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final score effect setting process 4. In the final score effect setting process 4 (S2854), the processing content for selecting the variation pattern using the difference-giving score is different from the final score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 383) described above, and other than that. The contents of are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 388, when the final score effect setting process 4 (S2854) is executed, the same processes S7201 to S7205 as the final score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 383) described above are executed. Then, when the process of S7205 is completed, the final variation pattern is selected using the final variation pattern selection table 222da (S7251), and this process is terminated.

<About the second production example>
The following effects may be used for each of the above-described embodiments. For example, in the eleventh embodiment described above, a configuration is used in which the number of specific effects executed in the final variation of the scoring effect can be notified to the player in advance, but in addition to the configuration, the specification in the final variation is used. A configuration that can notify the player in advance of the execution timing of the effect may be used. Here, with reference to FIGS. 389 to 395, a second effect example in which the execution timing of the specific effect executed in the final variation of the score effect can be notified to the player in advance will be described.

In this second production example, the execution timing of the specific effect executed in the final variation of the scoring effect is final among the plurality of variations in which the scoring effect is executed, which is one variation before the final variation (pre-final variation). It is configured to execute a notification effect (countdown effect) that can notify the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed due to fluctuations. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict in advance the content of the effect to be executed in the final score effect of the score effect, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation. it can.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a long fluctuation time can be easily selected when a big hit of a special symbol is won. Therefore, depending on the length of the period notified by the countdown effect, it is possible to raise the expectation that the scoring effect of this time is executed in response to the special symbol that wins the jackpot.

First, with reference to FIG. 389, the content of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second example of the effect will be described. FIG. 389 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the countdown effect is executed in the final pre-variation, and FIG. 389 (b) is a schematic diagram. , Is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen of a countdown effect at the time when the final fluctuation is started.

As shown in FIG. 389 (a), when the countdown effect is executed in the final pre-variation, the timing at which the specific effect is executed in the next variation (final variation of the score effect) is the first countdown display area Dg10a and the first countdown effect. 2 It is displayed in the countdown display area Dg10b.

Here, in the second effect example, as the countdown effect described above, a plurality of execution timings of the specific effect executed in the final variation of the score effect can be displayed, and the score effect is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a. The execution timing of the specific effect to be executed first in the final variation of the score effect is displayed, and the execution timing of the specific effect to be executed later in the final variation of the score effect is displayed in the second countdown display area Dg10b.

According to the example shown in FIG. 389 (a), "15 seconds" is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a, and the characters "preparing" are displayed in the second countdown display area Dg10b. Here, a method of setting the display contents displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a and the second countdown display area Dg10b as the countdown effect will be briefly described.

The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the final scoring effect executed in the final variation of the scoring effect of the second effect example is the period during which a specific effect can be set at a point where a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the variation. (For example, the end timing of the first notice period (see FIG. 384 (a))).

Further, when the countdown effect is started based on the fluctuation time counted by the fluctuation time counter 223h and the fluctuation pattern set by the fluctuation display setting process, the residual fluctuation time of the final pre-variation can be measured (discriminated). Means are provided. Then, the total value (time) of the remaining fluctuation time of the final pre-effect and the predetermined period from the start of the fluctuation of the final fluctuation is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a. With this configuration, even if the execution timing of the countdown effect (the timing at which the countdown effect is determined to be executed) is different, the player can be accurately notified of the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

When time has passed from the state shown in FIG. 389 (a) and the final fluctuation is executed, "10 seconds" is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a as shown in FIG. 389 (b), and the first countdown display area Dg10a is displayed. 2 “30 seconds” is displayed in the countdown display area Dg10b. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of at least the number of specific effects to be executed during the final fluctuation and the timing at which each specific effect is executed, so that the player can grasp the timing at which the specific effects are executed. The final score effect can be executed in this state.

Here, as the content of the effect that can be executed as a specific effect, there is an effect of giving a score to change the display mode of the storage gauge Dg, and an effect of increasing the expectation of winning the jackpot, so that the effect is notified by a countdown effect. Which production mode is the target of the countdown effect, depending on whether or not the timing (execution timing of the specific effect) is, for example, the timing at which it is difficult to give a score (the timing when the score-giving effect is not executed). It is possible to make the player predict whether or not it will be executed in. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the scoring effect to the end while letting the player predict the result of the scoring effect this time in advance.

In this second production example, a countdown effect for notifying the execution timing is used for a plurality of (two) specific effects, but the number of specific effects for which the execution timing is notified is not limited to this. It may be one or three or more. Further, in the second effect example, the period until the specific effect is executed is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a, but "preparing" is also displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a. Is also good.

In addition, in this second production example, a countdown effect based on the actual timed time is used to notify the execution timing of the specific effect executed in the final variation, but the specific effect executed in the final variation is used. The execution timing may be configured to be suggestive to the player. For example, the time until a plurality of specific effects are executed may be calculated, and the calculated times may be added up and displayed. With this configuration, it is not possible to accurately grasp the timing when each specific effect is executed, but since the player can grasp the total time, the final fluctuation (final score effect) is in progress. Each time a specific effect is executed, the timing and number of times the remaining specific effect is executed can be predicted. In this case, it is preferable to configure the player so as not to notify the player of the number of specific effects executed during the final variation (final score effect).

Further, the above-mentioned countdown effect is an effect of varying the variable display mode in which the variable display mode is variably displayed so that it can be grasped whether the period until the specific effect is executed is short (for example, within 2 seconds) or long (for example, 30 seconds). It may be used instead of. Further, during the pre-final fluctuation, "preparing" is displayed in the second countdown display area Dg10b (see FIG. 389 (a)), and when the final fluctuation is executed thereafter, the character "preparing" is displayed as a big hit. It may be configured to be variable to a display mode (for example, "chance") that raises expectations. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to a player who thinks that the timing at which the specific effect is executed is notified. In this case, it is preferable to configure the display mode so as to show contents that are more advantageous to the player than various effects that can be executed as a score-giving effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction with the player even if the specific effect that was recognized to be executed is not executed.

As described above, by executing the countdown effect of this second production example, it is possible to predict the jackpot expectation while grasping the progress of the countdown effect and the progress of the score effect, and the effect of the effect. Can be enhanced.

In addition, when displaying some countdown display modes as "preparing" instead of displaying the countdown display mode for all specific effects, the countdown display mode is set according to the execution timing of each specific effect. It is preferable to display the display and to let the player grasp only the execution order of each specific effect. As a result, it is possible to predict at what timing the specific effect corresponding to the countdown display mode displayed as "preparing" will be executed, based on the countdown display mode corresponding to the other specific effect.

Further, the period displayed in the countdown display area may be configured to be variable when the final variation of the score effect is executed (when the final score effect is executed). As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect. In this case, it is preferable to configure the countdown display mode so that the period displayed is longer. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second production example, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. Therefore, the period displayed in the countdown display area is changed to be longer. So, you can raise the expectation of big hits.

Further, when changing the countdown display mode displayed in the countdown display area, it is preferable to provide a determination means for determining whether or not to change the countdown display mode according to the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22) by the player.

In the second effect example, in order to execute the countdown display described above, a determination process for determining whether or not to execute the countdown display in the variation display immediately before the final variation of the score effect (pre-final variation display) is performed. Is executed, and when it is determined that the countdown display is executed, the remaining period of the fluctuation (pre-final fluctuation) is calculated, and the predetermined period of the final fluctuation (for example, 10 seconds), that is, the final fluctuation is calculated in the remaining period. The process of displaying the total period, which is the sum of the periods that surely elapse, is displayed in the countdown display area regardless of the fluctuation type.

Then, when the final variation of the score effect (final score effect) is executed, it is determined whether the countdown effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the countdown effect is being executed, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variation (for example, 10). It is preferable to configure so that the specific effect of 1 is executed (after seconds). With this configuration, the countdown effect can be easily executed.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment described above, the entire period of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the final fluctuation of the scoring effect is set as the period during which the scoring effect can be executed. The first predetermined period (for example, the first 10 seconds) may be set so that the specific effect is not executed, and may be set as a pseudo specific effect period for the countdown effect. With this configuration, when the countdown effect is executed in the pre-final variation of the specific effect, in addition to the remaining period of the variation, the timing of 1 from the range of the first 10 seconds of the variation time of the final variation can be set. Even if it is selected and the total period is set, it does not interfere with the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the final fluctuation. Therefore, a specific effect can be easily set.

If a new charge is acquired during the final change of the score effect (the given score reaches a predetermined amount), the specific effect may be executed immediately, or the specific effect may be performed within the change. The period until execution may be displayed as a countdown. Further, a plurality of countdown displays may be executed at the timing when one specific effect is executed. That is, when the specific effect is executed after 10 seconds, the plurality of countdown displays may be configured to be displayed in different display modes indicating 10 seconds later. In this case, for example, it is preferable to make the count speed of each countdown display different so that the player can grasp that the same timing is shown as the timing at which the specific effect is executed approaches. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode of the plurality of countdown displays, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, the above-mentioned countdown effect is used as an effect indicating the execution timing of the specific effect executed during the final change of the score effect, but it may be used for other purposes. For example, the final change of the score effect may be used. When the jackpot is won, the predetermined timing during the jackpot game executed after the final change may be configured to be indicated by a countdown display. With this configuration, it is possible to set a countdown display mode that is longer than the fluctuation time of the final fluctuation of the score effect.

<About the electrical configuration in the second production example>
Next, the electrical configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second production example will be described with reference to FIG. 390. FIG. 390 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second production example, and FIG. 390 (b) is a schematic view in the second production example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents specified in the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113. The second production example is different in that the first countdown flag 223ea and the second countdown flag 223eb are added to each of the above-described embodiments.

The first countdown flag 223ea is a flag for indicating that the countdown effect is executed, and the score given by the score giving effect executed during the final pre-variation is the lap value (the storage gauge Dg becomes MAX). When the value) is exceeded (S7106: Yes in FIG. 392), it is set to ON in the countdown setting process (see S7151 in FIG. 393) to be executed (see S7304 in FIG. 393). Then, it is referred to in the final score effect setting process 5 (see S2854 in FIG. 394) for setting the final score effect executed during the final fluctuation (S7271 in FIG. 394), and it is determined that the final score effect is set to ON. (S7271 in FIG. 394; Yes), the countdown effect is set in the countdown effect setting process (S7272 in FIG. 395) to be executed, and then turned off (see S7402 in FIG. 395).

The second countdown flag 223eb is a flag for indicating that the condition for displaying the second countdown display area Dg10b is satisfied as the countdown effect, and is given by the score giving effect executed during the final pre-variation. When the second countdown effect is executed in the countdown setting process (see S7151 in FIG. 393) to be executed when the score exceeds the lap value (value at which the storage gauge Dg becomes MAX) (S7106: Yes in FIG. 392). When determined, it is set to on (S7305: Yes in FIG. 393) (see S7307 in FIG. 393). Here, the determination of S7305 is executed by determining whether or not the lap value has been exceeded twice in the process of S7106 of the final pre-score effect setting process (see S2872 in FIG. 392). Then, in the final score effect setting process 5 (see S2854 in FIG. 394) for setting the final score effect executed during the final fluctuation, it is referred to in the countdown effect setting process (S7272 in FIG. 395) executed (see S7272 in FIG. 395). When it is determined that it is set to on (S7405: Yes in FIG. 395), the second countdown effect is set (S7407 in FIG. 395), and then it is set to off (S7405 in FIG. 395). See S7402).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second production example>
Next, the content of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 395. In this second effect example, as described above, the final score effect is executed in the final variation of the score effect, and the execution timing of the specific effect executed during the final score effect is notified to the player during the execution of the final pre-variation. The process for executing the countdown effect is executed.

The contents of the effect setting process 5 (S2704) in the second effect example will be described with reference to FIG. 391. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 5 (S2704). This effect setting process 5 (S2704) is a dedicated effect for the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 353) in the tenth embodiment described above, in which the variation is one before the final variation of the scoring effect. The difference is that the setting process is executed, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect setting process 5 (S2704) is executed, the same processes of S2851 and S2852 as those of the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 353) described above are executed, and the value of the effect variation counter 223 m is 0 in the process of S2851. If it is determined that the amount is not large (S2851: No), the same processing of S2855 to S2858 as described in the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 353) is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2852 that the value of the effect fluctuation number counter is 1 (S2852: Yes), the final score effect setting process 5 is executed (S2873), and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined in the process of S2852 that the value of the effect variation counter is not 1 (S2852: No), then it is determined whether the value of the effect variation counter is 2 (S2871), and the effect variation. If it is determined that the value of the number-of-times counter is 2, the final pre-score effect setting process is executed (S2872), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2871, when it is determined that the value of the effect fluctuation number counter is not 2 (S2871: No), the pre-score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 382) is performed as in the twelfth embodiment described above. It is executed (S2853), and this process is terminated. With this configuration, as the process for setting the effect content of each variation during the score effect, the process of setting the final score effect corresponding to the final variation and the process of setting the final pre-effect corresponding to the final pre-variation are set. It is possible to execute the process of performing the process differently from the process of setting the pre-scoring effect corresponding to the other fluctuations.

Next, with reference to FIG. 392, the content of the final pre-score effect setting process (S2872) executed in the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 391) will be described. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final pre-score effect setting process (S2872). In this final pre-score effect setting process (S2872), the countdown setting process for executing the above-mentioned countdown effect is executed. The other processes are the same as the above-mentioned pre-score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 382), and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the final pre-score effect setting process (S2872) is executed, the same processes of S7101 to S7109 as those of the pre-score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 382) described above are executed. Among them, after executing the process of S7108, the countdown process is executed (S7151), and when the process of S7151 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S7107 described above. That is, in this effect example, in the final pre-variation, a process for executing the countdown effect is executed when the lap value (upper limit value of the gauge) is exceeded.

In this effect example, since the countdown effect is executed only in the final pre-variation, for example, when the special symbol change is executed, the main control device 110 executes the special symbol change start process. Even in the case where the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected by the value of the special symbol holding ball counter is different, the countdown effect can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 393, the content of the countdown setting process (S7151) executed in the final pre-score effect setting process (see FIG. 392) will be described. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown setting process (S7151). In this countdown setting process, a countdown period corresponding to the execution timing of the specific effect executed in the final score effect is set, and a display command for displaying the countdown effect is set.

When the countdown setting process (S7151) is executed, first, the remaining period from the countdown start timing, that is, the remaining residual variation period from the timing when the countdown setting process is executed in the pre-final variation is calculated (S7301) and calculated. 10 seconds is added to the remaining period (S7302). In this production example, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 395, when the countdown effect is executed, a specific effect (pseudo specific effect) is performed 10 seconds after the start of the final fluctuation (after the end of the first notice period). ) Is executed. Therefore, in the process of S7302, by adding 10 seconds to the remaining period, it is possible to set the execution timing of the specific effect in the final variation which is the next variation.

After finishing the process of S7302, next, the first countdown command for display corresponding to the added number of seconds is set (S7303), and the first countdown flag 223ea is set to ON (S7304). Then, it is determined whether or not the second countdown effect is executed (S7305), and if it is determined that the second countdown effect is to be executed (S7305: Yes), a second countdown command for display indicating "preparing" is set. (S7306), the second countdown flag 223eb is set to ON (S7307), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second countdown effect is not executed in the process of S7305 (S7305: No), the processes of S7306 and S7307 are skipped and the present process is terminated. Here, the processing content of S7305 will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 389, in this effect example, when the lap value is exceeded by the number of points given in the final pre-variation, the player is notified of the execution timing of the specific effect executed in the final variation. It is configured to perform a countdown effect to do so. Furthermore, when a large number of points are given in the final pre-variation and the lap value is exceeded twice, as a countdown effect, the game is played with the execution timing of a plurality of (twice) specific effects executed in the final variation. It is configured to execute a countdown effect for notifying a person.

Then, in the process of S7405, a final pre-variation effect in which a large amount of points are given in the final pre-variation is set, and the process is executed by determining whether or not the lap value is exceeded twice in the final pre-variation. .. Specifically, the determination method is based on the value of the notified number counter 223bb updated in the final pre-score effect setting process (see FIG. 392).

<About the second operation effect example of the operation score effect in each embodiment>
Next, another example of the operation effect executed in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 396 to 402. In the first operation effect example described above with reference to FIGS. 359 to 365, the effect modes of the first notice effect and the second notice effect that are set in duplicate are changed according to the execution timing of each notice effect. It was configured like this. Further, the first notice effect is an operation effect executed when the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22, and the valid period of the operation effect (the predetermined operation on the frame button 22) is set to the second. By setting so as to overlap with the advance notice effect, the effect mode executed in each advance notice effect is changed according to the timing when the player operates the frame button 22.

More specifically, the valid period of the operation effect (predetermined operation on the frame button 22) is the first period before the timing when the second notice effect is executed, and the second period during the second notice effect period. , It is divided into a third period after the second notice period, it is determined which period the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 corresponds to, and the production mode of each notice effect is based on the determination result. Was configured to be variable.

On the other hand, in the second operation effect example, a plurality of advance notice effects can be set independently, and the effect mode (preliminary content) of the advance notice effects set independently is determined. A configuration is used in which the execution timing of each advance notice effect is adjusted based on the determination result. With this configuration, when a plurality of advance notice effects are executed for one effect target (for example, a score-giving effect), the effect content of the advance notice effect to be executed first is executed later. If the content is more reliable than the production content, the meaning of the advance notice production to be executed later is lost, and the problem that the production effect is lowered can be solved.

Further, since it is not necessary to change the effect mode as compared with the first operation effect example described above, when a plurality of advance notice effects are executed using different display forms, the effect is variable for each of the advance notice effects. Since it is not necessary to provide a display mode of the content to be displayed, the amount of data for executing the advance notice effect can be reduced.

Further, in the second operation effect example, at least one of the plurality of independently set advance notice effects is an operation effect executed when the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22. In addition, when the timings are duplicated, the execution timing of each advance notice effect is set to be different based on the timing when a predetermined operation is performed on the frame button 22. As a result, even if the advance notice effect whose execution timing of the advance notice effect is changed by the operation of the player is used, each advance notice effect can be executed in an appropriate order.

Next, with reference to FIG. 396 (a), the content of the effect of the second operation effect example will be described. FIG. 396 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of the effect in the case where a plurality of notice effects overlap. According to the example shown in FIG. 396 (a), the first notice effect and the second notice effect executed based on a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 overlap. Specifically, the first notice effect is an operation effect executed in the main display area Dm of FIG. 360 (a) described above, and the second notice effect is displayed in the small area Ds2 of FIG. 360 (a). The same effect as the notice effect using the treasure box is executed.

In the first notice effect, a 10-second frame button operable range (operation valid period) is set after a 2-second notification period (a period for notifying the player that the effect of operating the frame button 22 is executed). After that, a notice effect display period of 8 seconds is set, and the notice effect is configured as a total of 20 seconds. Here, when the player operates the frame button 22 within the frame button operable range for 10 seconds, the first notice effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 396 (a), the second notice effect notifies the player of the period in which the notice effect is executed for 5 seconds (the second notice effect period) and the execution of the second notice effect. It is composed of a second advance notice period of 18 seconds for the purpose, and further divides the second advance notice period into a second advance notice period 1 (10 seconds) and a second advance notice period 2 (8 seconds). It is configured. When the second advance notice effect is executed independently, the advance notice effect is executed for 5 seconds at the timing when the second advance notice period (18 seconds in total) has elapsed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 396 (b), the relationship between the operation timing of the frame button 22 which is the operation means, the execution timing of the first notice effect, and the execution timing of the second notice effect will be described. FIG. 138 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation timing of the frame button and the notice display timing. As shown in FIG. 396 (b), in this second operation effect example, when the first notice effect and the second notice effect are set in duplicate as shown in FIG. 396 (a), the first notice is given. If the first notice display timing and the second notice display timing are different according to the first notice display timing of the effect, that is, the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 within the frame button operable range of the first notice effect. I'm letting you.

Specifically, if the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated is the "first period", "after the first period" is set as the first notice display timing, and "second advance notice" is set as the second notice display timing. After period 1 "is set. If the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated is the "second period", "immediately after the operation" is set as the first notice display timing, and "same as the first notice display" is set as the second notice display timing. Will be done. It should be noted that executing the second notice display at the same timing as the first notice display timing is a concept including a slight error that the player cannot recognize, and is a range in which the player can recognize that they are displayed in the same manner. If it is good.

If the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated is the "third period", "immediately after the operation" is set as the first notice display timing, and "after the second advance notice period 2" is set as the second notice display timing. Set. Further, if the frame button is not operated within the frame button operable range (10 seconds) of the first notice effect, the first notice display is not executed, and the second notice display timing is "the second advance notice period". "After 2" is set.

As described above, if the frame button 22 is operated during the first period of the frame button operable range, the notice display of the second notice effect is executed after the notice display of the first notice effect is executed. .. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the second period, the notice display of the first notice effect and the notice display of the second notice effect have the same timing (including an error to the extent that the player recognizes that they are displayed in the same manner). ) Is executed. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated during the third period, the notice display of the second notice effect has already been executed (the notice display of the second notice effect is displayed after the lapse of the second advance notice period 2). (Because it is displayed), the notice display of the first notice effect is executed after the notice display of the second notice effect is executed.

With this configuration, when a plurality of advance notice effects are duplicated, the execution timing of each of the plurality of advance notice effects set in duplicate is set based on the timing at which the advance notice display of one advance notice effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of advance notice effects in an appropriate order.

Further, when the above-mentioned second notice effect is executed independently, after an 18-second advance notice period (the period during which the treasure box shown in FIG. 361 (a) is displayed), the notice display of the second notice effect ( (See FIG. 362 (a)) is set in advance to be executed, but when it is executed in duplicate with the operation notice effect (first notice effect) as shown in FIG. 396 (a), If the frame button 22 is operated during the first period or the second period within the frame button operable range of the operation notice effect (first notice effect), the notice of the second notice effect is given during the second advance notice period. It is possible to execute the display (see FIG. 362 (a)).

Further, in the second advance notice period 1 of the second advance notice period for notifying in advance that the second notice effect will be executed, the notice display of the second notice effect is displayed regardless of the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated. Is not executed, so that it is possible to reliably secure a period for notifying in advance that the second notice effect will be executed.

<About the electrical configuration of the second operation production example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 397, the electrical configuration in the second operation effect example will be described. The second operation effect example is different from the ninth embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 397 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second operation effect example. In the second operation effect example, the first comment notice selection table 222ea and the second comment notice selection table 222eb are added to the ROM 222 (see FIG. 288 (a)) in the ninth embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first comment notice selection table 222ea is a data table for selecting the first comment notice effect mode (notice content, execution timing), which is the advance notice effect (first notice effect) used in the second operation effect example. Therefore, a plurality of production modes are defined corresponding to the values of the first comment lottery counter (not shown) included in the production counter 223f. The first comment notice selection table 222ea is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the first comment notice in the comment notice setting process (see FIG. 399) (S7501 in FIG. 399).

The second comment notice selection table 222eb is a data table for selecting the effect mode (notice content, execution timing) of the second comment notice, which is the notice effect (second notice effect) used in the second operation effect example. Therefore, a plurality of production modes are defined corresponding to the values of the second comment lottery counter (not shown) included in the production counter 223f. The second comment notice selection table 222eb is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the second comment notice in the comment notice setting process (see FIG. 399) (S7502 in FIG. 399).

It should be noted that the first comment notice selection table 222ea and the second comment notice selection table 222eb described above are each composed of different data tables, and are configured so that the production modes are independently selected.

FIG. 397 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second operation effect example. In the second operation effect example, the first comment flag 223ea and the advance notice duplication flag 223eb are added to the RAM 223 (see FIG. 288 (a)) in the ninth embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first comment flag 223ea is a flag for determining that the first comment notice is executed, and indicates that the first comment notice is executed when the first comment notice is set to ON. The first comment flag 223ea is set to on (S7503: Yes in FIG. 399) when it is determined that the first comment notice is to be executed in the comment notice setting process (see S2951 in FIG. 399) described later (FIG. 399). S7504), referred to in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 6 (see FIG. 400) (see S3051 in FIG. 400), and turned off after setting the display notice command in the notice mode setting process 6 (see FIG. 401). It is set (see S3077 in FIG. 401).

The notice duplication flag 223eb is a flag for indicating that the first comment notice and the second comment notice are set in the overlapping period, and when it is set to ON, the first comment notice and the second comment notice are set. Indicates that and was set in the overlapping period. This notice duplication flag 223eb is set to on (S7509) when it is determined that there is a duplication period (S7508: Yes in FIG. 399) in the comment notice setting process (see S2951 in FIG. 399) described later, and the frame button. It is referred to in the input monitoring / effect processing 6 (see FIG. 400) (see S3052 in FIG. 400), and is set to off after setting the display notice command in the notice mode setting process 6 (see FIG. 401) (see FIG. 401). See S3077).

<Regarding the control processing of the second operation effect example>
Next, the control process in the second operation effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 398 to 402. In the second operation effect example, when the comment notice is included in the fluctuation pattern executed during the score effect, the process for setting the comment notice is executed.

First, the contents of the score giving effect setting process 6 (S2803) will be described with reference to FIG. 398. FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing the contents of the score giving effect setting process 6 (S2803). The score-giving effect setting process 6 (S2803) is different from the score-giving effect setting process (see FIG. 323) of the ninth embodiment described above in that a process related to comment notice is added instead of the operation score effect. Everything else is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the score-giving effect setting process 6 (S2803) is executed, first, the same processes of S2901 to S2910 as the above-mentioned score-giving effect setting process (see FIG. 323) are executed, and when the processing of S2910 is completed, then , The comment notice setting process is executed (S2951), the above-mentioned process of S2908 is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, the content of the comment notice setting process (S2951) will be described with reference to FIG. 399. FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing the contents of the comment notice setting process (S2951). In this comment notice setting process (S2951), a process for setting whether or not to execute the comment notice in the fluctuation pattern determined this time and the effect mode (notice content, execution timing) of the comment notice to be executed is performed. Will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 399, when the comment notice setting process (S2951) is executed, the first comment notice is first selected using the first comment notice selection table 222ea (S7501), and then the second comment notice is selected. The second comment notice is selected using the table 222eb (S7502). Then, it is determined whether or not it is selected to execute the first comment notice in the processing of S7501 (S7503), and if it is determined that the first comment notice is to be executed (S7503: Yes), the first comment flag 223ea is turned on. It is set (S7504), then it is determined whether or not it is selected to execute the second comment notice in the processing of S7502 (S7504), and if it is determined that the second comment notice is to be executed (S7505: Yes), the first 1 The notice content selected as the comment notice and the notice content selected as the second comment notice are determined (S7506).

Then, the first comment notice execution period and the second comment notice execution period are set based on the determination content of S7506 (S7507), and then the first comment notice execution period and the second comment notice execution period set this time are set. It is determined whether there is a period that overlaps with the period (S7508). If it is determined that there is an overlap period in the process of S7508 (S7508: Yes), the advance notice duplication flag 223eb is set to ON (S7509), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no overlapping period in the processing of S7508 (S7508: No), the processing of S7509 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is. Here, when it is determined that there is no overlapping period in the process of S7508, each comment notice is executed based on the first comment notice execution period and the second comment notice execution period set in the process of S7507. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 400, the contents of the button input monitoring / effect processing 6 (S2107) executed in the main process (see FIG. 314) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second operation effect example will be described. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 (S2107), a process for displaying the effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 at each timing on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 (S2107) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S3001), and if it is determined that the pressing is not detected (S3001: No), This process ends as it is. When it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S3001: Yes), it is determined whether the first comment flag is on (S3051). When it is determined that the first comment flag is on (S3051: Yes), the operated flag is set to on (S3003), and it is determined whether the notice duplication flag is on (3052). If it is determined that the notice duplication flag is on (3052: Yes), the notice mode setting process 6 is executed (S3053). The notice mode setting process 6 (S3053) will be described later with reference to FIG. 401.

After the process of S3053 is executed, the process of S3004 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S3052, when it is determined that the notice duplication flag is off (S3052: No), the process of S3004 is executed. In the process of S3004, a display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing is set (S3004). On the other hand, in the process of S3051, when it is determined that the first comment flag is off (S3051: No), it is determined whether it is another operation period. If it is determined that the operation period is other than that, the process of S3004 is executed. After executing the process of S3004, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3005, when it is determined that the operation period is out of the others (S3005: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 401, a notice that is one process in the button input monitoring / effect process 6 (S2107) executed in the main process (see FIG. 314) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second operation effect example. The contents of the mode setting process 6 (S3051) will be described. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing the advance notice mode setting process 6 (S3051). In this notice mode setting process 6 (S3051), a process of setting various effects based on the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed is executed.

When the notice mode setting process 6 (S3051) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressing timing is the first period (S3053). When the pressing timing is the first period (S3053: Yes), the execution period of the first comment notice is set after the first period (S3071). The execution period of the second comment notice is set after the end of the second advance notice period 1 (S3072). After that, the process of S3055 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3053 that the pressing timing is outside the first period (S3053: No), it is determined whether the pressing timing is within the second period (S3056). When it is determined that the pressing timing is within the second period (S3056: Yes), the execution of the first comment notice is set (S3073). The execution of the second comment notice is set (S3074). After that, the process of S3055 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3056, when it is determined that the pressing timing is outside the second period (S3056: No), the execution of the first comment notice is set (S3075). After that, the execution period of the second comment notice is set after the end of the second advance notice period 2 (S3076).

In the process of S3055, a display notice command corresponding to the set mode is set (S3055). After that, the first comment flag and the notice duplication flag are set to off (S3077), and then this process ends.

Next, the contents of the effect update process 6 (S2112) in the second operation effect example will be described with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 6 (S2112). In the effect update process 6 (S2112), a process for setting an execution period of the advance notice effect to be executed when the frame button 22 is not operated during the execution period of the first advance notice effect is executed.

When the effect update process 6 (S2112) is executed, first, it is determined whether the first comment flag 223ea is set to ON (S3171), and if it is determined that the first comment flag 223ea is set to ON (S3171: Yes). Then, it is determined whether the second period has passed (S3172). Here, whether or not the third period is determined is determined using the time measured by the fluctuation time counter 223h included in the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the process of S3172, when it is determined that the second period has elapsed (S3172: Yes), it is determined whether the operated flag 223r is on (S3173), and it is determined that the operated flag 223r is not on. If so (S3173: No), then it is determined whether the advance notice duplication flag 223eb is set to ON (S3174).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3171 that the first comment flag 223ea is not on (S3171: No), the second period has not passed in the process of S3172, that is, the present is the first notice effect period. If it is determined that the status is inside (S3172: No), and if it is determined that the operated flag 223r is set to ON in the process of S3173 (S3173: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of S3174 that the notice duplication flag 223eb is set to ON (S3174: Yes), the execution period of the second comment notice is set after the end of the second advance notice period 2 (S3175), and the notice is given. The duplication flag 223eb is set to off (S3176), the first comment flag is set to off (S3177), and the present process is terminated. That is, when the first comment notice and the second comment notice are set in duplicate as described above with reference to FIG. 396 (a), the operation of the frame button 22 for the first comment notice, which is an operation effect. Is configured to set the execution period of the second comment notice when is not operated for a predetermined period (until the second period elapses).

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, as the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the lottery of the special symbol, a continuous effect executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations can be set. It is configured in. In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol using the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed before the target special symbol, the player can be directed for a longer period of time. Can be provided and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, since the lottery result (for example, deviation) of the special symbol can be continuously produced without highlighting each variation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's motivation to play is reduced. it can.

Further, an effect for giving a score for changing a predetermined stage information (gauge amount) to a different stage information (gauge amount) (score giving effect) and a case where the stage information becomes a specific stage information (gauge amount). Is configured to execute a specific effect (charge effect) that can be executed when the number reaches 6 and the charge amount is accumulated, and a score effect that can be executed. And, as a whole, in the scoring effect executed as a continuous effect, the lot of stage information is variable, and the more the charge amount is accumulated, the higher the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol to be the target of the scoring effect will be a big hit. It is configured to be.

As a result, the player is expected to win a big hit by executing the scoring effect so as to gradually change the stage information during the period during which the scoring effect is executed (multiple special symbol fluctuation periods). It can be visually notified, and it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage and enhance the effect of the effect.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment described above, as a score-giving effect, the score is displayed (granted) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol, and the displayed (granted) score is obtained. When a fixed amount (for example, 6) is accumulated, a specific effect (charge effect) is executed. As a result, by grasping the score displayed on the third symbol, it is possible to predict whether or not the specific effect is executed and the execution timing of the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the ninth embodiment described above, as a method of giving points during the score effect, a total score is set when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, and each time each variation display is executed during the score effect. , The score is set so as not to exceed the total score. As a result, it is possible to smoothly set the effect mode during the score effect.

Further, in the tenth embodiment described above, as a method of giving points to be given during the scoring effect, when it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed, the number of specific effects to be executed during the scoring effect is set in advance. It is configured to set the total number of points corresponding to the set number of times of the specific effect. As a result, the total number of points can be set within the range in which the number of times the specific effect is executed is the same, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the specific effect is configured to be executed only during the final variation of the score effect, that is, the variation display corresponding to the winning information command that caused the determination that the score effect is to be executed. In the variable display in which the score effect up to that point is executed, the stock effect for securing the number of times the specific effect is executed is configured to be executed.

With this configuration, the score effect can be enjoyed to the end, and it is not necessary to set the specific effect to be executed in the variation display other than the final variation, so that the variation display setting process can be easily executed. be able to.

In addition to the configuration of the eleventh embodiment described above, when it is determined that the scoring effect is to be executed, it is determined that the scoring effect is executed from the pre-variation period of the scoring effect (from the special symbol variation at which the scoring effect is started). As a score giving pattern during the period until the special symbol change (final change) corresponding to the winning information is started), one giving scenario is set from a plurality of giving scenarios having different giving patterns, and the setting is made. It is configured to manage the score grant timing using the given grant scenario, and the final fluctuation period of the score effect (the period during which the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the score effect is executed). The effect mode of the effect display (final score effect) to be executed is selected based on the set granting scenario.

As a result, the effect mode of the score-giving effect executed during the score-giving effect can be intentionally different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the total number of points to be given in the current score effect at an early stage, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, it is different in that the expectation of the jackpot winning indicated by the effect mode selected as the final score effect is configured to be different according to the set granting scenario.

With this configuration, the jackpot expectation can be changed according to the contents of the score production process (score giving process) and the variation display executed in the final variation (final score production). It is possible to keep the player expecting until the end of the scoring effect.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the scoring effect is executed by using a plurality of variations of the special symbol, but the scoring effect executed in each of the above-described embodiments is within one variation of the special symbol. It may be configured to execute. In this case, for example, one fluctuation pattern of a special symbol is divided into a plurality of blocks, a setting means for setting the plurality of blocks to the first half block and the second half block is provided, and the period set in the first half block is set in advance. It is preferable to execute the scoring effect and to execute the final scoring effect in the period set in the second half block. With this configuration, it is possible to set the effect mode of the second half block based on the effect mode of the first half block of one special symbol, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, the technical concept described in each of the above-described embodiments may be combined with a configuration in which a scoring effect is executed within one special symbol variation.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration for setting a plurality of scenarios is provided, but an effect of suggesting (notifying) the set scenarios to the player may be provided. As a result, the player can grasp various scenarios set during the scoring effect, so that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of inferring the effect result of the scoring effect.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration is used in which the gauge amount (stage information) is changed when a score is given in the score giving effect, but in addition to this, for example, no score is given in the score giving effect. When the effect (gase effect) is executed (for example, a score-giving effect in which 0 points are displayed), a measuring means for measuring the number of times of the gase effect is provided, and the number of times measured by the measuring means is a predetermined number (for example). For example, a variable means for changing the gauge amount (step information) when the score reaches 5 times) may be provided. As a result, even when the scoring effect is executed in the score-giving effect, the gauge amount (step information) can be changed, so that the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when it is decided to give a score (for example, 1 point) in the score giving effect, a means for determining whether a predetermined condition (for example, an operation to the operation means (frame button 22)) is satisfied is provided and predetermined. Based on the condition that the condition is satisfied, an effect switching means for switching between the normal score giving effect and the giving effect using the Gase information may be provided.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed, the number of points given in the continuous advance notice effect (total number of points) and the number of specific effects to be executed (total number of specific effects) are determined. It is configured to determine and set the effect mode of each variable display executed during the continuous advance notice effect according to the determined content. Then, as the effect mode of each variation display, the number of remaining fluctuations executed during the continuous advance notice effect and the winning / failing of the winning information that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect are up to the maximum of the above-mentioned total score and the total number of specific effects. Based on the judgment result, the score to be given and the number of specific effects are determined by lottery from a plurality of ranges.

With this configuration, the effect mode of each variable display executed during the continuous notice effect can be appropriately set for the continuous advance notice effect, and various effect modes can be set. .. However, since the score is randomly set for each variable display unit executed during the continuous notice effect, the score is intentionally set so as to have relevance (story) throughout the entire period of the continuous notice effect. There was a problem that it could not be granted.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, for example, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed, the result of determining whether or not the winning information that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect is to be executed, or the variable number of times displayed during the continuous advance notice effect A scenario is set so that the score-giving pattern during the entire period of the continuous advance notice effect is related (story) according to the number of special symbols) and the type of variation included in the winning information that is the target of the continuous advance notice effect. You may.

Specifically, as the scenario set here, a scenario in which a large number of total points are given in the first half of the continuous advance notice effect (scenario A) and a scenario in which a large number of total points are given in the latter half of the continuous notice effect (scenario B) , It is preferable to provide a scenario (scenario C) in which the total score is evenly given during the continuous advance notice effect, a scenario (scenario D) in which the total score is randomly given during the continuous advance notice effect, and the like. With this configuration, it is possible to give relevance (story) to the points given during the continuous advance notice production. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

When the above-mentioned scenario (score-giving scenario) is provided, it is preferable to configure it so as to set an effect mode corresponding to the set score-giving scenario. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress giving a player a sense of discomfort with respect to the continuous advance notice effect.

In the above-mentioned example, the scenario is set for the score giving pattern in the entire period of the continuous advance notice effect, but as another configuration, when setting the effect mode of each variation display during the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, a scenario may be set so as to have a relevance (story) to the score given in the variable display period, and the variable display effect corresponding to the scenario may be executed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, in the third symbol, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and during the normal state. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured so that the game can be executed in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operating means have been operated by the player's pressing operation are used, but other than that. The configuration may be used, and an operating means configured in a lever shape capable of determining that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means capable of discriminating, a wireless operating means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not by the main control device 110 but by the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine (simultaneous fluctuation type) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed at the same time has been described, but it may be adopted for other types of gaming machines. Good. Other types of gaming machines include, for example, a type of gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the order in which they win a prize at the starting port, and a change in one special symbol causes the other special symbol. There are types of gaming machines, etc. that are executed with priority over fluctuations in.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in combination thereof.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Feature A group> (Twice loop configuration)
A state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and a privilege advantageous to the player are given based on the establishment of predetermined conditions. In a gaming machine having at least a privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game to be played and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. When the first privilege game is executed in this state, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, the first privilege game is executed. , The second advantageous state is set after the execution of the second privilege game, and when the first privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the first The gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first advantageous state is set after the execution of the privileged game.

At least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, at least the first privilege game that gives the player an advantageous privilege and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means. When the first privilege game is executed while the first advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. As a result, even after the first privilege game is executed in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set, so that the advantageous state for the player can be continuously set. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privileged games are executed, and there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the privilege game execution means can execute a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means has the first advantageous state. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, and when the third privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the third privilege game is executed. The gaming machine A2, characterized in that the specific state is set after the execution of the third privilege game.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. As a result, in the second advantageous state, a specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third gaming state is executed is set, so that the continuous state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling of the game becomes too high.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more favorable to the player than the second advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, so that the advantage given to the player is excessive. It has the effect of suppressing becoming.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the improvement that facilitates the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means. A gaming machine A4 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privileged game is improved by the privileged game executing means. This makes it easier to execute, so that there is an effect that the player can expect the privileged game to be executed.

In either the gaming machine A1 or A4, the starting condition determining means capable of determining the establishment of the first starting condition and the second starting condition different from the first starting condition, and the starting condition determining means thereof. , The lottery means for executing the lottery based on the determination that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, and the privilege game execution means is a specific lottery by the lottery means. The gaming machine A5, characterized in that the privileged gaming is executed based on the determination that the result has been established.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of either the gaming machine A1 or A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the establishment of the first starting condition and the second starting condition different from the first starting condition is determined by the starting condition determining means. The lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the determination that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied by the start condition determination means. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the determination that the specific lottery result is established by the lottery means. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to satisfy the first starting condition and the second starting condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the gaming machine A3 or A4 has a regulating means for restricting the establishment of the second starting condition when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, when the advantageous state is not set by the setting means, the establishment of the second starting condition is regulated by the regulating means. There is an effect that a disadvantageous state can be easily set.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first starting condition and the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second starting condition are shown. Each of the two identification information has a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the dynamic display means can dynamically display the first identification information and the second identification information at the same time. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second start condition are displayed by the dynamic display means, respectively. Dynamically displayed in the means. The first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means at the same time. As a result, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be efficiently executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the gaming machine A5 or A6 has a releasing means for releasing the regulation by the regulating means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the regulation by the regulating means is released by the releasing means based on the setting of a specific advantageous state by the setting means. There is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific advantageous state will be set.

A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game execution means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means are set. The setting means to be performed and the control means for facilitating the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means even when the privilege game is executed next based on the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means. A gaming machine A8 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine A8, the privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privileged game executing means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game execution means is set by the setting means. When the privileged game is executed next time based on the advantageous state being set by the setting means, the advantageous state can be easily set by the control means by the setting means, so that the advantageous state can be combined into a plurality of privileged games. It can be set continuously across. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Characteristic B group> (Switch between advantages and disadvantages to prevent disadvantages)
The first lottery game is played based on the first entrance where the game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the entry into the first entrance. A lottery game execution means for executing and executing a second lottery game based on entering the second entrance, and a second lottery game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game. A switching means for switching between one state and a second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game based on a predetermined opportunity, and a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means. The gaming machine B1 is characterized by having a suppressing means for suppressing the execution of the game machine B1.

According to the gaming machine B1, the first lottery game is executed by the lottery game executing means based on the fact that the ball has entered the first entrance. Further, the second lottery game is executed by the lottery game execution means based on the fact that the ball is entered into the second ball entrance different from the first ball entrance. The first state in which the second lottery game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game and the second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game are switched based on a predetermined opportunity by the switching means. Be done. The restraining means suppresses the execution of the lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means. As a result, the execution of the disadvantageous lottery game is suppressed by the suppressing means, so that the player can easily execute the advantageous lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that gives a significant disadvantage to the player.

In the gaming machine B1, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means, and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means. It has a dynamic display means and a dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic period determining means has a longer dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that has been disadvantageously switched by the switching means than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that has been advantageously switched. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it facilitates determination of a dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. In addition, the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means, respectively. The dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that is disadvantageously switched by the switching means is dynamically displayed. The dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game that is advantageously switched is determined dynamically. It is easy to determine by means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the unfavorably switched game from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can determine the game that is set to be advantageous.

The gaming machine B1 or B2 has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, and an adjusting means for adjusting the launching force of the gaming ball launched by the launching means based on the operation of the player. The first ball entry port and the second ball entry port are arranged at positions where the game ball launched from the launching means can enter the ball while the player performs the same operation on the adjusting means. A gaming machine B3 characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means. The firing force of the game ball launched by the launching means is adjusted by the adjusting means based on the operation of the player. The first entrance and the second entrance are arranged at positions where the game ball launched from the launching means can enter while the player performs the same operation on the adjusting means. As a result, the player can execute the lottery game that is advantageous to the player without changing the operation of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be made easier.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, there is a privilege giving means for giving a privilege to the player. The privilege granting means is set to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game than in the first lottery game. A gaming machine B4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, the player is given a privilege by the privilege giving means. When a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game rather than the first lottery game, the rate of granting the privilege that is advantageous to the player is set higher. As a result, when the game in the second lottery game is set in favor of the player, it is possible to set a state in which the player is more advantageous. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

In the gaming machine B4, when the specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, the privilege granting means is either the first privilege or the second privilege which is more advantageous than the first privilege. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that one is given, and the switching means switches to the second state based on the second privilege being given by the privilege giving means.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, either the first privilege or the second privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege is given as a privilege by the privilege granting means. Based on the fact that the second privilege has been granted by the privilege granting means, the switching means switches to the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be changed.

In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the privilege granted to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means includes the first lottery game or the second lottery game until a specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the ratio of the setting privileges set so as to easily result in a specific lottery result is set higher than the privilege for the first lottery game.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege giving means includes the first lottery game or the first lottery game until a specific condition is satisfied. Since the ratio of the setting privilege that is set so that the second lottery game is likely to be the specific lottery result is set higher than the privilege for the first lottery game, the second lottery game is executed. This has the effect of improving the expectations of the player.

The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege giving means is configured so that at least the set privilege is given. B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B6, at least the set privilege is given to the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege giving means. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second lottery game is executed can be raised.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the first flow path through which the game ball can flow, the second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first entry port are the first flow path. The gaming machine B8, which is arranged in each of the second flow paths, and the second entrance is arranged in the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the first entry port is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively, and the second entry port is the first. Since it is arranged in two flow paths, there is an effect that it is possible to set a state in which only the first lottery game is executed.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the suppressing means notifies, when a lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, notification information indicating that the disadvantageous lottery game is being executed. The gaming machine B9 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the suppressing means means that the disadvantageous lottery game is executed when the lottery game that is disadvantageous to the player is executed. Since the notification information to be shown is notified, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

A gaming machine B10, wherein in any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the lottery game executing means is configured to be able to execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game at the same time.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are simultaneously executed by the lottery game executing means, so that the game can be played efficiently. It has the effect of being able to do it.

<Characteristic C group> (Electric chew configuration)
The first lottery is executed based on the first entrance where the game ball can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the entry into the first entrance. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, the lottery means for executing the second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, and the first entrance. A variable means that can be changed between a first state that regulates ball entry and a second state that makes ball entry easier than the first state, a judgment means that executes a judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a judgment thereof. When a specific determination result is determined by the means, the variable control means for changing the variable means from the first state to the second state, and the second entrance based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a regulating means for regulating entry of a ball or regulating the execution of the second lottery.

According to the gaming machine C1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the ball has entered the first ball entrance. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, the second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, is executed by the lottery means. It is variable by the variable means to a first state that regulates the entry of the ball into the first entry port and a second state that makes it easier to enter the ball than the first state. When a specific determination result is determined by the determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the variable means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable control means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, the regulation means regulates the entry of the ball into the second entrance or the execution of the second lottery. Thereby, the advantageous state and the unfavorable state for the player can be set by the regulatory means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be given a change in the interest and the interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the second entrance is arranged below the first entrance, and when the variable means is in the second state, the second entrance is entered by the variable means. The regulating means is arranged so as to prevent the flow of the gaming ball flowing down the ball flow path, and the regulating means is set so that the variable means can be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, whereby the second entry ball is entered. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it regulates entry into the mouth.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second entrance is arranged below the first entrance. When the variable means is in the second state, the variable means is arranged so as to prevent the flow of the game ball flowing down the flow path that enters the second entry port. By setting the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, the ball entering the second ball entry port is regulated by the regulating means. As a result, it is possible to regulate the entry of the ball into the second entry port with a simple configuration. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine C1 or C2 has a first flow path through which the game ball can flow down and a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first entry port is the first flow path. The gaming machine C3, which is arranged in each of the second flow path and the second flow path, and the variable means is arranged in the first entry port arranged in the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first ball entry port is arranged in the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. Since the variable means is arranged in the first entry port arranged in the second flow path, there is an effect that the game ball flowing down the second flow path can be easily entered into the first entry port.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery, and the dynamic display thereof. The first identification information dynamically displayed by the means and the dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the second identification information are provided, and the regulating means operates with respect to the second identification information. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the execution of the second lottery is regulated by facilitating the determination of a long dynamic display period as the target display period by the dynamic display period determining means.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. By facilitating the determination of a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period for the second identification information by the dynamic display period determining means, the execution of the second lottery is regulated by the regulating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution can be restricted to the second lottery with a simple configuration.

<Characteristic D group> (Continuous up configuration)
The first ball is based on the first ball slot into which the game ball can enter, the second ball slot different from the first ball slot, and the game ball entering the first ball slot. A lottery means for executing a lottery and executing a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery based on the game ball entering the second entrance, and the first lottery. A dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the lottery result on the display means and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery on the display means, respectively. The dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means, and the second identification information by the dynamic display determining means. As the dynamic display period, a long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined and a short state in which a dynamic display period shorter than the long state is easily determined are set. A setting means capable of this, and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode. , As a privilege given to the player by the privilege giving means, at least the first privilege and the second privilege given less than the first privilege based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery. When either the privilege determining means for determining either the privilege and the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, the other identification information is dynamically displayed. If it is displayed, the stop display means for displaying the dynamic display in a stop display mode different from the specific stop display mode, and the first when the long state is set by the setting means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized by having a setting means for facilitating the determination of the second privilege by the privilege determining means in a lottery.

According to the gaming machine D1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first entrance. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, the second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, is executed by the lottery means. The first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determining means, respectively. A long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as a dynamic display period of the second identification information by the dynamic display period determining means, and a dynamic state shorter than the long state. A short state in which the display period is easily determined is set by the setting means. When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player by the privilege giving means. As the privilege given to the player by the privilege giving means, at least the first privilege and the second privilege which is given less privilege than the first privilege based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery. Either one is determined by the privilege determination means. If either the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, and the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is changed to the specific stop display mode. The stop display mode different from the above is stopped and displayed by the stop display means. When the long state is set by the setting means, the second privilege is easily set by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. As a result, the player can be expected to execute the second privilege, which has few benefits. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine D1 has a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states based on a predetermined condition, and the setting means is set with a specific gaming state by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that, on condition that the second privilege is easily determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one game state from a plurality of game states is set by the game state setting means based on a predetermined condition. On condition that a specific game state is set by the game state setting means, it is easy for the setting means to determine the second privilege by the privilege determining means in the first lottery. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to determine the second privilege when a specific gaming state is set.

In the gaming machines D1 or D2, when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, the privilege granting means sets the advantageous state in which the privilege is likely to be granted, and the setting means sets the advantageous state. The gaming machine D3 is characterized by having a control means for facilitating the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means even when the privilege is next granted based on the above.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily given by the privilege giving means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state is set by the setting means, even when the next privilege is given by the control means, the advantageous state can be easily set by the setting means, so that the advantageous state can be set across a plurality of benefits. It can be easily set and has the effect of further improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic E group> (Set low non-priority probability variation rate)
A first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the second variable ball entry means arranged in, a specific area in which the game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the game ball passing through the specific area, the player A predetermined variable pattern of the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition and a privilege-giving means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player. The variable pattern determined by the determination means includes a variable control means that is variable by the above and a determination means that determines the variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. An advantageous pattern in which a gaming ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means when the 1 variable ball entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control of switching the entrance opening opened as a privileged game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine E1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine E1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched from the launching means, and a first ball entering means thereof. A second ball-entry means different from the above, a ball-entry assisting means that enables a game ball to be more easily entered into the second ball-entry means than the first ball-entry means, and the first ball-entry means. A first determination means for executing the first determination based on the entry of the game ball into the ball, and a second determination means for executing the second determination based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. And the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second identification information showing the second discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means are dynamically dynamic at the same time. When the display means that can be displayed and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result are displayed, the privilege game A privileged game executing means for executing the above, a first state set by allowing a game ball to be inserted into the second entry means to perform a game, and a game ball to be inserted into the second entry means. A game state setting means for setting one of a second state set so as not to allow the ball to play a game, a case where the first state is set by the game state setting means, and the second state. It is characterized in that it has a ratio variable means for varying the ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set by the determination means when the state is set and when the specific second determination result is obtained. Game machine E2 to play.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, an advantageous pattern is set depending on whether the first state is set by the gaming state setting means or the second state is set. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio variable means, when the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low, the ball is entered into the second ball entry means in the second state and the game is played. There is an effect that the damage can be reduced even if the fraud is done.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the ratio variable means sets the ratio of the second probability lower than that in the first state in the second state.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when fraud is performed in the second state.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the first flow path that allows the game ball to easily enter the first ball-entry means rather than the second ball-entry means, and the first ball-entry means than the first ball-entry means. The gaming machine E4 is characterized by having a second flow path for easily entering the gaming ball into the second entering means.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, the ball entry rate between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is variable depending on the flow path, so that the game ball flows down. It is possible to change the game depending on the flow path to be played, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means is inserted into the second variable ball entry means. A guiding means for guiding the variable ball-entry means over a predetermined period or longer is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is such that after the first variable ball-entry means is changed to the closed state, the period is shorter than the predetermined period. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, in the disadvantageous pattern, it can be performed with easy control so that it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the second variable ball entering means. It has the effect of reducing the control load.

<Characteristic F group> (Advantageous symbols and disadvantageous symbols are changed during the opening period)
A first variable means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can pass and a closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to pass than the open state, and the first variable means arranged downstream of the first variable means. A second variable entry means capable of entering a game ball that has passed through one variable means, a specific area in which a game ball that has entered the second variable entry means can enter, and a specific area in which the game ball enters the specific area. The first variable means and the second variable ball entry as a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the passing, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition. It has a variable control means for varying the means with a predetermined variable pattern, and a determination means for determining the variable pattern variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, and is determined by the determination means. The variable pattern includes an advantageous pattern in which a gaming ball that has entered the first ball-entry means can enter the specific region when the first variable means is in the open state, and the advantageous pattern is more than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter a specific area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control of switching the entrance opening opened as a privileged game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable means and the second variable ball entry means, the player can be interested in the variable pattern. , It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine F1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entry means capable of launching a game ball launched from the launching means, and a first ball entry means thereof. Is different, the first discriminating means that executes the first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The second discrimination means that executes the second discrimination based on the sphere, the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means by the second discrimination means. A display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. When the second identification information indicating the second identification information to be shown is displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a ratio in which the advantageous pattern is set corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine F2 is characterized by having a ratio setting means for variably setting the ratio and the ratio at which the disadvantage pattern is set.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the ratio of the advantageous pattern and the disadvantaged pattern to be set is variable according to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. There is an effect that the player's interest can be improved by changing the degree of expectation for the privilege given to the player.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the probability of being discriminated from the specific first discriminating result or the specific second discriminating result by the first discriminating means or the second discriminating means is based on the first probability and the first probability thereof. The probability setting means for setting at least a high second probability and the privilege given by the privilege giving means are characterized in that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. Game machine F3 to play.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the gaming ball is in the specific area even while the privilege game is being executed. By making people interested in whether or not they can pass through, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble of getting tired of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are set so that at least the period from the start of the privilege game to the opening state of the first variable means is different. The gaming machine F4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the player determines the start of the privileged game at the timing when the first variable means is opened. Can be difficult for the player to identify, and even if it is a disadvantageous pattern, it is possible to expect the ball to enter a specific area.

The gaming machine F4 has a guiding means for guiding a gaming ball that has passed through the first variable ball means to the second variable ball entry means for a predetermined period or longer, and the disadvantageous pattern is that the first variable ball entry means is said to have said. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is at least set so as to be variable from the open state to the closed state within the predetermined period after the open state.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, there is an effect that the game ball can be more reliably suppressed from passing through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

<Characteristic G group> (Advantageous symbols and disadvantageous symbols are variable over the interval period)
A first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the second variable ball entry means arranged in, a specific area in which the game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the game ball passing through the specific area, the player A predetermined variable pattern of the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition and a privilege-giving means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player. The variable pattern determined by the determination means includes a variable control means that is variable by the above and a determination means that determines the variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. An advantageous pattern in which a gaming ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means when the 1 variable ball entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control of switching the entrance opening opened as a privileged game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine G1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G1, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern have at least a period from when the first variable ball-entry means is changed to the closed state until the second variable ball-entry means is changed to the open state. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it is set differently.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, there is an effect that advantageous patterns and disadvantageous patterns can be set with easy control.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, between the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable entry means is inserted into the second variable entry means. A guiding means for guiding the means to the means over a predetermined period of time is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is the second variable in a period shorter than the predetermined period after the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the ball entry means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more reliable to make it difficult for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entering means capable of launching a game ball launched from the launching means, and a first ball-entry means thereof. A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a first determination means for executing the first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means. A second discriminating means for executing the second discriminating based on the fact that the pachinko ball has entered the ball, a first discriminating information indicating the first discriminating result of the first discriminating by the first discriminating means, and the second discriminating A display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the means, and the first identification information or the specific identification information indicating the specific first determination result. When the second identification information indicating the second determination result is displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the privilege game execution means execute the privilege game. , The ratio of the advantageous pattern to the disadvantageous pattern is changed according to the game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states and the game state set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine G4 having a variable ratio setting means for setting.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the ratio of the advantageous pattern to the disadvantaged pattern is variably set according to the gaming state, so that the game state to be set is set. As a result, the degree of expectation that the game ball enters a specific area can be changed, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, and a first probability higher than the first probability thereof. It has a probability setting means capable of setting either one of the two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. The gaming machine G5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the specific area is set even while the privilege game is being executed. By making people interested in whether or not they can pass the game ball, there is an effect that the problem of getting tired of the game can be suppressed.

<Characteristic H group> (New Zero Attacker)
Based on the condition determination means for determining the establishment of the specific condition and the determination of the establishment of the specific condition by the condition determination means, the open state in which the game ball can enter from the closed state in which it is difficult to enter. The first variable ball-entry means that is variable to the above, the second variable ball-entry means that is arranged in parallel with the first variable ball-entry means, and the first variable ball-entry means or the second variable ball-entry means. The first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied and the privilege-giving means for giving the player an advantageous privilege based on the ball entering the ball. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game in which the ball entry means are changed in a predetermined order until a predetermined condition is satisfied in the open state, the first variable ball entry means, and the second variable ball entry means. With, when the first variable ball entry means is in the closed state, there is a guiding means for setting the period until the game ball reaches the second variable ball entry means to a predetermined period or longer. The gaming machine H1 characterized by being.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control of switching the entrance opening which is opened as a privilege game is performed, and the flow path of the gaming ball is not formed by using the two variable winning devices, and further gaming. There was a need to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine H1, even when the first variable ball entry means is closed, the period until the first variable ball entry means is reached by the guiding means is set to a predetermined period or longer, so that the second variable ball entry means is available. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball flows down without entering the second variable ball entry means and the interest of the game is lowered by the time the ball entry means is opened.

In the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means includes an open effect indicating that the first variable ball-entry means or the second variable ball-entry means is in the open state when the first variable ball-entry means or the second variable ball-entry means is in the open state, and the first variable. It has an effect executing means for at least executing a closing effect indicating that the ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are in the closed state when they are in the closed state, and the closing effect is within the predetermined period. The gaming machine H2, which is characterized in that it is executed in.

According to the gaming machine H2, in the closing effect, it is possible to notify that the closed state is in use for a predetermined period of time, so that there is an effect that the player can easily understand the effect.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the privilege game 1 is executed by the privilege game execution means, the order in which the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are changed to the open state, respectively. The gaming machine H3 is characterized by having an opening pattern determining means for determining an opening pattern in which is set from a plurality of opening patterns.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, since it is determined from a plurality of opening patterns, there is an effect that the opening patterns can be randomized and the game can be diversified.

In the gaming machine H3, the timing for changing the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state is preset in the opening pattern determined by the opening pattern determining means. The gaming machine H4, which is characterized in that it has been used.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, the timing for changing from the closed state to the open state is set in advance in the open pattern, so that the first variable ball entry means and the second variable entry means are set according to the open pattern. There is an effect that the number of gaming balls entering the ball means can be stabilized, and the profit given to the player can be set based on the design value.

<Characteristic I group> (Loops twice only for a predetermined period after the big hit)
A state setting means capable of setting at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and a privilege advantageous to the player are given based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having at least a privilege game executing means for executing a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. If the first privilege game is executed in this state, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and if the second privilege game is executed, the first privilege game is executed. The second advantageous state is set after the execution of the second privilege game, and when the first privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the first privilege is set. After the game is executed, the first advantageous state is set, and after the first advantageous state is set, the specific condition is set without executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game executing means. The gaming machine I1 characterized in that the second advantageous state is set when the second advantageous state is established.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a big hit lottery of a special symbol is performed, and based on the result of the lottery, the probability of becoming a big hit is high. Some give high-probability games with high probability. In such a configuration, a gaming machine in which a high-probability game is continued until the jackpot is won twice has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-57583). In such a gaming machine, once the high-probability game is started, it is promised to win the jackpot twice while continuing the high-probability game. Therefore, after the high-probability game is started, the player There was a problem that he got tired of playing games. The gaming machine I1 has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the gaming machine I1 is to provide a gaming machine capable of alleviating the tiredness of a player.

According to the gaming machine I1, at least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions, at least the first privilege game that gives the player an advantageous privilege and the second privilege game that is different from the first privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means. When the first privilege game is executed while the first advantage state is set, the first advantage state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game is executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. After the first advantageous state is set, if a specific condition is satisfied without executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game executing means, the first advantageous state is changed to the second advantageous state. Set. As a result, if the first privilege game is executed before the specific condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, then the second advantageous state is set, so that the advantageous state for the player is continuously set. be able to. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privileged games are executed, and there is an effect that the player's interest can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1, the privilege game executing means can execute a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means has the first advantageous state. When a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than any of the second advantageous states can be set, and the third privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set. , The gaming machine I2 characterized in that the specific state is set after the execution of the third privilege game.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. As a result, in the second advantageous state, a specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third gaming state is executed is set, so that the continuous state of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling of the game becomes too high.

The gaming machine I1 or I2 has a discriminating means for executing the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminant result. A gaming machine I3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. Since the above condition is satisfied, the player can play the game with an interest in the discrimination result by the discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine I4, wherein in any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the specific condition is satisfied when the discrimination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times. The game will be played while expecting that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Probability setting means for setting at least one of a first probability that is determined to be the specific determination result by the determination means and a second probability that is higher than the first probability in either the game machine I3 or I4. The gaming machine I5, wherein the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are those in which the second probability is set by the probability setting means.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I3 or I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one of the first probability that is determined to be a specific determination result by the discrimination means and the second probability that is higher than the first probability is set by the probability setting means. In the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the second probability is set by the probability setting means. Thereby, in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific determination result in a short period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic J group> (Attacca prize distribution configuration)
Based on the condition determination means for determining the establishment of a specific condition and the determination of the establishment of the specific condition by the condition determination means, an open state in which the game ball can enter from a closed state in which it is difficult to enter. To the first variable ball entry means, the second variable ball entry means arranged on the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means, and the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means. The first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means based on the privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the ball entering the game ball and the determination that the specific condition is satisfied are determined. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game in which the variable ball entry means is changed in a predetermined order until a predetermined condition is satisfied in the open state, the first variable ball entry means, and the first variable entry means. A first distribution means for distributing at least a game ball to the downstream side of the ball means, and a game ball distributed to the downstream side of the first variable entry means by the first distribution means with the second variable entry means. The gaming machine J1 is characterized by having at least a second sorting means for sorting to the downstream side of the second variable ball entering means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a big hit lottery of a special symbol is performed, and when the result of the lottery is a big hit, the game is played. There is one that provides a jackpot game in which a gaming ball is inserted into a jackpot provided on the board. In such a configuration, a gaming machine in which two large winning openings are provided on the surface of the gaming board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, a gaming ball that did not enter one of the major winning openings does not enter the other major winning opening, and there is a problem that the flow of the gaming ball on the game board surface is poor. .. The game machine J1 is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the game machine J1 is to provide a game machine capable of realizing a ball flow of a game ball that makes a player expect.

According to the gaming machine J1, the establishment of a specific condition is determined by the condition determining means, and based on the determination of the establishment of the specific condition, the opening that allows the gaming ball to enter from a closed state in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter. The first variable ball entry means is changed to the state. The second variable ball entry means is arranged on the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means, the privilege granting means grants a privilege advantageous to the player. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the privilege game executing means opens the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means in a predetermined order until the predetermined conditions are satisfied. Perform a variable bonus game. At least the game balls are distributed to the first variable ball entry means and the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means by the first distribution means, and the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means are second. At least the second variable ball entry means and the downstream side of the second variable ball entry means are distributed by the distribution means. As a result, the game ball distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means can be made to enter the second variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a ball flow of a gaming ball that makes the player have expectations, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are a rotating portion that can rotate in the first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, and a rotating portion thereof. The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that it has at least each of the regulating means for regulating the rotation range of the machine J2.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are moved to the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction by the rotating portion. Since it is rotatable and the rotation range of the rotating portion is regulated at a predetermined angle by the regulating means, it is possible to execute an appropriate distribution operation, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved. ..

The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the first sorting means and the second sorting means are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by a flowing game ball. The gaming machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the first sorting means and the second sorting means are configured so as to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by the flowing game ball. Therefore, it is possible to execute a more appropriate distribution operation.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the first variable ball-entry means is in the closed state, the guiding means for guiding the game ball to the second variable ball-entry means, and the guiding means for guiding the game ball to the second variable ball-entry means. When the second variable ball entry means is closed when the ball is guided to the two variable ball entry means, it has a taxiway for guiding the guided game ball to the second distribution means. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or the gaming machine J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first variable ball entry means is in the closed state, the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entry means by the guiding means. When the game ball is guided to the second variable ball entry means by the guiding means, and the second variable ball entry means is in the closed state, the guided game ball is guided to the second sorting means. It has a taxiway. As a result, the rotational state of the second sorting means can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to complicate the distribution of the game ball by the distribution member, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic K group> (Regulate the probability variation rate of one symbol at normal times by a variation method other than simultaneous variation)
A first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the second variable ball entry means arranged in, a specific area in which the game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the game ball passing through the specific area, the player A predetermined variable pattern of the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition and a privilege-giving means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player. The variable pattern determined by the determination means includes a variable control means that is variable by the above and a determination means that determines the variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. An advantageous pattern in which a gaming ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means when the 1 variable ball entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control of switching the entrance opening opened as a privileged game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine K1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine K1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball launched from the launching means, and a first ball entry means thereof. A second ball-entry means different from the above, a ball-entry assisting means that enables a game ball to be more easily entered into the second ball-entry means than the first ball-entry means, and the first ball-entry means. A first determination means for executing the first determination based on the entry of the game ball into the ball, and a second determination means for executing the second determination based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. And the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means and the second identification information showing the second discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means are displayed respectively. The display means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying either the first identification information or the second identification information on the display means based on a predetermined priority order, and the specific first identification information. When the first identification information indicating the determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the second ball entry means The first state, which is set to allow a game ball to enter and play a game, and the first state, which is set not to allow a game ball to enter the second ball-entry means to play a game. The specific second determination between the game state setting means for setting one of the two states and the case where the first state is set and the case where the second state is set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine K2 is characterized by having a ratio variable means for varying the ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set by the determining means when a result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, an advantageous pattern is set depending on whether the first state is set by the gaming state setting means or the second state is set. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio variable means, when the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set low, the ball is entered into the second ball entry means in the second state and the game is played. There is an effect that the damage can be reduced even if the fraud is done.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the ratio variable means sets the ratio of the second probability lower than that in the first state in the second state.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when fraud is performed in the second state.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a first flow path that allows a game ball to easily enter the first ball-entry means rather than the second ball-entry means, and the first ball-entry means than the first ball-entry means. The gaming machine K4 is characterized by having a second flow path for easily entering the gaming ball into the second entering means.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines K1 to K3, the ball entry rate between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is variable depending on the flow path, so that the game ball flows down. It is possible to change the game depending on the flow path to be played, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means is inserted into the second variable ball entry means. A guiding means for guiding the variable ball-entry means over a predetermined period or longer is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is such that after the first variable ball-entry means is changed to the closed state, the period is shorter than the predetermined period. The gaming machine K5 is characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, in the disadvantageous pattern, it can be performed with easy control so that it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the second variable ball entering means. It has the effect of reducing the control load.

<Characteristic L group> (The probability variation rate is changed by the opening and interval in configurations other than simultaneous fluctuation)
A first variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and a downstream side of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the second variable ball entry means arranged in, a specific area in which the game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means can enter, and the game ball passing through the specific area, the player A predetermined variable pattern of the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition and a privilege-giving means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player. The variable pattern determined by the determination means includes a variable control means that is variable by the above and a determination means that determines the variable pattern that is variable by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns. An advantageous pattern in which a gaming ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means when the 1 variable ball entry means is in the closed state can enter the specific area, and the specific pattern rather than the advantageous pattern. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that at least a disadvantageous pattern that makes it difficult to enter the area is set.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games. In such a configuration, as a privilege game, a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling the opening and closing of two entrances has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control of switching the entrance opening opened as a privileged game is performed, and further improvement of the interest of the game is required. Furthermore, the purpose is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine L1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine L1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entry means capable of launching a game ball launched from the launching means, and a first ball entry means thereof. Is different, the first discriminating means for executing the first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the gaming ball entering the second ball entering means. The second discrimination means that executes the second discrimination based on the sphere, the first identification information indicating the first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means by the second discrimination means. A display means capable of displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination, and either the first identification information or the second identification information are placed in a predetermined priority order. Based on this, the dynamic display means that is dynamically displayed on the display means and the first identification information that indicates the specific first determination result or the second identification information that indicates the specific second determination result are transmitted to the display means. When displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game and the game state setting for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. It is characterized by having a means and a ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern according to the game state set by the game state setting means. Game machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the ratio of the advantageous pattern to the disadvantaged pattern is variably set according to the gaming state, so that the game is played in a specific area according to the set gaming state. There is an effect that the degree of expectation that the ball enters can be changed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the first probability of being determined as the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result by the first determination means or the second determination means, and a first probability higher than the first probability thereof. It has a probability setting means capable of setting either one of the two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. The gaming machine L3 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the gaming ball is in the specific area even while the privilege game is being executed. By making people interested in whether or not they can pass through the game, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantage pattern are such that the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state and then the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state. The gaming machine L4, characterized in that the period until is set to be at least different.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, there is an effect that an advantageous pattern and a disadvantageous pattern can be set by easy control.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, a game ball that did not enter the first variable ball entry means is inserted into the second variable ball entry means. A guiding means for guiding the variable ball-entry means over a predetermined period or longer is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is such that after the first variable ball-entry means is changed to the closed state, the period is shorter than the predetermined period. The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state and then changed to the closed state.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines L1 to L4, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more reliable to make it difficult for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

<Characteristic M group> (Control that changes the vibration intensity in conjunction with audio output)
A player touches a gaming machine having an effect executing means for executing an effect and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means. A contact portion capable of moving the contact portion, a movable means capable of moving the contact portion, a movable control means for movablely controlling the movable means based on the movable data, and a plurality of the movable data used by the movable control means. The movable data is set by the storage means based on the storage means in which the data is stored, the discriminating means for discriminating the effect information of the effect executed by the effect executing means, and the effect information determined by the discriminating means. The gaming machine M1 characterized in that it has a setting means to be used.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display means such as a liquid crystal display capable of displaying an effect. In such a conventional gaming machine, the interest of the player is improved by executing the entertainment effect in the display means. In addition, some conventional gaming machines can perform a vibration effect accompanied by a vibration operation as a kind of hobby effect. In such a conventional gaming machine, a realistic effect can be realized by generating vibration according to the effect displayed on the display means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-195692).

However, with such a conventional gaming machine, the improvement of the sense of presence is still insufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M1, the contact portion that the player can touch is moved by the movable means. The movable means is movably controlled by the movable control means based on the movable data, and a plurality of movable data used by the movable control means are stored in the storage means. The effect information of the effect executed by the effect execution means is determined by the determination means. Movable data is set from the storage means by the setting means based on the effect information discriminated by the discriminating means.

As a result, the movable control of the movable means can be changed according to the effect executed by the effect executing means, so that there is an effect that the movable means can be appropriately moved.

The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that the discriminating means discriminates information of audio data to be reproduced and processed in the effect as the effect information in the game machine M1.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1, the information of the audio data to be reproduced and processed in the effect is determined as the effect information by the determining means, so that the information is determined according to the sound output during the execution of the effect. The movable control of the movable means can be made different.

Therefore, there is an effect that the movable means can be preferably moved.

In the game machine M2, the movable data is composed of information on drive voltage data for supplying a predetermined voltage value to the movable means, and the determination means uses the information of the voice data to be reproduced to be the drive voltage. The gaming machine M3 is characterized in that it is converted into identification information corresponding to information related to data and discriminated, and the setting means sets the corresponding movable data based on the identification information.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the movable data is composed of information on the drive voltage data for supplying a predetermined voltage value to the movable means. The information of the audio data to be reproduced is converted into identification information corresponding to the information related to the drive voltage data by the discriminating means and discriminated. Corresponding movable data is set by the setting means based on the identification information.

As a result, the voltage supplied to the movable means can be changed according to the voice, so that there is an effect that the movable means can be appropriately controlled.

In the game machine M2 or M3, when one or a plurality of voice data are reproduced, and a plurality of voice data are reproduced in parallel by the voice reproduction means, the plurality of voice data are synthesized. A voice synthesizing means and a voice output means for outputting a voice based on the synthesized voice data synthesized by the voice synthesizing means are provided, and the discriminating means discriminates the information of the synthesized voice data as the effect information. A game machine M4 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2 or M3, the following effects are exhibited. One or more audio data is reproduced by the audio reproduction means. When a plurality of voice data are reproduced in parallel by the voice reproduction means, the plurality of voice data are synthesized by the voice synthesis means. The voice is output by the voice output means based on the synthetic voice data synthesized by the voice synthesis means. The information of the synthetic voice data is discriminated as the effect information by the discriminating means.

As a result, even when a plurality of voices are output in parallel, the movable data to be set in the movable means can be set according to the synthesized voice data after synthesis. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable means can be suitably controlled.

In the gaming machine M4, when the voice reproduction means starts the reproduction of new voice data, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the new voice data and the new voice data are combined with each other. The gaming machine M5 is characterized in that the reproduction processing with the canceling data that cancels each other is executed in parallel.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of the game machine M4, when the reproduction of new voice data is started, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the new voice data and the new voice data are combined. By doing so, the reproduction process with the canceling data canceling each other is executed in parallel by the audio reproduction means, so that new audio data is output as audio from the audio output means while the predetermined conditions are satisfied. It has the effect of suppressing.

In the game machine M5, the game machine M6 is characterized in that the cancellation data is data having a waveform having a phase opposite to that of the new voice data.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M5, the cancellation data is composed of the new voice data and the waveform data having the opposite phase, so that the new voice data can be completely canceled. effective.

In the gaming machine M5 or M6, the voice reproduction means newly starts a second type of effect different from the first type while the first type of effect is being executed by the effect executing means. When this is done, the gaming machine M7 is characterized in that the reproduction processing of the audio data corresponding to the second type of effect and the cancellation data is executed in parallel.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M5 or M6, a second type of effect different from the first type is produced in a state where the first type of effect is executed by the effect executing means. When a new start is made, the reproduction process of the audio data corresponding to the second type of effect and the cancellation data is executed in parallel by the audio reproduction means, so that the first type of effect is being executed. It is possible to suppress the output of the sound corresponding to the second type of effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the sound corresponding to the first type of production from becoming difficult to hear due to other sounds.

<Characteristic N group> (Indicates the operation content in the form of vibration)
An effect executing means for executing an effect, an operation means having an operation unit that can be operated by a player, a signal output means capable of outputting a signal by operating the operation unit of the operation unit, and a signal output means thereof. The content of the effect executed by the effect executing means is changed based on the signal discriminating means for discriminating the signal output by the above and the specific discriminating result obtained by the discriminating by the signal discriminating means. In a gaming machine having an effect variable setting means to be set, a contact portion that can be touched by a player, a movable means that can move the contact portion, and the movable means are based on movable data. It has a movable control means for movable control and a data setting means for setting the movable data which is movablely controlled by the movable control means, and the signal output means is a first signal as the signal based on the first operation. Is configured to be capable of outputting at least a second signal different from the first signal based on a second operation different from the first operation, and the signal discriminating means is the signal output by the signal output means. The data setting means is for setting the specific movable data suggesting the operation of the operation unit, which is the specific determination result, based on the establishment of the specific condition. A game machine N1 characterized by.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the configuration includes an operating means that can be operated by the player, such as a push button. In such a conventional gaming machine, as a kind of hobby production, a predetermined notification is given based on an operation on the operating means to improve the hobby of the player. In addition, some conventional gaming machines can perform a vibration effect that suggests the operation timing of the operating means by vibrating the operating means. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier for the player to understand (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-128557).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the mode of vibration production is poor, and there is still room for improvement in terms of improving the interest of the player.

According to the gaming machine N1, the contact portion that the player can touch is moved by the movable means. The movable means is movablely controlled by the movable control means based on the movable data. The movable data that is movablely controlled by the movable control means is set by the data setting means. Based on the first operation, the signal output means outputs the first signal as a signal. On the other hand, a second signal different from the first signal is output by the signal output means based on the second operation different from the first operation. The type of the signal output by the signal output means is determined by the signal discrimination means. The data setting means sets specific movable data that suggests the operation of the operation unit that produces a specific determination result based on the establishment of the specific condition.

As a result, the movement of the movable means can be made different according to the operation of the operation unit that results in a specific determination result, so that the game can be performed by paying attention to the movement of the movable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that the movable means vibrates the contact portion as a movable operation of the contact portion.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the movable means is movable so that the contact portion vibrates as the movable operation of the contact portion. There is an effect that the player who thinks that he / she can actively touch the contact portion.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the specific vibration data is provided with a plurality of movable data including at least the first specific data for moving the first position of the contact portion in a movable operation different from the other positions. The data setting means sets the first specific data as the specific movable data when the operation of the operation unit that results in the specific determination result is the first operation. A gaming machine N3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines N1 or N2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the contact portions, a plurality of movable data including at least the first specific data for operating the first position in a movable operation different from the other positions are provided as specific vibration data. When the operation of the operation unit that produces a specific determination result is the first operation, the first specific data is set as the specific movable data by the data setting means.

As a result, by paying attention to the movable operation of the first position, there is an effect that the player can easily understand whether the first operation is an operation that gives a specific determination result.

In the game machine N3, the specific vibration data includes at least the first specific data and the second specific data for moving a second position different from the first position with a movable operation different from other positions. A plurality of movable data including the above are provided, and the data setting means is the first operation as the specific movable data when the operation of the operation unit that results in the specific determination result is the first operation. A game in which specific data is set and the second specific data is set as the specific movable data when the operation of the operation unit that results in the specific determination result is the second operation. Machine N4.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N3, the first specific data and the second position different from the first position are moved by the movable motion different from the other positions for the specific vibration data. At least the second specific data for the purpose is included. When the operation of the operation unit that produces a specific determination result is the first operation, the first specific data is set by the data setting means, while the operation of the operation unit that produces the specific determination result is the second operation. In this case, the second specific data is set by the data setting means.

As a result, by paying attention to the movable operation between the first position and the second position, the player is informed whether the operation of the operation unit that produces a specific determination result is the first operation or the second operation. It has the effect of being easily understood.

The game machine N3 or N4 includes a rotatable rotating member, and the movable means is a rotating motor that rotates the rotating member with a predetermined position different from the position of the center of gravity of the rotating member as a rotation axis. The gaming machine N5 is configured, wherein the movable control means controls the rotational operation of the rotary motor at a rotational speed corresponding to the movable data.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N3 or N4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the movable means is composed of a rotating motor that rotates a rotatable rotating member with a predetermined position different from the position of the center of gravity as a rotating shaft. The rotation operation of the rotation motor is controlled by the movement control means at the rotation speed corresponding to the movement data.

As a result, during the rotation of the rotating member, the centrifugal force acts strongly in the direction from the rotation axis to the position of the center of gravity, and as a result, the direction in which the centrifugal force acts changes according to the rotation, and as a result, vibration may be generated. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who wants to know the operation that gives a specific determination result from the vibration motion can positively touch the contact portion.

In the game machine N5, the first specific data sets the rotation speed before and after the rotating member passes the position closest to the first position to a speed different from the rotation speed when passing through other positions. A game machine N6 characterized by being data for setting.

According to the game machine N6, in addition to the effect of the game machine N5, when the first specific data passes the rotational speed before and after the rotating member passes the position closest to the first position, and passes through another position. Since it is composed of data for setting a speed different from the rotation speed of, it is possible to make the centrifugal force acting on the rotating member before and after the first position different from the centrifugal force at other positions. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily understand whether the first operation is an operation that gives a specific determination result only by comparing the magnitude of the vibration at the first position with the other positions.

In the game machine N6, the first specific data sets the rotation speed before and after the rotating member passes the position closest to the first position as the first speed, and when the rotating member passes through another position. The gaming machine N7, which is data for setting the rotation speed to a second speed slower than the first speed.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effect of the game machine N6, the first specific data sets the rotation speed before and after the rotating member passes the position closest to the first position as the first speed. Since it is composed of data for setting the rotation speed when passing through other positions to a second speed slower than the first speed, the rotating member can be used before and after the position closest to the first position. The acting centrifugal force can be increased compared to other positions. Therefore, since the vibration of the first position can be made larger than that of the other positions, the operation that easily gives a specific determination result is the first operation only by checking whether or not the vibration of the first position is large. It has the effect of making the player understand if there is any.

In the gaming machine N3 or N4, the movable means is composed of a plurality of movable members including at least a first movable member that moves the first position, and the first specific data is the first movable member. The gaming machine N8 is characterized in that the member is composed of data for moving the member in a movable motion different from that of other movable members.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N3 or N4, the following effects are exhibited. The movable means is composed of a plurality of movable members including at least a first movable member that moves the first position. The first specific data is composed of data for moving the first movable member in a movable motion different from that of other movable members.

This has the effect that the player can easily understand whether or not the operation that produces a specific determination result is the first operation simply by comparing the movable operation of the first position with that of the other positions. is there.

In any of the gaming machines N1 to N8, the effect executing means selects a part of the options from a plurality of options including at least a first option and a second option different from the first option. It is possible to execute the option effect suggesting that the first option is selected, the first operation is an operation corresponding to selecting the first option, and the second operation selects the second option. The gaming machine N9, which is characterized in that it is an operation corresponding to the above.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N8, the following effects are exhibited. An option effect suggesting to select a part of the first option and a plurality of options including at least a second option different from the first option is executed by the effect executing means. The first operation is set as an operation corresponding to selecting the first option, and the second operation is set as an operation corresponding to selecting the second option.

As a result, the player can be given the pleasure of selecting an option, which has the effect of improving the player's willingness to participate in the game.

In the gaming machine N9, the option effect includes a first option effect that can be determined by the signal discrimination means as the specific determination result, and a second option effect that is not determined by the signal discrimination means as the specific determination result. The gaming machine N10 includes at least an option effect, and the data setting means can set the specific movable data only during the execution of the first option effect.

According to the gaming machine N10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the option effect includes at least a first option effect that can be determined as a specific determination result by the signal discrimination means and a second option effect that is not determined as a specific determination result by the signal discrimination means. There is. Only during the execution of the first-choice effect, specific movable data can be set by the data setting means.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game by paying attention to whether or not specific movable data is set.

In the gaming machine N11, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means. , A plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state as the game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed. The effect executing means includes a game state setting means for setting one of the game states, and the second game state is set when the first game state is set, rather than when the second game state is set. The gaming machine N12 characterized in that the ratio of executing the option effect is high.

According to the gaming machine N12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the result of the specific determination by the determination means. As a game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The game state of is set by the game state setting means. It is configured so that the ratio of the second option effect being executed by the effect executing means is higher when the first game state is set than when the second game state is set.

As a result, it is possible to play the game paying attention to whether it is the first-choice production or the second-choice production, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature O group> (Control that changes the button push sound according to the conditions at the time of pressing)
A plurality of operation means that can be operated by the player, specific effect execution means that executes a specific effect based on the operation when the operation means is operated, and the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means. A specific effect determining means determined from different specific effects, a first state in which the first specific effect is determined by the specific effect determining means, and a second state in which a second specific effect different from the first specific effect is determined. The gaming machine O1 is provided with a state setting means capable of setting one state from a plurality of states including at least.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the configuration includes an operating means that can be operated by the player, such as a push button. In such a conventional gaming machine, as a kind of hobby effect, the hobby is improved by performing an effect that encourages the operation of the operating means. Further, some conventional gaming machines are known to notify the result of a big hit lottery by an effect executed based on an operation on an operating means. In such a conventional gaming machine, each time the operation means is operated during the execution of the hobby effect, it is determined whether to execute a hit suggestion effect that suggests a big hit or a normal effect different from the hit suggestion effect. There is something to do. As a result, the player can be made to positively operate the operation means in the expectation that the suggestion effect will be executed during the execution of the hobby effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-184177).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the player continuously operates the operating means, it may not be possible to suitably perform the normal effect or the hit suggestion effect. Therefore, it may not be possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

According to the gaming machine O1, when the operating means that can be operated by the player is operated, the specific effect based on the operation is executed by the specific effect executing means. The specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means is determined by a plurality of different specific effects by the specific effect determining means. One state is one of a plurality of states including the first state in which the first specific effect is determined by the specific effect determining means and the second state in which the second specific effect different from the first specific effect is determined. It is set by the state setting means.

As a result, the specific effect executed when the operating means is operated can be made different depending on the state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine O1 is characterized in that the state setting means sets one of the plurality of states based on information that is variable by operating the operating means. Machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, one of a plurality of states is set by the state setting means based on the information changed by the operation of the operating means. , The specific effect can be changed according to the operation of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine O1 or O2 includes a valid period setting means for setting a valid period for validating the operation on the operating means, and the specific effect executing means is when the operating means is operated during the valid period. , The specific effect is executed, and the state setting means sets one state from the plurality of states each time a predetermined setting condition is satisfied during the valid period of one. The gaming machine O3 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines O1 or O2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the validity period for validating the operation on the operation means is set by the validity period setting means. When the operating means is operated during the valid period, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. During the validity period of 1, each time a predetermined setting condition is satisfied, one state is set from a plurality of states by the state setting means.

As a result, different specific effects can be executed within the valid period of 1, so that the variation of the specific effects during the valid period of 1 can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, an interval determining means for determining the interval at which the player operates the operating means is provided, and the state setting means has a predetermined interval determined by the interval determining means. The gaming machine O4 is characterized in that the first state is set when the time is shorter than the above, and the second state is set when the interval is longer than the specific interval.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the interval at which the player operates the operating means is determined by the interval determining means. The first state is set by the state setting means when the interval determined by the interval determining means is shorter than the predetermined specific interval, while the second state is set by the state setting means when the interval is longer than the specific interval. Will be done.

As a result, it is possible to make the specific effect to be executed different according to the operation interval of the player, so that there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player who is performing the operation from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine O4, the gaming machine O5 is characterized in that the first specific effect is an effect having a shorter effect period than the second specific effect.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O4, the first specific effect is configured with an effect period shorter than that of the second specific effect. Therefore, when the operation interval is shorter than the specific interval, It is possible to execute the first specific effect having a short effect period, and to execute the second specific effect having a longer effect period than the first specific effect when the effect period is longer than the specific interval. Therefore, there is an effect that a specific effect of the effect period can be executed according to the operation interval of the player.

In the gaming machine O5, the specific effect includes at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode in one effect period, and the first specific effect includes the first effect mode. The gaming machine O6 is characterized in that the period from the end of the first effect mode to the start of the second effect mode is shorter than that of the second specific effect.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect is configured to include at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode in one effect period. The period from the end of the first effect mode to the start of the second effect mode is configured so that the first specific effect is shorter than the second specific effect.

This has the effect that the effect period can be made different only by making the interval between the first effect mode and the second effect mode different.

Any one of the gaming machines O1 to O6 includes a voice output means capable of outputting a voice, and the specific effect executing means produces a sound effect based on the operation of the operation means as the specific effect. The gaming machine O7, which is characterized in that it is output to a machine.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines O1 to O6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sound can be output by the sound output means. As the specific effect, the sound effect based on the operation of the operating means is controlled to be output by the voice output means by the specific effect executing means.

As a result, the sound output by the sound output means can be made different as a specific effect, so that the sound can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O7, the operating means operates in the valid period setting means for setting the valid period for validating the operation on the operating means and in the valid period of 1 set by the valid period setting means. A counting means that counts the number of times that has been performed, a number-of-times determining means that determines whether the number of times counted by the counting means has reached a predetermined specific number of times, and a determination that the number of times has reached the predetermined specific number of times. The gaming machine O8 is provided with a special effect executing means for executing a special effect different from the specific effect based on what has been done.

According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the validity period for validating the operation on the operation means is set by the validity period setting means. The number of times the operating means is operated in one valid period set by the valid period setting means is counted by the counting means. Whether or not the number of times counted by the counting means has reached a predetermined specific number is determined by the number-of-times determining means. Based on the fact that the number of times determination means has determined that the specified number of times has been reached, a special effect different from the specific effect is executed by the special effect execution means.

As a result, there is an effect that the player who wants to execute the special effect can operate the operation unit of the operation means until a specific number of times is reached in the valid period.

In the gaming machine O8, a plurality of different times are defined as the predetermined specific times, and the number determination means is variable by operating the operating means among the plurality of different times. A gaming machine O9 characterized in that the number of times corresponding to information is used for discrimination.

According to the gaming machine O9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of different times are specified as a predetermined specific number of times. Of the plurality of different times, the number of times corresponding to the information changed by the operation of the operation means is used for the determination by the number determination means.

As a result, the specific number of times can be made different according to the operation of the player, so that there is an effect that the specific number of times can be optimized according to the operation of each player.

The gaming machine O9 includes an interval determining means for determining the interval at which the player operates the operating means, and the number of times determining means corresponds to the interval determined by the interval determining means among the plurality of different times. The gaming machine O10, characterized in that the number of times of 1 is used for discrimination.

According to the gaming machine O10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the interval at which the player operates the operating means is determined by the interval determining means. Of the plurality of different times, one number corresponding to the interval determined by the interval determination means is used for determination by the number determination means.

As a result, the number of operations until the special effect is executed can be changed according to the interval at which the player operates the operation means, so that the execution frequency of the special effect varies according to the operation interval of the player. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine O10, the plurality of different times include at least a first number of times and a second number of times greater than the first number of times, and the number of times determining means is determined by the interval determining means. The gaming machine O11 is characterized in that if the interval is longer than the specific interval, the first number of times is used for discrimination, and if it is shorter than the specific interval, the second number of times is used for discrimination.

According to the gaming machine O11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first number of times and the second number of times that is larger than the first number of times are defined as a plurality of different times. If the interval determined by the interval determining means is longer than the specific interval, the first number of times is used for the determination by the number of times determining means. On the other hand, if it is shorter than the specific interval, the second number of times is used for the determination.

This has the effect that the number of times can be changed according to the operation interval of the player.

<Characteristic P group> (Control that outputs the rising edge when the sound effect is output at short intervals)
Based on a specific effect executing means that executes a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, a determination means that executes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the specific condition, and a determination result by the determination means, the above-mentioned The gaming machine P1 comprising: a type determining means for determining the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the configuration includes an operating means that can be operated by the player, such as a push button. In such a conventional gaming machine, the interest is improved by performing an effect of encouraging the operation of the operating means as a kind of the interest effect. Further, some conventional gaming machines are known to notify the result of a big hit lottery by an effect executed based on an operation on an operating means. In such a conventional gaming machine, each time the operation means is operated during the execution of the hobby effect, it is determined whether to execute a hit suggestion effect that suggests a big hit or a normal effect different from the hit suggestion effect. There is something to do. As a result, the player can be made to positively operate the operation means in the expectation that the suggestion effect will be executed during the execution of the hobby effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-184177).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the player continuously operates the operating means, it may not be possible to suitably perform the normal effect or the hit suggestion effect. Therefore, it may not be possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

According to the gaming machine P1, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, a determination unit for executing a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the determination means thereof. A type determining means for determining the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means based on the determination result is provided.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

The gaming machine P1 has an audio output means capable of outputting audio, and the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means includes at least an audio effect that outputs a specific sound from the audio output means. The gaming machine P2, which is included, wherein the specific voice is configured in a voice mode for a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, it is possible to perform an auditory effect, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine P2, the voice output means is configured to be capable of simultaneously outputting a plurality of different voices, and the voice output means has a plurality of output units for simultaneously outputting the plurality of different voices. The voice output control means has an output control means, and when the specific condition is satisfied, the specific voice is generated in an output unit different from the previously set output unit among the plurality of output units. The gaming machine P3, which is characterized in that the voice information corresponding to the above is set.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P2, the voice information is set in the output unit different from the output unit previously set by the voice control means, so that the specific conditions are continuous in a short period of time. Even if it is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the voice mode output based on the previous establishment of the specific condition from being interrupted because the voice mode output based on the establishment of the current specific condition is output. is there.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the specific effect is configured to include at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode, and the type determining means is The gaming machine P4 is characterized in that the type of the second effect mode is determined based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect is configured to include at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. The type of the second effect mode is determined by the type determining means based on the discrimination result by the determining means.

This has the effect that the mode of the specific effect can be changed by changing only the second effect mode.

In the gaming machine P4, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the validity period setting means that sets the validity period for validating the operation on the operation means, and the validity period set by the validity period setting means are specified. The first state in which the first type is determined as the type of the second effect mode based on the specific determination means for executing the determination and the determination result of the determination by the specific determination means, and the first state different from the first type. The gaming machine P5 is provided with a state setting means capable of setting one state from a plurality of states including a second state in which two types are determined.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a valid period for validating the operation on the operating means is set by the valid period setting means, and a specific determination is executed by the specific discriminating means during the valid period set by the valid period setting means. Includes a first state in which the first type is determined as the type of the second effect mode based on the determination result of the determination by the specific determination means, and a second state in which the second type different from the first type is determined. One of a plurality of states is set by the state setting means.

As a result, the type of the second effect mode can be changed according to the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine P5, the specific determination by the specific determination means is executed a plurality of times within the valid period of 1. The gaming machine P6.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P5, the specific discrimination by the specific discriminating means is executed a plurality of times within the valid period of 1, so that the first is performed a plurality of times within the valid period of 1. 2 The type of effect mode can be switched. Therefore, when the player operates the operating means, he / she can pay attention to the type of the second effect mode in the specific effect, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine P5 or P6, the specific discrimination by the specific discriminating means determines the operation interval of the player with respect to the operating means.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P5 or P6, the specific discrimination by the specific discriminating means is the discriminating the operation interval with respect to the operating means of the player. 2 There is an effect that the type of the effect mode can be changed.

<Characteristic Q group> (Sound effect data and reverberation sound data are processed separately)
Based on a specific effect executing means that executes a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, a determination means that executes a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the specific condition, and a determination result by the determination means, the above-mentioned A gaming machine Q1 comprising: a type determining means for determining the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the configuration includes an operating means that can be operated by the player, such as a push button. In such a conventional gaming machine, the interest is improved by performing an effect of encouraging the operation of the operating means as a kind of the interest effect. Further, some conventional gaming machines are known to notify the result of a big hit lottery by an effect executed based on an operation on an operating means. In such a conventional gaming machine, each time the operation means is operated during the execution of the hobby effect, it is determined whether to execute a hit suggestion effect that suggests a big hit or a normal effect different from the hit suggestion effect. There is something to do. As a result, the player can be made to positively operate the operation means in the expectation that the suggestion effect will be executed during the execution of the hobby effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-184177).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the player continuously operates the operating means, it may not be possible to suitably perform the normal effect or the hit suggestion effect. Therefore, it may not be possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

According to the gaming machine Q1, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, a determination unit for executing a predetermined determination based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the determination means are used. A type determining means for determining the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means based on the determination result is provided.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

The game machine Q1 has a voice output means capable of outputting voice and a voice control means capable of causing the voice output means to output a synthetic voice obtained by synthesizing a plurality of voice data. It includes a voice effect for outputting a voice mode from the voice output means, and has a voice data determinant for determining voice data for synthesizing and generating voice data corresponding to the voice effect. Characteristic gaming machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q1, the voice data determined by the voice data determining means is synthesized and generated as the voice mode output in the specific effect, so that the amount of voice data is small. Also has the effect of being able to generate a variety of voice modes.

The gaming machine Q3 is characterized in that the voice data determining means determines at least one basic voice data and at least one reverberant voice data corresponding to the base voice data.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q2, there is an effect that the basic voice data can be changed to a different voice mode by synthesizing the reverberation voice data with the base voice data.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operating means that can be operated by the player and the voice output means that can output the sound are provided, and the specific effect executing means operates the operating means as the specific effect. The gaming machine Q4, characterized in that the sound effect based on the above is output to the voice output means.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sound is output by the sound output means. As a specific effect, the specific effect executing means controls the sound effect based on the operation of the operating means to be output by the voice output means.

As a result, the sound effects can be made different, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Q4, the specific effect determining means is configured to be able to output at least the first sound effect and the second sound effect whose output period is shorter than that of the first sound effect to the voice output means. A game machine Q5 characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q4, the first sound effect is composed of sound effects having a longer output period than the second sound effect, so that the sound effects can be diversified. effective.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the specific effect executing means includes an operating means that can be operated by the player and a valid period setting means that sets a valid period for validating the operation on the operating means. The gaming machine Q6 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed every time the operation of the operating means is detected during the valid period of 1 set by the valid period setting means.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the following effects are exhibited. The validity period for validating the operation on the operation means is set by the validity period setting means. During the one valid period set by the valid period setting means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means every time the operation of the operating means is detected.

As a result, since the player can operate the operation means a plurality of times, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine Q6 is provided with a time measuring means for measuring the elapsed time from the previous operation performed on the operating means within the valid period of 1, and the specific effect determining means is timed by the measuring means. A gaming machine characterized in that the first specific effect is determined when the elapsed elapsed time is shorter than a predetermined specific time, and the second specific effect is determined when the elapsed time is longer than the specific time. Q7.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q6, the following effects are exhibited. During the validity period of 1, the elapsed time from the previous operation performed on the operating means is timed by the timing means. When the elapsed time timed by the timing means is shorter than the predetermined specific time, the specific effect determining means determines the first specific effect, while when it is longer than the specific time, the second specific effect is determined. To.

As a result, since the specific effect can be changed according to the interval at which the player operates the operating means, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic R group> (Sound effect data and reverberation sound data are processed separately)
A voice output means capable of outputting voice, a voice effect execution means for executing a voice effect for outputting a voice mode from the voice output means, and one or a plurality of voice data constituting the voice data corresponding to the voice effect are determined. And a voice control means capable of causing the voice output means to output a synthesized voice obtained by synthesizing the plurality of voice data when a plurality of voice data are determined by the voice data determination means. A game machine R1 characterized by being provided with.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include an audio output device such as a speaker in the configuration. In such a conventional gaming machine, as a kind of hobby effect, an effect of outputting a sound such as a predetermined music or a sound effect from an audio output device is performed to improve the interest. Further, in the conventional gaming machines, even in the production of the same system, the production mode is diversified by differentiating the sound to be output according to the result of the production (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-184177). Gazette).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since different audio data is output for each production mode, there is a problem that the amount of audio data to be stored increases with the diversification of the audio modes. It was.

According to the gaming machine R1, the sound is output by the sound output means. A voice effect for outputting a voice mode from the voice output means is executed by the voice effect executing means. One or more audio data constituting the audio data corresponding to the audio effect is determined by the audio data determining means. When a plurality of voice data are determined by the voice data determining means, the voice output means is controlled by the voice control means so that a synthesized voice obtained by synthesizing the plurality of voice data is output.

As a result, as the voice mode output by the voice effect, the voice data determined by the voice data determining means is synthesized and generated, so that various voice modes can be generated even with a small amount of voice data. effective.

In the game machine R1, the voice data determining means includes voice data for outputting the voice of the first component constituting the voice mode output in the voice production, and a second component different from the first component. The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that it is configured so that at least audio data for outputting audio can be determined.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine R1, the sound data for outputting the sound of the first component constituting the sound mode output in the sound production and the second component different from the first component. Since the audio data for outputting the audio of the component is configured to be at least determinable by the audio data determining means, the number of audio data of the first component and the second are as the data for outputting the synthetic audio. It is sufficient to prepare audio data for the sum of the number of audio data of the component. When preparing audio data in the form of synthetic audio data that combines the first component and the second component, it is necessary to prepare audio data for the product of the number of the first component and the number of the second component. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of voice data can be reduced.

In the game machine R2, the voice data of the first component is composed of basic voice data for outputting the basic voice in the voice mode, and the voice data of the second component corresponds to the basic voice. The gaming machine R3 is characterized in that it is composed of reverberant sound data for outputting the reverberant sound.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the voice data of the first component is composed of basic voice data for outputting the voice that is the basis of the voice mode. On the other hand, the audio data of the second component is composed of reverberant audio data for outputting the reverberant sound corresponding to the underlying audio.

As a result, by synthesizing the reverberation voice data with the basic voice data, there is an effect that the basic voice data can be changed to a different voice mode.

In the game machine R2, the voice data of the first component is composed of basic voice data for outputting the basic voice in the voice mode, and the voice data of the second component corresponds to the basic voice. The gaming machine R4 is characterized in that it is composed of reverberant voice data for outputting the reverberant sound.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the voice data of the first component is composed of basic voice data for outputting the voice that is the basis of the voice mode. On the other hand, the voice data of the second component is composed of reverberant voice data for outputting the reverberant sound corresponding to the basic voice.

This has the effect that by synthesizing the reverberant voice data with the basic voice data, the basic voice data can be changed to a different voice mode.

In any of the game machines R1 to R4, a plurality of receiving units that receive each of the plurality of voice data determined by the voice data determining means, and the plurality of voice data received by the plurality of receiving units. The voice control means includes a synthetic voice data generation means for generating the synthesized synthetic voice data, and the voice control means outputs the synthetic voice to the voice output means based on the synthetic voice data generated by the synthetic voice data generation means. A game machine R5 characterized by being made to do.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, a receiving unit for receiving each of a plurality of voice data determined by the voice data determining means is provided. Synthetic voice data obtained by synthesizing a plurality of voice data received by a plurality of receiving units is generated by the synthetic voice data generation means. The voice output means is controlled by the voice control means so as to output the synthetic voice based on the synthetic voice data generated by the synthetic voice data generation means.

As a result, it is not necessary to directly input a plurality of audio data to the audio output means. Therefore, there is an effect that the input of the audio output means can be simplified.

In the game machine R5, the voice data determining means includes voice data for outputting the voice of the first component constituting the voice mode output in the voice production, and a second component different from the first component. It is configured so that at least the audio data for outputting the audio can be determined, and the plurality of receiving units are configured to be able to receive different components constituting the audio data. The featured game machine R6.

According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the audio data for outputting the audio of the first component constituting the audio mode output in the audio production and the audio data for outputting the audio of the second component different from the first component are audio. Determined by data determination means. Different components constituting the audio data are received by the plurality of receiving units.

As a result, the components of the audio data that can be received are determined for each receiving unit, so that the same components may always be output to the same receiving unit regardless of the timing of outputting the audio data or the like. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing when outputting the voice data can be simplified.

<Characteristic S group> (Notify in advance the degree of advantage when punctured)
In a gaming machine provided with a variable ball entry means that is variable to a ball entry state in which a game ball can be entered, at least until the second condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the first condition, the variable ball entry The first game state is set based on the specific area in which the game ball that has entered the means can enter and the game ball has entered the specific area, and based on the fact that the ball has not entered the specific area. As the type of the game state setting means for setting the second game state different from the first game state and the second game state set by the game state setting means, one of a plurality of game state types is used. A gaming machine S1 comprising: a determining means for determining a game state type, and an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the game state type determined by the determining means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Among such gaming machines, it is possible to make the number of prize balls that can be obtained at the start of the hit different depending on the type of gate through which the player passed the game ball before the hit is started. is there. That is, the first gate at which the winning of the prize balls can be obtained on average, the hit at which a small amount of prize balls can be obtained, and the hit at which a large number of prize balls can be obtained are started. Some are equipped with a gate. In such a conventional gaming machine, by having the player select either the first gate or the second gate, it is possible to select a hit that suits the taste of each player.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is only possible to make different prize balls that can be obtained by hitting, and there is no room for the player to select the playability during the normal game. That is, there was a risk that the normal game would become monotonous.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine S1, the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the specific area where the gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entering means can enter. .. On the other hand, a second game state different from the first game state is set by the game state setting means based on the fact that the game ball does not enter the specific area. As the type of the second game state set by the game state setting means, one game state type from a plurality of game state types is determined by the determination means. The effect based on the game state type determined by the determination means is executed by the effect execution means.

As a result, it is possible to execute an effect based on the game state type of the second game state set by the game state setting means, so that the game set when the game ball does not pass through the specific area from the effect. It has the effect of being able to recognize the state type.

The gaming machine S2 is characterized in that the effect executing means can execute an effect based on the game state type before the first condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine S2, since the effect based on the game state type is executed by the effect executing means before the first condition is satisfied, the variable ball entering means can enter the player. Before this, it is possible to predict the type of the second gaming state that is set when the gaming ball does not enter the specific area. Therefore, depending on the type of the predicted second game state, the game ball is allowed to enter the specific area to set the first game state, or the second game state is set without entering the specific area. There is an effect that the player can be made to select.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, a discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and a privilege of executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result obtained by the discriminating means. The first condition includes a game execution means, and the first condition is satisfied based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means, and the game state setting means is the privileged game of 1. When the game ball enters the specific area during the execution of, the first game state is set as the game state after the privilege game is completed, and the specific area is executed during the execution of the privilege game 1. The gaming machine S3 is characterized in that the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the privileged game is completed when the gaming ball does not enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines S1 or S2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on the fact that the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result. The first condition is satisfied based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means. When a game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the privilege game of 1, the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the privilege game is completed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the privilege game 1, the second game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the privilege game is completed.

As a result, the game state after the end of the award game can be changed depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the execution of the award game. Therefore, the specific area can be changed during the award game. It is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the execution of the privilege game.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the plurality of gaming state types include at least a first type and a second type that is more advantageous to the player than the first type. Pachinko machine S4.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the plurality of gaming state types include a first type and a second type that is more advantageous to the player than the first type. Since it is included at least, it is possible to predict from the effect whether the second gaming state set when the gaming ball does not enter the specific area is the first type or the second type. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the effect corresponding to the second type will be executed.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied while the second gaming state is set, the third gaming state is more favorable to the player than the first gaming state. The gaming machine S5 is provided with a special state setting means for setting a special state that is easy to shift, and the gaming state types are characterized in that the easiness of satisfying the specific conditions is different from each other.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special state setting means is a special state in which it is easier to shift to the third game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied while the second game state is set. Set by. The game state types are configured so that the easiness of satisfying specific conditions is different from each other.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the effect according to the game state type in which the specific condition is easily satisfied is executed.

In the gaming machine S5, the discriminating means that executes the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and the privileged game execution that executes the privileged game that is advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result obtained by the discriminating means. The gaming machine S6, comprising means and means, wherein the specific condition is defined by a number of consecutive deviation determination results different from the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine S5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific determination result. Specific conditions are defined by the number of consecutive deviation discrimination results that are different from the specific discrimination results.

As a result, the more the deviation discrimination results are continuous, the higher the possibility of shifting to the special state. Therefore, in the second gaming state, a novel game property is realized in which the game is played with the expectation that the deviation discrimination results will be continuous. It has the effect of being able to.

<Characteristic T group> (Sound effects are output continuously on multiple channels)
Execution of a voice data output means for outputting voice data, a voice pronunciation means for producing a voice based on the voice data output by the voice data output means, and a voice effect for outputting a specific voice from the voice sounding means. The type of the voice effect executed by the voice effect executing means includes a voice effect executing means for setting the above, and a plurality of voice data corresponding to the specific voice is provided by the voice data output means during a predetermined period. The gaming machine T1 characterized in that at least a plurality of modes to be output are included.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include an audio output device such as a speaker in the configuration. In such a conventional gaming machine, as a kind of hobby effect, an effect of outputting a sound such as a predetermined music or a sound effect from an audio output device is performed to improve the interest. Further, in the conventional gaming machines, even in the production of the same system, the production mode is diversified by differently outputting the sound according to the result of the production (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-184177). Gazette).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since different audio data is output for each production mode, there is a problem that the amount of audio data to be stored increases with the diversification of the audio modes. It was.

According to the gaming machine T1, the voice is pronounced based on the voice data output by the voice data output means. The execution of the voice effect in which a specific voice is output from the voice sounding means is set by the voice effect execution means. The type of voice effect executed by the voice sounding means includes at least a plurality of modes in which voice data corresponding to a specific voice is output a plurality of times in a predetermined period by the voice data output means.

As a result, it is possible to perform an auditory effect, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game. Further, in the plurality of aspects, since the voice effect can be executed using only the voice data corresponding to the specific voice, there is an effect that the voice data can be reduced.

The game machine T1 includes a plurality of output units capable of outputting audio data, and the audio data output means is one of the plurality of output units when the audio effects of the plurality of modes are executed. The voice data corresponding to the specific voice is output to the output unit different from the output unit that previously output the voice data, and the voice sounding means is output to the plurality of output units. A game machine T2 characterized in that it pronounces voice based on voice data.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of output units capable of outputting audio data are provided. When a plurality of modes of audio production are executed, the audio data output means corresponds to a specific audio for an output unit different from the output unit that output the audio data immediately before among the plurality of output units. The audio data to be output is output. The voice is pronounced by the voice sounding means based on the voice data output to the plurality of output units.

As a result, even when a specific voice is continuously output in a short period of time in a plurality of modes, the specific voice based on the previously output voice data can pronounce the specific voice based on the voice data output this time. , It has the effect of suppressing interruptions.

In the gaming machine T2, when the voice effect of the plurality of modes is executed, the voice data output means receives the next voice before the output of the voice data that started the output immediately before ends. A gaming machine T3 characterized in that it starts outputting data.

According to the game machine T3, in addition to the effect of the game machine T2, when a plurality of modes of voice production are executed, the voice is heard before the output of the voice data that started the output immediately before is finished. Since the output of the next voice data is started by the data output means, it is possible to duplicate the sound organs of the voice that is sounded based on the voice data that is continuously output. Therefore, there is an effect that the expression of the sound production can be further diversified.

In the game machine T2 or T3, a receiving unit that receives the voice data output to the plurality of output units and a synthesis means capable of generating synthetic voice data by synthesizing the voice data received by the receiving unit. The gaming machine T4 is characterized in that the voice sounding means pronounces a voice based on the synthetic voice data generated by the synthesis means.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine T2 or T3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a receiving unit for receiving the audio data output to the plurality of output units is provided. Synthetic voice data obtained by synthesizing the voice data received by the receiving unit is generated by the synthesis means. The voice is pronounced by the voice sounding means based on the synthetic voice data generated by the synthesis means.

As a result, since the sounding means only needs to pronounce the voice based on the synthetic voice data, there is an effect that the input to the sounding means can be simplified.

In any of the game machines T2 to T4, the specific voice is a voice that maximizes the amplitude of the acoustic waveform after a lapse of a specific period from the start of pronunciation, and the voice data output. The gaming machine T5 is characterized in that, when the voice effects of the plurality of modes are executed, the voice data corresponding to the specific voice is output at least at intervals shorter than the specific period. ..

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines T2 to T4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a specific voice is output in which the amplitude of the acoustic waveform is maximized after a lapse of a specific period from the start of sounding. When a plurality of modes of audio production are executed, audio data corresponding to a specific audio is output by the audio data output means at least at intervals shorter than a specific period.

As a result, since the specific sound is continuously output at intervals shorter than the specific period, the sound of the portion where the amplitude of the acoustic waveform is maximized can be output at intervals shorter than the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be further enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T5, a discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player are executed when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. The privilege game execution means and the suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect suggesting the discrimination result by the discrimination means are provided, and the voice effect is executed during the execution of the suggestion effect, and the plurality of voice effects are executed. The gaming machine T6 is characterized in that the expected degree of the specific determination result is higher than that of other types of voice effects.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. A suggestion effect suggesting a discrimination result by the discrimination means is executed by the suggestion effect execution means. The audio effect is executed during the execution of the suggestion effect. The plurality of modes are set to the type of sound effect in which the degree of expectation of a specific determination result is higher than that of other types of sound effect.

As a result, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that a specific determination result will be obtained by the voice production, so that there is an effect that the player can be more focused on the voice production.

<Characteristic U group> (Changes in playability depending on whether V passes or does not pass)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, in a gaming machine provided with a variable ball entry means that is variable to a ball entry state in which a game ball can be entered, at least until the second condition is satisfied, the first gaming state. And the second gaming state set to be more favorable to the player than the first gaming state, and the ratio set to be more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state and to shift to the second gaming state. However, a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a third game state set higher than the first game state, and the variable ball entry means. The second game state and the third game state are the ratios in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means when the game ball passes through the specific area through which the game ball can pass. The rate at which the third game state is set by the game state setting means when the game ball does not pass through the specific area is set higher than the rate at which the game state is set. A gaming machine U1 comprising: a ratio setting means for setting a ratio higher than the ratio at which the second gaming state is set.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. Among such gaming machines, it is possible to make the number of prize balls that can be obtained at the start of the hit different depending on the type of gate through which the player passed the game ball before the hit is started. is there. That is, the first gate at which the winning of the prize balls can be obtained on average, the hit at which a small amount of prize balls can be obtained, and the hit at which a large number of prize balls can be obtained are started. Some are equipped with a gate. In such a conventional gaming machine, by having the player select either the first gate or the second gate, it is possible to select a hit that suits the taste of each player.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is only possible to make different prize balls that can be obtained by hitting, and there is no room for the player to select the playability during normal gaming. That is, there was a risk that the normal game would be monotonous.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine U1, the first gaming state, the second gaming state set to be more favorable to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state set to be more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state are set. In addition, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a third gaming state in which the ratio of transition to the second gaming state is set higher than that of the first gaming state. To. When the game ball passes through a specific area through which the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means can pass, the ratio of the first game state set by the game state setting means is the second game state and the third game. The state is set by the rate setting means so that it is higher than the rate at which the state is set. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area, the rate at which the third game state is set by the game state setting means is higher than the rate at which the first game state and the second game state are set. It is set by the ratio setting means.

As a result, depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area, it is possible to switch whether the setting ratio of the first game state is high or the setting ratio of the third game state is high by the game state setting means. it can. Therefore, the player who wants to shift to the first gaming state can be made to play the game so that the game ball passes through the specific area, while shifting to the third gaming state. A player who wants to shift to an advantageous second gaming state can be made to play a game so that the game ball does not pass through a specific area. Therefore, since the player can be made to select the game state that suits the taste of each player, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine U1 is characterized by having a probability setting means for setting a high probability of satisfying the first condition until the changing condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through the specific area. U2.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, the probability of satisfying the first condition is set to be high until the changing condition is satisfied by the probability setting means. Will be done.

This has the effect of making the player feel the merit of passing through a specific area. That is, when the game ball is passed through the specific area, the ratio of being set to the first gaming state in which the player's advantage is low is set high, but the probability of satisfying the first condition is set high, so that it is specified. You can feel the attraction of passing through the area. As a result, a player who demands high gambling ability and a stability-oriented player who demands low gambling property can select whether or not to pass the game ball to a specific area, and satisfy various players. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machines U1 or U2, the gaming state setting means compares the second gaming state to the second gaming state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied while the third gaming state is set. The gaming machine U3 is characterized in that it sets a fourth gaming state that is easy to shift to.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U1 or U2, the second gaming state is changed to another gaming state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied while the third gaming state is set. A fourth gaming state, which is easier to shift in comparison, is set by the gaming state setting means. Therefore, by setting the third gaming state, it is possible to expect the player to set the fourth gaming state, and there is an effect that the attractiveness of not passing through the specific area can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines U1 to U3, the first condition determining means for determining the establishment of the first condition and the first condition determining means for determining that the first condition is satisfied are determined. The variable pattern of the variable ball entry means includes a variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns, and the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means specifies a gaming ball. It is characterized in that at least a first variable pattern that makes it easier to enter the area and a second variable pattern that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern are set. Amusement machine U4.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines U1 to U3, the following effects are exhibited. When the establishment of the first condition is determined by the first determination means and the first condition is satisfied by the first condition determination means, one variable pattern is variable from a plurality of variable patterns as the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means. It is determined by the pattern determining means. The variable patterns determined by the variable pattern determining means include a first variable pattern in which the game ball easily enters a specific area and a second variable in which the game ball is less likely to enter the specific area than the first variable pattern. At least the pattern is set.

As a result, the frequency of entering the specific area can be changed by the variable pattern determined when the first condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the set gaming state can be controlled.

In the gaming machine U4, the gaming state setting means shifts to the second gaming state in comparison with other gaming states based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied while the third gaming state is set. A fourth game state that is easy to play is set, and the third game is more likely to be determined when the first variable pattern is determined than when the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means. The gaming machine U5 is characterized in that when a state is set, the specific condition is easily set.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied while the third game state is set, the fourth game state, which is easier to shift to the second game state than the other game states, is set by the game state setting means. Set. When the first variable pattern is determined, the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied when the third gaming state is set than when the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determining means.

As a result, when the first variable pattern that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the specific area is set, there is an effect that the player can feel the merit of not intentionally passing the specific area.

In the gaming machine U3 or U5, the specific condition is satisfied when the first condition determining means determines that the first condition is not satisfied a predetermined number of times. ..

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U3 or U5, when the first condition determining means determines that the first condition is not satisfied a predetermined number of times, the specific condition is satisfied. If one condition is not satisfied, the player's expectation for the third gaming state can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the playability can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic V group> (Big hit that is more advantageous to puncture)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the above-mentioned privilege. When the game ball enters the specific area in the specific area where the game ball can enter during the execution of the game and the special area in the privilege game of 1, the gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. A gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state and setting a second gaming state different from the first gaming state when the gaming ball does not enter the specific area in the privileged game of 1. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the type determination means for determining one type from a plurality of privilege game types including at least the first privilege game, and the execution of the first privilege game. The advantage of the first gaming state, which is set based on the entry of the gaming ball into the specific area, is set by the gaming ball entering the specific area during the execution of the first privilege game. The gaming machine V1 is provided with an advantage degree setting means for setting an advantage degree of the second gaming state or less, which is set based on the fact that the second gaming state has not been performed.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning result. In such a gaming machine, either a normal state in which a hit is drawn with a normal probability or a probability variation state in which a hit is drawn with a higher probability than the normal probability is set as a state after the hit state is completed. There is something possible. In addition, as a method of determining the state after hitting, when a game ball enters a specific area during hitting, a probabilistic state is set as the state after hitting, and the game ball enters a specific area during hitting. It is known to set a normal state as a hit state when the ball is not hit.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the probabilistic state is more advantageous than the normal state, so that the player is disappointed when the gaming ball does not enter the specific area during the hit. There was a risk of letting them.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine V1, the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game execution means is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. The privilege game is executed. There is a specific area where the game ball can enter during the execution of the privilege game. When the game ball enters the specific area in the privilege game of 1, the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the specific area in the privilege game of 1, a second game state different from the first game state is set by the game state setting means. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one type is determined by the type determination means from among the types of the plurality of privilege games including at least the first privilege game. The degree of advantage of the first game state, which is set based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific area during the execution of the first privilege game, is determined by the advantage degree setting means in the specific area during the execution of the first privilege game. It is set to be less than or equal to the degree of advantage of the second game state, which is set based on the fact that the game ball has not entered.

As a result, at least in the case of the first privilege game, it is more advantageous that the game ball does not enter the specific area than the game ball enters the specific area. Even if the game ball does not enter, it has the effect of suppressing the disappointment of the player.

In the gaming machine V1, in the first gaming state, the probability that the specific discrimination result will be obtained by the discrimination by the discriminating means is set as the first probability, and the second gaming state is discriminated by the discriminating means. The gaming machine V2 is characterized in that the probability of the specific determination result is set to a second probability lower than the first probability.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first gaming state, the probability that a specific discrimination result will be obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means is set as the first probability. In the second gaming state, the probability that the discrimination by the discrimination means will result in a specific discrimination result is set to the second probability, which is lower than the first probability.

As a result, when the first privilege game is executed and the second game state is set even though the probability that the first game state has a specific determination result is higher, the first game state is higher than the first game state. Since the degree of advantage is high, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game can be performed with the expectation that the probability of a specific determination result will be low.

In the gaming machine V1 or V2, the gaming state setting means has a second condition when the first condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set and when the second gaming state is set. When is satisfied, the first gaming state and the third gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than either of the second gaming states, are set, and the advantage degree setting means sets the first gaming state. The gaming machine V3 is characterized in that the second condition when the second gaming state is set is set so as to be less likely to be satisfied than the first condition in the case of the above.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines V1 or V2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first condition is satisfied while the first game state is set, and when the second condition is satisfied while the second game state is set, the first game is performed by the game state setting means. A third gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than either the state or the second gaming state, is set. The degree of advantage is set by the advantage degree setting means so that the second condition when the second game state is set is less likely to be satisfied than the first condition when the first game state is set.

As a result, if the game ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the first privilege game, the second condition is less likely to be satisfied, and thus the disadvantageous third game state is less likely to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from being discouraged when the game ball does not enter the specific area.

In the gaming machine V3, the first condition and the second condition are defined by the number of consecutive deviation determination results different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means, and the degree of advantage. The gaming machine V4 is characterized in that the setting means sets a larger number of times as the continuous number of times of the deviation determination result in the second condition than in the first condition.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first condition and the second condition are defined by the number of times in which the deviation determination result different from the specific determination result is continuously generated by the determination by the determination means. The advantage degree setting means sets a larger number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result in the second condition than in the first condition.

As a result, in the second game state set when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the first privilege game, the game state is changed from the first game state to the third game state. However, since the discrimination can be performed many times by the discrimination means, there is an effect that the possibility of obtaining a specific discrimination result can be increased.

In either the gaming machine V3 or V4, the advantage degree setting means has a second condition rather than an expected value that will result in the specific determination within the number of determinations by the determination means set as the first condition. The first condition and the second condition are set so that the expected value of the specific determination result becomes higher within the number of determinations by the determination means set as. Gaming machine V5.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect of either the gaming machine V3 or V4, the second condition is more than the expected value that gives a specific determination result within the number of determinations by the discrimination means set as the first condition. Since the first condition and the second condition are set by the advantage degree setting means so that the expected value that gives a specific judgment result is higher within the number of times of judgment by the judgment means set as, the first privilege. When the game is executed, the expected value of the specific determination result becomes higher when the game ball does not pass through the specific area before the transition to the third game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to select not to pass through the specific area.

In any of the gaming machines V3 to V5, an entry means in which a game ball can enter, an open position in which the game ball can easily enter into the entry means, and an open position in which the game ball enters in comparison with the open position. A variable means that can be changed to a closed position that is difficult to ball and a variable control means that controls the variable operation of the variable means are provided, and the discriminating means means that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. The determination is executed based on the above, and the third gaming state is characterized in that the variable means is less likely to be changed to the open position by the variable control means as compared with the second gaming state. Gaming machine V6.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines V3 to V5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means is variable between an open position where the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means and a closed position where the game ball is less likely to enter the open position. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. Discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. The third gaming state is configured such that the variable means can be easily changed to the open position by the variable control means as compared with the second gaming state.

As a result, in the second gaming state, the variable means is more likely to be changed to the open position than in the third gaming state, so that there is an effect that the discrimination by the discriminating means can be efficiently performed.

<Characteristic AA group>
When the determination means capable of performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific game. And the special game type determining means for determining the type of the special game executed by the special game executing means, and the type information regarding the type of the special game executed by the special game executing means is specified by the identification information. The gaming machine AA1 is characterized by having a suggestion means for suggesting when the determination result of the above is displayed.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball wins a prize at a starting port and displays a variable effect or a winning effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. Among these types of pachinko machines, a game machine has been proposed that can improve the interest of a game by setting a plurality of hit types and differently producing different effects depending on the hit type (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741).

With this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of games.

This technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine AA1, the type information regarding the type of the special game is suggested when the specific determination result is displayed by the identification information, so that it is executed not only when the determination result but also when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific game. Since the type of special game to be played can be recognized in advance and the motivation for the establishment of a specific condition can be changed, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA1, a variable ball-entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can be entered and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and the variable ball-entry means. The specific game execution means has a specific area through which the pachinko ball can pass, and the specific game execution means changes the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state as the specific game. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that the condition is satisfied based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area.

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA1, when a specific game is executed, it is possible to make an interest in whether or not the gaming ball passes through a specific area, and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the suggesting means is a gaming machine AA3 in which the type information is added to the identification information and displayed.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the type information is added to the identification information by the suggestion means and displayed, so that the player can easily recognize the type information. is there.

In the game machines AA1 to AA3, the type information is displayed when the specific game is executed, and the display is continued even when the game ball does not pass through the specific area. The gaming machine AA4.

According to the gaming machine AA4, the type information is displayed even when the specific game is being executed, and is continuously displayed even when the game ball does not pass through the specific area. Therefore, the specific area is displayed to the player. If it passes through, it is possible to suggest what kind of special game was executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, there is a specific game type determining means for determining the type of the specific game executed by the specific game executing means, and the special game type determining means is executed by the specific game executing means. The gaming machine AA5, characterized in that the type of the special game is determined according to the type of the specific game to be played.

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, the type of the special game is determined according to the type of the specific game, so that the awareness of the specific game can be raised. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic AB group>
When the determination means capable of performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific game. And the special game type determining means for determining the type of the special game executed by the special game executing means, and the type related to the type of the special game executed when the specific condition is satisfied by the special game executing means. The gaming machine AB1 comprising: suggesting means for suggesting information before the specific game is started.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball wins a prize at a starting port and displays a variable effect or a winning effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. Among these types of pachinko machines, a game machine has been proposed that can improve the interest of a game by setting a plurality of hit types and differently producing different effects depending on the hit type (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741).

With this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of games.

This technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine AB1, since the type of the special game is suggested before the start of the specific game, there is an effect that the expectation for the special game can be raised and the interest of the game can be improved before the specific condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine AB1 has a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information and a dynamic display period means for determining the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Then, the identification information is dynamically displayed in accordance with the dynamic display period, and the first identification information is dynamically displayed until at least the specific condition is satisfied in the case of the specific determination result. 2 A gaming machine AB2 characterized in that it is composed of identification information.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AB1, the second identification information is dynamically displayed until the specific condition is satisfied, so that even when the specific condition is satisfied and the special game is executed, it is special. There is an effect that it can be determined from the second identification information that the game is executed.

In the game machines AB1 or AB2, the variable ball-entry means that can be changed between the open state in which the game ball can enter and the closed state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the open state, and the variable ball-entry means. The specific game executing means has a specific area through which the entered game ball can pass, and the specific game executing means changes the variable ball entering means from the closed state to the open state as the specific game. The gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that the specific condition is satisfied based on the passage of the gaming ball through the specific region.

According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AB1 or AB2, when a specific game is executed, it is possible to make an interest in whether or not the gaming ball passes through a specific area, and the interest of the game is Has the effect of improving.

In any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, the second identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol strings, and in the case of the specific determination result, one of the plurality of symbol sequences is one symbol sequence. The dynamic display period elapses in the reach display mode in which the symbol string excluding the above 1 is dynamically displayed by displaying the stop display or the temporary stop display in a mode capable of indicating that it is the specific determination result. The gaming machine AB4, which is characterized in that the period after the game is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, the second identification information is displayed after the lapse of the dynamic display period in the reach display mode, so that the player can be given a specific determination result. There is an effect that it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that a special game is started by displaying the stop in a mode for indicating that.

<Characteristic AC group>
The determination means capable of performing the determination, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification for indicating to the display means that the determination result is the first determination result. When the information is displayed, the first specific game can be executed, and when the identification information for indicating that the second determination result is different from the first determination result is displayed, the second specific game is performed. Execution of the second specific game after execution of the first specific game based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the first specific game in a gaming machine having an executable specific game execution means. The specific effect executing means includes a specific game setting means for setting the above and a specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the specific effect executing means executes the second specific game. The gaming machine AC1 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed even when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution period.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball wins a prize at a starting port and displays a variable effect or a winning effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. Among these types of pachinko machines, a game machine has been proposed that can improve the interest of a game by setting a plurality of hit types and differently producing different effects depending on the hit type (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741).

With this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of games.

This technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

According to the gaming machine AC1, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution period of the second specific game, the specific effect is executed, so that the second specific game goes through the first specific game and the second specific game is performed. It has the effect of making the player feel as if it is being executed and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AC1, a first variable entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and the first variable entry means thereof. The specific game execution means has a specific area through which the game ball entered into the means can pass, and the specific game execution means changes the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state as the first specific game. The gaming machine AC2 is characterized in that the specific condition is satisfied based on the passage of the gaming ball through the specific region.

According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC1, when the first specific game is executed, it is possible to make an interest in whether or not the gaming ball passes through the specific area, and the interest of the game is Has the effect of improving.

The game machine AC2 has a second variable ball entry means different from the first variable ball entry means, and the second specific game is executed by displaying the identification information for showing the second determination result. In this case, after the first variable ball-entry means is changed to the open state, the second variable ball-entry means is changed to the open state based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine AC3 is characterized in that, when the second specific game is executed when the specific condition is satisfied, the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC2, it seems that the second specific game is executed through the first specific game in the second specific game that is executed when it is determined as the second determination result. It has the effect of making you think.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the second identification information gives a determination result different from the specific determination result based on the fact that the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution period of the first specific game. The gaming machine AC4, characterized in that it is stopped and displayed in a mode for indicating.

According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, there is an effect that the player can be easily notified that the second specific game is not executed because the specific condition is not satisfied.

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, From M1 to M7, N1 to N12, O1 to O11, P1 to P7, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R6, S1 to S6, T1 to T6, U1 to U6, V1 to V6, AA1 to AA5, AB1 to AB4, AC1 In any of AC4, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, From M1 to M7, N1 to N12, O1 to O11, P1 to P7, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R6, S1 to S6, T1 to T6, U1 to U6, V1 to V6, AA1 to AA5, AB1 to AB4, AC1 In any of AC4, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, From M1 to M7, N1 to N12, O1 to O11, P1 to P7, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R6, S1 to S6, T1 to T6, U1 to U6, V1 to V6, AA1 to AA5, AB1 to AB4, AC1 In any of AC4, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by setting a plurality of hit types and differently producing different effects depending on the hit type has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). Gazette).
However, further improvement of interest is required.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is specified as a determination means capable of executing the determination, a display means for displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means, and the display means. The specific game execution means capable of executing the specific game when the identification information for showing the determination result of the above is displayed, and the specific condition is set during the execution of the specific game. It has a special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the establishment, and a special game type determining means for determining the type of the special game executed by the special game executing means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, a determination means capable of executing a determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the determination result specific to the display means. The specific game execution means capable of executing the specific game when the identification information for indicating the above is displayed, and the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the specific game. Based on this, it has a special game execution means capable of executing a special game, and a special game type determining means for determining the type of the special game executed by the special game executing means.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)

Claims (1)

Judgment means that can execute judgment and
A display means for displaying identification information for showing the judgment result by the judgment means, and a display means for displaying the identification information.
The first privilege game can be executed when the identification information for indicating that the determination result is the first determination result is displayed on the display means, and the second determination result different from the first determination result. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a second privilege game when the identification information for indicating the above is displayed.
A specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball during the execution period of the first privilege game or the second privilege game, and
A specific area through which the game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means can pass,
A variable means that can be changed into a first state in which a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means can be guided to the specific area, and a second state in which it is more difficult to guide the game ball into the specific area than the first state.
With the privilege game setting means capable of setting the execution of the second privilege game after the execution of the first privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area during the execution of the first privilege game. ,
A second privilege game type determining means for determining the type of the second privilege game set by the privilege game setting means, and a second privilege game type determining means.
Wherein the specific area based on the game ball passes, have a, a specific effect execution unit capable of executing the specific effect,
The specific ball entry means is variable between an open state in which an opening formed with an opening area in which two or more game balls can enter at the same time and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the open state. An opening / closing means capable of causing the opening, and a guide port formed with an opening area through which the game balls for guiding the game balls entering the opening to the specific area one by one can pass. Have and
The variable means is always in a state of being changed to the first state without being electrically operated.
The gaming machine uses the variable means based on the detection that the gaming ball has entered the guidance port other than the period in which the opening / closing means is controlled to be variable to the open state. A gaming machine characterized by executing control for changing the state.

Images